Nr dea) fe i ie
4 ’ A ; ty D a
4 re ‘Tr f 7 7
on | ,
z
7 q
re -
- "
THE ACAD
PROCEEDINGS
OF
EMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES
co
fHomas MEEHAN,
Epwarp J. Nouan, M.D.,
OF
PHILADELPHIA.
1900.
MMITTEE ON PUBLICATION :
HENRY SKINNER, M.D.,
Henry A. PInssBry, Sc.D ,
Puinie P. CaALvERT, Ph.D.
Eprtork: EDWARD J. NOLAN, M.D.
5 A
an
ees
\
eae
i
ot
Pe
PHILADELPHIA :
THE ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES,
LOGAN SQUARE.
1901.
'T OKe
ae gh
THE ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF "PHILADELPHIA,
February 13, 1901.
I hereby certify that printed copies of the PROCEEDINGS for 1900 have
been presented to the meetings of the Academy and mailed as follows :—
Pages 1to 48 mailed March
“e
“e
49 to 80
81 to 96
97 to 128
129 to 144
145 to 176
177 to 208
209 to 224
225 to 256
257 to 288
289 to 320
321 to 352
353 to 368
369 to 400
401 to 432
433 to 448
449 to 484
485 to 500
501 to 582
533 to 580
581 to 596
597 to 612
613 to 628
629 to 644
645 to 676
677 to 692
698 to 740
741 to 772
es
April 2, 1900;
April 13, 1900;
April 16, 1900;
April 19, 1900 ;
April 27, 1900 ;
May 15, 1900;
May 18, 1900;
June 5, 1900;
June 21, 1900;
June 30, 1900;
July 5, 1900;
July 10, 1900;
August 9, 1900;
August 14, 1900;
August 29, 1900;
September 26, 1900;
October- 81, 1900;
November 6, 1900;
November 10, 1900;
November 22, 1900;
December 11, 1900;
December 13, 1900;
December 14, 1900;
December 29, 1900;
January 28, 1901;
February 5, 1901;
February 9, 1901;
24,1900; presented March
oe
oe
27, 1900.
April 3, 1900,
April 17, 1900.
Aprii 17, 1900.
April 24, 1900.
May 1, 1900.
May 15, 1900-
May 22, 1900.
June 5, 1900.
June 26, 1900.
July 3, 1900.
July 3, 1900.
July 10, 1900.
August 14, 1900.
August 14, 1900.
September 4, 1900.
October 2, 1900.
November 6, 1900.
November 6, 1900.
November 18, 1900.
November 27, 1900.
December 11, 1900.
December 18, 1900.
December 18, 1900.
January 1, 1901.
January 29,1901.
February 5, 1901.
February 12, 1901.
EDWARD J. NOLAN,
Recording Secretary.
LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS.
With reference to the several articles contributed by each.
For Verbal Communications, Announcements, ete., see General Index.
Banxs, NatHAN. Some Arachnida from Alabama, .
Boyer, CHartes S., A.M. The Biddulphoid Forms of
North American Diatomacez, . :
CHAapMAN, Henry C.,M.D. Observations upon His nae
omy of Hylobates leuciscus and Chiromys madagas-
cariensis,
CocKERELL, I. D. A. eeemtions of Nee Bées bolleeted
by Mr. H. H. Smith in Brazil, I, ee. tee
CocKERELL, T. D. A., and Witmatre Porter. A New
Crayfish from New Mexico,
Dati, Witt1AM HeEAteEy. Additions to the mraniie Tele
Shell Faunas of the Pacific Coast, especially of the
Galapagos and Cocos Islands (Plate VIII),
Fow.er, Henry W. Note on Ameiurus prosthistius,
Contributions to the Ichthyology of the Tropical Pacific
(Plates XVIII, XIX, XX), .
HARSHBERGER, JOHN W., PH.D. An oslopteal Shidy of
the New Jersey Str and Flora,
Kewuer, Ina A. Notes on Hyacinth Roots (Plate XI II),
KELLocG, VERNON L., and Sainxat I. Kuwana. Mal-
lophaga from Alaskan Birds (Plate VIT),
MacELweEeE, ALEXANDER. The Flora of the Edgehill
Ridge near Willow Grove and its Ecology, .
MeesAn, THomas. Contributions to the Life-History of
Plants, No. XIV,
ii
Moore, J. Percy. <A Description of Microbdella biannu-
lata with Especial Regard to the Constitution of
the Leech Somite (Plate VI), . ane
Post-Larval Changes in the Vertebral AeGeaiations of
Spelerpes and Other Salamanders, at ee
Patmer, THomMas CHALKLEY, and F. J. Kretzy. The
Structure of the Diatom Girdle (Plates XV and
XVI),
PILSBRY, Hee A. Note on abn Avacare of a kent
Genus Ashmunella,
Mollusca of the Great Smoky Moanianns
Notice of New Japanese Land Snails,. .
New South American Land Snails (Plates XI, XI),
Note on the Australian Pupide,
Note on Polynesian and East Indian Paps
Additions to the Japanese Land-Snail Fauna, II (Plate
XLV), :
Notes on Certain Molluacs of Sauthiwestent Adaeinas
Lower Californian Species of Ccelocentrum and sndien,
Sonorella, a New Genus of Helices (Plate XXI), .
On the Zodlogical Position of Pariula and Achatinella
(Plate XVII), .
The Genesis of Mid-Pacific eae)
Additions to the Japanese Land-Snail Fauna, Il (Plates
RRL, LY ),. . ;
Pirspry, Henry A., and Epwarp G. 8 ATTA, x Par-
tial Revision of the Pup of the United States
(Plates XXII, XXIIT),
Ranp, THEODORE D. Notes on the aac of Sautbeael
ern Pennsylvania,
Renn, JAMES A G. Notes on Giimaptass :
Ruoaps, SAamMuEL N. A New Weasel from Western ein
sylvania, 3 V8 Re
Sargent, ANNIE Betv. Preliminary Notes on the Rate
of Growth and on the Development of Instincts in
Spiders (Plates IX, X),
Saunpers, C. F. The Pine Barrens of ee os
Simpson, Cartes T. New and Unfigured Unionide
(Plates I-V),
Srone, Witmer. Report on the Birds and Mammals Col-
lected by the Mell
Alaska,’.
henny Expedition to Pt. Barrow,
Description of a New Rabbit from the Liu Kiu Islands
and a New Flying Squirel from Borneo,
VAUGHAN, T. WAYLAND.
Trochocyathus Woolmani, a
New Coral from the Cretaceous Formation of New
AOTSCYRE ee os, 8
Von Inerinc, H. The M
Tellinacea, .
usculus cruciformis of the Order
iti
480
Pec Ee EmiINGs
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES
PHILADELPHIA.
1900.
JANUARY 2.
Mr. CHarves Morris in the Chair.
Nineteen persons present.
The Council reported that the following Standing Committees
had been appointed to serve during the ensuing year:
On Liprary.—Dr. C. N. Peirce, Arthur Erwin Brown, Henry C.
Chapman, M.D., Thomas A. Robinson, and Chas. Schaeffer, M.D.
On Pusriicatrons.—Thomas Meehan, Charles E. Smith, Henry
Skinner, M.D., Henry A. Pilsbry, and Edward J. Nolan, M.D.
On Insrauctiox.—Uselma C. Smith, Benjamin Smith Lyman,
Philip P. Calvert, Ph.D., Henry A. Pilsbry, and Charles Morris.
On Fivance.—Isaac J. Wistar, Wm. Sellers, Charles Roberts,
John Cadwalader, and George Vaux, Jr.
CoMMITTEE OF CounciL oN By-Laws.—Isaac J. Wistar,
Theodore D. Rand, Arthur Erwin Brown, and Benj. Sharp, M. D.
2 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
The deaths of the following were announced:
Edward H. Williams, Thomas Mackellar and Charles P.
Krauth, members; Elliott Coues and Henry Hicks, correspon-
dents.
Mr. C. F. SAunpDERS made a communication on a botanical excur-
sion to the Pine Barrens of New Jersey. The paper was pre-
sented for publication under the title ‘‘ Through the Jersey Pines
with Plant-press and Kodak.”’
JANUARY 9.
Mr. CHarves Morris in the Chair.
Twenty-eight persons present.
Dr. THomas H. MontGoMeEeRyY made a communication on recent
studies of the Gordiacez (no abstract).
—_
JANUARY 16.
The President, SamcEL G. Drxon, M.D., in the Chair.
Twelve persons present.
A paper entitled ‘A Description of Microbdella biannulata, with
Special Regard to the Constitution of the Leech Somite,’’ by J.
Perey Moore, was presented for publication.
The death of Carl Frederick Rammelsberg, a correspondent,
was announced.
JANUARY 23.
The President, SamueL G. Dixon, M.D., in the Chair.
Nineteen persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Mallophaga from Alaskan Birds,”’ by Ver-
non L. Kellogg and Shinkai I. Kuwana, was presented for publi-
eation.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
JANUARY 30.
The President, SamurL G. Drxon, M.D., in the Chair.
Fifteen persons present.
The following were elected members:
Oo
Col. William E. Barrows, S. Mendelson Meehan, Catharine G.
Dixon, William R. Reineck, and Florence Bascom.
The following were ordered to be published:
4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
REPORT ON THE BIRDS AND MAMMALS COLLECTED BY THE
McILHENNY EXPEDITION TO PT. BARROW, ALASKA.
BY WITMER STONE.
Through the courtesy of Mr. E. A. MclIlhenny, I have beem
entrusted with the preparation of a report on the splendid collec-
tion of birds and mammals obtained by him during his sojourn at
Point Barrow, August, 1897, to August, 1898.
It was originally intended to defer the publication of this paper
until the issue of a general report of the expedition which Mr.
Mcllhenny has in view, but for many reasons we deemed it best to
present it at once.
It will be understood that the following pages consist entirely of
a study of the skins, and that Mr. MclIlhenny’s field notes are
reserved for the subsequent report.
The material obtained is the finest yet brought from the Arctic
regions, and the series are so full that the molts and variations of
plumage in many of the birds, that have not previously been
understood, are beautifully illustrated.
For convenience of reference, it should be stated that the expe-
dition was in the North Pacific, July 5-22, 1897; at King’s Island,
July 23; Port Clarence, July 24-28; Point Hope, July 31-
August 1; Cape Lisburne, August 1; Wainwright Island, August
3, and Pt. Barrow, August 10, 1897, to August 17, 1898.
BIRDS.
The collection of birds comprises 1,408 specimens, representing
sixty-nine species. Of these nine were obtained on the northward
trip at points south of Pt. Barrow, leaving sixty as the number
actually secured at that locality.
Six species observed by Lieut. Murdoch’ were not obtained,
though they may have been seen, i. e., Olor columbianus, Nume-
nius borealis, Tringa subarquata, Junco hyemalis, Clivicola riparia
and Sazxicola enanthe.
On the other hand, thirteen species were obtained which are not
1 Cf. Report of the Internat. Polar Exp. to Pt. Barrow, Alaska, Wash-
ington, 1885.
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 5
recorded in Murdoch’s list, 7. e., Asio accipitrinus McIlhennyi, Con-
topus richardsonti, Calcarius pictus, Ammodramus sandwichensis
alaudinus, Dendroica coronata, Budytes flavus leucostriatus,
Hylocichla alicie, Rissa tridactyla pollicaris, Larus glaucescens,
Phalacrocorax pelagicus robustus, Oidemia deglandi, Calidris are-
naria and Inimosa fedoa.* One species, Eudromias morinellus,
obtained at King’s Island, is new to the North American fauna,
and another, Asio accipitrinus McIlhennyi, seems to represent a
new geographic race.
Gavia adamsii (Gray)—Yellow-billed Loon.
Twelve specimens of this species were obtained, ten of them were
adults in nuptial plumage taken on the following dates: Males—
June 30, 25, June —, 1898; September 25 (2), August 28 (2),
August 39, 1897; Females--June 27 and July 21, 1898. None
of these show any trace of molt, except No. 671 (September 25),
in which the neck feathers are being lost.
A young bird, taken June 14, is in full juvenal plumage:
white on the breast, belly and throat; lower neck dusky like the
sides of the neck, above general color gray, feathers mostly black-
ish at the base with broad gray edgings, crown and back of neck
gray sides with feathers tipped with brownish.
One adult specimen, September 29, has just completed the molt,
and the new wings are only half grown: above glossy black with
a tinge of green appearing ‘‘ scaly’’ in certain lights, top of
head and back of neck black, feathers on sides of neck slightly
tipped with black.
The flight feathers in the Loons are evidently lost all at once,
as in the Ducks.
Gavia pacifica (Lawr. )—Pacifie Loon.
A series of forty-nine specimens. Twenty-five males—July 5,
fos; duly 11,798; August 25, 97 (2); August 20, 97 (2);
August 24, August 26, August 30 (8), August 51 (9), and
twenty females—August 24, °97,(2); August 30 (5), August
* Only twelve birds were obtained in August, 1898, and only six mam-
mals, 7. ¢., Gavia adamsit, Dafila acuta, Tringa bairdi (4), 7. subruficol-
lis, T. canuta, Phalaropus lobatus (3), Budytes flavus leucostriatus and
Spermophilus empetra (6), so that with the above exceptions all August to
December specimens were obtained in 1897 and all January to July speci-
mens marked Pt. Barrow in 1898.
6 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900
31 (11), September 16 and 20—these are all in more or less worm
nuptial dress, some have a few new pinfeathers just showing their
points, but molt is indicated more by the extreme looseness of the
old body feathers than by the appearance of new ones. ‘There is
no trace of molt in the flight feathers. Four specimens are in full
winter dress, though the primaries still show the traces of the
sheaths at their bases.
There are no young birds.
Gavia lumme (Gunn)—Red-throated Loon.
A series of seventeen specimens.
Four are downy young taken August 3, at Wainwright Island.
Twelve are adults: Males—August 15, 20 (2), 26, 30 (2), Sep-
tember 17, 1897,and females—August 3 (2), 26, 27, 30, 1897.
These show no molt whatever, though several are very much
worn, especially No. 360 (August 26) and No. 776 (August 30).
One female, September 17, has completed the molt, though the
primaries still retain portions of the sheaths.
Uria troile californica (Bryant)—California Murre.
One specimen from King’s Island, July 23, 1897, is referable
to this race Measurements: wing 8 ins., length of culmen 1.62
ins., depth of culmen .45 in.
Uria lomvia (Linn.)—Brinnich’s Murre.
Seventeen specimens represent this species. A pair taken May
23 are in full nuptial plumage. Twelve others (July 51, one
female; August 1, six males and five females) are similar, but
much worn, with the tips of the primaries often distinctly bleached.
A female, August 30, is molting. The entire series of remiges
have been lost simultaneously, as in the Ducks, and the new
feathers are just showing beyond the edge of the coverts. The
back is about half molted, old feathers showing bleached brown-
ish tips, the new ones jet black.
Two young in the down, July 28, 1898, are uniform dark plum-
beous above, lighter below.
As the question of the relation of the Pt. Barrow birds to U. /.
arra naturally presents itself I append measurements of the wing
in a series of fourteen specimens. Seven males, 8.15—9 ins., aver-
age 8.77; seven females 8.45-8.75, average 8.60.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 7
Cepphus mandtii (Licht.)—Mandt’s Guillemot.
A most interesting series of twenty-seven specimens was ob-
tained. Beginning with the late summer specimens, these may be
described as follows:
August 30, old breeding bird, very much worn and with wing
feathers much bleached. A few white feathers on the breast and
neck, but no further molt.
Ten specimens, August 15 (2), August 21, August 28, August
30 (4), August 31, September 15, have lost all or nearly all the
remiges, they evidently fall almost simultaneously, but the primary
coverts persist. This series shows varying amounts of new white
feathers, both above and below. One taken August 15 shows none
at all, and in none is there more white than black.
Four specimens, September 17 (2), September 7, September 8,
show the new remiges about half-grown, with the body feathers
about half white and half black.
Two specimens, March 10 and 11, are in adult winter plumage,
pure white below, interscapulum black with white edges to the
feathers.
Two others, March 10 and 28, illustrate the spring molt of the
body plumage; about one-half of the black feathers have ap-
peared.
Eight young (birds of the year), September 25, January 11
(2), Februay 6, March 10, March 24, March 28, March 30,
exhibit much variation in the amount of black on the head and
black spots on wing coverts. All have narrow black tips to white
feathers of the abdomen. None of these birds show any trace of
the spring molt which was well under way in the adults at the
time that most of these were taken.
Lunda cirrhata Pall.—Tufted Puffin.
Two females, August 1. Cape Lisburne.
Fratercula corniculata (Naum.)—Horned Puffin.
Four males and four females. Cape Lisburne.
Cyclorrhynchus psittaculus (Pall.)—Paroquet Auklet.
Three females, July 23. King’s Island.
Simorhynchus pusillus (Pall.)—Least Auklet.
One specimen, secured August 30.
8 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Stercorarius parasiticus (Linn.)—Parasitie Jeger.
Twenty-two specimens represent the dark phase of plumage:
1897—July 24, August 20, August 24 (2), August 50 (3),
August — (2), September 9; 1898—June 1, June 17 (2), June
27 (2), July 7, July 8 (4), July 9 (2).
:. These are very uniform in plumage and exhibit 1 no molt. Two
are slightly mottled below with light crossbars, and two others
have barred under wing coverts, but from the worn condition of
the plumage they appear not to be birds of the year.
The light phase of plumage is illustrated by nine specimens:
1897—July 24 (2), August 20, August 24, August 30 (3), Sep-
tember 9 (2). These show no variation.
Stercorarius longicaudus Vieill.—Long-tailed Jeger.
Fourteen specimens secured 1898: June — (2), June 11 (2),
June 17 (4), July 2, July 8, July 13 (4).
These are all quite uniform, except one male taken July 13 (No
1,302). This is slightly mottled across the breast, the under wing
coverts are barred with white and black, and some of the tail
coverts similarly barred, the back is sprinkled with dull brownish
feathers. Some of the feathers forming the white collar are
barred with dusky and some of those on the head have whitish
edges. All the feathers are worn and the bird has evidently
passed the winter in this dress.
Stercorarius pomarinus (Temm.)—Pomarine Jeger.
The light phase of plumage is represented by a series of forty-
six specimens: 1897—July 24, August —- (5), August 14 (8),
August 15 (2), August 20 (10), August 24 (2), August 30, Au-
gust 26, August 27; 1898—May 23 (3), May 50, May 31 (6),
June 2, June 4, June —, July 3, July 8.
Twenty-nine are in the dark phase: 1897—August 20 ( 2),
August 30 (4), September 20; 1898—June — (3), June 6, June
8 (2), June 11, June 12, June 14 (3), June 23, June 28 (2),
July 3, July 8 (7).
There are also twelve young in the down, making total of
eighty-seven specimens.
While the August specimens of both phases are molting some of
the body plumage, there is no trace of molt in the flight feathers.
The variations of plumage exhibited are as follows: Of the white
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 9
series twelve have the under tail coverts barred and the lower belly
and thighs more or less white, the lightest of all (No. 208, August
15, 1897) having only a trace of dark shading on the belly and only
the tips of the under coverts black; there is scarcely any black on
the breast and the bars on the sides are restricted to the sides of
the chest, there is a broad white collar on the hind neck and con-
siderable white on the upper tail coverts.
No. 864, male, May 23, 1898, while uniform dusky on the
lower belly, is even whiter on the breast than the last specimen
described. There are no black spots on the breast, and only slight
traces on the sides of the chest; and no white on the tail coverts
either above or below.
Other specimens have the whole breast very broadly spotted.
Two (1,240 and 1,211, July 8 and 3, 1898) have the under coverts
barred; the back of the neck is black with white bars, and the
upper tail coverts marked with white. Throat streaked longitu-
dinally, breast and sides strongly barred, and lower belly dusky
mixed with white. The only really white area being in the centre
of the abdomen and even here the tips of the feathers are dusky.
In the dark series, some specimens are uniform deep sooty, with
the head glossy bluish black; others have a golden tinge to the
collar; some have the breast feathers obscurely barred, and tipped
with purplish or buff.
One bird of the year (September 20, 1897) has the feathers
above tipped with pinkish buff, while those of the lower surface,
including the under tail coverts are transversely barred with pink
and dusky, the bars being very broad and distinct on the coverts.
The downy nestlings may be grouped in three series:
A. Average length 5ins. July 6, July 10, July 27 (5).
Almost uniform plumbeous; down long like that of a young gull.
B. Average length 8 ins. July 10, July 27 (2).
Similar, with remiges and some body feathers just sprouting.
C. Average length 12 ins. Wings about one-quarter grown,
banded feathers on back and breast, but body still well coyered
with down.
Larus barrovianus (Ridgw.)—Pt. Barrow Gull.
A study of the fine series of thirty-seven specimens confirms
Mr. Ridgway’s views of the changes in plumage which this bird
undergoes.
10 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
The series may be grouped as follows:
(A.) Five birds of the year are mottled above with gray, pale
buff and white, with more or less gray on the under parts. These
specimens are as follows:
578. September 17, wing 16 ins., plumage very dark.
579. September 17, wing 18.40 ins.,
648. September 23, wings 17.25 ins.,
651. September 23, wings 17.50 ins.,
665. September 28, wings 18.20 ins.,
(B.) Nine specimens represent adult birds in the first breeding
season. ‘These are nearly white with some buff and dusky
mottled feathers on the back and with mottled wing feathers.
The dark feathers are not remnants of the juvenal plumage, as
would at first be supposed, as fall specimens show them still in the
pinfeather sheaths just like the white ones.
The following are in this plumage: June 1, August — (5),
September 5 (5). The September specimens are molting the
remiges, and the new feathers are white like the old ones, and not
gray like those of old adults!
(C.}) Four specimens, older birds, or perhaps birds of the same
age as the last, but for some reason more advanced in plumage,
have the backs partly pearl-gray like fully mature specimens,
but are otherwise like the last lot.
July 24.—Molt of wings nearly completed.
Another is very pure pearl gray above, but with the new
plumage there are a number of the sooty feathers characteristic of
the young bird!
August 20.—Very light above; molt of wings advanced to
second primary, old and new remiges pure white, color below dark.
September 5.—Molt advanced to first primary.
(D.) Sixteen specimens are in the normal adult plumage, with no
dusky feathers, except a few streaks on the heads of two speci-
mens (September 5). These were taken June 2, June 17, July
24, August 1, August 11, August 24, September 5 (3), September
12, September 17 (2), September 24 (2), September 25, October 5.
(E.) Three others are very peculiar and are perhaps very old in-
dividuals. Two females, taken June 8, are pure white all over,
with just a tinge of pearl on the back and middle wing coverts.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 11
Another female, August 27, is similar, but is darker below and
has slight dusky streaks on head and tail.
Three young in the down, July 13, are grayish white mottled
obscurely on the back with plumbeous, face and head distinctly
spotted with dark plumbeous.
The plumages of this species are very puzzling, the birds of the
year (A), and the normal adults (D), with plain pearl mantle,
pure white bodies and gray primaries, are easily picked out.
There remain, however, a number of others which may be grouped
in three lots: (B) White birds with no pearl mantle, but with
many dusky feathers above similar to those of birds of the
year, and with pure white primaries ; (C) Similar to the last, but
with a more or less perfectly developed pearl mantle; (E) Pure
white birds with only a trace of pearl and with white primaries.
Individuals of (B) and (E) occur in the breeding season along
with normal adults (D), so that it seems likely that (B) and (C)
are breeding birds of the first year, differing individually in the
state of advancement of their plumage, or perhaps they represent
birds of one and two years of age. The curious point is that
those which are molting are acquiring white primaries like those
they are shedding, instead of pearl gray ones like those of the
adult !
(E) may be regarded as extremely old birds or perhaps abnor-
mal specimens, differing in their very pale plumage and white
primaries. The possibility of (B), (C) and (E) representing
another species is apparently not worthy of consideration.
Larus nelsoni Hensh.—Nelson’s Gull.
One male specimen, taken September 5, has the head streaked
with dusky, the mantle plain pearl, wing molt advanced to the
outermost primary, which has not yet been cast.
Larus glaucescens Naum.—Glaucous-winged Gull.
One male secured July 24 at Pt. Clarence isin the molt. It has
a very dark mantle ; four outer primaries are the dusky ones of
the first year, the rest having been renewed, but only partly
grown. The tail is dusky.
Another specimen, a bird of the year, is doubtfully referred to
this species. It is a male secured August 15, and is in the molt.
The plumage above is very dark fora gull of this sort, much
12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
darker than any juvenal LZ. barrovianus, and exceeding)y varied
with pinkish, dark brown and white, a few pearl-gray feathers also
appear on the back. Below dusky. Old primaries dull brown,
probably bleached, new ones deep black, inner ones grayish with
black ends and light tips.
Xema sabinii (Sab.)—Sabine’s Gull.
Ninety-four specimens representing only adults and birds of the
year, with no molting specimens, are in the collection. Birds of
the year were taken August 14 (2), August 15 (4), August 20
(3), August 24, August 30 (7), August 31, September 7, Sep-
tember 8, September 9 (28), September 17. Full-plumaged
adults, June 23 (3), June 27, July 31, August 8 (2), August 14
(3), August 15 (4), August 20 (3), August 30 (3), Septem-
berg) (17):
The above mentioned adults are practically identical and though
August birds exhibit some new feathers, with sheaths at their
bases, there is no general molt, and no trace of it in the wings.
Eight other specimens, taken August 5 (5) and August 15 (3),
are probably breeding birds of the first year. They show a consider-
able variation, one extreme having white feathers scattered all over
the gray, especially on the throat, and the black collar broken
with white; the other extreme haying the throat entirely white,
forehead and cheeks mainly so, nape spotted with gray, and a
broad blackish collar on the hind neck.
These birds look exactly like molting specimens, but examination
shows no trace of molt and all the feathers are in exactly the same
condition. It is such series as this that have frequently misled
ornithologists into the belief that the feathers were actually chang-
ing color, while, as a matter of fact, the pied plumage, often differ-
ent in every individual, is nevertheless permanent and unchanged
from the time it is assumed until the next molt.
Rissa tridactyla pollicaris Ridgw.—Pacifie Kittiwake.
The series resolves itself at once into three lots, nestlings, birds
of one year, and those of more than one year. There are none in
juvenal plumage. Eight downy specimens taken at Cape Lis-
burne, August 1, 1897, are pure white below, and on the head
and wings; back and rump gray.
The bird in the first breeding season, as I take it, is grayish on
>
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 15
the head, and has a brownish collar on the hind neck, and brown
feathers all along the wing from the bend to the extreme tertials.
The primaries are also browner than in the adult, the white on the
outer ones being restricted to the inner part of the inner web.
A specimen taken July 9 illustrates this plumage, and is just
starting to molt. Nine others, August 15 (4), August 24, Au-
gust 30 (4), illustrate the assumption of the full winter adult
plumage.
Five specimens, June 2, July 25, July 27 and August 1 (2),
are in adult nuptial plumage, with pure white heads while seventeen
others, August 1, August 14, August 15 (3), August 20 (5),
August 24, August 30 (7), August 51 are old birds in annual
molt.
One very curious specimen taken August 14 is very pale, being
much lighter than the ordinary adult. The wings also are much
lighter and there is no brown or black on any but the two outer-
most primaries, and there only on the outer web. This is an
exactly parallel case with the two white Larus barrovianus, and
is probably a very old bird, or an abnormai albinistic specimen.
Pagophila alba (Gunn.)--Ivory Gull.
One male in nuptial plumage was secured June 2, and seventeen
adults just completing the molt, August 28 (2), August 30 (2),
August —, September 1 (11), September 17.
Three young of the year agree well with Ridgway’s description
(Manual N. A. Birds), but the sides of the face, throat and top
of the head are somewhat spotted with gray. These were taken
September 7, 16 and 25.
A note on the label of a September specimen (482 2 juv.)
states that the breast and abdomen were rose-tinted.
Rhodostethia rosea (Maegil).—Ross’s Gull.
Three specimens of this rare bird were obtained: No. 501,
Sep. 9, 1897, a young male like the second plate in Murdoch’s
Report; No. 649, Sep. 23, 1897, an adult male in winter plumage,
like the first plate in the above work, but with a concealed black
collar ; and No. 1,245, June 9, 1898, an adult male in full nup-
tial plumage, bright pink below, white on the head and neck
above, and a delicate black collar encircling the neck.
14 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1900.
Sterna paradisea Briinn—Arctic Tern.
Ten adults taken June 23 (3), July 24, 27 and 31, August 14
(2), August 30, September 7, are quite uniform in plumage and
show no signs of molt whatever. This seems to render it doubtful
whether these birds molt at all before their autumnal migration.
Birds of the year are represented by a beautiful series representing
all stages from the recently hatched nestling to the fully plumaged
fall bird. The downy young (July 10) is mottled above with dull
black and buff, with two well-marked longitudinal patches of the
former on the head. The throat is dark plumbeous and the rest of
the lower surface snowy white.
Eight specimens illustrate the growth of the young bird until
the flight feathers are about half-grown and the plumage of the
back and breast about half attained, the head and throat still
remain covered with down, true feathers showing only on the ear
coverts. The throat at this period is much lighter and the down
on the belly is not so white (series secured July 26 (4), July 27,
August 21 (2).
The full-grown bird of the year is represented by six specimens,
August 14, August 30, September 7 (3), September 9. The young-
est of these has the feathers of the back broadly bordered with dull
black and buff, exactly the shades of the downy young, while
below the neck is tinged with buff.
These tints all wear away by abrasion and bleach out as the bird
grows older, and the later specimens show very indistinct plum-
beous and whitish borders.
Diomedia nigripes Aud.—Black-footed Albatross.
Eleven specimens were secured July 5 and 11, five males and six
females.
The principal variation exhibited by this series is the presence of
buft edgings to the feathers on the belly of many of the specimens,
and the pied appearance of the upper surface owing to the irregu-
lar mingling of feathers of different ages and different degrees of
bleaching. One specimen is nearly white on the lower belly and
between the legs.
Seven of the birds are molting the primaries; four of these are
progressing in the usual way, the innermost quill being renewed
first, but the others exhibit an exceptional order of molt. In Nos.
1900.1] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 15
2 and 10 the second, third and fourth primaries are only partly
grown, the old feathers having been but recently cast, but the
first primary (outermost) and the six inner ones are of the old
plumage. In No. 3 the fourth, fifth and sixth feathers have been
renewed and are only half grown, but the others have not been
molted, while in No. 5 the first and second are renewed, but none
of the others. Furthermore, they are full-grown in one wing
and only partially so in the other.
Branta nigricans (Lawr.)—Black Brant.
A series of seventeen specimens.
Five breeding birds, June — (2), June 6 (2), June 5, are
brownish black, lighter than fall birds. Feathers mottled below
with pale edgings and much worn, especially on the sides. One
example seems younger than the others, and has whitish tips to
the wing coverts. It is probably a one-year-old bird. Three fall
specimens, August 24, September 17, September 20, are blue black
below with no lighter edgings. A scattering of old brownish
feathers remains on the upper parts, but the molt is apparently
over. One bird of the year, August 30, has white tips to the
wing coverts and feathers of the lower surface, while the general
coloration is grayish, and there is no white collar.
Eight downy young, July 10, are rather light plumbeous, paler
in the middle of the abdomen and nearly white on the throat,
There is a rather obscure dark breast band, and narrow black and
white ring on hind neck, while the top of the head is blackish.
Chen hyperborea (Pall.)—Lesser Snow Goose.
A male and female taken June 30 are in very worn plumage,
the tips of the primaries in the female being bleached to a light
brown, though the covered portions remain jet black.
Anser albifrons gambeli (Hartl.)—White-fronted Goose.
Two specimens were obtained. A female, June 3, is in good
plumage with a few black feathers on the lower parts. Another,
June 14, is very much worn, but otherwise similar.
Merganser serrator (Linn.)—Red-breasted Merganser.
Two males secured July 27, at Pt. Clarence, are of much in-
terest, being in the summer molting plumage.’ They are like the
3See Stone, Proc. A. NV. S., 1899, p. 467.
16 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
nuptial plumage except the head and neck, which resemble the
dress of the female; crest dull brown, breast dull gray, many of
the black head feathers and pink and black breast feathers of the
nuptial plumage still remain, but are easily brushed off, being just
ready to drop. The flight feathers have not yet been molted.
Somateria v-nigra Gray—Pacific Eider.
A series of twenty-five specimens beautifully illustrates the
plumage changes of this species. The females include three adult
breeding birds, May 31 and June 3 (2), and five worn breeding
specimens, August 24, August 30 (4).
In the latter the tips of the wing feathers are bleached almost
white, while the feathers of the belly are sooty with the bars
nearly obliterated. These may possibly be new feathers as they
are much less abraded than those of the breast where the bars
remain distinct.
A number of the wing coverts and scapulars seem to be renewed
at a spring molt, as in the June birds some are full and dark while
others, side by side with them, are pale and worn. The same
difference can be detected in August specimens, where the former
feathers are slightly worn and the latter are exceedingly abraded,
only the dark central portion remaining. These feathers may, how-
ever, possibly persist through the winter from the last year’s
plumage, as indicated below.
One specimen, taken September 24, has completed the molt, and
the new wings are about half grown. <A few old feathers remain
on the breast. The belly is plumbeous and very mottled and
irregular in appearance as if only half through molting. No
barred feathers are to be seen such as constitute the spring plum-
age, so it is probable that the molt of the belly is the last to be
completed.
The male series consists of eight breeding specimens, May 31
(2), June 2, June 3 (5), and seven birds in the transition
plumage with wings fully molted and the new feathers half grown;
these were taken September 17, September 23 (5) and October 6.
One other, August 20, retains the old wing feathers, and has not
quite acquired the full transition plumage on the head, remains of
the nuptial feathers being seen on the lores and crown.
The last of the series, October 6, shows the new winter plumage
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. uy/
supplanting the dull transition dress. The breast is nearly molted,
but is still flecked with brownish feathers, while the new green
feathers of the face may be seen just bursting from the pin-
feather sheaths.
The transition plumage is as follows:
Belly and wings as in nuptial plumage. Head and neck dull
brown, streaked with black, with indistinct lighter areas on the
head, breast mottled, feathers generally white in centre, black at
tip and barred with brown, some all brown and some all white.
Scapulars blackish or brownish, varied with white.
Somateria spectabilis (Linn.)—King Hider.
- The King Eider is represented by a series of 107 specimens.
Twelve are downy nestlings, uniform plumbeous, except for a
ligiter area on each side of the face. There is no marked
difference in the plumage of the young Eiders, though each of the
four species can be told at a glance by the feathering at the base of
the bill, this character being quite as distinct as in the adults.
Three others, August 1 (2), August 18, have the down about
half replaced by the juvenal plumage.
The young of the year include fifty-one specimens, August 30,
September 5, September 6 (4), September 8 (3), September 17
(39), September 24 (3). These exhibit no variation except that
the males are less buff below, with the tips of the feathers inclin-
ing to white, while all the breast feathers have distinct white cross-
bars as well as black ones.
Of the adult females there are six in full nuptial plumage, taken
May 23; three in worn plumage, August 1, August 11, August
24, and six which exhibit more or less molt in the body plumage.
None are renewing the flight feathers, which are often exceed-
ingly worn and bleached. These were taken August 10, August
24 (3), August 30, September 17.
Of the adult males twenty-three are in full nuptial plumage,
May 23 (15), May 26 (4), May 27 (3), June 1 (1). The last
is peculiar in having the V on the neck open in front, forming two
separate streaks. Two later specimens, August 24 and 30, illus-
trate the change to the transition plumage. The breast is speckled
all over with the new brown white and black barred feathers, the
interscapulum is largely speckled with black, and the head and
2
~
18 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
neck are being covered with dull brown black-tipped feathers.
The pattern of the green and blue areas, as well as the black V
are still clearly apparent, though the feathers which remain on these
parts are very easily displaced.
Another specimen, August 24, has fully assumed the transition
plumage, but in none of the three has the molt of flight feathers
begun, they are very much worn and bleached.
Arctonetta fischeri (Brandt)—Spectacled Eider.
Thirty-six specimens represent this species. Five downy young
taken July 28 are plumbeous with the spectacle-like mark clearly
indicated in dull buff.
Nineteen are birds of the year, taken September 8 (7), and
September 17 (12). They are black above, feathers broadly
edged with fulvous buff, except sometimes on the rump. Head
and neck narrowly streaked with black and buff, with throat
and large eye patch plain ochraceous; below vinaceous buff finely
vermiculated and irregularly banded with blackish.
They differ from the adult female in being irregularly mottled
below instead of distinctly cross-barred, and in the lack of light
cross-bars on the rump.
The adult female is represented by five specimens, one June 2, in
full nuptial plumage, the rest August 30 and September 8 (3),
showing much wear and bleaching and some renewal of body
feathers, but no molt on the wings.
Of the adult male there is a series of seven in full nuptial dress,
May 31, June 1, June 3, June 22, June 27 (2), June —.
These vary much in the depth of green between the eye and the
bill, some being very pale and some brownish olive.
One interesting specimen taken September 17 is in the transition
plumage, and the new flight feathers are just full grown. No simi-
lar specimen has ever been described so far as I am aware. The
head and neck are gray streaked with black, front and cheeks
whitish, eye spot gray, centre of throat white, more or less brown
black-barred feathers on the breast, back and scapulars largely
gray, some white beneath the shoulders. Lower parts gray.
Eniconetta stelleri (Pall.)—Steller’s Duck.
Sixty specimens are contained in the collection. Twelve are
downy young taken July 28. They are much darker than the
young of the other Eiders.
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 19
Twenty-three are birds of the year, August 30 (14), Septem-
ber 4 (4), September 5, September 8 (2), September 17, and one
without data.
They have no black on the throat, lower parts are transversely
barred with black and chestnut, the individual feathers being
white at the base, with a black band and chestnut tip. The black
band is sometimes transverse, sometimes curved, and sometimes
forming an angular V-like spot; this variation causes much difter-
ence in the appearance of the plumage of different birds.
The adult female is represented by nine specimens, June —,
June 9, August 11, August 26 (5), August 30. They show
much variation in the markings of the under surface, and the late
August specimens exhibit molt in the body plumage, but not in the
flight feathers.
Thirteen adult males in nuptial plumage were taken as follows:
June 25 (4), June 27 (2), June 22 (2), July 2, June 9 (2),
June 13 (2).
One peculiar male, June 25, is exceedingly worn; speculum
dull brown without a trace of blue; whole plumage dull and
mottled, eye region and cheeks whitish, as is also the breast.
Throat black but not glossy. This bird appears like a bird of the
year which never molted properly in the spring.
Clangula hyemalis (Linn.)—Old Squaw.
Forty-four specimens.
Eight downy young collected July 28, to illustrate variation
with age may be grouped in three lots.
A. Throat and belly white, with a brownish breast band.
Glossy black above, with a brownish cast caused by mixture of
brown filaments. A black mark below and behind the eye.
B. Browner and more faded, abdomen darker owing to plum-
beous color of Jater down.
C. Whole lower surface with strong plumbeous cast, quills not
yet sprouted.
Ten birds of the year are in the familiar plumage representing
that stage, September 8, September 16 (2), September 24 (7).
Adult females were taken, June 8 (2), July 31, September 8
(2), September 24, October 5. The fall specimens have nearly
completed the molt. The October bird has the head nearly pure
white with very obscure crown and cheek patches.
20 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
There are nineteen adult males. Of these, five are in nuptial
dress, May 31, June 2, June 8 (3). One of these has the top of
the head white, some black, some intermediate.
Three taken August 24 are in the molt. The wings are nearly
full grown, and the tail about one-half; the sides of the body
are deep pearl gray.
Six others, August 24, August 30, September 8 (3), September
17, are similar, but the neck and breast are more mottled with new
feathers and the pearl gray scapulars are beginning to appear.
Other specimens are as follows:
September 17 and 24 (3), scapulars all pearl gray, head and
neck nearly white, except cheek patch.
October 8, head and neck almost pure white, no cheek patch.
These species apparently acquire no ‘‘ transition’’ body plumage
during the molt of the flight feathers, as is the case with many
ducks.
Oidemia deglandi Bonap.—White-winged Scoter.
One male in full nuptial plumage, taken June 22.
Phalacrocorax pelagicus robustus Ridgw.—Violet-green Cormorant.
One male specimen taken June 8, at Pt. Barrow. It is entirely
destitute of white plumes.
Grus canadensis (Linn.)—Little Brown Crane.
Two specimens, still in worn, very rusty plumage, taken
June 25.
1,163 — length of culmen, 3.60; wing, 17.75 inches.
1,164 o& length of culmen, 3.50; wing, 16.50 *‘
Crymophilus fulicarius (Linn.)—Red Phalarope.
A series of eighty-five of these birds is in the collection, which
illustrates very nicely most of the stages of the molt.
Twenty adult males in nuptial plumage obtained June 3 (5), June
4 (13), June 7 (2), June 8, June 25, exhibit considerable varia-
tion in plumage. Not a single specimen is uniform rufous beneath,
though one (1,158) is very nearly so. The majority have a con-
siderable sprinkling of white feathers, and in several there are more
white than rufous. The lightest specimen has some gray feathers
scattered over the back, while the throat and sides of the face are
white. Others have these parts more or less gray, while the back
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. yA
is uniformly streaked with black and buff. The darkest of all
has the sides of the face chestnut rufous and the gray throat much
restricted. These light feathers are not indications of molt, but
were evidently acquired at the same time as the rest of the
plumage.
The adult female is represented by a series of eleven taken June
4 (10), June 23. There is much less variation than in the male,
and a greater tendency to uniform coloration below, four of the
specimens being without any white.
Two males, taken July 31, and five secured August 3 are molt-
ing the body plumage, and show all gradations of gray mottling
above and white beneath, while a female (171), taken August 14,
is entirely gray and white, except a few rusty feathers on the belly
and vent, and striped ones on the rump. In none of the above
males is there any trace of molt of the wing feathers, and in all but
one they are in good condition, not perceptibly more worn than in
the June specimens.
In the female the three outer primaries are distinctly fresher
and darker than the others, and the middle pair of rectrices are
being renewed, as well as the three inner primaries on one wing.
In another molting male (285), taken August 20, the same dif-
ference is seen in the outer primaries, and, furthermore, the fresher
feathers still have the sheaths around their bases, showing that they
have just been renewed, and the same is true of the three inner-
most primaries. This molt is, however, only seeu in one wing, the
other retaining the old feathers throughout. In body plumage this
bird has nearly finished the molt.
Birds of the year are illustrated by eight downy young, July 5
and 4 and 27 (4), and 37 in the juvenal plumage, taken July 24,
August 3 (4), August 10, August 24 (16), August 26 (10), August
30 (2), September 5, September 8 (2). Those taken July 24 and
August 30 stil] retain traces of down about the head, while the
later ones all show more or less gray feathers above, though none
appear to have completed this molt. There is no molt in wing or
tail, and the long black buff-edged tertials seem to be retained
through the winter, which thus serve as an easy distinguishing
mark in separating them from winter adults in which these feathers
are gray. The dark tinted feathers across the breast also serve to
distinguish them.
22 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF | 1900.
Phalaropus lobatus (Linn.)—Northern Phalarope.
Three specimens were obtained, an adult male in full nuptial
plumage, June 15; a very much worn specimen, July 27, and a
bird of the year, July 28, which still retains a considerable
amount of down about the head. Three full-grown birds of the
year, August 7 and August 17 (2), 1898.
Arenaria interpres (Linn.)—Turnstone.
Three typical breeding birds were taken respectively May 29
(S), May 31 (2), June 2 (3). Two others secured July 11 (o
and ?) are more worn and the female is beginning to renew the
plumage of the back, the new feathers being exactly like the old
ones. Unfortunately, no later adults were obtained.
A large series of young are in the collection. One secured
June 4, 1898, at Pt. Barrow, and two July 24, 1897, at Port
Clarence, are still decidedly downy about the head and neck,
though otherwise the juvenal plumage is well advanced.
Fourteen others are practically uniform and are in full juvenal
plumage, taken as follows: August 10 (5), August 13 (2), August
14 (2), August 20, August 26, August 30, September 4 (2).
Eudromias morinellus (Linn.)—Dotterel.
One specimen taken at King’s Island, July 23, 1897, an adult
female, just beginning the molt. The three outer primaries still
remain, and but little body molt is yet apparent.
This is the first record of this species for North America; in fact,
it seems to be very rare even on the Asiatic coast. One was
recorded by Cassin from Japan, but Mr. Swinhoe, who reviewed
his paper in The Ibis, 1863, p. 444, seriously doubted the correet-
ness of the identification, with no reason whatever. The result is,
that wherever the record is cited it is queried. The specimen
referred to is still preserved in the Academy’s collection, and is
unquestionably a Dotterel in first winter plumage.
Squatarola squatarola (Linn.)—Black-bellied Plover.
Only six specimens were obtained, but they are quite interesting
as throwing some light on the vexed question of the molt in this
species.
An adult male and female, obtained June 26, have lost the two
innermost primaries and are renewing the plumage of the back,
the new feathers being gray edged with whitish. Two other males,
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 23
July 26, 1898, are in about the same condition. Another specimen,
taken August 20, has a considerable number of similar feathers
on the back, but there is no sign of molt and the primaries are so
worn as to make it extreniely unlikely that they were recently
acquired. Another bird in the Academy collection, No. 34,545,
Buckland river, Alaska, August 1, 1895, has gray feathers scat-
tered through the plumage of the back, but no other trace of molt,
and is very close to some of Mr. Brewster’s black-bellied fall
specimens, from the New England coast, which were courteously
loaned to me for examination.
All the birds above mentioned have black bellies and show no
indication of shedding this plumage, although some of them
(notably some in Mr. Brewster’s series) have acquired some white
feathers. These may, however, have been similarly colored in
spring as we often see mottled birds at this time.
While it seems doubtful whether the flight feathers are always
molted during the sojourn of the bird in the far north, it is certain
that in some cases a part of them, at least, are renewed. Further-
more, all the material which bears upon the question of the molt
of the adult indicates that a number of gray feathers are acquired
on the back after the breeding season, though the molt is far from
complete, and that the black under surface is retained at all sea-
sons, probably becoming purer with age. This is the theory ad-
vanced by Mr. Mackay (The Auk, 1892, p. 143), and the material
before me corroborates it in every instance.
The sixth specimen obtained is a bird of the year, with round
yellow spots above and triangular shaft streaks below.
Charadrius dominicus Mill.—American Golden Plover.
Twenty-eight specimens of this bird are contained in the collec-
tion representing various ages and plumages.
Between the adult male and female, I fail to detect any appreci-
able difference in plumage. Eleven adults taken June to August
serve to illustrate the beginning of the annual molt. One taken
June 1 and two secured June 2 show no evidence of molt what-
ever, and may be regarded as typical breeding birds. They are
uniform black below, but show great variation in the plumage of
the upper surface, many of the old abraded winter feathers being
still retained, as already noticed by Nelson, while some of the
24 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
earliest acquired spring feathers are already beginning to fade and
become ragged. Four later specimens (June 18, 27 (2), 28) show
much greater abrasion, and a general bleaching of the yellow
spots to whitish, while beneath the plumage of the back and head
new feathers are everywhere to be found, beginning to expand.
In the next series (July 24, 27 and August 1), these feathers
are fully grown and a number of white and gray feathers are
scattered over the breast and belly. There is, however,
no trace of molt in the remiges, rectrices or greater wing coyerts
in any of the birds, and it seems that they are not lost till
later. One of the birds secured August 1, while much mottled
with light feathers below, has undergone scarcely any molt on the
back, where the plumage is mainly composed of the much abraded
spring feathers.
Sixteen specimens are in full fall plumage (August 1, August
18 (8), August 20 (7)). They vary considerably in the bright-
ness of the yellow spots and the extent to which they are abraded,
but cannot be separated into old and young (if both are contained
in the lot?) by any tangible character. There is no trace of old
feathers on a single specimen, while all have apparently molted
the flight feathers. The bellies are without a trace of black.
One nestling is bright golden above mottled with black, whitish
on the back of the neck and everywhere below.
Tryngites subruficollis (Linn.)—Buff-breasted Sandpiper.
One female specimen obtained June, 1898, in full nuptial plu-
mage, and a male, August 15, 1898, in winter plumage.
Tringa canutus Linn.—Knot.
Six specimens in full first winter plumage taken July 51 (5)
and August 17.
Tringa couesi (Ridgw.)—Aleutian Sandpiper.
Three specimens in winter plumage were obtained at Port Clar-
ence, August 22, 1898.
Tringa alpina pacifica Coues—American Dunlin.
A fine series of sixty specimens of the Dunlin is contained in
the collection, and as the adults are represented throughout the
molting season, the change of plumage in this species is excellently
illustrated.
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Zo
Nine adults, June 2 (2), June 4, June 7 (2), June 8 (4), repre-
sent the height of the nuptial plumage and are like the latest spring
migrants on our coasts.
One taken June 27 illustrates the beginning of the molt, having
shed the five inner primaries. The new feathers which have not
yet broken from the sheath seem to be all at an equal stage of
development. The next specimen, taken July 51, shows the two
outermost primaries about half grown, while the others are fully
grown. In this bird, too, the wing coverts have all been renewed,
and upon raising the plumage on the back many new feathers are
to be seen, the earlier specimen showed no trace of a molt, except
in the primaries.
A series of fourteen molting adults (August 10 (2), August 15
(4), August 18 (3), August 20, August 24 (2), August 26, Sep-
tember 1), resemble the last in the molt of the wing, though the
later ones have all the remiges fully grown. The extent of the
body molt is very variable, some of the later specimens being still
quite rusty above, while earlier specimens are quite gray, all still
show the black on the belly, though one taken August 24 has
nearly lost it.
Eight downy young were collected July 6, 8, 10 and 25. They
are mottled with chestnut, black and buffy white above with little
buff dots scattered about on the tips of the plumes. Forehead
whitish with a central black stripe forking into two on the top of
the head, and passing into chestnut brown, broad bufty white
superciliaries, which unite below the occiput, and tawny postocular
stripe, strong buff wash below the eye. Under parts white with a
buff collar across the neck.
One young bird, taken July 16, has the body well covered by
the first winter plumage, but is still quite downy on the head,
breast and flanks. The remaining twenty-eight are all fully
grown, and in the usual winter plumage, August 10 (5), August
21 (8), August 24, August 18, August 20, August 26 (6), Septem-
ber 1 (5), September 4.
Tringa maculata (Vieill)—Pectoral Sandpiper.
A series of twenty-six specimens was obtained. Ten are breed-
ing males, with the throat sack enormously extended, spreading the
feathers to such an extent that the black bases are clearly visible.
26 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900-
These were obtained May 30 (2), May 31 (2), June 2 (4), June 8
(2). Six female specimens in nuptial plumage were secured May
30—June 7, and a much worn specimen was obtained July 31,
which is beginning to molt the plumage of the back and breast,
though there is no evidence of molt elsewhere.
Five specimens are in winter plumage (July 31 and August 20
(4)). These show no variation, except that No. 288, August 20,
is more deeply colored on the breast than any of the others. I
am uncertain whether these are adults or birds of the year. If
the former, then this species molts before migrating southward,
like A. alpina pacifica, but not nearly so early.
Four downy young are labelled T. maculata. They do not differ
from young 7. alpina paeifica, except in rather darker coloration.
Tringa bairdii Coues—Baird’s Sandpiper. ‘
A large series of breeding birds was obtained as follows: May
28, May 30, June 2 (3), June 7, June 8 (7). These are quite
uniform in plumage, though the later ones are a little more worn.
Three specimens, taken June 11, June 15, June 27, show more
or less new body feathers both above and below, when the old
plumage is raised, and another secured July 11 has nearly com-
pleted the molt of the head, breast and back. In none of these,
however, is there a trace of molt on the wings or tail.
Eleven birds in first winter plumage were secured, July 31 (8),
August 1 (2) and September 4. These differ from the winter plu-
mage of the adults in the conspicuous white margins to the feathers
of the back and the greater amount of streaking on the breast.
Ten young in the down were taken July 16, 18 and 27; they are
darker than young Dunlins, with the brown tints darker and not
so rufous. while the light mottlings are whiter and less tinged
with buff. Two others taken August 1 are intermediate between
the down and first winter plumage.
Tringa friscicollis Vieill—Bonaparte’s Sandpiper.
Five of these birds were taken as follows: June 2, June 8 (2),
June 14 (2). All are in full nuptial plumage, and show no s
of molt.
Ereunites pusillus (Linn.)—Semipalmated Sandpiper.
A series of thirteen specimens was obtained. A breeding bird,
June 6, is rather worn, without a trace of chestnut tints on the
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 27
plumage. Two others, obtained July 8, show a considerable
renewal of the plumage of the back, but no molt in the flight
feathers. A female from Port Clarence, July 24, is similar.
The other specimens appear to be birds of the year, one from Pt.
Barrow, August 12, and another, Port Clarence, July 24, still
retain much down about the head, while two others from Point
Hope, July 31, and one from Port Clarence, July 24, are in full
winter plumage; also July 31, 1898 (4). The shortness of bill in the
Pt. Barrow birds is extreme, measurements being as follows: No.
1,243, .65 in.; No. 1,028, .74; No. 1,242, .70 inches.
Those from Point Hope measure No. 88, 1.00; No. 87, .80;
and from Port Clarence, No. 29, .74 inches.
Limosa haemastica (Linn.)—Hudsonian Godwit.
Two specimens, obtained July 14, are slightly mottled with new
gray feathers above and below, and show a number of pin-feathers
beneath the plumage, but there is no indication of molt in
flight feathers.
Limosa fedoa (Linn.)—Marbled Godwit.
One bird of the year, obtained August 26.
Calidris arenaria (Linn.)—Sanderling.
Six breeding specimens, June 6 and 7, and one bird of the year,
August 27.
Macrorhamphus scolopaceus (Say.)—Long-billed Dowitcher.
One adult female in worn nuptial plumage, secured June 30, and
twelve birds of the year, taken August 1, August 20 (8), August
24 (2), August 26, represent this species.
The bills of the latter series range from 2.25 to 2.95 inches,
but there is no variation in the plumage.
Lagopus rupestris (Gm.)—Rock Ptarmigan.
Four specimens only were collected.
One male, taken in April, is in worn winter plumage, while two
others, June 25 and 29, are extremely worn, and of a dirty
brownish white. There are new brown feathers on top of the
head and on the back, but apparently no general molt, and con-
sidering the very late date it seems that the molt must have been
arrested in some manner in these specimens.
A female, taken June 26, is in almost full nuptial plumage, but
28 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
retains a few white feathers below. There is no molt of the flight
feathers. hen
Lagopus lagopus (Linn.)—Willow Ptarmigan.
Sixteen adult specimens illustrate the winter and nuptial plu-
mages.
Twelve of these, October 6 (2), October 15 (3), October 9 (7),
are white, with a few old rufous feathers about the head. Two
others, January 11 and March 21, show effects of wear, but are
still in the white dress.
The next specimen, April 18, is very much worn with many new
rufous feathers coming in on the head and neck, while in the last,
June 22, the nuptial plumage is completed except a few old white
feathers on the belly.
In none of these is there any indication of a spring molt of the
primaries, secondaries or greater coverts.
Falco rusticolus gyrfalco (Linn.)—Gyrfalcon.
Two specimens, September and November 7, 1897.
The former has scarcely any transverse barring above, and is
very dark below. The latter is strongly barred above with buffy,
aud is white below streaked with dusky.
Asio accipitrinus mcilhennyi Stone—Arctic Short-eared Owl.
A series of nine males and two female Short-eared Owls were
secured, June 2-22; have already been described (Proc. Acad.
Wat.. Sei., 1899; p. 478):
Nyctea nyctea (Linn.)—Snow Owl.
Eleven adults, taken June 3-27, are contained in the collection.
Six of these are marked male and four female, while one is
unsexed. There is great variation in the amount of dark barring
on the plumage, but the nearly pure white ones are always males,
and the darkest ones always females; among the intermediate
specimens there are two specimens, one male and the other female,
which are almost alike in plumage.
Three of the sexed females are nearly denuded of feathers on
the breast and abdomen, but the other as well as the unsexed speci-
men which, from its measurements appears to be a female, are well
feathered and were evidently not nesting.
The whitest example is No. 1,089, taken June 12, the only mark-
ings on it are small black tips to the outer primaries, a few dull
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 29
streaks on the crown, and an obscure grayish spot on the wing-
coverts. The lightest female is decidedly white, interscapulum,
back and rump pure white, tail slightly spotted, wings and coverts
irregularly but not heavily barred, beneath the bars are few and
faint, and confined to the middle of the abdomen. No molt was
observable in any of the series. The wing measurements are as
follows:
Ins. Ins
Pits. ic, Jane 16, 16.00. So2e eS dune 3, “te %5:
meee une 26.) 10.50. 1,127. 2; June 17, 17.00.
Posed. sune 12, 16.00. 1,128 ¢, June 17, 17.10.
1,089. co, June 12, 15.60. 999. —, June 5, 17.80.
i Df reg 5. 1,051. 2, June —, 17.10.
of
esane: b7.) 15.
7 as
1,118. Pedanes 17.) 15.2!
A series of twenty-four nestlings in various stages is of particu-
lar interest as it illustrates two distinct conditions of the downy
plumage.
The birds may be grouped in four lots:
A. Average length of skin 4.25 ins., June 25 (1), July 6 (5),
July 10 (2). Pure white down all over the body, the largest
individuals showing dusky traces on the wings.
B. Average length 6.50 ins. July 6 (9). White down not
continuous over the body, all the feather tracts distinctly dusky
with the new plumbeous down.
C. Average length 8 ins. July 6 (3), July 10 (2). Prevailing
color dusky plumbeous, plumes all tipped with white, these tips
being, of course, the earlier white down.
D. Average length 12 ins. July 10 (2). Thickly covered
everywhere with plumbeous down, much of it with white tips.
Some fluffy banded plumbeous scapular feathers and the wing quills
just sprouting.
Horizopus richardsonii (Swains.)—Western Wood Pewee.
One female secured July 1, 1898, materially extends the north-
ward distribution of the species. This bird is interesting, as it is
renewing the outermost primary of the left wing which had evi-
dently been accidentally lost. Instances of renewal of rectrices
are common, but this is the first instance that has come to my
notice of the renewal of a remex.
30 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Calcarius lapponicus alascensis Ridgw.—Alaskan Longspur.
The Longspur is represented by a series of ninety-nine speci-
mens, eighty-one from Pt. Barrow and eighteen from Port Clarence.
Compared with a series of Greenland birds, they are perceptibly
lighter on the upper surface, the black lines being much narrower.
In no other respect, however, can I see any material difference,
and the absence of rusty tints on the wings does not seem to be a
constant character.
Twenty-eight breeding males (May 28 (16), May 30 (9), June
2 (2), June 11 (1)) present a very uniform appearance. In nearly
all the chestnut of the neck, black of the throat and light post-
ocular stripes are very clear and have entirely lost the bufi edgings.
In many, however, the light tips remain on the lowest of the
black breast feathers and in none is the black cap entirely pure.
Nine breeding females (May 28 (5), May 30 (2), June 2 (1),
June 14 (1)) show considerable variation in the brightness of the
black chest band and the chestnut collar, and in all but the last
abrasion is much less advanced than in the males. It seems prob-
able that the dul) specimens are younger birds.
Six males secured at Port Clarence, July 24 and 25, are in the
midst of the molt. In three of these the fourth primary has just
been shed, in the others, the third, second and first respectively.
In the first two specimens the three old outer rectrices are still
retained, in next two only the outermost pair, and in the last the
entire tail has been shed. One or two of these birds show the
culmination of the abrasion on the crown, which is pure black, a
condition not noticed in any of the June specimens. It is evident
that this process continues until the molt is actually under way.
Another point of interest is that many of the new feathers on
the chin are white almost or quite to their bases, while these feath-
ers in May and June specimens are jet black, indicating a slight
molt in spring, which is well known to oceur in many Fringillide.
Two molting females from Port Clarence, July 23 and 24, are
in the same stage as the first males above referred to.
Nineteen specimens are in the juvenal plumage and thirty-five
in full winter dress.
Four specimens (July 8, 18 (2) and 27) have only half-grown
tails, while two secured at Port Clarence, July 24, are in perfect
juvenal plumage, the molt to winter plumage follows almost imme-
»
1900. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 31
diately, as all the other birds (July 24 to August 18) show it in
progress. The new feathers first become noticeable on the rump,
and the molt is well advanced here before it is apparent on the
lower surface.
The fall specimens are separable at once into males and females
by the large amount of black on the breasts of the former, but I
fai] to distinguish birds of the year by any external characters.
Indeed, the only noteworthy variation seems to be an occasional
increase in the black on the chest of the females, a tendency
toward the plumage of the male not infrequently noticed in vari-
ous birds.
Calcarius pictus (Swains.)—Smith’s Longspur.
One male secured June 11, 1898, presents no peculiarities.
Wing measures 3.58 ins.
Passerina nivalis (Linn.)—Snowflake.
A series of forty-three specimens, all from Pt. Barrow, except
three immature birds taken on King’s Island. These correspond
excellently with a series of Greenland birds obtained on the Peary
expeditions, and now in the collection of the Academy, and show
no tendency whatever toward P. nivalis townsendi Ridgw., of the
Aleutian Islands. .
Of nine breeding males, taken May 3 to June 11, 1898, six are
nearly uniform in coloration, the heads being pure white, and the
interscapulum with only slight whitish edgings, these having practi-
cally disappeared in the latest specimen in the series. In none of
these is there any trace of brown or rusty tints, though the remain-
ing three show this to a varying degree. No. 855, May 3—the
earliest specimen—exhibits slight rusty tips to the feathers of the
head and the innermost wing coverts, as well as a spot of rusty
on each side of the breast. In No. 856, May 6, the rusty is con-
fined to the wing coverts and the rump, while in 855, May 6, the
whole upper surface is suffused with rusty. The abrasion of the
tips in this bird seems to have been delayed for some reason, and
it forms a striking break in the series which otherwise illustrates
beautifully the gradual progress of this abrasion during the month
covered by the specimens.
Two breeding females, May 30 and July 3, show practically no
trace of rusty tints; the later bird, though very much worn, shows
no indication of molt.
32 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Only five adult males illustrate the molt, and the early fall
plumage. One of these (302, August 21) is in the midst of the
molt, six"new primaries are full grown and the others of varying
lengths, the old ones being all shed, the old secondaries still
remain, while the tertials and nearly all the body feathers are new.
Three specimens, taken August 26, and one September 4, are in
full fall plumage, the remains of the sheath on the outermost
primary being the only sign of molt.
Nine females are in ful] fall plumage,of which four (August 26
(2), September 4 and September 11) retain remains of the sheath
on the base of the outermost primary, while the rest (August 30
(2) and September 4 (3)) show no trace of it, and may be birds
of the year.
Eighteen unquestionably immature birds illustrate the changes
from the nestling to the full fall plumage.
Five nestlings, July 10, Admiralty Bay, were collected to show
the progress of plumaye growth. The youngest is quite white
down the centre of the abdomen and brownish on the sides, the
older birds exhibit a buffy suffusion over the whole lower surface.
The neosoptiles on all are dull plumbeous.
Three males from King’s Island (July 23) are in full juvenal
plumage, though in two of them the tail is not fully grown. Four
specimens (August 15, 21, 24, September 3) illustrate the progress
of the postjuvenal molt on the back and rump, while in two others,
August 21 and September 3, it is completed.
Of two immature females taken August 14, one is beginning to
molt, while the other has finished, and the same is true of two
secured August 21.
In examining this series, I discovered that the primary coverts
were an excellent index to the sex and age of the bird, as they are
always white in the male—even in the fledgling—and dull black
in the female. Young males always have a spot of black on the
tip of each feather, the pure white feathers replacing them at the
first annual molt. By this means we can separate the male and
female fledglings, and distinguish the males of one year from the
older individuals in the spring-breeding series.
Acanthis hornemannii exilipes (Coues)—Hoary Redpoll.
A series of sixteen specimens taken June 18-26 exhibits very
little individual variation. One male is bright rosy pink over the
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 33
whole breast and down the sides, as well as on the rump, but the
others, both males and females, present a very uniform appearance.
Unfortunately, none were secured in the molt.
Ammodramus sandwichensis alaudinus (Bonap.)—Western Sayanna Sparrow.
Six breeding specimens, taken June 7 to July 27, and three in
winter plumage, August 26 and 27, illustrate this species. None
of them show any trace of molt.
Zonotrichia leucophrys nuttalli Ridgw.—Nuttall’s Sparrow.
One female specimen, secured June 10, 1898, is typical in every
way. Wing measure 2.90 ins.
Dendroica coronata (Linn.)—Myrtle Warbler.
One male obtained from a native near Pt. Tangent, June 3,
1898.
Budytes flavus leucostriatus (Hom.)—Siberian Yellow Wagtail.
One adult male obtained June 11, 1898, a young bird just com-
pleting the molt into the winter plumage, and another young, August
8, 1898.
Hylocichla alicie (Baird)—Gray-cheeked Thrush.
An adult female, found dead on the ice near Pt. Tangent, May
27, 1898, and a male secured June 10, 1898, at Pt. Barrow.
The latter is in exceedingly worn plumage, the ends of the prima-
ries where they project successively one beyond the other being so
bleached that the pattern of the covering feather is clearly marked
on each.
MAMMALS.
Twenty species of Mammals are represented in the collection by
855 specimens. Seventeen of these are given in Murdoch’s paper,
though the nomenclature varies considerably. Of the other eight
mentioned by that author, the Red Fox, Wolverine, Barren-
ground Bear and Mountain Sheep were given on the basis of skins,
etc., in possession of the Eskimos, and were admittedly not ob-
tained at Pt. Barrow, while Elephas was of course fossil. The
other species were the Ribbon Seal, NarwhaJ, and Killer Whale.
Of these no specimens are in the McIlhenny collection.
Three other species were, however, secured, which are appar-
ently reported for the first time from Point Barrow, the Fur Seal,
Least Wease] and Canada Lynx.
3
34 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Balena mysticetus Linn.—Bowhead Whale.
Portions preserved in formaline.
Delphinapterus leucas (Pallas)—White Whale.
One skeleton and ten skulls, one an embryo. Mr. Mcllhenny’s
measurements show the average length of males to be 15 ft. 3 ins.
(ext. 16.4-12.1), and of females 12 ft. 11 ins. (ext. 13.9-11.7).
Rangifer arcticus (Rich.)—Barren-ground Caribou.
A series of twenty-four of these animals was secured ; three
skeletons, eight skins with skulls and thirteen additional skulls.
Some of the horns are in the velvet, which is dark blackish brown,
with scattered white hairs near the basal portion.
The youngest examples have straight or slightly incurved
‘‘ spike ’’ horns eight to eleven inches long. The next has the
horns incurved, thirteen inches long (chord measurement) with a
forward tine six inches long near the base. Other horns of the same
size are slightly forked at the tip with the forward tine also some-
times forked; while one specimen has the tip of one horn some-
what flattened. Another specimen slightly larger has a well-
developed fork to the main horns, while the adults vary very
much,
A comparison of this series with a number of skulls from Green-
land fails to show any tangible difference either in the characters
of the cranium or the antlers No doubt there are satisfactory
differences in the coloration, but lack of skins of the Greenland
animal prevents me from making comparisons.
In color the adult skins do not vary to any great extent; No.
299, ¢, March, 1897, is nearly white on the neck and head, the
ears and portions of the face and top of head are brownish gray,
the middle of the back from shoulders to rump is brownish gray,
as well as the legs, sides, under parts, tail and buttocks white, a
well-defined dark, narrow lateral band about three inches from
the dark dorsal area. Feet white, the brown color running down
the middle of each toe to within an inch of the hoof, but much
paler than elsewhere on the legs. No. 292, 2, March 15, 1897,
is in much fuller coat, with hair much longer aud everywhere
lighter, owing to a ‘‘ frosting’’ of white hairs. The lateral
stripes are not so well defined, and the feet are pure white. The
horns of this specimen are in the velvet.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 35
Two of the calves are uniform, dark smoky gray, while the
third is varied with white on the rump, face and legs.
Lepus tschuktschorum (Nordquist.)—Alaskan Polar Hare.
One skeleton of a male obtained April, 1898, on the Ikpikpun
river.
*‘Length, 28.5 ins; hind foot, 7.5; tail, 4.62; ear, 4.25.’’
Skull, total length, 112mm; greatest breadth, 57; greatest breadth
of nasals, 24.
Ovibos moschatus (Zimm.)—Musk Ox.
One weather-beaten skull picked up on the tundra.
Lemmus trimucronatus (Rich.)—Alaskan Lemming.
Mr. McIlhenny’s magnificent series of 606 skins furnishes abun-
dant material for studying the variations in this species due to age
and season.
Two points are at once noticeable upon arranging the specimens
according to dates of capture, first, that some young seem to be
born every month in the year, and second, that during the four
months (August to November) of the expedition’s stay at Pt.
Barrow only young Lemmings (probably all born that year) were
obtained. The latter fact may be merely due to lack of knowledge
of the habits of the adults, but owing to the fact that such large
numbers of old ones were taken later on, and but few young, it
may have something to do with the erratic habits of these curious
rodents. The former fact is no doubt accountable for some of
the peculiat individual variations in pelage which are seen in the
series.
Beginning our study of the series with the first that were obtained,
August, 1897, it will be convenient to consider them month by
month.
August.—Six specimens, ali young, three to five inches long and
poorly haired, black and yellow hairs closely mingled over the
upper surface with a rufous patch on the rump, blackish under fur
everywhere showing through. Below buff with dark under fur
very conspicuous.
September.—Fifty-four specimens, twenty-six like the above,
twelve younger (three to four inches long), grayer and less rufous,
some with only a trace of the latter tint. Sixteen show the trans-
formation from the dull reddish rumped pelage above described,
36 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
to a full long-haired pelage of bright yellow buff, brightest on the
rump and dusky on the head, below buff with the plumbeous under
fur nearly obscured. This I consider to be the regular first
winter pelage. Many of this series show the bright yellow-buff
hairs about half-grown pushing up through the dull juvenal
pelage.
October. —Twenty-two specimens. Three of the earliest (gray)
stage, eight of the next (red-rumped), and nine of the winter,
though many of the latter are not yet fully molted. Two others
are peculiar in being very gray above with no trace of the rufous
tint on the rump; they are, however, acquiring the yellow-buff
winter pelage. One November specimen is similar and shows dis-
tinctly the new buff pelage coming in, though the old pelage is
very gray and like that of a very young individual. These speci-
mens were probably born very late in the season, and the juvenal
pelage never attained its full development, the molt to the winter
dress occurring much earlier in life than in those born in June or
July.
November.—One specimen described above.
December.—Three specimens, one like the above and two in full
winter pelage, though larger than any so far considered (7. e., 5.80
ins. long).
January.—FEight specimens. Three young like those last de-
scribed, but farther advanced in the molt, and five in full winter
pelage.
February.—Nine specimens. Three in absolutely first pelage,
gray, fur much longer and thicker than in summer-born young
(length 3.87 ins.) One larger individual molting, and five in
winter pelage, duller and more faded than early fall examples.
March.—Twenty-three specimens. Eight small ones in first
pelage, similar to summer young, but rather paler and with
denser fur. Two molting and thirteen in adult winter pelage
(length 5.15-6.83 ins.).
April.—Sixty-eight specimens. Three are well-grown young,
with a trace of the rufous rump patch. Sixty-one are in winter
pelage or in the spring molt, many of them very ragged with the
gray under fur exposed in places. Four have about completed the
molt. These have the hair shorter than winter specimens, and are
darker colored with the whole rump bright ferruginous.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 37
May.—Two hundred and sixty-four specimens. Twenty are
young of various ages, some very small, the oldest showing distinctly
the accession of the rufous pelage on the rump, replacing the orig-
inal gray. Thirteen are in the red-rumped juvenal pelage, and
two hundred and thirty-one adults, some stil] in the ragged winter
pelage, some completely molted, and others in transition.
June.—One hundred and forty-eight specimens. Nine young
of various ages and one hundred and thirty-nine adults, nearly
all in fresh summer pelage.
The four pelages of DL. trimucronatus that seem to be normal
are described in detail below, the colors being compared with
Ridgway’s Nomenclature :
1. The Gray young (No. 168, February 5). Hair brown,
slightly tinged with buff in the middle of the back, and with many
of the hairs tipped with black. Beneath paler.
Length 97 mm. ; tail 12; hind foot 17.
2. The Red-rumped young (No. 46, September 6). Hairs over
the anterior part of the back and head raw umber and black finely
mingled, some with a golden lustre; rump and posterior parts
dark chestnut, sides pale tawny. Below cinnamon rufous, with the
gray under fur conspicuous.
Length 124 mm.; tail 18; hind foot 17.
3. Adult summer (No. 657, May 31). Forward part of body
russet and black very finely mingled, shading to very bright
chestnut almost hazel on rump, sides tawny ochraceous. Beneath
ochraceous buff.
Length 155 mm. ; tail 24; hind foot 21.
4, Adult winter (No. 161, January 27). Anterior portions
clay color with black hairs finely intermixed, rump and _ posterior
parts. ochraceous, below cream buff.
Length 148 mm.; tail 23; hind foot 22.
Dicrostonyx hudsonius alascensis subsp. nov.—Alaskan Pied Lemming.
The seasonal and individual variations in Dicrostonyx, as shown
below, is very great, and renders any division into geographical
races difficult without extensive series from a number of localities.
The material before me, however, indicates that the form inhabiting
Alaska and the northwestern part of British America is separable
from the Dicrostonyx of Labrador, to which the name hudsonius
38 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
belongs. The type specimen (No. 821, Coll. E. A. MclIlhenny,
Pt. Barrow, Alaska, 2, June 8) may be described as follows: An-
terior portion of upper surface, rich chestnut, with whitish mottling
due to the light bases of the hairs showing through, rump blackish
and gray mottled with white, a blackish median dorsal stripe
extending to the nose, face gray, ear patches strongly chestnut.
Sides and under parts strongly tinted with rusty, with chestnut
across the breast between the forelegs; feet white.
D. hudsonius (three specimens in Coll. E. A. and O. Bangs, Ham-
ilton Inlet, Labrador, August 10-19, 1895) differs in its nearly uni-
form grizzled gray pelage, and almost total absence of chestnut, this
color appears only at the base of the fore legs, on the ear patches,
and as a slight tint on the sides of the body, but is nowhere as rich
as in alascensis ; the feet are gray or blackish, instead of white,
and the under paris are darker. While it is quite probable that
the Labrador Lemming is subject to greater variation than shown
by the material before me, it also seems evident that it is a much
grayer animal at all times than the Alaskan form. The grayest
specimen of alascensis has more chestnut coloring than any of
Mr. Bangs’ series or Labrador specimens in the National Museum
collection, and the black and gray mottling is much coarser.
There is no tangible difference in the skulls of the two forms.
Their measurements follow:
, Length. Tail. Hind Foot.
D. hudsonius, No. 4,166 (Bangs), Hamil-
ton Inlet, Labrador, W, . . . . . 150mm. 8 21
D. h. alascensis, Type, No. 824 (Me-
Ilhenny), Pt. Barrow, Alaska, o’, . . 132 18
D. h. alascensis (largest spec. ), No. 496
(Mcllhenny), Pt. Barrow, Alaska,. . 165 21 19
A series of forty-eight specimens was obtained, which vary
considerably in size, but are all apparently adult.
October and November (October 11, November 3, November
13).—These three specimens are decidedly white. The first two
show traces of the dark summer pelage everywhere under the long
silky winter coat and on the back of the neck, ears and top of
the head, the old pelage still remains intact. The last specimen is
entirely white, but with a pinkish tinge produced by the partially
covered chestnut hairs remaining from the summer coat.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 39
January and February.—Two specimens, both pure white with
long silky hair.
March.—Seven specimens. Five pure white and two showing
the beginning of the spring molt. The latter are white, with a
general pinkish tinge produced by the dark hairs of the new
summer coat; two have dusky lines between the shoulders, and
one has well-defined pinkish bands from the eyes to the rump where
they join and continue as one band to the tail, there are also rusty
spots at the base of the fore legs.
April.—Ten specimens. Four are pure white, and one white
with a dusky area on the head and across the occiput, ending in a
longitudinal stripe on the forepart of the back. These dark
marks are apparently not produced by the ingrowing summer hair.
The other five are beginning the molt though the prevailing color
is still white.
May.—Sixteen specimens. One pure white (May 26), one with
several round spots of chestnut on the back of the neck, but other-
wise white, evidently injured late in winter or early in spring, the
new hair coming in dark. Two others have the centre of the
back more or Jess dark, with a well-defined median dark stripe.
Ten others are white beneath and on the sides, gray on the head,
rump and middle of back, rest of upper surface rusty, inclining to
chestnut, with a dark median stripe. These average 152 mm. in
length, and are dull in appearance compared with June specimens,
probably due to scattered short white hairs in the pelage.
Two large ones, average length 160-mm., are much more chest-
nut than the above series, one is in complete summer pelage, the
other is white below with the whole posterior part of the body veiled
with the long white winter hairs.
June.—Ten specimens all in summer pelage, though varying
much individually. All are rusty beneath with the gray under
fur conspicuous. Above the normal pelage appears to be mottled
chestnut and white on the anterior half of the body, the white
being confined to the basal part of the hair and more conspicuous
in some than in others, posterior half iron gray or black, with
more or less white bases to the hairs, face gray, nose black, feet
and tail white. On some specimens there is a median black stripe.
The most extreme specimen has a complete median stripe from
nose to tail, and the whole back mottled with black and gray,
40 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
giving it a grizzled appearance, while the hairs over the shoulders
and on the ears are chestnut, and a few on the forepart of the
back are chestnut tipped. In size this June series averages 137
mm., the extremes being 165 and 112. The heavy claws on the
fore feet are well developed on all of the series, except three of the
June specimens.
On THE RELATIONSHIP OF Norra AMERICAN LEMMINGS.
The number of species of American Lemmings of the genera
Lemmus and Dicrostonyx and their proper nomenclature has long
been an unsettled question.
In the present connection it occurred to me that an opportunity
was offered to throw some light on the subject, and through the
kindness of the authorities of the U.S. National Museum, the
American Museum of Natural History and of Mr. Outram Bangs,
I now have before me a series of 129 specimens in addition to the
magnificent series of 654 skins secured by Mr. McIlhenny.
Owing to the great variation in these animals due to age and
season the series is still insufficient to satisfactorily settle all the
points at issue, though much is made clear.
The American specimens of Lemmus have been variously referred
by writers to L. lemmus, L. obensis and L. helvolus.
The first two are respectively European and Siberian animals,
and, as can be seen at a glance, are wholly different from any
American Lemmings as well as from each other.
Leaving these out of the discussion, we have to consider the
names proposed for the American animals. There are, I believe,
only four:
Arvicola trimucronata Rich.
Parry’s Second Voyage, App. (1825), p. 309.
Type locality, Point Lake, lat. 65° N.
Arvicola helvolus Rich.
Fauna Boreali-Americana (1829), p. 128.
Type locality, Alpine Swamps in lat. 56°, Evidently near the
headwaters of Peace river.
Myodes nigripes True.
Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., vol. xvii, No. 799, April 26, 1894.
Type locality, St. George’s Island, Alaska.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Al
Myodes albigularis Wagner,
Schreber’s Sdugeth. Suppl. (1843), vol. 3, p. 602.
Several specimens in the U. 8. Nat. Mus. from the Arctic coast
are practically topotypes of ZL. trimucronatus, the type locality of
which is Point Lake.
These are identical with Pt. Barrow specimens of similar age,
and Richardson’s description, which is of an adult female animal,
can be well matched by specimens in the McIlhenny series.
This being the oldest of the three names proposed, no difficulty
presents itself in applying it to the Lemmus of the Arctic coast.
We have now to consider the status of the two other described
forms. Richardson’s description of L. helvolus is not sufficiently
detailed to judge of its relationship with the more northern form.
I have before me, however, a specimen from the collection of the
Amer. Mus. of Nat. Hist., obtained by A. J. Stone in the Cassiar
Mts., directly west of the region where Drummond collected the
type of L. helvolus. This specimen is, unfortunately, not fully
adult, and it is difficult to decide as to its relationship with the
Arctic form. I find no apparent cranial differences between it and
specimens of the same size from Alaska, while in color it is rather
yellower than any of the Arctic series. Without more material it
is impossible to say whether the two are identical] or not, though
it seems quite likely that the southern form will prove subspeciti-
eally different in which case it will stand as Lemmus trimucronatus
helvolus Rich.
Lemmus nigripes True, is an island form restricted to St. George’s
Island. Though generally regarded as quite distinct, the large Pt.
Barrow series before me contains specimens that come very close to
the island form. The latter are, however, darker and have blacker
feet than specimens of the same size from the mainland, and are
apparently distinct, though very closely related. I have seen no
specimens of L. nigripes which approach in size or color the old
adults of JZ. trimucronatus. The great variation in L. trimu-
cronatus, which presumably exists also in the other forms Just
mentioned, has been already described at length; and it is now
quite evident that several specimens in the National Museum col-
lection which, from their difference in size and coloration, appeared
to represent distinct* species, are really identical. L. albigularis
*Cf. True, Report of Fur Seal Investigations, 1896-7, Part ili, p. 347.
42 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Wagn., is apparently a synonym of L. trimucronatus, but if the
Sitkan animal proves separable this name is available.
The species of Lemmus before me in adult pelage may be distin-
guished as follows:
Anterior part of back as well as whole front of head jet black;
rest of upper surface, including area just above ears, tawny
ochraceous. . Wile 1k) GE ce.) al remeeee
Head gray, body tawny ochraceous to chestnut, with a longitu-
dinal black stripe from nose to shoulders, beneath yellowish white.
LL. obensis.
Upper surface russet passing to chestnut on rump, no median stripe,
below ochraceous buft. Feet gray or white. Li. trimucronatus.
Similar to the last but much duller and browner, with the feet black.
LL. nigripes.
Our American Dicrostonyx has generally been referred to the
European D. torquatus Pallas, but while certainly quite closely
related to this form, I regard it as probably distinct. Unfortu-
nately, no skins of the Old World animal are available for com-
parison, and I have only been able to examine one skull from
Petschara, Russia, kindly loaned by Mr. Gerrit S. Miller, Jr.,
from which no very satisfactory deductions can be made.
For the American animal only one name has been proposed:
hudsonius of Pallas, while Richardson proposed groenlandicus for
the Dierostonyx of Greenland.
I am inclined to think that the characters upon which this last
form was based are due to age and season, but it is quite likely
that the animal may prove distinct, in which case Richardson’s
name will be available. The Greenland material that I have is
all alcoholic, and the specimens do not seem fully adult, so that no
satisfactory comparison is possible except as to cranial characters,
and here I find no apparent difference.
The three specimens of Dicrostonyx kindly loaned by Mr. Bangs
are from Labrador and consequently topotypes of D. hudsonius.
They, as well as other Labrador specimens before me, are uni-
formly grayer and more finely mottled than Alaskan examples, as
already explained, and in consequence I have proposed to separate
the western form as D. h. alascensis.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 45
Spermophilus empetra (Pall-)—Parry’s Spermophile.
Forty-four skins of this animal were obtained. Four June
specimens are pale and somewhat ragged, with the thick woolly
under fur rather conspicuous, while two others taken late in the
same month are darker, brighter and distinctly rusty beneath.
These latter are evidently in the fresh summer pelage. Four July
specimens are similar while two young individuals are very gray,
with the back obscurely mottled, but without distinct white spots.
The pelage is very thin.
The August series includes eight normal adults, three young and
one large adult, which is remarkably gray below and dusky above,
With scarcely any trace of rusty tints. A similar specimen was
obtained in September, but the rest of the autumn series of
eighteen specimens are normal (September to November 12). One
albino obtained in November, 1895, by Charles Brower, is in the
collection.
Sorex personatus streatori Merriam—Streator’s Shrew.
Three specimens which measure as follows:
Length. Tail. Hind Foot.
71. 2, September 16, 1897, . . . 86mm. 34 10
fe ceptemper 17, 1897, « .« . 91 35 10
alee October: 1897... 2. .« . . 88 34 11
Odobenus obesus (Illig).—Pacifie Walrus.
Two skeletons and one skull.
Callotaria ursina (Linn.)—Fur Seal.
* One female, obtained at Pt. Barrow, August 17, 1897, meas-
uring 48 ins. in length.
Erignathus barbatus (Fabr.)—Bearded Seal.
One male specimen prepared as a skeleton was secured Septem-
ber 7, 1897. It measured ‘‘ 88 ins. in length, hind foot 20.5 ins.,
greatest girth 60 ins.’’ (MclIlhenny).
Phoca largha Pallas—Pallas’ Seal.
Four skulls and two skeletons of this seal were secured. The
cranial and dental peculiarities already pointed out by Dr. Mer-
riam hold good throughout the series, and the species is certainly
distinct from P. vitulina, which it represents on the Pacific coast of
the continent.
Mr. Mcllhenny’s measurements of the length of his specimens
44 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
are as follows: No. 22, 59 ins.; No. 30, 48-ins.; No. 31, 69 ins. ;
No..32, 61 ins.; No. 33, 56 ins.; No. 54; 69 ins.
Phoca fetida Fabr.—Ringed Seal.
Twenty-eight skulls and five skeletons of the Ringed Seal are in
the collection, together with several skins. A comparison of the
skulls with a series from the coast of Greenland fails to show any
taugible differences.
Thalarctos maritimus (Phipps)—Polar Bear,
One skeleton and five skulls.
Putorius arcticus Merriam—Tundra Weasel.
Four skins of this species were obtained:
Length. Tail. Hind Foot.
115. hi OeteberO 1897 ee ee 378mm. 147 46
150. of, December 28, 1897, . . 406 127 44
173. co, February 11, 1898,. © - 399 127 46
119%, (Si, NMC ROGOc, mae aren ee 323 = 47
The first three are white, the last one brown, with the belly pale
yellow slightly tinged ochraceous, (a mingling of the primrose and
Naples yellow of Ridgway’s Nomenclature of Colors).
The deep black tip to the tail measures 67.2 mm.
The skull of No. 115 measures as follows: Basilar length 44;
mastoid breadth 22.2; breadth of postorbital processes 15; orbital
breadth before postorb. proc. 11.8; orbital breadth behind do. 11;
last molar to foramen magnum 29; palate 18.
Putorius rixosus eskimo subsp. noy.
Five specimens of this interesting little animal were secured and
an additional skull showing the milk dentition. The measure-
ments are as follows:
Length. Tail. Hind Foot.
32k. 6, June 21> 1008 26 alee 204mm. 28 20
Seo: is, ane 20; 1808. ie fc 230 31 22
Sep suned{, 1896 .~ la. es 180 24 16
aoe pedune 14 d808- . ee 178 22 19
848. 2, July 25,1898, . . .. 184 25 23
When Mr. Outram Bangs aud Dr. Merriam prepared their
excellent monographs of American Weasels, there was no good
series of Least Weasels from the far North, and it is therefore not
1900. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 45
surprising that the present form was not recognized. On first
examination I took it to be P. rivosus, but a comparison with the
type which was kindly loaned by Mr. Bangs showed at once that
it belonged to a well-marked race, though evidently allied to that
form. Mr. Bangs has since compared some of the above speci-
mens with other examples of P. rixosus in his collection, and con-
firmed my views. He further states that it needs no comparison
with P. nivalis of northern Europe, though lack of specimens
leaves us uncertain as to what its relation to the Least Weasel of
Siberia may be. As no form has yet been described from the latter
country, however, no complication in nomenclature will result.
The type specimen of P. rixosus eskimo, No. 848, Coll. E. A.
Mellhenny, 2, July 25, 1898, Pt. Barrow, Alaska, is brown,
with a tinge of reddish, being intermediate between Prout’s brown
and walnut brown of Ridgway’s Nomenclature of Colors. It is
much duller than P. rivosus, which is ‘‘ burnt umber to Vandyke
brown.’’ ‘The other specimens are still duller than the type, the
extreme specimen, No. 826, being almost drab.* These are per-
haps younger individuals. P. rivosus eskimo has a shorter tail
than true P. rivosus, and rather larger feet.
The skull has the same strong sagittal ridge as P. rivosus, but is
in every way larger. The measurements in mm. are appended:
Pe ai | vi :
Oo o | o gq
a ai/42 2/3 8) os
Alesse ee liss:| ae | =
7 a S | So | ove Sa Sr
no o aby Rea | aaa, | oe my
a = am | mom | am CA &
eo fea) : | et hi= = °
= ree) |e eat ee || elt A
fl | Be lee eal ee |
3 Ce eae ta Shee eo | os
a % Ze hen) Pas =
3 & jo) o | oy i) 8
ea) a cv | a es ¥
P. rizosus (type), 2, No. |
GAD BAN GSerie = = ej se - 5 | 13.4 7.5 | 5.5 11
P. rizosus eskimo (type), | |
Q, No. 848... 29, | 15.4 | 93,8 | 8&2 |, 20 | 121
P. rixosus eskimo, a : No.
She) oo SE OOO SO ODN 35. LZ jfile Oee Oson | ce | 14-4
A specimen of this race in pure white winter pelage is in the
collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia,
obtained at Bethel, Alaska, by J. H. Romig.
5 Cf. Ridgway’s Nomenclature.
46 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
Canis occidentalis Rich.—Timber Wolf.
One skeleton (female) and one skull (male) were obtained, the
latter from some distance inland. The female measured as follows:
No. 220. 2, March, 1898. Length 1,550 mm.; tail 430; hind foot
298; ear 126; girth 852; height 765.
While I am not at all prepared to consider the relationships of
the large Wolves of North America, I append a table of measure-
ments of skulls in the collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences,
Philadelphia, and of the two Alaskan specimens above mentioned:
|
|
& || | sf | 82) 88) s2
go 21) el) Borla) aed
Bol & | 3. SB) es) ssl eet.
= e s 6 | 8§| 58| 8} 3
\3| 8/8 | 8 | &s|az| 78) 3
P= dean ees al | a am] | Bl ee
‘2,260 (A.N.S.), Missouri..... 200) 134 pay ail 5 |} 39} 91) 209
2,262 (A.N.S.), Pennsylvania 205| 130} 64] 53 | 42| 37] 95 | 118
2,261 (A.N.S.), Pennsylvania) 208; 122) 64} 57 44 | 42) 93 {117
2,256 (A.N.S,), Germany....| 212 | 198] 67 | 57 44) 43) 96 | 115
| |
2,253 (A.N.S.), Sweden...... 212} 126] 68} 55 41 | 41; 95 |118
2,254 (A.N.S.), Sweden...... 220) 142) 66 Se. ieee, | So PLS ee
2,266 (A.N.S.), LZ. gigas
Towns., Columbia River) 236) 151} 72 | 7 54 | 49 | 108 | 130
220 (McI.), Point Barrow...) 222| 144) 65 |65(?)| 49 | 38 | 106 | 125
297 (McI.), Point Barrow. . .| 224] 138] 63 | 65 50.) 41. | 303.)
Vulpes lagopus Linn.—Arctic Fox.
Seventeen specimens were obtained, six skins, four with skulls;
two skeletons and nine separate skulls.
Five adult specimens measured as follows in mm. :
Length. Tail. Hind Foot.
142. 2, November 1, 1897,. . . . 9938 408 126
143. co, November 1, 1897, . < . .« “948 S68" Iss
153. co’, December, 1897, . . . . 1020 408 152
SS0ld, GUNG Selous. S . a ome 926 356 175
Sols .<.June 21, 1898, :. << Jo. cee coe ghee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 47
A pup, No. 832, 3%, June 21, 1898, measures about 300 mm.
in Jength. It is of a general plumbeous color, lighter beneath with
a dark dorsal area spreading out on the flanks. The face and feet
have a number of scattered white hairs. The two summer adults
are in very ragged pelage, the female is almost entirely covered
with a thick, somewhat matted fur like coat, and here and there
all over the body are scattered long white hairs left from the win-
ter coat. The full summer hair seems to be only just appearing.
The male specimen is more advanced and the dark hairs of the
summer pelage are conspicuous. The general color of both speci-
mens is the same, though the tints of the male are brighter.
The whole head above and below and a broad dorsal band are dull
brown (between the seal and clove brown of Ridgway), this color
also spreads over the flanks and shoulders, and down the outside of
the legs to their extremities as well as on the upper surface of the
tail. The sides, belly and inside of the legs are dull, bufty white,
passing to vinaceous on the breast and along the edge of the
dorsal band. The tips of the ears are white and a number of
white hairs are scatterd over the face. The brown hairs which are
appearing in the wooly pelage of the back are tipped and ringed
with buff
The winter specimens are in pure white, very long pelage; at the
end of the tail the gray under fur is visible, but elsewhere it can
only be seen by separating the white hairs to their very bases.
Compared with a series of Arctic foxes from Greeniand, the
skulls collected by Mr. McelIlhenny show conclusively that they
belong to a different geographic race. They are larger and heavier
than the Greenland specimens, and the audital bulle are more
divergent posteriorly.
Messrs. Hamilton and Bonhote have recently (Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist., April, 1898, p. 287) separated the Arctic Fox of Spitz-
bergen from that of the European continent as V. /. spitzber-
genensis, and associate with it the Greenland form. From lack of
material they were unable to decide upon the relationship of the
American continental animal, though they suggested that it would
prove identical with that of Europe.
Being without Old World material for comparison, I am equally
unable to settle the point, but from size alone I should endorse
their views.
48 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
The statement that both forms occur in Greenland seems very
unlikely, and I should rather suggest that the large ‘‘ Davis Strait *’
examples came from the western side of the strait. The measure-
ments of the Alaskan skulls and a series of Greenland specimens in
the Academy’s collection give the following averages:
: g wi 4 :
3 g g g
S z= ASS a ie | oS
rn us| o13S 6/3nu0 | 2 &
oD & ae |) Son | Se aa
of & rb an, | e&eo Sz) ae
i > = ro) } oe Rey - Se
o 2S foo] a RS ie erH ead [i
ra] = OF | SOx | Box | aa
K S SO | 45 | S02 | Soe | oo ~
s 9g (o) ~ ter im QO 2g o
= ° S OU ee OFS. OO) Socal Ries
I a i es esc ps, Wes =
a) Sy || -¥ es oo Fe, | a
Greenland, males...... mm} 115 672] 46: 1} 332 27 23 53 | 60
Alaskan, males........ “ POL Toe |AV soi aco 25 54 | 63
| |
Greenland, females..... ‘‘ | 100) 60 | 43 | 28 | 24 22 | 46 | 52
Alaskan, females....... N15 | 20") 45: 16334| 28 23 52) |) GE
Lynx canadensis mollipilosus subsp. noy.—Arctie Lynx.
A single male Lynx was obtained at Wainwright Inlet, Pt.
Barrow, November, 1897, which seems to be subspecifically differ-
ent from the true Lynx canadensis, and may be described as
follows:
Type No. 141. Coll. E. A. McIlhenny. Browner and less gray
than true Lynx canadensis, with a very dense, soft, woolly pelage.
Skull decidedly narrower, higher and more arched than L. eana-
densis, and much more constricted across the frontals and between
the orbits, the postorbital processes are conspicuously more slender.
Measurements.—Total length 1,040 mm.; tail vertebra 150;
hind foot 260 (approx. ).
The skull measurements compared with those of true L. cana-
densis and an intermediate specimen from British Columbia in the
collection of Mr. Outram Bangs are given in the following table :
a
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 9
| |
| a | wi an wo | ; ro)
co | o o o | gq | =
ome ieee st Ay | Ss
a] S | s * gw Bla I Sq | 3 BS)
alee et x 3 6/8. S|$a5| nb] a 3
rh | 8S | mes jooelotEg! a| Ss S
| a | w isa) | o D HMma,|/=n,| = | fy =
Sy ol esi _- 2 | 6m mee Rm s
oF aa OME Pecan erties «ier ttn |e ral aS | ef ace
EI nS os OF HOH ADH r= | °
ae la 28\go8] & 3
he Pw} 3 oO 42 |\S20/\35055)| »O re eg (oe
a a g FOL i ee et ee | > |) S>
= ae | fe | oO }2 cla oo] es 0 &
I =} ° So \H 8) 6) OS oo
R [S) ao | ale) RDliS n ke =| q
a 5 | Ss oN S| io) iS) ® 5)
ies) (2) N = 4 | 4 ov & H 4
| |
L. can. mollipilosus, No. | |
141 (McI.) Alaska, mm.} 113.5 | 124, |......| 56.2 |......| 28 38 70. | 49.2 | 90.5
L. can. mollipilosus, (in- |
termediate), No.“9,059 | |
(Bangs), Brit. Columbia] 107.6 | 121.4] 90.2 | 53.6 | 54.8 | 28. 38.4 | 67.6 | 47.2 | 86.2
L.- canadensis, No. 7,259 |
(Bangs), Maine........ 105.6 | 118.8 By 55.4 60.4 | 30.8 | 38.2 | 68. 48.2 | 85.4
This is evidently a northwestern form of L. canadensis, and
extends southward to British Columbia, as the specimen above
referred to from Sumas, B. C., is much more nearly allied to it
than to true L. canadensis. Alberta specimens in Mr. Bangs’
collection, on the other hand, are nearer to L. canadensis, though
showing a slight tendency toward L. mollipilosus. I am particularly
indebted to Mr. Outram Bangs for his courtesy in examining and
comparing the Alaskan specimen, and in placing in my hands a
description and measurements of his British Columbia specimen, as
well as in loaning his fine series of Lynx skulls. |
50 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
A DESCRIPTION OF MICROBDELLA BIANNULATA WITH ESPECIAL
REGARD TO THE CONSTITUTION OF THE LEECH SOMITE.
BY J. PERCY MOORE.
Perhaps the most noteworthy of a number of annelids collected
in the mountain region of North Carolina during the summer of
1898 is the little leech about to be deseribed. The form appears
to be rare, as it was met with but once. On this occasion an even
dozen were found attached in a close cluster to the axillary and
pectoral regions of a large Desmognathus nigra. As the morpho-
logical interest attaching to these leeches was at once recognized
(though unfortunately not until all had been killed), special efforts
were made to add to the supply. Notwithstanding that several
hundreds of the salamander host were examined, the examples first
collected remain unique. The locality is a mountain stream on
the Yonahlossee road, at an elevation exceeding 3,500 feet. In
about one-half or more of the specimens the gastric ceca were
distended with blood, apparently derived from the salamander on
which they were found. During life they were sluggish, and
remained huddled together in a contracted state, making but little
attempt to creep about or even to extend themselves.
Falling naturally within the limits of the Glossiphonide, this
is, I think, the smallest species of that family which has been
discovered, the length of sexually mature individuals in a half-
extended condition being only from four to five millimeters. But
of much greater interest is the, up to the present time, entirely
novel structure of the complete somites, none of which present
more than two well-defined external rings and whose internal
relations are such as to elucidate several points affecting the value
and limitations of the typical leech somite. The Chinese leech
Toriz mirus Blanchard (’98) is scarcely larger than the salaman-
der leech and approaches it very closely in the external structure
of the somites, which are biannulate dorsally and triannulate
ventrally. Nothing is yet known of its internal anatomy. A fur-
1900. ] PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF 51
ther study of Torix may render unnecessary the establishment of
the following genus:
MICROBDELLA gen. nov.
The complete somites each consist externally of two annuli, a
smaller posterior, and a larger anterior, which bears the metameric
sensillz on its posterior part and the nephridiopores on its anterior
part. There are five pairs of testes, of which the last is enlarged.
Intersegmental septa are well developed between many of the
somites.
Microbdella biannulata sp. nov. Pl. VI.
Description.—The body is strongly depressed and sharp at the
margins, though less so than in many parasitic species of Glossi-
phonia, etc. The suckers, and more especially the posterior one,
are large even for a species of parasitic habit. Measurements are.
of no great value, as the proportions vary so much with the degree
of extension or contraction or according to the amount of food
contained in the stomach, but the specimen figured, which had the
exca only moderately filled, and was about two-thirds extended,
had the following measurements :
Length 6.3 mm. ~
Greatest width (XV) 2 mm.
Greatest depth (XVII) .6 mm.
Diameter of acetabulum 1.4 mm.
Of course the species may reach a larger size than that attained
by the type specimens, as among leeches sexual maturity is no
indication of full growth, but if these specimens were found in
their normal habitat this seems improbable.
The large size of the posterior sucker (PI. VI, figs. 1, 2 and 3)
is an excellent adaptation for retaining a hold on the slippery skin
of a salamander, and the region of the body to which the leeches
were found fixed is that which would afford them almost the best
protection, and from which they would be least likely to be swept
away when the host is actively swimming or when it burrows
amongst shingle and pebbles, as is the habit of its kind. The
anterior sucker is not expanded: laterally, but its posterior margin
-is largely free and mobile (figs. 2 and 3).
The small mouth is situated in the anterior part of the ventral
surface of the sucker, apparently in somite II (fig. 2, m). Al-
52 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
most immediately dorsal to it, and in the posterior half of somite
III, is a conspicuous median spot of black (really dark brown
when strongly illuminated in sections) pigment in which the two
eyes are embedded close together (figs. 1 and 3, ¢). So intimately
united are they that they can be resolved only in good sections.
They have the typical structure. The male pore is between somites
XI and XII. This opening (figs. 2 and 3, %) is large and con-
spicuous and is frequently rendered still more obvious by the
partial eversion of the atrium. The much smaller female pore
(figs. 2 and 3, 2) lies in somite XII in a line with the furrow
which separates the major and minor annuli, although the furrow
itself is not usually continued so far onto the ventral surface. In
the usual position on the dorsal surface just above the acetabulum,
the rather Jarge anus is situated; it lies behind or partly within
somite XX VII (figs. 1 and 3, a).
Sixteen pairs of nephridial pores (figs. 2 and 5, np) have been
definitely located on the ventral surfaces of the corresponding
number of somites from VII to XXII inclusive. A seventeenth
pair was sought, but not found, on somite XXIII, but owing
to the proximity of this region to the acetabulum the integument is
here much wrinkled, and they might readily have been overlooked
in the several specimens examined. In the middle region of the
body the pores are distinctly visible in surface views, and in sec-
tions the entire series can be readily traced, although the vesicles
are so small that they rarely extend through more than two or
three transverse, or twice that many longitudinal sections.
Their position in the somite is of greater interest. The two pores
of each pair are separated in the example figured by a distance
which is approximately equal to one-half of the entire width of
the body, but this distance necessarily varies with the shape of
the body resulting from the greater or less distension of the gas-
tric cca. Antero-posteriorly they lie a little cephalad of the
middle of the major annulus, their position being often marked by
a very faint groove, which may extend nearly the width of the body.
The typical complete somites (figs. 1, 2 and 3) of this genus, as
previously stated, consist of two distinct annuli, but these are gen-
erally sharply defined only on the dorsal surface and even here the
furrows which separate them are much less deep than those sepa-
rating successive somites. Ventrally the interannular furrows are
1
2
Vv
oO
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
complete on a few of the anterior somites (VI to VIII, or there-
abouts) only (fig. 2). Elsewhere they are much interrupted or
extend only a little way mesiad from the margin. Not infre-
quently in longitudinal sections of contracted specimens a slight
depression indicates the presence of traces of a faint furrow sug-
gestive of incipient subdivision of the major annulus. This may
occur not on the ventral side only, as noted above, but also dor-
sally, and always anterior to the line of sensille. The complete
somites are, however, always strictly biannulate above and in most
cases practically uniannulate below.
The metameric sensillz (figs. 1 and 2) are rather small, and their
arrangement could be worked out only partially in surface views of
alcoholic specimens; the gaps were completed after the study of
sections. In figs. 1 and 3, the rows of small circles, which do not
accurately indicate the relative sizes of the several sense organs,
show the typical distribution as finally determined. On fig. 2
those sensillz only are shown which were seen in a single surface
view, and they are represented as too large. They were found
in sections in corresponding positions of other somites. but were not
plotted. The dorsal median and inner lateral series are the best
developed and, in fact, the sensillze of these rows are the only ones
which certainly have the typical structure, the others very fre-
quently lacking the clear vitreous cells. It is worthy of comment
in connection with Whitman's suggestion of the homology of these
vitreous cells with epidermal glands that cells of the latter charac-
ter are frequently associated with these smaller sensille. The six
dorsal sensillz occur constantly in all of the material examined,
but the marginal organs are sometimes missing from one or more
of the middle somites, and constantly so from somites I, II and
III, and from two or three cf the preanal somites, at least they
could not be detected in sections. Of the small and inconspicu-
ous ventral sensillz, but two series were found on each side, whose
position suggests the median and outer lateral. They are not
entirely constant, even on the middle body region, one or more not
infrequently being absent from a somite. The twelve sensille of
-each somite form a ring, the two halves of which are widely sepa-
rated by a median interspace which is somewhat wider ventrally
than dorsally. This ring encircles the major annulus half-way
between the nephridiopores and the posterior margin of the annu-
54 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF 1900.
lus. There are nineteen (Nos. V to XXIII inclusive) complete
somites of the character just described, except, of course, that
the first two and apparently the last lack nephridiopores.
Somites of a simpler character are found at both the anterior
and posterior ends of the animal. At the anterior end they are
related to the sucker (figs. 1 and 3). Somite V, the first of the
biannulate ones, is much crowded ventrally by the posterior mar-
gin of the sucker, which is constituted of somite IV. The sub-
division of the latter somite into rings is evident on the dorsal
aspect only, where the shallow furrow fades and disappears a short
distance from the median line, and is very faint at the margins.
The line of sensillee is placed much closer to the middle of the
whole somite than is the case in the biunnulate somites and the
marginal pair is absent. In somite III all trace of subdivision into
rings is wanting, the inner and outer lateral sensille lie exactly
along the middle of the one simple ring, while the median pair
have risen to the importance of eyes, which have moved to the
posterior margin of the somite. Somite II is also a simple undi-
vided ring, as much narrower than III as the latter is narrower
than IV. Its anterior bounding furrow is so shallow as to sepa-
rate it only imperfectly from the prostomium. But two pairs of
distinct sensillee remain on this somite, being those of the inner
lateral and median series.
On the prostomium (figs. 1 and 2) anterior to somite II is found
a pair of median dorsal sensillee which are the only ones which
can certainly be referred to the segmental series. This region has,
therefore, been designated as somite I, a value which was first
determined for it by Apathy (’88), and later, and on better
grounds, by Whitman (’92). Other sense organs there are which
appear suspiciously like still additional segmental organs placed
anterior to those last described and sometimes separated from them
by the faintest of transverse grooves. The possibility of an addi-
tional rudimentary somite in this region is suggested by these
appearances, and is somewhat strengthened by indications that the
brain contains four more lobes or capsules than are necessary to
satisfy the requirements of the number of somites counted. In
the absence of decisive evidence, these somewhat uncertain indica-
tions have been disregarded for the present, and in the tentative
enumeration of the metameres here adopted, the system of Whit-
or
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 5
man (’92), based as it is on a careful and exhaustive analysis of
the nervous system of Glossiphonia, has been followed. If the
material were available for a similarly exhaustive study of Microb-
della, the number of preocular somites might be augmented. The
question of the constitution of this region must, I think, be re-
‘garded as still open. Although recent work has been tending
toward the establishment of a typical number of segments for all
leeches a great many genera still remain to be examined with
requisite attention to the details. It is quite possible that leeches
may vary, as all other segmented animals vary. New somites may
have been added within the history of the group, just as new annul
are added when the needs of greater mobility require. On the
other hand, it is even more probable that the process of reduction
of the number of somites below that found in primitive annelids
may have continued after the establishment of the Hirudinean type,
and have progressed further in some forms than in others.
The first departure from the biannulate type of somite at the
posterior end occurs at somite XXIV, in which two rings can be
detected only at the margins (figs. 1 and 3). The dorsal sensillz
are all present. Somite XXV is commonly a simple ring, but in
the example figured (fig. 1) presented an excellent example of the
spiral variation of segmentation. On the left margin a small par-
tial annulus appears anterior to the larger one, while on the right
side the latter is alone present. A very interesting circumstance
concerns the position of the sensillz on this somite. On the left
side they are placed nearer to the anterior than to the posterior
margin of the larger annulus, while on the normal somites, in which
the relative position of the two rings is reversed, the sensille lie
toward the posterior margin of the annulus. The next two
somites are represented by simple rings, of which the first, con-
stituting somite X X VI, is united ventrally to XXV, while XX VII
is similarly coalesced with the postanal somites. Somite XX VII
bounds the anus in front and may be more or less cut into by it.
The anus is succeeded by two rings which are separated from
each other and from somite X XVII only dorsally. As both bear
metameric sensille they must represent somites XXVIII and
XXIX. A portion of this last-mentioned somite combined with
five entire somites constitute the posterior sucker. These somites
are not distinguished externally, but their number was determined
56 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
by the number of ganglia in the posterior mass. Leaving out of
account the possible rudimentary anterior somite the whole num-
ber counted is 34, a number which was first determined accurately
by Whitman (’92), and is now generally attributed to all leeches.
Structural features of interest are not confined to the exterior.
but some important characters are presented by the internal ana-
tomy. In the first place, the intersegmental septa, which, as a
_ result of the reduction of the cclome, are so much modified and
shifted in most leeches, are clearly represented by strong trans-
verse sheets of vertical muscle fibres corresponding, except toward
the ends of the worm, exactly with the external segmentation.
Some of the septa are shown diagrammatically in figs. 4 and 5, s,
where they are seen to begin on the ventral side exactly at the
intersegmenta) furrows, though dorsally they tend to shift their
attachments with the muscular and integumentary layers slightly
forward to the smaller annulus of the preceding somite. Except
where they are interrupted by the passage of organs continuing
from somite to somite, the alimentary canal, principal blood yes-
sels, longitudinal sinuses, genital ducts and nephridia, these septa
are complete. ©The ccelome has been reduced as usual and the
various organs are packed around with the usual parenchymatous
tissues, glands, etc., but there are very few dorso-ventral muscle
fibres except in relation to the posterior sucker. The dorso-ven-
tral musculature of the middle region of the body is almost en-
tirely represented by these septa, which have retained a simple
structure and a primitive arrangement almost as definite and regu-
lar as in the Oligocheta.
Unfortunately no fresh material was available for a complete
study of the nervous system by the more refined neurological
methods. But by dissection, after maceration, of the preserved
material, I succeeded in isolating in two examples almost the entire
central nervous system, with the exception of a part of the pos-
terior ganglionic aggregation. From these preparations and from
sections the general features were determined and are represented
on a small scale in fig. 5. The similarity to what is known of
the nervous systems of other leeches is sufficiently evident. The
anterior complex is composed of at least six and not improbably
of seven neuromeres. In this region but six neuromeres were found
by Whitman (’92) in Glossiphonia and other leeches, and by
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. i
Bristol (98) in Herpobdella. The determination of the exact
number in Microbdella is uncertain, but is based upon a count of
the number of neuromeric lobes or capsules after Whitman’s
method. In each of the two dissections a few of these were dis-
placed or broken, but by comparing them with each other and
with sections the whole number appeared to be four greater than
in either of the genera mentioned above. ‘The distribution of
the nerves of this region could not be worked out. However, I
hope to be able later to state the exact number of metameres in
Microbdella.
The seventh neuromere (still following Whitman’s system of
enumeration ) lies very close to the subcesophageal ganglionic mass.
Then follow in the ventra] chain sixteen more widely separated
ganglia arranged along a partially double nerve cord in the usual
manner. Each of these ganglia lies principally in the major, but
also partly in the minor annulus of itssomite. Those from XXIV
posteriorly become more and more closely crowded, the neuromeres
XXVIII to XXIX being especially intimately associated and prac-
tically part of the posterior complex, which is made up of very
closely packed neuromeres ending as in other leeches with No.
ROOMY, (fig: 5.)
Typical neuromeres of two complete somites (XIT and XIIT)
are represented in figure 8. The six groups of nerve cells, each
contained in a delicate nucleated capsule, so characteristic of the
leech neuromere, are present. Four of these are arranged in pairs
on the sides of the cord and the remaining two placed tandem on
its ventral surface. Two nerve roots arise on each side from be-
tween the paired capsules and rather toward its ventral surface.
They are bound closely together in a common sheath, so that they
appear as a single nerve, on the surface of which lies a large
(Leydig’s?) cell. After traversing the ventral sinus, and on
entering the body walls, the two nerves completely unite, a second
large cell being present at this point. From the place of union
three nerve trunks arise, of which the anterior and larger (fig. 8,
» 1) supplies the ventral portion of the larger annulus. It divides
into an anterior and a posterior branch and I see no evidence what-
ever that these extend beyond the limits of the annulus in which
they originate, but they were not traced to their end organs. A
second branch (fig. 8, v 2) supplies the ventral part of the smaller
58 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
annulus. The third (fig. 8, d) arises from the dorsal surface of
the enlargement formed by the union of the two roots. 1t passes
dorsad through the parenchyma, and without doubt corresponds
with the dorsal branch of the third nerve of Glossiphonia. * In
dissections it was frequently broken off short, but in some cases was
sufficiently well preserved to show that it splits into a number of
branches after proceeding a considerable distance as a single trunk.
In sections this main nerve could be traced upward as far as the
dorsal longitudinal muscles among which it was lost.
In some respects the arrangement of the nerves of Microbdella
resembles that of Herpobdella (Bristol, ’98) more closely than
Glossiphoniau. _ The attempt to point out homologies without
having traced these nerves to their final distribution is no doubt
open to criticism, but a comparison of the nerve trunks in the two
cases is almost as convincing as though this had been done. There
is little reason for doubting that the two nerve roots of Microbdella
correspond to the two trunks of Herpobdella. The anterior nerve
of the former corresponds with the anterior nerve of the latter,
the one which supplies the ventral surface of the first ring of its
own somite together with the fourth and fifth rings of the preced-
ing somite. But Bristol has shown that this nerve is the homo-
logue of the first and second nerves of the neuromere of Glosso-
phonia, which agrees with the subdivision of the anterior nerve of
Microbdella into two branches. The posterior nerve of Herpob-
della is essentially like that of Glossiphonia ; it gives off branches
to the ventral surface of the second ring of the somite in Glossi-
phonia, or to its homologue, the second and third rings of Herpob-
della. In both genera this nerve also gives off a dorsal branch
which is equivalent to the dorsal nerve of Microbdella. Every
important element of the neuromere of Glossiphonia and Herpob-
della is, therefore, represented in Microbdella.
The male reproductive organs (figs. 4 and 5) consist of five
pairs of testes (t 1-5), of which the fifth is much larger than the
others, and lies partly in somite XX, but chiefly in XIX. The
remaining four are situated beneath as many gastric czeca in somites
XV to XVIII. The majority of species of Glossiphonide have
six pairs of testes, which are commonly described as_ being
situated in somites XIII to XVIII, and although there is some
discrepancy in position it may be suggested that the number preva-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 59
lent in the family may have arisen by the subdivision of the fifth
pair in Microbdella, or by a similar process affecting the anterior
pair of an ancestral form. The primitive condition may be repre-
sented by the elongated saccular testes of Archwobdella (Kowa-
levsky, ’962 ), of which there is a single pair, by the subsequent
subdivision of which the five or six pairs of the Glossiphonide may
have been derived.’ Still further subdivision would lead to the
nine or ten pairs of Hirudo, the ten to twelve pairs of Hamopis
and finally to the numerous small testes of the Herpobdellide,
which are so beautifully arranged to meet the structural condi-
tions to which they must accommodate themselves. Increase in the
number of testes is an accompaniment of progressive development
in at least one series of leeches and is associated with increasing
length of body and many correlated changes in the sperm ducts.
Another feature of the testes of Microbdella is the unusually
large size, though this is not unique, of the sperm funnels (figs. 6
and 7). They are connected with the anterior, dorsal, mesial part
of the wall of each testis and consist of cells of relatively large
size. In vertical section they appear to be more or less columnar,
but when cut tangentially are seen to be really flattened, some-
wnat plate-like cells set on edge and arranged concentrically around
the mouth of the funnel. The marginal cells of the funnel pass
somewhat abruptly into continuity with the excessively flattened
epithelium of the testes which exhibits ciliated elevations at points
corresponding to the positions of the nuclei. Toward the centre of
the funnel the cells become higher, first cubical and then elevated
and compressed, then again cubical as they pass through the
mouth into the neck and finally change into the flattened epi-
thelium of the vas efferens (fig. 6, ve). The free surfaces of all
of the funnel cells are ciliated. On the more prominent parts of
the funnel this ciliated area is continuous, but in the narrow neck
becomes first interrupted by naked spaces and then reduced to
small isolated patches of larger cilia. This latter condition be-
comes more emphasized within the vas efferens, where a small
bunch of cilia arises on each cell opposite its nucleus. The vasa
1 The posterior part of the testes has already become lobed and partly sub-
divided, so that the actual primitive condition has to this extent been lost.
In this and some other features of its organization Archwobdella approaches
the Herpobdellide.
60 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
efferentia (fig. 5, ve) pass vertically dorsad close to the basal part
of the anterior surfaces of the gastric cca, and in close contact
with the posterior faces of the septa which limit their respective
somites anteriorly. They unite above in a common vas deferens
for each side. Unlike the vasa efferentia, the common sperm ducts
(vasa differentia) are lined by a simple flattened non-ciliate epi-
thelium. Their course is a perfectly straight one, without tortu-
osity or modification of any kind, just along the inner surface of
the longitudinal muscular layer and exactly over the line of sperm
funnels, as far forward as somite XII.
The vasa differentia finally terminate in the conspicuous sperm
sacs (figs. 4 and 5, ss), which are modified enlargements of the
sperm ducts, their walls being characterized by a strongly developed
muscular layer and a thin lining epithelium. They have the form
of a dilated tube folded into S-shape, and occupy somites XI and
XII on each side of the csophagus. The sperm sacs are
not succeeded by narrow tubes (ducti ejaculatorii) of consid-
erable length as in Glossiphonia, but open immediately through
narrow constrictions into glandular sacs (figs. 4 and 5, pg). The
latter rise vertically upward from the ventral ends of the sperm
sacs, and after bending somewhat sharply caudad, become con-
stricted and open into the glandular horns of the atrium (figs. 4
and 5, at). These horns are the terminations of the paired
sperm ducts, and have a structure very similar to the section of
the ducts which immediately precedes them. Each has a very
‘narrow lumen and thick glandular walls. They may be consid-
ered as together constituting the prostates. The median atrium
¢at) which receives the openings of the sperm ducts, is a thin-
walled muscular globoid sac, capable of being everted through the
male pore—its external opening. The sperm sacs are packed full
of mature spermatozoa in all of the specimens examined.
There is nothing especially noteworthy about the ovaries, which,
within their sacs, are closely approximated and form together a
massive organ lying between the nerve cord, alimentary canal and
series of testes. They extend from somite XII to somite XVIII,
and at the anterior end diverge from each other and form a ring
through which passes the nerve cord, ventral to which they unite
at the common ovarian pore (figs. 4 and 5, ov).
The alimentary canal is nearly like that of other small Glossi-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 61
phonids. The protrusible pharynx (figs. 4 and 5, ph) extends” to
LX, extensible esophagus (w) to XIII, and the stomach thence to
XIX, where it joins the intestine (7). A pair of nearly solid
elongated glands are appended to the cesophagus in X (figs. 4 and
5, g). There are seven pairs of gastric czeca, of. which the first
six are small and simple and the seventh much. larger and saccu-
lated. They arise from the stomach within the major annuli of
the seven somites from XIII to XIX. The first (¢ 7) bends
cephalad somewhat sharply into somite XII, the next five are
confined by the septa within the limits of the somites in which
they arise, but they bend caudad more or less into the minor
annuli and usually terminate in a bulbous enlargement ( ¢ 4).
The seventh and last pair are continued through five somites,
developing sacculations in each (¢ 7); corresponding enlargements
also appear on the intestine.
Besides the position of the nephridiopores, which is described
above, the only point concerning the nephridia which is worthy of
comment relates to the funnels. These are very simple in struc-
ture, being composed of a single large cell. The vesicles into
which they empty are formed of a small number of rather large
cells. The funnels lie opposite to the outer ends of the cca,
‘toward their posterior dorsal surfaces, where they open into a sinus
which corresponds to the complex which Oka (’94) has described
in this region of Glossiphonia dorsal and mesiad to the lateral
longitudinal sinus. They lie wholly within the minor annuli
(fig. 5, f’).
Microbdella appears to be one of those leeches in which fertiliza-
‘tion is accomplished by the hypodermic injection of spermatozoa, a
process which has been so nearly demonstrated by Whitman
(792 ) for Placobdella plana. The evidence for this is found in
the presence of spermatozoa in the sinuses and internal tissues of
the body. The nephridial funnels and funnel vesicles are almost
always gorged with spermatozoa which have been taken through
the nephrostomata from the surrounding sinus. In several cases
spermatozoa were found within the ovarian sacs, either aggregated
in large masses or scattered among the ova. The presence of
compact masses of spermatozoa in the ovaries suggests that fertili-
zation may also be accomplished by the entrance of spermatophores
directly through the ovipores. The species is protandric.
62 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900°
‘ There is nothing striking or distinctive about the color of this
species. The body is translucent and speckled with scattered green
and brown pigment cells, the general effect of which is to give the
animal a pale olive green color.
The Leech Somite.—The facts contained in the foregoing descrip-
tion seem to me to point conclusively to a necessity for some modi-
fication of current views regarding the constitution of the typical
leech somite. Most text-books of zodlogy agree in stating of
leeches that external and internal metamerism do not correspond.
Except in so far as this means that the somites are externally
divided into rings which have no internal counterparts (a condition
which is also met with in many Oligocheta and Polycheta, in
which there is said to be agreement between internal and exter-
nal segmentation), this is not true of Microbdella, for in this leech
the metamerism of the exterior does correspond most exactly with
the arrangement of the internal organs in typical somites.
Let us reéxamine a typical somite. Externally its boundaries
are indicated by deep furrows which extend all around the body.
Between these intersegmental furrows the body wall is divided
into two distinct rings, which are only faintly, and in most cases
partially, indicated on the ventral surface. The first ring is the
larger and bears the metamerie sensille posteriorly and the neph-
ridiopores anteriorly. Internally well-developed dissepiments cor-
respond with the bounding furrows exactly on the ventral side
and nearly so on the dorsal. Each somite contains a ganglion of
the ventral chain from which arise nerves distributed solely within
the limits of that somite. There is complete agreement between
the neuromeres and external segmentation. In some of the seg-
ments the ducts of the testes are in contact with the anterior
septa, ceca of the alimentary canal occupy just the distance
between the two septa and nephridial funnels open within the
limits of one somite to pass into tubules which perforate the
following septum and open on the anterior part of the succeeding
somite. The external segmentation does, therefore, agree with
all of the principal internal systems in which metamerism is ex-
pressed.
If, adopting the current definition of a leech somite, we similarly
examine the organization of any leech which has been fully
described— Gilossiphonia, for example, as being one of the most
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 63
simple and best. known—the chief discrepancy is found to exist
between the arrangement of the nervous system and the groups of
rings which indicate the somites externally. The two anterior
rings of each somite are innervated by its own neuromere, and
its third by the immediately succeeding neuromere, or, as Whitman
C92) has stated it, the peripheral nerves of typical somites
“‘innervate three successive rings, the first and second of their
own segment and the third of the preceding segment. The dis-
tribution is thus triannulate and dimeric.’’ The body walls
have, so to speak, slipped one ring backward on the nervous sys-
tem or the nervous system one ring forward on the body walls.
Can it be possible that there is such a fundamental difference
between two genera of leeches of the same family as would exist
if both of the above interpretations are correct, and if not, which
of the two interpretations must be accepted ? An attempt to reply
to these questions necessitates a close comparison between typical
somites of the two genera. The most striking external difference
is that the somite of Glossiphonia is triannujate, while that of
Microbdella is only biannulate. As each has one ring bearing
metameric sensillz, the difference appears to be that Microbdella
has one less ring lacking segmental sense organs than has G/sssi-
phonia. There are no known external marks which constantly
belong to the latter rings throughout the different genera, but the
comparison of the nerve supply already given shows that the
second annulus of Microbdel/a finds its counterpart in the ring of
Glossiphonia which succeeds the sensilliferous one, for in the
former genus there is no ring which receives its nerve supply from
the succeeding neuromere, while the nerves which supply the
second annulus in the two genera have been shown to be homo-
logous.
The sensillze-bearing annuli of the two genera under comparison
resemble each other, in addition to the presence of the sense
organs, in containing the nerve ganglion and nephridiopores,’ and
according to the accepted interpretation in being the most anterior
of their somites. Without further examination it might therefore
be concluded that these rings are homologous, that the biannulate
? The description of Clepsine hollensis Whitman is mainly being fol-
lowed. In some other allied species the nephridiopores are on the boundary
between this and the preceding annulus.
64 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
somite is equivalent to the first and second rings of the triannulate
type, that the posterior ring of the latter is unrepresented in the
former, and that the want of a nerve supply from the succeeding
ganglion is correlated with its absence. But the sensills-bearing
annulus of Microbdella is not in all respects like that of Glossi-
phonia. In the first place itis much larger than its fellow-annulus
in the somite, while in Glossiphonia the annuli are of equal size or
the sensillze-bearing one somewhat smaller than its mates. It has
been repeatedly shown by Whitman and Apathy and by many
others in a great variety of leeches that all the annuli of a given
species of leech are not equivalent, that a single annulus toward
the end of the body may represent two or more annuli of a somite
in the middle region. Such annuli almost invariably indicate
their greater value by a larger size as compared with those adjacent.
This fact alone should make it evident that the sensille-bearing
annulus of Microbdella comprehends more than that of Gossi-
phonia. This additional part cannot be the middle annulus of
Glossiphonia, for this has already been shown to have its exact
counterpart, both in position and nerve supply, in the minor
annulus of Microbdella. Just as certainly does the posterior posi-
tion of the sensillze indicate a greater value for the part of the ring
in front than behind them and lead us to look for the missing
member in a more anterior position, and consequently within the
preceding somite of (Glossiphonia. Comparison of the nerve
supply locates it in the third annulus, for it will be remembered
that the anterior part of the larger annulus of Mierobdella is
supplied by a nerve homologous with the one which in Glossi-
phonia reaches into the preceding annulus. The major annulus of
Miecrobdella is equivalent, therefore, to the sensillee-bearing annulus
plus the one which precedes it in Glossiphonia; the first is repre-
sented approximately by that portion of the major annulus which
bears the sensillze and lies caudad of the nephridiopores and the
second by the cephalic portion. Occasionally a very faint groove
partially marks the boundary line.
If the limits of the somites of leeches have been hitherto cor-
rectly defined then Microbdella is a leech in which every somite
throughout almost its entire length has obviously given up its pos-
terior third to the following somite and absorbed the corresponding
third of the preceding somite, a suggestion which is so improbable
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 65
that it might almost be repudiated without examination. But the
fact that the entire bodily organization, and especially the distri-
bution of the nerves, point to the external metamerism of Microb-
della as fundamental is sufficient to dispel any lingering suspicion
with which we might be led to regard an animal which is very
small and parasitic, and therefore a likely subject for degenera-
tion. On the other hand, the lack of alignment between the
neuromeres and external segments as hitherto determined argues
forcibly against the current view. The interpretation of the
structure of Microbdella shows, therefore, that the sensillse-bearing
annulus is the middle and not the first of the triannulate and
quinqueannulate somites, and that we must look for agreement
between the distribution of the nerves and the external segmenta-
tion in all leeches.* That the neuromeres cannot be an absolute
criterion of the limits of all of the somites has, of course, been
shown by Whitman for Glossiphonia (’92), in which the peripheral
nerves of the anterior neuromeres shift and unite in such a man-
ner as to obscure their segmental value. But this fact does not
lessen their utility for determining the typical somites.
Since the above conclusions were reached about eighteen months
ago, I have examined many genera and species in order to apply this
new interpretation to their external segmentation, and in search of
corroborative evidence. The latter has been ample; but the details
are too voluminous for statement here and now. ‘That the new
standard of enumeration accords better with the facts and explains
away some of the difficulties now found in all families of leeches is
evident from the following general statements. The increasing sim-
plicity of the somites from the middle toward the ends of the body
becomes more gradual and regular; adjacent somites differ from
one another by seldom more than one ring, whereas under the
current system there are sudden jumps from five to three to one,
ete. Moreover the individual somites almost invariably repeat
the condition of the entire extremity in which they are located;
their distal ends present (especially when the whole number of
annuli is less than the typical number for the species) a less devel-
3 After this paper had been written and presented for publication, Castle
(Abstract of papers read at the New Haven meeting of the Morphological
Society, Science, February 2, 1900, p. 175) announced his arrival at pre-
cisely the same conclusion. It is a real pleasure to be able to furnish such
complete confirmation of results as carefully worked out as were Castle’s.
5
66 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
oped condition than their proximal. The necessity for splitting
rings—dividing the halves between two contiguous somites—practi-
cally disappears, for union of the rings of neighboring somites
consisting of more than a single annulus each, is exceedingly rare,
if indeed it ever occurs; division into somites is far more funda-
mental than divisicn into rings, which have no primary metameric
significance, and is never, or very rarely, obscured by the latter.
The shifting of the sensille back and forth on the ring which bears
them, as the balance of growth is thrown, with the splitting off of
new rings, first on one side, then on the other, takes place exactly
as it should if the present view is true, while it is inexplicable
upon that hitherto accepted, in fact, contradictory of it. The
same is true of many of the cases of spiral annulation and partial
annulation which have been studied; and none have been found to
favor the current view, while opposing the one here upheld. Very
curiously the left side of somite XXV of fig. 1, representing the
only important variation met with among the twelve examples of
this species, illustrates the last two statements. If the sensillz-
bearing annulus be really the first of all leeches, why does the
partial ring appear anterior to it, and why do the sensille of that
side move forward? If the sensille belong primarily to the
middle of the somite, the insertion of an anterior ring is per-
fectly natural und the change in position of the sensille the re-
sult of a readjustment of the ring to the new balance of growth.
The differences in the location of the nephridiopores in different
genera and families is a difficulty which others have recognized and
tried to explain as a result of shifting or the disappearance of
annuli. Upon the view here held the nephridiopores always fall
within the same region of the somite and have shifted back and
forth only within limits which might have been expected. The
change in the position of the septa during ontogeny appears to be
confirmatory, but this evidence is still rather obscure and unsatis-
factory. A better explanation of the position of the intermus-
cular nerve rings described by Bristol in Herpobdella seems to be
afforded.
But one‘ serious objection to the application of this neuromeric
* It has not been thought necessary to regard Blanchard’s (’98) determi-
nation of the large double annulus of Zoriz as the posterior one, as an objec-
tion. This conclusion was arrived at without any knowledge of the
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 67
standard has been met with. In certain genera of leeches both sex-
pores would fall within the limits of somite XII, whereas under
the current system the male pore is in XI and the female in XII.
This condition occurs very rarely outside of the family Herpob-
dellide, in which the sex pures are peculiarly liable to variation
both between species and among individuals of the same species.
Six out of seven North American species have them separated by
two rings. In European species they are from two to five rings
apart. In the genus Orobdella of Japan, Oka (’95) has described
a variable number of rings as intervening, but the distance amounts
to more than afullsomite. Still more remarkable are the individual
variations, among which it is not uncommon to find the two sperm-
ducts, instead of opening together, with distinct apertures sepa-
rated by one or even two full rings. These facts and others indi-
cate that the pores are shifting their positions and it is along this
line that a solution of the difficulty is being sought.
It is a matter of some morphological importance to find a
standard by which the leech somite may be correctly delimited,
and the present writer’s chief interest is connected with the possi-
bility which now exists for the first time, of making a detailed
comparison between the Hirudinean and Oligochzte somites, a
comparison which, it is believed, will do much to bring the two
groups closer together and to weaken the position which is still
adhered to by some eminent authorities that the Hirudinea were
Platyhelminthine in origin. How the general theory of metamer-
ism will be affected has not yet been considered.
The adoption of this standard will also necessitate the modifica-
tion of the generic formule which were proposed in my paper on
‘* Leeches of the National Museum’’ (’98). The theoretical for-
mula may remain the same for leeches with three annuli and over,
but the discovery of a more primitive biannulate form destroys
some of its significance, and the annuli which undergo most elab-
oration must now be designated as a 7 and a 3 instead of a 2 and
position of the nephridiopores or sensillz or other intrinsic data for the
determination of the limits of the somite. It is an assumption from the
accepted theory and practice. When Yoriz is studied by means of sections
it seems very probable that the nephridiopores will be found in the anterior
half and the sensillz on the posterior half of the double annulus. Should
this surmise prove to be incorrect, Zorix will probably present a serious
obstacle to the acceptance of the conclusions suggested by the structure of
Microbdella.
68 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
a 3, while a 2, which becomes the symbol for the middle sensillz-
bearing annulus, remains relatively stable.
The number of annuli into which typical somites are divided,
together with the number and degree of departures from this type
in a given form of leech have been much used in classification.
Whitman and Apathy especially have considered these characters
as of great phylogenetic significance. But the fundamental con-
ceptions of these two zodlogists regarding the meaning of the facts
belonging to the first-mentioned class are diametrically opposed.
Up to now leeches have been known whose complete somites con-
tained from three (two dorsally in Torix) to fourteen (twelve
according to Apathy’s count) annuli. Apathy (’88) believes that
the latter is the primitive number and that all other types have
been derived from this by a process of absorption and suppression
of those rings which have lost their functional importance in the
evolution of genera from a purely parasitic form to forms which
have become adapted to a variety of environments. Whitman
(90* and elsewhere) considers the triannulate type as the primi-
tive one from which the multiannulate somites of the Gnathob-
dellida are derived by a process of progressive fission and multipli-
cation of rings. The latter view seems to be most in accord with
the facts of embryology and comparative anatomy and has been
supported by several zodlogists, including the present writer.
It is well known that typical complete somites are absent from
the end regions of nearly all leeches, where they are represented
by somites which contain a smaller number of rings. Whitman,
Apathy, and I believe all other modern writers on the Hirudinea
are agreed that such somites, when of less than three rings, are the
result of a process of reduction, that uniannulate or biannulate
somites occurring in a typically triannulate leech have been derived
from the latter type of somite by a process which is essentially oue
of phylogenetic concrescence—a shrinking in size of the affected
rings, together with a smoothing out of the furrows which geneti-
cally separate them. The favorable argument seems to be derived
largely from analogy to other groups of segmented animals and it
must be admitted has seemed to explain the facts known up to the
present time. Whitman, who is the author of this hypothesis, has
formulated it as follows:
‘« All somites with less than three rings are abbreviated, and
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 69
all with more than three have been increased by the division of
one or two of the three primary rings. I have collected consider-
able evidence, which cannot be given here, to show that in the
evolution of Hirudo, it was the second and third rings that under-
went division, while the first remained undivided’’ (’92, p. 392).
Probably the authors of the opinions that the triannulate or
multiannulate somites represent the primitive types would admit
the probability of the occurrence of a uniannulate ancestor some-
where in the remote history of the Hirudinea, but evidently no
such form was looked for within the Jimits of the group. Blanch-
ard (98), to whose activity in systematic studies we owe the dis-
covery of so many important generic types of leeches, describes
the typical somite of Toriz-as biannulate with one ring subdivided
into two on the ventral surface. This type of somite he regards
as more primitive than that of Glossinhonia, and prophesies the
discovery of a uniannulate leech, a prophecy which Microbdella
so nearly fulfils. The discovery of a truly biannulate leech sheds
new light on the subject, and it seems very doubtful if Prof.
Whitman himself would explain this condition as a process of
abbreviation affecting all of the somites of the body, and most of
them in a perfectly similar manner and to an equal degree. The
variation shown in the somite X XV of fig. 1 affords, however, one
little bit of evidence for such a contention, for it is indeed very
curious that the only distinct attempt toward the separation of
annulus a 7 should occur in a somite which is in other respects of
simpler structure than the type. I have no explanation or excuse
to offer for this bit of wilfulness upon the part of my material. °
The crucial question is really which is the most primitive in struc-
ture, Glossiphonia or Microbdella. If the former shows evidence
in its general organization of standing nearer to the ancestral
Hirudinean stock, then the biannulate somite has probably been
derived by abbreviation of the triannulate. If Microbdella proves
to be the more generalized, the converse is probably true. In the
general description reason has been given for believing that the
latter is true. The evidence is found chiefly in the exact agree-
ment between the metameres as expressed internally and externally
® There is evidence that this and some similar variations may be the re-
sult of a conflict between immediate mechanical factors and hereditary
influences.
70 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
by the different systems of organs, and in the structure and arrange-
ment of the dissepiments, testes and nephridia. The few special-
ized characters are unimportant and easily explained. It is there-
fore concluded that Microbdella approaches nearer to and throws
light upon the characters of a primitive ancestral leech which
phylogenetically preceded the Glossiphonide, ete. The triannulate
somite of the latter has, therefore, been derived from a biannulate
somite. The derivation of the multiannulate from the triannulate
type is but the continuation of the general process of elaboration
begun earlier, and which affords a means of maintaining the flexi-
bility of the body as it increases in length.
The structure of Acanthobdella (Kowalevsky, ’96°), which is
a true annectant type between Hirudinea and Oligocheta, seems
to present a difficulty, as this leech appears to have quinqueannu-
late somites, but the discussion of this remarkable form can profit-
ably be postponed until the publication of Kowalevsky’s final
paper, which has not, I believe, yet appeared.
Microbdella also furnishes some data which seem to make it
sufficiently clear that in the development of the triannulate from
the uniannulate somite (if such a type actually existed), the latter
first became enlarged posterior to the segmental sense organs, a
posterior ring was then split oft which became the third (a 3).
The anterior part of the then biannulate somite grew and a furrow
was formed approximately in the plane of the nephridiopores, thus
producing the first ring (a 7) and leaving the sensille on the
second (a 2). Some direct evidence of an embryological nature,
and a considerable amount of collateral evidence derived from
comparative anatomy and relating chiefly to the relative positions
of the internal organs ina number of genera has been collected
in support of this view, but cannot be given here.
The conclusion arrived at that the triannulate has been reached
through the biannulate somite leads to one further consideration.
Are the uni- and biannulate somites which are so generally found
toward the ends of the body in nearly, if not quite, all leeches the
product of abbreviation as now universally admitted ? The answer
is in large part a corollary from the above conclusion, but the
very fact of the occurrence of one or several biannulate somites*
Such somites are not usually apparent by the current manner of
counting, as the larger rings have very often been interpreted as indicating
fusions of contiguous parts of neighboring somites.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ral
having all of the essential characteristics of the typical somite of
Microbdella in both the anterior and posterior ends of nearly all
leeches is in itself very significant. The argument then is the
same as that adopted by Whitman (’92) to show that the trian-
nulate somites of the Hirudinide are <<‘ type somites’’ and not
‘* abbreviated somites.’’ It is therefore believed that the smaller
number of rings embraced by the somites toward the ends of a leech’s
body is not due to their having been reduced from the condition
of complete somites, but that most of them represent phylogenetic
stages of development arrested or still in progress toward the com-
plete type. We may therefore read one part, and this no doubt
much garbled, of the story of a leech’s ancestry in the records of
its somites from the extremities toward the middle of its body.
There are, of course, other versions of this story which are recorded
elsewhere. It is not meant to be implied that the retrograde process
of abbreviation has never occurred in the differentiation of the genera
of leeches, as some almost certain cases of this are known, but it is
believed that they are infrequent and that the process has not
played anything like the important part which has been attributed
to it. Nor must it be supposed that a Jeech which presents a large
number of incomplete somites is regarded as necessarily primitive,
for it is recognized that specialization of somites may take place,
and has taken place, in other ways than by an increase in the
number of rings, for example, by a great development of segmen-
tal sense organs, as in the Hirudinide.
The difference (in respect to the number of component rings)
between somites of the middle and terminal regions of a leech’s
body is believed to have arisen phylogenetically by a process which is
more accurately described as one of centrifugal expansion and
elaboration rather than ‘‘ centripetal abbreviation.’’ The somites of
the middle region probably first increased in size and multiplied their
annuli and in this region the process has advanced the farthest.
From this centre the change has extended toward the ends, but
with gradually diminishing effect. The terminal somites, already
Specialized in other directions, might be positively lowered in
efficiency by any increase in length.
72 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
List oF PArers CITED.
Apathy, Stefan. ’88. Analyse ‘der ausseren Korperform der
Hirudineen. Mittheil. zool. Sta. Neapel, viii (1888), 155-232.
Blanchard, R. ’98. Noveau type d’Hirudinée (Torix mirus).
Bull. Scient. France et Belgique. xxviii (1898), 539-544.
Bristol, Charles L. ’98. The Metamerism of Nephelis. Jour.
Morph., xv (1898), 17-72.
Kowalevsky, A. ’°96%. Etude sur l’anatomie de |’ Archzobdella |
Esmontii de O. Grimm. Bull. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Petersbourg,
v (1896), 331-335. Comm. prélim.
Kowalevsky, A. ’96>. Etude sur l’anatomie de ]’ Acanthobdella
peledina. Comm. prélim. Bull. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Peters-
bourg, v (1896), 265-274.
Moore, J. Percy. ’98. The Leeches of the U. S. National
Museum. Pro. U. S. Nat. Mus., xxi (1898), 545-563.
Oka, <Asajiro. ’94. Beitrige zur Anatomie der Clepsine.
Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., lviii (1894), 79-151.
Oka, Asajiro. ’95. On Some New Japanese Land Leeches.
Jour. Coll. of Sci. Imp. Univ. of Japan, viii (1895), 275-306.
Whitman, C. O. ’86. The Leeches of Japan. Part I. Quar.
Jour. Micr. Sci., xxvi (1886), 317-416.
Whitman, C. O. ’90. Description of Clepsine plana. Jour.
Morph., iv (1890-91), 407-416.
Whitman, C. O. ’90%. Spermatophores as a means of Hypo-
dermic Impregnation. Jour. Morph., iv (1890-91), 361-405.
Whitman, C. O. ’92. The Metamerism of Clepsine. Festschr.
zu. 70ten Geburtstage R. Leuckarts (1892), 385-595.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE VI.
MICROBDELLA BIANNULATA.
Figs. 1, 2 and 3. Dorsal, ventral and lateral views, respectively.
of a full grown, partly extended specimen, showing the
chief external characters. X (about) 15. I to XX VII,
the twenty-seven preanal somites; m, mouth; a, anus;
e, the ocular pigment spot; <, male pore; °, female
pore; small circles indicate the segmental sensille and
dots (in fig. 2) the nephridiopores.
Fig. 4. A semi-diagrammatic representation of some of the more
important features of the alimentary canal, organs of
reproduction and dissepiments as seen from the dorsum.
The entire digestive tract is outlined and the reproduc-
tive organs are seen as though it were transparent. The
sperm sacs are displaced laterally in order to expose the
atrium. The parenchyma and other filling tissues are
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 73
left out of account. X 15. m, mouth; ph, pharynx;
@, esophagus; g, cesophageal glands; ¢ 7-7, the seven
pairs of gastric cca; i, intestine; a, anus; 3%, male
pore; a, median atrium; pg, prostate sac and gland; ss,
sperm reservoir; vd, vas deferens; ¢ 7—5, the five pairs
of testes; 2, female genital pore; ov, ovaries and their
ducts (the arrangement of the loops of the egg-strings
is purely diagrammatic); s, the muscular dissepiments
corresponding to the anterior limits of somites XI to XX.
Fig. 5. A lateral view similar to fig. 4, and showing in addition the
entire length of the central nervous system, the posi-
tions of the nephridiopores and of two of the nephridial
funnels. The sperm sac has been displaced slightly
caudad. The lettering is the same as in fig. 4, with the
following additions: n I-VI, XV, XXVJ and XX VI/—
XXXIV, neuromeres as numbered; np 1-16, nephri-
diopores 1 to 16; f, funnels of nephridia; ve 7-5, the
five vasa efferentia.
Fig. 6. A vertical longitudinal section through a sperm funnel of
the last pair, showing the continuity of its cells with the
testicular epithelium on the one hand, and with its vas
efferens on the other, and the contact of the latter with
the muscular septum. The testes, of course, faces to
the right instead of the left as in fig. 5. X 300. d,
dorsal wall of testes, with e, its lining epithelium, and
ct, its connective tissue tunic; «, anterior wall of testes;
m, muscle fibres, and cs, connective tissue of septum;
ve, ciliated epithelium of vas efferens.
Fig. 7. A tangential section across a sperm funnel, showing the
concentric arrangement of the cells around the contracted
mouth. X 300.
Fig. 8. Two typical neuromeres, XII and XIII, showing the prin-
cipal nerve trunks and their relation to the annuli, etc.
Xx 35. ma, major, and mi, minor annulus; s, position of
the row of metameric sensillze; np, position of nephri-
diopore; v 7, anterior, v 2, posterior, and d, dorsal
nerve trunks; /, Leydig’s (?) cells.
74 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
NEW AND UNFIGURED UNIONIDE:
BY CHARLES T. SIMPSON.
In preparing a synopsis of the Naiades, quite a number of new
species of Unionide have come to light. These I have held until
the work should be practically finished, and they are here pub-
lished for the first time.
Messrs. S. H. and B. H. Wright having generously donated
the types of most of their species to the National Museum, it was
thought best to give figures of those which were described in The
Nautilus, and which are unfigured.
Only brief descriptions are here given of the new genera and of
a few used in anew sense. These will be fully described in the
Synopsis.
Genus LAMPSILIS Rafinesque.*
Lampsilis fallaciosus (Smith) Simpson. PI. II, fig. 5.
Lampsilis fallaciosus Smith, Bull. U. S. Fish Com., 1899, p. 291, Pl. 79.
Figured and name given, but not described nor authority given.
Shell elongate elliptical, subsolid, inflated, rounded in front, and
ending in a rather sharp point behind, at two-thirds of the height
of the shell, with a moderate, rounded posterior ridge; beaks not
prominent, their sculpture consisting of a few delicate parallel
ridges, somewhat doubly looped, the hinder loops generally open be-
hind; epidermis very smooth and shining, ashy straw color, often
brownish on the back of the shell, generally feebly rayed with green;
female shell decidedly swollen in the postbasal region, so that the
base line is often incurved in front of the swelling; teeth rather
delicate, there being one compressed pseudo-cardinal and one
lateral in the right valve, and two pseudo-cardinals and two lat-
erals in the left; beak cavities not deep; nacre brilliant, silvery.
Length 90, height 40, diam. 32 mm.
1Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
2See Simpson in Baker, Mollusks of the Chicago Area, 1898, p. 93.
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. TO
Upper Mississippi drainage; scuth to the Cumberland and Arkan-
sas rivers; Red river of the North.
This species has generally been confounded with its near ally,
Lampsilis anodontoides Lea. It is a smaller, more inflated, and in
every way a more delicate form than the latter, it is not so high,
the epidermis is brighter and more glossy, and generally rayed.
The postbasal inflation of the female is usually more pronounced,
and the posterior point is higher than in anodontoides. The latter
is usually more yellow or tawny than fadlaciosus, and is, on the
whole, a heavier shell.
In L. fallaciosus there is a horny, brown, raised streak on the
inside of the mantle behind, that I do not find in anodontoides,
and the palpi of the former are shorter.
Lampsilis australis Simpson. PI. I, fig. 2.
Shell long elliptical, subsolid, moderately inflated, bluntly pointed
behind above the middle; beak sculpture not seen on account of
erosion, posterior ridge low, rounded; epidermis smooth, shining,
‘greenish yellow, rayed with green, with a large burnt brown patch
on the central and upper part of the shell; female shell slightly
inflated in the postbasal part; hinge teeth delicate, somewhat
compressed; beak cavities moderate; nacre bright bluish white,
iridescent behind, dark lurid in the cavity of the shell.
Length 52, height 28, diam. 15 mm.
Little Patsaliga creek, southeastern Alabama.
Both the type, a young shell, and an older, larger specimen are
badly eroded at the beaks, so that the hinges are slightly injured.
I am not positive as to the relations of this species, but it seems
to belong in the anodontoides group, next to L. rectus Lam.
Lampsilis mearnsi Simpson. PI. I, fig. 4.
“Shell small, rather solid and inflated, elliptical, pointed at the
middle of the posterior end, with a rather pronounced, rounded
post ridge; beaks moderate, the sculpture consisting of several
ridges looped in a single loop, which are strongly curved upward
behind; epidermis tawny with a greenish tint, rather smooth and
shining, though sometimes a little silky, often with a large, dark
green blotch at the posterior base, which sometimes covers the entire
posterior half of the shell, or it may break into rays at its front
edge; female shell decidedly swollen at the postbase; hinge teeth
76 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
rather delicate; laterals curved; pseudo-cardinals smooth below
and slightly reflexed upward; muscle scars distinct; beak cavities
shallow; nacre brilliant, soft silvery, yellowish or salmon.
Length 53, height 30, diam. 22 mm.
Near Fort Clark, southwest Texas.
A large number of valves and several perfect specimens were
contributed to the Museum by Dr. Edgar A. Mearns, of the
U.S. Army. It is closely allied to L. texasensis Lea, but it has a
higher posterior ridge, is much smoother, and the remarkable color
pattern is totally difterent.
Lampsilis brittsi Simpson. PI. V, figs. 1, 2.
Shell elliptical, subsolid, moderately inflated; beak sculpture
not seen; epidermis smooth, shining, greenish yellow to tawny,
with delicate wavy, often broken green rays; hinge line curved;
pseudo-cardinals small, rather high but stumpy; laterals somewhat
remote; muscle scars distinct; nacre whitish to salmon colored.
Animal: Marsupium occupying the hinder part of the outer gills,
with 13-15 large ovisacs having dark bases; inner gills united to
abdominal sac throughout; mantle with a thick border, incurved
in the female behind the postbase, and having several strong,
lengthened, fingerlike papille; palpi small; branchial and anal
openings but slightly fringed.
Length 72, height 43, diam. 25 mm.
The female shell is decidedly emarginate behind the postbasal
swelling.
Differs from L. breviculus in s2veral respects. The female shell
is more emarginate behind; the painting is in more regular, wide
rays. The male shell of breviculus is obovate, rounded or slightly
biangulate behind; that of Z. brittsi is more elliptical and pointed
posteriorly.
Lampsilis kirklandianus S. H. Wright. Pi. I, fig. 7.
Unio kirklandianus S. H. Wright, Naut., X, 1897, p. 136.
A wonderfully beautiful shell, of which I have only seen the
type, apparently a male. It is very different from the ordinary
manifestation of Lampsilis, but seems to be nearly related to the
Unio subangulatus of Lea, which is nearer the typical form of the
genus, and in which the difference between the male and female
shells is clearly shown. The marsupium is of the Lampsilis type.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 77
Lampsilis villosus B. H. Wright. PI. I, fig. 1.
Unio villosus B. H. Wright, Naut., XII, 1898, p. 32.
A species close to the Unio amygdalum of Lea, but which also
seems to be related to his U. exiguwus.
Genus MEDIONIDUS Simpson.
Shell elongated, elliptic rhomboid, subsolid, with a more or less
definite posterior ridge; beak sculpture fine, subparallel, broken,
doubly looped ridges; epidermis smooth, rather bright, variegated
with broken green rays or clouds; pseudo-cardinals small, stumpy ;
laterals curved; female shell generally slightly swollen at and
behind the central base; marsupium occupying the centre and
posteentre of the outer gills, in a few large, irregular, distinct
ovisacs. Type Unio conradicus Lea.
<)
Medionidus walkeri B. H. Wright. Pl. I, fig. 5
Unio walkeri B. H. Wright, Naut., XI, 1898, p. 91.
A singular shell, but most probably related to Unio rubellinus
of Conrad, which is a member of this genus.
Genus NEPHRONAITIAS Crosse and Fischer.
Shell rather solid, elliptical, more or less biangulate behind, that
of the male often becoming arcuate when old, that of the female gen-
erally swollen on the postbase; surface sulcate; beaks sculptured
with faint, broken ridges; two pseudo-cardinals in each valve;
laterals perfect; beak cavities rather deep.
Type Unio plicatulus Charpentier.
Nephronaias reticulatus Simpson. PI. I, fig. 3.
Shell evenly elliptical, subinflated, rather solid, slightly biangu-
late behind; sGrface decidedly suleate and sculptured throughout
with radiating ridges or slight furrows, which cut the sulcations
into loops, and give the shell a reticulated appearance; epidermis
tawny; pseudo-cardinals stumpy; laterals rather heavy and gran-
ular; muscle scars distinct; nacre lurid, thicker in front.
Length 50, height 33, diam. 20 mm.
‘Patook river, Honduras.
A single shell, which is probably not fully adult, is in the
National Museum collection. The sculpture reminds one of that
of Glabaris reticulatus Sowb., of South America, or Plagiola
encarpa Lea, of Lake Nicaragua.
78 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Genus OBOVARIA Rafinesque.
Shell solid, inflated, short, rounded before and often behind,
that of the female swollen at postbase; beaks high, their sculpture
delicate and faint, slightly doubly looped; epidermis silky, but
feebly rayed; pseudo-cardinals and laterals strong; animal
having the marsupium in the hinder part of the outer gills with
well-marked ovisacs.
Type Unio retusa Lamarck.
Obovaria rotulata B. H. Wright. Pl. IV, fig. 2.
Unio rotulatus B. H. Wright, Naut., XIII, 1899, p. 22°
A very solid shell, nearly circular in outline, and having a black
epidermis. It seems to be closely related to the Unio cireulus of
Lea, but I have only seen a single specimen, the type.
Obovaria tinkeri B. H. Wright. Pl. IV, fig. 3.
Unio tinkert B. H. Wright, Naut., XIII, 1899, p. 7.
A species near to the Unio unicolor of Lea, but probably dis-
tinct.
Genus TRITOGONIA Agassiz.
Shell elongate rhomboid, solid, that of the male somewhat
swollen and truncate behind, that of the female longer, more com-
pressed, and having a rounded posterior wing or flap; posterior
ridge high and well defined; beak sculpture consisting of strong,
irregular corrugations; surface covered with tubercles; epidermis
dark and rough; hinge strong, curved; a decided lunule showing in
front of the beaks, which extends underneath and behind them,
and is filled with epidermal matter; pseudo-cardinals strong,
ragged, radial; laterals somewhat remote, two in each valve; mus-
cle scars distinct, those of the anterior deep and rough; beak
cavities deep, compressed; dorsal scars on the under side of the
hinge shelf.
Animal: Inner gills much the larger, mostly free from the ab-
dominal sac; palpi enormous, elongated; mantle of male truncate
behind, that of the female produced into a wide, rounded, thick-
ened flap filling the wing of the shell behind; marsupium not
observed.
Type Unio tuberculatus Barnes.
1900.] - NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 79
? Tritogonia conjugans B. H. Wright. Pl. IV, fig. 1.
Unio conjugans B. H. Wright, Naut., XIII, 1899, p. 89.
A most remarkable shell, of which only the type, probably a
male, is known. I am not certain as to the relationship of this
species. It does not have the biangulation at the postbase gener-
ally found in male shells of TY. tuberculata Barnes, but has an
almost straight truncation from the postbase to the dorsal region,
However, T. tuberculata often shows such a truncation when young,
and we have shells of this an inch and a half in length which are
much like T. conjugans would be at the same size.
Genus PTYCHOBRANCHUS Simpson.
Shell somewhat subtriangular or elliptical, solid, that of the
male and female alike; epidermis haying hairlike or broken rays;
beak sculpture faint, broken, and somewhat doubly looped ridges;
hinge strong; pseudo-cardinals stumpy; laterals club-shaped,
remote; the muscle scars deep; shell cavity with one or more
oblique furrows. Marsupium occupying the entire outer branchiz
in a series of beautiful, wide folds, the ovisacs well marked and
rounded below.
Type Unio phaseolus Hildreth.
Ptychobranchus clintonensis Simpson. PI. V, fig. 3.
Shell elongate, elliptical, sometimes slightly obovate, feebly
biangulate behind, quite solid; beak sculpture not seen; epidermis
somewhat clothlike, dirty olive, the hinder two-thirds of the shell
ornamented with delicate, wavy, capillary rays; pseudo-cardinals
low, laterals very heavy, remote; muscle scars large and well
defined; nacre lurid, with greenish brown blotches.
Length 73, height 40, diam. 22 mm.
Archie’s Fork of Little Red river, near Clinton, Ark. ae
extends into Kansas.
This form I at first mistook for a variety of Unio gibbosus Bar.,
but an examination of the animal ina gravid state later on showed
me that it is a Ptychobranchus. The soft parts of the specimens
examined were a dark leaden color, almost blue.
Genus UNIO Reizius.
Unio iheringi B. H. Wright. Pl. IV, fig. 5.
Unio iheringi B. H. Wright, Naut., XII, 1898, p. 93.
This shell is rather close to Unio mitchelli Simpson, but differs
80 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
from it in the character of the beak sculpture, in the rays, the
texture of the epidermis, and in the form.
Unio dispalans B. H. Wright. PI. I, fig. 9.
Unio dispalans B. H. Wright, Naut., XIII, 1899, p. 50.
A member of the complanatus group, probably, though it has
relations with that of buckleyi and fisherianus. It is one of those
puzzling forms which is a good deal like several things, but not
near enough to anything to be referred to it.
Unio lehmani S. H. Wright. Pl. IV, fig. 9.
Unio lehmani 8S. H. Wright, Naut., X, 1897, p. 138.
A member of the buckleyi group.
Unio burtchianus S. H. Wright. Pl. IV, fig. 8.
Unio burtchianus B. H. Wright, Naut., X, 1897, p. 137.
Another member of the buck/eyi group.
Unio pinei B. H. Wright. Pl. III, fig. 1.
Unio pinei B. H. Wright, Naut., XI, 1897, p. 40.
Near to forms of U. buckleyi,but probably distinct.
Unio buxtoni B. H. Wright. PI. I, fig. 6.
Unio buatoni B. H. Wright, Naut., XI, 1897, p. 55.
A peculiarly formed member of the buckleyi group.
Unio brimleyi §. H. Wright. PI. IV, fig. 6.
Unio brimleyi S. H. Wright, Naut., X, 1897, p. 138.
A species related to U. subplanus Conrad.
Genus PLEUROBEMA (Rafinesque) Agassiz.
Shell solid, oval, triangular or rhomboid, usually inflated,
inequilateral, with high beaks, their sculpture coarse and broken;
epidermis generally tawny, but sometimes brownish or black, often
having broken rays and square spots; rest lines strong; hinge
heavy, with pseudo-cardinals and laterals; beak cavities shallow,
nacre white. Embryos contained in the outer gills alone:
Type Unio clava Lamarck.
Pleurobema brevis subelliptica Simpson.
Shell elliptic rhomboid, solid, inflated, slightly biangulate behind;
beaks rather high, but compressed, sculptured with strong, irregu-
lar corrugations that curve up behind; epidermis tawny, with a
few faint posterior rays; rest marks moderate; nacre silvery,
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 81
iridescent behind; muscle scars well marked; beak cavities mod-
erate; teeth strong, two laterals in each valve.
Length 55, height 40, diam. 28 mm.
Hardy, Arkansas. Tennessee drainage, probably.
Something like P. brevis Lea, but much more inflated, and
slightly rayed instead of square blotched, and less rhomboid.
Probably a distinct species.
Pleurobema avellana Simpson. PI. II, figs. 6, 7.
Shell small, solid, inflated, rhomboid elliptical, with a well-
developed, rounded posterior ridge; beaks full, badly eroded in
the only specimens seen; surface lightly concentrically striate,
greenish brown, scarcely rayed, but slighly clouded; two diverg-
ing pseudo-cardinals in the left valve and one in the right; two
laterals in each vaive; muscle scars deep; nacre bluish, iridescent
behind.
Length 30, height 20, diam. 15 mm. *
Catawba river, Alabama. Collections of Bryant Walker and
Lorraine Frierson. —
Seems to be near P. rubellus Con.
Pleurobema strodeana B. H. Wright. PI. I, fig. 3.
Unio strodeanus B. H. Wright, Naut., XII, 1898, p. 5.
This species is nearly related to P. patsaligensis and P. simulans.
Pleurobema harperi B. H. Wright. Pl. I, fig. 10.
Unio harperi B. H. Wright, Naut., XIII, 1899, p. 6.
I am somewhat doubtful whether this is more than a variety of
Unio bulbosus Lea.
Pleurobema pinkstoni S. H. Wright. Pl. I, fig. 8.
Unio pinkstoni S. H. Wright, Naut., X, 1897, p. 136.
Related to P. hanleyana Lea and P.
Pleurobema swordiana S. H. Wright. Pl. IV, fig. 4
Unio swordianus S. H. Wright, Naut., XI, 1897, p. 4.
A puzzling form which may be related to Unio appressus of
Lea and U. abacus of Haldeman. Its shallow beak cavities dis-
tinguish it at once from Unio bursa-pastoris of B. H. Wright,
which it resembles, but which has deep cavities.
6
82 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Pleurobema patsaligensis Simpson. Pl. II, fig. 1.
Shell rather small, nearly elliptical, subsolid and somewhat
inflated, with a well-developed, posterior ridge, sometimes slightly
biangulate behind; posterior slope with two or three faint ridges:
epidermis a little silky, but shining when rubbed, greenish yeliow,
with scarcely perceptible rays, and often clouded with bluish green;
beaks eroded and the sculpture not seen; hinge curved; pseudo-
cardinals radiate, rather stumpy; two laterals in the left valve and
one and a vestige of a second in the right ; beak cavities moderate,
but compressed; nacre whitish, often blotched with brown, irides-
cent behind.
Length 43, height 28, diam. 18 mm.
Little Patsaliga creek, southeast Alabama.
This groups with P. strodeana B. H. Wright and P. simulans
Lea, but is perfectly distinct.
Pleurobema reclusa B. H. Wright. PI. I, fig. 2.
Unio reclusus B. H. Wright, Naut., XI, 1898, p. 111.
Closely related to P. harperi and bulbosa.
Pleurobema argentea pannosa Simpson.
Shell rather solid, irregularly and rudely concentrically striate ;
epidermis where fresh somewhat clothlike, tawny or brownish.
White river and Hot Springs, Ark.
Possibly a variety of P. argentea, but it may prove to be a dis-
tinct species.
Genus QUADRULA (Rafinesque) Agassiz.
Quadrula rudis Simpson. PI. III, fig. 2.
Shell large, long quadrate, inflated, solid, with high beaks,
curved inward and forward, having apparently delicate corrugated
sculpture, a decided, sharp, curved posterior ridge ending in.a
blunt point at the posterior base, in front of which the basal line
is incurved, anterior end rounded, posterior end an eyen curve from
the ligament to the postbase; epidermis brownish, rough, rayless;
surface suleate and, excepting the later growth, covered with
sharply elevated small pustules which are sometimes united; hinge
curved; asingle very large pseudo-cardinal in the right valve which
fits in a cavity of the left, around which there is a high ridge
which develops into a high tooth behind. the cavity; under the
beaks is a sort of lunule which is extended inward across the hinge
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 85
plate, which is partly filled with epidermis; laterals curved, rather
delicate; anterior scars deep, those of the adductor very rough in
the centre; posterior scars shallow, beak cavities very deep, slightly
compressed; front part of the shell greatly thickened; nacre soft,
creamy white.
Length 103, height 65, diam. 45 mm.
Rio Taxtunilha, Guatemala.
A single shell, the type, is in the Lea collection, presented to
Dr. Lea by C. M. Wheatley, and labelled by the latter Unio
psoriacus Morelet. It is evidently not that species, and is, I
think, new. The type is nearly decorticated.
Quadrula guatemalensis Simpson. PI. II, fig. 4.
Shell rather small, subrhomboid, solid, scarcely inflated, with a
low posterior ridge, above which it is faintly biangulate; beaks
moderate, their sculpture not seen; surface suleate, covered through-
out, with rather obsolete pustules and corrugations; epidermis dark
brown, rough, rayless; there are two partially united pseudo-
cardinals in the left valve, with a pit between them, into which the
large tooth of the right valve fits; under and behind the beaks on
the hinge plate is a deposit of epidermal matter; beak cavities
moderately deep; nacre coppery purple.
Length 45, height 27, diam. 14 mm.
Rio Usumasintze, Guatemala.
The only shell seen, the type, is probably young. It does not
agree with anything I can find described, though it seems to come
nearest to Q. ostreata.
Quadrula triumphans B. H. Wright. Pl. III, fig. 3.
Unio triumphans B. H. Wright, Naut., XI, 1898, p. 101.
A fine shell which has characters like those of Q. boykiniana
and multiplicata, but which, I think, is neither.
Quadrula flexuosa Simpson. Pl. II, fig. 8. ;
Shell subtriangular, solid, inflated, with a faintly double poste-
rior ridge, rounded in front and slightly incurved at the posterior
base; beaks high, eroded in the only specimen seen; a low, wide,
radiating depression leads from them down to the base; epidermis
roughly concentrically striate, tawny to brownish, showing the rest
marks; hinge plate wide and flat; pseudo-cardinals low, diverging,
ragged; laterals straight, short, two in each valve; anterior adduc-
84 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900
tor scars deep, rough; posterior scars distinct; nacre lurid whitish,
dull.
Length 65, height 55, diam. 33 mm.
Holston river, Tennessee. Collection of L. S. Frierson.
Apparently nearest to Q. plena, but not so high or inflated.
Genus NODULARIA Conrad.
Shell elliptical to elongated, inflated; beaks not prominent, sculp-
tured with some form of zigzag, radiating sculpture, which often
extends over part or all of the shell; epidermis generally greenish,
often bright; hinge provided with pseudo-cardinals and laterals
which are usually somewhat compressed; beak cavities shallow ;
nacre whitish. Marsupium occupying the inner gills only.
Nodularia cylindracea Simpson.
Unio grayanus Schrenck (non Lea), Reis. und Forsch. im Amur-
Lande, 1867, p. 694, Pl. XXVII, figs. 1-3.
Shell greatly elongated, inflated, rather solid and slightly arcuate,
very inequilateral, rounded in front, with a low, rounded posterior
ridge which runs to the postbase, where the shell ends in a some-
what rounded point, above which it is obliquely subtruncated ;
ligament large, long; surface apparently without sculpture save
for slight concentric ridges; epidermis thick, brown, and in the
shell figured cracking and peeling off; dorsal line wavy at the hinder
end where the point of the shell turns a little to the right; pseudo-
cardinals apparently broken up into several slightly curved denticles;
anterior muscle scars deep and large.
Length 155, height 45, diameter 38 mm.
China.
Schrenck supposes this to be Lea’s Unio grayanus, which is a
smaller shell, is always more or less nodulous and corrugated, and
has a pinched up posterior ridge and different pseudo-cardinals. He
has three shells from a London dealer said to come from China.
The specimen figured is very badly eroded on the dorsal region,
and is apparently damaged at the postbase, while the heavy epider-
mis has peeled off in a number of places. I do not think it should
group with NV. grayana.
Genus PSEUDODON Gould.
Pseudodon loomisi Simpson. PI. IV, fig. 7.
Shell elongated elliptical and slightly obovate, somewhat in-
flated, rather thin; beaks not high, the sculpture not seen; poste-
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 85
rior ridge low, rounded; posterior slope having a few corrugations
running*in a nearly horizontal direction, the rest of the shell nearly
smooth; Sepidermis black, rayless; there is a single rather elevated
tooth in each valve, there being a vestige of a second in the right
valve; laterals represented by a low, rounded ridge; beak cavities
shallow; muscle scars well marked; nacre pale bluish, becoming a
lurid salmon in the cavities.
Length 73, height 37, diam. 23 mm.
Asaka, Japan. Loomis.
This seems to be a rather peculiar Pseudodon.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES
Prate:l,
Fig. 1. Unio villosus B. H. Wright, p.
Fig. 2. Unio reclusus B. H. Wright, p- 89,
Fig. 3. Unio strodeanus B. H. W. right, p. 81.
Fig. 4. Lampsilis mearnsi Simpson, p. 75.
Fig. 5. Unio walkeri B. H. Wright, p. 77.
Fig. 6. Unio buxtoni B. H. Wricht, p- 80.
Fig. 7. Unio kirklandianus S. H. Wright, p. 76.
Fig. 8. Unio pinkstoni S. H. Wright, p. 81.
Fig. 9. Unio dispalans B. H. Wright, p. 80.
Fig. 10. Unio harperi B. H. Wright, p. 81.
Pxate II}
Fig. 1. Pleurobema patsaligensis Simpson, p. 82.
Fig. 2. Lampsilis australis Simpson, p. 795.
Fig 3. Nephronaias reticulatus Simpson, p. 77.
Fig. 4. Quadrula guatemalensis Simpson, p. $5.
Fig. 5. Lampsilis fallaciosus (Smith) Simpson, p. 74
Fig. 6. Pleurobema avellana Simpson, p. $1.
Fig. 7. Pleuyobema avellana Simpson, p. 81.
Fig. 8. Quadrula flecuosa Simpson, p. 85.
Puate IIT.
Fig. 1. Unio pinei B. H. Wright, p. 80.
Fig. 2. Quadrula rudis Simpson, p. 82.
Fig. 3. Unio triumphans B. H. Wright, p. 85.
Fig.
Fig.
eae ES EM ce ee
wre
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
Piate IV.
Unio conjugans B. H. Wright, p. 79.
Unio rotulatus B. H. Wright, p. 78.
Unio tinkeri B. H. Wright, p. 78.
Unio swordianus 8. H. Wright, p. 81.
Unio iheringi B. H. Wright, p. 79.
Unio brimleyi S. H. Wright, p. 80.
Pseudodon loomisi Simpson, p. 84.
Unio burtchianus B. H. Wright, p. 80.
Unio lehmani S. H. Wright, p. 80.
PLATE V.
. Lampsilis brittsi Simpson, female, p. 76.
. Lompsilis brittsi Simpson, male, p. 76.
. Ptychobranchus clintonensis Simpson, p. 79.
[1900.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 87
FEBRUARY 6.
Mr. Caarces Morris in the Chair.
Thirteen persons present.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication:
** Additions to the Insular Land-shell Fauna of the Pacific
Coast, especially of the Galapagos and Cocos Islands,’’ by Wil-
liam Healey Dall.
** Notes on the Anatomy of the Helicid Genus Ashmunella,’’ by
Henry A. Pilsbry.
“¢ Mollusca of the Great Smoky Mountains,’’ by Henry A.
Pilsbry.
FEBRUARY 13.
CHARLES SCHAEFFER, M.D., in the Chair.
Twenty-three persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Descriptions of New Bees Collected by Mr.
H. H. Smith in Brazil. I,’’ by T. D. A. Cockerell, was presented
for publication.
The death of James B. England, a member, was announced.
FEBRUARY 20.
Mr. CHARLES Morris in the Chair.
Sixteen persons present.
FEBRUARY 27.
The President, SamurL G. Drxon, M.D., in the Chair.
Sixteen persons present.
The death of Ernest B. Sangree, M.D , a member, was announced.
Harry G. Parker was elected a member.
Henri Lacaze-Duthiers, of Paris, and Frederick W. True, of
Washington, were elected correspondents.
The following were ordered to be published:
88 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
ADDITIONS TO THE INSULAR LAND-SHELL FAUNAS OF THE PACIFIC
COAST, ESPECIALLY OF THE GALAPAGOS AND COCOS ISLANDS.
BY WILLIAM HEALEY DALL.
Several expeditions, during the last five years, have made collec-
tions on islands lying off the Pacific coast-of America, south of the
United States. Material from most of them came into my hands
for examination, or as the property of the National Museum.
In 1896, Mr. A. W. Anthony, of San Diego, Cal., undertook
a collecting tour along the west coast of Lower California, touch-
ing at Rosalia Bay and Guadelupe, Cerros, San Martin, San
Benito and Natividad Islands. The collection of land shells in-
cluded several novelties and was acquired by the National Museum.
A subsequent visit to Clarion Island was less lucky; the few land
shells obtained were put into formalin solution, which destroyed
them utterly before they could be identified.
Guadelupe has been visited by Mr. C. H. Townsend, of the
U.S. Fish Commission, and the Coronado Islands and Tiburon by
parties from San Diego, from whom small lots of material have
been obtained.
In 1898-99 a party from Stanford University visited Guadelupe,
Cocos and the Galapagos Islands, particularly exploring the less-
known islets of the latter group.
The party consisted of Mr. R. E. Snodgrass and Mr. Edmund
Heller, who, through the generosity of Mr. Timothy Hopkins, of
Menlo Park, Cal., were able to take passage on a sealing schooner
from San Francisco, commanded by Captain W. P. Noyes. The
time from December, 1898, to July, 1899, was spent in the work.
The attempt was made to spend as much time as possible on the
less-known islands. A week was given to Chatham, ten days to
Charles, but Tagus Cove, Elizabeth Bay and Iguana Cove, all
on Albemarle Island, were given three months. Narborough had
never been visited by collectors and Abingdon but rarely. On
Bindloe, Mr. Snodgrass made careful search, but could find no
traces of the species reported from it.
Through the kindness of President Jordan and Mr. R. E. Snod-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 89
grass, I have been able to examine and report upon the land shells
of this expedition. All this material being of a congruent nature,
the results obtained from a study of it may properly be assembled
in a single paper.
The present publication may be regarded as a supplement to that
published in the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences
for 1896, pages 395-479, which was largely based on the collec-
tions made at the Galapagos by the late Prof. G. Baur.
SPECIES FROM THE GALAPAGOS ISLANDS.
The Stanford expedition collected land shells at Chatham, Hood,
Charles, Barrington, Duncan, Albemarle, Narborough, James and
Abingdon, islands of the group. From Narborough and Abing-
don no collections had previously been made, but curiously enough
no new species turned up on either. Narborough is probably the
youngest island of the group, being actively volcanic in historic ~
times; so perhaps its land shells are comparatively new immigrants
from Albemarle, its nearest neighbor. But Abingdon, so small,
distant and isolated, would have been expected to furnish some
new material.
It was something of a surprise to find two new species from
Albemarle out of ten collected, and three from Hood, all that
were collected.
The additions to previously published lists of known species are
three each to Albemarle and Narborough, six to Abingdon and one
to Barrington.
The references are to my paper above cited of 1896, where the
synonymy is given in full, and the species are here given in the
same order, with the intercalation of those supposed to be new.
Bulimulus nux Broderip.
Bulimulus nux Dall, 1896, p. 429, Pl. XVI, fig. 6, Pl. XVII, fig. 10.
Charles and Chatham Islands, Snodgrass and Heller.
The collection of B. nuxz was not very large, but contained the
banded variety (B. unifasciatus Reibisch non Sowerby) and the
pale form, approaching rugu/osus, which Reibisch named invalidus.
Bulimulus duncanus Dall.
Bulimulus duncanus Dall, 1896, p. 438, Pl. X VI, fig. 7.
Dunean Island, Snodgrass and Heller.
As in previous cases, all the specimens were dead, and those
90 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
collected were not quite mature as the parietal denticle had ap-
peared in none of them. The species is probably extinct.
Bulimulus eschariferus Sowerby.
Bulimulus eschariferus Dall, 1896, p. 434.
Chatham and Barrington Islands, Snodgrass and Heller.
This species had not been found at Barrington previously.
Bulimulus Snodgrassi n. sp. Plate VIII, fig. 2.
Bulimulus Waving the general form of B. perspectivus Pfr., with
a distinct suture and eight polished moderately convex whorls ;
apex attenuated, nucleus livid, with an apical dimple and fine
regular ribbing which becomes obsolete on later whorls; there
is also on the first four whorls more or less spiral sculpture of
microscopically fine lines, which also disappear on later whorls;
subsequent whorls smooth or with fine incremental lines; upper
whorls dark purplish brown, later ones a little paler, with a narrow
paler band just behind the suture, which on the last whorl becomes
strongly marked, with a dark reddish narrower band on each side
of it, and traces of another at the suture; in some specimens the
dark coloration covers the whole surface on each side of the per-
ipheral pale band, but inside the aperture the bands can always be
distinguished ; base rounded about a well-marked umbilicus ; aper-
ture small, ovate, marginally thickened and slightly expanded, but
not reflected ; a narrow band of callus over the body connects the
posterior ends of the lips; pillar broad, slightly swollen, external
coloration visible in the throat. Alt. of shell 17, of aperture 5.2,
diam. of shel] 6, of aperture 4 mm.
Hood Island, Snodgrass and Heller; numerous.
This species is smaller than B. perspectivus and differently colored,
but belongs to the same group.
Bulimulus approximatus n. sp. Plate VIII, fig. 4.
Shell belonging to the type of B. nux and B. rugulosus with
seven pretty evenly tapered whorls, with a distinct suture; nucleus
as in the last species, livid, but the early whorls bear no traces of
revolving lines; whorls moderately convex, base evenly rounded;
sculpture, on the later whorls, only of faint incremental lines;
umbilicus small and narrow, aperture rather elongate. Alt. of shell
17.5, diam. 8 mm. :
Hood Island, Snodgrass and Heller.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 91
A single specimen of this shell was obtained which differs from
all the others of the nux group in the absence of spiral sculpture
and the smooth and polished surface. The peristome is not quite
matured, so it cannot be determined whether it is reflected or not,
but the probabilities are in favor of its being simple and. unre-
flected.
Bulimulus hoodensis nu. sp. Plate VIII, fig. 1.
Shell allied to B. unifasciatus Sby., but smaller, with about six
convex, rapidly tapering whorls; nucleus sculptured as usual in
the group, livid purple; later whorls smooth, polished, with no
sculpture but faint incremental lines; color light yellowish brown,
with two broad reddish purple spiral bands nearly peripheral, and
a narrower one in front of the suture; base evenly rounded, with
a narrow but deep umbilicus: aperture ovate-oblong, the peristome
white, thickened and distinctly reflected; pillar broad, white, not
swollen, a thin wash of callus over the body, the external colora-
tion distinct within the aperture. Alt. of shell 18, of aperture
8.5, diam. of shell 8.5, of aperture 6 mm. :
Hood Island, Snodgrass and Heller.
This well-marked form more nearly resembles some of the con-
tinental species than the typical Neesioti. The distinctly reflected
lip and rapid enlargement of the whorls distinguish it from any
other Galapagos species.
Bulimulus jacobi Sowerby.
Bulimulus jacobt Dall, 1896, p. 436.
This seems to be the commonest and, among the islands, the
most generally distributed species of the Galapagos. It was ob-
tained by Messrs. Snodgrass and Heller at James and Albemarle,
where it was previously known, and also from Narborough and
Abingdon, where it had not previously been reported. There is
not a great deal of variation in the specimens, which were found
at elevations of from 1,700 to 2,000 feet. The form named cinereus
by Reibisch was obtained at Iguana Cove, Albemarle Island, and
the variety acutus Reibisch, at a height of 3,000 feet, near
Tagus Cove, Albemarle Island. The species is usually found
under flat pieces of rock, and a large proportion of the specimens
are dead.
92 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Bulimulus curtus Reibisch.
Bulimulus (amastroides var.?) curtus Dall, 1896, p. 442, Pl. XV, fig.
13) Pl exo fo8:
Chatham Island, Snodgrass and Heller; also Baur, Wolf and
the U. S. Fish Commission.
Bulimulus rugiferus Sowerby.
Bulimulus rugiferus Dall, 1896, p. 443.
James Island, Cuming.
A single specimen of a very young shell probably belonging to
this species was obtained by Messrs. Snodgrass and Heller.
Bulimulus Tanneri Dall.
Bulimulus tannert Dall, 1896, p. 488, Pl. XVI, fig. 3
Tagus Cove, Albemarle Island, Snodgrass and Heller.
This species) was previously known only from Indefatigable
Island, where it was collected by the U. S. Fish Commission.
The present specimens are not fully grown and do not show the
broadly reflected lip.
Bulimulus indefatigabilis Dall, nom. noy.
Bulimulus n. sp. Dall, 1896, p. 444, Pl. XV, fig. 15.
One specimen found on James and two on Indefatigable Island,
according to Reibisch.
In 1896, to complete my monograph of the Galapagos shells, I
figured and described this shell but left it unnamed, thinking Herr
Reibisch himself intended to name it. But the years have passed
by and I have been unable to renew communication with that
gentleman, who is, I am informed, absorbed in other pursuits, so I
take this opportunity of applying a name to this shell.
Guppya Bauri Dall.
? Trochomorpha Bauri Dall, 1896, p. 447, Pl. XV, figs. 8, 9
Abingdon Island, at an elevation of 1,700 feet, Snodgrass and
Heller; Albemarle Island, Baur.
The specimens of this species obtained by Mr. Snodgrass were
dead and discolored, but the identification is complete. This is a
new locality for the species.
Conulus galapaganus Dall.
Conulus galapaganus Dall, 1896, p. 448, Pl. XV, fig. 11.
Chatham Island, at 1,600 feet, Baur; Abingdon Island, at 1,700
feet, Snodgrass and Heller; numerous.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 93
Quite a number of these were obtained but mostly in poor con-
dition. It was previously known only from Chatham Island.
Vitrea chathamensis Dall.
Vitrea chathamensis Dall, 1896, p. 448, Pl. XV, figs. 3, 10.
Chatham Island, 1,600 feet, Baur; Abingdon Island, 1,700 feet,
Snodgrass and Heller.
Good specimens of this species were obtained by Mr. Snodgrass.
It was previously known only from Chatham Island, by a single
specimen.
Vitrea actinophora n. sp. Pl. VIII, figs. 11, 16, 17.
Shell small with four brilliantly polished, subtranslucent, oliva-
ceous whorls; spire depressed but slightly rounded, with a distinct
suture; nuclear whorl and a half smooth, succeeding whorls near
the suture with well-defined close-set incised lines in harmony with
the lines of growth but short, rarely extending to the periphery;
last whorl evenly rounded, base smooth, convex, with a narrow
deep umbilicus; aperture oblique, hardly expanded, the peristome
sharp, thin, the pillar and outer lips not approximated. Major
diam. 4, minor diam. 3.2, alt. 2 mm.
Top of mountain near Tagus Cove, Albemarle Island, Snodgrass
and Heller.
This belongs to the group of V. radiatula Alder, but is suffi-
ciently distinguished by its sculpture and umbilicus; the last whorl
is also proportionally smaller.
Endodonta Helleri n. sp. Pl. VIII, figs. 7, 8, 9.
Shell small, solid, pale olivaceous gray, with about five sharply
sculptured, acutely keeled whorls; nucleus smooth, the succeeding
whorls with close, oblique, evenly.spaced, elevated lamellie in har-
mony with the lines of growth, and covering both the upper and
lower surface of the shell; spire elevated, domelike, the surface of
the whorls somewhat flattened with the periphery narrowly com-
pressed forming a sharp marginated keel; base rounded with a
rather wide and deep umbilicus; aperture oblique, the peristome
widely reflected and thickened except at the upper angle which
is appressed against the keel of the prior whorl; interior of the
aperture with a narrow low rounded parietal lamella running far
into the throat; on the basal side, a fourth of a whorl behind the
aperture, two narrow white patches are seen through the shell, indi-
94 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
cating the presence of two short basal lamelle. Major diam. 3,
minor diam. 2.6, alt. 1.75 mm.
Near Iguana Cove, Albemarle Island, at an elevation of 2,000
feet, Snodgrass and Heller.
This very characteristic and elegant little shell adds a represen-
tative of a genus and family new to the Galapagos fauna.
Pupa Wolfii Miller.
Pupa (Leucochila?) wolfit Dall, 1896, p. 446, Pl. XVII, fig. 14.
Guayaquil, Ecuador, Wolf; Albemarle Island, near the sea
level, Wolf and Baur; near Tagus Cove, Albemarle, on leaves of
Croton; near Iguana Cove, Albemarle, at 2,000 feet elevation;
Narborough Island, Snodgrass and Heller; abundant.
This species was usually found, when alive, on leaves of plants.
It seems to be common and many of the specimens approximate in
the characters of the armature of the mouth to P. clausa. Their
distinctness cannot yet be said to be demonstrated.
Pupa clausa Reibisch.
Pupa clausa Dall, 1896, p. 447.
On bushes near the sea, Indefatigable Island, Wolf; Abingdon
and Narborough Islands, near the sea level, Snodgrass and
Heller.
These localities are additional to that of Wolf, which was the
only one previously known for this rather doubtful species.
Succinea Bettii Smith.
Succinea bettit Dall, 1896, p. 448, Pl. XV, fig. 6.
Previously known from Charles, James and Chatham Islands;
Iguana Cove, Albemarle and James Island, Snodgrass and Hel-
ler; variety Wolf Reibisch, at 1,700 feet elevation, Abingdon
Island, 2,000 feet elevation near Iguana Cove, Albemarle Island,
Snodgrass and Heller.
This species appears to be common and is doubtless widely
diffused among the islands.
Succinea brevior (Smith).
Succinea brevior Dall, 1896, p. 449, Pl. XV, fig. 4, Pl. XVI, fig. 8,
Pl. XVHU, fig. 9.
At 1,000 feet elevation, on shrubbery, near Black Beach,
Charles Island, Baur; Charles Island, Snodgrass and Heller.
1900.) NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 98
Succinea producta (Reibiseh).
Succinea producta Dall, 1896, p. 449, Pl. XV, fig. 7, Pl. XVI, fig. 10,
Pl. XVIUU, fig. 5.
Chatham Island, on lichen-covered rocks at 900 to 2,000 feet
elevation, Wolf and Baur; Chatham and Narborough Islands,
Snodgrass and Heller.
The last locality is a new one for the species.
Succinea corbis Dall.
Succinea corbis Dall, 1896, p. 450, Pl. XV, fig. 5.
South Albemarle Island, on dry bones of turtles, Dr. Baur ;
Iguana Cove, Albemarle Island, and also on James Island, Snod-
grass and Heller.
The specimens obtained by Messrs. Snodgrass and Heller were less
strongly reticulate than the original type, but on examination in a
good light and strong magnification the characteristic sculpture
was detected.
Tornatellina chathamensis Dall.
Leptinaria chathamensiz Dall, 1896, p. 451, Pl. XVI, fig. 9, Pl. XVII,
fig. 16.
Chatham Island, on ferns at 1,690-2,000 feet above the sea, also
South Albemarle Island, Baur; Iguana Cove, Albemarle Island,
Snodgrass and Heller.
In his revision of certain Stenogyride, Dr. Pilsbry has shown
that the small forms, often called Leptinaria, which are allied to
and perhaps were the original root stock of the Achatinellide, must
take the name Tornatellina, while the very similar shells with a
Stenogyroid radula will be called Leptinaria. Hence the shell
described by me as Leptinaria chathamensis will now take its place
as a Tornatellina.
The close resemblance between many of the non-arboreal
minuter Achatinellas and Tornatellina is sufficiently obvious. The
anatomy confirms the relationship intimated by the shell charac-
ters. Add to this that the only fossil (possibly Pliocene) Achati-
nellas yet observed belong to this dwarfish dull-colored group, and
the hypothesis that Achatinella originally sprang from a Tertiary
Tornatellina-like immigrant, borne, perhaps, on the wings of the
wind, from other islands of the Pacific, does not seem to be very
far-fetched.
96 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900
Helicina nesiotica Dall.
Helicina (Idesa) nesiotica Dall, 1896, p. 451, Pl. XV, figs. 1, 2, Pl-
XVII, fig. 12.
Chatham Island, on leaves at 1,600 feet, Baur; top of mountain,
near Tagus Cove, Albemarle, also near Iguana Cove, Albemarle,
Snodgrass and Heller.
It is quite likely that this inconspicuous species may exist on all
the islands, and the new material obtained during this the latest
expedition may serve to confirm the opinion that the islands are
still not sufficiently explored to warrant final conclusions on
interisland distribution.
Cocos IsLAND SPECIES.
Cocos Island is a remote volcanic islet, about half-way between
the Galapagos Islands and the Panamic Isthmus in a north-north-
easterly direction. The only reference to its land shells I have
found is a short paper by von Martens on a small collection of
small land shells obtained by Herr Pittier in June, 1898. These
comprised four species of which one was an undetermined species
of Conulus.
Messrs. Snodgrass and Heller obtained also four species, one of
which appears to be identical with one of von Martens’, the other
three to be undescribed.
I have had the valuable advice of Dr. H. A. Pilsbry in the
determination of these shells, and it appears that the revision of
the group containing Subulina, ete., leaves in the genus Leptinaria
the Achatinoid forms which have, like these from Cocos Island,
the dentition of Stenogyra, while to Tornatellina will fall those
having a radula recalling Achatinella, such as the species described
by me under the name of Leptinaria chathamensis.
The list of ‘Cocos Island species, so far known, will be as
follows :
Conulus sp.
Guppya Hopkinsii Dall. On leaves.
Leptinaria (Neosubulina) Pittieri (von Martens).
Leptinaria (Neosubulina) Martensi Dall. Under stones.
Opeas juncea (Gould).
val Sitzungsberichte der Gesellschaft Naturforschender Freunde zu Ber-
lin, pp. 156-160, 1898.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 97
Vertigo cocosensis Dall. On leaves.
Suceinea globispira von Martens. On leaves.
Siphonaria gigas Sowerby and Melampus panamensis C. B.
Adams were obtained by the U. S. Fish Commission from the
beaches of Cocos Island in 1888.
Guppya Hopkinsii n. sp. Pl. VIII, figs. 5, 6.
Shell small, with 54 whorls, of a reddish horn-color when fresh,
polished below; above, the surface is dulled by fine close even
striation in harmony with the lines of growth crossed by a micro-
scopic, partly obsolete spiral striation; spire moderately elevated,
nepionic whorls polished, the sutures very distinct, the whorls rounded
between them; base evenly rounded, the periphery of the last
whorl situated in the path ef the suture as it advances and not in
the middle of the whorl; umbilical region impressed, imperforate;
aperture lunate, wider than high, the margins acute, the parietal
surface without callus and polished. Alt. 4.2, lat. 6 mm.
Cocos Island, on leaves, Heller and Snodgrass, 1899.
This is a very neat little shell in which the reddish color of the
living form seems to fade to a pale yellowish after the animal has
been some time removed. It seems to have been not uncommon.
It is named in honor of Mr. Timothy Hopkins, patron of the
expedition. An examination of the animal by Dr. Pilsbry has
settled the genus.
Leptinaria (Neosubulina) Martensi n. sp. Pl. VIII, fig. 10.
Shell small, of a yellowish-green color, polished, with 55 whorls,
a rather blunt apex and distinct suture ; under magnification the ~
upper whorls are seen to be minutely axially wrinkled, most dis-
tinetly so in front of the suture, but, in the later whorls, this
sculpture becomes obsolete. There is also a fine obscure spiral
striation and in certain spots, under magnification, the two series
of lines form a faint reticulation. The shell has much the gen-
eral form of Cochlicopa lubrica, the aperture is small, semilunate,
the pillar obliquely truncated, somewhat thickened at the twisted
edge; on the body is a very prominent projecting lamina which
extends inside the shell for about one whorl, projects at the mouth
half-way to the outer lip and is united to the pillar and outer lip
by a thin callus; the outer lip is not reflected, but is not. sharp-
edged in the adult; directly opposite the parietal lamella is a sin-
7
98 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
gle thickened spiral ridge, but little elevated, and extending
inward about one-third of the last whorl. Alt. of shell 10, of
aperture 4.25; lat. of shell 4, of aperture 2 mm.
Cocos Island, under stones, Heller and Snodgrass.
An immature dextral specimen among the seven sinistral L. Pit-
tieri v. Marts. may have belonged to this species. It differs from
that species by being dextral, by having the mouth larger in pro-
portion to the spire, and in having one less whorl in a somewhat
greater length. The specimens were strongly contracted in
alcohol but presented the general appearance of Stenogyra, with
which the short and broad, very small, radula fully agrees. The
partitions of the upper whorls are not absorbed. The foot is
entire and quite small. I could detect no jaw nor eyes, but the
tentacles were inverted. It seems, according to Dr. Pilsbry, that
Leptinaria is the proper name for these stenogyroid forms with
dentition of Achatina, while Tornatellina includes those with
achatinelloid teeth. Consequently Neosubulina, which was founded
chiefly on these distinctions, is, at most, hardly of more than sec-
tional value. The resemblance to Stolidoma Desh. is quite marked,
but they may be discriminated by the apical characters of the shell.
Vertigo cocosensis n. sp. Pi. VII, fig. 13.
Shell small, reddish brown, rather pointed, with nearly five
rounded whorls; apex paler, polished, rather blunt; last whorl
much the largest; base rounded with a well-marked umbilical pit;
aperture wider behind, the posterior part of the outer lip and the
‘pillar lip broadly reflected, the anterior outer and basal margin
narrow; the pillar and outer lip united by a thin callus; lamellz
according to Sterki’s formula .ABDE, comprising one columeliar
and two parietal folds, and, on the outer wall well within the peri-
stome, two narrow little-elevated ridges, of which the anterior is
shorter. _ Axial length of shell 2.2, of aperture .8, width of last
whorl 1.5, of aperture .8 mm. }
Cocos Island, on leaves, Heller and Snodgrass.
The chief peculiarity of this species is that the surface, which
looks silky under an ordinary hand lens, when more magnified is
seen to be punctate all over, recalling V. variolosa Gould, of
Florida, which, however, differs in form, size and dental arma-
ture.
= Pale
dn? SOU WER Oin Ss) pee wy
i ee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 99
Succinea globispira von Martens.
S. globispira vy. Mts., Sitzb. Ges. Naturf. Freunde zu Berlin, p. 158,
1898.
Cocos Isand, on Jeaves, Heller and Snodgrass.
This is a rather rude, short-spired form of a yellowish-white
color, and which covers itself in life with pellets of its own ex-
creta. It does not seem to be abundant.
SPECIES FROM THE CALIFORNIAN ISLANDS.
Epiphragmophora Veatchii (Newcomb).
Arionta Veatchit Newcomb (MS.) Tryon, Am. Journ. Conch., II, p.
316, Pl. 22 (5), fig. 19; Pl. 23 (6), fig. 6, Oct., 1866; III, p. 162,
1867.
Cerros Island, off Lower California, in about N. Lat. 28°
Veateh (1859), Anthony (1896).
This splendid shell is well suited to its arid environment, since
Stearns had a specimen collected by Veatch which only issued from
behind its epiphragm in 1865, having been kept six years in a dry
box without food or moisture.
?
Epiphragmophora leucanthea n. sp. PI. VIII, figs. 18, 20.
Shell with five and a half rather convex whorls; pale lavender,
nearly white below, with an obsolete white peripheral band, above
which the whorl is more or less tinged with pale bluish gray; a
translucent band above the peripheral one through which the dark
brown with which the interior of the whorls is lined may show
through more or less distinctly; nuclear whorls with wavy radial
striz, visible under a lens, for a whorl and a half, translucent;
succeeding whorls opaque, except as stated, polished, with rather.
distinct incremental lines and obsolete vermiculations or mallea-
tions; base rounded, perforate, with the umbilicus nearly closed by
the columellar reflection; aperture rounded, the outer lip slightly
reflected, white, with the throat brown internally; body without
eallus, pillar short, arcuate, with no thickening or denticle upon
it. Major diam. 28, minor 23.5, alt. of shell 20, of aperture
15 mm.
Eastern side of Cerros Island, Anthony, 1896.
This is evidently a derivative from E. Veatchii, from which it
differs in the absence of the numerous interrupted brown bands, in
the usually blunter and lower spire and more distinct and deeper
sutures.
100 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Epiphragmophora areolata (Sowerby).
Felix: areolata Sowerby (MSS.), Pfeiffer, Zeitschr. fiir Mal., II, p. 154,
Pee areolata Tryon, Am. Journ. Conch., II, p. 319, Pl. 23 (6),
fig. 5, 1866.
Margarita Bay, L. Cal., Newcomb; Natividad Island, ten miles
south of Cerros Island, Anthony, 1896.
This species was mistakenly referred to Oregon by Tryon.
Binney, in Land and Fresh-water Shells of North America, figures
for it a specimen of FE. Veatchit (p. 177, fig. 311, two middle
figures) and one of LE. Jevis Pfr. (ibid., two outer figures).
Though doubtless similar in origin and in coloration, areolata is
smaller than Veatchii and has a more depressed spire, and on the
whole is easily separable from the latter if a good series is com-
pared.
Epiphragmophora levis (Pfeiffer).
Helix levis Pfr., Zeitschr. fiir Mal., II, p. 152, 1845; Binney, Land and
Fresh-water Sh. N. Am., I, p. 180, fig. 316, 1869.
Rosalia Bay, mainland of Lower California, in N. Lat. 28° 30’,
Anthony, 1896.
Erroneously referred to the Columbia river by Pfeiffer.
Epiphragmophora crassula n. sp. Pl. VIII, fig. 3.
Shell small, solid and heavy, smooth, with five whorls; spire
rather pointed, suture distinct, not deep, last whorl evenly rounded
at the periphery; color opaque white with more or less numerous
very pale-brown subtranslucent spiral bands, all or part of which
may be absent; usually there is a peripheral white band and be-
tween it and the suture one or two translucent bands of which the
anterior is most constant; from two to four narrower translucent
bands may exist in front of the periphery; the base is rounded,
at first minutely perforate, later imperforate and sealed by a reflee-
tion of the pillar lip; aperture rounded, slightly oblique, with a
solid white, slightly reflected peristome, but no callus on the body;
pillar broad, short with a conspicuous callosity. Alt. of shell 15,
of aperture 6, lat. of shell 15.5, of aperture 7.5 mm.
Natividad Island, ten miles south of Cerros Island, Anthony,
1896.
This species is an offshoot of E. devis Pfr., from which it differs
by its smaller and much heavier shell, fewer whorls, conspicuous
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 101
peristome and narrower, fewer and less interrupted banding of a
paler tint.
Epiphragmophora pandore (Forbes).
- Helix pandore Fbs., P. Z. S., 1850, p. 55, Pl. IX, figs. 3a, 3b.
Helix damacenus Gould, Proc. Bost. Soc. N. Hist., VI, p. 11, 1856.
San Benito Island, east of Cerros, in N. Lat. 28° 16’, Anthony,
1896; Santa Barbara, on Margarita Bay, L. Cal., Forbes.
This is a well-marked species which varies from white to dark
gray above, and, below, may be white or banded with ashy gray.
The nucleus is, however, invariably of a livid purplish color and
the surface is dull and conspicuously striate. A typical specimen,
received by Dr. Lea from Forbes, is now in the Nationai Museum.
It differs from the San Benito shells chiefly in having the spire
less elevated and the whorls slightly flatter above.
Epiphragmophora Stearnsiana (Gabb).
Helix Stearnsiana Gabb., Am. Journ. Conch., III, p. 235, Pl. XVI, fig.
1, 1867.
Lower California, from San Diego, Cal., south to San Tomas
river, Binney; San Martin Island, in N. Lat. 30° 30’, Anthony,
1896.
These specimens do not seem to differ from those taken on the
mainland.
Epiphragmophora (Micrarionta) guadelupiana n. sp. Plate VIII, figs. 14, 45.
Shell small, thin, depressed, of a dark-brownish color with a
narrow reddish band, bordered on each side by a pale streak, just
above the periphery; spire little elevated, suture distinct; epider-
mis strong, in well-developed specimens slightly microscopically
hirsute; sculpture of well-marked incremental lines, stronger on
the spire, with occasional microscopic punctations; base more or
less flattened, the last whorl with the periphery somewhat above
the middle of the whorl, umbilicus narrow and deep; aperture
subeircular, very oblique with a strong whitish reflection of the
peristome, the ends of the lip on the body approximated, throat
with the bands showing through. Alt. of shell 6, diam. 10.5,
aperture diam. 4.5 mm.
Guadelupe Island, off Lower California, in N. Lat. about 29°,
Anthony, 1896; Snodgrass and Heller, 1899.
This very well-marked little species 1s nearest to FE. cataline, but
is more depressed, with a larger umbilicus and differently shaped
102 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
aperture. It seems to be tolerably abundant, though most of the
specimens received were defective.
Epiphragmophora sp. indet.
Among the shells collected by Anthony from Guadelupe Island,
was a single specimen of a species of Epiphragmophora consider-
ably larger than the preceding, but which I am unable to identify
since it is not mature. There is a pale band and an almost obso-
lete reddish band at the periphery. It represents a species quite
unlike E. guadelupiana.
Binneyia notabilis Cooper.
Binneya notabilis Cooper, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., III, p. 62, 1863, with
figures.
Santa Barbara Island, Cooper, 1863; Guadelupe Island, An-
thony, 1896.
This species appears to be abundant on Gaudelupe Island, but
owing to want of care in collecting few of the delicate shells
were intact when received.
Succinea (rusticana Gld. var:?) guadelupensis Dall. Pl. VIII, fig. 12.
Shell small, acutely pointed, strongly marked with incremental
lines; whorls very convex, with deep sutures; last whorl the
largest; aperture smail for the genus, oblique, with a well-marked
callus over the body. Lon. of shell 8.5, of aperture 5, of last
whorl 7, diam. of shell 5, of aperture 3.2 mm.
Guadelupe Island, Anthony, 1896.
This variety differs from S. rusticana in its much smaller size
with the same number of whorls, also by the incurving outer lip
where it joins the body. The surface is rather coarsely striated
with incremental lines. The specimen obtained was dead, and the
color when fresh was doubtful, but the appearances indicate that
was pale yellow. It resembles a good deal Succinea corbis Dall
from the Galapagos, but is a broader shell and does not possess the
fine reticulate surface sculpture. It may very likely prove eventu-
ally to be of specific rank, but in the present state of our knowl-
edge of the American species I prefer to introduce this as a
variety.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 103
Epiphragmophora cataline Dall.
“‘Heliz tenuistriata’’ W.G. Binney (as mutation of H. Gabbi), Land
and Fresh-water Sh. N. Am., part I, p. 175, fig. 305, 1869 ; not of A.
Binney, 1842.
Arionta Gabbi W. G. Binney, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., No. 28, p. 148.
fig. 130, 1885.
This form was collected on Catalina Island by H. Hemphill,
and, while obviously a member of the Gabbi-facta group, seems
perfectly distinguishable from the other members of that group.
There is a very large series of Gabbi and facta in the collection of
the National Museum, and notwithstanding their variability I do
not find any specimens which are not readily referred to one or
the other, and none intermediate between these and cataline. The
name tenuistriata had previously been used specifically by A.
Binney, and was repudiated for this shell by his son. As the
original tenwistriata A. Binney has never been identified, and in
the case of the present species the name would have to rest anony-
mous, it seems better to apply a local name to it which is free from
any uncertainty. It has a small deep umbilicus partly shaded by
the reflected pillar lip and a broadly reflected peristome, the ends
of which upon the body are not approximated. It measures as
follows: Alt. of shell 7, diam. 12, diam. aperture 4.5 mm.
There are five and a half rounded whorls and the entire shell is
finely spirally striate. It is also found fossil on Santa Barbara
Island, but the fossil specimens are often considerably larger than
the largest living specimens now known; one measures 15 mm. in
major diameter and nearly 10 mm. in height.
Epiphragmophora Kellettii Forbes.
Helix, Kellettit Forbes, P. Z. S., 1850, p. 55, Pl. IX, fig 2, a, b.
Epiphragmophora (Mierarionta) Kellettii Pilsbry, Cat. Land Shells
of Am. North of Mex., p. 6, 1897.
The measurements of the type are major diam. 22, minor diam.
19, alt. 19 mm. No locality is mentioned. A shell occurs on
San Clemente Island of the Santa Barbara group, which has been
referred to Kellettii as a dwarf variety. I suspect it to be distinct,
but, at all events, it is sufficiently different to deserve a name:
Epiphragmophora (var.?) clementina Dall.
Shell small, thin, pale translucent brownish in color with obscure,
revolving series of very minute yellow or whitish flecks; whorls
four, the nucleus wrinkled transversely, reddish, slightly flattened,
the succeeding whorls rather convex with a distinct suture; a very
104 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
narrow dark reddish-brown band, with a hardly visible pale border
in front of it, revolves above the periphery; sculpture of rather
well-marked incremental rug, cut on the upper part of the last
whorl by microscopic spiral striation, to which is added a partly
obsolete oblique striation which is visible, under magnification,
chiefly in patches; the effect of the whole is to give the surface a
very fine shagrination; the last whorl near the aperture descends
strongly and the plane of the aperture forms an angle of about
45° with the axis of the shel]; base full and rounded, the umbili-
cus completely covered by a reflection of the pillar lip; aperture
rounded, the peristome narrow, whitish, slightly thickened and
reflected. Major diam. 15, minor diam. 12, alt. 11 mm.; other
specimens are slightly larger.
Habitat: San Clemente Island, Cal., U. S. Fish Com.
The typical E. Kellettii is that found in the vicinity of San
Diego. It has six whorls and they are well rounded. It differs
from the Catalina Island form in its less flattened and more inflated
whorls, more dome-like spire, smaller size and browner aspect, the
contrast between the upper and lower sides of the last whorl being
much less marked. Specimens from the Coronado Islands are like
those from San Diego. The National Museum has this species
only from the above-mentioned three localities authentically.
‘Santa Barbara,’’ frequently mentioned as a locality, should read
‘« Santa Barbara Islands,’’ as it is improbable that the shell occurs
at the town of Santa Barbara on the mainland. A lot in the
National Museum are labelled ‘‘ Oregon City, Shumard,’’ which
is, of course, an error. . clementina differs in size, in number of
whorls and in the more emphasised surface sculpture. It is more
like the San Diego shells than like those from Catalina.
Epiphragmophora Orcutti n. sp. Pl. VIII, fig. 19.
Shell globose, moderately elevated, polished, with nearly six
moderately convex whorls forming a dome-like spire; color pur-
plish brown, lighter toward the umbilicus; a narrow pale band oa
the last whorl bordered behind by a darker brown, poorly defined,
similar band, both being above the periphery and the suture in
the earlier whorls being laid on the anterior edge of the darker
line; nucleus finely flexuously radiately wrinkled, pale colored;
subsequent whorls with fine incremental wrinkles the ridges of
which are cut by revolving, partly obsolete incised lines: as a rule
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 105
these lines are not deep or continuous, cutting merely the tops of
the wrinkles and not the furrows between them; suture distinct, last
whorl rounded, plump, toward the aperture descending below the
pale band; base plumply rounded, the umbilicus covered by a
reflection of the pillar-lip with a minute chink behind it; aperture
very oblique, thickened, whitish, reflected, especially near the
pillar; throat livid brownish with the bands well indicated.
Major diam. of large and small specimens, respectively, 24 and
22.5, minor diam. 20 and 18.5, alt. 19 and 16 mm.
Habitat: Rosario mesas, in northern Lower California, in May,
1886, by C. R. Orcutt.
This form much resembles in shape the typical E. Kellettii,
from which it differs in the absence of the yellow flecking and the
different surface sculpture. E. Kellettii is also a more globose
shell. The same stock, doubtless, was the origin of both species,
as well as several others.
Addendum—Note on the Anatomy of Guppya Hopkinsi Dall.
By Henry A. Pilsbry.
The sole is distinctly tripartite; tail with a subtriangular mu-
cous pore surmounted by a blunt short fleshy process. The mantle
lining the lung cavity is pearl-gray with some opaque white spots
and irregular, broken, black, transverse lines. Genital system of
the simple ‘‘ haplogon ’’ type, the
vas deferens and retractor termi-
nal on the penis. Kidney long-
triangular, nearly double the length
of the pericardium. Jaw arcuate
with a slight median projection
below, entirely smooth. Radula
‘
with the centrals tricuspid, the ecto-
cones diverging; laterals bicuspid ;
marginal teeth at first with the
Jaw and teeth of G. hopkinsi. long cusp bifid (entocone + meso-
cone), then trifid (entocone + mesocone + ectocone), the outer-
most marginals shortened and simplified as usual. The whole
anatomy agrees with Guppya, so far as that genus is known.
106
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
5
Fig.
5
Fig.
fo)
oORWONS
OND
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIII.
. Bulimulus hoodensis Dall; alt. 18 mm., p. 91.
» Bulimulus Snodgrassi Dall; alt. 16.5 mm., p. 90.
. Epiphragmophora crassula Dall; alt. 15 mm., p. 100.
. Bulimulus approximatus Dall; alt. 17 mm., p. 90.
Guppya Hopkinsi Dall; viewed from above, major diam.
Gmina sep. ol:
The same, in profile.
. Endodonta Helleri Dall; profile; diam. 3 mm., p. 93.
. The same, viewed from above.
The same, basal view, the basal lamellee indicated by
the lighter spots.
. Leptinaria Martensi Dall; alt. 10 mm., p. 97.
Vitrea actinophora Dall; viewed from above, major diam.
4 mm., p. 93.
. Succinea guadelupensis Dall; alt. 8.5 mm., p. 102.
Vertigo cocosensis Dall; alt. 2.2 mm., p. 98
. Epiphragmophora guadelupiana Dall; major diam. 11
mm., p. 101.
. The same, in profile.
Vitrea actinophora Dall; in profile, p. 93.
. The same, from below.
. Epiphragmophora leucanthea Dall; alt. 20 mm., p. 99.
. Epiphragmophora Orcutti Dall; alt. 16 mm., p. 104.
. Epiphragmophora leucanthea Dall; from below, major
diam. 28 mm.. p. 99.
—
1900.]
NATURAL SCIENCES
OF PHILADELPHIA. 107
NOTE ON THE ANATOMY OF THE HELICOID GENUS ASHMUNELLA.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.
This genus was established’ by Prof. Cockerell and myself for a
series of Polygyra-like Helices from New Mexico and Arizona, only
genus in the above-mentioned paper.
one of which, A. miorhyssa, was
then known anatomically. That
we did not exceed the legitimate
bounds of inference from mere
shell characters, in grouping eight
anatomically unknown forms
around A. miorhyssa, I am now
in a position to show.
Living specimens of the follow-
ing species of the genus have
been secured by Prof. Cockerell
and transmitted to me for study:
A. thomsoniana portere, Beulah,
Upper Sapello Cation, New Mex-
ico; A. thomsoniana (Anc.),
one living specimen found by T.
D. A. Cockerell and Wilmatte
Porter under a rock at Monu-
ment Rock, in Santa Fé Canon,
8,000 feet elevation, in the region
of quaking aspens and scrub oaks,
December 30, 1899; A. rhyssa
hyporhyssa (CkIl.), Clouderoft,
Sacramento Mts., N. M., 8,750
feet elevation, collected by Prof.
E. O. Wooton.
The examination of these
forms fully confirms the anatom-
ical characters ascribed to the
* These Proceedings for 1899, p. 188.
108 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
A. thomsoniana (Anc.). Fig. 2.
This species diverges from the others in having three aperture-
teeth as in Triodopsis. The single specimen secured extruded its
penis in drowning, and I found it impossible to retract it. It is
notable that only the lower and wider portion is everted, not the
tapering upper part, which is probably epiphallic.
The general proportions of the genitalia are as in var. portere,
the spermatheca being long, decidedly over half the length of the
penis + epiphallus, in both forms. The lower insertion of the
penis retractor muscle in var. portere seems to be wanting in
thomsoniana.
The jaw is strongly arcuate with seven moderately strong, separ-
ated, distinct ribs.
Radula with 27. 1. 27 teeth, similar to those of A. hyporhyssa, the
tenth to the thirteenth transitional, outer 10 marginals with the
inner cusps bifid.
A. thomsoniana portere Pils.and Ckll. Fig. 3.
Genital system similar to that of A. thomsoniana, except that
it is larger, with a double insertion of the penis retractor muscle.
A. miorhyssa (Dall).
These Proceedings, 1899, p. 189, figs. 1 (genitalia), 2 (jaw), 3 (teeth).
The spermatheca is half the Jength of tne penis + epiphallus, being
shorter than in A. thomsoniana and portere. The penis retractor
muscle has a double insertion, as in the preceding and following
forms.
A. rhyssa hyporhyssa (Ckll.). Fig. 1.
The epiphallus is very long, the penis + epiphallus being 24
times the length of the spermatheca. The lower insertion of the
penis retractor muscle is situated decidedly further down than
in A. miorhyssa, and the spermatheca is shorter.
The jaw is horse-shoe shaped with eight or nine weak unequal
ribs.
Radula with 28. 1. 28 teeth, the central and laterals with small
ectocones developed, 12 marginals with the inner cusp bifid, outer
cusp simple. The fourteenth to sixteenth teeth are transitional.
It will be noticed that all the species have similar kinks in the
epiphallus, showing it to be doubled in the body-cavity in much
the same manner in all of them. The tridentate forms thom-
soniana and porter differ from the others in the greater propor-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 109
tionate length of the spermatheca. The length of the flagellum
varies somewhat between the species, but it is so small in all of
them that very exact measurements of its length are not readily
obtained. Moreover, a vestigial organ so near its extinction as
this is not likely'to be constant in any species. I would not be
surprised to find that it had entirely disappeared in some cases.
Measurements of genitalia, in millimeters.
Thomson-
SPECIES. Miorhyssa. Hyporhyssa. a Portere
Total length of penis,
epiphallus and flagel- 41 40 ca. 28 34
liWit\ ASA Sa GRe See eeeeEe
From atrium to upper
insertion of penis re- 15 11 ? ala
RACLOReere at ctcis 2), s =\a's j
Length of flagellum...... 1} 1 | nearly 1 3—t
“SE, Se 16 16} =
Museum No. of shell sup- ) ~. --~ ney my QF eae
eee on \ 73,557 77,869 77,870 76,739
The absolute measurements will, of course, vary with individual
variation in the size of the individual; but the comparative lengths
of spermatheca and penis + epiphallus, and probably the details
of the penis retractor muscle, will evidently afford valuable specific
characters.
The study of the anatomy of three more species and subspecies
shows Ashmunella to be a remarkably distinet genus anatomically.
There can be no question of its radical difference from Polygyra,
but light may be thrown on the nature of its relationship to
Epiphragmophora by the investigation of the species now referred to
that genus which inhabit the same region. Judging from a single
half-grown and sexually immature specimen of FE. hachitana
which I was able through the courtesy of Prof. Cockerell to exam-
ine, a series strikingly divergent in genitalia from the Californian
forms may be found here. I shall be most grateful for living or
drowned alcoholic specimens of any Epiphragmophora from New
Mexico or Arizona. Also for E. gabbi, facta, rowelli, or ruficincta.
2 The length of the spermatheca was given as 27 mm. in our former paper,
p. 190. This was a typographical error for 21 mm. In the table here given
I have not given the length of the penis, as it is doubtful whether it should
be measured to the point marked z in fig. 1 or to that marked y. I in-
cline now to the latter view, as the portion extruded in a specimen of A.
thomsoniana only extends to y.
110 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
MOLLUSCA OF THE GREAT SMOKY MOUNTAINS.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.
The material recorded and described in this paper was gathered
by a party of five naturalists, Messrs. J. H. Ferriss, Bryant
Walker, George H. Clapp, H. E. Sargent and myself, who visited
the mountains in July and August of 1899.‘ Some account of the
wanderings and adventures of this band has been given else-
where,” and it will suffice here to give their itinerary as briefly as
may be.
From Knoxville, Tenn, the rendezvous, travel was by wagon
through Chilhowee Gap to Cade’s Cove,* in Blount county, Tenn.,
a valley adjacent to the main range of the Great Smokies.
Thence with guides, pack mules and camping outfit we ascended
Thunderhead, camping at ‘‘ Spencer’s Cabin,’’ and collecting
both near the summit and at various lower levels. Ferriss made
a day’s journey to Block House Mountain, a peak running up to
some 5,500 feet, nameless on the Geological Survey topographic
1 All of those mentioned have contributed valuable notes and specimens
toward this paper, so that it really represents our joint and several observa-
tions, which I have correllated and systematized. To this end, most of the
smaller or more critical specimens have been generously entrusted to me for
examination, to the number of some six or eight thousand shells including
those collected by myself.
It should be mentioned that Mr. Ferriss had previously made several
vacation journeys to the Great Smokies, and Mr. Clapp was there in 1898.
The richness of the region in mollusean life was first made known by Mrs.
George Andrews, of Knoxville, although Rugel, many years ago, evidently
ventured within the mountain fastnesses, and Miss Law visited the outlying
ridges.
2 Nautilus, 1900.
’ A mountain valley becomes a ‘‘ cove ’’ on the tongue of the mountaineer.
Some of the ‘‘ coves’’ are of considerable extent and nearly level; the soil
is fertile and the farms productive and- beautiful. Cade’s Cove is also the
name of a post-office in the valley. The localities ‘‘Sugar Cove,’’ ‘*‘ Rose
Cove,’’ Brannon’s, Rowan’s, ‘‘ Laurel Creek’’ are all in Cade’s Cove or
subsidiary valleys thereto. During our stay in Cade’s Cove we were in-
debted to Mr. Blair for numerous courtesies, which are here gratefully ac-
knowledged. .
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ia
map, but shown on the Knoxville sheet, due south of Thunderhead,
with which the 4,700 foot contour connects it. From Thunder-
head the trail follows the ridge along the Tennessee-North Caro-
lina boundary, over Briar Knob (an outrageous climb) and
Proctor’s Knob to the south end of Miry Ridge. Thence
over Siler’s Bald to Clingman Dome (6,600 feet altitude), still
upon the interstate boundary. The main collecting ground on
Clingman was a few hundred feet below the summit along the
north side. This was the last camp of Messrs. Clapp, Walker
and myself; but Mr. Ferriss and Mr. Sargent explored beyond,
first visiting Andrews Bald, an outlier of the Clingman mass, and
then returning to Siler’s Bald they followed the crest of the great
ridge ramifying southwest, to Welch Bald, which reaches 5,000
feet elevation. From this peak they descended the Welch Bald
Branch to Chamber’s creek, and down to the Little Tennessee
river. Crossing the river into Graham county, N. C., they
ascended Tuskeegee creek, collecting en route and on ‘‘ Tuskeegee
Mountain ’’ (not named on the Nantahala topographic sheet), a
spur of the Cheoah Mountains which projects northward between
the headwaters of Tuskeegee creek and Yellow creek. Most of
the shells here came from a valley called ‘‘ Ramp Cove,’’ on the
Yellow creek side. Along Yellow creek they followed the road
to the Cheoah river. From here they entered the Unaka Moun-
tains,* ascending the twin peaks Hangover and Mt. Hayo (5,200
feet) and Stratton Bald, (5,400 feet)—this peak named for Robert
Stratton, being locally known as ‘‘ Bob’s Bald.’’ Some collecting
was then done in ‘‘ Glen Cove,’’ nameless on the Geological Sur-
vey map, but readily located as one of the heads of Slick Rock
ereek, in Tennessee. They then turned northward in Monroe
county, Tenn., stopping at Tallassee ford of the Little Tennessee
river, at Caringer, Tenn., where they collected on the south side of
the river, finally returning across country to Cade’s Cove.® Mr.
Sargent made a journey by rail to Hayesville, Clay county, N. C.,
4 This Unaka range must not be confused with another so-called on some
maps, lying to the west of Roan Mountain.
5 No ordinary atlas gives an adequate idea of the extent or complexity
of this mountain region. Recourse must be had to the excellent topographic
maps published by the U. 8. Geological Survey. The localities mentioned
on the route described above will be found on the Knoxville, Mt. Guyot,
Nantahala, Murphy and Loudon sheets.
112 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
the malacological results of which have been incorporated in this
list.°
In the region where collecting was done the country rock is
mainly sandstone and a coarse gray conglomerate. The coves are
said to have a floor of limestone, but it is evidently buried deeply,
as I noticed no exposures. There is a good exposure of the
“* Hazel Slate’’ on the dizzy, knifelike ridge connecting Siler’s
Bald and Clingman Dome. ‘The strata along the boundary ridge
dip deeply to the south and southeast, and the débris of the broken
edges falling down the northern and northwestern declivities makes
more abundant shelter for rock-loving snails on this than on any
other slope. Springs can be found almost anywhere, up nearly to
the mountain tops, aud frequent rains or cloud-mist hanging about
the summits keep the ground moist, and the deep moss holds
water like a sponge.
RELATIONSHIPS OF THE GREAT SmMoKY MounTAIN Fauna.
The Appalachian mountain system is divided in the south by the
broad valley of eastern Tennessee into two divisions unlike in
their physical features and geological structure. The level strata
of the Western Division, or Cumberland Plateau, though more
or less dissected by stream-erosion, never become so rugged as the
steeply tilted strata forming the noble mountains of the Eastern
Division.
Faunally the two divisions have hitherto been considered to con-
stitute a zodgeographic unit, under the title of the ‘* Cumberland
Subregion.’’* The inclusion of both the Eastern and Western
Divisions under one zodgeographic term would lead one to suppose
a numerically important part of the characteristic species com-
posing the fauna to be common to the whole tract; but the collec-
tor on the ground finds this to be far from the truth. A certain
number of land snails extend over the whole mountain region and
far east and west of it; but of those restricted to the Appalachian
system we find that the Cumberland Plateau has its own set of
species, and the eastern mountains another. The characteristic
® It may be mentioned here that the shells Ferriss collected in 1898 and
labeled ‘‘Unaka Mts.’’ were taken on Citico Creek, in Monroe county,
Tenn.
7See W. G. Binney, Manual American Land Shells, p. 33.
—————————
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 115
species, those which give the mountain regions individuality as
contrasted with the lowlands, are very largely different on the two
sides of the great valley.
I would submit, then, that the ‘‘ Cumberland Subregion ’’ as
understood hitherto is not a faunal unit, but contains two faunule
as diverse from one another as either is from the lowland fauna
to the west or the east of the mountains.
Characteristic forms illustrating this diversity are as follows:
EasterRN DIvisIon. WesteERN DIvIsIon.
(Roan Mt. to the Great Smokies. ) (Cumberland Plateau. )
Polygyra chilhoweensis, Polygyra plicata,
oe subpalliata, es dorfewilliana,
ce MOPERFisstt, ‘< fatigiata,
es clarkii, ae troostiana,
“< _ andrewse, ‘« tridentata complanata,
‘< wheatleyi, ‘© wether byt,
‘* ehristyi, ‘« obstricta,
oe lawe, Vk sargentiana,
a depilata, Ee downieana,
‘« bar bigera, ‘¢ spinosa,
as hirsuta altispira, ee labrosa,
ou “¢ pilula, Oe edgariana,
7 maxillata, os edvardsi,
; ee stenotrema exodon.
Omphalina rugeli, Omphalina inornata.
a subplana,
7 andrewse.
Vitrinizonites.
Zonitoides patuloides. Zonitoides lateumbilicatus.
Gastrodonta lasmodon, Gastrodonta collisella.
os celaxis,
a andrewse,
cm clappt,
oe walkert.
Pyramidula alternata costata, Pyramidula alternata carinata,
“3 bryanti. be cumberlandiana.
The list could be increased, but these main genera sufficiently
illustrate the distinctness of the faunas. It seems that the depres-
8
114 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
sion of the East Tennessee valley practically prevents intermingling
of the mountain species, and has doubtless been a barrier far back
into Tertiary time. Further north, in the Virginias and Pennsyl-
vania, the distinction is almost obliterated; partly owing to the
absence of an intervening tract so markedly differentiated physi-
eally, and partly because, if the northward extensions of the
eastern and western divisions of the mountain system ever had
special faunas, they were obliterated by the severe conditions of the
Ice Age far beyond the southern border of the actual ice sheet, and
there has not been time for the differentiation of new faunas in
the North.
The Eastern Division, with which we have particularly to do,
extending in a great ridge from northeast to southwest, between
Tennessee and North Carolina, is cut transversely into several
sections by rivers breaking through the highest ranges—the upper
Nolichucky, the French Broad and Little Pigeon, and the Little
Tennessee. The mollusk fauna of the section above the Noli-
chucky is fairly well known by the researches of many naturalists
on Roan Mountain and in its vicinity, Mrs. George Andrews and
Mr. A. G. Wetherby having contributed most largely to our
knowledge.
The Great Smokies proper, as far east as Clingman, and the
mountains along the southern side of the Little Tennessee, are now
fairly known by the work of Mrs. Andrews and our party of five,
and especially by Ferriss’ explorations, though no doubt the lists
of species will be largely augmented in future.
The mountain region between the Nolichucky and Clingman’s
Dome, a distance of about seventy-five miles as the crow flies, is
wholly unknown malacologically, so far as I know. We may rea-
sonably expect the forms common to Roan and the Great Smokies
to occur in this intermediate tract; but in view of the extreme
local differentiation, specific and varietal, in the known areas, how
many splendid snails, never yet seen by man, still lurk in their
rocky shelters along these mountain tops!
Comparing the fauna of Roan Mt.* and its environs with that of
® For the fauna of Roan I take Wetherby’s p papers : “Some Notes on
American Land Shells,’’ Journ. Cincinnati Soe. N. H., IV, 1881; and
‘‘Natuaral History } Notes from North Carolina,” in the same Journal, XVI,
1893. p. 87, and XVII, 1894, pp. 69 and 209. These articles, containing the
observations of an experienced naturalist, give as good an idea of the fa auna
as could be obtained without actually working over the ground.
*, war owed GA.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 115
the Great Smokies below Clingman shows the following forms
common to the two tracts, exclusive of those occurring also in
the Cumberland Mts. or elsewhere:
Polygyra andrewse, Vitrea sculptilis,
‘< wheatleyi, Zonitoides elliotti.
Vitrinizonites latissimus, Philomycus wether byi.
Omphalina subplana,
Special to the Roan Mountain neighborhood are:
Polygyra subpalliata, Gastrodonta andrewse,
C3 hirsuta altispira, e celaxis,
Omphalina rugeli, Pyramidula bryanti.
And the following forms have hitherto been found only in the
Great Smokies and adjacent ranges along the Little Tennessee
river:
Polygyra chilhoweensis, Zonitoides patuloides,
Ge ferrisstt, Pyramidula alternata costata,
‘« depilata, Punetum blandianum,
«« edwardsi magnifumosa, _Gastrodonta lamellidens,
s¢ hirsuta pilula, « walkeri,
Omphalina andrewse, . iy clappi.
And also some varietal forms of various other species.
VERTICAL DISTRIBUTION OF SPECIES.
Our data on Polygyra andrewse show that mere altitude has
little, if any, influence within the limits afforded by the region
investigated. Thus, on the flanks of Thunderhead Mt., the shells
up to fully 4,000 feet do not differ in size or other characters from
those of Cade’s Cove, at half that elevation. At Proctor’s Knob
(5,000 feet) and Miry Ridge (4,500-5,000 feet) the average size
and solidity of the shells is undoubtedly somewhat greater than at
the lower stations, though the conditions do not differ much, and
the country rock is not greatly different. What favorable local
cause works this change is not clear. It is only near and at the
exposed mountain tops themselves that the shells suddenly diminish
in size and solidity, as among the scrubby beeches at the storm-
swept summit of Thunderhead, or along the lofty ridge of Cling-
man, from 5,500 to 6,500 feet elevation.
Polygyra wheatleyi, also a species of wide distribution, is similar
116 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
to P. andrewse in its variations. The toothed form with wide lip
occurs throughout the region, except along the ridge of Clingman,
where a more delicate and toothless form replaces the ordinary one.
For the rest it varies greatly in size, and without reference, so far
as I can see, to altitude or exposure, the other factors of soil and
vegetation being probably more potent. Extremely small speci- .
mens occurred in the Tuskeegee Mountains (between Yellow creek
and Tuskeegee creek), at a small elevation, and very large ones
on Stratton Bald, over 5,000 feet above the sea. The only locality
in which anything like racial characters are appearing, however,
is on Clingman, as mentioned above, the only locality, so far as I
know, where the forest is coniferous.
Polygyra ferrissvi has been found so far only at elevations above
4,000 feet, on the Clingman conglomerate which crowns Miry
Ridge and Clingman’s Dome, though probably some of the lower
stations are on the Thunderhead conglomerate, lithologically the
same. An equilateral triangle with sides about seven miles long,
the angles at Miry Ridge, Andrews Bald and Welch Bald, in-
cludes all known localities, though it certainly does not occur over
much of the small area thus enclosed. The researches of our
party along the high ridge west from Miry Ridge, and Ferriss’
and Sargent’s search to the south, make it probable that the
species has no great extension in these directions. It remains to
be seen whether it extends along the interstate boundary ridge
toward Mt. Guyot and the Big Pigeon river gap, but such exten-
sion is likely.
Polygyra depilata has occurred so far only along the interstate
boundary ridge from Thunderhead to Clingman’s Dome, reappear-
ing south of the Little Tennessee river on Stratton Bald.
Pyramidula alternata costata has been found only along the south
side of Cade’s Cove. The small Gastrodonts are probably more
widely distributed than existing data indicate.
List oF SPECIES.
HELIOCINIDA.
Helicina ocoulta (Say).
Rowan creek, Cade’s Cove. A single, rather thick-lipped small
specimen, diam. 54 mm., was taken by Ferriss, and two more by
Sargent. This is further south than any previous record.
CSS eer) (Ee Ae Oa iete Se 6 ri Is +
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. iD Ee A
HELICIDA.
Polygyra tridentata (Say).
Practically typical specimens of this species occur in the upper
Tennessee Valley in eastern Tennessee. In the Great Smokies,
however, a divergence occurs which I have not seen from any
other locality. The basal tooth is split into two denticles; either
distinctly or obsoletely; or without being bifid, the tooth has a
callous slope or buttress against its outer side. This tendency to
double the basal tooth evidently characterizes a mountain race,
but I doubt whether the race be yet firmly enough established to
require recognition in nomenclature. The localities are: ‘‘ Roe’s
Flat,’’ in Cade’s Cove (Ferriss and Clapp, 1898), diam. 16 to 18
mm. Brannon’s, Sugar Cove, off Cade’s Cove, one specimen;
basal tooth very heavy. Hannah Mt. (Ferriss, 1898). Welch
Bald, on the Forney Ridge, diam. ranging from slightly over
13 to nearly 18 mm.; basal tooth nearly as simple in a few speci-
mens as in tridentata, distinctly double or buttressed in others.
Ten specimens collected by Ferriss. A single P. fraudulenta with
typical aperture was taken with them. PP. tridentata also was taken
on Welch Bald branch of Chamber's creek, and on Chamber’s
ereek down to the Little Tennessee.
South of the Little Tennessee, in Graham county, Ferriss took
specimens on Yellow creek and Bob’s Bald; in both localities the
basal tooth was double or calloused.
‘« Other characters of the mountain form of P. tridentata are the
tubercular upper tooth and the flattening of the basal lip. An-
other variety of tridentata from Oakdale, Morgan county (Clapp,
1899), and Concord, Knox county (in the James H. Lewis collec-
tion), has the aperture of var. complanata, with very small and
widely spaced teeth, but is striated like typical tridentata. Largest
from Concord, diam. 23 mm., alt. 103 mm; smallest, diam. 193,
alt. 9 mm. Largest from Oakdale, diam. 204, alt. 9 mm. ;
smallest, diam. 19, alt. 10 mm.’’—G. Hi. C.
Polygyra fraudulenta Pilsbry.
Welch Bald, Swain county, N.C. One specimen, diam. 13 mm.
Polygyra rugeli (Shuttl.).
An abundant species. Tuckaleechee Cove, at about 1,200 feet
elevation, two rather small shells, 11 mm. diam. Cade’s Cove,
very abundant, usually about 14 mm. diam., the ordinary varia-
tion 12 to 15. One umbilicated specimen taken, and one slightly
118 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900
less than 9 mm. diam., the smallest rugeli on record. Ferriss
took a specimen in 1898 which is distinctly carinated at the per-
iphery, this being from ‘‘ Roe’s Cove.”’
Of ten specimens collected at Brannon’s, Sugar Cove, off
Cade’s Cove, by Ferriss, five measure 9 to 10 mm., one 104, and
four 134 to 14 mm. Some of these are among the smallest speci-
mens of the species seen.
On Thunderhead, in the Eagle creek region, N. C., probably
between 3,500 and 4,500 feet, the extremes in a series collected are
11 and 15 mm. diam.
‘¢ Quite common on Miry Ridge in 1898, probably about 4,000
feet, about same size as Cade’s Cove specimens, average. The
smallest shell of this species which I have seen is from Russellville,
Ala. (Lewis collection), 8}mm. diam. From Scott county, Va., I
have two specimens of 9 and 94 mm. diam. respectively.’’—G. H. C.
It occurred also on Andrews Bald, Welch Bald and Chamber’s
creek.
On the Little Tennessee river, at mouth of Chamber’s creek,
Mr. Ferriss collected small specimens, 11 to 12 mm. South of
the Little Tennessee river specimens were taken on Cheoah creek,
and in Glen Cove, in the Unakas, twenty-one specimens, varying
gradually from 104 to 144 mm. diam.
At Tallassee ford, Little Tennessee river, in Monroe county,
Tenn., a dozen specimens taken by Ferriss vary from 12 to
. nearly 138 mm., being thus very uniform in size.
Polygyra chilhoweensis (Lewis).
This magnificent species is characteristic of the Great Smoky
Mountains, having been described from an outlying ridge, the
Chilhowee Mountain, which rises some 2,000 to 2,500 feet—about
the elevation of the slopes of Cade’s Cove. In large series col-
lected by the party of 1899, and in those taken by Ferriss and
Clapp in 1898, no intergradation with P. sayii Binn. was ob-
served. P. chilhoweensis is always larger, with broader lip and
more obsolete teeth or none. PP. sayii is not known to occur in
the region, though Wetherby has taken it at Roan Mountain.
Of many specimens taken by our party, 1899, in ‘‘ Sugar
Cove,’’ off Cade’s, the largest I have seen measures 39 mm.
diam., the smallest 31 mm. Mr. Ferriss gives 40 and 27} mm.
as the diameters of his largest and smallest specimens.
‘oa
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 119
At Eagle creek, N. C., on Thunderhead, 35 mm. diam.
Proctor’s Knob (on the Tennessee-North Carolina boundary,
between the south end of Miry Ridge and Briar Knob), 33 mm.
diam.
South end of Miry Ridge, 31-34 mm. Ferriss’ 274 mm. shell
was from Miry Ridge.
On Clingman’s Dome it is rare, occurring on the western end,
probably at about 4,800 feet. We did not find it near the summit.
South of the Little Tennessee Ferriss found it on Yellow creek,
Graham county, N. C., and in Glen Cove, one of the heads of
Slick Rock creek, in the Unaka Mountains.°®
*Mr. Clapp furnishes the following table of measurements of specimens of
P. sayti and P. chilhoweensis in his collection :
Polygyra saytti Binn.
Gr. diam. 173} lesser 15 alt. 10} mm. New York.
. 19 “6175 —6“ «113: “sO Noorth Carolina.
x 20 eral Soe ye eas New York.
ae 203 oo ois *<. tt ** North Carolina.
Se 203 oa (7 ome eared bl ne
o oh * 49 13° “ NewYork.
23 “20 ‘“* 133 ‘* Ontario, Can.
e 23 Selo) fo 13y* > (Pennsylvania:
pe 23 aaeecOn wads: «16° ) ‘Ohio;
4g 244 Sais Ib “West: Virginia.
Cs 253 “22 14 #=“ Virginia. This specimen has a
double parietal tooth.
oe 274 poet 16 “ Kentucky.
ig 28 Geer rs 1G iy So Virginia:
a oa) eC c
Polygyra chilhoweensis Lewis.
Gr. diam. 313 lesser 26} alt. 21 mm. Miry Ridge. Tenn.
ms 314 Gen VOT] 20 “ =“ The Balsams.”’
ee 33 e 28i 6S 18h ‘© Braden Mt., Campbell county.
rs 33 Boo, fe ela ey Miry-
ig 35 “ 30 “ 21 « ‘Toothed. Campbell couuty.
«354 30 99 Cade’ :
OS oe oe 99 ce ce ade’s.
ae 36+ ae 31 ce 90 “é “ce ce
ee” 365 pale = Olle 18" Cadels:
4 365 sc 32S 24h «= Unaka Mountains.
ma 373 se 32S 224 ** Campbell county.
ea 38 oo 4a ss Toothed. Cade’s.
ts 39 #83). OAL ys « Miry.
a 397 “ ~633)Ci«SSS:s 248 ** = Unaka Mountains.
~ 42 “* 353 ** 265 «** = Bald Mountain, 6,000 feet, Blount
county, Tenn.
This last giant is in the Lewis collection, and Dr. Lewis says: ‘‘ Cubic di-
mensions 9.65 of H. diodonta of the size of Say’s type.’’ I think the alti-
tude given for Bald Mountain, 6,000 feet, isa mistake.—G. H. C.
120 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1900.
Polygyra albolabris (Say).
_ Cade’s Cove, at ‘‘ Roe’s Flat’’ and ‘‘ Laurel Creek ’’ (Ferriss
and Clapp), Blount county, Tenn. South of the Little Tennessee,
in Graham county, N. C., Ferriss reports the species from Tuskee-
gee” Mountain (at the head of Yellow creek), Yellow creek, and
the Cheoah river.
We did not find albolabris on the mountains and it probably
does not ascend over 2,500 feet, if so high as that, in this region,
being confined to the coves.
The specimens from Cade’s Cove are heavy, solid shells, 32 to
35 mm. diam., of beautiful texture, the microscopic sculpture
being sharply developed. Many of them blush with a distinet
rose tint above, the base pale yellow. The white peristome is
strongly developed.
I have been disposed to refer these shells to the variety major,
the typical form of which occurs in Georgia and western extra-
peninsular Florida; but the dividing line between albolabris and
major is at best an exceedingly indistinct one, and we may perhaps
be nearer the truth if we consider the shells of this region as a
transition between a/bolabris and major. A specimen from John-
son City, in the valley of East Tennessee, measures 38 mm. diam.
Polygyra exoleta (Binn.).
Cade’s Cove, abundant; Glen Cove, Unaka Mountains, N. C.;
Tallassee ford, Caringer, Tenn.; well-developed shells of the nor-
mal form. It was not found by us on the mountains, but in the
coves, and apparently does not ascend much above 2,000 feet.
‘¢ The Cade’s Cove shells vary in color, some having a very dark
spire shading to nearly white on the base, while others are either
uniform dark or light.”’—G. H. C.
Polygyra ferrissii Pils.
This beautiful species can never become common, so rugged
and remote are its mountain haunts. To the north and northwest
of the summit of Clingman’s Dome the slope is steep, frequently
precipitous, and covered with a talus of great blocks of rock, deeply
carpeted with sphagnum and shaded by great balsam firs." Like
the other mountains of this ridge, Clingman seems to be a mono-
10 Besides the balsam fir or ‘‘she balsam,’’ Abies fraseri, the Picea rubens
Sargent is mingled with it in the Clingman forest. J am indebted to Mr.
Thomas Meehan for the identifications, based on cones and foliage.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 121
cline, the massive conglomerate beds dipping steeply to the south
or southeast. This results in a rocky talus on the north or north-
west slopes, from disintegration of the faulted or eroded edges of
the strata, while the other slope is less rugged. Mossy trunks lie
in every direction, making progress slow and difficult.
It is on the wet and bare under surfaces of blocks resting
free from the ground that Ferriss’ Mesodon lives. Kneeling or
lying at length on the wet moss, and peering or crawling into these
black crevices, we found the snails on the rock roofs of the cavities,
but only in small numbers. Candles were occasionally of use.
A few specimens were taken among the rank herbage covering
the ground near the summit of the ridge, where they live with
Japp’s variety of Polygyra andrewse.
Besides this locality near the summit of Clingman, a few speci-
mens were taken from a similar station about one and a half miles
down the west end of the mountain on the Tennessee side, prob-
ably near the 4,000 foot contour. This spot was reached by a
desperate climb in the bed of a leaping brook, through a dense
laurel thicket, the way led by the indomitable Ferriss. This
locality is a jolly good place for hard work, but a poor one for
snails.
Ferriss and Sargent found P. ferrissii on Andrews Bald, which
is really but a spur of the Clingman mass.
Another spot at which P. ferrissii has been taken is on ‘‘ Miry
Ridge on the western slope, from a quarter to a half mile below
the point where the ridge leaves the boundary range. The situa-
tion is very similar to that described above for Clingman, except
that mauy of the fallen stones are smaller and the bulk of the
collecting was done by ‘ quarrying.’ On the southern side of
the main range Ferriss found a few specimens in 1898. These
two localities are so close together that they may be considered as
practically the same.’’—G. H. C.
Along the great ridge ramifying southward from Siler’s Bald,
Ferriss and Sargent found P. ferrissii at Welch Bald. This peak
rises to 5,000 feet, and is connected with Miry Ridge and Clingman
by the 4,000 foot contour.
P. ferrissii does not show much variation so far as known. Fer-
riss found a single albino, a lovely light-green shell, which he gave
to the Academy, and Sargent found two light-colored shells, one
122 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
of which was albino, in 1899. Of the specimens taken on Cling-
man, the Jargest measures 234, the smallest 19 mm. diam.
Polygyra palliata Say.
Taken by Ferriss at Laurel creek, Cade’s Cove. It is appar-
ently wanting in the mountains along the interstate boundary, but
reappeared in the Little Tennessee region on Chamber’s creek, and
at its mouth, on Bob’s Bald (Stratton Bald), at Glen Cove,
Unakas, and Tallassee ford, Monroe county, Tenn. Mr. Clapp ob-
serves that the southern specimens are less hairy than the northern.
Polygyra appressa perigrapta Pils.
Tuckaleechee Cove; Cade’s Cove; Eagle Creek, Thunderhead,
about 4,000 feet; Block House, ‘‘ The Balsams,’’ west end of
Clingman, about 6,000 feet; Welch Bald creek and Chamber's
creek, to the Little Tennessee. Everywhere well-developed,
typical specimens. South of the Little Tennessee, Ferriss tuok
specimens on Tuskeegee creek, Cheoah creek, Bob’s Bald and in
Glen Cove. We found P. appressa sculptior Chadw. on the bluffs
of the Tennessee, opposite Knoxville.
Polygyra clarkii (Lea).
Cade’s Cove. Fine specimens were taken about 1,000 feet below
the summit of Thunderhead, on the North Carolina side, though
it is far from common. ‘The largest and smallest shells measure:
Alt. 103, diam. 14 mm.; alt. .10, diam. 15} mm. Clingman’s
Dome and Andrews Bald ; Welch Bald branch of Chamber’s
creek; and south of the Little Tennessee on Tuskeegee and
Cheoah creeks, in Glen Cove, and at Tallassee ford of the Little
Tennessee.
‘¢ Ferriss and I found this species on Miry Ridge in 1898, at
about 4,000 to 4,500 feet. Decidedly scarce. Largest alt. 12,
diam. 15% mm. Largest from Thunderhead, just below Spencer's
Cabin, alt. 104, diam. 154 mm. Largest from Cade’s Cove, alt.
11, diam. 15 mm.’’—G. H. C.
Polygyra thyroides (Say).
We did not find this species along the Tennessee-North Caro-
lina boundary, but Ferriss found it in North Carolina, at Welch
Bald, and on the Little Tennessee at mouth of Chamber’s creek,
and at Tallassee Ford. I picked up a specimen at Porter’s
Academy, Blount county, Tennessee.
e* At
s
o
Py
4
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 123
Polygyra andrewse (W. G. Binney).
This species was originally described from the thin, small, green-
ish horn-colored form occurring on the upper 2,000 feet of Roan
Mountain. This form is in reality a local race of a species widely
spread along the mountain ridge between Tennessee and North
Carolina, and eastward, probably throughout the mountains, ex-
tending into Georgia. Just what its westward limit may be is
uncertain; but apparently it does not invade the valley of eastern
Tennessee watered by the Holston, Nolichucky and Tennessee
rivers. In Blount county, Tenn., we did not find it below about
2,000 feet, first encountering the species on the slopes of (ade’s
Cove. Whether it occurs at lower levels, or in the isolated Chil-
howee ridge, remains to be seen, as no exploration has been made.
It is obviously not a species of the Cumberland elevation, in the
proper restriction of that term.
Typical P. andrewse will, of course, be restricted to the small
Roan Mountain race, first described and well represented by Mr.
Binney’s figures (Man. Amer. Land Shells, fig. 321). For the
larger, more solid, yellowish-brown or slightly greenish form, with
wider lip and a more or less distinct prominence (hardly a tooth)
on the columella, the varietal name normalis may be used, the
types being from Cade’s Cove, Blount county, Tern.
The typical P. andrewse is not known to occur in the Great
Smoky Mountains.
P. andrews normalis 0. var.
This is the form occurring throughout the Great Smokies, in the
coves and on the mountain sides, up in some places to 4,500 feet,
as at the southern end of Miry Ridge, or even higher, at the west-
ern end of Clingman’s Dome. Specimens with a parietal tooth are
very rare, and have only a small or indistinct tooth. No example
of var. normalis with a band is known. Our collecting gave the
following data:
Cade’s Cove. The snails live on densely wooded mountain sides
in the subordinate coves on the Thunderhead side at an elevation
of about 2,000-2,500 feet. We found them crawling on the
ground, and especially on logs or sticks. The lip is broad; none
show a parietal tooth, and none are banded or dark colored.
Largest of a series of seventy-five, 344 mm. diam.; smallest, 29
124 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
mm.; average of the entire lot 314 mm. Seventy-five per cent.
of the shells measure 31-33 mm. diam.
Eagle creek, on the South Carolina side of Thunderhead, from
about 3,500 to 4,000 feet. Station similar to Cade’s Cove, but
sometimes crawling up trees four to six feet. The shells are simi-
lar to the preceding lot, but there are apparently more very pale
or albino specimens among them. Largest of a series of nineteen,
334 mm. diam. ; smallest, 29 mm.; average of the lot, 51 mm.
diam. Two-thirds of the shells are 31-32 mm. diam.
Proctor’s Knob, on the Tennessee-North Carolina boundary, west
of Miry Ridge; alt. about 5,000 feet. The shells taken are solid
and large, measuring 32, 33, 33, 34, 35 mm., diam.; average
334 mm. :
South end of Miry Ridge, 4,500-5,000 feet altitude, on the
boundary trail. Sixteen specimeus, two with a very slight trace
of a parietal tooth. A few show a slight channel at the upper ter-
mination of the outer lip. They occurred on logs of a former
camp. Largest specimens, 33 mm. diam.; smallest, 30 mm.;
average of the lot, 32 mm. diam. The shells are more solid
than at Eagle creek or Cade’s Cove.
‘‘ Miry Ridge, in Tennessee. In 1898 Ferriss and I followed
out the ridge a few hundred yards and then down the western
angle probably 2,000 feet. (According to the ‘ Knoxville
sheet’ Miry is 5,000 feet high where it leaves the boundary. )
We collected normalis all the way down, but found it most plenti-
ful on top. It was a very wet season and the snails were all over
the ground and weeds and even on the trees several feet above
the ground. My largest from Miry is 36} mm. diam.; smallest,
314 mm. diam. Many of the shells were very globose, two meas-
uring, alt. 274, diam. 32 mm., and alt. 28, diam. 344 mm.,
respectively. One shell, 833 mm. diam., has a strong parietal
tooth, and two others have faint teeth.’’—G. H. C.
Western end of Clingman’s Dome, at about 5,600-5,800 feet.
Specimens of the large variety (normalis) are rare here, only
two being found by me, to nineteen of the small variety (see
below), during a long search. These measure 32 and 33 mm.,
are rather solid, toothless, without a groove at the upper insertion
of the lip, and quite similar to specimens from Miry Ridge.
Clapp writes of the specimens from this locality: ‘‘ Shells from
Ss ey PNR ae
Ph By lie eee erent hh Ny a a Pe I i 8 ee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 125
‘The Balsams’ are large and very heavy, largest 353 mm..
smallest 30 mm. diam.’’ As at the second Miry Ridge iocality, it
occurs here with the var. altivaga, but only sparingly.
It was taken also at Andrews Bald and on Chamber’s creek
by Ferriss. South of the Little Tennessee, Ferriss took specimens
on Tuskeegee creek and Yellow creek, Cheoah river and in Glen
Cove, one of the heads of Slick Rock creek. In the Unaka
Mountains, not far from Citico creek, the shells are large and
solid, toothless or with the slight trace of a parietal tooth, lip not
grooved at its junction above. Diam. 33-364 mm. A series
would probably show them to be perceptibly larger as well as more
solid than the Miry Ridge shells, which excel those of other locali-
ties mentioned above.
P. andrewse altivaga n. var.
This is the form of the higher mvuntain tops. It is character-
ized by the small size, globose contour, compact coiling of the
whorls which scarcely exceed five in number; the striation being
very fine and delicate; parietal wali unarmed or with a small
acute tooth; lip flat and rather wide, the internal rib interrupted
near the upper termination, leaving a slight channel at the angle
of junction, more or less obvious in different specimens. Shell
thinner in adults than in adults of var. normalis ; colors typically
darker and richer, but varying to pale with a dark band above
the periphery. Types from near the summit of Clingman’s
Dome, with-P. ferrissii.
Mr. Clapp first directed attention to this form, which he and Mr.
Ferriss took at the summit of Thunderhead and at Miry Ridge in
1898. While there is no sharply defined single character sepa-
rating it from the ordinary form of P. andrewse normalis, yet
among some hundreds of specimens of P. andrewse I have exam-
ined I find it easy to distinguish this form, which is by all odds
the handsomest of the varieties of P. andrewse. The following
details relate to special localities :
Clingman Dome, near the summit, 6,500 feet elevation. On
herbage and moss on the ground, shaded by balsams. ‘The shells
are often dented while alive, and mostly appear to complete their
growth in two seasons, the second period of growth beginning of
a lighter color and slightly coarser texture than the preceding
growth. Of thirty-two specimens the largest has a diameter of
126 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
28, the smallest 24 mm., eighty per cent. being from 25 to 27
mm., the average of the lot is 26 mm. Thirty per cent. are more
or less distinctly banded. Mr. Clapp writes of the specimens
taken by him that ‘‘ out of thirty-six shells, nineteen are dark
and seventeen banded, some of the latter with only the peripheral
band, others with an additional subsutural band. Largest 29
mm., smallest 244 mm. diam. West of ‘ Double Springs’ I got
one specimen 314 mm. diam., alt. 24 mm ’”’
Andrews Bald, south of Clingman Dome, and connected with
it by a high ridge, alt. about 5,800 feet. Forms entirely like that
on Clingman were found here by Ferriss.
West end of Clingman, between 5,500 and 6,000 feet, Shells
similar to those from top of Clingman, but usually paler colored.
Fewer specimens are banded, one with two distinct bands; and a
few specimens show a minute but sharply defined parietal tooth,
quite near the upper end of the lip. The largest of nineteen
examples is 28 mm., the smallest 244 mm. diam.; average of the
lot 26 mm.
Miry Ridge. ‘‘ In the same locality as ferrissii, and either under
the rocks or in the moss overhanging the edges of the rocks, on
the western angle of the ridge. I think the Miry Ridge shells
collected last year are more typical than those from Clingman as
they are more mature and heavier. Out of fifteen Miry Ridge
specimens in my collection, six have the parietal tooth strong, three
have it faint and six are toothless. These shells also show the
channel much better than these from Clingman on account of the
lip being fully formed. Of the fifteen shells, three are dark, six
are light (we did not get this color variety on Clingman), two
have a peripheral band, one has a faint line between the band and
the suture, and three are what Ferriss calls ‘ half and half ’—that
is, the band extends from the periphery to the suture. Largest
Miry shell diam. 30, alt. 214 mm.; smallest, diam. 26, alt. 184
mm.’’—G. H. C.
The specimens vary from the pale greenish-yellow tint, occasion-
ally with a band above, to a dark reddish-brown color, similar
to the Clingman form. The largest of twelve specimens is 284,
the smallest 25 mm. diam.; average of the lot 27 mm. diam.
Thunderhead, at the summit, in a sparse growth of scrub
beeches, under bunches of moss on the trunks. The shells ar
a Baas eae eee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 127
pale green or tinted with red, frequently with a reddish band, and
sometimes having an indistinct band at the suture. The largest of
six shells measures 254 mm., the smallest 224 mm. ; average of the
lot 24 mm. Mr. Clapp found nine shells, which measure,
“Largest 26 mm., smallest 23 mm.; average of Jot 244 mm.
One is dark red, four light, three with a single band, and one dark
above, lighter beneath. One has a faint parietal tooth.”’
The shells inhabit a grove of beeches at the edge of the
“‘bald.’? The trees are dwarfed by the exposed situation, and
look, as one approaches the grove, like an old country orchard.
The shells differ from those of Clingman in being smaller on the
average and paler colored. The form is that of the Clingman
_ altivaga.
Polygyra wheatleyi (Bld.).
A characteristic and widespread species in this region. It is
allied to P. ferrissii rather than to the species with which it has
hitherto been grouped. The specimens vary considerably in size,
and in presence or absence of the parietal tooth, the variations
being mainly local rather than indiscriminate.
Specimens from Cade’s Cove (2,000 feet) and Thunderhead (up
to 5,300 feet) are of good size, 13 to 164 (rarely 18) mm diam.,
moderately solid, with very broad lip and a well-developed pari-
etal tooth when mature. Similar specimens occur on Block House
Mountain (south of Thunderhead), diam. 16 to 17 mm.
Ferriss found some beautiful greenish-white albino specimens in
Cade’s Cove.
Mirv Ridge. ‘‘ Quite common in 1898, and intermediate be-
tween the Thunderhead and Clingman forms, the lip being narrow
and the parietal tooth small. Smallest of five, 14 mm. ; largest,
15} mm. diam. Found down the western slope, from 4,000 to
4,500 feet."—G. H. C.
On Clingman Dome the shells are all small, diam. 124 to 14
mm., thin, without a parietal tooth, the aperture more rounded, and
the lip less flattened. This seems quite a well-marked local form.
It occurred from our camp near the western end to the summit.
On Welch Bald the shells are like those from Cade’s, diam.
144-16 mm. Ferriss took it also along Chainber’s creek.
South of the Little Tennessee, specimens were taken by Ferriss
128 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
on Tuskeegee Mountain (north of Tuskeegee creek), where they
are remarkably small, diam. 12-124 mm., but the lip is wide and
a parietal tooth developed in fully adult shells. They are not
like the form from Clingman. At Bob’s Bald, near Mt. Hayo, in
Graham county, N. C., the shells are very large, 20-23 mm.
diam., the parietal tooth present but small. On Hangover Lead,
four miles east of Mt. Hayo, they are 124-13 mm., and all den-
tate. Mt. Hayo, 16-17 mm., dentate. At Tallassee ford of the
Little Tennessee river, the specimens are like those from Cade’s
Cove. It occurs also in Glen Cove.
Polygyra christyi (Bld.).
Roes Cove and Rowan’s in Cade’s; one specimen taken on
Clingman’s Dome. South of the Little Tennessee, Ferriss and
Sargent found it on Tuskeegee creek and Cheoah river.
Subgenus STENOTREMA.
The various interrelations of the Stenotrema species have been
discussed in more or less detail by Bland, Wetherby and Binney.
Probably the primary division of the group should be based upon
the epidermal sculpture, the first five species of the Catalogue
Amer. L. Shells—spinosa, labrosa, edgariana, edvardsi and bar-
bigera, to which depilata should be added—having no erect hairs
whatever above, but short curved epidermal laminz, running with
the growth-lines; while stenotrema, hirsuta and the rest have either
erect hairs above or are nude. Species of the first division are
more or less carinated or angular at the periphery, at least in front
of the aperture; those of the second division usually are rounded,
though sometimes subangular.
This division of the group separates depilata from P. stenotrema,
of which it has hitherto been considered a variety; and as there
are several other characters of importance sundering the two, it
will be better to treat depilata as a distinct species. The distin-
guishing characters of depilata and stenotrema, and the varieties of
the latter, are shown in the following key:
a.—Surface with short processes parallel with the growth-lines
above, but no erect hairs anywhere; parietal lamella slighter
and straighter than in stenotrema, the inner end not bending
in to meet the basal lip, outer end not passing under the
basal lip, when viewed from below; no callous ridge between
OD el ERLE I EO LOE.
&
4
2
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 129
the lamella and the peripheral termination of the outer lip ;
space between lamella and lip wider than in stenotrema ;
basal lip with a shallow median notch, but no notch or
tooth on the outer are of the lip; fulerum quite small;
spire high; periphery angular; surface hairless, with faint
spiral striz and -a@ silken lustre below.
P. depilata Pils.
a’.—Surface without laminar processes above, bearing erect hairs or
none; parietal lamella very strong, crescentic, its inner end *
curving in and terminating at the axis close to the inner
end of the basal lip; outer end also strongly incurved.
P. stenotrema (Fer.), Pfr.
b.—Surface densely thoigh shortly hirsute or beset with the
sears of hairs, both above and below.
c.—Outer lip with a deep notch for the reception of the
outer end of the deeply incurved parietal lamella, a
distinct tooth outside of the notch; fulerum long ;
form depressed; pale colored. 6 X 10mm. Wood-
ville, Jackson county, Ala.
P. stenotrema exodon Pils.™
e’.—Outer lip less notched and less distinctly or not
toothed; fulerum decidedly shorter; form more
globose, more elevated, and usually dark colored.
Typical stenotrema.
b’.—Surface without hairs or their scars; other characters of
typical stenotrema; 64 X 10 mm. Nashville, Belle-
vue and Johnson City, Tenn.
P. stenotrema nuda, n. var,
Polygyra depilata Pilsbry.
This species was first found by Mrs. Andrews. It is not closely
allied to P. stenotrema, with which I formerly associated it, but to
P. edvardsi. It is known from high up in ‘‘ Sugar Cove,’’ on the
Thunderhead side of Cade’s Cove (one specimen); near the sum-
mit of Thunderhead, where all our party took specimens, and
The names globosa (Nautilus vi, p. 77) and subglobosa (Catalogue,
p- 14) are to be suppressed. Both are purely nomina nuda. As not a
word of definition has been published, and as they are quite inapplicable
to the depressed variety here defined from Woodville, Ala., no good purpose
would be served by their perpetuation. Both typical stenotrema and var.
exodon were collected at Woodville by Mr. H. E. Sargent.
9
130 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
where Mrs. Andrews first found it, and Clingman Dome, near the
summit. ‘‘ Ferriss and I found it on Miry Ridge in 1898, same
locality as P. ferrissii. Occasionally on trees in moss.’’—G. H. C.
It also occurs on Andrews Bald, a spur of Clingman, in Swain
county, N. C., and south of the Little Tennessee river in the
northeastern Unaka Mountains, on Stratton Bald (Sargent). In
the specimens from this peak, collected not far from the 5,000-
foot contour, the notch in the basal lip is shallower and wider
from the obsolescence of the callus between it and the axis. a
It lives in wet moss and on rocks; not around logs, like our
northern Stenotremes.
In size it varies but little, the extremes being 94-104 mm.
diam. The conic spire is lower in some individuals, there being
sometimes as much as 1 mm. variation in height in specimens of
the same diameter. The silky sheen of the surface seems invari-
able. Some albino specimens from Thunderhead are light green.
Polygyra edvardsi magnifumosa 2. var.
Shell small, dark brown and lustreless, often with some golden
streaks or spots; the periphery angular in front; whorls 4} to 53; the
upper surface distinctly wrinkle-striate, not hairy but when unworn
showing short cuticular lamin (like those on P. spinosa); lower
surface smooth, showing fine, slight spiral striz, and sometimes
very short hairs or hair-scars. Aperture much as in P. steno-
trema, the parietal lamella well developed, curving downwards at
both ends, a callous ridge running from it to the peripheral inser-
tion of the outer lip; notch of the basal lip median, of moderate
size; no tooth developed on the callus within the outer lip. Alt.
4.7 to 5, diam. 7 to 74 mm.
Brannon’s and Chestnut Flats, in Cade’s Cove, Blount county,
Tenn. (one specimen an albino); Welch Bald, on the Forney
Ridge (one specimen), and Welch Bald branch of Chamber’s
creek (nineteen specimens); Chamber’s creek (four), all in Swain
county, N. C. Also south of the Little Tennessee river, in Graham
county, N. C., on Tuskeegee creek (three specimens), and on the
Cheoah river, near the confluence of Yellow creek (thirty-one
specimens). ‘‘ Bob’s Bald’’ (three specimens). Clay county,
N. C.; at Hayesville (forty-three specimens).
In all, 105 specimens from some eight localities, the extreme
é
=
:
q
;
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 151
points about forty miles apart. Its vertical range is from about
4,500 feet on Welch Bald toa little below 2,600 feet at Hayesville,
Chamber's creek, Cheoah river, ete.
Despite the varying localities, the specimens are remarkably
uniform in character. The largest specimen was taken on Cham-
ber’s creek, measuring 5.7 mm. alt.,.8.8 mm. diam.; otherwise
typical. The peculiar sculpture of the upper surface, resembling
that of P. spinosa, depilata, edvardsi, ete., and wholly unlike P.
stenotrema or P. hirsuta, amply distinguish it from the latter
species. Compared with P. edvardsi, described from West Vir-
ginia, the var. magnifumosa differs in the following features: the
parietal lamina is higher, stronger and more sinuous, with a
stronger callus between it and the upper end of the peristome;
the lip notch is deeper and wider, and the periphery is less
angular.
P. edvardsi was collected at Burnside, Pulaski county, Ky., by
Messrs. Ferriss and Sargent, the specimens differing from the
West Virginians in the well-developed lip notch.
P. barbigera (Redf.).
A single half-grown shell from Hayesville, Clay county, N. C.,
was taken by Mr. Sargent; and while the peristome is still sharp
and simple, the shaggy cuticle, fringed at the sutures, indicates
this rare species.
Polygyra stenotrema (‘Fer.’ Pir.).
Practically typical specimens occur throughout the region, but
in some localities, noted below, huge fellows larger than ever have
been recorded were found by Mr. Ferriss. The localities are:
Tuckaleechee Cove, and Cade’s Cove, including the dependent
“«Sugar Cove;’? Thunderhead, the specimens being very densely
hirsute above and below, 9-11 mm. diam., and have an extremely
small notch in the basal lip.
Chamber’s creek, Swain county, N. C. Diam. varying from
8.7 to 10 mm. Densely hirsute, the notch very small in two,
quite large in three specimens, the latter smaller. Another lot
from same locality consists of eight very large, densely hirsute
specimens, normal in form, varying from 734 X 11 to 8.2 X 12.3
mm., whorls 54 to 6. Some of these shells are the largest I have
seen of the species.
132 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1900.
Tuskeegee creek, Graham county, N. C., small specimens, diam.
9 and 10 mm., the form typical
Tallassee ford of the Little Tennessee river, Monroe county,
Tenn. Several large, globose shells, 114-12 mm. diam., and
some decidedly smaller, 84-10 mm. diam.
Yellow creek, Mt. Hayo, Stratton Bald and Glen Cove, Graham
county, and Hayeaviile, Clay county, are other North Carolina
localities where Ferriss or Sargent took specimens.
Polygyra hirsuta pilula n. var.
Smaller than typical hirsuta, with more elevated spire; whorls
nearly 5, the last with well-rounded periphery, surface beset with
rather long curved hairs. Parietal tooth sinuous, connected with
the peripherai end of the outer lip by a callous ridge. Basal lip
3-toothed, the median notch much deeper than in hirsuta, with
raised edges, the outer tooth small. Alt. 44, diam. 6 mm.
The smallest specimens measure, alt. 4, diam. 54 mm.
Thunderhead Mountain, from near the summit to Cade’s Cove.
This form is not only smaller and more globular than P. hirsuta,
but the armature of the basal lip is different. The median notch
is much deeper, and instead of being a mere notch in a straight
calloused edge, it appears as a deep sinus between two wide,
irregular teeth.
This form seems to be confined to the Great Smoky Mountains.
It was first found in June, 1895, by Mrs. George Andrews.
Subsequently Messrs. Ferriss and Clapp collected specimens; and
the party of five collected it in 1899. We found it in ‘‘ Sugar
Cove,’’ ‘‘ Lead Cove,’’ ‘‘ Rowan’s’’ and Laurel creek in Cade’s
Cove, and on Thunderhead, near the middle summit, among the
rocks where Gastrodonta lamellidens was found. Sargent found it
on Welch Bald, and Ferriss took specimens on Tuskeegee creek,
below the Little Tennessee river, in Graham county, N. C. It
apparently does not descend below 2,000 feet above the sea.
This variety must not be confused with a small form of the
species which occurs in the mountains of Pennsylvania, Maryland
and Virginia, which is more depressed than var. pi/ula, and has
not the peculiar basal lip described above. In the West, Michi-
gan, Illinois, Iowa, ete., a’‘form decidedly larger than that of the
Middle States occurs, still retaining the normal shape of the basal
lip.
or
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 135
In the region of Roan Mountain, ascending to about 5,000 feet,
P. hirsuta is represented by another well-marked subspecies, P. h.
altispira Pils. This form is large, diam. 9, alt. 7 mm., with
high, conoidal spire, and broad, deep labial notch. It occurs also
in the Black Mountains, N. C. (Hemphill), and in its area ap-
parently replaces the true P. hirsuta, as the subspecies pilula does
in the Great Smokies. It has the habits of P. depilata, accord-
ing to Wetherby, living in damp moss, not under logs and sticks,
like the lowland P. hirsuta.
Polygyra monodon cincta (Lewis).
Found very sparingly at Chamber’s creek Church, on Yellow
creek, Cheoah river, in Glen Cove, and at Tallassee ford of the
Little Tennessee river. The specimens are nearly typical of the
variety, which has more striking peculiarities of form than of color.
In the James Lewis collection there are specimens from Hayesville,
N.C. It was found to be a very rare shell by Ferriss.
PUPIDA.
Bifidaria contracta (Say).
“Sugar Cove’’ and Laurel creek, in Cade’s Cove (Ferriss,
Clapp and Walker); Thunderhead (Clapp, one specimen). It
is rare in the mountains.
Vertigo bollesiana Morse.
Cade’s Cove (Ferriss and Clapp); ‘‘ Tuskeegee Mountains,’’
between Yellow creek and Tuskeegee creek (Ferriss). Very rare
in the mountains, and apparently quite typical.
Strobilops labyrinthicus strebeli (Pfr.).
Cade’s Cove (Clapp et al.) ; Tuskeegee creek (Ferriss).
ACHATINIDA.
Cochlicopa lubrica (Mull.).
*‘ Sugar Cove’’ in Cade’s Cove, Blount county, Tenn., and
“* Ramp Cove,’’ between the headwaters of Tuskeegee and Yel-
low creeks (Sargent). Very rare in the mountains, a single speci-
men found at each of the two localities.
CIRCINARIIDZ.
Circinaria concava (Say).
Cade’s Cove ; Thunderhead ; Clingman’s Dome, to near the
summit; Welch Bald; Chamber’s creek. South of the Little
134 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Tennessee it was taken by Ferriss on Tuskeegee and Yellow creeks,
Cheoah river, in Glen Cove, and at Tallassee ford.
After his visit to the mountains in 1898, Mr. Clapp called my
attention to the fact that there are two forms of this species in the
Smokies, a larger and a smaller. This, however, seems to be a
case of wide range of individual variation in size. Thus, of five
adult specimens taken in the lily patch near the summit of Cling-
man, the largest is 154 mm. diam., with 54 whorls, the smallest
12} mm. diam., with 44 whorls. Two others are 13? and 14}
mm. in diam.
A. larger series taken on Thunderhead, in the Eagle Creek
region, N. C., between 3,500 and 4,500 feet, contains larger shells,
the measurements of four being 183, 164, 15 and slightly under
14mm. ‘There seems but little variation in the specimens from
Cade’s Cove, adults measuring about 16 mm. diam. Of course
only specimens with the peristome completely developed are consid-
ered. Mr. Clapp’s note follows: ;
‘¢ Largest from Cade’s 184, smallest 134 mm. diam. Largest
from Thunderhead, 205 mm., with 5 whorls; smallest, 14 mm.,
with 44 whorls. The small shells have a proportionately wider
umbilicus. It may be merely an optical illusion, but the last
whorl of the small shells appears to be subangular around the
umbilicus. A specimen from Philadelphia, Loudon county,
Tenn., in the Lewis collection, measures 22} mm. diam.’’
ZONITIDZ.
Omphalina fuliginosa polita Pils.
Fine specimens up to 28 mm. diam. occur in Cade’s Cove.
Those from Thunderhead, near the summit, are not so large, diam.
25-26 mm. Mr. Ferriss took it also at Chamber’s Church, at
the mouth of Chamber’s creek, Swain county, N. C. In 1898
Clapp collected specimens along the bluffs of Little river, in
Tuckaleechee Cove. They are much smaller than the Great Smoky
shells, the largest being only 20 mm. in diam.
Omphalina levigata (‘ Raf.’ Beck).
Mesomphix levigata Raf., Beck, Index Molluscorum, p. 7, 1837.
Helix levigata Fér., Pfr., et auct., not Helix levigata Pennant, 1777.
The name of this species has been long preoccupied as a Helix,
but I propose to avoid the obloquy of changing it by dating it
el
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 135
from Beck, who really first defined the species by a reference to
Férussac’s figures, and whose publication was anterior to that of
Pfeiffer, who has generally been cited as authority for the name.
The synonomy has been ably discussed by Mr. W. G. Binney,
who, however, does not credit Beck with the name. The type
locality is ‘*‘ Kentucky.’’
Not uncommon in Cade’s Cove, attaining 20 mm. diam. Those
from high on Thunderhead are rather smaller; the color being
decidedly green. Mr. Clapp took one specimen on the west end
of Clingman. Mr. Ferriss took duskier specimens on the Cheoah
river, Graham county, N. C.
Two notable varieties occur near the Little Tennessee river.
0. levigata perlevis n. v.
Whorls more convex beneath than in typical /evigata, the last
whorl much smoother above, not rib-striate, its width at the aper-
ture (measured above) less than one-third the diameter of the
shell. Aperture rounded-lunate, almost as high as wide. Alt.
93, diam. 17 mm. This is from Tallassee ford of the Little Ten-
nessee river, Monroe county, Tenn.
Omphalina levigata latior n. v.
Broad and depressed, more broadly excavated around the umbili-
cus than the typical form, the last whorl wider, its width at aper-
ture (measured above) one-third the diameter of the shell, and
far smoother than in lJevigata, being wrinkled irregularly, but
without the close, deeply cut and subregular rib-strize of the
typical form of that species. Aperture oval-lunate, far wider than
high. Color yellowish green. Alt. 153, diam. 24 mm., or as
large as 14 X 27 mm.
Tallassee ford, Little Tennessee river, Monroe county, Tenn. ;
also Chamber’s creek Church, at junction of Chamber’s creek with
the Little Tennessee river.
A large, flattened and very green form, in which the rib-striz
are obsolete on the last whorl, and the aperture decidedly oval.
In O. 7. perlevis the base is more convex around the umbilicus,
the mouth much more nearly round, and the last whorl narrower.
QO. 1. latior has an elegant microscopic sculpture, which gives the
upper surface a somewhat silky lustre.
136 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Omphalina subplana (Biuney).
In this species the apex and inner whorls are striated, as in O.
levigata, not smooth as in inornata. Splendidly developed speci-
mens occur in the Smokies; the largest taken by myself in Cade’s
Cove measuring 214 mm. diam. On the flanks of Thunderhead
equally large specimens occur nearly to the summit, one in Clapp’s
collection measuring 234 mm. diam. A clear green albino is
among those collected there. As on Roan Mountain, it lives with
Vitrinizonites, but is not rare. The shells are hard to clean,
scarcely ever ‘‘ pulling ”’ well.
It occurs, but rarely, on Clingman’s Dome. Ferriss took speci-
mens on Block House Mountain and Welch Bald, and south of the
Little Tennessee river on Tuskeegee creek, Cheoah river, Mt.
Hayo and in Glen Cove.
Omphalina andrewse Pilsbry.
A very characteristic shell of the Great Smokies in Blount
county, replacing here the O. inornata of the Cumberland Plateau.
The largest taken by myself in Cade’s Cove is 16 mm. diam.,
but Clapp took one 17} mm. diam. On Thunderhead, near the
summit (about 5,400 feet), they are smaller, diam 12 mm.. and
rather thinner. Specimens with a dark band above the periphery
occasionally occur. It is one of the most beautiful shells of the
region. Specimens were taken by Clapp on Miry Ridge, in
1898, diam. of the largest 17 mm. Also collected by Ferriss on
Block House, Clingman’s, Welch Bald, Welch Bald branch,
Chamber’s creek, and south of the Little Tennessee river on Tus-
keegee creek, Cheoah river, Mt. Hayo, in Glen Cove, and at
Tallassee ford. It therefore seems generally distributed in the
Great Smokies and northeastern Unakas.
0. andrewse montivaga Pils.
This form seems to show no intergradation with andrewse, and
is chiefly notable for the prolonged form of the aperture. The
largest taken in Cade’s Cove measures 19 mm. diam., and it is
usually over 17. They are smaller, 15 to 17 mm., near the sum-
mit of Thunderhead. Mr. Ferriss took specimens on Welch Bald
and Chamber’s creek, and south of the Little Tennessee on Cheoah
river. Clapp took it in 1898 on Miry Ridge, diam. 18% mm.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 157
Vitrinizonites latissimus (Lewis).
Slopes on south side of Cade’s Cove, about 2,000-2,500 feet
elevation; near summit of Thunderhead, lurking in deep moss
covering the damp rocks; Block House Mountain, just south of
Thunderhead; Clingman’s Dome, not far from the summit, in
moss, on the Polygyra ferrissii and P. andrewse altivaga ground;
Welch Bald; and below the Little Tennessee, Ferriss took one
specimen on Stratton Bald, in the northeastern part of the Unaka
range.
The species is ubiquitous in the Great Smokies everywhere above
2,000 feet, though not found in great numbers, and restricted to
moist places where moss carpets the rocks or logs. These conditions
are met on the lower levels where the mountain slopes are densely
shaded, but on the cloud-touched heights not much shade is
necessary.
The shell of V. datissimus is often deficient in calcareous stiffening
in the region near the axis behind the columella, and it is more or
less shrunken or dented there. This is a significant feature, show-
ing that Vitrinizonites is varying toward the condition of shell we
find in Cryptostrakon, Peltella, Gotis and some forms of Gira-
sia,” in all of which decalcification has affected the same region of
the shell. The following form, however, shows more impartial
decalcification, or, to be more exact, want of calcification.
Vitrinizonites latissimus uvidermis, n. var.
Near the summit of Thunderhead and Clingman’s Dome, in the
wet moss covering the rocks, there lives a form of Vitrinizonites
of about the size of /atissimus, but almost wholly lacking any cal-
careous layer of the shell. The cuticular test is more or less dented
and distorted in the living snails; and when ‘‘ cleaned’’ the shell
collapses like wet paper, unless stuffed with cotton. The surface
is usually less brilliant than in V. /atissimus, and the last half-
turn of the suture deviates somewhat more tangentially. The color
varies from as light as the ordinary V. latissimus of the region to
a very dusky, even blackish, shade. These ‘‘ grape-skin Vitrini-
zonites,’? as we called them, live with the normal form, but are
apparently always easily distinguished as above indicated. <A
cleaned shell quite resembles the empty skin of the ordinary free-
—_—
1 See Manual of Conchology, XII, second series, p. 211.
138 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
skinned Concord grape. The form was first found by Ferriss and
Clapp in 1898. It is not improbable that a study of the soft parts,
which I hope to find time fer before long, will show it to differ
specifically from V. /atissimus.
Vitrea petrophila pentadelphia n. var.
Shell about the size of V. indentata ; glossy, pink-brown, openly
umbilicated, convex above, composed of 44 whorls, those of the
spire slowly widening, the last much wider; surface sculptured with
many unevenly spaced radiating grooves similar in character to
those of V. indentata, but more numerous; and there are some
strize intermingled, the spire being more closely striate. No men-
tionable spiral strize seen with an enlargement of fifty diameters.
The grooves continue upon the base, but are weaker there. Aper-
ture broadly lunate. Alt. 24, greatest diam. 5 mm.
Cade’s Cove, Blount county, Tenn., in many places—‘‘ Roe’s”’
and ‘‘ Sugar’’ Coves, ‘‘ Rowan’s’’ and Laurel creeks—from about
1,800 to 2,200 feet elevation. Apparently wanting in the higher
region, at least not found by us along the crests and peaks; but
taken by Ferriss and Sargent on Stratton Bald, in the Unaka
Mountains, Graham county, N. C., at what altitude not known,
and at or below the level of Cade’s Cove on the Cheoah river,
near the junction of Yellow creek, and in Monroe county, Tenn.,
at Tallassee ford of the Little Tennessee river, near Caringer.
This Vitrea may be briefly characterized as similar to V. petro-
phila, but with only 44 instead of 5-54 whorls in shells of the
same size, slightly wider umbilicus, Jess embracing and therefore
less deeply lunate aperture and usually pinkish instead of whitish-
corneous color. V. rhoadsi is a smaller shell with decidedly
narrower umbilicus.
V. petrophila is not known to occur in the Great Smoky Moun-
tains.* Judging from specimens taken by Mr. Clapp and myself at
Knoxville, Tenn., and part of the original lot received from
Bland, as well as other specimens collected by Ferriss and Sargent
at Burnside, Ky., that species is very constant in characters. JV.
p. pentadelphia seems equally constant in the considerable number
I have now seen, collected by Mrs. Andrews and the members of
18 The furm reported thence in the Catalogue of American Land Shells,
p. 27, No. 263, was var. pentadelphia,
a
eae eee
¥
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 139
our party of 1899. It is the memory of this journey of five
conchologists which the name seeks to perpetuate.
Vitrea carolinensis (Ckll.).
This species has been discriminated from V. scu/ptilis in the
published accounts, but it is very much more closely allied to V.
indentata. Indeed, it becomes an extremely difficult matter to
separate the smaller form of carolinensis, such as prevails in the
Great Smoky Mountains, from V. indentata. There is, however,
one usually decisive criterion: V. carolinensis when examined with
a very strong hand-lens, or, better, a compound microscope with an
enlargement of 25 or 50 diameters, shows a minute sculpture of
very even, close, clear-cut spiral engraved lines. In V. indentata
the same magnification only brings out an extremely weak stria-
tion or none; only rarely does it approach the condition of V.
carolinensis. P
This micro-sculpture is so minute that an ordinary pocket lens,
even a very good one, rarely reveals it. But I have seen very
few specimens which could not be definitely referred either to
carolinensis or indentata when examined with a compound micro-
scope. The sculpture is visible only in the ‘‘ high-light’’ or point
of reflection.
Common throughout the Great Smoky ranges wherever explored.
In Cade’s Cove and the dependent valleys it has been taken in
many places: Rowan creek, diam. 6 mm.; ‘‘ Brannon’s’’;
“‘ Chestnut Flats,’’ diam. 6 mm.; Laurel creek, diam. 53 to
74 mm.; ‘‘ Sugar Cove,’’ diam. 6 mm.; most of these having
been collected by Ferriss; the localities lying between 1,800 and
2,200 feet.
On Thunderhead, near the summit, at 5,300—5,400 feet, on Block
House Mountain, and on the western end of Clingman Dome,
6,000 feet, they measure 5 to 6 mm. diam.; Welch Bald, diam.
64 mm.; and on Chamber’s creek, adults 5 to 6 mm. diam.
South of the Little Tennessee river specimens were taken by
Ferriss and Sargent on Tuskeegee creek and Cheoah river, diam.
7 mm.; Hayesville, diam. 54 mm.; Stratton Bald, in the north-
eastern Unakas, alt. about 5,000 feet. In Monroe county, Tenn.,
it occurred at Tallassee ford, diam. 64 mm.
It was taken on Miry Ridge in 1898 by Clapp, whose largest
specimen measures 84 mm. diam.
140 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Besides these mountain localities, Mr. Clapp collected V. caroli-
nensis at Oakdale, Morgan county, Tenn., and Mr. Ferriss obtained
at at New Pittsburg, Tenn. (64 mm. diam.), and at Burnside,
Ky., diam 6 to7 mm. I found a specimen among shells Clapp
and I collected on the south side of the Tennessee at Knoxyille.
Vitrea sculptilis (Bld.).
This strikingiy distinct species was taken in Cade’s Cove and on
Thunderhead Mountain, up to the spot near the summit where
Gastrodonta lamellidens was found. The largest from this locality
is 7 mm. diam. Ferriss and Sargent add the localities Block
House, Andrew’s Bald, Chamber’s creek, in Swain county, and
Cheoah river and Stratton Bald in Graham county, N. C. Also
Tallassee ford and Welch Bald. It was described from some-
what below these localities, in the Anantahely Mountains, N. C.
Under a strong lens the surface of this species is seen to be
granulose in spiral series, and the edges of the radial grooves seem
somewhat raised. This is usually more prominent on the spire
than on the last whorl.
Vitrea capsella (Gld.).
Probably most of the examples from the Great Smokies are
referable to the variety placentula, which is larger than typical
capsella, with an additional whorl; but one lot of seven shells
from ‘‘ Sugar Cove,’’ off Cade’s Cove, is typical capsella. The
largest shell measures 5 mm, diam., and has 64 whorls. Sargent
took it in ‘‘ Ramp Cove,’’ on Tuskeegee Mountain, between the
headwaters of Tuskeegee and Yellow creeks, in Graham county,
IN-G:
V. capsella placentula (Shuttl.).
Cade’s Cove; Thunderhead near summit, a little smaller. It
occurs also on Chamber’s creek, Swain county, N. C. It is very
difficult to draw a line between capsella and placentula.
Conulus chersinus (Say).
Cade’s Cove (Ferriss and Clapp).
Zonitoides arboreus (Say).
Cade’s Cove, at many points (Laurel and Rowan’s creeks,
Roe’s, Brannon’s, ete.), but not common; Thunderhead, at Spen-
cer’s Cabin, under dried cow-dung, and near Eagle Creek; Block
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 141
House Mountain, south of Thunderhead; west end of Clingman,
at about 5,800 feet, on logs. Chamber’s creek and Welch Bald,
Swain county, and south of the Little Tennessee on Tuskeegee
creek, Graham county (Ferriss and Sargent), and at Hayesville,
Clay county (Sargent). Also Tallassee ford. It is common at
Knoxville. Seems to occur throughout the mountains, though far
more sparingly than on lower country, and apparently varies from
the Northern shells in being somewhat smaller and frequently more
widely umbilicated.
Zonitoides patuloides (Pilsbry).
I found one specimen under chips in Cade’s Cove, on the Thun-
derhead trail. Ferriss and Clapp took one or two specimens each
in various parts of Cade’s Cove in 1898, and Sargent in 1899.
It is one of the rarest snails.
Zonitoides elliotti (Redfield).
Cade’s Cove; Thunderhead near the summit; Welch Bald and
Welch Bald branch; Chamber’s creek, down to the Little Ten-
nessee, south of which Ferriss and Sargent took specimens on
Tuskeegee creek, Cheoah river and Mt. Hayo. Also Stratton
Bald and Hayesville, N. C. (Sargent).
Z. elliotti is evidently allied to the preceding species, not to the
Gastrodontas, where I formerly placed it. It has the foot-grooves
and caudal pore of the Zonitide, as Binney has stated, and the
resemblance of the shell to Circinaria is therefore meaningless.
Messrs. Ferriss and Sargent took specimens of Zonitoides latewm-
bilicatus Pils. at Burnside, Pulaski county, Ky. This species has
not hitherto been reported from elsewhere than the type locality
in Jackson county, Ala., where it was discovered by Mr. H. E.
Sargent.
GASTRODONTA.
The genus Gastrodonta is a most interesting one to the evolu-
tionist, presenting a considerable number of local forms. These
are of all grades between the slightest deviation from the historic
types of the species and strongly marked subspecies, or forms
which apparently could be called specific. Taking the group (ex-
clusive of Taxeodonta) as enumerated in the Catalogue recently
published by the Nautilus, it divides naturally into three parts:
the group of G. ligera, containing intertexta, acerra, demissa,
142 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
cerinoidea and ligera; the group of G. gularis, containing colli-
sella, gularis, suppressa, celaxis, lawe and lasmodon ; and finally
the group of G. interna, comprising that species alone.
‘¢ G@. elliotti’’ evidently does not belong here, but to Zonitoides,
next to Z. patuloides; and G. macilenta (Shuttl., not W. G.
Binn.) is a synonym of G. lasmodon. It is often an excessively
difficult matter to separate young G. gularis from G. suppressa,
yet they cannot reasonably be united specifically.
Gastrodonta intertexta (Binn.).
Cade’s Cove, Blount county, Tenn. Also taken by Ferriss on
Welch Bald branch, Chamber’s creek and Tuskeegee creek, and by
Sargent at Hayesville, N. C. Clapp found one specimen, an
albino, on the west end of Clingman.
Gastrodonta acerra (Lewis).
Commonly distributed in the Smokies. Cade’s Cové (variable in
size and form, measuring from alt. 10, diam. 16, to alt. 11, diam.
14 mm.; the high bee-hive shaped form prevailing); Thunderhead
(5,400 feet) and Clingman Dome (6,500 feet), somewhat thinner
and smaller, diam. 12-134 mm. ; and in North Carolina at Welch
Bald, Chamber’s creek, in Swain county, and south of the Little
Tennessee river on Cheoah river, Mt. Hayo, and in Glen Cove,
Graham county, and Hayesville, Clay county, N. C.; also at
Tallassee ford, Monroe county, Tenn. (Ferriss and Sargent).
The form of acerra prevalent in the mountains is generally
smaller and more elevated than Dr. James Lewis’ specimens from
Monroe county, Tenn., and the last whorl seen from above is not
so wide. Occasional specimens, however, may be found almost
exactly like the Monroe county shells, though the average or norm
of the mountain shells is perceptibly different.
Mr. Walker got a sinistral specimen in Cade’s Cove.
Gastrodonta demissa (Binn.).
Rowan creek, Cade’s Cove, with G. gularis (Ferriss). Also
taken at Chattanooga, Tenn., by My. Ferriss, and at Stratton
Bald, Graham county, N. C., and Harriman, Tenn, by Mr.
Sargent.
Gastrodonta gularis (Say).
The very large series examined shows considerable variation in
height of the spire, but is constant in the barely perforated um-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 145
bilicus. The teeth vary as usual, often curving strongly toward
each other, but sometimes nearly straight. The same sort of shell
prevails throughout most of the localities thus far explored in the
Great Smokies, about 400 shells from that region having been
individually examined.
The localities are as follows: Monroe county, Tenn., Tallassee’
ford, and on Citico creek; Blount county, Cade’s Cove, in many
places. Along the Tennessee-North Carolina boundary at Thun-
derhead and Clingman’s Dome. Swain county, N. C., at Welch
Bald and on Chamber’s creek; Graham county, N. C., on Tus-
keegee creek and Cheoah river, and on Stratton Bald (5,000 feet).
At Hayesville, Clay county, N. C. (slightly below 2,000 feet), a
series of over 100 specimens collected by Sargent shows somewhat
more variation than occurs in the other localities enumerated
above. The umbilicus varies from a very minute perforation in
nearly all examples to one about .8 mm. wide in a very few; and
of two specimens with a diam. of 8 mm., one is 54 mm. high
with fully 8 whorls, another 44 mm. with 7 whorls. All inter-
mediate contours occur. The high examples do not have the full
basal whorl of G. collisella, and are true gu/aris in the mouth
parts.
Gastrodonta interna (Say).
Apparently does not occur abundantly in the mountains along the
Tennessee-North Carolina boundary. Ferriss found it on Welch
Bald, Chamber’s creek Church, and south of the Little Tennessee
on Tuskeegee creek, Cheoah river and Bob’s Bald.™
Section TAXEODONTA.
This little group comprises the thin little Gastrodonts allied to
G. multidentata. Comparison of the shells and soft anatomy
should be made with the toothed Conulus and with certain toothed
individuals of the V. capsella group. Aside from these, the
group stands well apart from others. G. significans and G. an-
drewse are comparatively large and robust forms, the former widely
distributed and with teeth in pairs, the latter belonging to the
Roan Mountain region, and with numerous teeth. Then we haye
in the Great Smokies several peculiar species:
'* Ferriss lists G. interna from ‘‘ Brandon’s Cove,’’ probably Brannon’s
Cove, subsidiary to Cade’s Cove. 5
144 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Gastrodonta clappi Pilsbry. :
Described from Miry Ridge, where it was taken by Ferriss and
Clapp in 1898, but most of the few shells taken that year were
found at the lamellidens locality on Thunderhead. In 1899 we
found it at the western end of Clingman, at about 5800 feet alt.,
on wet stones some distance below the surface. Mr. Ferriss found
a single half-grown but unmistakable specimen on Block House
Mountain, a peak nameless on the Geological Survey topographic
map, lying south of Thunderhead; and Sargent took specimens on
Thunderhead, in the G. /amellidens locality.
No specimens yet seen, either old or young, have internal teeth
or barriers. It is very distinct from the following forms by its
much larger size and conspicuously coarser sculpture, wider
whorls, etc. The type measures, alt. 3, diam. 5.5, width of
umbilicus .23 mm., whorls 64. The spire is slightly raised.
The Thunderhead examples agree with the type in having a very
small umbilicus, the spire being slightly convex. A specimen
taken by Clapp on Clingman measures, alt. 3, diam. 6.2, width
of umbilicus .54 mm_., whorls 64, the spire nearly plane. Below
‘¢ The Balsams’’ on the western end of Clingman, a few hundred
feet down the Tennessee side, I found two half-grown specimens
of about 3.8 mm. diameter, also having the umbilicus somewhat
wider than in the Miry Ridge type, though less wide than Clapp’s
specimen, and the spire nearly flat. It is unsafe to draw conclu-
sions from the three specimens thus far known from Clingman, but
perhaps that peak has a race with more depressed spire and wider
umbilicus.
Four localities are now known for this species, the Thunderhead,
Miry Ridge and Clingman shells coming from a little north of the
interstate boundary, in Tennessee, the Block House shell from
south of the boundary, in North Carolina. None of the localities
are far from the 5,000-foot contour, and the extremes lie about
thirteen miles apart. The shel]s are extremely fragile, like most
forms living on the Clingman and Thunderhead conglomerates.
The most assiduous search by our party of five in 1899 resulted
in finding fourteen specimens, most of them immature. About
as many were found by Messrs. Ferriss and Clapp in 1898.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 145
G. lamellidens Pilsbry.
A very glossy and brilliant, dark reddish-brown shell, with the
closely coiled whorls and size of G. multidentata, but differing
from that species in never having radial rows of teeth, but having
obliquely radial laminz, three in young, rarely more than one or
two in adult shells. This armature is constant in a large number
of specimens that I have examined, collected by Ferriss, Clapp and
myself.
Mr. Clapp has a similarly armed shell, very light colored but
otherwise typical, from Deering, N. H., collected by Mr. E. W.
Roper, and there is one (No. 57,106) in the collection of the
Academy from Greenwich, N. Y. The question arises, are these
not mere occasional variations of G. multidentata, which appear
sporadically, rather than a distinct species? In this case /amelli-
dens is to be regarded as a race in which this rare variation has
become a fixed and, so far as can be proved by about 150 shells
examined, probably a constant character. And in this connection
the possible relationship to these forms of Conulus dentatus Sterki,
which has similar armature, needs investigation.
In G. lamellidens the surface shows no spiral striation under an
enlargement of 50 or 75 diameters; it is rather deeply, closely and
regularly costulate-striate; and the width of the umbilicus is con-
tained about ten times in the diameter of the shell.
The type locality” is a steep slope close to the middle summit of
Thunderhead, deeply covered with a talus of angular stones small
and large, in the interstices of which there is considerable mould
which supports a herbaceous growth. Vitrinizonites, Gastrodonta
acerra and a few Polygyra depilata are the chief dwellers among
the moss of the superficial stones, but, as Ferriss wrote last year, a
“‘ quarry’? must be opened to find G. Jamellidens. Each one of
the wet stones must be closely examined on all sides before it is
thrown out, and once in a long while one or two of the snails
may be found, if one is in iuck. They occur from a few inches
to a foot or more below the surface of the talus.
Specimens have also been found by Mr. Ferriss at Block House
Mountain (near and south of Thunderhead), Swain county, and at
18 By an error of my own, the locality ‘‘Clingman’s Dome ”’ was given in
the Classified Catalogue, p. 29. No specimens are yet known from Cling-
man, though it will probably be found there.
10
146 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1900.
Stratton Bald and on the Cheoah river, Graham county, N. C. ;
Sargent also took it at Stratton Bald.
Gastrodonta walkeri n. sp.
Size of G. J/amellidens, and general contour about the same;
whorls 53; umbilicus much wider and more open, its diameter
contained about 5} times in that of the shell; swrface rather dull
to the naked eye, under strong magnification seen to be extremely
finely and irregularly plicatulate-striate, tie strie cut into minute
beads by close decussating, impressed, encircling lines. No internal
aminze or teeth in adults, or with two transverse, curved barriers,
as in G. lamellidens. Alt. 1.45, diam. 2.9, width of umbilicus
.O mm.
Cheoah river, near junction of Yellow creek, Graham county,
N. C., three specimens taken by Ferriss. ‘‘ Ramp Cove,’’ on
Tuskeegee Mountain, between the heads of Tuskeegee and Yellow
creeks, several taken by Sargent.
This form differs from G. clappi in the sculpture and in size.
It resembles G. l/amellidens and multidentata, but is ornamented
with densely crowded spiral lines, and very conspicuously finer
growth-striz, and has a wider umbilicus. A half-grown specimen
of the type lot has two curved internal laminz, like G. Jamellidens,
with finely denticulate edges; the others have no internal arma-
ture. Four specimens from Tallassee ford of the Little Ten-
nessee, Monroe county, Tenn., have the spirals rather more spaced,
and each has two internal denticulate transverse lamin; umbilicus
about one-seventh the diameter of shell.
Of the specimens taken by Sargent, one from Ramp Cove has
an internal barrier, another pone; and those from Sam. Blair’s,
at Tallassee Ford, vary in the same way. The decussated sculp-
ture is constant.
The species will be most easily recognized by the finer radial
sculpture and wider umbilicus than /amedlidens, as the spirals are
nearly or quite invisible under an ordinary lens, though their
development is an essential specific character.
G. multidentata (Binn.).
Oakdale, Morgan county, Tenn., one specimen (Clapp).
Though not in the Great Smoky Mountain area, this is included as
showing the southward distribution of the species.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 147
G. significans (Bld.).
‘* Ramp Cove, Tuskeegee Mountain,’’ between the headwaters
of Tuskeegee creek and Yellow creek. Typical specimens taken
by Ferriss and Sargent.
LIMACIDZ.
Agriolimax campestris (Binn.).
Thunderhead Mountain, near the summit, common.
PHILOMYCIDA.
Philomycus carolinensis (Bosc.).
Tuckaleechee and Cade’s Coves, Blount county, Tenn.; Thun-
derhead, to the summit, crawling on trees; Clingman Dome.
This species is common throughout the Great Smoky Mountains,
and the individuals reach a very large size. In the humid atmos-
phere of the mountain tops Philomycus lives in the open, on trees
and logs, not concealed beneath the bark, as in dryer localities.
Philomycus hemphilli (W. G. Binney).
*« Sugar Cove,’’ in Cade’s Cove, at over 2,000 feet elevation ;
Thunderhead, near the summit, on moss, etc.; Clingman’s Dome.
The coloration of this species reminds one of Amalia hewstoni,
the back being black, fading on the sides to whitish beneath.
The jaw in a specimen examined has a group of four contiguous
ribs near the middle. The specimens collected were drowned, but
all collapsed in alcohol; and probably some other method of pre-
servation would be better.
ENDODONTIDA.
Pyramidula alternata (Say).
Andrews Bald; Welch Bald, Cheoah river, Tuskeegee creek
and Mt. Hayo, N. C. At Glen Cove, Unaka Mountains, Graham
county, N. C. (Ferriss), a distinctly depressed form, but not more
carinated than typical shelis, occurred.
Typical specimens of P. alternata carinata Pils. were taken by
Ferriss at Burnside, Pulaski county, Ky. Large specimens, up
to 22 mm. diam. This form is very strongly carinated, but rather
more finely ribbed than typical alternata. See Proc. Acad. Nat.
Sei. Phila., 1896, p. 490. The types of the variety were taken by
Mr. S. N. Rhoads, on the Emory river, near Harriman, Tenn.
It is a race of the Cumberland Plateau.
148 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Pyramidula alternata costata Lewis.
We took this strongly marked variety in Cade’s Cove and on
Thunderhead. It has not been found elsewhere (see Clapp,
Nautilus, XIII, p. 41). Ferriss found a sinistral specimen in
Sugar Cove, off Cade’s.
Pyramidula perspectiva (Say).
Cade’s Cove; near summit of Thunderhead, and near summit of
Clingman’s Dome. Ferriss adds the localities Welch Bald,
Chamber’s creek, Tuskeegee creek, Cheoah river, Mt. Hayo and
Tallassee ford. Typical, and in Cade’s Cove very abundant,
under slabs at an old saw-mill, near Blair’s place. Beautiful
albino specimens were found in ‘‘ Sugar Cove.’”’ P. bryanti does
not appear to occur in the Great Smokies.
Helicodiscus lineatus (Say).
The mountain specimens are well developed, but practically typ-
ical. Specimens were taken in Cade’s Cove at various points,
near the summit of Thunderhead, at Block House, on the west
end of Clingman, and south of the Little Tennessee on the Tus-
keegee Mountains, north of Tuskeegee creek, on Bob’s Bald and
on Mt. Hayo.
Punctum blandianum n. sp. Fig. 1.
Mr. Clapp found two specimens of
Punctum somewhere in Cade’s Cove
(probably in the dependent ‘‘ Sugar
Cove’’) which differ markedly from
P. pygmeum. The umbilicus is much
wider than in P. pygmceum, its width
contained between 2% and 2} times in
the total diam. of the shell. The
aperture is smaller than in P. pyg-
meum. Whorls 33; color brown;
surface-sculpture about as in P.
pygmeum—very fine but rather sharp
@ j strie along the growth-lines and
nearly obsolete spiral strix. The
spire is low conoidal, about as in P.
4 pygmceun.
Alt. .6, diam. 1.15 mm.
—— It is named in honor of Thomas
Pewee. oP
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 149
Bland, whose excellent work on American land shells materially
advanced the science.
SUCCINEIDA.
Succinea obliqua (Say).
A rather thin form of this species occurs near the summit of
Thunderhead, on leaves of herbage. Also found on Clingman’s
Dome.
PLEUROCERATIDA.
The mountain streams above two or three thousand feet in the
Great Smokies are apparently barren of molluscan life, though full
of trout. The following occurred at lower levels.
Pleurocera aratum (Lea).
Little Tennessee river, at Tallassee ford, Monroe-Blount coun-
ties, Tenn. (Ferriss).
Pleurocera hastatum (Anth.).
Little river in Chilhowee Gap, Blount county, Tenn. (Walker,
Clapp and Pilsbry).
Goniobasis proxima (Say).
Welch Bald branch of Chamber’s creek, Swain county; Tus-
keegee creek, Graham county; and Mission creek, Hayesville, Clay
county, N. C. (Ferriss and Sargent).
Goniobasis saffordi (Lea).
Chamber’s creek, Swain county, N. C. (Ferriss).
APPENDIX.
In The Nautilus for January, 1898, Prof. W. H. Dall men-
tions, without description, a new variety of Vitrea wheatleyi under
the ‘‘ varietal name of V. elingmani,’’ based upon ‘‘ the large
form of Z. wheatleyi referred to by Binney (Manual, p. 222) as
collected by Hemphill at Clingman’s Peak, N. C.”’
When on Clingman Dome, our party searched diligently for
this shell, but without success. On applying to Mr. Hemphill for
information, I learned that the ‘‘ Clingman’s Peak ’’ of his label is
not Clingman Dome of the charts, but a local name for a peak
northeast of Asheville. Hemphill did not visit the Great Smoky
range. He writes as follows:
** Black Mountain Station is on the railroad east or northeast
of Asheville. From this station I walked into the mountains
(north) about ten or twelve miles and stopped at a house near the
foot of Mt. Mitchell, and also near the Pinnacle of the Blue
150 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Ridge. In company with two other persons, I went to the summit
of Mt. Mitchell and ‘ Clingman’s Peak,’ as they called it, and
remained all night. We carried our provisions and blankets. It
took nearly all day to get to the summit, and I had but a few
hours for collecting the next morning. If my memory serves me
faithfully, I got but little material on that trip, but judging by
the name, I suppose the shell called Z. wheatleyi clingmani was
collected at that place and time.”’
The specific name does not of course refer to the mountain, but
is to honor Thomas L. Clingman, who made valuable observations
on the geology and topography of North Carolina, and further served
that State with distinction in the U.S. Senate, before the civil war.
The following diagnosis and camera lucida outlines have been
supplied by Prof. Dall:
‘“‘Vitrea clingmani Dall. Fig. 2.
‘‘ Shell extremely thin and fragile, of a trans-
lucent greenish color, polished, with five rather
inflated whorls; suture well marked, the envelop-
ing whorl rising slightly above it and not suturally
appressed ; sculpture in harmony with the incre-
ee mental lines, consisting of at first rather close-set
regular wrinkles which are obsolete on the base
and’ more distant in the adult near the last part of
the last whorl; spire and base somewhat flattened,
periphery rounded, peristome acute, the upper lip
but little produced beyond the basal part; umbili-
Fig: 2 cus narrow, deep; nucleus very small, smooth;
major diam. 6.5, minor diam. 5, alt. 2.5 mm.
‘¢ Habitat, Black Mountain, N. C., near Clingman’s Peak,
Hemphill. Types 38,910, U. S. Nat. Mus.
‘¢ This form was referred to Zonites wheatleyi by Binney, from
whose original specimens this diagnosis is drawn, but, as pointed
out to me by Dr. Pilsbry, the species to which our shell is most
closely allied is Vitrea petrophila. The latter is of a waxen
whitish or pale straw color verging toward brownish, but ]. eding-
mani is distinctly greenish; V. petrophila, though a smaller shell,
has, in all the specimens I have been able to examine, a larger and
more funicular umbilicus, and the lumen of its whorls is more
circular.’’
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 151
MALLOPHAGA FROM ALASKAN BIRDS.
BY VERNON L. KELLOGG AND SHINKAI TI. KUWANA.
The Mallophaga described and identified in the following notes
were collected by Mr. E. A. MclIlhenny from birds shot by him
at Point Barrow, Alaska. The determinations of the birds were
made by Mr. Mcllhenny.
The two references given for each identified species are, first,
to the original description, and, second, to a complete list of the
Mallophaga from North American birds recorded up to the time of
the publication of this paper. In this list can be found for each
species all of the references to the occurrence of the parasite on
North American hosts, and also a complete list of all the hosts,
North American and foreign, from which the parasite is recorded.
Docophorus lari Denny, Monograph Anoplur. Brit., 1842, p. 89, pl. V, fig. 9. Ke llogg
A List of the Biting Lice (Mallophaga) taken from Birds and Mammals of North
America, 1899, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., vol. X XII, p. 44.
From Larus sp. Previously recorded by Kellogg from a dozen
or more species of Larus from Kansas, California and Alaska.
Docophorus alaskensis n. sp. (PI. VII, fig. 1).
A single male taken from a Ross’s Gull, Rhodostethia rosea (Point
Barrow, Alaska). This species closely resembles montereyi, but
differs in having the abdomen but little wider than head, while in
montereyi the abdomen is one-fourth wider than head. It also
differs markedly in shape of signature and somewhat in shape of
clypeus, and the lateral abdominal bands present noticeable differ-
ences.
Description of male: Body, length 1.6 mm., width .6 mm. ; head
large, dark brown; thorax, with dark lateral borders; abdomen,
a little wider than head, dark brown, with blaek lateral border.
Head, length .55 mm., width .5 mm.; uncolored front of
elypeus very slightly expanded, flatly rounded with three short
marginal hairs on each side in front of the suture; trabecule large,
reaching almost to the distal end of the second antennal segment,
yellowish brown; antennze with segment 2 longest, segments 3 and
4 shortest, segment 5 a little shorter than segments 3 and 4 to-
152 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
gether, dark brown with distal end of each segment paler; eye flat,
with a long hair and a short prickle; temporal margins with two
long hairs and a fine prickle; occipital margin nearly straight or
slightly concave; signature shield shaped with produced acuminate
posterior angle reaching the mandibles, anterior margin very
slightly concave ; antennal bands blackish brown, distinct, poste-
rior ends turning diagonally inward, anterior ends, where inter-
rupted by the suture, turning in toward the base of the point of the
suture; occipital bands blackish brown, narrow, uniform, diverg-
ing, and separated from the antennal bands by a pale diagonal
space ; region contiguous to the eye dark.
Prothorax short, broad, with slightly diverging sides and rounded
posterior angles with one hair; lateral marginal bands blackish
brown, bending inwards along posterior margin. Metathorax
broadly pentagonal, witha series of seven pustulated hairs on each
latero-posterior margin beginning at lateral angles; a dark lateral
blotch in each lateral angle extending inward along latero-anterior
sides. Legs concolorous with body, with darker markings.
Abdomen, elongate, ovate; segments 2 to 8 with one or two hairs
in posterior angles; segments 2-8 with broad black lateral bands,
which are narrower on the posterior segments; segments with long,
transverse, dark-brown blotches barely separated medially by a
paler line, widest on segments 3 and 4, and narrowing on each
successive segment; transverse blotches confluent medially on
segment 1, with a small, medial, angulated, uncolored emargination
on anterior margin; transverse blotches confluent medially on seg-
ment 8; a narrow dark-brown transversal line behind the series of
hairs in each segment; segments 2—5 with three to four pustulated
hairs along the posterior margin, on each side of the middle, seg-
ments 1, 7 and 8 with one pustulated hair; segment 9 paler, poste-
rior margin with slight emargination and a few short hairs.
Docophorus melanocephalus Burmeister; Handb. d. Ent., 1839, I, p. 426; Kellogg,
List, 1899, p. 44.
From Stercorarius parasiticus and (straggler?) Oidemia sp.
(Point Barrow, Alaska). Previously recorded by Kellogg from
Sterna maxima (Bay of Monterey, Cal.) by Kellogg and Chap-
man from Stercorarius pomarinus (same locality). Recorded by
European authors from three species of Sterna and two of Larus.
~.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 155
Docophorus ceblebrachys Nitsch ; (ed. Giebel) Zeitsch. f. ges. Naturwiss., 1861, vol.
XVII, p. 528; Kellogg, List, 1899, p. 48.
From Nyctea nyctea (Pt. Barrow, Alaska). Previously recorded
by American and European authors from same host (various local-
ities in North America and Europe).
Docophorus cursor Nitzsch; Burmeister, Handb. d. Ent., 1839, II, p. 426; Kellogg,
List, 1899, p. 48.
From Asio acecipitrinus (Pt. Barrow, Alaska). Previously
recorded by Osborn from Asio wilsonianus (Ames, la., and Lin-
coln, Neb.), by Kellogg from Bubo virginianus (Lawrence,
Kans. ), and by Kellogg and Chapman from Asio wilsonianus
(Ontario, Cal.). Recorded by European authors from Strix bubo,
S. otus and S. brachyotus.
Nirmus triangulatus Nitzsch; (ed. Giebel) Zeitsch. f. ges. Naturwiss., 1866, vol.
XXVIII, p. 378; Kellogg, List, 1899, p. 53.
From Stercorarius parasiticus (Pt. Barrow, Alaska). Previ-
ously recorded by Kellogg and Chapman from Stercorarius poma-
rinus (Bay of Monterey, Cal.). Recorded by European authors
from Lestris, Stercorarius and Larus.
Nirmus infectus n. sp. (Pl. VII, fig. 2).
A single female taken from a Red Phalarope, Crymophilus
fulicarius (Pt. Barrow, Alaska).
Description of female: Body, length 1.55 mm., width .42 mm. ;
pale yellowish white, dark-brown head border, blackish lateral
abdominal bands; slight indications of the abdominal blotches,
seoments 2-6 with small! dark-brown median markings.
Head, length .37 mm., width .26 mm. ; elongate conical, with nar-
row parabolic front ; four short weak hairs along margins of fore-
head, a short hair in front of the trabeculz ; antenne short, segments
4 and 5 most colored, segment 3 longest, segment 5 longer than seg-
ment 4, with a few short hairs on the segments; trabeculze short but
distinct; eye flat, with a long hair and prickle; clypeus transparent ;
temporal margins with two long hairs and a fine prickle between
the long hairs; occipital margin nearly straight, with a few fine
prickles; signature distinctly colored, nearly pentagonal, slightly
convex in front, posterior margin weakly rounding, a dark-brown
eross band in anterior middle of the signature; antennal bands
distinct, rather broad, bending inward at the suture ; temporal
154 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
margin for a little distance behind eye with dark-brown border
which narrows posteriorly; temporal bands indistinct.
Prothorax short, rectangular, with a single hair in posterior
angles; blackish brown lateral borders which extend inward along
anterior margin. Metathorax almost as wide as head, with flatly
rounding posterior margin, with one long hair in angle and two
groups of two each on each lateral half; blackish brown, lateral
borders. | Legs concolorous with the body, tibiae darker than
femora.
Abdomen elongated elliptical; each segment of 1-7 with dis-
tinct narrow lateral blackish bands, slightly expanding at front
of segment and projecting across the sutures; abdominal blotches
very slight; segments 2-6 with small dark-brown ventral median |
markings; two or three hairs in the posterior angles and a series
of four longish hairs on the posterior margin of each of segment
2-6 and 8, segment 1 without hair, segment 7 with two hairs,
segment 9 short and with slight angular posterior emarginations,
two hairs on the posterior margin.
Nirmus complexivus Kellogg and Chapman; Mallophaga from Birds of California, in
New Mallophaga, ITI, 1899, p. 78, pl. VI, fig. 4; Kellogg, List, 1899, p. 54.
From Tringa canuta (Pt. Barrow, Alaska). Previously re-
corded by Kellogg and Chapman from Tringa minutilla, and
Calidris arenaria (Pacifie Grove, Cal. ).
Lipeurus ferox Giebel; Zeitsch. f. ges. Naturwiss., 1867, vol. X XIX, p. 195, Kellogg, List,
1899, p. 59.
From Diomedea nigripes (Pt. Barrow, Alaska). Recorded by
Kellogg from Diomedea albatrus (Bay of Monterey, Cal.), by
Osborn from D. brachyura (locality ?), and by European authors
from D. exulans, melanophrys and brachyura.
Lipeurus confidens Kellogg, Mallophaga from Birds of Panama, Baja California and
Alaska, in New Mallophaga III, 1899, p. 28, -pl. III, fig. 2; Kellogg, List, 1899,
p. 59.
From Diomedea nigripes (Pt. Barrow, Alaska).
Lipeurus densus Kellogg, New Mallophaga I, 1896, p. 114, pl. VI, figs. 1,2; Kellogg
List, 1899, p. 59.
From Diomedea nigripes (Pt. Barrow, Alaska). Recorded by
Kellogg from D. albatrus (Bay of Monterey, Cal.), and from D.
nigripes (off Kodiak, Alaska).
a”
Pe
—
a Ay Sek
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 155
Lipeurus macilhennyi n. sp. (Pl. VII, fig. 3).
A single female taken from a Black-footed Albatross, Diomedea
nigripes (Pt. Barrow, Alaska). This Lipeurus is a very well-
marked species differing strongly in shape of head and body and
in markings from the other Lipeuri of the Albatrosses.
Description of female: Body, length 3.6 mm., width .85 mm. ;
whole body chestnut brown with sharply defined, blackish brown
marginal marking on abdomen and thorax, and distinct antennal
and occipital bands on head; body long, widening posteriorly to
fourth and fifth segments ; head small and shorter than wide,
forehead only one-third of length of entire head; clypeus broadly
and flatly rounded; legs unusually large and stout.
Head, length .53 mm., width .55 mm.; decidedly short and
broad for Lipeurus; clypeal front flatly rounded, with six short
marginal hairs on each side of the front, a short hair on the mar-
gin in front of the antennz which are short; trabeculze small but
distinct, uncolored; segment 2 of the antennz longer than segment
1, segment 5 slightly longer than segment 3 or 4, the anterior end
of segment 3 and segments 4 and 5 pale fulvous, a few short hairs
on the segments; eyes prominent with a distinct ocular fleck;
temples flatly convex, with three short prickles; occipital margin
nearly straight without hair or prickle; whole head brown; an-
tennal bands broad and blackish continuing beyond the suture;
temples bordered by a very narrow line of blackish brown slightly
broader just below the eyes; conspicuous ocular blotch blackish
brown; two large blackish triangular blotches on the occipital
margin; no uncolored clypeal region, and no signature.
Prothorax, very much wider than long, the angles very weakly
rounded ; segment chestnut brown with dark-brown lateral border
extending inward, but leaving the middle portion of the segment
paler, posterior angles slightly projecting; two blackish brown
lateral blotches on the suture of pro and metathorax. Metathorax
with lateral margin slightly concave before the middle; longer
than broad; segment chestnut brown with large, lateral, marginal
blackish brown blotch in front of the middle, and margin behind
the blotch dark; four hairs in posterior angles, and set closely
together in a small uncolored space; posterior margin slightly con-
cave. Legs large, stout, concolorous with thorax, with distinct
dark border; front legs short, femora wide with small dark-brown
156 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
marginal markings; second and third pair of legs long; cox of
third pair unusually large and flat, projecting laterally beyond
the sides of metathorax; femora long and broad, with dark-
brown border, tarsi short and broad at middle, with dark-brown
border ; claws pale brown; several scattered hairs and spines on
the legs.
Abdomen, widening posteriorly to segments 4 and 5 which are
widest, segments 6 and 7 a little narrower than segments 4 and 5,
and segments 8 and 9 narrowing more rapidly; first four segments
with single hair in posterior angles, segments 5 and 6 with two
hairs, and long hairs, increasing in length and number on posterior
segments, segment 9 short and pale; segments almost wholly cov-
ered by large brown lateral blotches which leave a median paler
longitudinal space and distinct transverse pale sutural lines; lateral
marginal bands with conspicuous round-headed blackish brown
processes projecting inward, segment 1 with a single pair, seg-
ments 2 to 7 with two pairs, none in segments 8 and 9.
Lipeurus laculatus Kellogg and Chapman, Mallophaga from Birds of California, in
New Mallophaga III, 1899, p. 93, pl. VIII, fig. 1; Kellogg, List, 1899, p. 59.
From Stercorarius sp. (Pt. Barrow, Alaska). Recorded by
Kellogg and Chapman from 8S. pomarinus and Puffinus ecreatopus
(Bay of Monterey, Cal. ).
Lipeurus protervus Kellogg, Mallophaga from Birds of Panama, Baja California and
Alaska, in New Mallophaga III, 1899, p. 31, pl. III, fig. 4; Kellogg, List, 1899, p. 63.
From Lagopus lagopus (Pt. Barrow, Alaska). Recorded by
Kellogg from same host (Kodiak Island, Alaska).
Although these specimens are from the same host and the ane
from the same region as in the case of the type specimens, there is
a noticeable and constant difference in the shape of the head
between the specimens of the two lots. The Point Barrow speci-
mens have the clypeal margin distinctly flatter, and it is in the
character of this clypeal margin that specific differences are most
readily recognized among the Lipeuri of the Grouse. This case
simply emphasizes the fact, referred to in the senior author’s former
papers on the Mallophaga, of the flexible character of specific lines
in this group of insects. The peculiar habits of the Mallophaga,
producing isolation of all degrees from slight to nearly absolute,
renders their systematic study an intricate but interesting matter.
pa ee SS FP eta seer
W
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 157
Eurymetopus brevis Dufour, Ann. Soc. Ent. France, 1835, vol. IV, p. 674, pl. xxxi, fig.
3; Kellogg, List, 1899, p. 64.
From Diomedea nigripes (Pt. Barrow, Alaska). Recorded by
. Osborn from D. erulans (Albatross expedition), by Kellogg from
D. albatrus (Bay of Monterey, Cal.) and D. nigripes (North
Pacific Ocean, off Alaska). Recorded by European authors from
D. exulans, nigripes and brachyura.
Colpocephalum pingue Kellogg, New Mallophaga I, 1896, p. 144, pl. XII, fig.5; Kel-
logg, List, 1899, p. 72.
From Diomedea nigripes (Pt. Barrow, Alaska). Recorded by
Kellogg from D. albatrus (Bay of Monterey, Cal.).
Colpocephalum paetulum n. sp. (Pl. VII, fig. 4).
A single male from Arenaria interpres (Pt. Barrow, Alaska).
This small Colpocephalum belongs to the group of species including
ochraceum N. and Piaget’s species related to ochracewm occurring
on shore birds, but differs obviously from all of the hitherto de-
scribed members of the group. The long hairs arranged in trans-
verse series on the dorsal surface of the abdomen are pustulated,
thus differing from ochraceum P. and umbrinum P.; there are two
to three transverse series in each abdominal segment of the male
thus differing from spinulosum P. with but one such series; there
are no pustulated hairs on the head thus differing from pustu-
losum P.
Description of female: Body, length 1.7 mm., width .45 mm.;
elongate with comparatively large head and legs: head golden
brown with dark-brown ocular blotches; yellowish brown transverse
blotches on the abdomen; a distinct pale submarginal longitudinal
line parallel with the lateral margin of the abdomen; two or more
transverse rows of pustulated hairs on segments 3-8.
Head, length .37 mm., width .45 mm.; front rounded, almost
a semicircle, four hairs between the middle of front and the
latero-anterior angle of which the last hair is the longest, a very
short hair in front of the projecting tip of palpus; five hairs in
the lateral angle in front of the ocular emargination of which the
first is the longest; ocular emarginations deep, narrow; the eyes
undivided but with a distinct medial emargination; the ocular
fringes prominent; four long hairs in the temporal margin ; occipi-
tal margin slightly concave, with four long hairs; color golden
158 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
brown, ocular blotch dark brown, and narrow dark-brown border
on outer temporal and occipital margin; indistinct narrow brown —
occipital bands, the dark-brown occipital margin expanded at their
bases.
Prothorax, broad (nearly twice as wide as Jong), with a spine
and two long hairs in produced lateral angles, posterior border
rounded with a series of eight hairs; color golden brown with
dark-brown lateral border, and a narrow transverse line across the
segment in front of the middle. Metathorax showing no marginal
constriction at line of union of mesothorax and metathorax; sides
bare, posterior angles with a Jong hair and spine; posterior margin
straight, with a row of long hairs; color golden brown wita narrow
dark lateral border. Legs, large, stout ; femora greatly thick-
ened and margined with golden brown; with scattered prominent
hairs.
Abdomen elliptical; several short hairs on the lateral margins
of the segments, some long hairs in the posterior angles; a row of
unpustulated hairs along posterior margin of segments 1-2, two
rows of pustulated hairs on segment 3 and three rows of pustulated
hairs on segments 4-8, which are not strictly arranged in definite
rows except the most posterior ones; color golden brown; lateral
marginal blotches dark brown, separated from the median trans-
verse blotches by a pale submarginal band, which is parallel with
the lateral margin of the abdomen; median transverse blotches
yellowish brown; last segment rounding, with numerous hairs on
the posterior margin, two long hairs in each latero-posterior angle
and a few scattered hairs, color paler.
Menopon corporosum 2. sp. (Pl. VII, fig. 4).
Several specimens from a Red Phalarope, Crymophilus fulicarius
(Pt. Barrow, Alaska), and one specimen (straggler?) from a
Turnstone, Arenaria interpres (same locality). Differing mark-
edly from the few other species of Menopon taken from the Gral-
latores in the very broad abdomen.
Description of female: Body, 1.8 mm., width .8 mm.; small
head, with obovate abdomen; color light chestnut brown with
dark-brown lateral abdominal borders.
Head, length .29 mm., width .53 mm.; front rounded, with
slight indication of median angulation; eight hairs between mid-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 159
dle of front and the ocular region; palpi projecting by the length of
their terminal segments, temporal margin with three long hairs,
one slightly shorter and five short ones; occipital margin concave,
with four hairs on the middle third; color pale brown, dark occipi-
tal margin and black ocular blotches.
Prothorax broad, short, with lateral angles much produced and
bearing two spies and one long hair; posterior margin flatly con-
vex with ten long hairs; color golden brown. Metathorax as wide
as head, narrow anteriorly with rapidly diverging sides; meso-
thorax distinctly separated by marginal constriction and dark
transverse line; posterior angles of mesothorax bare, sides of
meso- and metathorax bare; posterior angles of metathorax with
four spines; posterior margin weakly convex with a series of
hairs; metathorax with broad transverse yellowish brown band like
those of abdomen. Legs pale brown with dark margin; femora
thick, with rather long hairs.
Abdomen obovate, pusterior angles of segment with one or two
strong hairs and adjacent short ones; a series of hairs along poste-
rior margin of each segment; color pale at sutures, black inter-
rupted lateral bands, and a yellowish brown transverse band on
each segment; a distinct pale and submarginal longitudinal line;
ninth segment rounded behind with narrow transparent margin
thickly set with a fringe of short sharp-pointed transparent hairs.
Menopon infrequens Kellogg, New Mallophaga I, 1896, p. 161, pl. xv, fig. 5; Kel-
logg, List, 1899, p. 75.
From Oidemia sp. probably a straggler from a gull. Recorded
by Kellogg from Larus glaucescens (Bay of Monterey, Cal.) and
by Kellogg and Chapman from Larus delawarensis (same locality).
EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIL.
Fig. 1. Docophorus alaskensis Kellogg and Kuwana, ¢.
Fig. 2. Nirmus infectus Kellogg and Kuwana, °.
Fig. 3. Lipeurus macilhennyi Kellogg and Kuwana, &.
Fig. 4. Colpocephalum petulum Kellogg and Kuwana, &.
Fig. 5. Menopon corporosum Kellogg and Kuwana, °.
160 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHEASTERN PENNSYLVANIA.
BY THEODORE D. RAND.
The work of the Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania was
very properly directed chiefly toward the economic geology of the
State. Had reasonable appropriations, been continued, it is prob-
able that a more careful survey would have been made of the area
southeast of the Red Sandstone region, and we might also haye
had what it is a disgrace to the State that we have not: a map of
Pennsylvania comparable with that of the New Jersey Survey or
to the Philadelphia Sheet of the U. S. Geological Survey. It
being the fact, therefore, that this region southeast of the Red
Sandstone has been hastily examined by the geologists of the
Survey,’ that their observations, in many particulars, do not agree
with those of the First Survey under that most careful observer,
Prof. Henry D. Rogers, and also that in this region there is differ-
ence of opinion even among those who studied it under the auspices
of the Second Survey, it seemed not improper that I should put
upon record numerous observations made in the leisure moments
of a rather busy life during the past twenty years, in the hope that
some little additional light may be shed upon the subject, and as
an aid to those who may wish to study the region hereafter.’
I have written of some of the rocks discussed in this paper, but
to make this one intelligible it will be necessary to repeat briefly
some of the facts already published.
The region, covered chiefly with mica schists and gneisses and
1“ Tn a single field season of seven months, a geologist who is to report
on a county of fifty-six townships has just three days (on an average) to
cach township ; and in a State with sixty-seven counties, all of equal
importance to their inhabitants, and to practical science, it is evident that a
State survey can only afford one full season to each county, unless its funds
be greatly increased or its duration be indefinitely protracted.’’—Second
Geol. Survey of Pa., chap. 4, p. 20.
? Having experienced much difficulty in identifying localities already
published owing to the changes of ownership of farms, quarries, mills, ete.,
I have described outcrops with particularity, perhaps greater thau necessary,
deeming it safer to err in the direction of clearness.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 161
soil derived from them, is, as is well known, a difficult one for
geological study. Exposures are often few and far between; ad-
vantage must be taken of every possible opportunity, such as well-
digging and boring, and even of the exposures occasionally made
by unusually heavy rains, while over large areas it is often impos-
sible to find a single exposure. Besides this, some rocks of definite
character are of very limited breadth, while others, well exposed,
vary in width so greatly and suddenly that mapping in the usual
method of connecting like exposures is very unsafe. Imagine,
for instance, the well-exposed limestone and hydromica schist west
and northwest of Conshohocken to be represented by scattered out-
crops similar to those of the limestones and mica schists of southern
Chester county, the intermediate surface being covered with soil
as in that region, what geologist could possibly map the rocks as
they really exist ?
Of the rocks southeast of the Red Sandstone there are three
prominent series as to which there is reasonable accord among all
geologists :—
I. Rogers’ Third Belt —possibly Laurentian, probably a consider-
able part plutonic. A remarkably straight outcrop of quite uni-
form, very hard gneissoid rocks, striking about S. 65° W., and
extending almost unbroken from near Morrisville, Bucks county,
opposite Trenton, N. J., to west of the Brandywine, apparently
anticlinal in structure, and the oldest rock of the region. This,
called Laurentian by the Second Survey and in my previous
papers, I prefer to call by the safer term Ancient Gneiss.
II. Cambrian Sandstone. Rogers’ Primal Sandstone, often
called Potsdam, No. 1 of the Survey—the oldest fossiliferous rock
yet discovered in this area.
III. Limestone, No. 2 of the Survey, Rogers’ Auroral Limestone,
formerly supposed to be equivalent to the Calciferous, Chazy and
Trenton Limestones of the New York Survey,* though the recent
studies of Prof. Walcott seem to prove that is Cambrian.‘ As to
the remainder of the rocks, opinions differ widely. Those covering
the largest areas are mica schists and gneisses. Among these
gneisses and mica schists are belts of peculiar character traceable
3 Chap, 4, p. 113, where this opinion is very.forcibly asserted. 2
4A. J. S., January, 1894, p. 37, and Vol. XLIV, 1892, p. 469.
11
162 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
for miles, for, as a rule, there are few well-marked sudden varia-
tions on the strike line.
These gneisses and schists include Rogers’ first and second belts,
Mr. Hall’s Philadelphia schists and gneisses, and Manayunk schists
and Chestnut Hill schists; Prof. Lesley’s newer gneiss of the
Philadelphia belt. The strike of these accords in the main with
that of the ancient gneiss, local deviations being common; the
subdivisions vary in width, their borders being usually more or
less divergent or convergent. The almost universal dip, northwest
of Darby creek, is northwestward, except close to the ancient
gneiss, where it is southeastward. It should he said, however,
that the apparent dip may not be the true dip, but merely schis-
tosity due to pressure. It is a fact, however, that this schistosity
seems to accord closely with changes in the constitution of the rocks.
Southwest of Darby creek a southeast dip prevails. Southwest
of the Schuylkill similar schists and gneisses occur northwest of the
ancient gneiss.
Minor faults are common, great ones may exist, but this has not
been proved. The age of these newer schists and gneisses and
their relative superposition is greatly in doubt; indeed, hardly any
two geologists have agreed. Fossils not having been found, the
arguments are necessarily based upon lithological character and
stratigraphical position. It is, I believe, conceded that there is no
considerable break of continuity on the line of strike, except that
Mr. Hall regards certain hard gneisses in southern Delaware
county and some gabbros, as Laurentian, underlying the newer
schists and gneisses. The views of geologists may be briefly
summed as follows:
Prof. Rogers supposed the structure a simple synclinal, the Chest-
nut Hill series, his second group, underlaid by the gneiss, which
rose to the southeast and to the northwest, his first and third belts.
Above his third belt he recognized the primal (Cambrian) sand-
stone and a series of rocks which he regarded as of the same age
stretching southwestward, and in western Chester county south-
ward nearly or quite to the Maryland line, here overlying the
Philadelphia rocks which he saw extending in a series of anticlinals
dying out westward under his primal rocks.°
5 First Geol. Survey of Pa., I, p. 228, quoted chap. 4, p. 68: ‘‘ But to
the westward of the Brandywine . . . . the primal series is spread prodig-
|
.
.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 165
Mr. Charles E. Hall, finding in Montgomery county the same
succession of rocks southeast of the ancient gneiss as northwest of
it, particularly the Cambrian sandstone (then called Potsdam),
and the limestone of Huntingdon Valley, supposed to be Silurian,
argued that the schists and gneisses of the Philadelphia series
succeeding to the southeast must be still more recent,° and likewise
that the hydromica schists of the South (Chester) Valley hill were
Hudson river,’ and that these last spread through southwest Ches-
ter county.® .
Dr. T. Sterry Hunt’ made a study of the region, and chiefly on
lithological grounds identified the Chestnut Hill series as Huronian,
the Philadelphia rocks as Montalban overlying the Chestnut Hill
schists.
Prof. James D. Dana referred the mica schists and gneisses of
New York island and vicinity, which are certainly identical with
those of the vicinity of Philadelphia, to the Lower Silurian.”
N. L. Britton wrote of the correspondence between the rocks of
southeast New York and northern New Jersey of the gneissic and
schistose group and Dr. Hunt’s Montalban."
Prof. H. Carvill Lewis” identified the newer schists and gneisses
as Huronian, and in a later paper’ contended that many, if not
most, of these rocks were ‘‘ of purely eruptive origin, consisting
of syenites, acid gabbros, trap granulites, and other igneous rocks,
often highly metamorphosed.’’
Dr. Frazer referred many of these rocks to the Huronian,™
jously to the southward almost to the southern line of the State.’ Geol.
Of-Pa., J, p: 154.
A brief but remarkably accurate description of the geology of Chester
county was published in a report of the Chester County Medical Society
about the year 1857 anonymously. Its delineations of the chief belts of
rock crossing the county show the author to have been most familiar with
the region.
6 Second Geol. Survey of Pa., Vol. C®, x, but for Pottsville, Potsdam is
probably intended. Jbid., p. xvii, and pp. 6 and 7.
BOS. ps 12:
AG. p: 54:
9 Second Geol. Survey of Pa., Vol. E.
10 American Journal of Science, June, 1881.
U School of Mines Quarterly, Vol. IX, p. 33.
2 Journal Franklin Institute, third series, Vol. LXXXV, 1883, p. 424.
18H. C. Lewis, Proc. British Association in Nature, October 8, 1885,
p. 560.
14 ““ Ces mica-schistes, schistes 4 damourite, gneiss chloritiques et micacés
representent la plus méridionale et la plus orientale des trois bandes du
Huronien de ce district.”’ Memoir sur la géologie de la partie sud-est de la
Pennsylvanie. Lille, 1882, p. 37.
164 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
though questioning whether the limestone at Brinton’s Bridge,
north of Chadd's Ford, were Huronian or Laurentian.*
* Dr. Frazer regarded the South Chester Valley hill rocks as
older than the limestones. He also urged” that much of the
sandy schist area of southwestern Chester county should be re-
garded as Potsdam.
Prof. C. H. Hitchcock” referred the Philadelphia gneisses to the
Montalban system of New Hampshire.
Prof. Lesley, in his Final Report, seems to regard the limestones
of southwestern Chester county as Laurentian,” though this opinion
is qualified on p. 128, where it is stated, ‘‘ If the distinction
between the older and the newer gneiss be a valid one, the older
gneiss seems to disappear from the surface, going west from the
Schuy)kill into Chester county, and the newer gneiss seems to
occupy the whole field south of the belt of South Valley Hill
hydromica slate in Chester.’’
On p. 120, Vol. I, of the Final Report, Prof. Lesley gives
clearly his view of the structure on the Schuylkill section as
follows:
‘© 1. The lower, or Philadelphia mica schist and gneiss group;
‘© 2. The middle, or Manayunk mica schist;
«© 3. The upper, or Chestnut Hill garnetiferous schist group.’’
“*. . . . a constant general northwest dip, and these continue
for another half-mile to a serpentine outcrop along the south edge
of the Bear Ridge” older gneiss belt, but with reversed (south-
east) dips. Therefore there is here a synclinal basin, and then a
great fault, in 1 which must be buried (against the older gneiss mass)
18 Memoir sur la g géologie de la partie sud-est de la Pennsylovanie. Lille,
1882, p. 52.
16 Second Geol. Survey of Pa., Vol. C*; Proc. Am. Phil. Soc. Dee. 15,
1882, p. 517.
17 C*, pp. 35, 159, 311.
18 Trans. Am. Inst. M. H., 1883, 1884, Vol. XII, p. 68.
19**Tn Pennsylvania the highland g eneiss areas do not show their marble
beds enough to be well studied, . . but where they are thus exposed
. . . in southern Chester county . . . they reveal the same facts as in
the New Jersey Highlands’’ (Final Report, p- 110).
“There seems to be no probable objection to be urged against recognizing
in the rocks of the Highlands of New York, New Jersey and Pennsylvania
the rocks of the Adirondack region and of the Laurentian mountains of
Canada ; therefore the term Laurentian gneiss has been freely used in the
reports of progress of the Survey to signify the rocks of the Pennsylvania
Highlands” (Idem, p. 62).
Probably a TDR for Buck Ridge.
|
|
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 165
the Manayunk and Philadelphia subdivisions; at least, this is the
best explanation of the structure which has been obtained.’’™
From this brief summary it will be seen how very diverse are
the views of the eminent geologists quoted, and why a more
minute study was needed, for it seems incredible that upon the
same facts, clearly and correctly stated, conclusions so varied could
be reached by men so well qualified, some of whom, however,
made no personal study of the outcrops.
The region is a portion of the great Piedmont plateau, but in
its northern part nearly covered by the Red Rocks. The Phila-
delphia rocks (in part) extend southwestwardly through Maryland,
where they have been studied by the late Dr. Williams, whose
papers on the subject are very clear and throw much light on the
questions which arise further north.”
Dr. Williams divides the rocks of the Piedmont belt in Mary-
Jand into two distinct classes. ‘‘ One completely crystalline, and
whatever their origin retaining no certain evidence of clastic
structure, and confined to the eastern portion of the plateau. The
second class are semi-crystalline, and while they have been sub-
jected to a certain amount of metamorphism and alteration, they
still plainly show that they were once sediments of ordinary type,
not more altered than formations which in other locations have
yielded fossils, so that there is no reason to suppose that their age
will not be determined on paleontological evidence.’’*
That this conclusion is not unwarranted may be inferred from
his remarks on the ‘‘ quartz schist ’’ under which he describes most
clearly and unmistakably the Cambrian sandstone of Pennsylvania,
which contains Scolithus in Chester county and abundant fossils
further west. He says ‘‘ whatever the origin of the quartz schist
may have been, it is closely allied to the gneiss into which it
grades by imperceptible transitions.’’ **
It will be noticed that in Maryland the highly crystalline rocks
4 Trans. Am. Inst. M. H., 1883, 1884, Vol. XII, p. 123.
” Extract from the Guide Book of Baltimor é, prepared for the American
Institute of Mining Engineers, February, 1892; U. S. Geological Survey
Bulletin, No. 28, 1886 ; “Bulletin Geol. Soc. Am:, Vol. I; p. 301,
8 Guide Book, pp. 79, 80.
4“ The cleavage planes of the quartz schist are due to their layers of mus-
COVIUC. . . =: Its most characteristic feature . . . . long erystals of black
tourmaline . . . . invariably broken and their fragments stretched along
one line.’’ (Williams’ Guide Book, p. 103).
166 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
are to the east of the schistose belt. This belt, according to my
observations, extends but a short distance into Pennsylvania, near
the Delaware line, and is too poorly exposed to much more than
indicate its existence, but there is evidence that it is largely intru-
sive. The map of Dr. Williams shows the rocks occupying very
irregular areas in Maryland. In Pennsylvania, however, the
margins of the areas are nearly straight, or at most gently cury-
ing lines, with remarkable uniformity of dip (cleavage?) over
large territory.
The work of Dr. Williams was well supplemeated by that of
Prof. Frederick D. Chester on the gabbros of Delaware,” confirm-
ing Dr. Williams’ results, but seemingly proving the passage of the
massive gabbro into gneisses such as are common in the Philadelphia
schists and gneisses.
If, starting at the northeast, we take a bird’s-eye view of the
region, we shall find it a triangle with the apex near Trenton,
N. J., measuring about seventy miles southwestward with a base
of about eighteen miles at the Octorara creek, the dividing line
between Lancaster and Chester counties.”
At this apex we find the ancient gneiss flanked on the northwest
by the Red Rocks, and on the southeast by the Cambrian sand-
stone, closely southeast of which are rocks typical of Mr. Hall’s
Manayunk series.
Southwestwardly we see the ancient gneiss widening and becom-
ing a prominent ridge, known as Buck Ridge. The Cambrian
sandstone continues on its southeasterly flank for a distance of
nearly twenty miles, in its turn flanked on the southeast by lime-
stone for a short distance, the schists and gneisses following.
Returning now to the ancient gneiss, we see it fork near Willow
Grove, about eighteen miles from our starting point being divided
and its central part overlaid by the Cambrian sandstone. The two
branches of the gneiss continue southwestwardly, the northerly
soon covered by the Red Rocks, but reappearing and covering a
large extent of territory in northern Chester county, the southerly
extending southwestward, narrowing, and at the Wissahickon
becoming obscure or covered, then reappearing and widening
25 U7. S. Geol. Survey Bul., No. 59. .
26 Except in the Chester valley, and to a very limited extent south of it,
my researches have not extended west of the Octorara.
‘
;
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 167
rapidly, crossing the Schuylkill with a width of a mile; Darby
creek, seven miles from the Schuylkill, with a width of four miles;
Crum creek, three miles beyond, with a width of five miles,
Here it again forks, the southerly fork, only about a mile wide
and extending not over five miles in length, narrows and ends
southwest of and near Westtown School; the northerly, with a
width of four miles, continues to the north of Westtown School,
underlies West Chester, then narrows to a little over a mile,
crosses the Brandywine just above the forks, and ends at North-
brook, about two miles beyond.
In nearly all this course we find the adjacent rocks to be schists
and schistose gneisses, in which are outcrops of the sandstone.
Returning now to the vicinity of Willow Grove, we find, going
southwestward, the sandstone divided by a limestone area. The
northerly and much larger branch of the sandstone continues, with
interruptions, to Valley Forge, whence it continues southwest-
wardly as the very prominent North Chester Valley Hill to Quarry-
ville, in Lancaster county.
The southerly area of the Cambrian ranges through Edge Hill,
here approaching very closely that mentioned as being on the south-
easterly flank of the ancient gneiss, thence, through Barren Hill, to
Spring Mill on the Schuylkill. Here it becomes obscure, but it
may be traced westward as far as Wayne, Delaware county, while
the sandy micaceous rocks, which seem to replace in part the
typical sandstone, continue uninterruptedly. Im middle and
western Chester county the typical rock again appears among the
micaceous rocks.
The limestone which first appears a short distance southeast of
Willow Grove rapidly widens and forms the Montgomery or
Plymouth Valley and westward the Chester Valley.
A little east of the Schuylkill this great area of limestone is in
its turn divided by a hill of hydromica schist, with no sandstone
visible between it and the limestone. West of the Schuylkill, the
southerly areas of limestone and sandstone become insignificant,
while the hydromica schist, not over a quarter of a mile wide at
the river, broadens (chiefly by two remarkable promontcries) until
one and a half miles west of the river its breadth exceeds two
miles, while the northerly area of the limestone forming the floor
of the valley two and a half miles wide at the Schuylkill narrows
168 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
to less than a mile. From the Schuylkill westward it is known as
the Chester Valley.
Close to the southerly arm of the limestone occur mica schists,
not unlike those on the southerly side of the southerly ancient
gneiss. These schists, very narrow at the Schuylkill, widen
rapidly westward, while the hydromica schists narrow. Near
Northbrook Station, on the West Branch of the Brandywine, these
mica schists appear to unite with those on the southeast of the
ancient gneiss, while the gneiss itself disappears from view.
This disappearance is accompanied by a large outcrop of serpen-
tine, a rock which northeastward seems to flank the ancient gneiss
on both sides in scattered outcrops. Here the northerly mica schists
become more quartzose and gneisses abound, much less massive,
however, than the ancient gneiss, and form steep and high hills.
Included in the area of Prof. Rogers’ first belt is the porphy-
ritic gneiss, occupying a narrow outcrop at the Schuylkill but
widening westward, It is remarkably uniform in its composition
and from its hardness makes a prominent hill through most of its
course.
In the same area are the Fairmount and Frankford gneisses, the
former apparently anticlinal at the Schuylkill, the latter with the
abnormal strike of nearly east and west. Both are noted for the
rare minerals which they contain.
Resting on the higher summits of the newer gneisses and schists,
southeast of the ancient gneiss, are patches of the Bryn Mawr
gravel, described by Prof. Lewis. At a much lower level, over-
lying similar schists and gneisses, occur the Delaware river gravels
and clays.
It would be most systematic to study the region, beginning with
the most recent rocks. So far as the gravels and clays are con-
cerned this could readily be done, but they are so much better
exposed in New Jersey and Maryland and have been so well studied
by the geoiogists of those States and by Mr. Woolman that nothing
T could add would be of value.
Below these, however, it is the probably newer rocks about which
there is the greatest difference of opinion, while as to the older
there appears to be less question. For this reason, and also be-
cause the ancient gneiss forms a nearly straight almost unbroken
ridge through about fifty miles of the region, I have deemed it
)
:
j
f
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 169
best to begin with it, and to consider next the sandstone and lime-
stone, and afterwards the more doubtful rocks.
In endeavoring to describe the rocks clearly and at the same
time to avoid as far as possible the description of areas simply of
geographical or political division, I have found some repetition
unavoidable, which I trust will be pardoned.
The following is the classification of the rocks of the region,
except the gravels and clay, by Prof. Rogers, Mr. Hall and my-
self, the latter showing my view of the Schuylkill section, except
that the northwesterly ancient gneiss is not visible at the Schuyl-
kill, though to be seen not very far off, both to the northeast and
southwest, and that the northwesterly Cambrian sandstone and
Cambrian schists are concealed at the Schuylkill. The Frankford
gneiss does not reach the Schuylkill.
Prof. Rogers. Mr. Chas. E. Hall. Theo. D. Rand.
S. E. Philadelphia mica { Frankford gneiss.
schists and gneiss | Fairmount gneiss.
group. Manayunk — schists
First Belt. ; and gneisses.
Porphyritic gneiss.
Manayunk _ schists
| | and gneiss.
} Chestnut Hillschists, ( Chestnut Hill schists,
| including steatite including steatite
L
¢ Manayunk schists.
Second Belt.
and serpentine ; belt.
belts. Cambrian sandstone.
J Spangled schists.
| Lafayette — serpen-
tine.
Rogers’ altered pri-
| mal.
Third Belt. Laurentian. Ancient gneiss.
¢ Rogers’ altered pri-
iSannasal.
Altered Primal. 1 Schists, spangled and
| _ garnetiferous.
| Cambrian sandstone.
Auroral, Cambrian limestone.
Primal. Hudson river slate. Hydromica schists.
Auroral. No. 2 Jimestone. Cambrian limestone.
Upper Primal. Upper Cambrian
schists.
Primal Sandstone. Cambrian sandstone.
170 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Prof. Rogers. Mr. Chas. E. Hail. Theo. D. Rand.
( Lower Cambrian
| schists and gneisses
J (Chester county
| gneiss).
| Lower Cambrian
| conglomerate.
Ancient gneiss.
Red sandstone.
Lower Primal.
It is well recognized that no thorough study of the crystalline
rocks can be made without a study of sections under the micro-
scope. I do not feel myself competent to undertake this, but hope
it may be done by more able hands, when undoubtedly much light
will be thrown on many points now obscure. To this end it is my
intention to present to the Academy, as soon as I can properly
label it, my collection of the rocks of the region, which I believe
to be nearly complete.”
Tn preparing these notes I have been most generously aided by
many persons—by information, by taking me to points of interest
and by hospitality. Indeed, I may say that I have never asked
assistance but it was most freely tendered by owners of farms, of
quarries and others, and I regret that I cannot name all to whom
I am thus under obligation, but among them I feel that especial
thanks are due to Mr. Alfred Sharpless, of West Chester; to Mr.
William W. Jefferis, to Dr. Charles Schiiffer, to Mr. John L. Bal-
derston and Mr. Eli Thompson, of Kennett Square; to Messrs.
David and Harry Wilson, of Gum Tree; to Mr. William B.
Harvey, of West Grove; to Mr. Thomas H. Windle, of Coates-
ville, and to Mr. Walter J. Baldwin, of Romansyille; and for
photographs to Dr. and Mrs. Charles Schiffer, Mr. William C.
Stevenson, Jr., Mr. John C. Browne and Mr. George Vaux, Jr.
THe GEOLOGICAL Map.
With this paper I have deposited with the Academy a map, on
which I have represented the rocks as I have found them, except
minor details impossible to be shown on a map of this seale.
*'Since this was written the Pennsylvania Legislature has made an
appropriation and the United States Geological Survey has undertaken the
further study of the geology of the State, Dr. Florence Bascom, Professor of
Geology in Bryn Mawr College having been placed in charge of the south-
easterly part so that my hope will inall probability be realized within a few
years,
ee ee a a
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 171
This map is not intended for publication at present, because I
have been unable to procure a trustworthy topographical base. If,
as now seems certain, the excellent work of the U. S. Geological
Survey, as shown in the map of Philadelphia and vicinity, shall
be extended westward, it will give me pleasure to revise this
work.
TI do not wish to be understood as believing that the whole area
upon which is represented the newer schists and gneisses is covered
by rocks of one age. Future and more careful study will doubtless
divide this area, and I believe it will be made to appear that
paleozoie clastic rocks have been penetrated by igneous rocks both
basic ard acidic, and that the resulting complex has been very
greatly metamorphosed and folded by dynamic action.
The topographical base of the map presented, but not pub-
lished, was prepared from other maps, for the use of the Con-
vocation of Chester, by Mr. Charles G. Darragh, to whom I am
indebted for copies. From personal observation I can say that
there seem to be errors in all the maps. That which I have used
for fieldwork in Chester county, and probably one of the best, is
Breou’s atlas. The maps are of varied large scale, but when
reduced to one scale will often not even approximately register,
while the orientation is often in error. The boundaries shown are
approximate only. Exposures are rarely sufficient to make them
accurate.
THE ANCIENT GNEISS.
The rocks forming the long, nearly straight, Buck Ridge, and
extending from near the Delaware at Trenton southwestward for
some fifty miles, are, I believe, universally admitted to be the
most ancient rocks of the region, and to be, probably, the equiva-
lent of the Highland gneiss of New Jersey and New York. They
appear to be to a considerable extent of plutonic origin.
There has been no controversy in regard to them in their range
through Bucks, Montgomery and part of Delaware counties. Ex-
actly similar rocks continue in the same strike line to range
through northwesterly Delaware county and Chester county, but in
regard to this portion geologists do not agree. My observations
lead me to distinguish these from what I regard as the more recent
series by the following characteristics:
Ancient Gineiss.
Very compact and very hard,
never schistose unless decom-
posed.
foliation,
never mi-
Stratification, or
generally obscure,
nutely plicated.
Weather into (1) schist-like
masses,* which, however, will
not readily cleave. (2) Fre-
quently into very hard nuclei
surrounded by concentric coats
of decomposed and decomposing
rock (vulg. ‘‘ niggerheads’’).
(3) Frequently into loam con-
taining angular fragments of
blue quartz, but almost always
intermixed with 1 or 2, and
very rarely showing mica in the
soil.
Blue quartz very frequently
present; particularly shown in
the soil derived from the rock.
Rocks often uniform over large
areas.
Margins usually marked by
steep slopes, making a well-
defined hill or table-land on the
strike line.
Feldspars disseminated granu-
lar, rarely in crystals of any
size, and when so porphyritic.
Usually triclinic.
Mieas, chiefly biotite in very
small quantity and~ dissemi-
nated; muscovite non-existent,
or very rare.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
[1900.
Philadelphia Newer Gneisses.
Sometimes very compact and
hard, but always more or less
schistose: usually very schistose,
often soft.
Stratification, or foliation,
rarely obscure; often much pli-
cated, both minutely and on a
large scale.
Weather into irregular mass-
es, but more frequently into
loam, often showing mica abun-
dantly in the soil. The por-
phyritic gneiss only shows the
concentric (boulder) decompo-
sition.
Blue quartz absent or very
rare.
Rocks usually vary greatly
within short distances on the
dip line.
Marginal slopes gentle, no ex-
tensive well-defined hills on the
strike line, except the porphy-
ritic gneiss and except west of
the Brandywine.
Feldspars often segregated, or
in veins, beds or dykes, often
large crystalline masses (pegma-
tite), usually orthoclase or mi-
crocline.
Micas, chiefly muscovite, gen-
erally abundant, often forming
a large part of the rock, also in
crystals and cleavage masses.
Biotite, however, not rare.
eel ——
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 173
Ancient Geiss. Philadelphia Newer Gneisses.
Basic trap dykes common, Basic trap dykes unknown to
usually small. the northeast (except some of
the hornblende rocks, which
are probably altered diorites).
They occur southwest, but are
not common. Granite or peg-
matite common.
As has been stated, the ancient gneiss forms a hill, usually
prominent, from near Morrisville, on the Delaware,* opposite
Trenton, N. J., to Northbrook, on the West Branch of the
Brandywine, a distance of about fifty miles.
In this distance it is unbroken, save by narrow gaps, most of
them with high precipitous sides. In the northeast it is bounded
on the northwest by the Red Rocks, and on the southeast by the
Cambrian, with iron-bearing clays. As stated, the hill which it
forms is known as Buck Ridge.” Its structure is apparently
anticlinal, but it seems probable that this is due to foliation from
dynamic action. The dips vary so widely in short distances, and
are usually so steep, that almost any structure may be built upon
them.
As has been stated, Buck Ridge forks a little west of the Penny-
pack, receiving a basin of Cambrian sandstone, which divides it into
two areas, the northwesterly, soon concealed beneath the Red
Rocks but rising beyond the Schuylkill, to form part of the azoic
region of northern Chester county, north of the Cambrian of the
North (Chester) Valley Hill, and extending beyond Honeybrook
in the northwestern part of Chester county.
Near Feasterville is the only limestone outcrop occurring in this
gneiss (Van Artsdalen’s quarry). Accompanying the limestone
78 In the final report, Second Geol. Survey of Pa., Vol. I, p. 125, it is
stated that the Philadelphia group narrows more and more, but reaches the
Delaware at Easton ; but on p. 79 it is stated that the old azoic gneiss is
seen rising from beneath the mesozoie brown sandstone at the Delaware
opposite Trenton. According to my observations the gneiss hill is northwest
of the Cambrian sandstone ridge which reaches the Delaware just above the
Hancock street bridge, Trenton, N. J. The ancient gneiss I have not seen
northeast of the cut of the Trenton Cut-off Railroad, near Woodbourne, six
miles south 70° west of Trenton. The rocks exposed in the river below
the Hancock street bridge and thence southeast to the Pennsylvania Rail-
road bridge are typical Manayunk gneisses.
* Bear Ridge, Hinal Report, I, p. 175, is probably a misprint. Cf. idem,
LAA
174 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
were many minerals, among them graphite, or plumbago, of which
@ mine was opened southeast of Feasterville, and not far from Van
Artsdalen’s.
This is probably the mine referred to in the Final Report, p.
478, where it is stated that a mine of very pure plumbago was
worked a century ago near Bustleton, Bucks county. Bustleton,
however, is some eight miles to the southeast, and is in Philadel-
phia county.
The southeasterly arm continues as a high hill through Abington,
but near Waverly Heights sinks and is shown only by loose
masses, and in one quarry. ‘This quarry is of special interest,
because here we have the gneiss dividing two closely adjacent areas
of Cambrian sandstone, precisely similar in character and little
more than half a mile apart on a geographical line, which would
be a little longer than the line of dip. The gneiss in this quarry
(west of the Limekiln pike, a quarter of a mile south of Edge
Hill village) dips N. 60° W. 55°, the southwesterly Cambrian §.
10° E. 70°, 8. 20° E. 70°, the northwesterly strikes about 8. 60°
W. vertical.
A marked change in the topography is here noticeable. The
long straight Huntingdon Valley (limestone) has ended, the gneiss
ridge has disappeared, while the northwesterly Cambrian sandstone
ridge rises to a considerable elevation, forming the southeast bound-
ing hill of that part of the great Montgomery-Chester limestone
valley known as the Plymouth Valley. This hill, however, trends
more southward than the rocks, so that the ancient gneiss, the
southeasterly Cambrian, and the schists which lie to the southeast
of the latter strike into it. The northwesterly slope of the hill
is much more steep than the southeasterly. Westward, toward
the Wissahickon, the former increases, the latter. decreases, until
at Chestnut Hill the scutheasterly slope has disappeared, while the
northwesterly is quite steep and probably over 500 feet in vertical
height.
Where the North Pennsylvania Railroad crosses this hill at Edge
Hill village, south of Edge Hill Station, the hill is wholly of sand-
stone. Following the crest of the hill southwestward, we find no
exposures, but soon the rock fragments in the soil are wholly of
the ancient gneiss, while the northwesterly Cambrian sandstone
forms a subordinate hill to the northwestward, (this last becomes
2
a
2
|
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 175
more and more prominent westwardly, forming Barren Hill). The
gneiss fragments are soon succeeded by schists and these soon form
the entire hill from a point north of Chestnut Hill to southwest
of the Wissahickon. On the north flank of this hill is apparently
a ponconformable contact between the schists, the sandstone and
the ancient gneiss. °°
On the Wissahickon, I have failed to find the ancient
gneiss, the schist occurring within a thousand feet of the
Barren Hill Cambrian sandstone, with low ground intervening,
but on Northwestern avenue, the northwest boundary of Philadel-
phia, it appears within two thousand feet of the Wissahickon,
soon attains an elevation of some three hundred feet, and widens
rapidly toward the Schuylkill. It is this rock that terminates
westward toward Barren Hill, the ridge to which the Ridge Road
owes its name, a narrow hill of schists and gneisses cut off from the
adjacent table-lands of Germantown and Chestnut Hill on the
north, Ardmore and Bryn Mawr on the south, by the valleys of
the Wissahickon and the Schuylkill, which here both run in a
general course nearly that of the dip of the rocks, 1.25 to 3 miles
apart. The summit of the ridge is nearly level, while the flanks
are much serrated by the vaileys of small streams flowing east-
ward into the Wissahickon, and westward into the Schuylkill.
The Wissahickon and Schuylkill sections, though so short a dis-
tance apart, show clearly the great changes in the rocks of this
region within short distances. On the Wissahickon, as has been
stated, the schists are within a thousand feet of the sandstone. On
the Schuylkill they are over a mile apart. The dips are almost all
steep.
At the Schuylkill the ancient gneiss hill is most prominent.
Nearly a mile in width with very steep slopes it rises to an eleva-
tion of four hundred feet. The Schuylkill gap shows almost pre-
cipitous escarpments toward the river. Westward, the same steep
slopes on the sides prevail for about three miles, the belt widening
westwardly. The summit is comparatively level, and is traversed
for many miles by the Spring Mill road.
Near the line of the Pennsylvania Railroad and the Lancaster
turnpike the floors of the adjacent valleys have risen so that the
°° Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1890, p. 90.
176 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
hill, while reaching 450 feet to 500 feet in its highest ground, is no
longer very prominent. The Pennsylvania Railroad summit west
of Villa Nova, in a cut about twenty-five feet deep, is 430 feet above
ocean level. The gneiss is here two and a quarter miles wide.
Further southwestward it still widens, extending on Darby Creek
from the Roberts road and the Coopertown and Newtown road
to Devon Inn, a distance of three and a half miles. Although
no longer so bold a hill, its characteristics may be seen on the old
Roberts road, laid out near its eastern base and so hilly that a new
road, Bryn Mawr avenue, was laid out a short distance east of it,
and in the schists, to avoid the hills. West of Darby Creek it
still widens, and east of Crum Creek attains its greatest width,
about five miles; between Crum and Ridley creeks it is divided by
a valley of schists, the northerly and main arm continuing, the
southern arm ending before it reaches Chester creek.
The northerly arm is about three miles wide at West Chester,
thence it narrows, crossing the Brandywine above the forks and
ending near Northbrook.
There being difference of opinion about the areas occupied by
this gneiss in Delaware and Chester counties, they will be given
somewhat in detail, premising that I include in it only the hard
non-schistose rock shown in the Schuylkill section, and along the
Pennsylvania Railroad between Rosemont and St. Davyid’s Sta-
tions, where it is sharply differentiated from the schists which ad-
join it on both sides.
Mr. Hall found difficulty in distinguishing the schistose gneiss
from the decomposing ancient gneiss,“ but my experience has been
that they weather so differently that few mistakes would be made
if nothing but the soil were carefully examined. Added to this,
however, it is hard to find, except in the small tract southeast of
West Chester, an area of the ancient gneiss of more than a few
acres without unmistakable evidences of its presence; especially is
this true of the margins where erosion has been most active.
Among others, the area colored correctly Laurentian in C*, north-
west of Bryn Mawr, is changed on that in C’, to schists, Mr. Hall
31 “¢ Many of the syenitic rocks of the Laurentian are weathered to such an
extent that it is, in many cases, impossible to distinguish them from the
adjacent and overlying feldspathic schistose gneisses, and it is therefore
impossible to draw a definite dividing line between them ’’ (C°, p. 92).
1900.1] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 177
saying (p. 22), ‘‘I have since been able to trace the schistose
rocks all the way from Bryn Mawr to the serpentine localities
in the vicinity of Wayne in Radnor township, thus connecting the
two areas and proving the schistose rocks to extend across the
Laurentian belt... .. ss i
I have already published® a number of localities within this
area where the undecomposed hard ancient gneiss of most typical
character may be observed. Since that time it has been exposed
in many other places within the region thus changed, notably in
quarries on the Wayne estate, east of the northwest branch of
Ithan creek north of the road from Radnor Station to St. David’s
Church; in a well 70 feet deep on Mr. Robert Stewart’s property,
near St. David’s Station; in a large well 50 feet deep on Pennsyl-
vania Railroad property, close to Radnor Station, dug in 1892-
1893, as well as at many localities on both sides of Darby creek.
The northwest border line being the most regular and best defined,
it will be traced first. With the map in C* my observations agree,
but the later map in C’ is certainly in error as to the north-
west boundary as well as the southeast. The schists do occur
north and northwest of Radnor Station, in Cream Valley, but
not at all east or south of that valley. Within a short distance
are at least a dozen conspicuous outcrops of unmistakable ancient
gneiss. The line is nearly straight S. 63°-W. from the Schuylkill
through Lower Merion and Radnor, as far as St. David’s Station,
where the railroad emerges from it through a cut in which the
rock was well exposed; thence to Devon the border line is about
S. 80° W., and thence to West Chester S. 60° W. Northwest of
West Chester it bends rapidly southward, crossing the East Branch
of the Brandywine south of Copesville, and then still curving
southward crosses the West Branch of the Brandywine east of
Northbrook. The §. 60° W. line is not strictly so, but curved,
with that as the general direction.
The southeasterly boundary from the Schuylkill to Rosemont is
so well defined by the ridge itself as to be unquestionable.
At Rosemont (in Lower Merion, Montgomery county, but very
close to the Delaware county line) in excavations about the station
the spangled schists were exposed, particularly in wells and in the
2 Second Geol. Survey of Pa., An. Rep., 1888, part iv, p. 1573 et seg.
12
178 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
trenches dug for the abutments of the railroad bridge at Rosemont
Station, dipping 8. 45° E. 50°. About 500 feet northwest was
an old quarry showing the ancient gneiss with abundance of large
masses on the surface. It is exposed also in the bed of the Dela-
ware-Montgomery county line road, about a quarter of a mile
uorthwest of Rosemont Station. About a quarter of a mile south-
west of Rosemont Station the old Lancaster road, or Conestoga
road, crosses a small stream, a branch of Meadow-brook, and then
going westwardly climbs the gneiss hill. About 800 feet east of
this stream the schists are exposed in the road; about 600 feet west
of it the gneiss is well exposed in a quarry on the north side of
the road, the rock dipping southeast 65°.
On Ithan creek the schists may be seen close to Bryn Mawr
avenue, thence northward the banks are of the gneiss to its source,
there being many exposures.
On the Radnor and Chester road, occupying from Ithan P. O.
to the mouth of Meadow-brook the watershed between Ithan and
Darby creeks, the schists are exposed near the Roberts road and
Darby creek; thence northwestward for miles the gneiss is exposed
at frequent intervals.
On the right bank of Darby creek, the Coopertown and New-
town Square road (in fact, the prolongation southwestward of the
Roberts road) is in the schists which are exposed in the cut just
southwest of the creek, while the gneiss is exposed in a quarry
less than a hundred feet north of the road, and thence constantly
on both banks very nearly to its source.
Immediately to the south of this road is the large serpentine
outcrop (the continuation, I believe, of the La Fayette belt)
which contained Moro Phillips’ chrome mine, and which extends
from east of Darby creek through Marple township. In a cut
made for the Chester County Railroad, the gneiss is well exposed
a short distance northwest of the serpentine and of Fawkes run,
close to the Radnor-Newtown township line.
Mr. Hall maps the whole area from Ithan creek on the east to
Crum creek on the west (and beyond it) as far north as Camp
run, Reese’s run and Central Square as of schists, but the three
localities last. mentioned, embracing many outcrops, are within
this area, and show the rock unweathered and indisputable.
The southerly border of the gneiss is not well defined between
ny a a ee a
-_
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 179
Darby and Crum creeks, but the rock appears on the latter atthe
mouth of Hunter’s run. It is well defined at Ridiey creek, close
to the serpentine of the Blue Hill Schoolhouse, two miles north of
Media. The schists are well exposed southeast of the serpentine,
and typica] ancient gneiss close northwest of it.
Across the creek from the Blue Hill Schoolhouse, that is on the
right or westerly bank, the southerly border of the gneiss forms a
high hill very steep on its south side, divided by a branch of Dismal
run into two, known locally as Poplar Hill and Round Top ; but
west of this the border is not clear, exposures being few and poor,
and the gneisses of the newer series adjoining it on the southeast
being of unusually hard and heavy bedded character, and being
possibly altered gabbros. There can, however, be little doubt that
it extends south of Howellville, but not as far as Lima, and that
before reaching Chester creek the margin turns northward and then
eastward (forming the southerly hill of the valley in which the
Street road runs) toa point a little east of the Willistown Inn,
on the Philadelphia and West Chester road, this hill outlining the
southerly branch of the gneiss referred to. From Willistown Inn
the southerly edge of the northern and larger branch pursues a
west-southwest course to a point north of Oakbourne Station.*
%3Qn the map in C the gneiss area of Radnor and west is made to end
north of Newtown and Central Squares, the schist areas to the east being ex-
tended across Newtown and Edgemont to the Chester county line. South-
west of this schist area is represented a large area of the gneiss, extending
along Ridley creek from Sycamore Mills to the Chester county line. West-
ward it forks into three very irregular areas, one trending a little south of
west, another southwest and the third south-southwest. But the Radnor
gneiss is very conspicuously continued through Newtown and along Crum
creek, and the schists and schistose gneisses are equally conspicuous on the
south of the gneiss from Sycamore Mills to south of Howellville. Prof.
Lesley seems to doubt these areas, for although on p. 91 of his Final Report
he refers to irregular areas of old syenitic azoic gneiss in Delaware and south-
ern Chester counties, he says (p. 128): ‘‘ If the distinction between the older
and the newer gneiss be a valid one, the older gneiss seems to disappear
from the surface going west from the Schuylkill into Chester county and
the newer gneiss seems to occupy the whole field south of the belt of South
Valley Hill hydromica slate in Chester.”’
Within the limits described there is no scarcity of outcrops of the typical
rock, but at very few of them can the dip be measured ; the following may
be selected as typical exposures within the area designated as schists on the
map in C®:— ;
Cut of the Philadelphia and Delaware County Railroad, northwest of
Fawkes run and near The Hunt station.
Road between Newtown Square and Central Square.
Forks of the road .75 m. west of Newtown Square and thence westward on
both roads to Crum Creek. On the southerly it is shown in one outcrop,
180 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
In the region northwest of Oakbourne, that is near West Chester,
there is no longer difficulty in finding the line. The ancient gneiss
is exposed a short distance northwest of Westtown School, while
the schists are exposed west and south of it. Thence the line curves
northwardly and changes from west-southwest to nearly west, the
gneiss appearing one-tenth mile northwest of the schoolhouse at Scon-
nelltown, while serpentine succeeded by schists lies southwest of it.
On the Brandywine the line is close to the forks, and on the
right bank is marked by a steep conical hill. It is at this point
probably not over half a mile wide. A mile to the westward it
forms a separate high ridge known as Brag Hill, separated from
the conical hill by the deep valley of a small affluent of the
Brandywine; the gap affording an easy passage for the State
road. A mile further, near Northbrook, it has become still nar-
rower, occupying but the northerly slope of the hill, with schists
and serpentine on both flanks. A mile southwest of Northbrook
it appears to end, the schists on both sides uniting and a large
outcrop of serpentine appearing.
The limits of the ancient gneiss above given accord closely with
those of Prof. Rogers,* but as stated differ materially from those
in C’, while in C‘ no distinction is made upon the map between
the ancient gneiss and the schists, though they are separated in the
text. They differ also from the more recent geological map of the
whole State (1893).
Prof. Lesley says of the gneiss ‘‘ from the gorge of the Nesham-
3007 east of serpentine, dipping S. 25° E. 75°, and in another, 200’ west of the
serpentine, S. 50° E. 75° along and south of the West Branch of Ridley
creek, north of Howellville.
4 In Ct, p. 56, it is stated that the area of this gneiss, which is the con-
tinuation of that of Delaware county, has a western limit in the vicinity
of West Chester, but that a small area occurs at the junction of the East and
West branches of the Brandywine, surrounded by mica schists and micaceous
gneisses similar to those along the northern edge of the syenite east of West
Chester. This does not at all agree with my observations. The northern
border is very well defined with numerous outcrops and quarries along Tay-
lor’s run to the East branch of the Brandywine and thence through the
Worth farm (southeast of serpentine) to the West branch at Seeds Bridge
and thence westward across the State road to Northbrook. The southern
border passes between the Philadelphia and West Chester road, which is
wholly within it from Willistown Inn to West Chester, and the Street road
which is in the schist valley. The area appears to narrow rapidly toward
the Brandywine, the union of the two branches of the creek being at the
border. In this area it is constantly and well exposed.
3 Geol. of Pa., I, p. 78.
ee eee eee ae =
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 181
iny to the gorge of the Pennypack it makes what is locally known
as the Buck Ridge, with a constant width of two and one-half
miles. At Willow Grove it splits, . . . . its southern fork keep-
ing on as a narrow thread into Delaware county, where it spreads
out into three separate areas, the northern one passing on into
southern Chester and the southern one into the State of Dela-
ware.’’*
I cannot believe that Prof. Lesley personally examined this
region, for instead of being a narrow thread in Delaware county
it there attains its greatest width, more than double its width
between the Neshaminy aad the Pennypack; the northern area
does not extend into southern Chester county, neither does a southern
one pass into Delaware, unless the northwesterly extension of the
Delaware gabbro be so regarded.
A prominent feature of this belt is its trap dykes. None are
_large, none can be traced for any distance, the latter fact being
due probably to the gneissic rock resisting decomposition equally
with the trap, but evidence of its presence is to be found very fre-
quently. In the cut of the Pennsylvania Railroad southeast of Rad-
nor Station two systems of dykes were exposed, one a diorite in
narrow veins, dipping about 65° east-southeast, cutting an older
granite dipping 60° to 80° west-southwest. Much trap lies on the
surface over the ancient gneiss area, and there are numerous out-
crops in place—e. g., three-tenths of a mile northwest of Radnor
Station (diabase of a reddish tint) on Ithan creek, on the Radnor
and Chester road near the old Lancaster road, on Johnston’s
quarry at Wayne (diabase), near Van Artsdalen’s quarry in Bucks
county (norite).*
Dr. Bascom identified as norite a rock found on the property of
Miss Martha M. Brown near Radnor Station.
THe CAMBRIAN SANDSTONE.
Prof. Rogers divided his primal series into three, based upon the
exposures in the North Chester Valley Hill, of which the middle
member is by far the most uniform and characteristic :—
1. A lower shale, or slate, the lower primal;
2. The middle, or sandstone proper;
86 Final Report, p. 79.
Dr. J. F. Kemp, Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci., XII, p. 71.
182 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
3. An upper, sandy, micaceous, shaly or schistose rock, next
below the limestone.
The sandstone formerly supposed to be the equivalent of the
Potsdam sandstone of New York is undisputed by all geologists
who have examined the region. It is abundant and widespread.
Lithologically it is remarkably uniform. Its most usual aspect is
thus described by Prof. Rogers: ‘‘ A thin-bedded yellowish-white,
very compact rock, presenting in its composition much imperfectly
developed feldspar,* and showing a tendency to a rhombohedral
fracture;... . other bands contain likewise many minute partings
of crystalline talc, and the surface of the more solid feldspathic
beds exhibit very frequently at these partings innumerable minute
crystalline specks of pure black schorl.’’*
To this may be added that the rock is often a soft sandstone,
while at times very compact and hard, indeed a quartzite, pre-
serving all the other of the above characters; that the tourmaline
erystals (of which, when Rogers wrote, schorl was the common
name) are not always minute, and that they are generally dis-
rupted.
It should further be noted that at that time the varieties of mus-
covite of the damourite group were not separated from tale, so that
with our present light we should translate tale into damourite,
sericite or hydromica in many cases in which Prof. Rogers uses it.
In some portions the markings of Scolithus linearis are abun-
dant, particularly west of the Valley Forge Gap. This fossil,
though of little value otherwise, distinctly marks the rock as in
the paleozoic column, while the unusually definite character of the
rock enables us to identify it readily when the markings are absent.
This uniform character is remarkable when we consider the numer-
ous outcrops far separated, not only on the strike line but also on
the dip. The same rock is described by Dr. Williams as occur-
ring in Maryland.”
88 Kaolinized feldspar.
89 First Geol. Survey of Pa., I, p. 155, quoted C*, p. 109.
10In the Final Report of the Second Geol. Survey, p. 177, it is stated
“some of the beds show needles of hornblende and a little crystallized tale.”
This I think is not the case.
41 “‘Quartzite, or quartz schist, . . . such a clearly marked type that it
serves at many other localities to fix a definite horizon. There is always
present a perfect foliation due to parallel layers of muscovite at varying dis-
tances from each other. In these foliation planes there is an abundant de-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 183
The lowest beds, best shown near Willow Grove, are of a con-
glomerate chiefly of quartz pebbles, united by a siliceous cement.
The same rock seems to be poorly exposed westward of Valley
Forge.
The Cambrian enters the State near Morrisville, flanking the
ancient gneiss on its southeast side, forming a prominent narrow
straight hill, in most of its course called (as is also the correspond-
ing outcrop on the northwesterly side of the ridge of ancient gneiss
further southwest) Edge Hill, also Rocky Hill. It is here sepa-
rated from the ancient gneiss by about a thousand feet, chiefly of
unctuous variegated clays, which resemble those of the iron ore
beds further southwest. On the Trenton Cut-off Railroad, where
it is well exposed, it dips N. 50° .W 70° to 80° toward the gneiss.
From this point it continues to Huntingdon Valley, and is ex-
posed on the Neshaminy and in quarries. It seems to narrow
westwardly, and at the Pennypack it is not visible; about one
mile west of the Pennypack a much overgrown quarry shows indi-
cations of it, and masses may be seen in walls in the vicinity; this
is immediately north of the limestone of Huntingdon Valley.
About four miles further west, it is well exposed in a quarry on
the Waverly road near the Limekiln pike, at Waverly Heights,
and here is separated from the sandstone northwest of the gneiss
by but half a mile; it dips S. 10° E. 70°, S. 20° E. + 70°; S.
25° E. 80°. It is almost identical in aspect with the northerly
sandstone, a little more micaceous, a little darker in color, some-
what harder, with cherty layers more abundant, and in this it
differs also from the outcrops in the same belt to the eastward.
This outcrop is about a mile in length, but is clearly exposed only
in this one quarry; it appears to strike into Edge Hill, the topo-
graphical continuation of the northerly sandstone hill, more fully
described hereafter. *
A similar rock, but still more micaceous, and with mica schists
_ interstratified, appears nearly in the line of the strike, about two
velopment of black tourmaline, whose crystals are always transversely
broken and their fragments more or less broken as if by stretching.’’—Geo.
H. Williams, Bul. Geol. So. of Am., Vol. II, p. 308.
” Prof. Lesley, Final Report, I, p. 86, writes of it as forming a low ridge
running three miles from Waverly Heights to near Chestnut Hill, but I
have been unable to find it beyond the outcrop in the Waverly road about a
thousand feet west of the Limekiln pike.
184 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
and a half miles to the southwest, on Paper Mill lane north of
the Bethlehem turnpike, dipping steeply S. 10° E., while the
ancient gneiss, poorly exposed 200 feet north of it, strikes S.
35° W. vertical.
While probable, it is not certain that this outcrop is of the true
Cambrian sandstone. If it is, then the adjacen’ and interstratified
mica schists must be of the same age. It may be a rock made
by the degradation of the Cambrian and be more recent. Com-
paring this outcrop with the Waverly Heights outcrop, and that
with the exposures near the Neshaminy, we find that the change
from Waverly Heights westward is not much if any greater than
from the Neshaminy to Waverly Heights.
West of this Prof. Carvill Lewis identified it close to the ser-
pentine, southeast of the gneiss, northwest of La Fayette on the
Schuylkill. West of the Schuylkill, in the same line, occur sandy
mica schists with rhomboidal jointing, which may or may not
represent it. On the Roberts’ road south of the Conestoga road,
and on the latter west of the Roberts’ road (Radnor township)
close to the gneiss, a rock appears very closely resembling it; con-
taining, however, no tourmaline. ‘It occurs in narrow beds in the
mica schists much as in Paper Mill road; a chert-like quartz
accompanies it.
This is the most westerly point at which I have observed any
similar rock close to the ancient gneiss on its southeast side, but to
the southwest, in Chester county, are numerous outcrops which
will be best considered after the more prominent ones to the north-
eastward.
THE CAMBRIAN NORTAWEST OF Buck RIDGE.
This first appears, as has been mentioned, a short distance east
of Willow Grove, where the gneiss forks, and the sandstone
appears as the end of a synclinal. This is about ten miles north-
east of the Schuylkill. Here the rock is a coarse conglomerate of
bluish quartz pebbles in a siliceous paste, followed by the typical
rock.
About a mile southwest of Willow Grove, the synelinal of sand-.
stone is in its turn overlain by a synclinal of limestone, the easterly
end of the limestone of the Chester-Montgomery valley, dividing
the sandstone into a northwesterly and southeasterly arm. The
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 185
former is soon covered by the Red Rocks, but appears at intervals.
West of the Schuylkill it is very prominent, attaining a height of
+ 600 feet at Valley Forge, and thence westward forming the
North (Chester) Valley Hill.
The rock is well exposed by Valley creek flowing from the Ches-
ter Valley through this high hill into the Schuylkill, though the
hill dies down to an insignificant elevation eastward within little
more than a mile. At this point, as described by Prof. Rogers,
the hill appears to be composed, as already stated, of three beds
of the Cambrian: (1) a sandy micaceous, shaly or schistose rock
(Upper Primal of Rogers’) between the sandstone and the lime-
stone of Chester Valley; (II) the sandstone proper, and (III) a
shale or slate more argillitic (Rogers’ Lower Primal) underlying
the sandstone, while underlying the argillitic shale is a conglom-
erate, poorly exposed, but exactly like that of Willow Grove.
About four miles west of Valley Forge the sandstone appears to
end suddenly, on the east side of the gap through which a branch
of Pickering creek, rising on the northerly side of the Chester
Valley, flows northwardly and then eastwardly into the Schuylkill.
In this gap we find no sandstone, but a rock of very different char-
acter, probably that mentioned by Dr. Frazer in C’, p. 272—‘‘A
coarse-grained, heavy-bedded rock, called variously in my field
notes feldspar-porphyry, conglomerate, granite and heavy-bedded
gneiss ’’— which, from Valley Forge westward, appears to underlie
the sandstone with but little, if any, intervening slaty or shaly rock.
This rock is well exposed in Williams’ quarry on the Phcenixville
Branch of the Pennsylvania Railroad, near Aldham Station. It
sometimes resembles a pegmatite, often a very feldspathic gneiss,
occasionally it is a hornblende or a mica schist or a micaceous
gneiss. 1 have termed it provisionally the Chester county gneiss.
North of it is a much harder gneiss, containing blue quartz and
closely resembling the ancient gneiss of Buck Ridge, probably the
continuation of the northerly arm at Willow Grove, before men-
tioned.
Further west the upper of these becomes a true mica schist, as
on the road south of Caln Meeting-house, and still more markedly
north of the Pennsylvania Railroad west of Pomeroy, where the
“ Proc. Acad. Nat. Sct., 1894, p. 457.
186 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
schist contains in small quantity feldspar (probably microclin),
coarsely crystalline, tourmaline and garnet, and very closely resem-
bles the mica schists of Rogers’ first group. At Pomeroy, just
north of this schist, are the great quarries in the sandstone whence
has been obtained much of the stone for the foundations of Broad
Street Station and other recent structures for the Pennsylvania
Railroad. These quarries are in the sandstone proper, dipping S.
30° KE. 30° to 50°.
On the map in C’ this upper schist and much of the true sand-
stone are colored the same as the gneissic areas on the northerly
side of the sandstone, and it is not shown further east than a mile
east of Pomeroy, but as extending westwardly, widening rapidly
to the Octorara.“
On the West branch of the Brandywine the sandstone is met
about 200 feet from the railroad, which runs nearly on the strike;
it dips S. 25° KE. 55°, while on the railroad the schists dip S. 30°
KE. 50°. About 600 feet further north a harder and less evenly
bedded sandstone, some of it quartzite, dips S. 25° E. 50°; two
miles north of this is a high bluff of the sandstone in massive beds
striking N. 70° E. nearly vertical, at the base of which the creek
flows nearly on the strike. On the right bank is the Chester
county gneiss.
A half-mile west of the creek the Lancaster pike crosses the
railroad and rapidly rises on the slope of the hill; here the schists
are again well exposed, as noted by Dr. Frazer,“ but a careful
examination forced me to the ecenclusion that the apparent inclina-
tion of the rock visible close to the railroad is due wholly to creep,
as is very evident a short distance northwest where the probable
normal dip of 8. 35° E. 70° shows, upwards, a northerly dip of
loose rock as is so often the case in this sandstone.
Nearly four miles west of Coatesville we reach Pomeroy, and
just beyond it Buck Run. Here the exposures are excellent.
“4 Of this, Dr. Frazer says under the heading ‘‘ West Caln’’: ‘‘ The Pots-
dam sandstone. . . . gradually leavis the contact of the limestone below
the borders of this township, permitting an uneven wedge of the older crystal-
line rocks to intervene between it and the latter in Sadsbury and Valley.”’
Ci, p. 256, and on p. 267: ‘‘. . . . from Octorara Creek branch to and be-
yond Pomeroy. At no place within the distance dces the limestone touch
the quartzite or sandstone, though removed from it by a belt of varying
width, nowhere very broad except at the two points mentioned.”’
oh Coa Ee A
}
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 187
The sandstone has been largely quarried on both banks of the Run
and within 500 feet of the railroad, dipping quite uniformly about
S. 35° E. 50° in the four quarries. Included in the sandstone
are thin micaceous beds not unlike the schists on the south. On
the railroad, southeast of these quarries, and within a quarter of a
mile, the mica schists appear; here containing small segregations
(?) of osicrolin(?) and tourmaline, and resembling closely those
of Delaware county. One dip was S. 18° W. 75°, others steep S.,
but there is reason to suspect creep. Within .25m. west, on a
private road, about 400 feet north of the railroad, the sandstone is
exposed, dipping S. 32° E 80°, succeeded to the southeast by a
more schistose variety and within fifty feet a mica schist, dipping
irregularly northwest, exposed only in a deep washed-out gutter.
The strike is about N. 60° E. The northwest dip is probably
due to creep.
About two miles west of Pomeroy is Parkesburg, through the
easterly part of which flows a westerly branch of Buck Run. On
this, within .1m. of the railroad, is a quarry in the sandstone,
dipping S. 15° E. 40°, overlaid conformably by mica schists.
About 700 feet about S. 20° E. of this quarry is an exposure of
limestone on the south side of the Strasburg road. This road,
here running nearly west, forms the main street of Parkesburg,
but nearly opposite the railroad station it resumes its west-north-
west direction and ascends the hill. Near the foot the mica schists
appear poorly exposed, dipping northwest steeply but irregularly,
doubtless owing to creep. Following this, about 150 feet of the
road is filled with the sandstone dipping 8. 15° E. 70°, then sandy
mica schists appear with the sandstone for nearly half a mile, the
sandstone outcropping at frequent intervals, with a cliff on the
northwest side of the road near the summit S. 28° E. 60°. On
the summit are no exposures. One mile from Parkesburg the
limestone road crosses the Strasburg road. On the former the
sandstone is poorly but extensively exposed. West of this to the
Octorara I have seen no exposures of the sandstone, but fragments,
some very large, are quite common. On the old Valley road
northwest of Lenover sandy mica schists appear; no black gneiss
was seen. At the Octorara, however, we have a repetition of the
section near Coatesville and Pomeroy.
The sandstone is particularly well exposed where the Octorara
188 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
flows southward through it. This gap and the adjacent one to the
northward through Copper Mine Ridge have been taken advan-
tage of by the Pennsylvania Railroad to pass by easy gradients
from the Chester to the Lancaster (Pequea) Valley. The rail-
road, turning from its uearly west to a northwest course along a
shelf quarried out of the precipitous left bank of the Octorara
exposes the rocks most clearly. To the southeastward, next to the
limestone, there is a somewhat plicated dark-colored mica schist 5.
30° E. 80°, perhaps 200 feet in breadth, then the typical sand-
stone S. 28° E. 72° about 300 feet, then sandstone fragments,
and then a bluff of the sandstone, about fifty feet high and a hun-
dred and fifty feet wide, dipping 8. 28° E. 70°.*
The sandstone continues west of the Octorara as a narrow but
high and conspicuous hill, bounding the limestone valley on the
north; as in Chester county, its crest is nearly straight, S. 60°-70°
W., and for several miles almost level about 200 fect above the
Octorara or 660 feet above tide. The hill seems to be composed
almost wholly of the sandstone, the Chester county gneiss forming
the floor of the valley on the north and the hills further north to
Copper Mine Ridge. The rock is abundantly exposed, occa-
sionally, but not frequently, in such manner as to show the dip
beyond doubt. The bearing of the Valley road is almost coinci-
dent with the strike. About two miles west of the Octorara, just
west of the road to Steelville (Chester county), a dark mica schist
appears on the north side of the road with the sandstone with some
46 Tn Prof. Lesley’ s Final Report, Vol. I, p. 177, this ridge is apparently
confused with the parallel ridge to the north, “Copper Mine Ridge.’ It is
there stated ‘‘ In the North Valley Hill, the gaps of the East and West
Brandywine and at Gap Station show the beds to be about 100’ thick.’
Gap Station, however, is on the northerly side of Copper Mine Ridge, a
parallel northerly out-rop of sandstone, separated from the North Chester
Valley Hill by more than two miles of gneissoid rocks, and according to my
observatioas this separation continues far into Chester county, Copper
Mine Ridge ranging eastwardly to within a hundred yards of the West
branch of the Brandywine near Wagontown as a distinct narrow ridge of the
typical sandstone, evidently referred to in C*, p. 262.
It may also be observed that on the map in C*, the yellow color, which is
stated on p. 160 to be ‘‘ confined to the quartzite and sandstone beds alone,
and does not include the underlying much weathered feldspar porphyries,
conglomerates, etc., which (following Prof. Rogers) he regards as part of the
Potsdam or primal formations No. 1,’’ is broadened to four miles, viz.: from
Compassville to Parkesburg, thus connecting the sandstone of Copper Mine
Ridge with that of the North Valley Hill. I was unable to find such con-
nection, fora broad belt of the ‘‘feldspar porphyries, etc.,’’ intervenes, as
stated by Rogers, I, p. 84, ete. (quoted C*, p. 163, ete.).
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 189
interlaminated dark mica schist on the south, strike of road and
rock N. 70° E.
The further discussion of this ridge will be found in connection
with the limestone of this portion of the valley.
North of the North Valley Hill, in the vicinity of the branches
of the Brandywine, are three other outcrops of the sandstone, as
noted by Prof. Rogers.”
The southernmost ranges a little north of east from west of the
Lancaster county line south of Compassville to a point within
.2m. northwest of Wagontown. It forms a low ridge conspicuous
north of Stony Hollow Schoolhouse, and seems to end in a very
narrow outcrop on the farm of Abraham Bubaker, just north of
a steatite outcrop. It appears to be the continuation of the sand-
stone of Copper Mine Ridge in Lancaster county, the southerly
boundary of the Pequea Valley limestone.
The middle outcrop is much more prominent and is locally
known as the Baron Hill. It ranges in an east-northeast direction
from the Lancaster county line, or west of it to the East Branch
of the Brandywine, at Cornog’s Station. In most ofeits course it
is a high hill, with comparatively steep slopes, and throughout the
greater part of its course entirely in forest, thus making a promi-
nent feature of the landscape. North of Martin’s Corner it is, by
barometer, 850 feet above tide, the valley south of it of ancient
gneiss being 750 feet and north of it 690 feet, limestone. *
The northernmost outcrop forms the Welsh Mountain, on the
summit of which is the Chester-Lancaster-Berks county line. It is
also the watershed between the Delaware and the Susquehanna,
with an elevation of 850 to 1,000 feet above ocean level.
Returning now to Willow Grove, we may trace the southeasterly
arm of the sandstone synclinal southwestward. As far as the cross-
“1 JT, 177, quoted C*, pp. 154, 155.
“8 On the map, C*, the sandstone area north of Martin’s Corners is repre-
sented as two miles wide, extending of nearly that width to the West
branch, there cut off by the ancient gneiss, with two outlying islands of this
sandstone to the eastward. With this my observations do not agree. North
of Martin’s Corner it is not much over a quarter of a mile in width. Along
the West branch it is conspicuously exposed between a point .5 m.
below Ferndale Station and Brandamore Station, dipping S. 25° E. 50° E.
Northeast of this it continues unbroken as a narrow, mostly wooded hill to
the East branch, near which it seems to te:minate in the ancient gneiss.
A road on or near the summit affords a series of very beautiful views
Brandywine Manor is on this hill.
190 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
ing of the Northeast Pennsylvania Railroad the conglomerate con-
tinues with the typical standstone overlying it. From east of
Weldon to west of Edge Hill village the sandstone forms a promi-
nent hill, and probably the highest ground of the vicinity, known
as Edge Hill, giving name to many places in the neighborhood.
The North Pennsylvania Railroad levels are Chelten Hills 190,
Junction Northeast Pennsylvania Railroad 254 (2597), Edge
Hill 293, Camp Hill (the northerly ancient gneiss) 178. The
levels of the Northeast Pennsylvania Railroad crossing the sand-
stone about a mile north of the North Pennsylvania Railroad are
Junction North Pennsylvania Railroad 259 (254?), Summit 342,
Willow Grove 259.”
Fie. 1.—Cambrian Sandstone, Edge Hill, Pa.
At Edge Hill village, where the sandstone is crossed by the North
Pennsylvania Railroad and the Limekiln turnpike, it is well
exposed in a cut about thirty feet deep, and in quarries which show
very plainly the ‘‘ creep’’ to which the upper part of this rock
49 These (mean ocean) levels are taken from Tables 60 and 62 in Second
Geol. Survey of Pa., Levels above Tide N.
—
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. . 191
has been subjected, shown in fig. 1, a photograph taken by Mr.
John Coates Brown. Its strike is about N. 55° E.; it is nearly
vertical, probably 85° S. E., and is very regular. In a quarry
close to the Northeast Pennsylvania Railroad its dip is S. 30°
E. 65°, hence toward the ancient gneiss; these dips are well below
all possible creep.
It is here that the sandstone southeast of the ancient gneiss
appears a half-mile to the southeastward, with the gneiss interven-
ing, but not prominently. It is not improbable that the two areas
were once connected at this point over the gneiss, if indeed they
were not over a much more extended area.
West of this, Edge Hill, as has been stated, continues topo-
graphically to the Wissahickon, but the geological formations strike
through it westwardly, that is strike about S. 60° W., while the
bearing of the hill itself is about S. 40° W., so that soon the
Edge Hill sandstone forms a separate, slightly divergent hill,
known as Barren Hill. It crosses the Wissahickon on the place
of Mr. John T. Morris, where it is well exposed. It continues
probably from Barren Hill to the Schuylkill, though not well
exposed except close to the latter at Spring Mill, where it appears
to dip S. 45°, though the exposure is not entirely satisfactory.
There is limestone here = or about 500 feet northwest of it.
So far no slates or schists are visible in its vicinity, though some
beds of the sandstone are very micaceous and rather quartz schist
than sandstone. The strike from the Spring Mill outcrop carries
it into that portion of the Schuylkill which flows about N. 70° E.
along the base of the ancient gneiss from Conshohocken to Spring
Mill. On the westerly bank the flanking gneiss, Rogers’
Altered Primal, and the limestone are well exposed, but the
sandstone is not distinctly visible, and its place appears to be
taken by mica schists, some garnetiferous, not unlike those between
the Cambrian and the limestone on the north side of the Chester
Valley, the Upper Primal of Rogers already described. These
are on the south side of the narrow valley between the gneiss on
the southeast and the hydromica schists on the northwest, a narrow
but typical straight limestone valley known as Cream Valley. As
a prominent valley it is five miles in length, ending at Wayne,
but with two drainage systems; the upper three and a half miles
draining by Gulf creek through the Gulf (a gap in the northerly
192 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
hill), the lower mile and a half directly to the Schuylkill.” The
divide is low and from the high hills on each side hardly
noticeable. While the prominence of the valley ceases at Wayne,
a depression follows the line of strike to the West Branch of the
Brandywine and beyond, as will be more fully described when
considering the limestones.
On the northerly slope of the ancient gneiss the sandstone appears
at intervals. In the Final Report (1, p. 174) this is discredited,
but I have given” my reasons for reiterating these occurrences as
they seem to explain the structure without the need of a fault. I
may repeat briefly that the sandstone may be observed of typical
character and in the same relation to limestone at distances from
the Schuylkill of one and a half, two, two and a half, two and
three-quarters, three and a half and four miles. It appears to be
interstratified in mica schists, Das all the exposures are poor. It is
certainly very narrow.
West of Wayne the schists continue, but the typical rock is
absent or concealed. The latter is not improbable, as the line of
strike is in comparatively low ground with few outcrops between
the gneiss and the hydromica; these outcrops being of mica schist,
serpentine, or diabase trap. In western Chester county, however,
it again appears near the Poorhouse quarry, and still more exten-
sively near Doe run, as mentioned in the discussion of the lime-
stones of that region.
The locality near the Poorhouse quarry limestone is Hayes’ whet-
stone quarry, a mile nearly west of the limestone. It is of the
typical rock, overlaid by sandy mica schists and underlaid imme-
diately by the same with more compact and heavy-bedded schists
to the northwest. It dips S. 30° to 50° E. 20° to 25°. It is
in Newlin township, close to the West Bradford line. Thirty or
forty years ago there was a considerable output of whetstones
from this quarry, as I am informed, by Mr. William M. Hayes,
owner of the Hayes farm, who was then engaged in their man-
ufacture.”
5° F, Bascom, Ph.D., Am. Geologist, Jan. ‘97, XIX, No. 1, p. 56.
5! Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., December, 1892, p. 445.
5! In Ct, p. 314, this quarry seems to have been confused with a quarry of
dark-green chlorite schist used in the neighborhood for flagstone. The
latter quarry, known as Fulton’s, is on the Speakman farm, about a mile
west of the Hayes quarry.
ie on eee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 195
Southwest of the Poorhouse quarry is a series of limestone quar-
ries (Embreeville, Pierce, Edwards, Guest, Doe run), but there
are no exposures of the sandstone until the Guest quarry is
reached. West of it and east of Doe run it is found abun-
dantly. A detailed description will be found in the discussion of
the limestones.
Southeast of the ancient gneiss ridge and of the outcrops just
described, which seem to belong to the series northwest of it, the
gneiss itself ending near Northbrook and west of Chester creek,
are several outcrops of the sandstone accompanied by limestone,
both having been quarried, the limestone very extensively and for
at least a half a century. In view of this well-known fact, it is
strange to find the contrary stated in the Final Report of the
Second Survey.”
Of these outcrops, the easternmost is in Thornbury towuship,
Chester county, one mile north-northwest of the Delaware county
line, where the typical rock, interstratified in schists, appears on
the road next northwest of the Wilmington road, Half a mile south
of the Street road, on the farm of John Wyeth. The rock is in
place, but the exposure poor. There is an outcrop of limestone
about three miles south of this, Bullock’s quarry in Birmingham
township, Delaware county, but the closely adjacent rocks are not
visible.
About a mile southwest of this it is exposed on the Wilmington
road, dipping about southeast 30°, with mica schists apparently
conformable both above and below it. A half-mile southwest it is
exposed in a quarry about three-quarters of a mile north-north-
west of Dilworthtown. The dip is N. 35° W. 80°; nothing but
the sandstone is visible. Half a mile nearly south from this
quarry, many loose masses are visible in the road which leads to
West Chester, next southwest of the Wilmington road, where the
road from Dilworthtown to Birmingham Meeting-house crosses it.
About three-quarters of a mile nearly west of the quarry just men-
tioned and less than a half-mile northeast of Birmingham Meeting-
58 ‘“ There is no sandstone, no limestone to be found in the Atlantic coast
country southeast of the Buck Ridge gneiss, except just at its southern edge.
The country between it and the Delaware river is occupied by a great series
of azoic rocks, . . . among which not a single stratum of sandstone or lime-
stone can be found.’’ Second Geol. Survey of Pa., Final Report, I, p. 86.
13
194 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
house is limestone exposed in a quarry and dipping S. 40° E.
50°. No other rock appears in place, but thousands of schist
fragments lie to the southeastward of the limestone; a quarter of
a mile south, schists dip S. 30° E. 30°.
Along the Brandywine the rocks are well exposed; the limestone
is visible in Harvey’s quarry, at Brinton’s Bridge, about a mile
above Chadd’s Ford, and the sandstone ought to be visible, but it
is not. But under the limestone of Huey’s quarry, about three-
quarters of a mile east-northeast of Brinton’s Bridge, there is
exposed a quartz schist dipping N. 60° E. 20° under the lime-
stone, and further westward the sandstone is exposed abundantly
close to the Red Lion Hotel in East Marlborough township and
thence westward and two miles south in Kennett township, east,
north and west of Kennett Square.
If the outcrops mentioned be plotted, it seems clear that they
cannot be ranged in one or two synclinals, unless very undulating.
It seems equally certain that no succession of anticlinals can be
made out of the Brandywine section. The country, except along
the large streams, is covered with mica schist and gneiss fragments,
with occasional outcrops of the same rock in place with pyroxenite
and gabbro. The peculiar sandstone, where it occurs, is of typi-
cal character, the adjacent schists both above and below the sand-
stone closely resembling Rogers’ Upper Primal of the North Valley
Hill, and there seems no marked distinction between those above
and below.
It may be briefly stated that in Chester county, south of the
Chester Valley, there are several outcrops of the typical rock. So
far as can be observed, aJl dips are southeast under southeast
dipping limestone, with possibly one exception to be hereafter
noted (Taylor’s quarry).
1. One mile west of the limestone of the Poorhouse quarry,
dipping S. 80° E. 25°, with schists dipping about the same above
and below (Hayes’ whetstone quarry, already mentioned), the
limestone dipping 8. 40° E. 5° to 25°.
2. West of Logan’s quarry, west of Unionville, dipping prob-
ably S. 75° E. 30°, with schists S. 55° E. 70° above and S. 55°
E. 55° below; the limestone about S. 40° E. 50°, with garnetifer-
ous schists §. 80° E. 45° overlying.
8. Northwest of Eli S. Bailey’s quarry and southwest of
\ ry ee a eee EE ———ES os,
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 195
Logan’s quarry are two well-exposed outcrops about 150 feet apart,
with mica schists above, between and below, all dipping about S.
40° E. 30°.
4. A half-mile northwest of the Guest quarry, West Marlbor-
ough, dipping southeast probably 45° and less, the limestone dip-
ping gently southeast with sandy mica schist between, also prob-
ably the same bed, .2 miles west of the quarry.
5. Two hundred feet west of the Enos Bernard quarry south of
Doe Run village, dip not visible, the limestone dipping either 30°
or 80° nearly west; also about .2 miles east of the Enos Bernard
quarry; fragments only visible.
A little over a mile south-southwest of the Enos Bernard quarry
and northeast of Marlborough Hall Schoolhouse sink-holes indi-
cate underlying limestone, while in the east and west road close
sandstone is shown by numerous loose masses.
6. The most important belt stretches from east of the Red Lion
through London Grove village to west of Chatham, bordering on
the north the Street road limestone outcrops. Near the Red
Lion it dips S. 25° E. 15° to 50°, mica schists underlying.
West of Taggart’s cross-roads S. 5° E. 15° to 20° toward the
limestone.
At London Grove it is wel] exposed in a quarry .3 miles south-
west of the meeting-house, 8. 35° E. 30°, with sandy mica schist
overlying and a harder schist underlying.
7. South of Lewis Bernard’s quarry it is poorly exposed at the
northern foot of the hill between Bernard’s and Story’s quarry.
8. Southeast of Story’s quarry it is clearly exposed in a quarry
about .2 miles east of West Grove Meeting-house, overlying mica
schist and dipping S. 50° E. 20° under the limestone of the Avon-
dale Lime and Stone (formerly A. G. Hughes & Co.’s) quarries,
northwest of Avondale, in which the limestone dips S. 40° E. 20°
and less, with mica schists overlying.
9. North and west of Kennett Square and also east of it, bor-
dering the Kennett limestone on the north.
Reviewing these sandstone outcrops in western Chester county,
and taking a section line about S. 15° E. from Heneybrook
township to London Britain township, we find the following suc-
cession:
196
North Red sandstone and trap,
1 | Limestone,
; Sandstone,
Ancient gneiss and igne-
ous rocks,
Limestone,
Sandstone,
Ancient gneiss (gabbro?),
3. Sandstone,
Chester county gneiss,
Ancient gneiss,
Chester county gneiss.
~ Sandstone,
Mica schist,
Limestone,
Hydromica
Mica schist,
( Sandstone,
Mica schist,
Limestone,
Miea schist,
{| Sandstone,
|
6. | Mica schist,
schist,
Limestone,
Mica schist,
Sandstone,
Mica scnist.
Limestone,
8. Sandstone(?),
Mica schist,
Limestone,
Sandstone,
Limestone,
Mica schist and gneiss.
Sandstone,
fk
Limestone,
Limestone,
Mica schists.
Limestone,
il Mica schists.
10 |
ql
§
(1
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
(1900.
Turkey Hill, Forest Hill.
Churchtown, Lancaster county.
Welsh Mountain.
Southern part of Honeybrook
township.
Southern part of Honeybrook
township.
Baron Ridge.
South of Martin’s Corner.
North of Wagontown.
Wagontown and south.
Siousca Station.
North Chester Valley Hill.
Caln Meeting-house.
Chester Valley.
South Valley Hill.
South of Modena.
Southeast of Doe Run village.
Not over 500 feet wide.
Guest quarry.
Not over a mile wide.
Northwest of Logan’s
Bailey’s quarries.
Not over 500 feet wide.
Logan’s and Bailey’s quarries.
About a mile wide.
London Grove.
and
Street road line.
South of Bernard’s.
South of Bernard’s.
Story’s quarry.
Road Avondale to West Grove.
Hughes quarries.
In same valley north of lime-
stone to the eastward.
Watson & Jones’ quarry, Avon-
dale.
Nevin’s quarries.
Eastburn quarries.
(The brackets connect those outcrops which appear related. )
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 197
It will be seen by this table that we have eight certain lines of
outcrops of the sandstone, with two uncertain and eleven of lime-
stone.
North of the Chester Valley, the limestone is close to and north
of the sandstone, while in the valley and south of it the limestone
is usually close to and south of the sandstone. Among the whole, in
this section, there is not one from which we can with certainty infer
an anticlinal or synclinal structure, except perhaps in the lime-
stone of the Nevins’ quarries and in the easterly part of the Doe
Run Valley. If the first is synclinal, the northerly sandstone leg
is concealed by the Red sandstone. At the second, rocks appar-
ently identical with those elsewhere referred to the ancient gneiss
lie closely adjacent to the limestone on the north, and with some
undoubtedly igneous rocks separate it for at least two miles from
the northerly Cambrian sandstone, while the southerly sandstone
forms a high hill and is the nearest visible rock, perhaps 500 feet
being concealed. South of this sandstone hill is again the ancient
gneiss, including possibly some areas of the Chester county gneiss,
extending about two miles to the Wagontown-Copper Mine Ridge
sandstone hill, followed by about two miles of the Chester county
gneiss, with possibly some areas of -ancient gneiss, extending to the
North Valley Hill. The sandstone in this hill was believed by
Prof. Rogers* to be not over a hundred feet in thickness, and its
apparent width to be due to compressed anticlinals and synclinals,
but I think the evidence of these inconclusive.
The sandstone, however, dips under the limestone, a thin stra-
tum of mica schist intervening from Caln Meeting-house west-
ward, and does not rise on the southerly side of the Chester
Valley, as it does on the northwest. There is, however, nearly
south of the King of Prussia, and thence westward for a mile or
two and north of Paoli, a narrow outcrop of sandstone with iron
ores. The best exposure was on the Trenton Cut-off Railroad,
north of Paoli.®
Prof. Rogers writes of this as occurring also east of Downing-
town, and further says:*° ‘‘ In the vicinity of Coatesville and west
of it this well-marked rock . . . . projects conspicuously in
“T, 174, quoted C4, pp. 147-148.
® Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1891, p. 119.
88 First Geol. Survey of Pa., I, p. 166.
198 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
rugged outcrops at the entrance of the numerous ravines and gorges,
thirty or forty feet thick.’’
I have tried in vain to find these outcrops, not only by personal
examination, but also by inquiry of observing residents, who have
assured me that there is no sandstone visible in that vicinity on
the north slope of the South Valley Hill.
This sandstone, while at the locality near Paoli resembling that
of the North Valley Hill, is so very limited in area that the prob-
abilities are that it is a more recent rock overlying the limestone.
It Jacks the characteristic tourmaline crystals.
South of the limestone isa mile of the hydromica schists, fol-
lowed by three miles or more of mica schists, many of them heavy-
bedded and hard, followed by the sandstone, and then softer schists
and limestones, the dips in the hydromica being steep to the south
in its northerly part, mostly vertical in its middle and southerly
portions, and the mica schist and almost all other rocks from it
southward dipping toward the southeast with anyles rarely above
35°. It is true, however, that at this limestone outcrop feldspar
and hornblende gneisses appear close on its northerly side further .
eastward, and that still further eastward the sandstone appears on
its southerly side.*
Sti]l going southward, and passing a region almost without out-
crops but with a soil suggesting the schists and containing schist
fragments, we find outcrops of the sandstone, followed by a narrow
stratum (300 feet to 500 feet) of mica schist, and then the lime-
stone of Logan's and Bailey’s quarries. South of this, mica
schists, at times garnetiferous, extend for a mile, followed by the
extensive outcrops of the sandstone at and near London Grove,
overlying which are mica schists, and over them the limestone of
the Street road line. At one locality south of and near Bernard’s
limestone a small outcrop of sandstone appears, but the exposure
is so poor that not much reliance can be placed upon it. South of
it isa hill of mica schists and about a mile south of Bernard’s
the limestone of Story’s quarry, south of which are very clear
outcrops of the sandstone, followed by the limestone of the Avon-
5? About three quarters of a mile south of the Embreeville outcrop of this
belt is a stratum of white quartzite with tourmaline shown in loose masses
only, but in quantity. While unlike the sandstone this may possibly rep-
resent it and make the structure synclinal.
1900.1] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 199
dale Lime & Stone Co., which dips very gently south and is over-
Jaid by garnetiferous mica schist. This is followed by the lime-
stone of the Watson & Jones quarry, Avondale, almost certainly of
the Kennett series, and if so, further east undoubtedly underlaid
by the sandstone well exposed.
The ‘‘ Potsdam ’’ is stated by both Dr. Frazer®’ and Prof. Ches-
ter® to underlie the limestone of extreme southern Chester county
and northwestern New Castle county, Del. I was unable to find
any exposure of sandstone either north or south of Nevins’
quarry. The limestone of this quarry being clearly anticlinal in
structure,” the sandstone, if it occurs to the southeast, can hardly
underlie the limestone.
In the schists of Rogers’ first and second groups are occasion-
ally and abundantly sandy schists which have much the aspect of
these schists associated with the type rock, but the latter rock itself
is absent. The outcrops in Thornbury, Birmingham, near Doe
Run, in London Britain and in East Marlborough show conclu-
sively that the type rock is underlaid and overlaid by mica schists
not infrequently garnetiferous. There seems, therefore, no reason
to doubt the conclusion of Prof. Rogers and of Dr. Frazer, that
these schists belong in the paleozoic column, as certainly do those
north of Pomeroy and Parkesburg.
The argument in Cream Valley is not less conclusive. Here we
have east and west of the Schuylkill a succession of rocks uni-
form, except that a mica schist in the west takes in part the place
of the typical sandstone two miles to the eastward. Besides this,
we have in this very schist further west a chert-like quartz and the
typical sandstone at several localities and in abundance, associated
as usual with limestone. It is reasonable, therefore, to believe
that the mica schists of Cream Valley are likewise Cambrian.
These schists we can follow with constant outcrops in a narrow
line to a poimt near West Chester, where they widen rapidly and
again show limestone. Further west they still widen, the lime-
stone becomes more frequently exposed and again we find among
them the typical sandstone. But here apparently the same
schists may be traced southward without a break, until they unite
88 C4 328.
® Proc. Acad. Nat. Sct., 1884, p. 239.
60 C4 307,
200 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
with those of East Marlborough, Kennett, etc., which is another
confirmation, That there are repetitions, in spite of the uniform
southeasterly dip, is most probable, but the data are too meagre to
define them.
Again, the mica schists of the Huntingdon Valley must be of
Cambrian age or more recent. They very closely resemble those
of Cream Valley. But if all these schists are of Cambrian age,
why should greater antiquity be claimed for the very similar rocks
of the Philadelphia newer schists and gneisses ?
Along the north.slope of the North Valley Hill, at several local-
ities, is a very compact sandstone which I have not seen in place,
though often local outcrops show a similar rock. This particular
rock is more quartzite than a sandstone, weathers of a light yellow
color and not infrequently shows white-ribbon-like markings.
These are curved, branched, swell out and contract, and seem to
indicate an organic origin.
LIMESTONE.
In discussing the limestone outcrops in this region it will be con-
venient to divide them into groups, ranging along west-southwest
lines, based upon their geographical position, following the usual
strike of the rocks:
1. That of Van Artsdalen’s quarry, Bucks county.
2. Those of the great Chester-Montgomery (Plymouth) Valley.
3. Those of Edge Hill, Flourtown, Spring Mill, West Consho-
hocken, Cream Valley, Cope’s quarry northwest of West Ches-
ter, those of the valley stretching southwestward from the East
branch of the Brandywine above Copesville to Embreeyille, and
of the Guest quarry.
4. Those of the Doe Run Valley.
5. That of the Huntingdon Valley southeast of the ancient
gneiss. ,
6. Those of Pocopsin township, Logan’s quarry and Elisha Bai-
ley’s quarry, in Chester county.
7. Those in West Thornbury, Birmingham and northeastern
Pennsbury township, Chester county, and Birmingham, Delaware
county, and westwardly much more largely exposed to the south
of the Street road westward of the Red Lion Hotel, toward West
Grove.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 201
8. Those in the valley through which the Baltimore Central
Railroad runs; that is, in central Pennsbury, Kennett, northern
New Garden and London Grove townships, Chester county.
9. The small areas on the southerly line of New Garden and
London Britain townships, Chester county, and those of New
Castle county, Del.
10. Several smal] outcrops in northern Chester county.
The first, that of Van Artsdalen’s quarry in Southampton town-
ship, Bucks county, is a small isolated outcrop in the ancient
gneiss of a highly crystalline limestone much mixed with other
minerals, of which the variety made this locality famous, but, like
many others, the quarry has not been wrought for years. It ap-
pears to be clearly within the ancient gneiss and to have no rela-
tion to any other outcrop, no other limestone having been exposed
in any part of the fifty lineal miles of this gneiss exposed in this
region. Near by is adyke of norite. Prof. Kemp suggests that
it may be an included piece of limestone caught up in a flow of
igneous rock.” It is much folded and contains considerable graph-
ite; the other minerals most prominent are pyroxene and wernerite.
II. LiIMestonE OF THE CHESTER COUNTY.
The second is by far the most important, and has been the object
of the most study. The valley underlaid by the limestone ex-
tends unbroken from Willow Grove on the northeast into Lancaster
county on the southwest, where, according to the observations of
Dr. Frazer,” it joins the great outcrop of the Lancaster and
Pequea Valleys.
In Montgomery county its length is about fifteen miles, in Ches-
ter thirty and in Lancaster ten, a total of fifty-five miles. In
width it varies greatly and suddenly, the greatest being about two
miles and the least a quarter of a mile. It is well exposed in
numerous outcrops, and has been extensively quarried. It dips
with much uniformity steeply to the southeast, and, while local
deviations are commoz, no systematic undulations appear. Com-
pressed anticlinals have been exposed—e. g., in the cut of the
Schuylkill Valley Railroad below Potts’ Landing, and in that of
61 J. F. Kemp, Zrans. of the N. Y. Academy of Natural Sciences, Vol.
GM p: 77.
% CCC., pp. 75, 76.
202 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
the branch of the Pennsylvania Railroad from Chestnut Hill to the
Trenton Cut-off near Camp Hill. Of these the former is instructive.
The limestone here formed a high bluff, the base of which was the
left bank of the Schuylkill river. Ina bench cut into the lime-
stone the Norristown Railroad was located, and there was exposed
a series of strata dipping quite uniformly to the southeast. More
recently, the Schuylkill Valley Railroad, running parallel with the
former, was forced to quarry more deeply into the hill, when it
appeared that some of the apparently parallel strata formed op-
posing legs of an anticlinal. It seems to be admitted that this
structure is common, though not usually apparent, and that the
limestone is not nearly so thick as would be inferred from its gen-
eral width.
West of the Schuylkill river this valley is remarkably straight,
especially on its south side. Its streams rarely flow for any great
distance along the axis of the valley, indicating that the present
courses of the creeks and rivers were established long before
erosion gave us the present contour lines. This apparently erratic
flow is emphasized by the present contour, for it is possible for an
observer to stand at points overlooking the valley, with its high
and well-marked bounding hills, and see seven streams leave the
floor of the valley and flow, toward the east-northward, toward
the west-southward, through the apparently impenetrable walls,
forming gorges with precipitous sides, rising at times three or four
hundred feet above the valley.
In. its northeast part there seems to be no question about the
relation of the limestone and the adjacent rocks, for we have
apparently without doubt a basin of the peculiar sandstone, the
Primal of Prof. Rogers, the Potsdam and No. 2 of the Second Sur-
vey, now generally believed to be Cambrian, underlying and sur-
rounding the limestone. This sandstone, at times concealed by the
newer Red Rocks on the northerly side, seems clearly to bound it
on the north to the westerly termination of the valley at Quarry-
ville, Lancaster county, forming usually a high hill.®
In the portion of the valley east of the Schuylkill river, known
as the Plymouth Valley, the limestone has been and is largely
8} As more fully referred to in the discussion of sandstone, Dr. Frazer be-
lieves an area of older rocks to intervene between the sandstone and the lime-
stone from Pomeroy westward. C', pp. 256-267.
Le
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 203
quarried, formerly as a flux for iron furnaces, as well as for build-
ing uses. The iron furnaces having been abandoned, it is now
quarried for the manufacture of lime, for railroad ballast and road
material, and for concrete, except a comparatively small amount
used as building stone. Near the Schuylkill, on both sides of the
stream, a slaty limestone, containing much quartz, mica and
graphite, has been largely quarried for foundation stone. For
large buildings in Philadelphia it has been used probably more
than any other stone, as it can be obtained in masses of any desir-
able size, with easy and smooth fracture, or more properly cleavage,
in one direction. At the Schuylkill the limestone is probably as
wide as at any point, extending from Swedesburg to the northerly
part of Conshohocken, a distance of about two miles, the river
flowing nearly on the line of dip. The northerly boundary is the
Red sandstone, quarried in and about Norristown. At Norristown
the Cambrian sandstone is reported to appear in limited areas, but I
have not been able to find the typical rock at the Schuylkill.* West
of the Schuylkill, however, are two prominent hills, one near the
river northwest of the Trenton Cut-off Railroad, the other two
miles to the westward, northwest of Henderson Station. Exposures
in these hills are poor, but abundant fragments and one or two
quarries indicate on the side toward the limestone a fine-grained
mica schist, and next northwestward a conglomerate very closely
resembling that underlying the sandstone to the northeastward. In
one quarry near Bridgeport the dip is S. 10° E. 50°; in one near
the northwest end of the hill nearest the river S. 50°.
The limestone on the river bank dips S. 10° to 20° E. 30° to
60°. It seems probable, therefore, that this is the basal con-
glomerate of the Cambrian, the typical sandstone being absent or
concealed.
The southerly boundary is a prominent hill of hydromica schist.
About a mile west of the Schuylkill the valley is suddenly and
greatly narrowed by the widening of the hydromica schist hill
from about four-tenths of a mile at the river to over a mile and a
half two miles to the westward.
A little over two miles west of the river is Henderson Station,
geologically important from the discovery by Mr. Martin B.
= C*.p. 74:
204 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Stubbs in Shainline’s quarry of fossils in orbicular quartzite, iden-
tified by Prof. Heilprin as Lituites orthoceras ( Gyroceras), Maclurea
or Pleurotomaria, and Murchisonia, of which specimens are in the
collection of the Academy. Unfortunately, all the masses found
were loose in the decomposed limestone soil overlying the common
limestone. A rock very closely resembling that in which the
fossils were found occurs in great abundance in the railroad cut
west of Henderson Station, here also probably not in place, and
almost certainly in place about a mile to the eastward, where the
highway was shifted northward at the time of the construction of
the Trenton Cut-off Railroad. At this locality, notwithstanding
the rock was largely exposed, no trace of fossils has been discoy-
ered. A similar rock occurs eleven miles further west in small
quantities and in loose masses only, near Sidley Station on the
Pheenixville Branch of the Pennsylvania Railroad, but no fossils
have been found. It occurs also on the west side of and near the
Schuylkill below Norristown, and also in loose masses but very
abundantly about a mile and a half northeast of Norristown, at
which place some of the quartz crystals were arranged in cylindri-
cal forms, giving rise to a newspaper paragraph that the rock con-
tained fossil Indian corn. This rock resembles the calciferous
sandrock of New York.
The hill near Henderson Station in which this rock occurs is
skirted on the north by the Swedesford road, while the Trenton Cut-
off Railroad and the Chester Valley Railroad cut its southerly base.
The northernmost rock, shown in fragments only, is a conglomerate
of blue quartz resembling the basal member of the Cambrian.
Next, also only in fragments, is a schist or slate like that exposed
in the Valley Forge gap. This slate seems to form the summit of
the hill. The southerly portion is of clay and gravel, chiefly of
quartz pebbles, but with some pebbles which apparently were of
gneiss, now much decomposed. In this, as far as can be seen,
occurs the orbicular quartzite, of which the masses appear not to
be rounded. In the bottom of the cut a large mass of limestone
appears. The hill near the Schuylkill presents much the same
features. Near the King of Prussia the area of Red sandstone
which overlies the limestone near the Schuylkill, from east of
Norristown northwestward, suddenly narrows, exposing the lime-
stone floor nearly or quite to the river at Port Kennedy, where
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 205
the unconformable contact of the two is well shown. Here the
high North Valley Hill of Cambrian sandstone begins, and in a
distance of about a mile rises to a height of over 500 feet, cut,
however, a mile beyond by the deep gorge of Valiey Creek at
Valley Forge. From the jongitude of Valley Forge to that of
Frazer, about seven miles, the valley continues with a width of
about two miles wholly of limestone, except small areas of a
hydromica schist apparently interbedded. At this point the North
Hill, ranging from 550 feet to 670 feet above tide, with but a
slight gap at Diamond Rock, suddenly ends, and a north-and-south
valley intervenes with an elevation of about 380 feet. Here, on the
north edge of the valley (near Devault Station on the Pheenixville
Branch of the Pennsylvania Railroad), a branch of Pickering creek
rises and flows northward and eastward into the Schuylkill, while
close by is the source of the Valley creek, which flows southeastward,
then eastward, then north through the Valley Forge gap into the
Schuylkill. In this valley of the branch of the Pickering creek
there is not a trace of the sandstone, though but a half-mile to the
eastward or westward it is prominent. In the Chester valley in this
vicinity are large limestone quarries, wrought chiefly for building
lime, the largest being those at Cedar Hollow, at the foot of the
hill, about .75 mile southeast of Devault Station, and those of
the Knickerbocker Co., about 1.75 miles southwest. From this
point westward the valley is narrower, averaging about a mile in
width, though the rock margins are rarely to be seen, being deeply
buried, especially on the north side, so that while the valley is
well defined, it is but a supposition that the base of the hill is the
border of the limestone.
Opposite Glen Loch is a watershed across the valley and the
highest ground in it, by barometer about 380 feet above tide, from
Frazer as datum 490 feet. Bacton is 365 feet, Sidley 370,
Devault 375, Aldham (descent into Pickering Valley) 305. This
watershed and the gap just below make an easy gradient for the
Pheenixville Branch of the Pennsylvania Railroad.
Tn the vicinity of Glen Loch large marble quarries were formerly
wrought and also mines of limonite iron ore. Near Bacton Sta-
tion are large deposits of kaolin near the abandoned Trimble Iron
Mine, famous as a locality of wavellite and cceruleolactite.
In the valley, between the longitudes of Berwyn and Glen
206 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Loch, are outcrops of a schist, whether interbedded in the lime-
stone or folded is not certain. On the Schuylkill section we find
very slaty limestone (Bullock’s quarry, etc.), and also, in the
limestone, beds not over two feet thick of a hydromica schist or slate.
North-northwest of Berwyn about one mile a similar slaty rock
forms a hill on the farm of Mr. A. J. Cassatt, and thence west-
ward appears at intervals. At Cassatt’s dips, not very satisfactory,
were toward the north S. 10? E. 60°, and towards the south S.
10° E. 90°. About 600 feet west-southwest of this is a quarry
in limestone, with dips of S. 30° E. 80° on the northerly side and
middle and S. 20° E. 70° on the southerly side. The easterly
face of this quarry showed a small compressed synclinal, and the
slate is not far from the line of this synclinal. To the westward
ij again appears just south of the large quarry at Howellville. A
little less than a mile west of Howellville and about a mile north
of Paoli Station it forms a prominent hill. On its southerly slope
a slaty limestone dips §. 25° E. 85°. In the road which passes
through a small gap in it the rock itself is not exposed, but lime-
stone on both sides, dipping 8. 20° E. 70° to 90°. The slate itself
is exposed in a small quarry on the hill, and appears to dip S. 10°
to 20° E. 80° to 85°. On the north flank of this hill the Chester
Valley Railroad passes through a cut in limestone S. 20° E. 75°.
Five hundred feet westward the slate hill is again prominent,
with a small limestone quarry on its north flank. The hill is quite
regular for about a mile, showing one gap through which a small
stream flows northward. It ends a little east of Cedar Hollow
Station, Chester Valley Railroad, with limestone on the north flank
dipping S. 20° E. 75° and 8S. 30° E. 60°.
Nearly three miles to the westward, on the left (nurth) bank of
Valley Creek, and less than a half-mile northeast of Mill Lane Sta-
tion (Chester Valley Railroad), is a high hill of the same schist.
This, being wooded, is a prominent feature in the landscape, espe-
cially looking from the line of the Pennsylvania Railroad, which,
opposite, descends the northerly slope of the hydromica schist ridge
and continues westwardly near its foot, affording a succession of fine
views. In this hill I found no outcrop of the slate which could be
satisfactorily measured. At one place the strike appeared to be
N. 60° E., and the dip probably southeast. There is limestone on
the north side within 500 feet of the schist, and on the south side
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 207
within twenty feet, dip S. 30° E. 65°. That on the south has
been very extensively quarried by William B. Irvine and Andrew
Carty (Knickerbocker quarries). The dip is about S. 50° E. 60°
in the quarries.
North of this hill limonite pseudomorphs after pyrite occur loose
in the soil. Rarely a portion of the enclosing rock is attached.
It is a damourite schist. They occur also in the schist of the
hill east of Cedar Hollow Station.
In the Knickerbocker quarries a narrow vein was filled with fine
erystallized, crystalline and fibrous aragonite.
Nearly due south of this, and less than a half-mile north of
Frazer, hence very near the south margin of the valley, is a small
hill of similar schist north of the Lancaster turnpike with limestone
on both sides within 500 feet. It appears to dip S. about 30° E.
about 80°, the limestone S. 25°-35° E. 55°-60°. This, of course,
is not at all in line with the outcrops near the Chester Valley Rail-
road, but nearly on the strike of this outcrop at Glen Loch, a mile
and a half further west. is another on the farm of Mr. William E.
Lockwood, forming a low hill striking more southwest than the
trend of the valley. I found no good exposures.
At Catanach’s quarry, near Cedar Hollow, a gravel of quartz
pebbles overlies the limestone; a similar gravel occurs south of the
Valley Forge gap, on the road to Devon. About four miles west
of Downingtown the valley narrows to about a half-mile. At
Coatesville it is crossed by the West branch of the Brandywine;
thence westward it becomes still narrower.
At the west boundary of Chester county it is crossed by the
Octorara creek and is again of greater width, about a half-mile.
In Lancaster county it continues just as clearly defined as in Ches-
ter, though the floor of the valley is higher and the slopes of the
bounding hills less steep. These hills are just asin Chester county,
hydromica schist on the south, Cambrian sandstone and schists on
the north.
Dr. Frazer’s tracing of the probable connection of the limestone
of this valley with that of the Lancaster Valley is one of the most
valuable contributions to the geology of this part of the State.
The identification of the limestone of these two valleys carries with
it the identity of the bounding sandstone.
208 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
The discovery of fossils in the Lancaster limestone® seems to
prove that part at least of the Lancaster limestone is Cambrian,
and hence that part at least of that of the Chester Valley must be
of the same age.
There seeming to be no doubt that the easterly end of this lime-
stone is a synclinal near Willow Grove, I carefully examined the
westerly termination. As I deem the structure not certainly made
out, I desire to place my observations on record, in hope that
future work by abler hands may solve the problem.
Going westward by the main route of travel, the Pennsylvania
Railroad, the casual traveler passes out of the Chester Vailey
almost without noticing it, and is apt to regard the next valley on
the north as its continuation; whereas, on approaching the Octo-
rara, the railroad bends quite abruptly to the north, and ascend-
ing the left bank of the Octorara a very short distance, passes by
the gap of that stream through the sandstone of the North Valley
Hill, crosses the Octorara to the town of Christiana, then passes
over two miles of gneissoid rocks and then through Copper Mine
Ridge (Cambrian sandstone) to Gap Station, on the southeasterly
edge of the Pequea Branch of the great Lancaster Valley.
Beginning at Midway, now the western edge of Coatesville, and
near the point at which the Lancaster turnpike leaves the valley
and takes a more northerly course, the Valley road® is an impor-
tant highway through Quarryyille to the Susquehanna. For so
hilly a region it is remarkably free from steep hills, and yet devi-
ates very little from a straight line. Running westward along the
foot of the North Valley Hill, it crosses the Octorara about a mile
and a half west of Atglen, and then ascends the hill to its summit,
which is here very narrow, so that in passing along the road the
adjacent valleys, both north and south, are visible, the elevation
being about 665 feet or about 200 feet above the creek. 4
The descent of the floor of the limestone valley from Parkesburg
® Olenellus and Obolelia, one mile northeast of Gap Station. C. D. Wal-
cott, Am. Jour. Soc., Vol. XLVII, Jan., 1894.
8° Now often called the Old Valley road, to distinguish it from a compara-
tively short highway also called Valley road, laid out more recently from
Parkesburg to Atglen, and lying in the valley about half a mile south of the
Old Valley road, which runs along the North Valley Hill near its base.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 209
westward to the Octorara is quite gentle, as is also its ascent to
the westward of that creek.” ,
The floor of the gneiss valley on the north rises much more
rapidly, so much so that at about five miles west of the Octorara
the gneiss rises to the level of the sandstone, the northerly valley
ends and thence westward the drainage is, as in Chester county,
from the gneiss region across the valley southward, except the first
creek, Valley run, which flows southward through the North hill
into the valley, which it follows eastward to the Octorara, and
except also the Quarryville drainage which is northwestward. The
ridge trends S. 60° W. for two and a half miles, then S. 70° W.
Throughout this distance the typical Cambrian sandstone is shown
by fragments, by the sandy soil and in occasional outcrops in place.
One dip, at a good exposure, half a mile from Christiana, was
S. 20° E. 65°. Two miles beyond, the strike is N. 65° E., dip
uncertain. On the rise of the hill beyond this, and about 100
yards west of the road to Steelville, the rock is exposed on both
sides of the road, which is almost exactly on the strike 8S. 70° W.
On the north side it is typical Cambrian sandstone, on the south
the same with thin layers of dark sandy mica schist. This con-
tinues for nearly 500 feet, and then, near the top of the hill, the
rocks are less exposed, but there are mica schist fragments on both
sides. About .25 m. west of the road to Steeleville the road and
hill trend 8. 75° W., quite level, to and beyond a road leading
north to Smyrna. East of this cross-roads the sandstone, unusually
hard and massive, approaching quartzite, is visible in large loose
masses—one of several tons weight, but not certainly in place.
The soil is very sandy. At the cross-roads the sandstone outcrops
67 In Ct, p. 17, it is stated that the Pennsylvania Railroad crosses the
Chester Valley west of Caln, and gradually rises upon the north slope to
‘“The Gap,’’ in Lancaster county, and that from Pomeroy westward the
floor of the valley rises rapidly into Lancaster county, but not so fast as the
railroad. This does not accord with my observations.
Tested by barometer the levels of Pomeroy and the Octarara creek, here
the boundary between Chester and Lancaster counties, are nearly the same.
The railroad rises from Pomeroy westward to the watershed between Buck
Ren and the Octorara, but immediately descends as shown on p. 18 where
levels are given, Pomeroy 483’, Parkesburg (2 m.) 537’, Summit 562’, Pen-
ningtonville (5m. from Parkesburg) 500’. In Levels Above Tide, Chris-
tiana, in Lancaster county, about half a mile from the Octorara, is given
about 491’. Moreover, the drainage of the valley from a point two
miles west of Pomeroy is westward into the Octorara. The railroad, how-
ever, as above stated, leaves the valley before entering Lancaster county.
14
210 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
S. 20° E. 75°; .2 m. west of the cross-roads is a quarry in the
sandstone on the north side of the road S$. 30° E. 35°. It is near
this that the valley on the north is almost obliterated by the rise
of the floor, and here also the Valley road begins to leave the
summit, but the deviation is slight. The road now crosses the
Sadsbury-Bart township line, and soon crosses a small creek about
sixty feet below the summit. This is Valley run, which flowing
southward from the gneiss into the valley flows eastward through
it to the Octorara.
West of this creek the road rises gently about thirty feet in
.3 m. to a cross-roads (north nine miles to Williamstown). The
road continues to rise, as does also the hill and the floor of the
valley. In the latter are abandoned iron mines (between Bart
Post-office and Nine Points). No fast rock is visible along the
road, but much quartz in fragments, some white, some rusty and
some smoky, closely resembling that occurring north of the same
hill in Chester county.
After a descent of about seventy feet the road crosses the creek
which drains the Gap nickel mine. Here the sandstone is not
visible, but north of the road and on the left bank of the creek is
a bold bluff of dark mica schist with quartz, showing minor plica-
tions and dipping N. 35° W. 80° to 85°. The road rises beyond
this creek about seventy feet, and then descends fifty, to cross the
westerly branch of the last-mentioned creek; beyond this the road
ascends ninety feet, and then descends slightly to cross a small
ereek, This is about a mile and a half east of May Post-office.
Here the schist is again exposed, together with a large amount of
loose trap, a fine-grained olivine diabase.
Beyond this the road passes through a very soft unctuous mica-
ceous rock, very fragile, resembling that which occurs with the iron
ores.
Two-tenths of a mile west of the trap masses of hard Cambrian
sandstone become very abundant; the fences are made of it, and
great quantities lie in dumps, together with a few masses of trap.
About .1 m. beyond a road goes south into the valley. Opposite
this road, about five hundred feet north of the Valley road, is a
precipitous cliff, about fifty feet high, of the typical sandstone. It
is much jointed, very compact and hard, approaching quartzite.
The base of this cliff is 100 feet above the road.
PNET omega
————————
1900. | NALURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 211
From this westward the sandstone is abundant to May Post-
office near which is trap, but insignificant in quantity compared
with the outcrop a mile further east. West of this is a gradual
descent for three-quarters of a mile, the road bearing 8. 80° W.,
and then a gradual descent of about one hundred feet in 1.25
miles 8. 60° W. to Quarryville.®
South of the valley, in Lancaster as in Chester county, ranges
the straight and little-varying South Valley Hill of hydromica
schists. South of Quarryville its elevation is 150 feet to 170 feet
above Quarryville Station, which, taken at about 488 feet
would give an elevation of from 63% feet to 658 feet.
From points near the summit a bird’s-eye view of Quarryville
and the adjacent country may be had, beautiful in itself and in-
structive geologically. Looking eastward the valley is seen as far as
the eye can reach, bounded northward by the Cambrian sandstone
hill. Westward, high, apparently irregular hills close the valley
and end the view. Northward, or rather north-northwestward,
stretches the irregular valley of the Big Beaver creek, bounded
east and west by high hills, but northward permitting the view to
extend to the great Lancaster limestone valley.
Examining more closely, these eastern and western hills are seen
to send forth promontories overlapping each other, as pointed out
by Dr. Frazer, so that while the valley is continuous it is tortuous,
as is most evident to a traveler upon the railroad which follows it.
8 Ct p. 114, ‘Prof. Frazer shows that the valley limestone lies on Potsdam
sandstone from the Schuylkill to near Coatesville ; that here, for a short
distance, thin mica schist layers come in between the limestone and the
sandstone (these would be Prof. Rogers’ Upper Primal slates), and that west
of Pomeroy and all the way to Quarryville, in Lancaster county, no sandstone
underlies the limestone ; but, instead of that, the limestone rests upon felds-
pathic gneiss beds, gneissoid mica schists, etc. (these would be Prof. Rogers’
Lower Primal slates).’’ But, so far as I have seen, nowhere east of Coatesville
is the typical sandstone much better shown than in the gap of the Octorara,
thence westward for a mile and at the locality mentioned near May Post-
office, and it is as well shown for the greater part of the intervening distance
as it is north of the valley in Chester county.
69 Dr. Frazer well describes the westerly ending of the valley: ‘‘The
north boundary wall sweeps up to the northwest, leaving the level limestone
land between itself and Quarryville. The south wall sweeps around
Quarryville and almost closes up the valley a short distance due north of
that town and west of the Mount Holly schoolhouse’’ (CCC, p. 75). The
trend of the westerly hills is, however, nearly north-northwest, bordering
Big Beaver creek, a branch of which rises a little south of Quarryville and
flows nearly north-northwest and then northwest, so that the angle of the
two valleys is much more than a right-angle.
212 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Bearing in mind Mr. Hall’s demonstration of the synclinal struc-
ture of the easterly end, ‘‘ where the Potsdam sandstone borders it
on the south, and where its round basin-shaped east end is per-
fectly manifest’’ (C’, p. 116), and his further demonstration that
in the middle of this half-round basin-shaped end lies the north-
eastern end of the hydromica schist of the South Valley Hill, I
sought for evidence of the structure of the hill at this westerly
end. Exposures of the hydromica schist are few and poor—one
.4 m. south of Quarryville was S. 10° E. 40°; further south
strike N. 50° E., dip uncertain; .5 m. dip southeast; .7 m. S.
50°; .8 m. S. 20° EB. 70°; 3 mp8) 30° EB. °65°. his waste
Mechanics’ Grove ; three miles northwest of Mechanics’ Grove and
southeast of The Buck, S. 20° E. 45°.
About a mile northeast of The Buck a fence was seen, composed
of a quite hard plicated gneiss, containing white feldspar and
quartz beds or veins. This appeared to be of quite limited extent
and was the only exception to the hydromica. About two miles
nearly north of The Buck the road descends eastward a Jong hill
of the schists, which near the top dip west 10°, further down §S.
40° E. 20°; these were soft, everi-bedded and sectile. This was
about three miles a little north of east of Rawlinsville. Then descend-
ing a small branch of the Pequea Creek, the same schists were
very largely exposed, dipping 8. 80° W. + 10°. This was in the
vicinity of Smithville, and on the road from Rawlinsville to the
Spread Eagle. Eastward toward New Providence no exposures
were seen until about a mile west of New Providence, when much
loose quartz appeared, aud then a mine of limonite iron ore and,
a quarter of a mile further, a hard limestone, N. 30° W. 35°,
with minor plications. This point is probably three miles at least
north of a line in the prolongation of the southerly side of the
sandstone of the North Valley Hill. Northwest of New Provi-
dence, about a half mile, a plicated limestone dips south to S.
10° W. +16°. About 500 feet east of New Providence a schis-
tose limestone coming out of the quarry like flagstones, but some
portions plicated, N. + 40° W. 10° to 20°.
About 500 feet north by west of New Providence limestone dips
N. + 40° W. + 45°. About 1000 feet further, N. 20° W. 30°
to 40°. About a half mile south of New Providence, in a
quarry, strike N. 60° E., dip in one place 70° northwest, in an-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 213
other, inaccessible, it seemed from a distance to be gentle south-
west. On the railroad .6 m. south of New Providence the lime-
stone is just visible, but at about one mile, in quarries, it is from
0° toS. 15°. This is about 2.25 miles northwest of Quarryville.
Nearly north of Quarryville is Hawksville, and here limestone
outcrops N. 45° W. 35°. On the Valley road east by north of
Quarryville .25 m. limestone dips 0, further east, northwest gentle,
then sandy mica schists shown in fragments only, and at one mile
Cambrian sandstone, abundant, the road leaving the valley and
ascending at a very acute angle the southerly slope of the North
Valley Hill.”
The road north from May Post-office, that is, near the westerly
edge of the tableland, ascends the valley of a small creek flowing
southward across a broad tableland, continuous northward from the
North Valley Hill, and free from steep slopes, except on its west-
erly border, where it ends abruptly at the valley of Big Beaver
creek in the series of promontories before described.
One-tenth mile north of May Post-office the sandstone is in great
quantity and extends for nearly a mile. Here a road goes east to
Georgetown, and a dark sandy schist appears. About 1.3 miles
from May Post-office another road goes east to Georgetown, and at
1.4 a road west to Camargo; between these the only rock is quartz
in loose masses. It does not resemble that of the Cambrian sand-
stone. At about two miles another road goes west to Camargo,
and a schistose sandy rock dips S. 70° W. 15°. This, 1 think, is
the Cambrian. In the vicinity the loose masses are of the typical
rock.
A little beyond this is the Bowery Church, the road attaining
its greatest elevation, 810 feet. North of the church it descends
into a small valley which heads perhaps .2 m. to the eastward
and descends to the valley of Big Beaver creek, on the north side
of Camargo. Near New Providence the easterly branch of the
ereek, which flows through this side valley, is joined by the south
branch (not shown on the map C’*) which, heading in the limestone
southeast of Quarryville, flows northwestward. The valley of
In the map of Lancaster county (C*), the Valley road is represented as
within the limestone area four miles east of Quarryville. I think, however,
it leaves the limestone three miles further west, as around May Post-oflice
the Cambrian sandstone is very abundant.
214 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
this south branch is taken advantage of by the Quarryville branch
of the Reading & Lancaster Railroad, which passes through this
rugged region by easy grades, and with very moderate cuts and
fills, though with tittle straight track.
In the valley of Big Beaver creek (south branch) the limestone
seems to be almost, if not quite, continuous. There is, as Dr.
Frazer notes, one narrow ridge .2 miles northwest of Quarryville,
which appears to cut it off. This is of hard heavy-bedded mica
schist, and is the ridge on which Hawksville is situated, though at
Hawksville limestone appears, dipping N. 45° W. 35°. The schist
is gnarled and twisted. The dip appears to be steep, but I could
obtain no satisfactory measurement. It is not over .25 mile wide
at the creek.
The fact that the hydromica schists of the south hill oceupy the
region in the strike of the valley west of the limestone at Quarry-
ville seems to negative the theory of a fault along the south side
of the valley bringing up the schists from below.”
My view of the westerly end of the valley would be that on the
north the gneiss and mica schist (Rogers’ Lower Primal) and the
Cambrian sandstone end in a high tableland with promontories
projecting into the Big Beaver valley, but that other areas of the
sandstone overlie the gneiss and mica schist east of the Big Beaver
valley, but none of these rocks appear west of it near Quarryville;
that the limestone, with a general westerly dip of low intensity,
sweeps northwest along the Big Beaver toward the Lancaster val-
ley ; the hydromica schist, widening first southward, widens west of
Quarryville northwardly overlying the limestone.
III. Limesrone or Fiourtown, CREAM VALLEY, Etc.
The third series should really not be separated from the second,
for there can be no question, I think, that they are identical; the
Spring Mill sandstone and limestone being the southeasterly legs
of the synclinal of which the limestone of Plymouth and the
sandstone of Cold Point are the northwestern,” as shown on Mr.
Hall’s map, C’, for we can trace the limestone of the Chester-
Montgomery valley around the northern end of the hydromica to
the Schuylkill and find it in its turn surrounded by the Cambrian
i Dr. Frazer, Proc. Am. Ass. A. S., 1884, p. $94.
? Pinal Report, I, p. 174; C4, 303.
.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. DALE
sandstone. Their supposed absence westward has led to several
theories.**
As far as to the Schuylkill this structure seems to be admitted.”
It is west of the Schuylkill where the diversity of opinion is
manifest, and this, I believe, arises from a failure to recognize the
topography of the region and the rocks which are actually there.”
A glance at the topographical map of Philadelphia and vicinity
of the U. S. Geological Survey will show that west of and near
the Schuylkill there are, southeast of the great Chester Valley,
three subordinate valleys, all trending west-southwest, and sepa-
rated by high hills of hydromica schist. The northwesterly two
3 Prof. Lesley’s Wotes of the Geol. of the Schuylkill River, 1884, p. 6.
4% “Tts acknowledged synclinal structure in Montgomery county, where
the Potsdam sandstone borders it on the south, and where its round basin-
shaped east end is perfect'y manifest.”’ C'‘, p. 116.
If tradition may be trusted, the source of the great spring which gives
name to Spring Mill is in the northerly leg of the synelinal though the spring
itself is in the southerly valley. The following facts I obtained in 1893,
from the well-known Dr. Hiram Corson, of Plymouth, be being then over
ninety years of age. There was a large sink hole near Plymouth meeting-
house filled up when the Plymouth railroad was built. When he was young
it was reported and currently believed that chaff thrown into this sink hole
was ejected at Spring Mill.
On the property of Mrs. Hovenden near the meeting-house was a well fifty
feet deep, at the bottom of which was a swiftly flowing stream.
A quarter of a mile west of this was a sink hole in a quarry (since filled
up) at which the sound of running water could be clearly heard.
The spring is said to flow twenty-two hundred gallons per minute. The
limestone area, southeast of the hydromica, seems insufficient to yield se
great an amount while the northwest area is very much greater. So far as
T bave been able to ascertain no large spring rises in the northwest valley.
% In C‘, p. 127, it is stated : ‘‘The southerly border of the limestone belt
crosses the Schuylkill at Spring Mill and follows Gulf Creek into Chester
county a little less than a mile south of the Baptist meeting-house’’—pre-
sumably the Great Valley Baptist Church, 1.5 miles north-northwest of
Devon Station. In Prof. Lesley’s summary of the arguments for and against
the synclinal structure of the Chester Valley (C', pp. 116 ef seq.) he seems
to regard the topographical valley alone, and to esteem the limestone and
sandstone outcrops southeast of the hydromica schist as of no importance
because they are so much smaller than those on the northwest.
But in the quotation from p. 127 he clearly recognizes the limestone at
Sprivg Mill as the southerly border and traces it along Gulf Creek, but no
one who has visited the locality can possibly unite the limestone of Spring
Mill with that on Gulf Creek near its mouth. The identity of the Spring
Mill limestone with that of West Conshohocken cannot be doubted, while
between the latter and the limestone on Gulf Creek, between the Gulf and
its mouth, intervenes the hydromica schist hill just as it.does east of the
Schuylkill between the limestone of Spring Mill and that of the Plymouth
Valley. It is possible, however, that the outcrops on Gulf Creek west of the
Gulf may be intended, for these are the continuation of the Spring Mill
limestone, but if so, several miles of the schists separate them from the lime-
stone of the Chester Valley near the Great Valley Baptist Church.
216 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
are soon lost on the hydromica schist highland, the southeasterly
continues along the southeast foot of the hydromica schist hill.
The Gulf Creek, rising in the southeast valley about 1.5 miles
south of the Great Valley Baptist Church, follows it to the Gulf,
then turns abruptly north through the hill by a deep and precipi-
tous gorge, and then follows the northwest foot of the southeasterly
hydromica schist hill and along the southerly edge of the Chester
Valley limestone to the Schuylkill; this hill is here quite narrow,
the strike ne of the two northwesterly hills being oceupied by
limestone continuous with that of the Chester Valley, but a mile
or two to the westward the three hills unite to form a tableland
nearly two miles wide southeast of the church. Some of the
difficulty may arise from the fact that the Schuylkill river, flowing
on the line of dip across the Chester Valley or Plymouth limestone
and the hydromica past the upper part of Conshohocken, turns
almost at right angles, along the base of the opposite ancient
gneiss ridge and on the line of strike of the Spring Mill-West
Conshohocken limestone for over a mile, when it resumes its south-
east course and passes through a gap in the ancient gneiss hill.
On the left bank, just above this gap, is Spring Mill. The
limestone appears on the left bank at and above Spring Mill, and
to the southeast of it the sandstone. Southwest of these outcrops
the limestone and sandstone appear to be covered by the longitu-
dinal flow of the river, so that while the river is but about a quar-
ter of a mile wide the distance between the outerops at Spring Mill
and West Conshohocken is about one and a half miles.
On the right (west) bank the limestone appears in considerable
quantity in the long, straight, narrow Cream Valley and supplied
the Merion furnaces with flux during their whole existence.
West of West Conshohocken there are but three actual outcrops
of the limestone of this belt in Montgomery and Delaware coun-
ties, viz., at Gulf Mills, at Stacker’s or Brooke’s quarry, .25 mile
west of the Montgomery-Delaware county line and on the farm of
Peter Pechin, one-half mile northwest of Radnor Station. Limo-
nite iron ore, as usual, overlies the limestone and was extensively
mined east of the Gulf and less largely on Pechin’s farm, north-
northwest of Radnor Station and Fenimore’s, a half-mile further
west, and also south of Devon Station, Chester county. On and
west of Pechin’s there are sink holes near the Eagle road, be-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. DAE
tween the King of Prussia road and that leading to St. David’s
Station, and in Wayne, due north of the Presbyterian Church and
south of the Eagle road, the last now filled up, also about a half
mile northeast of Sugartown, Willistown township, Chester
county.
The above limestone outcrops are, respectively, .1, 1.25, 2.5 and
3 miles from the Schuylkill ; the sink holes 3.4, 3.6, 3.7, 4.1
and 10 miles.
As already stated, the sandstone is well exposed on the left bank
of the Schuyikill, about 500 feet southeast of the limestone,
dipping 8. 40°. On the right or west bank the sandstone is not
visible, its place being taken by, or it being concealed in, mica
schists, which border the limestone on the southeast and which also
appear between two adjacent outcrops of limestone. The south-
easterly limestone dips about 8. 30° E. 80°; the schist S. 28° E.
74°, the northwesterly limestone about 80° northwest.
Five miles from the Schuylkill the valley is no longer prominent,
its floor having risen to 400 feet above tide, almost to the level of
the adjacent hills, nevertheJess a depression can be traced southwest-
ward, in which north of Sugartown there is the sink hole above
mentioned, but for nearly sixteen miles no limestone is visible.
North of West Chester and about fifteen miles from the Schuyl-
kill the valley is once more well marked, its floor occupied in part
by the garnetiferous schists, its southeast boundary the ancient
gneiss hill on which West Chester is situated, and its northwest
the South (Chester) Valley Hill, precisely as near the Schuylkill,
except that here the mica schists make the southerly part of the
hill and that a ridge of serpentine appears in the valley. In this
valley, about a mile and a half northwest of West Chester, at
Cope’s, the limestone once more appears at the surface, accom-
panied by the garnetiferous schists which adjoin the limestone of
West Conshohocken and appear at close intervals the whole dis-
tance and which to the westward include the sandstone.
The schists here appear between two outcrops of limestone about
100 feet apart, the northwesterly very slightly exposed, showing
now only one mass of limestone, dipping apparently gently to the
southeast or toward the larger quarry and under tie schists.
The southeasterly quarry has been wrought in a stratum of
limestone only thirty feet to sixty feet in thickness, and for a
218 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
distance of about 200 feet. Both walls are visible. The north-
westerly is of garnetiferous mica schist, or gneiss, including masses
of feldspar, exactly resembling that of Cream Valley, Radnor.
It dips N. 45° W. 65°, the limestone in contact with it N. 55°
W. 60°, but they appear to be strictly conformable and the slight
difference is probably due to irregularity of the surface measured.
The southeasterly wall is a hard schistose gneiss, containing
much feldspar, some apparently porphyritic, and some an aggre-
gate of crystalline feldspar. The limestone, however, appears to
rise in an anticlinal over this and to dip gently southeast beyond
it, but, apparently, of a thickness of but afewinches. The gneiss
surface toward the quarry is curved, but in the straight part
toward the southwest end dips N. 30° W. 65°, while over it the
limestone appears with a northwest dip of not over 20°. The
appearance further east is asif the limestone was folded completely
over this gneiss. This limestone is not far from the strike of the
serpentine, which, however, does not make its appearance.
About a mile west of Cope’s the East branch of the Brandywine
flows in a nearly southeast direction across the strike of the rocks,
and at the crossing of the creek by the Strasburg road is Cope’s
Bridge, or Copesville. About a quarter of a mile above is a small
valley in the hard mica schists and gneiss. Above this for .3 mile
is a coarser gneiss and hornblende schist, dipping $8. 30° E. 60° to
70°, followed by another valley seemingly in prolongation of a
limestone valley west of the Brandywine about to be described.
In the line of the upper valley the creek changes its direction for
nearly a half-mile from southeast ‘to nearly northeast. The
limestone of Cope’s quarry appears to be in this intermediate hill,
not far from the strike of the southerly valley, and it does not
appear in either valley east of the creek.
In the northwesterly valley we find the spangled mica schist full
of garnets, forming the northwest hill and dipping very clearly
and regularly S. 45°. In the southerly hill no exposures were noted
except along the Brandywine, but the loose rocks are hard feldspar
and hornblende gneiss. The Conshohocken trap dyke (diabase)
passes near the summit of this hill on its southeasterly slope, but
reaches the Brandywine only about .1 mile above Cope’s Bridge,
the southerly valley not extending over .3 mile from the Brandy-
wine.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 219
Opposite the northerly valley, on the right bank of the Brandy-
wine, but a little higher up the stream, a well-marked limestone
valley stretches west-southwest. Southeast of it is the high hill
of the schists on which Marshallton is situated. The first quarry
is that of George March, about .8 mile northwest of Copesville.
It is wholly in compact limestone, dipping quite regularly S. 50°
E. 20°. Over it are quantities of loose mica schist, with some
large masses about 100 feet south of the quarry. About .3 mile
north-northwest of the quarry the nearest rocks on that side appear
on a lane on the Ingram farm. They are hornblende and feldspar
schistose gneiss, striking N. 80° to 90° E., and dipping 60° and
upwards nearly south, or toward the limestone. As stated, the
valley is here well marked, the north and south hills rising to a
height of 150 feet or more. A section of this point shows con-
tinued widening of the schists, which form the Marshallton hill.
The gneisses and schists here, as pointed out by Dr. Frazer, bear
much resemblance to those of southern Delaware county,” and
this not only in their essential constituents, but also in their con-
taining both blue and gray kyanite. The more micaceous schists
are nearly a mile in width to the border of the ancient gneiss,
which is a little north of the Fairview Schoolhouse, the serpentine
being here, as at Taylor’s mill, close to the old gneiss. The
harder and more feldspathic and hornblendic rocks north of the
limestone are succeeded northward by mica schists to Hawley’s
mill, a mile north of the limestone, the dips being to the southeast,
averaging below 45°, and are there succeeded by the hydromica
schists nearly 90°, but about .25 mile above Sugar’s bridge there
is a small outcrop of very sandy schist closely resembling those
occuring with the typical sandstone.
A mile northwest of this on the farm of Wilson Young’s estate,
and in the valley of the creek flowing into the Brandywine at
Hawley’s mill, is a small outcrop of dolomite containing much green
tale or chlorite. The country west of the Brandywine is much
more hilly than that to the east, a succession of hills trending about
8. 70° W. rising 250 feet above the adjacent valleys.
About .4 mile south-southwest of March’s quarry is a smaller one
on the farm of Moses Woodward, almost obliterated, mica schist
fragments abundant on the south, but no good exposures. Just
cep: Gl. yrs
¥20 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
beyond this there is a low watershed in the valley, the westward
drainage being into the West branch through Broad run. On
this run, about .7 mile from March’s, was Moses Bailey’s quarry.”
This quarry is quoted from Rogers (C‘, p. 70) as being the most
easterly. It is probable the more easterly quarries were not opened
when Rogers wrote.
On the Strasburg road, a short distance east of this quarry, is a
large outcrop of pegmatite, or coarse granite, with garnetiferous
mica schist very close to it to the northwest, both near the floor of
the valley, but probably on its southeast side, while on the north-
west the hill is composed of schistose gneiss dipping steeply north-
west and forming a high hill. Immediately south of the limestone
quarry are garnetiferous mica schists, and in them was found a
large and distinct pebble of the ancient gneiss. This corresponds
closely with the similar occurrence in the Stacker-Brooke quarry
in Radnor township.
Three-quarters of a mile west-southwest is the most prominent
quarry of the region, known as the Poorhouse quarry. It has
been wrought nearly northeast into the side of a comparatively
steep hill and wholly in limestone, except the top of the north
west end. The limestone is hard and highly erystalline, but full
of small irregular cavities in which occur crystals of pearl spar,
quartz, chesterlite and, more rarely, rutile. On the northwest
side, near the entrance, the dip is clearly S. 40° E. 45°, but on
the same side of the quarry further in (northeast) the dip seems
to decrease rapidly to about 5° southeast. The back of the quarry
(northeast) shows sixty feet or seventy feet of limestone overlain
by ten feet to twenty feet of mica schist, perfectly conformable
though showing in one place a breaking down, due probably to a
sink hole in the Jimestone. The dip of this northeast side is about
5° southeast, though there is init a distinct small anticlinal forming
an arch probably twenty feet wide fifteen feet high, but apparently
merely local and not disturbing the upper strata. The nearest
rocks observed to the southeast are hard porphyritie schistose
gneisses on the left bank of the West branch of the Brandywine,
west of Glen Hall Station, Wilmington and Northern Railroad,
nearly horizontal, succeeded by fine-grained and plicated schists,
7 Boardsley run, C*, p. 40, and Boardley run, p. 70, Broadley in the index,
are probably typographical errors for Bread run.
Se ll eee
ie ill
See
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 221
which at the Glen Hall bridge dip N. 70° W. 10° to 40°. This
dip is distinct, but most of the rock appears to have an irregu-
lar waving gentle southerly dip. The nearest northwest are on
a road bearing north-northwest on the west side of the quarry,
and about .3 mile from it, where a cut shows decomposing schists
and gneisses with thin strata of quartzite, the bedding or cleavage
quite regular S. 40° E. 50°, becoming steeper southwardly.
From Cope’s to the Poorhouse quarry, there seems to be a very
decided difference in character between the rocks above and those
below the limestone. Assuming those dipping under it to be
really below geologically, as seems almost certain, we have the
same succession as has been observed in the dolomites of New
York island, the underlying rocks being much harder and contain-
ing hornblende and feldspars in considerable quantity, while those
overlying are comparatively soft very schistose rocks, without horn-
blende and much less feldspar.”
About a mile nearly west of the Poorhouse quarry (probably a
little less than a half-mile on the dip line) is the Hayes’ whetstone
quarry, of typical Cambrian sandstone interbedded in sandy mica
schists. The sandstone dips 8. 30° to 56° E. 20° to 25°, or toward
the limestone.
This is the first clear outcrop of the sandstone on this line west
of Wayne, though one specimen was found loose not far from the
Cope quarry, and a quartzite with tourmalines occurs near the
limestone quarries east of the Poorhouse quarry, but here the
sandstone is on the northwest side of the limestone with moderate
southeast dips, whereas near the Schuylkill it is on the southeast
side.
Standing on the hill above the Poorhouse quarry, a fine view of
the Brandywine valley is had. To the eastward and westward it
is narrow, with high steep bordering hills, but southwest it is broad
and flat, with the creek forming an S bend and flowing 1.5 miles
in a lineal distance of .5 mile. Further southeast a depression
leads from Embreeville southwestward. At Embreeville, one mile
78 “ As Prof. Dana has noted (Am. Jour. Sci., III, Vol. XXI, p. 439), the
beds underlying the limestone of New York county are highly quartzose,
while those overlying them are chiefly micaceous. Throughout West-
chester county south of the latitude of Sing Sing the writer has found this
lithological difference to prevail.’’ Merrill, Metamorphic Strata of South-
east New York, Am. Jour. Sct., 111, XX XIX, p. 387.
222 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
8. 50° W. from the Poorhouse quarry, is a small limestone quarry
in which the dip is 8S. 45° to 50° E. 60°. Less than 200 feet
northwest of this, mica schists, garnetiferous and spangled, are
well exposed, dipping regularly S. 45° to 55° E. 30° to 45°, hence
clearly under the limestone. In these schists is a dyke, bed or
vein of a partly kaolinized feldspar.” To the southeast are gneisses
dipping S. 50° E. 55°. A mile and a half S. 60° W. from the
Embreeville quarry are the quarries of Pierce and Edwards, near
the Green Valley Baptist Church, the limestone dipping S. 50° E.
35°, and .5 mile further S. 60° W. Job Hayes’ quarry near the
south line of Newlin township, the rock dipping 8. 30° E. 35°
The adjacent rocks are not exposed. In almost the same direction
1.25 miles further are the extensive Guest quarries, spoken of by
Rogers as Connor’s quarry. Rogers gives the dip as southeast,
and mentions the white sandstone as dipping to the southeast north
of it with the older primal slates also dipping southeast beyond.*
My own observations give varied gentle dips in different parts
of these quarries to the southeast, southwest and northwest, but
the general dip is probably to the southeast quite gentle. In the
immediate vicinity small loose masses of the typical sandstone are
abundant, while large flat slabs of it are in use as flagstones at the
farmhouse north of the quarry, but I was unable to ascertain
exactly whence they were obtained. About 700 feet north of the
quarry mica schists dip S. 30° W. 20° toward the quarry. Iron
ore occurs on the Doe run road about .7 mile southeast of the quar-
ries, and also at Pennock’s iron ore mines .5 mile a little east of
north. Here considerable ore (limonite) appears to have been
taken out. On the Doe run road a half-mile northwest of the
quarry, and thence southward, the typical sandstone is very well
and Jargely exposed, forming a hill about seventy feet high north-
west of the Guest quarry. An exception to any other locality in
the whoie region, it is here much plicated. It dips southeast 20°
to 30°, with sandy mica schists immediately southeast of it dip-
ping 15° 8. E., and mica schists just west of it dipping S. 70°
W. 45°. About half-way between the sandstone and Guest’s
quarry decomposing mica schists dip about 45° S. E. South of the
9 Soda-Orthoclase, T. C. Hopkins, Journ. Franklin Inst., CXLVII, p. 13.
8 First Geol. Survey of Pa., I, 230. Quoted C‘, p. 72.
,
a. ee
2 =e? —-_— 2. (Fee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 223
quarry are no exposures, but the soil is full of fragments of mica
schist and gneiss.
This is the last quarry that can be certainly referred to the series
mentioned. Prof. Rogers, after discussing this series from Broad
run to the Guest quarry, says: ‘‘ The furthest opening in the lime-
stone in this synclinal is that of Baker’s quarry, half a mile east
of the west line of West Marlboro’ township.’’”
The only quarry in this location would be the large one in the
bend of the Pomeroy & Newark Railroad, formerly Edwin Chan-
dler’s, now Walter Darlington’s, near the source of the south
branch of Doe run, but it seems impossible to consider this as
being in a synclinal continuation of the former line for two hills,
probably 150 feet in height, of sandstone and gneiss, intervene.
Geographically it is nearly on the line of the quarries mentioned, but
it seems to belong to the range of quarries north of it (William
C. Jones, Isaac Hoopes) of the Doe run valley, presently to be
mentioned.
IV. Tae Doz Run VALLEY.
The fourth or Doe run limestone seems geographically to be
simply a continuation of the third, but I have deemed it best to
consider it separately because in the subdivision I have made I have
intended to include in each series those outcrops only which appear
to be not only of one horizon, but also, in all probability, continu-
ous underground when not visible at the surface, or at least not
distinctly cut off. The accompanying is a sketch map of this
valley.
Going northwestward along the Dve run road from the Guest
quarry, as already stated, we cross southeast dipping mica schists,
then southeast dipping Cambrian sandstone, then northwest dip-
ping mica schist, and then no exposures, but a descent toward Doe
run. ‘To the north are high hills of gneiss and mica schist,
through which Doe run and Buck run flow northeastward to the
Brandywine. In front is Doe run valley, stretching in a general
southwest direction. The floor of the valley is low and flat. It
appears to be bounded on all sides by mica schists and gneisses,
which also make prominent hills which subdivide it in part. In-
cluding these hills it is about a mile and a half from east to west
8 Mirst Geol. Survey of Pa., I, p. 230. Quoted C*, p. 72.
(1900.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
224
LPM OM LNA 1oy,
bi
x)
Ap UMN Tb i,
Om Ni
Conbnne, onilalda
D. Diabase
S
C.S.
RUN VALLEY
Schestand Cneiss
Seale of Mules
DB Quarry
X Oulewp
L Limestone
fej
—s
eam
oOo
AY
<=
=
——————— = ——
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 225
and about two and a half from north to south. Its southerly and
westerly border is followed by the Pomeroy & Newark Railroad,
which, going north, crosses the divide between White Clay creek
and the Brandywine near Pusey Station, at about 470 feet
above tide. A half-mile beyond, its direction changes abruptly
frem north to about west by south around the base of a high hill
of hard schistose hornblende rock, dipping about 10° S. E,
After keeping the west by south course for nearly a’mile it crosses
the headwaters of the south branch of Doe run, and ‘then turns
north by east along the high hill of mica schist bounding the
valley on the west to Doe Run Station, about 374 feet above tide.”
In the valley are two prominent hills, both trending nearly north
and south, in echelon, the westerly projecting from the northern
highland, the easterly from the southern, from which, however, it
is cut off by a branch of Doe run. On both sides of the westerly
hill and on the east side of the easterly are limestone outcrops.
The easterly hill, as shown by loose masses only, which, however,
are in great abundance, is of hornblende schist and gneiss, but on
its eastern flank near its northern end is an old limestone quarry
(Enos Bernard’s), in which the strike is very nearly north and
south and the dip west, but whether 30° or 80° could not be
decided, as the quarry has Jong been abandoned and but one mass
of rock was well exposed. Within 150 feet west of the limestone
Cambrian sandstone outcrops in abundance, but it is not exposed
sufficiently to measure. The summit of this hill commands an
excellent view of most of the valley. Across this hill the Down-
ingtown diabase dyke strikes nearly southwest.
Looking southeast toward the Guest quarry, a mile and a quar-
ter distant, there is a marked depression in the hills.
East of this hill is a road leading south to Chatham and north
to Doe Run village. Just east of this road are five sink holes on
land of Pusey Buffington and George Elvin, east-southeast of
which is a hill about sixty feet in height, covered with sandstone
fragments.
It seems not improbable that we have here a north and south
*? These are from table 3, Levels above Tide, Second Geol. Survey of Pa.,
NV. This table, however, gives Avondale 281.6, while table 141 gives it as
227. The geater elevation is probably most nearly correct as by table 141
Chadds Ford Junction is given as 129, but by table 41, 175. My own obser-
vation by barometer from West Chester as datum gave 170.
15
226 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
synclinal basin of the Jimestone and sandstone underlaid by mica
schist, then an anticlinal of the schist, the limestone eroded, but
appearing at the Guest quarry overlying the southeast dipping
sandstone.
West of this hill, through low and flat ground, flows the main
Doe run, beyond which is the westerly hill of hard and heavily
bedded garnetiferous schists and gneisses, with limestone on both
flanks, no sandstone being visible. This hill is fully a quarter of
a mile wide and probably 150 feet above the valley. At its south- -
ern termination, near which unite the north, west and south
branches of Doe run, the strike is N. 25° E., the dip nearly 90°
The rock is hard, heavy-bedded gneiss. The road from Doe run to
Gum Tree crosses the hill about a half-mile to the north, the strike
of the gneiss being N. 40° E., the dip probably about 60° S. E.,
or under the limestone, which has been quarried about 500 feet
north of this road (I. H. Thomyson’s quarry, formerly McNeal’s).
The limestone dips nearly east, 50° to 70°, and is more highly
crystalline than at any other of the Doe run quarries. On the
west slope of the hill a hard micaceous gneiss dips N. 60° W.
30°, about 700 feet northwest of Jones’ limestone quarry. This
hill, therefore, appears to be an anticlinal underlying the limestone,
but exposing no sandstone. On the same flank of the hill as
Thompson’s, but a half-mile north, is the quarry of Ellis Woods,”
where the limestone dips 8. 80° E. 85°, bounded westward by the
same garnetiferous schist, dipping N. 60° W. = 35°, which
appears also in fragments on all sides. The limestone is exposed
on a northwest and southeast road, .25 mile northwest of Woods’,
dipping N. 65° W. 35°.
Crossing this anticlinal ridge westward, we descend into the
western and most uninterrupted branch of the valley, drained in its
northern part by a branch of Buck run and by the north branch
of Doe run, and in its southern by the south branch. The north-
westernmost quarry is that of William C. Jones, .1 mile south of
the Doe Run-Gum Tree road. The limestone is much plicated and
rolled with mica schist interbedded at the northern end. Dip at
the northeast part, S. 30° E. 35°; north end, +S. 20°; south
side, 8. 10° E. 20°. About a quarter of a mile south of Jones
are quarries of Cyrus Hoopes, in plicated limestone like that of
83 Hayes’ quarry, C‘, p. 70, but not Hayes’ quarry, p. 309.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 227
Jones’ quarry, dipping S. 10° W. 10°. A little west of south of
these, 1.5 miles, the intervening space occupied first by the westerly
affluents of Doe run and then by the southerly branch, and
almost at the head of the latter, is a very large quarry on the farm
of Walter Darlington, formerly Edwin Chandler, and _ being
almost certainly that mentioned by Rogers as Baker’s quarry.“
Here the limestone is nearly horizontal, with a quartzose mica schist
overlying it, in some places twelve to fifteen feet thick; some pieces
of the schist resemble somewhat the schists adjacent to the Cam-
brian sandstone, but most of it does not; its dip is likewise nearly
0°. This schist is well exposed in the cut of the railroad imme-
diately southeast, where it does not at all resemble that close to the
sandstone. East of it is a narrow outcrop of coarser mica schist,
then the diabase of the Downingtown dyke.
There seems no great difficulty in regarding these westerly out-
crops as the westerly leg of an anticlinal overlying the mica schist,
and this would bring them into accord with the easterly outcrops.
There are, however, two objections:
1. The sandstone is in great quantity at the easterly outcrops
and is not found in the western.
2. The observed dips in the mica schist are steep, those in the
limestone gentle.
On the map in C* the limestone is made continuous from Guest’s
to and including all the Doe run quarries, and to and including
Logan’s quarry west of Unionville. Fully three-fourths of this
area show the underlying rock to be gneiss, schists or sandstone;
the schists and gneisses forming high hills with abundant exposures.
and there seems no reason to suppose that limestone underlies more
than a fraction of the remaining one-fourth.
West of the Doe run valley there are no outcrops of limestone,
and indeed, except within a mile or two, very few of any kind, and
those of mica schist and gneiss; but in the southwest part of
Highland township, on the limestone road, are two outcrops of
limonite iron ore, in former years extensively mined. They are
respectively .3 and .9 of a mile nearly south of the Fairview pub-
lie school. About half a mile south-southeast of the southerly
iron ore outcrop, on the farm of John H. Esbenshade, about a
mile nearly east of Cochranville on the road to Gum Tree, is a sink
% First Geol. Survey of Pa., I, 230. Quoted C+, p. 72.
228 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
hole about 50 x 100 feet, and four or five feet deep in the centre.
It seems not improbable that limestone underlies the schists in
this vicinity.
V. HuntrIncpon VALLEY.
The fifth, the limestone of Huntingdon Valley, is the most con-
cealed and probably the most limited in extent, but one of the most
interesting geologically, for as shown by Mr. Hall* it is a very
strong argument in favor of the paleozoic age of the Philadelphia
schists and gneisses.
Huntingdon Valley is a straight narrow valley on the southeast
side of the ancient gneiss of Buck Ridge. It is crossed by the
Pennypack creek and drained by Paul’s brook flowing east, and
Huntingdon creek west, into the Pennypack. The valley proper
extends in a straight line N. 70° E. for about four miles, but it
may be traced further east less distinctly. East of the Pennypack
creek the Cambrian sandstone intervenes between the limestone and
the ancient gneiss, increasing in prominence eastwardly. West of
the Pennypack, while there are indications of it in the same rela-
tion, they are not beyond doubt. The limestone itself is very
obscure. It has been reported in wells and in pits dug for iron
ore and by Mr. Hall* in the bed of Paul’s brook, but the only
place I have seen it is in the cellar of an old mill, now a wagon-
house on the property of Mr. Penrose Hallowell, who informed me
that many years ago there was a quarry in the limestone west of the
wagonhouse. He pointed out a quarry of sandstone about 500
feet northwest from the limestone, not wrought for years. The
rock in this quarry resembles the Cambrian sandstone, but it is
coarser, more feldspathic, and not as well defined as at Waverly
Heights, but in walls of the vicinity were slabs of the typical
sandstone said to have come from this quarry. The sandstone
apparently dips southeast, steeply, the limestone 60° southeast,
and the spangled mica schist, well exposed 1000 feet southeast, S.
30° E. 60°, followed by the wood-like garnetiferous schist, nearly
vertical.
% diye
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 229
VI. Tse Livestone or Pocorsty Townsurp, oF LoGAn’s
QUARRY AND OF ELIsHA BAILEY’s QUARRY.
The first of these outcrops, perhaps, should not be grouped with
the last two, the only ground for the grouping being their geograph-
ical position. Indeed, the first is in geological position nearer that
of Huntingdon Valley, lying as it does about half a mile south of
the ancient gneiss near the extreme western outcrop of the latter.
It is in a small valley about .3 mile south of the State road, and
about the same distance west of the road leading south from Pocop-
sin Inn to the Red Lion. It has not been wrought for nearly fifty
years and now shows nothing but a hollow filled with water from
a large spring. There is, however, besides tradition, a quantity of
limestone fragments, and a little to the northeast a large sink hole.
The limestone is granular and crystalline. It was wrought by
James Gawthorp, and is now on the farm of L. M. Larkin. It
appears to be surrounded by the schists, but no good exposures
were seen. About 500 feet north of it is an outcrop of talc
schist.
Four miles nearly due west of this quarry and 1.75 miles N.
70° W. of Unionville is the quarry of Eli Logan. This is still
in operation. The dip, omitting one remarkable fold or roll, is
quite regular, S. 35° to 50° E. 30° to 50°. On the Doe run
road, immediately south of the quarry, garnetiferous mica schists
dip S. 40° to 50° E. 40° to 50°. About .1 mile west of the
quarry, mica schists dip S. 55° E. 70°, and about 300 feet further
west Cambrian sandstone S. 75° E. 30°; this is close to the town-
ship line between East and West Marlborough. A little west of
the line a road goes south to Upland (Marlborough Inn). On
this road the sandstone is well exposed in two outcrops about
150 feet apart, with mica schists above, between and below the
sandstone, all dipping about S. 40° E. 30°.
A remarkable feature of Logan’s quarry, unique in the limestone
quarries of this region, is the occurrence of a massive rock chiefly
of plagioclase feldspar with some quartz, exceedingly tough and
hard, containing much tourmaline. This has much the aspect of
a sheet of igneous rock. It was observed by Rogers, who sup-
posed it to overlie the limestone and to be possibly ‘‘a highly
altered form of the upper primal slates.’ It seems to have
230 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
escaped the notice of the Second Survey. Quarrying, since the
date of Rogers’ notes, has shown clearly that it is a sheet or vein,
apparently parallel with the dip of the limestone.
S. 50° W., 1.1 miles from Logan’s quarry, is that of Eli S$.
Bailey, a half mile or less west of Upland.
This quarry, when in active operation thirty or forty years ago,
was a famous locality for tremolite, which was found in larger
quantity and in better specimens than elsewhere in the State, but
almost nothing is showing now. The dip is probably southeast.
The strike of the sandstone west and southwest of Logan’s would
bring it west and northwest of this quarry. It is not exposed
nearer than the road north to Upland, but southeast dipping mica
schists with considerable quartzite appear to the westward, on
the State road.
VIL. Tue Srreet Roap LIMeEsTone.
The seventh group comprises a series of outcrops (on nearly all
of which quarries have been opened) extending in a line about
S. 70° W., somewhat curved to the north at the eastern end, and
having a total length of thirteen miles. The easternmost exposure
is about a quarter of a mile nearly due north of the south corner
of Thornbury township, Chester county. It is in very sandy
limestone, dipping 8. 40° E. 50°. No other fast rock is exposed,
but schist fragments are abundant, especially to the southeast.
About .25 mile south a schist dips S. 30° E. 50°. A half-mile
nearly east and about the same distance southeast typical Cambrian
sandstone outcrops abundantly, dipping at the former N. 35° W.
80°, and a little further east S. + 40° E. 20°, with schists above
and below, dipping from 0° to 60° S. E.
The second outcrop is in Birmingham township, Chester county,
about a mile and a quarter S. 35° W. of the first, on a small
stream which empties into the Brandywine just above Brinton’s
Bridge. Evidently much rock has been removed, but the quarry
is filled with water and mud. Southwest of it a trench was dug
for drainage, showing a hard quartz schist, with the unusual dip of
N. 60° E. 20° under the limestone. I could see no reason to
doubt this dip.
The third, about .75 mile S. 70° W. from the second,-is on the
right bank of the Brandywine at Brinton’s Bridge, about a mile
a
=
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 231
above Chadd’s Ford, at Harvey’s quarry. Here the limestone
and adjacent rocks are well exposed. The latter are schists and
gneisses, dipping S. 10° to 40° E. 25° to 70°. The limestone
dips about S. 20° E. 45° under a hard quartzose mica schist, with
quartz in serpentine forms, like those seen in the Manayunk
schists. The schist as well as the limestone is plicated, one
stratum making two 90° bends within a few inches. Under the
limestone is a similar schist, less quartzose and finer grained, dip-
ping 8. 25° E. 25°.
It is very rare in this region to find a section as good as that
afforded by the Brandywine. It is unfortunate that it does not show
the structure more clearly. Prof. Lesley examined it and thought
the limestone a tongued anticlinal.*’ While this may be the fact,
I incline to the opinion that it is interbedded in the gneiss. The
limestone of this quarry contains chondrodite, the only occurrence
of this mineral in the region so far as I am aware. Dr. Frazer
classed this limestone and that of Honeybrook township as Huro-
nian or perhaps Laurentian.*
It is not certain whether these outcrops belong strictly to the
Street road line about to be described, or to those in the valley to
the south followed by the Baltimore Central Railroad, or one or
more to each, or whether they constitute an isolated line. When
we possess a good topographical map of the region it may be pos-
sible to determine.
About 1.25 miles north of Harvey’s quarry the Brandywine is
crossed by the Street road, which occupies an almost continuous
nearly straight depression about S. 60° W. from a mile northeast
of the southeast corner of Westtown township nearly ten miles to
the Red Lion, in East Marlborough. It then bears about S. 80°
W. to a point beyond White Clay creek and then about southwest
through Oxford. In its vicinity is the line of quarries well de-
scribed by Rogers under the title ‘‘ Street Road Limestone Line.’’*
Proc. A. P. S., Vol. VIII, p. 282; also Ct, p. 239, where a drawing is
"® “ Caleaire Huronien. [1 parait y avoir des examples isolés de calcaires
intercalés dans les gneiss et les mica-schistes, un de ces examples se recontre
dans le township de Honey Brook comté de Chester, et un autre se trouve
sur la Brandywine a une courte distance de Chad’s Ford. Dans ce dernier
cas il est possible en réalité que le gite de caleaire appartienne au Lauren-
tian, dont une des bandes étroites passe ici dans Vaire du Huronien.”’
Memoir sur la géologie de la partie sud-est de la Pennsylwanie. Lille, 1882.
89 First Geol. Survey of Pa., 1, p. 226. Quoted C‘, p. 74.
232 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
For nearly its whole extent, east of Pocopsin creek, the Street
road passes through mica schists, but after passing the creek and
Parkerville the schists become very sandy, and near the Red Lion
there is abundance of the typical sandstone with mica schists
apparently on both sides of it, the dips being to the southeast and
moderate. An exposure on the Street road near the schoolhouse
.2 mile west of Red Lion, quite satisfactory, gave sandstone 8.
25° to 27° E. 15° to 50°, with mica schist underlying within
twenty feet S. 20° E. 25°. From this point a narrow straight
valley trends nearly southwest. A mile and a quarter west of
Red Lion, and .1 mile south of the Street road, is a quarry on the
land of Barclay Cope, formerly Reynolds’ quarry, then on the farm
of Jacob Way.” The quarry is now full of water, no rock being
visible. .75 miles west of this is Taggart’s cross-roads, Willowdale
P. O.; .75 mile west of this, on the farm of William Scarlett,
formerly John Baily’s, were, as I am informed, several sink holes,
now filled up and farmed over. In the Street road, just north of
this, the sandstone dips S. 5° E. 15° to 20° very clearly.
Close west of the road which bounds this farm on the west are
the quarries of Joseph H. Taylor, followed S. 50° W. from it by
quarries of Henry Pusey, one north, the other south of an east-
and-west road, at distances respectively of .3 and .6 mile from
Taylor’s. These quarries are in operation.
At Taylor’s there are two quarries. The eastern, recently
abandoned, shows clearly a mica schist containing tourmaline,
dipping S. 30° E. 30° immediately southeast of the limestone.
The westerly quarry is very close to the former and shows a highly
crystalline limestone full of cavities, some water-worn, others not,
with occasional quartz crystals in the cavities. From the upper
portion the cementing material of the crystalline grains has been
removed, leaving a lime sand which is utilized. The dip is south-
east, probably less than 10°; overlying is the mica schist, much
plicated, with a stratum about eighteen inches wide of the typical
sandstone, with its rhomboidal jointings, miecaceous partings, and
stretched tourmalines; apparently the same rock that is dipping
toward the limestone, about a half-mile to the northwest.
Within 500 feet southeast of the Taylor quarries is a mica schist,
dipping S. 50° E. 50°, but including a sharply folded mass of the
schist, and a convoluted mass of hard biotite gneiss.
mC poole.
———— sel
—
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 233
Three-tenths of a mile S. 50° W. from the Taylor quarries is
an old and large quarry on the farm of Henry Pusey™ still
wrought. On its southeast side the limestone dips 8. 25° E. 50°
under mica schists, in the northeast corner N. 25° W. 15°.
Near the northwest corner sandy mica schist containing tourmaline
appears next to the limestone for about twenty feet, and then a
hard quartzose stratum of which very little is exposed, N. 35°
W 70°.
Three-tenths of a mile 8. 50° W. is the other Pusey quarry.
Here the walls are not visible, nor the southeast part of the lime-
stone, but on the northwest side the dip is N. 30° W. 10° to 15°.
A peculiarity in this quarry is that the rock is partly blue and
partly pure white, both very compact, but the change from one
to the other occurs, not in what appear at first sight to be the lines
of stratification, but at the joint planes nearly at right angles,
which would seem therefore to indicate bedding planes.
Regarding the Taylor quarry and the northerly Pusey quarry,
close together as they are, the presence of the sandstone in the
former and its apparent total absence in the latter is remarkable.
The exposure in the Pusey quarry is unusually good, especially the
northwesterly wall, while in the Taylor quarries the southeasterly
is best shown. If the dips at Pusey’s are trustworthy we have the
summit of an anticlinal, but the curves in the adjacent mica schist
suggest caution. Dr. Frazer gives the dip (probably about 1879)
as N. 30° W. 60° on the south face,” while our observations on the
north side agree within 5°.
About half a mile west is the West Marlborough township line,
and about .1 mile west of it a quarry of considerable size on the
farm of Chalkley Bartram, formerly Eli Thompson, showing now
nothing of interest. The next farm is that of Edward 8S. Mar-
shall, on which there was a considerable quarry. Here sandstone
fragments are abundant. The westerly boundary of this farm is
the road leading south from Marlborough Inn (Upland) to Tough-
kenamon, being also at this point the west line of the tongue of
West Marlborough, which projects southward. About a mile
north of the limestone here, the sandstone is very well shown in
large quantity, being the most extensive outcrop south of the North
= ep. 312.
Ce p; 312.
234 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Valley Hill. Its best exposure is on the road from London Grove
Post-office to Chatham, at distances of .25 and .5 mile southeast of
London Grove, the former a quarry in the typical rock, overlaid by
sandy mica schist, both dipping 8. 35° E. 30°, the latter exposures
on the road showing the sandstone underlaid by mica schist, 8. 25°
E. 30° to 60°.
On the west side of the road from Upland to Toughkenamon,
about .2 mile north of the north line of New Garden township, is
a limestone quarry on the farm of Joseph Sharpless, formerly
Ephraim Wilson, and another a little further west on that of
Benjamin Swayne. The latter shows a dip of S. 35° E. 15° to 40°.
About a mile west-southwest of Swayne’s is a quarry on the
farm of Francis W. Hicks, formerly Elias Hicks, and a mile fur-
ther in the same direction a very extensive one on the farm of
Aaron Baker, known as Baker’s, subsequently as the Acme quarry,
and more recently wrought by the Avondale Marble Company.
Originally this quarry was wrought for lime for building and agri-
cultural purposes, but the decline of this industry impelled the
owners to put down diamond drill holes. The cores obtained
showed a good quality of marble. A large plant was erected and
now for some years excellent building marble has been obtained in
large blocks. The inferior grades are readily split, with little
waste, into rectangular blocks, which find a market. The marble
at the north end of the present excavation is about seventy feet
below the surface, and it dips nearly 8. about 20°. Overlying it
is a mica schist of great compactness which was quarried out in
large blocks and is used for retaining walls, foundations, ete.
The limestone of this quarry shows plications, but there is evi-
dently a gentle southerly dip throughout, except near the south
end where the limestone dips N. 25° W. 25° and abuts against
mica schist, dipping S. 40° E. 45°, the contact (a thrust fault ?)
being well shown in the railroad cut, nearly under the office.
Near the middle of the west side of the quarry is a stratum of
limestone containing much tremolite, phlogopite and quartz,
minutely disseminated, forming a very hard rock, sold as ‘* gran-
ite,’ and apparently in demand.
A short distance south of the marble quarry, on the Jacobs
farm, close to Baker Station, schistose gneiss, some of it with feld-
spar porphyritically enclosed, dips 8. 35° to 40° E. 50° to 55°.
i
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 235
A little over a mile, a little south of west of the Acme quarry,
is one of large size, but abandoned for years. This is the Levis
Bernard quarry, with a dip of S. 62° E. 20° in the most regular
pertion, but the limestone is much plicated. This is the most
western quarry in this line and is that mentioned by Rogers as the
most westerly quarry.*
South of the Street road line at its westerly end, that is south of
the Benjamin Swayne, Elias Hicks, Avondale Marble and L. Ber-
nard quarries, there are several outcrops of limestone which will
be discussed after the consideration of the next belt to the south.
VIII. THe Kennett LIMeEstTone.
At about two miles south of the Street road line there is, west
of the Brandywine but not far east of it, a valley even better
defined than that of the Street road. This has been taken advan-
tage of by the Baltimore Central Railroad, which, descending
rapidly from Brandywine Summit to the Brandywine* (from 273
above tide to 129 above tide in three miles), crosses the watersheds
between that stream and the branches of Red Clay and the east
branch of White Clay creek, with a rise of but 183 feet, while the
hills to the north and south are from 50 feet to probably 175 feet
higher. At intervals in the bottom of this valley outcrops of
limestone appear. The easternmost exposure is at Mendenhall’s
quarry, in Pennsbury township, about 1.2 miles west of the Bran-
dywine. At the quarry almost nothing is now visible, but one
apparently clear dip in the limestone was S. 60° E. 20° About
.2 mile east of this, hence over it, was a coarse mica schist with
much mica in distinct cleavages, with pegmatite and porphyritic
feldspar and quartz, dipping S. 25° E. 20°. Westward there are
no exposures near.
About two miles from the Brandywine is Fairville Station. A
half-mile north-northwest of it is a quarry in hard schistose gneiss,
dipping nearly S. = 40°, and about the same distance, west by
south, in a cut of the railroad, S. 20° to 40° E. 60° to 80°, while
to the south of the railroad are large quarries of feldspar in a
coarse pegmatite.
% First Geol. Survey of Pa., I, p. 227. Quoted C4, p. 75.
* These are from table 141, ** Levels above Tide,’’ N., p. 158, but by my
observations by barometer are about 50’ too low.
236 _ PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
About three miles west of the Mendenhall quarry, and about
1.25 miles nearly east of Kennett Square, is the Sharpless quarry.
The greater part of this quarry, which has yielded a large amount
of limestone, is under water, so that a measurement could be
had at one point only, giving E. 10°; .3 mile northwest, a sandy
feldspathic mica schist dips S. 25° E. 25°, while a half-mile
northeast there is a decomposed very sandy schist, with feldspathic
and quartzite layers and rhombic fracture very closely resembling
the typical Cambrian sandstone, dipping S. 10° W. 30° or
toward the limestone. From this vicinity westward the same
sandstone appears to bound the valley on the north wherever the
rock is well exposed as far as West Grove,” except for a
short distance near Avondale where a gneissoid mica schist,
containing garnets and tourmaline, forms the north hill, known in
a large part of its course as the Toughkenamon hill. This rock
seems to underlie the sandy schist and to form the greater part of
this hill. It is fire-resisting and has been much used for lining
limekilns and is called, locally, firestone.
The southerly hill, for about four miles at least, contains a very
hard compact hornblende gneiss with nearly vertical dips, not
improbably an altered intrusive rock. Near it are indications of
mica schist, but no clear outcrops, the hornblende rock being the
chief rock visible, but, except southeast of Kennett Square, it
appears in large loose masses only.
One mile west of Kennett Square Station, and just east of the
western line of New London township, close to the right bank of
the west branch of Red Clay creek, is Joseph A. McFarlan’s
quarry. This is of large size and is wrought at present in a small
way for building stone. A spring of considerable volume rises in
the quarry. The rock is a pale blue and white limestone, very
compact. Two dips about 600 feet apart were S. 20°. North of
the quarry are no exposures, to the south = 700 feet there is a
hill of some fifty feet in height of mica schist and schistose gneiss,
striking north to N. 30° E. and dipping about 70° W. to N. 60°
W., or toward the limestone.
Half a mile a little north of west of McFarlan’s quarry was
one on the west branch of Red Clay creek, north of the railroad.
% That is, if the valley in which is West Grove be the continuation of that
under consideration. This will be further discussed.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 237
It is wholly overgrown. A quarter of a mile nearly west of this
is a quarry on the State road, showing a jointed very sandy mica
schist, dipping S. 33° E. 35°. This is.2 mile northeast of Tough-
kenamon Station. On the Newark road, about .2 mile north of
Toughkenamon, similar schists are exposed near the schoolhouse,
dipping nearly 0° at the north part of the exposure then steep north-
erly, while toward the south they dip = 70° +8. 45° E,
About .6 mile, a little south of west of Toughkenamon, was the
Roberts’ limestone quarry, now of Mr. Sharpless. The dip in
this is S. 83° E, 35°.
Three-quarters of a mile west of this quarry is Avondale, and
the apparent ending topographically of the valley which we have
followed from the Brandywmme. Here the high northern hill is
cut by White Clay creek, of which the two northerly branches, one
flowing nearly south, the other southeast, unite in this gap.
Nearly in line with the quarries mentioned and about two
hundred yards south-southwest of Avondale Station is a quarry,
now full of water, but with the limestone walls still in evidence.
This quarry is the most interesting of the region if, as seems prob-
able, it is that in which Dr. Frazer found, adjoining the limestone,
the sandstone containing Scolithus.”
This is the westernmost quarry certainly of this series. A little
more than a mile to the north is the Street road line of quarries;
hence the two are closer than at the Brandywine. Between the
two and to the westward are a number of limestone outcrops
briefly referred to before, but worthy of detailed description.
They, and the western part of the Street road line and the Watson
& Jones’ quarry, are within a parallelogram less than two miles
from north to south and three miles from east to west, with Avon-
dale in the southeast and West Grove in the southwest corner.
From Avondale radiate three prominent hills of mica schist and
gneiss:
1. Eastward the Toughkenamon hill, practically continuous to
the Brandywine.
% C1 p. 333 and p. 324. The quarry is on the land of Watson & Jones,
but is not far from the John Williamson property, and is on the road lead-
ing south. At present no sandstone is visible. The limestone dips nearly
west about 30°. Northeast of it and within 30’ is a hard gneiss dipping
with and under the limestone. Dr. Frazer’s dips for the sandstone were
“W. 290° N., W. 10° N. to W. 10° S. with a dip of about 289,’’ and for the
limestone ‘‘ W. 10° N. 40°.”’
238 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
2. Westward a hill of mica schist, gneiss and pegmatite convex
to the north, bounded northward by the westerly branch of the
east branch of White Clay creek.
3. Northwestward the hill on which much of Avondale is built,
and along which the Gap and Newport pike runs.
The eastern line of the parallelogram is nearly the eastern
line of New London township, and is occupied by the rather flat
nearly north-and-south valley of the northerly branch of the east
branch of White Clay creek. In this valley, and near the creek,
are outcrops seemingly connecting the Street road and Kennett
series. To the north is the Benjamin Swayne quarry of the
Street road series, 8. 35° E. 15° to 40°, and half a mile south of
it, on the bank of the creek, an outcrop 8S. 50° E. 30°, the
former just north of the northwest corner of New Garden town-
ship. A quarter of a mile further south is the quarry of Joseph
Quarll, in which the limestone dips nearly S. + 15° on the south
side, nearly 0° on the north side, and N. + 10° on the west side;
no adjacent rock is visible. A half-mile south-southeast are three
quarries close together, the northerly one wrought chiefly for a
lime sand, or highly crystalline limestone or marble altered by
partial decomposition, by which the cohesion of the grains has been
destroyed. This sand is used largely by florists for propagating
purposes, and is said to be superior for that use. Some of the
limestone under the sand is highly crystalline and pure white, a
true marble. It is wrought by Michael Murphy. The dip is
about S. 20° E. 20° About 200 feet south of this is Watson’s
quarry, a very impure limestone in large solid blocks, used, I
was informed, for building purposes, and not for lime. The only
exposures are on the south side, due S. 40° and S. 20° E. 25°,
8. 65° E. 10°. As before, high hills, apparently wholly of mica
schist and gneiss, are to the east and west. Seven-tenths mile
south-southeast of this, mica schist and gneiss dipping S. 30° E.
15° to 50° intervening, we have the limestone of the quarry on
property of Watson & Jones, seemingly of the Kennett series,
already mentioned. As already stated, all these six outcrops are
in a line almost due north and south, and within the space of a
little over one mile.
To the westward and near the north line of our parallelogram
are the quarries, already described, of the Avondale Marble Co.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 239
and of Reuben Barnard. South of the latter is a high hill of
garnetiferous mica schist, south of which are two quarries, both
known as Storey’s, one on each side of the road leading north from
West Grove to Barnard’s quarry. They lie in a small east-and-
west valley on an affluent of the west branch of the East Branch
of White Clay creek. The eastern is quite small; it shows a
dip of N. 45° W. 65°. The western, though larger, is but a
small quarry compared with most of those of the region; it shows,
however, a distinct anticlinal structure, dipping on the southeast
side S. 30° E. 30°, at the west end about the same, and on the
northwest side N. 60° W. 65° within twenty feet of the moderate
southeast dip, the intervening space being concealed by talus.
On the northerly side a‘smal] spring issues from the limestone,
the water bearing with it at the time of my visits a continuous
stream of lime sand.
North of the Storey quarries and separating them from the
Barnard quarry, the westernmost of the Street road line, is the
hill of mica schist above mentioned, somewhat garnetiferous, on
the north slope of which, near the foot, is an insignificant outcrop
of the sandstone, loose fragments only, but apparently in place.
The mica schist is decomposed at the surface, and I was unable to
find any satisfactory dips. Dr. Frazer, however, writes of this
hill as one ‘‘ in which the chloritic mica schists lie almost flat, or
with very small angles of dip. These schists seem to be similar
to those in and below the South Valley Hill... .. Without
some change of structure which surface indications offer no right to
suppose, there is here a limestone synclinal holding a hill of
chloritic mica schists.
‘¢On the south side of the West Grove quarry” the dip is S. 30°
E. 30°, showing that it has been opened on an anticlinal which is,
however, of very insignificant breadth as the sand rock (Potsdam)
eurves in a few hundred yards below it with a dip of W. 10° N.,
raising the calcareous beds beyond our present surface.’’**
It is much to be regretted that the outcrops here are so few and
poor. Dr. Frazer’s interpretation may be correct, but the small
outcrop of the sandstone on the Chatham road southeast of Lewis
Barnard’s quarry and the gentle southeast dipping outcrops to the
% Probably the westerly Storey quarry.
iO, ip: 3S2.
240 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
southeast of the Storey quarry are difficulties. The decomposing
garnetiferous mica schists of the hill between Barnard’s and Storey’s
do not appear to me to resemble in the slightest degree the hydromica
schists of the South Valley Hill, but more to resemble the mica
schists lying to the southward of the hydromica, and clearly over-
lying the limestone of the Poorhouse quarry and of the quarries
on the right bank of the East Branch of White Clay creek. The
westerly Storey quarry certainly exhibits an anticlinal structure,
as Dr. Frazer observes, ‘‘ of insignificant breadth.’’ The dip of
the sandstone W. 10° N. I did not observe. About .3 mile south-
east of the quarry there is a quarry in the sandstone giving an
excellent exposure and a dip of §S. 50° E..20°. A quarry in
similar rock but harder .25 mile to the eastward dips S. 35° E.
30°. The sandstone forms a hill about a hundred feet in height
between the Storey quarries and the very extensive quarries of the
Avondale Lime and Stone Co., formeriy Hughes quarries, on the
right bank of the East Brauch of White Clay creek, about a mile
west-northwest of Avondale and about a mile east of the Storey
quarries. Here the limestone has a varying but very gentle south-
erly dip, probably averaging S. 10° to 20°, and is overlaid by
garnetiferous mica schists conformably. The rock is highly erys-
talline with interstratified beds of mica schist. It has been
wrought to a depth of over one hundred feet.
Although the limestone of this quarry seems to have throughout a
regular very gentle southerly dip, evidence of peculiar folding is seen,
as shown in the annexed photograph taken by Mr. George Vaux,
Jr., a view of a small part of the south wall of the quarry. Here,
although the stratum has nearly horizontal surfaces on this sec-
tion, there is a complete fold within the stratum which was about
three feet in width.
In this quarry is a stratum which contains masses of quartz of
lenticular form, as if flattened pebbles. These have a coating of
damourite, and have sharply defined parallel partings, also coated
with damourite. A variety of this quartz was uncovered in 1897,
partially filling what had evidently been a crevice dipping south-
wardly about 45°. The aspect of the quartz was exactly as if it
had been a viscid substance like asphalt, flowing over an edge
down a slope, forming masses like flattened stalactites, joined at
the top only. They were a foot and less in length, about a half-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 241
inch thick at the thickest part, and from an inch to three or four
inches wide, all tapering downwards. All had a thin coating of
damourite except at the top.
Fic. 2.—Fold in Limestone Quarry, one mile W. N. W. of Avondale.
On both sides of the Hughes quarries are outcrops of coarse
pegmatite, that to the eastward being in contact with the limestone
striking nearly northeast and southwest ; just north of it schists
dip S. 40° E. 63°; that to the westward is less than .1 mile dis-
tant from the westernmost quarry, and strikes N. 30° E. The
northerly hill, which the Gap aud Newport pike ascends north-
west from Avondale, is of garnetiferous mica schist, in part at
least. Southwest of this on this line no sandstone has been ob-
served, but the valley continues.
Prof. Rogers construed these limestones as forks of the Street
road line, seeing it divide westward into ‘‘ three subordinate nar-
16
242 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
rower valleys, all of them containing limestone more or less - con-
tinuously, and all of them ending westward in the vicinity of
West Grove Friends’ Meeting-house.’’*
While this may be the structure, including in the northerly sub-
ordinate valley the marble quarry and Barnard’s, in the middle
Quarll’s and Storey’s, and in the southerly the Avondale Lime
and Stone Co.’s, it cannot include the quarries south of Quarll’s.
Moreover, as we have north of the Street road line a wide and
persistent outcrop of the Cambrian sandstone, we should find
more of it to the south than the small outcrops south of Barnard’s
and southeast of the Storey quarries.
IX. Tue Limestone or Nevins’ QUARRIES.
The southern portion of New Garden township, Chester
county, is a triangle, bounded eastwardly by the curved portion of
Mason and Dixon’s line (twelve miles from New Castle as a cen-
tre). Here and to the westward, in London Britain township, we
find the most southerly Chester county outcrops of limestone,
ranging in a general east-northeast and west-southwest direction
in Broad Valley drained by Broad run, an affluent of White Clay
creek. There are four quarries in Pennsylvania and one in Dela-
ware. ‘The latter is Jackson’s quarry, near Hockessin Station on
the Delaware & Western Railroad, near extensive kaolin mines.
It is a highly crystalline limestone, but now shows nothing of the
adjacent rocks.*”
East-northeast of this limestone, among the schists and gneisses
of southwestern Delaware county, in Birmingham township, is a
single outcrop of limestone mentioned by Mr. Hall, though rep-
resented on his map as serpentine. It was known as Bullock’s
quarry and, as I am informed by Mr. T. E. Bullock, was wrought
by his grandfather; Thomas H. Bullock, fifty or sixty years ago
and burned into lime on the spot. Kaolin was afterwards mined
close to it and the outcrop obliterated. It is one mile west-north-
west of Elam, about two miles from the Brandywine and one and
® First Geol. Survey, I, p. 226. Quoted C*, p. 74.
10 “The magnesian marble which outcrops . . . . at Nevin’s runs into
Delaware, and appears at the surface in the Jackson quarry at Hockessin.
Here the rock forms a clearly defined anticlinal fold; . . . . the limestone is
overlaid by the mica schists.’’ F. D. Chester, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1884,
p. 248.
Wl CS, p. 47.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 243.
three-quarters from the Delaware line. It does not fall in line
with any of the nearby outcrops, being south of the Kennett line
and of the outcrops near Brinton’s bridge. About two miles
nearly west of Jackson’s quarry, near Broad Run Station, is the
quarry of David M. Brown, with a dip S. 60° E. 25°, with some
gentle waves.
About a mile and a half west of the Brown quarry limestone
outcrops in the road, and a little west of this, east of the East
Branch of White Clay creek, an affluent of the Christiana, is the
David Nevin’s quarry, or Septimus Nevin’s, showing a dip on the
south and west sides quite regular S. 25° E. 25°, while on the
northwest side the exposure was poor, but dip apparently nearly
io 10° 8. E.
Of this quarry Prof. Rogers wrote as follows, these quarries then
being in active operation: ‘‘ D. Nevin’s quarry, on the east side
of the East Branch of White Clay creek. The strata dip at a
gentle angle southeastward, and a low anticlinal undulation, or
saddle, lifts the talcose slates underlying the limestone to the bed
of the quarry..... The limestone is overlaid by the ordinary
very micaceous rock dipping on the south side of the quarry gently
south, and there is a dyke of granite at the south margin.’’!”
West-southwest of David Nevin’s is one of Edward Sharpless,
now showing no good exposures, and in the same direction about
three-quarters of a mile from the former are two closely adjacent
quarries of John Nevin; of these the easterly gives excellent ex-
posures. On the northwest side the dip is N. 50° W. 25° with
mica schist and gneiss overlying apparently conformably, on the
southeast side S. 50° E. 10°, on the northwest side at the northeast
end N. 60° W. 40°, becoming more gentle toward the middle to
0°, then débris conceals the following probably southeast dip.”
10 Geol. Survey of Pa., Vol. I, p. 225.
*5 Of this quarry Prof. Rogers wrote: ‘‘ An anticlinal axis runs through
the quarry about N. 60° E. On the north side of this saddle the dip is
about 45° under a micaceous gneissic-looking rock. The dip on the south
side is to the south about 30°.”’ Vol. I, p. 225.
Of one of the quarries, but which one is not clear, Dr. Frazer writes : ‘‘ At
Nevin’s quarry the limestone dips W. 10° N. 10° to 20° in the middle
portion of the quarry and steep at the extremities, which, compared with the
southeasterly dip of the quarries iu New Garden and just within the north-
east border of London Britain (which latter is +S. + 20)’’ (probably
the David Nevin’s quarry—T. D. R.) ‘‘ compel one to regard the structure
here as an anticlinal of limestone though one of very gentle dips... . 4 A
244 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
I was able to find no rock closely adjacent to the limestone on
the southeast side; on the northwest the rock clearly is not the sand-
stone, but mica schist and gneiss. One dip on the Delaware &
Western Railroad (or Wilmington & Landenberg Railroad), nearly
a mile west of the Brown quarry and .2 mile northwest of lime-
stone exposed near the Nevin’s quarries, was S. 60° E. 30° to
60° in decomposing mica schists.
About three miles nearly south of the Nevin’s quarries and near
Peach’s kaolin mines, in New Castle county, Del., is a series of
large quarries, known as Eastburn’s, on the easterly slope of a
hill, two on the east and two on the west of the road to Newark,
Del. Unlike the Chester county outcrops, these four quarries are
nearly on the line of dip: two of them are quite extensive. The
limestone is much plicated. Overlying the southeast quarry on the
southeast side are fragments of mica schist and pegmatite. The
north wall of this quarry is a mica schist dipping N. 65° W. 65°,
but northwest of this and within 200 feet is the next quarry with
limestone dipping S. 40° to 50° E. 20°, with no rock exposed
except the limestone and schist fragments. No sandstone was
observed, except in indistinct fragments, one of which contained
rutile.
X. Ovrcrors In NORTHERN CHESTER COUNTY.
In northwestern Chester county we have successive outcrops of
the sandstone with adjacent beds of limestone, most of them very
clear, but one obscure and with resemblance to those south of the
valley. In the north is the great sandstone outcrop of the Weish
mountain, with the Lancaster Valley limestone northwest of it.
Going southward the limestone does not appear south of the sand-
stone, but a very hard gneiss, like the ancient gneiss, with dykes
of igneous rock. South of this is a valley with limestone near the
couRRERY, edge of Honeybrook somaenty followed by the pons
mass of quartz sand rock and quartzite Meee underlies sie limestone to
the southeast coming in from the State of Delaware.’ C‘, p. 327.
Dr. Frazer does not explain how this is possible in view of the anticlinal
structure and gentle southerly dips on the southerly side. On the map in
Ct an area of sandstone (Potsdam) is shown nearly surrounding these out-
crops. Prof. Chester, however, states that in the northwest part of Delaware
a coarse quartzose rock underlies highly crystalline magnesian marble which
must be referred to Potsdam and Caleiferous. F. D. ‘Chester, Proc. Acad.
Nat. Sct., 1884, p. 239.
1900.1] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 245
Baron ridge of the sandstone, extending unbroken from Lancaster
county to a point east of the East Branch of the Brandywine in
Wallace township. South of this, in the western part of West
Caln township, is the easterly end of the limestone of the Pequea
Valley. South of it is another prominent ridge of sandstone,
probably connected with that of the Baron ridge close to the Lan-
easter border, but giving place to gneiss in the valley of Birch
run. This ridge of sandstone, much smailer than that of the Baron
ridge, reaches but apparently does not cross the West Branch of
the Brandywine north of Wagontown, its easternmost outcrop being
on the Brubaker farm just north of a steatite outcrop, an old
Indian quarry. South of this is gneiss and then the sandstone of
the North Valley Hill. The sandstone, as usual, forms high
nearly straight ridges. Gneiss appears in the intermediate valleys.
Possibly there is limestone in these valleys, for that in the valley
in the south part of Honeybrook was exposed in one quarry only,
aud is now invisible.
There are outcrops of limestone in Chester county east of the
Brandywine, but none of any magnitude. ‘Thirty to fifty years
ago when lime was in demand for farming purposes, it was the
custom of farmers near limestone outcrops to have kilns of their
own. Wood was abundant, and in winter labor also. By this
means every outcrop was quarried, the hauling being one of the
most serious items of expense. All this being changed the quar-
ries have been abandoned, filled up and grown over and even forgot-
ten by the present generation. While this is true of outcrops in
many parts of Chester county, it is particularly true of those in
the section now under consideration, the outcrops having been
mostly in low ground and small in size. Nothing, therefore, can
be added to Prof. Rogers’ descriptions, made when most of the
outcrops were wrought. He describes ten in Charlestown, East
Pikeland, West Pikeland, East (West?) Vincent, South Coven-
try, Nantmeal, Warwick and Uwchlan townships. ™
In discussing the relation of these rocks it may be useful, first,
to sum up the facts that seem to be beyond question:
(1) The peculiar sandstone is below the limestone of the Ches-
ter Valley.
(2) Mica schists occur between the two.
10 Geol. Survey of Pa., I, p. 231. Quoted C*, p. 82.
246 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
(3) All the limestone outcrops south of the Chester Valley are
among schists and gneisses which appear to cover by far the greater
part of the area, the dips being almost invariably to the southeast
and not steep.
(4) Some of these schists are very sandy and not infrequently
include strata of the peculiar sandstone.
(5) Nearly every line of limestone outcrops has adjacent to it
outcrops of the sandstone, usually on the northwest side, with mica
schists usually intervening.
(6) At no locality (except one in the Doe Run Valley) do we
find, with satisfactory clearness, an orderly succession of rocks,
making an undoubted synclinal or anticlinal.
(7) At several of the localities south of the Chester Valley mica
schists, sometimes garnetiferous, overlie the limestone conformably
and clearly.
There is no lithological evidence of the identity of the limestone
of the different outcrops. The variation in this rock is so great
that even in the same quarry the most diverse characters may be
found. ‘The opposite, however, is true of the saudstone. It has
a very peculiar and well-marked character in its rhomboidal joint-
ings, its micaceous partings, and its stretched and broken tour-
malines. While it must be admitted that lithological evidence is
of little weight in determining the age of a rock, yet when the
lithological character is so well defined and when, in addition, the
close association with the limestone is marked, together with the
fact that the outcrops are not widely separated, the evidence of
identity of age is not weak. But if the sandstone is of one age, it
seems difficult to believe the limestone which seems to accompany
it so closely is not of the same age as that which overlies the sand-
stone of the North Valley Hill, unless, indeed, there is one lime-
stone just below and another just above the sandstone with mica
schists intervening. Of this the only evidence is Taylor’s quarry,
and that is very meagre. The sequence of rocks at nearly all the
localities would be satisfied by southeast dipping sandstone over-
laid by schists and they by limestone and it by schists, and this
longitudinally faulted, but as the succession is at least eight times
repeated such explanation is not satisfactory. Equally does a sue-
cession of anticlinals and synclinals fail, for surely we could not
Fy
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 247
then have so uniform gentle southeast dips and we should have a
more orderly succession.
A curious feature is the westerly ending of several of these Jines
in north-and-south limestone valleys—thus the Chester Valley in
the valley of Big Beaver creek; the Cream Valley-Poorhouse-
Embreeville-Guest line in the Doe Run Valley; the Street road
and the Kennett lines in the valley of the East Branch of White
Clay creek. Another feature is that in all these north-and-south
valleys the dip of the limestone is much less steep than that of the
other outcrops and of the adjacent schists. These taken alone
would indicate flat synclinals of which the axes rise westwardly.
When, however, we attempt. to fit any theory to the facts, we
find constantly one or more stubborn ones which block the path.
Taking the second and third series, those of Chester Valley and
of Cream Valley, the facts all agree perfectly with a synclinal
structure, both legs of the sandstone and limestone appearing with
the hydromica in the middle, the rock which is wholly sandstone
on the north being only partially so on the south and largely mica
schists, but with enough of the peculiar sandstone to identify it
clearly. However, when we trace westward what appear to be the
same strata we find the sandstone among similar schists to the
northwest of the limestone instead of to the southeast.” Again,
along and north of the Street road line the sandstone is very well
shown for a distance of eight miles nearly continuously, with first
schists and then schists and limestone overlying, but in Taylor’s
quarry in this series the sandstone appears interbedded in the
schists overlying the limestone. It is true that it is but eighteen
inches thick, and is visible in but one small quarry and is not
shown in a much larger one only about .3 mile south-southwest.
If Dr. Frazer’s conclusion is correct that the limestone of Bar-
nard’s and Storey’s quarries are opposing legs of a synclinal, the
hill of schists between overlying, then the hill to the south,
whether it be regarded as the continuation of the Toughkenamon
hill or as an independent ridge, must represent the London Grove
sandstone. Dr. Frazer’ gives a dip in the sandstone of W. 10°
N. (N. 80° W.), which would be in accord, but, as above stated,
there are quarries in this narrow hill giving excellent exposures
1% Poorhouse quarry ; Guest quarry.
MACs, p. 332.
248 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
with gentle dips to the southeast, according with the dips of the
limestone further southeast.
THe Hypromica Scaist.
For these schists I prefer to retain Prof. Dana’s name, although
not free from the objection that the mica is probably not more
hydrous than that of those known as mica schists. The term
tale-mica is certainly incorrect. In them I include only the soft
micaceous schists such as are everywhere to be seen on the northerly
slope of the South (Chester) Valley Hill.
This rock is composed of minute scales of mica, perhaps damour-
ite, with quartz. With rare exceptions it is soft and, on the
broader surfaces at least, unctuous to the touch. When almost
free from quartz, it forms a rock so ductile that the blow of a
hammer upon a mass will not break it, but simply indent it, or
if not too thick make a hole. Strata of this variety occur of
considerable thickness, but more commonly much quartz occurs
with it, usually in lenticular masses, the quartz more or less cellu-
lar and rusty, the surface of the quartz coated with closely adher-
ent mica. Rarely the quartz occurs in beds of one to three feet in
thickness. It forms the whole of the hill from its beginning near
Marble Hall, Montgomery county, to East Goshen township,
Chester county, except the comparatively small space occupied by
the Conshohocken trap dyke. As far west as Wayne the hill is
very well defined on its southern slope, as it is throughout its whole
extent (except at its extreme eastern end) on its northern. West
of Wayne no distinct valley separates it from the mica schists
which border it on the south and which here begin to widen out.
North of Radnor Station it is less than a thousand feet north of the
ancient gneiss, and at Wayne but little more, while twenty miles
to the westward, between the two branches of the Brandywine,
over two miles of mica schists, etc., intervene.” In occasional
17 In the Final Report it is stated : ‘‘ The South Valley Hill hydromica
schist belt from the Delaware-Chester county line west to the Brandywine
has a south border fairly defined by a straight range of serpentine outcrops
and limestone quarries.’? As more fully shown elsewhere, a triangle of
mica schist, with included gneiss, and carrying garnets, kyanite and stauro-
lite, intervenes. On the Delaware-Chester county line (Devon) no rock is
visible between the serpentine and the hydromica, but to the westward as
well as to the eastward the schists and gneisses intervene, increasing in
width westwardly to nearly three-quarters of a mile at the East Branch of
, ‘
:
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 249
beds there is a highly quartzose variety containing little mica, but
still enough to make it distinctly a schist.
These rocks are usually olive-green in color, weathering to yellow
and red, and rarely to purple tints.
A curious error in regard to these rocks has been remarkably
perpetuated. When Prof. Rogers wrote, they were known as
taleose schists, the distinction between tale and damourite, ete.,
being hardly recognized, but when that distinction was made clear
these rocks were shown to be not talcose at all, being destitute, or
nearly so, of magnesia.** Notwithstanding this they are termed
tale schists repeatedly in the volumes of the Second Geological Sur-
vey, and chloritic schists and chloritic mica schists by Dr. Frazer.’
The following analyses of true chlorite schists and of these
hydromica schists by Dr. Genth are instructive:
1. Talcose chlorite slate, Prince’s quarry, near Lafayette (Mont-
gomery county, Pa.). C*, 128.
2. Chlorite slate from the same. C*%, 130.
3. Chlorite mineral, Rose’s quarry. C*, 130.*°
4. Hydromica schist from road between Gulf Mill and Hitner’s
marble quarry. C’, 152.
5. Ferruginous hydromica schist between Gulf Mills and King
of Prussia. C*, 133.
6. ‘‘ Hydromica slate 1222 feet from Bird-in-Hand tavern on
road Gulf Mills to Bryn Mawr.’’ C*, 133. (This therefore is
from in the Gulf.—T. D. R.)
the Brandywine, where much of the rock is heavy-bedded and hard and very
different from the hydromica schists.
1088 Dr. Frazer, Am. Nat., Oct., 1883, p. 1021.
109 Cf p. 103; Journal Franklin Tat April, 1884, C*, pp. 284, 292, 297,
304, ete.
0 A serpentine quarry on the west bank of the Schuylkill just above
Lafayette.—T. D. R.
250 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
CHLORITE SCHIST. Hypromica Scuist.
1 yy 3 4 5 6
Loss by ignition, . 9.07 12.60 12.88 7.52 95.91 6.05
Silicic'acid, . . : 41.80 32.78 39.39 43.61 43.10) 35am
Titanic acid, . . nays 3.78 $8.28 12338
Phosphoric acid, . trace .15 trace 49
Alumina, «+ °..° . ! 10:39; 17.530 S07! 27.52 30:8603e—m
Ferrous oxide, ',. (2. 7.29. 33890 3:25". 4traee 9.
Ferric oxide, . . 1.31 4.69 13 1.26, 236
Magnesia, . . . 26.71 31.56 34.34 L.77 61.80" S28
ames ON ee ee grag trace 19
adales. WAH tars oe 27 56 -°.66 “ie
Pubashr puss). Sie 06 8.81 6.87 5.26
iba cnt ack abs trace
TN 0 ee ee eres ws 06
100. 99.68 99.62 101.39 99.76100.58
My observations lead me to the conclusion that throughout nearly
the whole of their course, from the Schuylkill on the east to far
beyond the Octorara on the west, there is not the slightest diffi-
culty in distinguishing the line between the hydromica and the
mica schist on the south of it, except that often the margin is
concealed by the decomposition of the rocks, as usuai in this region.
It is, however, quite as well defined as any of the margins except
those of the ancient gneiss and the serpentines.
In the mica schists which are south of the hydromica, tale schists
and probably chlorites do occur, as near Copeland Schoolhouse,
East Bradford township, Chester county, near Mortonville, and
on Buck and Doe run, near the Brandywine in East Fallowfield
township, but they are rare and always easy to be distinguished
In the northeast the hydromica schist belt first appears in the
Whitemarsh (otherwise Plymouth, otherwise Montgomery Valley,
the northeasterly continuation of the Chester Valley) not far from
Marble Hall. If continues to Conshohocken as a high hill,
bounded on all sides, except the southwest, by limestone, which in
its turn is bounded by Cambrian sandstone and it by the ancient
gneiss. At Conshohocken the Schuylkill flows through it and it
is well defined, extending from the Mattson’s Ford road to the
Gulf creek, bounded on both sides by limestone and intersected by
the Conshohocken diabase dyke.
One of the prominent features of this belt is its remarkable
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 251
widening west of the Schuylkill. From its beginning to the
Schuylkill it is about a thousand feet in breadth. It forms the hill
on which Conshohocken is built. West of the river it forms a
hill of about the same width and 300 feet to 400 feet high for a
mile and a half, where it is cut by the Gulf creek to a level of
about 150 feet. This creek, flowing eastwardly through the upper
part of Cream Valley and near the southerly edge of the hydro-
mica, here turns abruptly northward through a very steep-sided
gap known as ‘‘ The Gulf,’’ and then turning abruptly eastward
flows on, or very near, the northerly line of the hydromica into the
Schuylkill. The illustration of this gap was taken by Dr. Charles
Schiffer.
Fic. 3.—The Gulf.
A very little west of the line of this gap, two steep, nearly
parallel hills of hydromica appear rising out of the limestone plain
which bounds it on the north, and widen the belt at once to a mile
and a half. It would be interesting to know whether the floor of
the intermediate valleys is of limestone, but no rocks are visible in
the valleys, and I have been unable to find trustworthy dips except
252 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
in the southernmost hill. The strike is evidently nearly coinci-
dent with the trend of the hills = 8. 60° W. In the Gulf, at the
south entrance, near almost vertical limestone of Cream Valley,
the dip is N. 30° W. 70°, soon becoming 90° and then 8. 25°
E. 80° near the north entrance and the limestone of the Chester
Valley, making a synclinal if the rock is stratified and dips so
steep are trustworthy. This was Mr. Hall’s view, while Dr.
Frazer thought it anticlinal. The limestone in front of the pre-
montories dips S. 20° E. 70° to 90°, S. 30° E. 75°.™
About three miles west of the Schuylkill, the Radnor and King
of Prussia road crosses (N. 25° W.) nearly on the dip line. The
southerly of the two valleys ends a short distance east of this
road, the northerly a short distance west of it, the hills becoming
a tableland two miles broad with deep, precipitous gorges on its steep
north slope, and more gentle ones on its more moderate south slope,
but without a gap for nearly twenty miles. It is here 350 feet to
450 feet above tide.
From the road just mentioned for about a mile the schists still
form a hill distinct on the south as well as on the north, but in the
vicinity of Wayne the floor of Cream Valley—composed in great
part of the mica schists, here very full of garnets, some of large
size, with Cambrian sandstone and, probably (a mile east, cer-
tainly), limestone—rises to 570 feet, and the southerly portion of the
hydromica schists is no longer a prominent hill though it still
occupies the highest ground, attaining an elevation of over 500
feet above tide.
At Wayne exposures of the two series are close together, but the
rocks are entirely distinct one from the other. The hard garnet-
iferous schist in Fenimore’s quarry, north of St. David’s Station,
dips N. 34° W. 75°; the hydromica schist in the well of the
water-works east of the Radnor Street road, distant from the
quarry .38 mile N. 40° W., dips S. 25° to 30° E. = 70°. Both
11 The Schuylkill Valley Raslvond cuts soe Conshohocken hill east of the
Schuylkill, ‘The hill is apparently wholly of hydromica (except the diabase
dyke), yet in this excavation, at the railroad level, immediately northwest
ot the dyke, was abundant limestone, nearly vertical, apparently underly-
ing decomposed hydromica schist, also nearly vertical. Directly across the
river the strike of the hydromica (N. 60° E.), of the limestone (N. 62° E.),
and of the trap dyke (N. 65 E.) being approximately the same, and the dis-
tance about 1,000 feet, the dyke is separated from the limestone on each side
by abont 500 feet of hydromica.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 253
these exposures are excellent. The two rocks may be seen between
the above exposures within 500 feet of each other, and in the
branches of Gulf creek, the mica schist with a rock much resem-
bling the Cambrian sandstone striking N. 70° E., dip uncertain
but steep; the hydromica with a dip 60° to 80°S. 30° E. with
iron ore and sink-holes adjacent.
Just west of Wayne, the Pennsylvania Railroad crosses Cream
Valley by an embankment, at the foot of which the garnetiferous
mica schist may be seen, and enters a cut showing abundant frag-
ments of a gneissic rock (probably the Altered Primal of Rogers), the
diabase of the Conshohocken dyke, and the typical Cambrian sand-
stone. The latter was abundant when the cut was made, but it is
now hard tofind. It was exposed also in an older cut to the eastward
through which the railroad formerly ran. At the Eagle road,
about a thousand feet northwest of Wayne Station, but immedi-
ately northwest of the cut just mentioned, the railroad enters the
hydromica, in which it continues over ten miles, the grade rising
from 405 feet at Wayne to 546 feet at Malvern with summits
probably 50 feet to 75 feet higher. At Frazer the summit of the
hill is 560 feet; the railroad has descended to 490 feet, and is near
the northerly foot of the hill, limestone appearing on the north
within one or two hundred yards. Here the West Chester branch
diverges southward, climbs the hill to a height of 584 feet, and
crosses it to the ancient gneiss which underlies West Chester. The
cuts of the Pennsylvania Railroad from Wayne westward afford
abundant exposures. The rock is quite uniform; the following
dips were obtained: Just below Valley Forge road (near Devon),
strike N. 70° E. 90°; 200 feet west, N. 12° W. 87°; east of
Devon Station, S. 5° E. 75°; half a mile above, S. 30° E. 85°;
200 feet above the Jast, S. 25° E. 85°.
At the northwest end of this cut there is for about a hundred
feet the unusual dip of N. 45° W. 65°, followed by a small valley
and another cut, strike N. 60° E. 90°; toward the west end of
this cut N. 50° W. 60°, being almost a repetition of the former.
Just below Berwyn Station, strike N. 45° E. 90°, just above
strike N. 50° E. + 90°.
Along the north foot of the hill the dips are usually 8. E. 60°
and upwards, agreeing closely with those of the limestone—e. g.,
southwest of Howellville, Chester county, S. 25° E. 60°; north
254 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
of Paoli, 8. 35° E.75° to 90°; Frazer, §. 10° E. 65°, S. 25° BE
60°, S. 35° E. 65°; south of Glenloch, S. 30° E. 60° to 90°, S.
25° E. 70° to 80°.
The exposures along the West Chester branch present no special
features. The border line between the mica schists and the
hydromica is not distinct; the latter east and west of Kirkland
Station strikes N. 60° to 75° E. 90°, but a half-mile north of
Green Hill Station the mica schists are well exposed close to a small
branch of Taylor’s or Black Horse run. They dip quite regularly
S. 23° E. 60°. The same rock forms bold bluffs further west
along Broad run,’ a small branch of Valley creek. The hydro-
mica is not well exposed in this vicinity, but its border is probably
but a little north of the southerly line ‘of West Whiteland town-
ship, so that the hydromica has diminished in width to a mile and a
half or less.
About a mile and a half further west Valley creek affords a
good section, as does also the East Branch of the Brandywine
one to two miles beyond (the two converging). On the former
the hydromica may be seen with a vertical dip about three-quar-
ters of a mile south of the Pennsylvania Railroad, while at and
above McMinn’s (now Grubb’s) mill the mica schist dips S. 30°
E. 60° and 8. 25° E. 45°. On the East Branch the latter is very
12 Tf may prevent confusion to state that there are at least three Broad
runs in Chester county, the northernmost a small creek rising near Kirkland
Station on the railroad from Frazer to West Chester and flowing nearly west
into Valley creek (C', p. 9); the next a considerable stream rising in the
hydromica schists south of Gallagherville and flowing southeast in a course
which for four miles is remarkable for its parallelism to the general course of
the Brandywine, from which in the four miles it is but little over one mile
distant. This course is curved first eastward, then southeastward, the last
being nearly the dip. This isthe Boardley run of C‘, pp. 40, 70. The south-
ernmost is in the southerly part of New Garden township, close to and nearly
parallel with the Delaware State line.
‘* Extensive exposures of limestone occur along the northern edge of New
Garden township in the banks of Broad run’’ (C‘, p. 59). If this is
correct there is a fourth Broad run.
Valley creek is but little more definite, as two of the name head in the
Chester Valley on the east and west sides of the divide which crosses the
valley near Glenloch in the western part of East Whiteland township, the
easterly flowing east and then north through the Valley Forge Gap to the
Schuylkill, the westerly flowing west and then south into the East Branch
of the Brandywine. It is this into which the Broad run referred to in the
text flows.
Besides these there is Valley run, rising south of Caln Meeting-house,
flowing eastward through the Chester Valley and through Beaver creek into
the East Branch of the Brandywine.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 255
boldly exposed close to Hawley’s mill, S. 35 E. 45°, S. 40° E.
40°, S. 40° E. 65°, S. 70° E. 25°; while within 500 feet to the
northwest the hydromica, striking about N. 50° E., dips vertically.
About a quarter of a mile above Hawley’s mill and one mile
above Valley creek, there is a small quarry in very quartzose
hydromica on the right bank. The bedding is unusually regular.
The rock contains small cubes of pyrite. Its strike is N. 50° E.,
dip 85° to 90° S. E.
About a mile above this, on the left bank, close to where the
road to the east part of Downingtown crosses the creek, is a green
hydromica schist N. 75° E., 85° to 90° N. W. This is close to
the northwest corner of East Bradford township.
About three-quarters of a mile 8S. 30° W. of Hawley’s mill, on
the farm of Wilson Young, is a quarry in which the schist resem-
bles more closely the mica schist than the hydromica, but with a
dip of 90°, strike N. 45° E. About 500 feet south of this is an
outcrop of dolomite colored green, probably by tale.
About three miles west of the East Branch, along Broad run,
and about one and three-quarter miles south of Thorndale, is a
high bluff of hydromica schist dipping S. 40° E. 70°. West of
this is a distinct but small anticlinal in the hydromica from N. 40°
W. 75° to S. 28° E. 55°, while a quarter of a mile north the
strike is N. 60° E., the dip 90°. One mile south the mica schists,
here heavy-bedded and hard, dip nearly S. + 15°.
The localities mentioned in the last two paragraphs indicate that
the usual nearly vertical dip of the hydromica and the Jow dip of
the mica schists are not without exception.
On the West Branch of the Brandywine the hydromica schists
may be seen well exposed south of Coatesville to bevond Modena
on the northeast bank, dipping S. 25° E. 60°, S. 10° E. 58°,
eeeaoe iH, 45°) 8. 20° HE: 150°, 8. 80° BH. 55°, S. 20° E. 45°,
S. 45°, below which are the mica schists. The mica schists occupy
the southwest bank from northwest of Modena southeastward,
with dips 8. 10° BE. 55°, 8. 35° E. 10° to 20°, S. 10° W. 20°,
eee) 50", 8. 35° W. 20°, 8. 80° Ws 30°, 8. 40° W. 20°.
No definite structure could be made from these very irregular dips.
On the highland between lines south of Coatesville and of Pome-
roy no trustworthy dips in the hydromica were obtained. The
mica schist, however, is exposed, especially along the Strasburg
256 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
road, and here seems to dip S. = 45° E.+ 50° with much uni-
formity (one dip, however, was S. 10° E. 55°), but on the road
from the Strasburg road to Modena, at a half-mile west of the
former, S. 35° E. 10° to 20°; at five-eighths, S. 10° W. 20°; at
three-quarters, S. 20° E. 50°.
The next gap is made by Buck run flowing south from Pome-
roy. Here the line is near Newlin Station, north of Garrett’s mill.
At the mill the mica schists form a precipitous hijl and dip S. 20°
E. 35°. South of Newlin Station they are S. 50° to 60° E. 20°,
one-quarter mile above S. 40° E. 45° onthe right bank, S. 25° E.
35° on the left bank near the railroad bridge. On the same side,
one-eighth mile above the grist mill near Newlin Station, convoluted
mica schist dips S. 40° E. 60°. A quarter of a mile above the
dip of S. 25° E. 35° near the railroad bridge, above (northwest
of)"Newlin, the hydromica appears dipping 8. 50° E. 80° ; a mile
further northwest S. 45° E. 85°, then a half-mile from Pomeroy
and not far from the limestone S. 35° E. 60°, S. 30° E. 50°,
beyond which the limestone dips S. 20° E. 60°, S. 25° E. 60°.
West of Buck run exposures near the border are few and poor.
One in the mica schist on Fawn run is S. 50° E. 30°; near
Gum Tree N. 55° W. 35°. North of this, on the Highland
road, hydromica schist, here unusually full of altered pyrite, is
abundant. In West Fallowfield, near Hudson’s grist mill on
Officer’s run, hydromica schist dips S. 45° E, 45° to 90°, but
further west near Steeleville, on the Octorara, the rock fragments
are of mica schist.
In Lancaster county the division line appears to be near Chest-
nut Level, where mica shists dip S. E. 30° to 40°, also near Fern-
Glen Post-office, 8. 35° E. 40°. On the Susquehanna, above and
below Phyt’s eddy, very compact heavy-bedded mica schists, dipping
S. 30° to 35° E. 40° to 55°, make high cliffs.
If the distinction between the mica schists and the hydromica is
a valid one, it is of no little importance to a proper comprehension
of the geology of the region. The distinctions which I would
draw may be summed as follows:
Mica Scuists. Hypbromica ScuHists.
Structure comparatively coarse. Structure very fine.
Quartz visibly intermixed and Visible quartz in lenticular
especially interlaminated. masses, very rarely interlami-
nated.
:
E
*
J
é
¥
.
|
we
?
ig
1900.1 NATURAL SCIENCES
Mica Scuists.
Feel rough and harsh.
Lamination often curved and
twisted.
Quarries into large blocks with
parallel bedding or cleavage
planes and roughly rectangu-
lar sides. Makes a fair
rough building stone.'*
Dips usually southeast and gen-
erally less than 40°.
Feldspar often present macro-
scopically.
Garnets often abundant. Pyrites
very rare, disseminated.
OF PHILADELPHIA. Hay
Hypromica ScHIsTs.
Fee] smooth and unctuous.
Lamination smooth and regular
(sometimes waved), except
around the lenticular quartz,
whose curves it follows.
The quartzose variety quarries
into comparatively small
pieces with more or less round-
ed surfaces. Almost worth-
less as a building stone. That
free from visible quartz breaks
into thin plates, is very soft
and of almost no value.
Dips usually 70° and upwards,
except on the northern edge
adjacent to the limestone and
except in its western part.
Feldspar rare and found in mi-
nute particles only and kaolin-
ized.
No garnets detected. Pyrites
in some portions, abundant in
cubes altered in great part to
limonite. The quartz full of
cavities containing ferric
oxide.
~ The dip is the most distinct feature, except in the Coatesville-
Modena section and westward. Dr. Frazer seems to have noticed
the difference of dip, but to have regarded it as of little significance.
On page 287, describing Willistown, he says: ‘‘ The northern
part of the township is filled with broad conchoidal mica schist
containing much chlorite and milk quartz; . . . . dips vertical or
nearly so.’’ He then gives two dips N. 20° W. 80°, S. 15° E.
85°. ‘* On the State road near George Hoskins, S. 35° E. 62°.”’
This last is inthe southerly part, in what I think the true mica
schists, and illustrates the change of dip.
Describing East Bradford he gives dips apparently going south-
ward: ‘‘ Strike of these schists is N. 30° E. and the dip vertical.
At the mouth of Valley creek the same rocks dip S. 20° E. 40°
118 The bridge which carries the Strasburg road over the West Branch of the
Brandywine was built about 1820 of this stone, quarried in the vicinity, and
is surpassed by very few road bridges in Pennsylvania. It has five arches.
4 Tn my judgment the rocks having these diverse dips are equally diverse
iz
258 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
(Ct, p. 292). . . . . In all cases above mentioned the rocks are
chloritic in character.’’ ‘‘ On the eastern side of the township
the character of the rocks is not chloritic, though there can be no
doubt of the stratigraphical continuity of the beds ’’* (C*, p. 293).
Describing West Bradford (pages 295, 296), the same change
of dip may be noticed: ‘‘ 85°, 70°, 80°, vertical, 72°, vertical, a
little further) south... ......S. -20° 3, .40°,..5. 402,53 2048
45°.’ «* There can be Jittle doubt that in these dips we have an
anticlinal between the limestone valley of Chester (and the vertical
dips immediately south of it) and the limestone belt here with the
moderate southeast dips in the same schists just north of it.’’.
My view would be nonconformity and that the schists are not
of the same age. The Schuylkill section may prove instructive in
this connection, comparing the east side with the west, the inter-
vening distance being about a mile and a half for 3, half a mile
for 4, and about a thousand feet for the others.’
East SIDE. West SIpeE.
S.E. 1. Ancient gneiss. 1. Ancient gneiss.
2. Rogers’ Altered Primal. 2. Rogers’ Altered Primal.
3. Cambrian sandstone, al- 3. Mica schist, in or northwest
most undoubtedly continuous of which occurs (to the
through Barren Hill and Wil- westward ) Cambrian sand-
low Grove with 7. stone.
4. Limestone, almost cer- 4. Limestone, mica schist.
tainly continuous north of Mar-
ble Hall and Barren Hill with 6.
5. Hydromiea schist. 5. Hydromiea schist.
6. Limestone of the Ches- 6. Limestone of the Chester
ter Valley. Valley.
Cambrian sandstone.
74. To the westward schistose
and gneissoid rocks.
8. Ancient gneiss. 8. Ancient gneiss.
64. To the westward mica schist.
7. Cambrian sandstone. 4
in their character, as elsewhere described and nowhere better to be seen than
here, the northerly steep dipping being soft, almost ductile, the southerly,
gently dipping, being hard harsh quartzose schist.
115 Tt is to be regretted that Dr. Frazer has not more fully described these
chloritic rocks. Among the hydro-mica schists I have seen no chlorites, and
yet if I understand him aright, it is in the hydromica schist area that he
found them abundantly. Dr. Frazer was one of the first, if not the very
first, to call attention to the misnomer of the ‘‘ tale schists ’’ (Am. Vatural-
ist, Oct., 1883) for rocks containing no magnesia.
6 Except that 7 and 8 are concealed on the Schuylkill by the Red Sand-
stone, but outcrop both northeast and southwest.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 259
All observed facts seem to agree with the hydromica schists
lying in a synelinal (perhaps not simple) over the limestone, and
may be recapitulated as follows:
First.—The limestone of the Chester Valley may be followed
northeastward around the end of the hydromica and thence south-
westward into Cream Valley.
Second.—The limestone in its turn is surrounded, except on the
west, by Cambrian sandstone and that by the ancient gneiss.
Third.—The two northwesterly hills of hydromica strike into a
limestone valley with nearly vertical dips, the limestone having
similar strike and dip. No explanation seems possible but that
the two were closely folded together, the hydromica overlying.
Fourth. —As already stated, limestone was exposed north of the
trap dyke in Conshohocken in the nose of the hydromica schist
hill, about twenty feet below the surface.
In considering the limestones, I have mentioned the fact that
these hydromica schists bound the valley in Lancaster as they do
in Chester county, and that west of Quarryville they seem to
extend northward and the limestone to dip under them.
THe Scuists AND GNEISSES.
Excluding the Ancient Gneiss and the Hydromica Schist.
For convenience of detailed description the schists and gneisses
may be subdivided as follows from the ancient gneiss as a start-
ing-point, the first, and perhaps the third, occurring on both sides,
the others on the southeast only:
1. Rogers’ Altered Primal.
2. The Spangled Schists.
3. The Chestnut Hill Schists, including the highly garnetiferous
schists and the sandy schists (whetstone schists). Prof.
Rogers’ second belt.
4, The harder, more plicated schists and gneisses to the eastward
of the last. These may again be divided into:
A, Manayunk schists.
B. Porphyritic gneiss.
C. The more feldspathic schists and gneisses with much
hornblende schist and gneiss, including the Fair-
mount-Leiperville-Chester gneiss.
D. The Frankford gneiss.
5. The schists between the North Chester Valley Hill sandstone
and the limestone.
6. The schists, gneisses, ete., north of that sandstone.
260 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
The whole series of these rocks between the ancient gneiss of
the Buck Ridge and its continuation southwestward, and the
Delaware river from Trenton, N. J., to the southerly line of
Pennsylvania, and, in western Chester county, over the whole
area from the hydromica schists of the South Valley Hill south-
ward, have been termed by Prof. Lesley, following Prof. Rogers,
‘¢ The Newer Gneiss of the Philadelphia Belt.’’"
He regards them as belonging all to one system of sedimentary
rocks, the oldest on the southeastern edge (Gray’s Ferry), and as
being the remnants of a mountain range of which the mica schists
of LaFayette, on the Schuylkill, formed summits of ten thousand
or fifteen thousand feet in height.”*
In saying ‘‘ The Newer Gneiss seems to occupy the whole field
south of the belt of South Valley Hill hydromica slate in Chester
. county,’’ I presume Prof. Lesley did not iniend to include
the ancient gneiss area, over three miles wide in the eastern part of
the county and running to a point west of Northbrook, about half-
way to the Lancaster county line, the continuation of Buck Ridge.
On the Schuylkill section these rocks were divided by Prof.
Rogers into his first and second groups, by Mr. Hall into three,
his second, the Manayunk schists and gneisses, including part of
Rogers’ first, and perhaps part of his second. Mr. Hall’s name
is convenient to distinguish the schists and gneisses which cover
the greater part of the area, and which are so well and typically
exposed at and near Manayunk. *®
The differing views of geologists as to these schists and gneisses
have been given, but the researches of Dr. George H. Williams **
and of Mr. Frederick D. Chester’ and Mr. C. B. Keyes™ in the
region to the south have thrown much light on the rocks in the
adjacent Pennsylvania region.
17 Final Report, pp. 118, 128; First Geol. Survey of Pa., I, p. 64.
8 7 bid., I, pp. 118, 119.
9 These divisions, while serving a useful purpose in discussing the region,
must not be regarded as typifying wholly distinct series of rocks, for in
most of them strata may be found closely resembling the typical rocks of
some of the others. Over large areas, however, the type rocks are very
much more abundant than any other kind.
20 The gabbros and associated hornbleude rocks occurring in the neigh-
borhood of Baltimore, Md. (Bul. U. S. Geol. Survey, No. 28).
121 The gabbros and associated rocks in Delaware (Bul. U. S. Geol. Sur-
vey, No. 59; Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1884, p. 248).
12 Bul. Geol. Soc. Amer., 1891, Vol. II, p. 309, ete.
——————
Ce oe
~
ST er h.o qe Te
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 261
The studies of these geologists seem to establish the fact beyond
question that in those areas igneous rocks have by dynamic meta-
morphism become more and more changed, chiefly by the well-
recognized alteration of pyroxene into hornblende, and the deyel-
opment of a distinctly foliated character into what are known in
the Philadelphia belt as hornblende schists and gneisses.
With this introduction it will be best to consider first the rocks
nearest the ancient gneiss, then the limited areas of the porphyritic
gneiss and the Fairmount and Frankford gneisses, leaving to the
Jast the very large area outside of those mentioned.
It should also be noted that in this region it is impracticable, in
the present state of our knowledge, to use the terms gneiss and
schist in their strict petrographic sense. While there are true and
typical schists, and equally characteristic gneisses, yet these pass
the one into the other by insensible gradations. The terms there-
fore will be used more in a general than in a strict petrographic
* sense.
I. Rogers’ ALTERED PRIMAL.
The typical rock is thus described by Prof. Rogers: ‘‘ Meta-
- morphosed with characteristic white streaks of imperfectly devel-
oped crystallized feldspar and hard hornblendic material, with
roundish specks of semi-crystallized feldspar;’’* ‘‘ remarkable
for the regular parallelism of its lamination and bedding; the
laminz alternately light and dark, being exceedingly thin, many
of them usually packing within the thickness of an inch. ....
In some of the layers certain Jaminze are studded with isolated
erystallizations of hornblende.’’**
This description is graphic as the rock itself is characteristic.
Its breadth is not great, but on both sides of the ancient gneiss,
from east of the Schuylkill westward, it seems to be of constant
occurrence. The rock is often plicated, sometimes minutely so. It
is well exposed at the Schuylkill where it appears to be thicker
than elsewhere. As Prof. Rogers notes, the feldspar occasionally
occurs in rounded crystalline masses of considerable size and the
rock approaches a porphyritic gneiss in aspect, but the feldspar is
rather in nodules and not in crystals. Some beds, well shown in the
Pavol. T. p: 72:
124 Tbid., p. 68.
262 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Stacker-Brooks quarry one mile north of Radnor Station, Dela-
ware county, Pa., yield a flagstone. This quarry exposes the rock
well, and in it occurred distinct pebbles of the ancient gneiss, the
only occurrence in this region of pebbles in these rocks of which
Iam aware except in similar rock west of the Brandywine. The
lamination and plication are shown in a photograph by Dr. Charles
Schaeffer.’* It is here in contact, with the limestone, and on the
Fic. 4.—Plicated gneiss. One mile north of Radnor Station.
southeast side of the latter, but on the northwest side the rock is
not essentially different. The limestone appears to be less than
forty feet in width.
It is possible that the Conshohocken diabase dyke, which about
this point crosses it, or is in juxtaposition, may have caused some
change, but at other points in the course of this dyke there seems
to have been little or no effect on the adjacent rocks. The rule,
125 Except the possible occurrence at the Queen. Lane Reservoir, Philadel-
phia, and in the Avondale lime-tone hereafter noted.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 263
however, is that this harder porphyry-like rock is next to the
ancient gneiss, and it frequently forms a guide to theymargin, as
in southeast Willistown, near Westtown School, and on the
Brandywine.
On the southeasterly side of the ancient gneiss it may be seen at
the Schuylkill, but best in a quarry on the place of Dr. Williams,
southwest of Rosemont; also near Westtown School, southeast of
West Chester.
Prof. Rogers regarded this as equivalent to his lower primal slate
of the North Valley Hill, but apparently all that can be certainly
stated as to its age is that in this region it is the upper stratum of
the ancient gneiss, or else the first overlying rock. It is evi-
dently of clastic origin.
I have omitted this rock from the geological map because its
narrowness would require it to be greatly exaggerated to be visible
at all.
If. Tae SpancLep Scuists.
These, while probably but a variety, are well defined and
important.“ They form to the northeastward a narrow but
characteristic belt northwest of the Chestnut Hill schists,
from which they differ markedly. In Huntingdon Valley
they lie southeast of the limestone and on the Neshaminy
southeast of the Cambrian sandstone. The characteristic feature
of most of the rock—namely, that the mica, instead of being all
disseminated, is partly in separate curved imperfect crystals, as if
it had been subjected to great compression, the crystals showing
brilliant surfaces on exposure —is here well shown. Generally the
crystals are quite imperfect, but sometimes nearly perfect. Feld-
spar, probably orthoclase, while frequently absent is sometimes
present in large quantity. To the southwest the curved surfaces
of the mica are large, when the term conchoidal mica schists,
applied to them by Dr. Frazer, is most appropriate,*” the rock on
a cleavage surface presenting a series of rounded hills and hollows,
with the mica particles parallel to the curving sides.
These rocks are usually quite schistose, but sometimes in heavy °
and solid beds, sometimes very micaceous, sometimes feldspathic,
and sometimes hornblendic, but invariably the characteristic min-
126 Second Geol. Survey of Pa., Annual Report, 1886, p. 1592.
21 Ct, p, 287.
264 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
eral, whether mica, feldspar or hornblende, is in more or less dis-
tinct crystals through the rock. The feldspar crystals are often
large, but usually not distinct in form, resembling rather rounded
pebbles, but almost always with single smooth cleavages. In
certain varieties these feldspar masses weather out while the ground
mass remains intact, forming a rock full of holes, well shown
north of the ancient gneiss west of the East Branch of the
Brandywine, southwest of Copesville. The mica crystals are
sometimes very distinct and abundant, with perfect cleavage,
but usually with curved surfaces; more frequently they are indis-
tinct, but a fracture of the rock gives always a succession of
rounded elevations and depressions, usually small, but sometimes
two or three inches across, with much lustre.
More rarely hornblende appears, not scattered through the rock
in minute particles, but distinctly crystallized, sometimes on the
cleavage or bedding plane like the tourmalines of the Cambrian
sandstone, sometimes, as well shown on the west bank of the
Brandywine just below the morth of the East Branch, in distinet
imbedded crystals.
This porphyritic character seems, however, to be not confined to
the lowest rocks of the series, as, at least in one instance, the rock
above the Cambrian sandstone is of the same character. This is in
Cream Valley, one mile nearly north of Radnor Station, and a
quarter of a mile west of the Montgomery-Delaware county line.
The northeasternmost point at which these schists are well ex-
posed is close to the Pennypack creek, east of the Bound Brook
Railroad, though they appear as far east as the Neshaminy. Near
the Pennypack they are more compact and harder than elsewhere
and are very dark and argillaceous-looking. At Paul Brook
Station, in a well, the same schists were found, much decomposed,
full of Jarge garnets. They form the northwest flank of the hill
bounding Huntingdon Valley on the south, about an eighth of a mile
southeast of the limestone. They dip quite regularly S. 20° to
30 E. 60° to 70°, and are bounded southeast by the Chestnut
Hill schists, as usual much plicated and nearly vertical. They
contain garnets in some strata, the garnets usually much larger
and not nearly so numerous as in the typical Chestnut Hill schists.
They continue flanking the hill to its termination near Jenkintown,
southwest of which they again appear southeast of the Cambrian
iy a cl
——— —_—
r - — 2.)
a a ee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 265
sandstone of Waverly Heights. ‘Chey may be seen on the westerly
slope of Chestnut Hill, on Paper Mill lane, and on the Schuylkill
close to the LaFayette serpentine, also at Rosemont, between
the serpentine and the ancient gneiss, dipping S. 45° E. 50°.
Here the Chestnut Hill schists east of it are not very garnetif-
erous, but sandy and approaching whetstone. On the Roberts’
road, the nearest exposure, the latter dip S. 40° E. 80°; further
Suuimeasee. sof 57°, §..48° BE. 50°, S. 45° EB. 62°, S. 50°
EK. 70°, with some irregular, as E., S. 80° E., S. 70° E.
It is possible that these belong to the spangled series and not to
the Chestnut Hill. Typical Chestnut Hill schists occur further
east, not well shown, near the Pennsylvania Railroad, owing
to deep decomposition, but very clearly both to the north and
south.
Southwest of Rosemont the spangled schists are exposed on the
Roberts’ road, and here one stratum is very feldspathic and crys-
talline, almost a granite. It has, however, the same relation to
the ancient gneiss as the schists at Rosemont.
At Darby creek they are prominent, here lying within 200 feet
southeast of the ancient gneiss and northwest of the serpentine.
Both the muscovite and the orthoclase are ina more crystalline
condition than elsewhere, except perhaps southwest of Rosemont;
the different strata vary greatly, the most crystalline muscovite
occurring in an argillitic variety of the schist.
Westward of Darby creek exposures are very few, and I am not
aware of any outcrop that can be clearly recognized. On the
Brandywine, however, a porphyritic gneiss, with hornblende crys-
tals in place of mica, just east of the ancient gneiss probably
takes its place.
About two miles west of the forks of the Brandywine, on the
State road, near Pocopsin Inn, and between the ancient gneiss and
serpentine, it is well exposed, being here very feldspathic. It dips
nearly E. 10°, and apparently overlies the serpentine. The ancient
gneiss is here not over a quarter of a mile in width, and on the
northwest side similar schists occur. A mile to the southwest, the
ancient gneiss ends apparently in a large outcrop of serpentine and
enstatite (Newlin corundum locality), beyond and on both sides of
which is a great area of mica schists. Northwest of the ancient
gneiss these extend to the Schuylkill, narrowing greatly.
266 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Because of this narrowing they will be discussed from the Schuyl-
kill westward.
As has been stated, the sequence of the rocks on the west side
of the Schuylkill near Conshohocken is: Southeast—ancient gneiss,
Rogers’ Altered Primal, garnetiferous schists, limestone. North-
west—hydromica schist, but in the midst of the limestone schists
appear. The contact on the southeast is concealed. The lime-
stone dips S. 28° E. 74°; about 300 feet northwest limestone again
appears, dipping about 70° to 80° N. W. If dips so steep as
these are trustworthy we have here an anticlinal of limestone.
A little east of this, on Aramink creek, the contacts of the
gneiss, the altered primal and the garnetiferous schist—the latter
here, and here only, very closely resembling the typical Chestnut
Hill rock—may be seen. The dips are very uniform and agree
well with those of the limestone: Gneiss 8S. 20° E. 73°; altered
primal 8. 20° E. 85°; schist S. 25° E. 80°, while on the River
road there are dips in the schists of S. 61°, S. 60° E. 86°, and
immediately southeast of the schists a sandy white rock, breaking
into small angular fragments much resembling the Cambrian sand-
stone, which outcrops on the opposite shore of the river at Spring
Mill.”
These outcrops are near the mouth of Cream Valley, a very
straight narrow valley, referred to on p. 216. At this point the
summit of the gneiss hill is over 400 feet above the floor of the
valley, while the opposing hill (hydromica schist) is between 200
and 300 feet, the summits being less than a mile apart.
The schists may be found thence westward on the northerly slope
of the gneiss hil]. On the Ciulf road, and westward, serpentine
and steatite appear in the schists..” On Montgomery avenue, 1.5
miles from the Schuylkill, the Cambrian sandstone appears in or
close to them.
About a half-mile west of Montgomery avenue, large masses of
these schists, full of large garnets, appear near Gulf Creek on the
land of Mr. Joseph E. Gillingham. From this westward they are
readily detected at short intervals. Close to the Delaware-Mont-
gomery county line, the typical sandstone was exposed in the bed
us A mile and a half distant, the river for that space flowing at the base
of the ancient gneiss parallel to the strike and over the line of strike of the
limestone and sandstone.
129 The northerly Radnor belt (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1878, p. 402).
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 267
of an affluent of Gulf creek, with the schists apparently on both
sides of it, certainly on the southeast side. About .4 of a mile
west of this was the Stacker-Brooks quarry in limestone and schis-
“tose gneiss, some layers answering to the description of Rogers’
Altered Primal, much alike on both sides of the limestone, except
that on the south side some layers of the rock were more slaty and
quartzose, while on the north side the porphyritic aspect was more
developed. Both sides and the limestone were plicated. About
an eighth of a mile nearly due south of this quarry the sandstone
was exposed in a Jane on the west line of Judge Hare’s property.
About .6 mile west of the quarry and south of the Eagle road,’
west of the Radnor and King of Prussia road, large masses of the
schist may be seen containing staurolite in addition to the garnets.
The schists were exposed in a well south of this on the property
of E. A. Schmidt.
In a quarry on land of Francis Fenimore, a quarter of a mile
north of St. David’s Station, they are unusually well exposed,
dipping N. 25° W. 70°, N. 34° W. 75°, while the hydromica
schists on the north are S. 10° E. 90°, S. 20° E. 60° to 80°, S.
25-30° E. 70°. North of Wayne they are poorly exposed, but
shown to be at least 400 to 500 feet in breadth, probably more
than to the eastward. Here, apparently in these schists, both on
Gulf creek and in the cut of the railroad, the typical Cambrian
sandstone appears.’
130 The Mattson’s Ford road follows the valley from the Schuylkill to the
Delaware county line. It then bears more southwestwardly and ascends the
ancient gneiss hill, crossing a serpentine outcrop (the Radnor-West-Chester
belt, not the northerly belt just mentioned), to Radnor Station, while about
.2 m. to the north the Brooke’s Mill road continues up the valley ending
in the Radnor and King of Prussia road. On this road, about .1 m. north,
the Eagle road begins and continues up the valley.
31 Contrary to Dr. Frazer’s opinion, I think there is no difficulty in trac-
ing the border line between the hydromica schist and the mica schists which
lie to the southward, that is if I understand him correctly. ‘‘Throughout
an area widening from the east from one mile near Eagle Station to fourteen
miles or more along the Octorara creek, and touching the northern outcrop
lines of most of the limestone and serpentine patches which extend along
this belt, there occur thin mica schists . . . . some of them are garnetifer-
ous. . .. . Within this triangular area... . are irregular included
areas of more or less chloritic rock and some argillitic or hydra-mica-schists.
It was intended to separate these areas from the general mica-schist region
and from each other, but this attempt when reduced to paper had to be
abandoned, so impossible to suppose as the results of natural divisions were
the boundaries thereby produced.’’ C', p. 216.
Eagle Station was at the crossing of the Conestoga turnpike by the Penn-
sylvania Railroad, about .5 m. east of Devon Station. This point is about .3
268 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
This is about four miles from the Schuylkill. Westward they
are almost continuous and widen greatly, though usually occupying
low ground and therefore much concealed.
In Easttown and Willistown townships, in Chester county, near
the headwaters of Crum creek, eleven miles from the Schuylkill,
they are poorly exposed in connection with the serpentine. On
the road next south of the State road three approximatively parallel
outcrops of serpentine may be seen, with two and perhaps three
outcrops of trap (diabase) and with the garnetiferous schists in
place both to the northwest and southeast, and with garnetiferous
schist fragments between the serpentine outcrops. On the road
leading to Green Tree, the schists may be seen on both sides of the
serpentine, while on the road to Malvern, half a mile westward,
they occupy a space of some 2,000 feet between two outcrops of
serpentine. Trap, probably the diabase of the Conshohocken dyke,
occurs distinctly north of all these serpentine outcrops, and to a less
extent among them, but none of the outcrops of any of the rocks,
except the serpentines, are favorable for observation.
North of West Chester, the schists have become nearly or quite
a mile in width. Here they do not appear between the serpentine
and the gneiss, but only north of the serpentine. Near the ser-
pentine they contain garnets and staurolite, and throughout gar-
netiferous strata are not uncommon. The dip is almost uniformly
to the southeast and not steep—e. g., one-half mile west of Green
Hill Station, S. 23° E. 60°; on High street, near Wrangle
Schoolhouse, S. 20° to 30° E. + 50°; on the north branch of Broad
run, in the southwest corner of West Whiteland township, S.
20° E. 55°, but a little higher up the creek they strike N. 60°
mile north of the ancient gneiss hill and about 1.5 south of the southerly bor-
der of the Chester Valley limestone, the hydromica schists lying on both sides
of the railroad, the mica schists not exposed, the ground south of the railroad
being low. It is clear, therefore, that Dr. Frazer means to include the soft
unctuous hydromica schists, but as these occupy to the westward a com-
paratively narrow belt, the harder mica schists must be included. This is
confirmed by the fact that the latter are frequently garnetiferous, the former
rarely if ever so. The distinctions between the chloritic and non-chloritie
schists I have been unable to recognize. Except in small quantity among
the serpentines, and except a narrow stratum near Mortonville, I doubt
whether there is chlorite schist, properly so-called, in the region except as a
comparatively rare occurrence as in quartz masses near Gum Tree. The line
of demarkation between what I have termed the mica schist and the
hydromica is clear, sharp and easily to be recognized wherever the exposures
suffice, and such are not few.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 269
E. and are nearly vertical. They are exposed in this vicinity in
bold bluffs. A very short distance to the north the soft hydromica
schists may be seea dipping vertically.
In this, vicinity there appears among the schists a hard compact
mica and hornblende gneiss much resembling some of the ancient
gneiss, but more schistose. It appears on New street, northeast of
West Chester in abundant loose masses, and also in place. Its
strike is nearly west-southwest, dip about 90°. This is in West
Goshen, about a quarter of a mile east of the East Bradford town-
ship line. North of it are loose masses of serpentine, but none of
it was seen in place. On the west side of the township line, or
perhaps on the line, and west of it, this gneiss seems to form the
centre of a hill of about 175 feet in height, quite narrow and about
half a mile long. On both its flanks are the schists. A road
cutting exposed the westerly nose of this hill, showing a narrow
synclinal of the gneiss, including a stratum two feet wide of
steatite, overlying which were mica schist and quartz, much plicated.
Nearly on the strike of this hill, and about 500 feet southwest, is
a lower, less abrupt hill of schists, including two outcrops of lime-
stone (Cope’s quarries). They lie about S. 50° W. and S. 65° W.
from the gneiss. The limestone and schists in the southerly and
best exposed outcrop strike S. 40° W., dip N. 35° to 45° W. 65°.
The schists forming the north wall are garnetiferous, spangled and
contain interlaminated quartz and also feldspar nodules. The
‘limestone is but about forty feet wide. The south wall is a por-
phyritic schistose gneiss, but, as Dr. Frazer suggests, probably
more recent than the ancient gneiss and made up of fragments
of it.’ The other outcrop, perhaps 200 feet to the north, is insig-
nificant, showing only the south leg of an anticlinal, with traces of
the arch. The adjacent rock is not exposed in place, but the soil
is full of schist fragments.
To the northwest of Cope’s quarry is a hill extending west-south-
west to the Brandywine. ‘This, as shown by fragments in the soil
and by the exposures on the Brandywine, is of the harder feldspar
and hornblende gneiss which forms the high hill east of Cope’s.
The trap dyke extends along its slope near the summit, but on the
Brandywine it is on the southerly side of the small valley which
separates this hill from that in which Cope’s quarry is. A meas-
132 Gf p, 294.
270 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
urement of this gneiss about .2 mile northwest of Cope’s quarry
just north of the trap gave a strike N. 40° E. nearly vertical.
Northwest of this gneiss the schists again appear and near Cope-
land Schoolhouse contain thin layers of tale schist.
Cope’s quarry is about a mile northeast of the East Branch of
the Brandywine, on which the rocks are unusually well exposed.
At the State road crossing, three miles southwest of West Chester,
and for some distance above it, the ancient gneiss is seen. The
next roads to the north are the Strasburg road, running westward
from West Chester over the gneiss, and a short curved road diverg-
ing northwestwardly from it and converging to it along Black
Horse run, laid out to obtain better gradients. The ancient gneiss
is exposed on these roads also. The two unite at the crossing of
Black Horse run, not far from Cope’s quarry, and ascend the low
hill on which the inn stands. This is of varied rock, chiefly a
hard but schistose feldspar and compact hornblende gneiss, much
of it decomposed. There are decomposed schists with it, probably
the hornblende rock altered, and in seams in these a compact
tale (?) known as ‘‘ indurated tale.’’ This rock does not resemble
any other of the vicinity, and is probably intrusive, or perhaps the
schists with intrusive hornblendic rocks (altered diorite ?) altering
them. On the east slope of the hill schists strike N. 60° E., dip
uncertain. On the west slope, the hard gneiss strikes N. 40° E.,
dip uncertain. Close to the Brandywine, the Strasburg road
makes a détour upstream to avoid a bold cliff on the right bank
known as Deborah’s rock. The rock forming this cliff strikes
N. 50° E., dip about 90°; it is very hard but somewhat schistose
mica and hornblende gneiss, and belongs, I believe, to the schistose
series and not to the ancient gneiss. At Copesville, where the
Strasburg road crosses, the schists are well exposed in high cliffs.
They are quite micaceous and contain kyanite and garnet, and more
rarely menaccanite with feldspar in porphyroidal masses; some
layers are Jess micaceous. A hard gneiss with considerable masses
of feldspar occurs further north. Dips here are 8. 50° E. 40°,
S. 30° E. 50°, S. 45° E. 45°. Some of the gneiss is studded
with isolated erystals of hornblende. These rocks, as pointed out
by Dr. Frazer, merle strongly the rocks near the Delaware
northwest of Chester."
133 Cs, p. 61.
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 271
Three-quarters of a mile northwest of Copesville, Valley creek,
flowing nearly south, empties into the Brandywine. On it at
MecMinn’s mill, or Grubb’s mill (Valeose Post-office), the mica
schists dip S. 25° E. 45°, and just above S. 30° E. 60°. Three-
quarters of a mile above McMinn’s mill, the hydromica schists are
met, the strike about southwest, but somewhat irregular, the dip
vertical or nearly so.
Returning now to the East Branch of the Brandywine, the mica
schists may be observed just above the mouth of Valley creek,
dipping southeast about 60°. A mile above is Hawley’s mill.
On the left bank, high steep cliffs of the mica schists form a
prominent feature, on the right bank they are also exposed, though
not so prominent. They dip S. 40° E. 40°, S. 40° E. 65°, 8.
35° E. 45°, S. 70° E. 25°. Less than three hundred feet above,
the hydromica schists appear with their characteristic features
striking about S. 45° W., dip vertical or nearly so.
It should be noted that a line connecting Cope’s limestone quarry
with the range of quarries among which are the Poorhouse quarry
and the Embreeville quarry would pass a little north of Copes-
ville. In C’, p. 58, it is stated that there are signs of limestone on
the East Branch of the Brandywine a little north of Copesville.
I could find no outcrop; the contours, however, very distinctly
indicate the continuance of the limestone, the creek itself follow-
ing its strike for a half-mile at nearly 90° from its general course
and a well-marked valley occupying the line west of the Brandy-
wine. On the south side of this valley a road has been constructed
diverging northwardly from the Strasburg road close to the Bran-
dywine and entering it again a mile beyond Marshallton, to avoid
a very high hill of the schists over which the old road passes. On
the Strasburg road schists only can be seen (except trap) poorly
exposed, dipping south-southeast, but on the newer road mica
schists are well exposed, dipping S. 50° E. 50°. On this road, a
little over a half-mile from the Brandywine, is the limestone quarry
of George March. No contacts are visible, but south of the
quarry and within 100 feet are quantities of schist fragments, two
very large, which may be in place. Its strike is N. 40° E. A
quarter of a mile north of the quarry there is an exposure in a
lane on Ingram’s property; the rocks are quite varied here, some
layers being micaceous, some highly feldspathic, and some horn-
272 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
bilendic. They strike from N. 80° E. to E. and dip 60° and
upwards southeast, or toward the limestone. A quarter of a mile
west of this is an abandoned limestone quarry (Moses Wood-
ward’s), south of which are schists poorly exposed. Three-quar-
ters of a mile westward is the road to Gallagherville, near the
junction of the newer road with the Strasburg road. Here in the
schists there is a considerable outcrop of coarse pegmatite. The
adjacent schists dip steeply to the northwest, and a variety with
large garnets is precisely the rock of Fenimore’s quarry, north of
St. David’s, Radnor township. Close by is another abandoned
limestone quarry (Moses Bailey’s), south of which is garnetifer-
ous mica schist, imbedded in which was found a pebble-like mass
of an older rock, probably ancient gneiss. ‘This schist strikes
N. 50° E. and is nearly vertical; a quarter of a mile south the
schists dip S. E. + 70°.
Half a mile southwest is the Poorhouse limestone quarry, by far
the largest of the series. Here all the indications are that the
schists both underlie and overlie the limestone. The dip being
very low, 0° to 15° S. E., an overturn is incredible. North of
the quarry decomposed gneiss and schists with quartzite bands dip
S. 40° E. 45°, becoming steeper to 65° southeastwardly, while
mica schists overlie conformably.
If we take a section line, west of Copesville, that is about
midway between the East Branch and Broad run, we find the
ancient gneiss well exposed on the West Branch of the Brandy-
wine at Seeds Bridge, southwest of which it forms Brag Hill. On
the westerly border of East Bradford, about three-quarters of a
mile N. 15° W. of Seeds Bridge, is a plicated sandy schist with
hornblende and mica gneiss, dipping about N. 45° W. 10° to
50°, and a quarter of a mile further a porphyritic, argillitic
schist, in much of which the feldspar crystals or masses have
weathered out, leaving numerous cavities. It forms a small hill,
and strikes N. 50° to 70° E. vertical. West of this is a hill of
the distinctly spangled schists, here containing much feldspar,
hence a gneiss, dipping N. 45° W. 15°. Northward the schists
continue, and in them, south of the Strasburg road, is trap which
extends eastward probably two miles, and in line with that north-
west of West Chester, near Black Horse run. It is probably the
diabase of the Conshohocken dyke. North of Marshallton, the
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 273
schists dip S. 45° E. 60° on the southerly border of the limestone
valley, north of which on this section-line no good exposures were
seen, but to the eastward are the gneissoid schists north of
March’s quarry.
We come next to the most interesting section of this belt, viz.,
that north and south of Northbrook.
Beginning south of the ancient gneiss, here very narrow, we find
going northward, the distances given being those of the outcrops
noted:
Approximate :
Distance. Dip.
10° E. Spangled mica schist and granu-
lite close east of and appar-
ently overlying serpentine,
State road, west of Pocopsin
Inn. (Southeast of this other
schists cover most of the re-
gion to the gabbro of Dela-
ware. )
+= 300° S. 70° E. 30°. Schists and gneiss, some highly
feldspathic, some not; with
tale and serpentine. This was
the most satisfactory dip and
about an average of a consid-
erable exposure, but for a short
distance the dip increased to
90° and was then 70° N. W.;
this was south of the gentle
southeasterly dips.
1,900’ N. 15° W. 75°. Ancient gneiss, near northerly
foot of hill.
s 40° H. - 40°, yearn gneiss on the Brandy-
2,600’ ~ Steep northwest ir-) wine east of Northbrook; two
( regular. j dips close together.
2.600" fee 20S WwW. 25°. ) Schists on right bank of the
a UN. 70° W. 67°. Brandywine west of North-
brook, and to the westward
enstatite and serpentine.
3,000’ +0° to 45°=N.W. Schists on left bank west of
Northbrook, very irregular.
1.5m. N. 45° W. 15°. Spangled mica schists with much
feldspar northeast of Trimble-
ville.
18
274 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Approximate
Distance. Dip.
175m. S. 45° BE. + 70°. ) Hast and west of Broad run,
90°.) south of the road next south
of Strasburg road and close
south of limestone.
2. Ooi Pa e=A0° 1B. 0°. ) Lisraestone and mica schist over-
20°. § lying Poorhouse quarry.
2.6m. 6 40° E. 45°.) Sechists north of Poorhouse
70°. § quarry.
3.25 m. §. 15°. Heavy bedded schists on Broad
run, a half-mile northeast of
Romansville.
4.m S. 30° KE. 90°.) Hydromica schist on Broad run,
S. 40° E. 70°.) one mile north of Romansville.
6.25m. S. +60° E. +70°. Limestone of the Chester Valley.
We have here apparently the schist resting upon both flanks of
the ancient gneiss, with comparatively gentle dips from it and very
close to its westward termination, no trace of it being visible one
mile to the westward, the schists on both sides seeming to unite.
Unfortunately, westward there are no good exposures, though
abundant decomposing schist fragments are visible.
It would seem, therefore, that these rocks must be the first over-
lying the ancient gneiss. If such is the fact, and the same schist
overlies both flanks, then it is impossible that these should
be more recent than the more easterly mica schists, and
equally impossible that there can be a profound fault between them
and the ancient gneiss. From the occurrence in them of the
limestone and of the sandstone, it seems most probable they are of
Cambrian age. In this section there seems to be no trace of the
subdivisions seen along the Schuylkill. On the contrary, while the
mica schists and gneisses characterize the region, the former are
most abundant, varying somewhat, mostly from more micaceous to
more quartzose varieties, but not in distinct belts or areas, and
almost free from other minerals.
Before considering these schists in their westerly and southerly
continuation it will be best to discuss schists of somewhat similar
character on the southeast of the ancient gneiss area.
bo
NI
or
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES .OF PHILADELPHIA.
III. Tue Cuesrnut Hivt Scuists.
Second Group of Prof. Rogers.
These lie between the spangled schists and the Manayunk schists,
and have been so thoroughly discussed by Prof. Rogers, Mr. Hall
and others that but a brief notice of them is necessary. They
are thus described by Mr. Hall: ‘‘ Characterized. by the serpen-
tines ;** soapstone; silvery micaceous garnetiferous schists; light-
colored thin-bedded sandy gneiss with disseminated light-colored
mica in minute flakes.’’'®
One of the most definite characteristics is thus well described by
Prof. Rogers: ‘‘ The rock breaking into long narrow chunks,
comparatively smooth on their sides, but excessively ragged on their
ends; a style of fracture strongly resembling that of half-rotted
fibrous wood.’’** They are frequently very garnetiferous, much
more so than any of the others.
In the Final Report, Vol. I, p. 125, it is stated that this group
ends in a point at Jenkintown, eight miles east of the Schuylkill.™
While the peculiar wood-like schist, whether garnetiferous or
not, is very well marked and characteristic, some areas of the belt
as laid down by both Prof. Rogers and Mr. Hall contain rocks
very hard to distinguish from those of Mr. Hall’s Manayunk
group. Mr. Hall states that no dividing line can be drawn.
West of the Schuylkill he suggests Mill creek as the dividing line,
but the gneisses immediately northwest of this stream are the hard
gneisses of the Manayunk belt. The Wissahickon, the Schuylkill,
and especially the Schuylkill Valley Railroad cuts give good sections,
but no dividing line. Further southwestward the very garnetiferons
134 Mr. Hall thinks the serpentines, with perhaps a few insignificant ex-
ceptiuns, confined to those rocks or overlying them in synclinal basins. C°,
p. 13 et seg. I have given elsewhere my reasons for doubting this (Proc.
Acad. Nat. Sci., 1890, p. 95 et seq.).
183. C8 py. 71.
= Geol. of Pa., I, p. 71.
181 This does not accord with my observations. It is well exposed in a
quarry on the Pennypack creek south of Huntingdon valley, the spangled
schist occurring as usual on its northwest side, dipping 8. 30° E. 70°, while
the Chestnut Hill schists are much plicated and apparently nearly vertical.
This locality is four miles east-northeast of Jenkintown. The spangled schist
is plainly visible on the Neshaminy southeast of Oaktord Post-office, six miles
further. There is at this point no evidence whether or not the Chestnut
Hill or Manayunk schists flank them—there are no rock exposures.
This seems also not to accord with the theory that all these rocks are
sheared by a fault diagonal to the strike (/inal Report, I, p. 125).
276 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900,
variety, so abundant from Cobb’s creek northward, gives place to
a highly quartzose non-garnetiferous schist, a whetstone. In this
section the rock, where entirely decomposed, may be traced by
abundant masses of white quartz, weathering yellow. This may
be seen in place in the schists on the Gulf road southeast of the
Roberts’ road, Bryn Mawr. Curiously the apparent southwesterly
termination of this area of these schists, which is near Marple
Schoolhouse, near the road from Newtown Square to Palmer’s
mills, is marked by an unusually great outcrop of the quartz.
In these schists kyanite and staurolite are not uncommon, while
garnets constitute sometimes a considerable portion of the rock.
IV. Tse Porpuyriric GNEIss.
About four miles from the ancient gneiss, measured along the
Schuylkill, which from Spring Mill flows nearly on the line of
dip, is the belt of porphyritic gneiss, a hard rock the limit of tide-
water before the Fairmount dam was built. The channel was
obstructed by the rock forming a rapids known as the Falls of
Schuylkill, a name which that part of Philadelphia still retains.
It is, at the Schuylkill, not over a quarter of a mile in breadth,
and is not visible northeast of Laurel Hill, but it widens rapidly
westward, extending at the Lancaster turnpike, 2.5 miles from the
river, from the crossing of the Pennsylvania Railroad below Over-
brook to Wynnewood, a distance of 2.25 miles, or 1.7 miles across
the strike. It is well exposed on Cubb’s creek, less so on Darby
creek. It can be seen in quarries in the vicinity of Morton, but it
apparently does not reach Crum creek.
Just on the northwestern edge of the porphyritic gneiss at the
Schuylkill, that is about .2 mile above the Park bridge at the
Falls, is a quarry, not recently wrought, in a rock showing the
variety of, and rapid changes in, the gneiss of this region. Not
over two or three hundred feet in linear extent and less on the
strike, the following varieties occur:
Nearly white, fine-grained, chiefly oligoclase and quartz, with a
little biotite and tourmaline;*
Quartzose biotite schist, nearly black ;
Muscovite gneiss, fine-grained, light gray;
Hornblende gneiss, some of the hornblende passing into epidote;
188 Determined by Mr. Goldsmith.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 277
A gneiss nearly black in color, containing much black mica,
probably biotite, passing into a black mica schist;
Pegmatite, chiefly of a reddish flesh-colored feldspar, with
tourmaline.
This porphyritic gneiss has much to suggest an igneous origin;
much of it is a true augen-gneiss. Its best exposure is that made
by Cobb’s creek, which flows through it by a deep valley. If
igneous, we ought here to find in its width of two miles some un-
altered rock and probably an increase in gneissic or schistose
structure from the centre toward the edges, but we do not. On
the contrary, it seems to alternate with mica schists containing
staurolite, garnet and kyanite, or to include one or more areas of
them, and the hardest and most crystalline rock is near the edges—
e. g., northwest of Sixtieth and Market streets, Philadelphia, and
on Cobb’s creek 500 feet south of the Haverford road, where that
road going southeast turns east and leaves the creek. It has a
fine-grained mica feldspar base in which are numerous evenly
distributed crystals of feidspar, apparently orthoclase, always
twinned, and usually, but not invariably, with their axes parallel.
These crystals are firmly attached to the base, so that crystal
forms are not seen, only sections upon fracture. They are from an
eighth of an inch or less up to two inches in length.
The granite of this belt differs in aspect from that of the rest of
the region. It occurs in large quantity. It is a coarse pegmatite,
chiefly a flesh-red feldspar, sometimes more than flesh red, with a
ehalky-white feldspar and with very little quartz and mica, the
latter sometimes in thin films and sometimes in small separate crys-
tals. There is also true graphic granite, and some that resembles
more a breccia of quartz and feldspar. In the cut of Lans-
downe avenue, Philadelphia, it appears to be in dykes cutting the
gneiss, or to be filling sharply defined veins. Toward Darby creek
in this belt occurs much hornblende rock not containing the feld-
spar crystals. Microscopic examination by Dr. Bascom shows this
to be a gabbro diorite. With this exception the rock is remark-
ably uniform over its whole area, the variation being almost wholly
in the size of the feldspar crystals. The finer varieties make a
very good building stone, and even the coarser are used.
This rock appears not to have been seen by the geologists of the
Second Survey." It seems to resemble very closely the augen-
198. C8, p. 27.
278 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
gneiss near Bedford, N. Y., described by Dr. Luquer and Dr.
Ries."
THE FarrMouNT GNEIss.
This name has been applied to the rather fine-grained muscoyite-
microclin-gneiss which forms the hill at Fairmount, Philadelphia,
exposed only there and on the opposite bank of the Schuylkill,
and along Crum and Ridley creeks near Chester and in that vicin-
ity. On the west side of the Schuylkill it formed a low anticlinal,
dipping under mica schists in both directions. The southeasterly
dip may still be seen on the Pennsylvania Railroad; the north-
westerly was exposed during the construction of the tunnel carry-
ing the tracks of the New York branch under the main line, near
Thirty-sixth street. The gneiss is here of very limited extent.
On Crum and Ridley creeks what appears to be the same rock is
well exposed, and has been largely quarried. Here the dip (cleav-
age'?) is steep.™
This rock yields the most valued building stone of the region.
The quarries on Ridley and Crum creeks are still yielding large
quantities of fine building and curb stone, while that of the Fair-
mount quarries, until the advance of the city closed them, was
much sought for.”
40 Am. Geologist. October, 1896, XVIII, p. 239.
M41 Mr. Hall (C, pp. 2 and 59, ete.), thinks the dip to be gentle and to the
northwest and to be indicated by what are known to the quarrymen as beds.
12 Tt is strange to find in the summary of the Second Geol. Survey a
sweeping condemnation of this gneiss: ‘‘ The Philadelphia lower stbdivi-
sion... . ”’ from ‘‘Gray’s Ferry to the mouth of the Wi-sahickon. ... .
very few solid beds can be found and the surface stone is worthless. Even
where quarries have been opened, the undecayed stone can only be used for
the roughest building purposes... . . But among the gray micaceous
gneiss beds and mica slate beds occur numerous beds of hard hornblende-
gneiss, which is a good quarry stone and stands well”’ (p. 122).
In the following important structures the Fairmount gneiss was used for
face stone and it would have been very much more largely used but for the
fact that its outcrop was in part taken into Fairmount Park, in part by the
Pennsylvania Railroad, and the remainder built upon.
The Church of the Redeemer, Bryn Mawr; Bryn Mawr Station ; Ardmore
Station ; the residence of Mrs. Wheeler, Bryn Mawrand that of Mr. James R.
Whitney ; that of Mr. John C. Wilson, northwest corner Thirty-fifth and
Poweilton avenue ; that of Mr. Field, southeast corner Thirty-sixth and
Powelton avenue; that of George W. Blabon, Twenty-second and Tioga
streets ; St. Martin’s Church, Radnor, Pa.
These and many others were constructed of the Fairmount stone and
show no signs of decay.
The stone from the quarries on Crum and Ridley creeks has been used for
nearly acentury. The size of the quarries shows the immense quantity of
stone removed. By far the largest proportion of this was used for face stone
and curbing.
Pe a ee ee oe ie ta me ee
EE FOO, Gey” ae
— Aes
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 279
' From the quarries on Crum and Ridley creeks was obtained the
stone for the old Market Street Bridge, the new Baltimore & Ohio
Railroad bridge across the Schuylkill in Fairmount Park, the
bridge of the Trenton Cut-off Railroad over the Schuylkill below
Norristown, and many other important structures, none of which
show sigus of deterioration.
The fine stone arched bridge of the Reading Railroad over the
Schuylkill at the Falls was constructed over a half-century ago of
the porphyritic gneiss, quarried near by, and is in perfect condition
to-day.
Comparatively little of the hornblende gneiss has been used,
except for road material, and except that of the Frankford and
Rittenhouse lane (McKinney’s) quarries, in which some hornblende
occurs, though hardly in sufficient quantity to make it a horn-
blende gneiss.
THE FRANKFORD GNEISS.
This rock has the abnormal strike of nearly east and west. Its
chief exposures are at Frankford, at Wayne Junction, German-
town, and at McKinney’s quarry on the Wissahickon. It is a
highly feldspathic gneiss containing but little mica (chiefly biotite,
var. lepidomelane) and hornblende, very hard yet readily wrought,
forming a valuable building stone.
Ata time when all the rocks of the region were deemed un-
doubtedly sedimentary, the late Prof. H. Carvill Lewis asserted his
belief that this was an altered intrusive dyke."
The quarries at Frankford and McKinney’s are noted mineral
localities. “*
THE MANAYUNK GNEISSES AND SCHISTS.
There remain to be described the mica schists and gneisses which
cover the remainder of the area between the ancient gneiss and the
Delaware, which are not distinctly separable into belts or areas.
They are of somewhat varied character, but are typified by Mr.
Hall’s Manayunk belt, so called from the excellent exposures near
that part of Philadelphia. He describes it as containing gray
schistose gneiss with garnets, beds of hornblende slate and fine-
grained sandy gneiss."
M3 Nature, October 8, 1885, p. 560.
1 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., April 26, 1892, pp. 178, 179.
45 08, p, 2.
il
‘MNUOAY YSnos0gxoyy ‘ssrouy—'s ‘OT
a
ae
o—7Re a
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900-.
280
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 281
They contain few garnets compared with the Chestnut Hill series ;
toward the eastward, hornblende schists are more abundant, like-
wise feldspar. A prevailing feature is the sharp folding of the
tock, the plications being numerous and great. Fig. 5 is from a
photograph taken by Dr. Schiffer on Roxborough avenue near the
Wissahickon, Philadelphia.
As stated by Mr. Hall and by Prof. Lesley the subdivisions, so
clear on the Schuylkill, cannot be recognized much further south-
westward. Indeed, the typical Manayunk rocks so prominent on
the Schuylkill are scarcely to be found three miles west of it.
Near the mouth of a small creek flowing into the Schuylkill near
Strawberry Mansion, Fairmount Park, is a rock apparently identi-
eal with one found by Dr. George H. Williams and described by
him as follows: ‘‘ In specimens collected on Sligo Branch ;'* the
surface of this rock was covered with small nodules, which upon
examination proved to be made up almost entirely of quartz and
sillimanite, a mineral combination strongly suggestive of the con-
tact metamorphism of included fragments.’’’’
In an excavation in the mica schist made for water-pipe near
the Queen Lane reservoir, in Germantown, Philadelphia, two
masses of quartz were observed looking like elongated pebbles.
They are oval in section, one measuring 5 x 3 x 10 in., but one end
was broken off. The original length was probably a foot; the
other was much larger. They are composed of a hornstone-like
quartz, jointed so that they fell to pieces on extraction, the joints
thinly coated with probably hyaline quartz with dendrites. They
were imbedded in a very soft mica schist.
Before discussing the rocks of western Delaware county and
southern Chester county, it will be well to consider the topography
and drainage systems of the region.
The Schuylkill flowing with a nearly south course across the
Chester Valley iimestone and the hydromica schist strikes the
ancient gneiss hill, and for a mile and a half flows along its base
a little north of east. Then, breaking through by a steep-sided
gap, it flows with a nearly straight southeast course until the por-
phyritic gneiss is reached at the Falls. This hard rock does not
divert it, but immediately after crossing the gneiss the river flows
146 Probably Fairfax county, Va.
47 U. 8. Geol. Survey, Fifteenth Ann. Rep., p. 665.
282 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
nearly south for a mile and a half through schists and gneisses of
varying texture and hardness to Columbia Bridge. Here on the
Jeft bank is very hard hornblende gneiss (altered diorite?), with
some pegmatite; this again does not divert it, but immediately after,
it takes a southeast course until it has passed Fairmount, then south-
erly, with curves, to its mouth. Southeast of Buck Ridge its
drainage area on its right bank is very limited for so large a stream,
not exceeding four miles in width at any point, and being as nar-
row as one and a half miles.
Darby creek and its branches drain the next area to the southeast-
ward between nearly southeast parallel lines about six miles apart,
the creek rising on the southerly edge of the hydromica schist and
flowing through the ancient gneiss, here nearly three miles wide, and
then through the schists. The stream bed is high and the erosion
much less than at the Schuylkill.
Next is Crum, then Ridley creek. In their lower courses the
drainage areas of these creeks are parallel to that of Darby creek
and very narrow, the creeks themselves being but about two miles
apart and their combined drainage areas not much over four miles
wide. Their northwestern branches, however, spread out to the
westward and along the northerly edge of the ancient gneiss and
cover a lineal distance of six miles.
The next, Chester creek, is roughly parallel to Ridley creek, but
its headwaters also spread out to the westward so that its general
course is about east-southeast, while its west branch drains a Jarge
area to the southwest. The parallelism mentioned is not perfect,
for all the streams converge, and all, except the Schuylkill, enter
the Delaware within three miles. All these streams, except the
Schuylkill, rise either in the ancient gneiss or along the base of
the hydromica and are comparatively smali, but owing to their
rapid descent, suggestive of geologically modern origin, subject to
sudden floods.
The next stream, the Brandywine, is second in importance to the
Schuylkill. It rises in the Welsh Mountains in the extreme north-
west corner of Chester county. It has two large and important
branches. These rise close together and flow southeastwardly
across the strike of the rocks and through deep valleys, one to six
miles apart, for a distance of about eighteen miles to the southeast
edge of the ancient gneiss, where the east branch turns southwest
Fr.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 283
and joins the west branch six miles from the Delaware State line,
to which point its general bearing is a little east of south, but
with a serpentine course.
By another important branch, Buck-and-Doe run, and _ its
branches, Buck run and Doe run, the whole of central western Chester
county is drained, leaving a comparatively small southern and
southwestern area to be drained by nearly south flowing streams,
Red Clay and White Clay creeks, except the extreme southwest
by Big Elk creek.
The Octorara flowing along the west line of Chester county
drains but a small area on its Jeft bank.
DARBY CREEK SECTION.
The Darby creek section shows southeast of the ancient gneiss,
the spangled schist, here gneissic and quite porphyritic, then the
serpentine of the LaFayette belt, then Chestnut Hill schists with a
preponderance of sandy schist and some hornblende schist, follow-
ing which are plicated mica schists and gneisses, usually quite hard,
aud the porphyritic gneiss. Kyanite and staurolite occur near the
Philadelphia city line and to the southeastward, but the Fairmount
gneiss does not appear.
On this section, from the West Chester and Philadelphia road
southeastward pegmatite is frequently found, but usually the con-
tacts are concealed. On the above road, about .2 mile east of
Darby creek, two sheets or veins of pegmatite occur, apparently
conformable with the enclosing schists. They are almost wholly
feldspar. The eastern dips N. 35° W. 40°, and is from eighteen
inches to two feet wide. Three feet east of it, and apparently
conformable, is a sheet of feldspar with much bluish quartz. Two
hundred feet westward is a sheet of the pegmatite, dipping irregu-
larly but gently to the northwest. In these beryl and tourmaline
occur sparingly.
The section afforded by Crum creek presents new features. At
Darby creek the ancient gneiss is over three miles wide; at Crum
creek this area, which here is wider, is divided by a small valley
heading in the gneiss on the Philadelphia and West Chester road
one mile west of Newtown Square. Here there are obscure traces
of schists, close to the well-known serpentine and enstatite of
Castle Rock. The arm of ancient gneiss to the southeastward has
284 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
a width of one mile. The schists, serpentine and enstatite are
probably not over 500 feet wide at the creek, if so much. On the
southeastern edge of the gneiss are outcrops of serpentine, not im-
mediately on the creek, but to the northeast (Blue Hill). South
of Walter Green’s the Chestnut Hill schists seem to end in a point,
and more compact and heavily bedded schists and gneisses to take
their place. In these occur a line of serpentine outcrops, but
whereas at Walter Green’s and Blue Hill serpentine proper is in
very great excess, in these it is subordinate, the chief rock being
impure tale schist and antholite (1), the latter being quarried for
use as asbestos.
Southeast of this is a wide area of the schists, mostly hard and
micaceous but embracing some outcrops of hornblende schist.
On the Media Railroad, southwest of Swarthmore College, but
east of Crum creek, is a rock consisting. almost wholly of horn-
blende and very slightly schistose, which is probably an altered
diorite. A similar rock was found in the tunnel of the Baltimore
& Ohio Railroad west of Darby creek.
The same hornblende rock can be traced nearly north and south
from the outcrop at Swarthmore, the most southern outcrop being
on the right bank of the creek about a quarter of a mile south of
the bridge at Avondale.
On the left bank of the creek, just below the Media Railroad
bridge near Swarthmore College, and just east of the hornblende.
the mica schists are exposed in great masses, some of which contain
andalusite (sillimanite {) in imperfect crystals, perhaps due to
contact metamorphism. About a mile distant, in masses of quartz
found loose in a wood, were remarkably perfect andalusite
crystals, some doubly terminated. This mineral is reported also
from Leiperville, a village on the Philadelphia and Chester road
near Crum creek. I have a specimen so labeled, which came from
an old collection and which differs decidedly from that from near
Swarthmore, but I have beer unable to learn the exact locality.
Minerals from the Avondale quarries and from those on Ridley
creek have been widely distributed labeled as from Leiperville,
which is therefore a somewhat elastic term.
A mile below Swarthmore are large quarries in gneiss resembling
that of Fairmount, but with the schistose structure more fully and
regularly developed and with joints more regular and less numer-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 285
ous, making a valuable building stone. The largest quarry is that
of Leiper & Lewis, which has been wrought for over fifty years.
Many thousand cubic yards of stone have been removed, much of
which has been used in important structures. The excellence of the
stone was recognized so early that one of the very first railroads
built in the United States connects these quarries with tidewater
a few miles below.
In these quarries pegmatite beds, veins or sheets occur, carrying
many of the minerals occurring near Fairmount. Particularly fine
beryls and garnets have been obtained.
RimpLeEY CREEK SECTION.
The section afforded by Ridley creek is so close to that of Crum,
that it is very similar. Where Ridley creek crosses the schist
valley in the ancient gneiss, the western branch flowing along this
valley joins the main stream, which then follows the schist valley
in an easterly direction for nearly a mile before resuming its south-
easterly course. From this point west-southwestward the schist
valley becomes more prominent and wider, with a very straight
course. With but few interruptions it may be traced far into
Chester county, its floor, occupied by the Street road, being com-
posed of Cambrian sandstone and limestone with the schists.
Near the right bank of Ridley creek and northwest of the schist
valley is the Willistown (Chester county) serpentine, almost cer-
tainly a continuation of that at Castle Rock.
Leaving the schist valley, here probably less than .2 mile wide,
the creek flows for over two miles through the southerly branch of
the ancient gneiss to Sycamore Mills, where the edge of the gneiss
forms prominent and high hills on both sides of the creek, and
serpentine appears. **
48 Tt is but fair to say that Mr. Hall, in the map accompanying C’,
interprets this region very differently. Instead of a very narrow valley of |
schists beginning a mile west of Newtown Square and widening gradually
to 500’ at Ridley creek, bounded north and south by the ancient gneiss, he
continues the Bryn Mawr schists northwardly up Ithan creek and Darby creek
to Camp run, showing more than a mile of schists north of the Roberts road
at Darby creek and nearly as much north of the serpentine of Moro Phillips’
chrome mine, thence westward, including Central Square and Newtown
Square. Southwest of Newtown Square an area of the gneiss is shown rapidly
widening westward and cutting off the schists on the right bank of Ridley
Creek. At Castle Rock and thence east to Newtown Square the schists are
represented as over a mile in width.
But in this area are hundreds of bold outcrops of the typical gneiss ex-
286 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Southeast of the Sycamore Mills are the Blue Hill and Dismal
run outcrops of the serpentine, the continuation of the Walter
Green outcrop in Marple, then mica schists among which are scat-
tered outcrops of enstatite, antholite, serpentine and a coarse binary
granite, including the celebrated Mineral Hill. Much of this area
is of the schists in which the serpentine rocks appear, accompanied
by a granite or aplite, sometimes free from mica, and often com-
posed almost entirely of oligoclase in crystals and crystalline masses
as much as three inches in diameter, with a small percentage of.
quartz. This appears to be in dykes or sheets as if intrusive in
the schists. Two localities in particular illustrate this, one at the
easterly end of Crump’s serpentine quarry, west of Media, where
the granitoid rock had every appearance of a true dyke; the other,
on the Jeft bank of Chrome run, three or four hundred feet above
the railroad near Williamson Station, shows a mass of hornblende
rock striking about northwest, while within two feet of it is the
granitic rock striking nearly at right angles. An excavation here
would be interesting. :
Southeast of Media there are the same schists as on Crum creek.
Approaching Chester we find the more feldspathic gneiss resembling
that of Fairmount. Two of the largest quarries of the region lie
on the left bank north of the Philadelphia and Chester road,
Leiper’s and Deshong’s, but the best stone has been removed to a
depth too great for profitable working. At the northwest end of
Deshong’s quarry is a tine exposure of pegmatite.
CHESTER CREEK SECTION.
Chester creek rises on the southerly edge of the hydromica, flows
southeasterly across the mica schists, the serpentine, and the ancient
actly like that elsewhere so represented—e. g., on the Raduor and Chester
road, all along Darby creek, a quarry on the right bank of the creek north
of the Roberts road, the cut of the Philade phia and Delaware County Rail-
road, about a tenth of a mile northwest of the serpentine and of Fawkes run ;
between Newtown and Central Square, dipping S. 30° E. 30° to 60° and
S. 50° E. 65° ; on the road from Newtown Square to Castle Rock, S. 25° EB.
75° at the forks and S. 20°, E. 60° close north of the serpentine east of
Castle Rock. My view is, as elsewhere expressed, that west of Newtown
Square the ancient gneiss tableland is divided by a narrow valley of the
schists, the southerly portion narrowing rapidly and ending east of Chester
creek, while Mr. Hall continues it south-southwest, making it unite with
and include the gabbro area of Chichester and Lower Chichester.
49 The quarry has been abandoned many years and the falling in of the
sides has nearly obliterated this.
patnas POSE eee
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 287
gneiss, and enters the mica schist valley spoken of close to West-
town school, near which the valley can be well seen and the hills
of ancient gneiss bounding it. Southwest of Westtown school the
southerly arm of ancient gneiss ends, and schists and schistose
gneisses only are found. Many of these, however, are of a decid-
edly harder character than most of those along Ridley creek and to
the northeast. They do not, however, differ from the harder strata
of the northeasterly gneisses, and in places between the two creeks,
as along the railroad west of Media, the hard gneiss may be seen
in narrow layers between the strata of soft mica schists. They do,
however, differ most markedly from the much harder and iittle
schistose rocks of the ancient gneiss to the north and east.”
In the north the best exposures are afforded by the West Chester
(via Media) branch of the Pennsylvania Railroad, which from
West Chester follows the west branch of Chester creek and then
the main stream to Wawa. The ancient gneiss can be recognized
clearly for some distance beyond the two-mile post from West Ches-
ter. About .1 mile beyond it the gneiss dips N. 25° W. 10°, and
150 feet further N. 30° W. 15°. This is about .15 mile west-
northwest of Oakbourne Station. The cut just above the station
shows a feldspathic gneiss much decomposed, dipping N. 50° W.
60°. Below the station is a feldspathic gneiss, dipping about N.
W. 45°, and 100 feet beyond a similar rock, more decomposed,
with plicated beds, dipping N. 45° W. 70°. Thisis about 100 feet
north-northwest of the three-mile post. One-tenth mile beyond
the post is a cut in a feldspathic gneiss, weathering almost black
upon the surface, somewhat schistose, dipping 8. 55° E. 50°, and
about .1 mile further a small quarry in similar but more micaceous
gneiss, showing a small distinct anticlinal N. 30° W. 55°, S. 60°
E. 50°, with a downward pitch to the northeast. The border be-
tween the ancient and newer gneiss I believe to be somewhere near
the three-mile post. The slopes are much more gentle until Cheney
Station is reached; this being the floor of the schist valley referred
130 Mr. Hall, however, regards them as the same as the ancient gneiss and
as occupying very irregular areas in Concord, Middletown, Aston, Bethel and
Upper and Lower Chichester ; but, according to my observations, except in
portions of the last three townships, the rocks are identical in the areas differ-
ently colored and are very unlike those in the area to the north colored for
Laurentian. Into Bethel and Upperand Lower Chichester and probably fur-
ther the gabbro area of Delaware extends (F. D. Chester, Bul. of the U. S.
Geol, Survey, No. 59).
288 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
to as heading west of Newtown Square, the Street road crossing the
creek at Westtown Station about half-way between Oakbourne and
Cheney. Six-tenths mile above Cheney on the right bank of the
creek the schists are exposed. At Cheney the hill bounding the
Street road valley on the southeast crosses the creek, as does also the
very irregular county line (Delaware-Chester). The rocks exposed
seem to be almost exclusively large loose masses of a hard gneiss,
mostly hornblendic. They do not resemble those of the ancient
gneiss to the north, nor those of the same (topographic) hill to the
northeast. Blue quartz is absent, the boulder decomposition likewise.
They do resemble the hornblende rocks of Columbia Bridge,
Swarthmore, Darby, etc., and are not improbably altered diorites.
About .5 mile below Cheney and above Locksley Station is a small
cut showing a feature exhibited also to the westward near Concord
Station (Baltimore Central Railroad) on the west branch of Ches-
ter creek. This is a decomposing rock, weathering alternately into
Jaminated very soft schistose layers one inch to eight inches wide,
and layers of small, hard, angular blocks of very hard rock one
inch to four inches wide. Of the latter sixteen were observed in a
space of eight feet. The schistose portion appears to have been a
schistose gneiss; the harder masses, the interior of which appears to
be undecomposed, were examined for me by Mr. Goldsmith, who
classed it as a diorite. Dr. Bascom classes it as a gneissoid gabbro
diorite. Northwest of Concord Station the same alteration is
visible, but on a larger scale. The hard rock here was determined
by Dr. Bascom to bea gabbro diorite. One dyke (?) of it is about
four feet in width. The intermediate strata have all the appear-
ance of decomposed gneiss and mica schist. Near the west branch
of Chester creek, about a mile nearly north of Concordville, Dr.
Charles Schiiffer discovered a single large mass of a gneissoid
gabbro with a reticulated structure. It consisted of feldspar,
quartz and garnet, arranged in narrow straight veins (?) often
several inches long, some parallel, others crossing it at various
angles, and often several in an inch with no general parallelism.
In the triangles and rhomboids thus formed is a black rock, chiefly
hornblende and garnet. A short distance above Locksley Station
is a gneiss 8. 80° E. 50°, then a highly ferruginous rock, followed
by a stratum resembling trap and a gneiss, weathering black, 8.
60° E. = 10°. About .1 mile below Locksley is a large quarry in
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 289
a garnetiferous gneiss, dipping 30° to 70° S.E. In the railroad
cut just below, the same gneiss dips 0° to 20° S.E.
Above Glen Mills similar rocks, but rather more micaceous, are
exposed with southeast dips of 20° to 30°. Below Glen Mills is a
large quarry in similar rock, dipping S.E. + 70°, and another
near Wawa.
Near Glen Mills are outcrops of serpentine on the right bank,
and also about three-quarters of a mile northeast; adjoining the
latter is a considerable outcrop of coarse pegmatite (Sharpless’
quarry) which has been quarried for its feldspar and mica.
Below Wawa and near Lenni on the left bank are extensive out-
crops of serpentine with much coarse feldspar rock, probably oligo-
clase, containing very little quartz, and almost no mica or horn-
blende, being evidently the continuation of the similar rocks west
of Media.
Schists and gneisses not essentially different from those above
continue down the creek, but in many places they are deeply de-
cayed. In these decayed schists amethysts are found, some of much
beauty, also a quartzite filled with small crystals of tourmaline.
Near Morgan’s Station (Dutton’s mill), Dr. J. T. M. Cardeza found
a loose mass, apparently a sandstone, containing elongated quartz
pebbles. This was near the amethyst and tourmaline localities.
On the right bank, near Morgan Station, mica schist with alter-
nations of hornblende schist dips S. 20° W. 70°. Here, in peg-
matite, Mr. Glanding Dailey recently discovered the rare mineral
monazite, its only known occurrence in the region. A little to
the westward was found, loose in the soil, very smal! but brilliant
transparent ruby-red crystals of rutile on colorless quartz crystals.
On the left bank, near Bridgewater Station, is a large quarry in
rock resembling that of Lenni and Glen Riddle, but containing
more mica, with dips S. 60° W. 60° to 90°, S. 65° W. 65°,
while on the right bank a coarse pegmatite has been quarried for
its feldspar and mica. Near Upland a feldspathic gneiss was
quarried, and also between it and Chester. The beds of gneiss of
the Avondale quarries and of Deshong’s and Leiper’s, on Ridley
creek, do not appear on Chester creek. The ground is lower and
they are probably covered.
Between the main stream of Chester creek and the Brandywine
is a region of high ground with few good exposures, but some points
19
290 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1900.
of interest. In the longitude of West Chester the northerly
branch of the ancient gneiss narrows rapidly and in Westtown and
East Bradford townships, its southern border appears to describe
approximately an are of about two miles radius with a centre near
the railroad station in West Chester, serpentine outcrops being not
far from the margin. The Street road valley continues, but not so
distinctly as to the eastward. In it we find the Cambrian sand-
stone and limestone, apparently the outliers of the Jarge areas west
of the Brandywine. ‘The easternmost exposure of the sandstone
is in the road running southwardly from Oakbourne Station, about
a quarter of a mile south of the Street road, on the farm of John
Wyeth.
The exposure is poor, but the rock unmistakable and clearly in
place. Nearly a mile to the westward the Wilmington road crosses
the Street road. On the former sandy schists dip gently southeast
for over a mile, and among them, about a half-mile north of Dil-
worthtown, the sandstone appears in quantity, but its outcrop in
place is concealed. The schists north of it dip 15° to 0° S.E.,
south of it 15° to 30° S.E. The outcrop must benarrow. About
a quarter of a mile west-southwest from this locality, on the farm
of Minshall Sharpless, the sandstone is well exposed in a small
quarry, the rock dipping N. 35° W. = 80°. Southwest of this
about .2 mile, on the road from Dilworthtown to Birmingham Meet-
ing-house, and about .2 mile west-northwest of Dilworthtown, is a
eonsiderable outcrop near the forks of the road, fragments only
being visible. Following the right-hand fork north-northwest
about .7 mile a small limestone quarry with a dip S. 40° E. 50°
is found on a branch of Radley run. This is near the western
border of Thornbury township, about .6 mile south-southeast of
Brinton’s quarry and abovt a quarter of a mile nearly east of Bir-
mingham Meeting-house. South of it are abundant schist frag-
ments, with one outerop in place 8. 30° E. 30°, with abundant
evidence of decomposed mica and hornblende schist. Inasmuch as
along the Street road, the north line of Thornbury township,
schists dip + 15° S.E., it would appear probable that the structure
js monoclinal.
The Brandywine section from the ancient gneiss at the forks
three miles southwest of West Chester is as follows, the general course
of the creek being about 8, 30° E., or nearly on the line of the dip:
Bes Werwe es. om 4s
:
*
}
j
1900.]
Distance.
miles.
0.
il
1
ag
a ae ees
or Go bo bo et Re
or or
ae
“Io ~I
“ce
6c
ce
ce
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 291
Dip.
5S. 60° E. 45°. North of East Branch: Ancient
gneiss.
S. 15° E. 20°. Schistose, porphyritic gneiss.
S. 40° E. 40°. Lenape: Porphyritic with erys-
talline muscovite, and mica
schist.
(S. 60° E. 50°. Hard feldspathic gneiss with con-
N. 40° W. 20°. siderable mica and a little mica
aso) JOS schist, the gneiss schistose and
| Prevailing dip porphyritic with waves and
8. Hi. folds, but no minute plications.
S. 35° E. 55°. Street road: Sandy mica schists
not exposed at the creek, but
to the eastward, and more
largely to the westward, where
they enclose Cambrian sandstone
and limestone.
S. 30° E. 30°. Half a mile above Brinton’s
bridge: Hard plicated gneiss
and hornblende gneiss, gabbro
and pyroxenite.
S. 25° E. 25°. Harvey’s limestone quarry, N.W.
wall: Hard gneiss with mica
schist.
=§. E. = 45°. Harvey's quarry: Limestone.
m. 20° EK. 45°. Harvey's querry, S.E. wall:
Hard gneiss.
S. 30° E. 30°. Hard gneiss, left bank.
8. 10° E. 65°. Schist and gneiss, some porphy-
ritic.
S. 20° E. 70° Same, some coarse porphyritic
to 90°. with decomposing feldspathic
micaceous rocks.
+ §.E. + 45°. Gabbro (?), left bank.
S. 40° E. 45°. Heavy-bedded feldspar and
hornblende gneiss.
Be 20° Be 30%.
S. 30° E. 70°. - Hard plicated gneiss, left bank.
N. 30° W. 40°. |
mNEISO02 We 20°.
S. 40° KE. 45°. Gneiss.
Chadd’s Ford Junction: No
good exposure. To the west-
ward a marked valley with lime-
stone and sandstone.
292 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Distance. Dip.
4.8 miles. S. 70° E. 70°. Garnetiferous schist.
4.9 S. 55° E. 45°. Very schistose gneiss.
5. if S. 60° E. 35°. Schistose gneiss.
DA, 9M S. 70°. Schistose gneiss.
S. 20° E. 70°. Schistose gneiss decomposed.
Deine S. 40° E. 60°. Mica schist and gneiss.
B38) i S. 30° E. 50°. ~Hard hornblende schist and mica
schist. Altered gabbro (?).
Gal’ deat Brookfield Station: Like the
last, but with included masses
of feldspar.
Orpen oS S. 10° E. 70°. Hard mica schist. Loose masses
80°. of quartz and mica as if de-
composed pegmatite.
BeBe if! Cossart Station.
de e Delaware line.
(oS S. 50° E. 50°. Very hard, heavy-bedded mica
schist.
ry Granoque Station.
8.7
ee re N. 50° W. 50°. Micaschist and gneiss in the mid-
dle of a cut, hornblende schist
at both ends. The schist and
gneiss contain red garnets.
wae N°. 40 W. 80°... “Hard heavy-bedded » hornblende
schist and mica schist.
LOMB. °S* Guyancourt Station.
KO fee ras Mica schist gneiss and pegmatite.
ily ee Thin-bedded mica schist.
Ie abet IN. 40°, Hard mica schist and gneiss.
a Winterthur Station.
LRGs) Hard mica schist and gneiss with
a little pegmatite.
Lie Gabbro.
Below Chadd’s Ford the curvatures of the creek are so numerous
and great that the distances on the dip line are probably not
seventy-five per cent. of those given, and between Winterthur and
Cossart not much over fifty per cent.
Tue Scuists AND GNEISSES WEST OF THE BRANDYWINE.
This region is mostly high, the slopes not rugged except toward
the Taiiecs As ake and ge decomposition has altered the surface
Sl Between Ce and Granogue the creek and the railncnd bend in the
form of the letter S and cross the State line three times.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 293
rocks to a considerable depth. On the northern margin near the
ancient gneiss and also at a few scattered and insignificant out crops
further south serpentine appears. In the midst and to the south
the Cambrian sandstone, with adjacent limestone, forms lines of
outcrop; two being about seven miles in length. Almost invariably
the dips are to the southeast, and not steep.
While the principal streams flow from north to south, there are
three east-and-west valleys. Of these the southerly two are lime-
stone valleys, and of these the northerly is the continuation of the
valley mentioned as heading near Newtown Square and followed
by the Street road, a valley of limestone with adjacent sandstone,
the bounding hills being of schist and gneiss. The southerly is a
similar valley, occupied by the Baltimore Central Railroad. The
northernmost of the three is that occupied by Pocopsin creek.
Like the others it is very straight, hut limestone occurs at but one
insignificant locality, a quarter of a mile north of the axis of the
valley.
South of Northbrook a section through about the middle of
Pocopsin township, nearly on the east line of East Marlborough,
and through the middle of Kennett would show, south of the
ancient gneiss, here not over .4 mile wide: (1) serpentine (Pocop-
sin Inn); (2) mica schists with gentle southeast dips, some loose
masses of tale schist, sufficiently abundant to indicate an outcrop,
and limestone (the tale and limestone “on the Larkin farm, about
.5 mile south-southeast of Pocopsin Inn); (3) mica schist, abun-
dant in loose masses but without measurable outcrops; (4) serpen-
tine (one mile nearly south of Pocopsin Inn); (5) the valley of
Pocopsin creek, on which, nearly a mile to the eastward, mica
schists dip S. 20° E. 40°; (6) a mile without exposures except
of soil derived apparently from mica schist; (7) garnetiferous
mica schists dipping 8. 30° E. 40° on the Doe run road, .6 mile
west-northwest of the Red Lion Inn, followed closely by decom-
posed sandy schists, and these by (8) the typical Cambrian sand-
stone, dipping S. 25° E. 15° to S. 28° E. 50°, with sandy mica
schists immediately underlying, dipping S. 20° E. 25° (this sand-
stone to the westward borders the Street road limestone on the
north). A mile to the south is the northerly line of Kennett
township, and in this distance soil only was found. <A quarter of
a mile south of the line, at Marshall’s, now Still’s mill, on the
294 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
east branch of the east branch of Red Clay creek; (9) a very
hard hornblende rock of trap-like aspect, dips (?) S. 25° E. 55°.
This may be traced a mile or more to the eastward, and is probably
an altered diorite. Associated with it are masses of pegmatite.
The exposures of the latter are but of fragments. South of the gneiss
is (10) a decomposed gneiss, with much rusty quartz, and south
of it (11) Cambrian sandstone with quartzite and very sandy
micaceous rock, dipping S. to S. 10° W. 36°. This is just south
of Red Clay creek, where it turns from a nearly south to a west-
southwest direction, and about .3 mile east-northeast of the lime-
stone of the Sharpless quarry. South of the sandstone are (12)
decomposed hornblende and feldspar gneisses, dipping apparently
nearly 0°, with few exposures. The most prominent rock is a very
hard, tough hornblende gneiss, usually visible in large loose masses
only, but largely exposed in place on the east branch of Red Clay
creek at Pierce’s paper mill, a little west of this section line, about
.75 mile southeast of Kennett Square Station. At this point a
single specimen of cancrinite, now in the collection of the Acad-
emy of Natural Sciences, was found many years ago by Mr. Jetteris
and Dr. Isaac Lea. So far as can be observed this hornblende
rock appears in narrow outcrops which cannot be ranged in a sin-
gle line, though a nearly east-and-west line will pass through sev-
eral of them.
These rocks suggest an “altered diorite. They contain plagio-
clastic feldspar, sometimes finely aventurine, also titanite and
chabazite. While this gneiss appears to be the most prominent
rock, it is probably in very much less quantity than a more feld-
spathic gneiss, subject to more speedy decomposition.
This hard gneiss, another outcrop further south, and that at
Still’s mill were regarded by Prof. Rogers as rising in anticlinals
through the schists,“’ by Dr. Frazer as a gneiss older than the
schists,* and by Prof. Lesley as three separated areas of the old
azoic gneiss.
Similar rocks can, however, be traced among the mica schists
into the great gabbro area of Delaware so well described by Prof.
Chester, who cites one locality on the Brandywine just below
127 yp. 77.
LSC OlO, oLG.
14 Hinal Report, I, p. 79.
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 295
Jessup & Moore’s paper mill at which foliated hornblende rock,
much resembling that of ixennett, may be seen between ‘‘ per-
fectly massive gabbro without the least sign of any distinct line of
separation between the two structurally different rocks.’
This is certainly a most interesting locality, confirming very
positively the views of Mr. Chester, who, I believe, was among
the first to urge a plutonic origin for these rocks,** though Prof.
Lewis still more forcibly published the same views, extending them
to other less massive rocks.‘
A section about three miles west of the Jast, or nearly north and
south of Embreeville, shows the absence of the ancieni, gneiss,
which has ended west of Northbrook, and hence a great width of
the schists and gneisses, from the hydromica on the north to and
beyond the Delaware line, a distance of some eleven miles. To
the northward we find hydromica schist, cut by the Downingtown
trap dyke, near the headwaters of Broad Run, West Bradford
township. A half-mile south of Cottage schoolhouse, and .75
mile north of Romansville, these schists, dipping S. 70° E. 70°,
form a high bluff. This seems to be near their southern limit,.
which is characterized by a high ridge extending east-northeast
toward the Brandywine. South of the ridge is a prominent val-
ley, perhaps indicating the margin. This valley, somewhat inter-
rupted it is true, may be followed from Romansville to Hawley’s
mill on the Brandywine, where, as already stated, the two series
may be seen close together with diverse dips. In this valley there
is a very small outcrop of dolomite, colored green by tale or
chlorite, on the farm of Young’s estate, .75 mile west of the
Brandywine.
On Broad run, a quarter of a mile south of this valley, the hard
spangled schists appear prominently, dipping about S. 15°. A
half-mile south of this, on the Strasburg road, are soft mica
schists, with some very feldspathic schistose gneisses, nearly ver-
tical. About a quarter of a mile south of this we reach the line
of limestone outcrops already referred to, extending from Cope’s
quarry, east of the East Branch, to Embreeville, on the West
Branch of the Brandywine, and probabiy to Doe run. These, as
15 F. D. Chester, Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey, No. 59, p. 43.
196 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sct., 1884, p. 248.
_ *T H.C. Lewis, Proc. British Asso. in Nature, October 8, 1885, p. 560.
296 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
elsewhere more fully stated, seem to be overlaid and underlaid by
schists and gneisses, in which is the typical Cambrian sandstone
(Hayes’ quarry, one mile west of the Poorhouse quarry). About
an eighth of a mile north of the Poorhouse quarry, decomposing
schistose gnefsses dip S. 40° E. 45°, hence under the limestone.
The schists over the limestone are from very nearly 0°, perhaps 5°
S.E., to 8. 50° E. 15°. South of the quarry are plicated schis-
tose rocks containing feldspar and mica porphyritically enclosed.
The dips vary from 0° to probably 40° S.E., while one clear dip
near Glen Hall bridge had the unusual direction of N. 70° W.
10° to 40°. One mile southeast of the Poorhouse quarry and .5
mile east-northeast of Glen Hall is an outcrop of steatite and serpen-
tine on the Lamborn farm, just north of a ridge of garnetiferous
schist, the latter dipping S. 50° E. 20° to 30°. The localities south
of the Poorhouse, also Hayes’ quarry, are in Newlin township, the
latter very close to the West Bradford line. Between the Poor-
house quarry and Embreeyille is a low plain about .75 mile by 1.5
miles. It is not improbable that the existence of this plain is due
to the limestone.
While at the Poorhouse quarry the immediately underlying
schists are concealed, at Embreeville they are well and clearly ex-
posed by a cut of the Wilmington & Northern Railroad, not over
a hundred yards north of the limestone quarry. They are
spangled and garnetiferous schists, dipping quite regularly 8. 50°
to 55° E. 30° to 45°. At the west end of the cut is a quarry in a
decomposing, very white feldspar, the relation of which to the
schists is not clear. So far as it appears it is a conformable stra-
tum under or in the garnetiferous schists.
The feldspar has been mined for use in the making of pottery.
It is a ‘‘ soda orthoclase, with a slight admixture of lime feld-
spar and considerable free quartz. ’’ 1s
The limestone dips in nearly the same direction as the schists, 8.
45° to 50° E. 60°. About a hundred yards southeast of the lime-
stone, schists and gneisses with one granitoid stratum, with tour-
maline, dip S. 50° E. 55°. South of this are hills of hard mica
schists, dipping about 45° S.E., rising probably 250 feet above
188 Prof. Thomas C. Hopkins, ‘‘ Feldspars and Kaolins of Eastern Penn-
sylvania,’’ Journal of the Franklin Institute, Vol. CXLVIII, p. 13, July,
1899.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 297
the Brandywine, and exposing, a little north of the summit, much
white and much rusty quartz. The white quartz contains small
erystals of back tourmaline, and seems to form a distinct stratum,
striking about N. 20° E., observable, however, only in loose
masses on the surface.
The summit of the hill and its eastern slope show fragments of
mica schist only, with much quartz, the surface of which is stained
yellow.
About one mile to the eastward of this hill is the extensive out-
crop of enstatite serpentine, coarse pegmatite and trap, the well-
known Newlin corundum locality, noted for its diaspore, beryl,
tourmaline and other minerals besides the corundum. This is less -
than half a mile from the apparent western ending of the ancient
gneiss. The schists close to the ancient gneiss appear to dip away
from it. Thus .2 mile west of Northbrook N. 70° W. 67°, N.
20° W. 25, a little further south nearly W. + 45°, a half-mile
further south + W. + 30°. A half-mile to the west of the last
the southeast dip seems to be resumed.
A mile and a quarter south of Embreeville the north line of
East Marlborough is crossed, and mica schist and coarse pegmatite
occur poorly exposed. Then follows a half-mile of schist soil,
with much loose quartz, but no rock in place, until the Doe run
road is reached,
On the Doe run road, west of Unionville, the soil is of decom-
posed schist. About a half-mile west, a narrow belt of hard gneiss,
with spangled schist, crosses the road. The hard gneiss is only
about ten feet wide; its strike is N. 20° E., dip 90°. The span-
gled schist a little east of it dips 15° S.W. A half-mile further
west the road passes through a cut of garnetiferous mica schists,
dipping S. 30° to 50° E. 40° to 60°, just beyond which and to the
northward is Logan’s limestone quarry, the limestone dipping S.
40° to 45° E. 40° to 50° under the garnetiferous schists. A
little over a hundred yards west of the limestone is an outcrop of
the sandstone dipping 8S. 75° E. 30°.
South of the Unionville-Doe run road, exposures were not found,
but one mile southeast there is a quarry on Milton Thornbury’s
farm at the head of the east branch of Red Clay creek, showing
a micaceous gneiss S. 60° E. 15°, with a vein of quartz dipping
&8)°.W. 70°.
298 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Three-quarters of a mile south of this quarry is the Street road,
which here, according to Breou’s map, runs 8. 85° W. parallel to
the south line of East Marlborough township; on this road sandy
mica schists, with typical Cambrian sandstone, dipping S. 5 E.
15° to 20°, may be seen. South of this is the Street road lime-
stone belt. At Taylor’s quarry, about a mile and a quarter west-
southwest of Taggart’s cross-roads (Willowdale Post-office), the
contact of the limestone with overlying mica schists (locally known
as firestone and used for lining limekilns), is well shown. The
mica schist dips S. 30° E. 20°, the limestone about the same or
more gently. In Pusey’s north quarry, which is about a thousand
‘ feet S. 50° W. from Taylor’s, the same schists appear to the south-
east, and to the northwest mica schist, dipping N. 35° W. 70°.
In the northeast corner the limestone dips N. 25° W. 15°, while on
the south side it is S. 25° E. 50°, a clear anticlinal, if these dips
may be trusted, but the plications in the limestones of this region
are so numerous that they probably cannot. The rocks immedi-
ately adjacent to the limestone on the northeast and southwest are
not alike.
About 500 feet southeast of the Taylor quarry, mica schist’and
gneiss dip S. 50° E. 50° with plications, and about a mile south-
southeast on Red Clay creek, close to the north line of Kennett
township, there is a quarry on the left bank in a very hard close-
grained mica schist, S. 50° E. 45°, while just below on the right
bank is one in a hard biotite gneiss S. 40°. South of this is the
mica schist hill on which the village of Kennett Square stands,
known to the westward as the Toughkenamon hill. This seems to
be chiefly of mica schist, some highly micaceous, some very sandy
and approaching closely the typical Cambrian sandstone, some
quite garnetiferous. The sandy varieties are best shown on the
road running north from Kennett, also north of the State road and
on the latter close to the west branch of Red Clay creek, .75 mile
west of Kennett Square, and on the left bank of the creek, west of
the State road (the main street of Kennett Square).
Kennett Square Station is at the southern edge of the village,
and about ninety feet below the State road. The railroad occupies
the valley in which limestone occurs, both to the east and to the
west. South of this is the hard, rather coarse hornblende gneiss
before spoken of, well exposed! at Pierce’s paper mill, .75 mile
southeast of the station, as stated in the preceding section.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 299
South of these hard gneisses the schists occupy most of the area,
and near the Delaware border there is another line of limestone
outcrops which extends from Jackson’s quarry, Hockessin, Dela-
ware, through Brown’s quarry to the Nevins’ quarries, with schis-
tose and garnetiferous gneiss certainly overlying and apparently
underlying the limestone.
South of the Nevins’ quarries are mica schists, poorly exposed,
covering a large area in northwestern Delaware. In these, be-
tween two and three miles south of the line of the Nevins’ quar-
ries and the Brown quarry, are the Eastburn limestone quarries,
apparently with schists above and below the limestone, and perhaps
interstratified, as the three quarries with southeast dips are appar-
ently separated by schists and lie in a northwest-southeast line.
The south quarry shows plications, but a general southeast dip.
One satisfactory measurement was S. 40° E. 25°, but the north-
west side of the quarry is a wall of mica schists dipping N. 65°
W. 65°. but not over 200 feet northwest of this is the second,
and probably largest, quarry; no rock showing but the limestone
dipping S. 40° to 50° E. 20°.
Before discussing the next section it may be expedient to trace
to the westward the northern edge of the mica schists, which was
previously traced from the Schuylkill to Broad run one mile north
of Romansville, West Bradford township, Chester county. About
three miles to the westward, on the West Branch of the Brandy-
wine, the northerly border of the mica schists is well defined, the
ereek itself seeming to flow nearly on the line east of Modena,
the hydromica schist on the left or north bank dipping nearly
south about 45°, while the hard mica schists on the right bank dip
quite irregularly 8. 80° W. 30°, S. 20° KE. 50°, S. 10° W. 20°,
S. 40° W. 20°, S. 35° W. 30°. On the right bank of the creek
.2 mile north of Mortonville a quarry has been opened in a hard
mica schist, in which the quartz grains are elongated. West of
this the Strasburg road seems to be in the mica schists to a point
northeast of Ercildoun.
Buck run affords excellent exposures. The hydromica appears
about .25 mile northwest of Newlin Station dipping 8. 50° E. 80°,
while .15 mile above the station the mica schists dip 8. 25° to 50°
E. 20° to 45°. West of this the hydromica schists extend along
the Highland road, while a mile to the south of that road the
300 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF {1900.
mica schists form low cliffs on the left (northwest) bank of Fawn
run, south of Harmony schoolhouse.
In West Fallowfield township the line is between Cochranville
and Hudson’s grist mill on Officer’s run, near the Gap and New-
port turnpike, and on the Octorara in the vicinity of Steeleville.
Through East Fallowfield, Highland and West Fallowfield
townships, the mica schists adjoining the hydromica, where not
decomposed, are heavy-bedded, largely of the spangled or con-
choidal variety, dipping usually to the southeast less than 50°, best
shown along the West Branch of the Brandywine, where they form
some high and steep cliffs.
South of this border of hard rocks are more quartzose and sandy
schists often containing garnets, from which the harder schists are
nearly free.
A section about four miles west of Embreeville, that is nearly
south of Coatesville, passing through East Failowfield, West Marl-
borough, Londoa Grove, Franklin and London Britain, and the
valleys of Buck run, Doe run and the east branch of White
Clay creek, shows many alternations of the schists and gneisses.
To the north is the hydromica schist; following it, well exposed
on Fawn run and Buck run, are the heavy-bedded mica schists
with irregular dips and then the Doe run valley.
In West Bradford, Newlin and East Fallowfield are outcrops of
the only distinct chlorite schist I have observed in Chester county.
Except its intense green color it resembles the more evenly bedded
mica schists, but can be quarried in flat slabs or flagstones used
chiefly for paving walks, ete. The best-known outcrop is Ful-
ton’s quarry on the Speakman farm in Newlin township, about .4
mile north of Harvey’s bridge on the Brandywine, and about .6
mile nearly west of the Hayes sandstone quarry. It also outcrops
on the Strasburg road about a quarter of a mile east-northeast of
Mortonville, and also on the road from Mortonville to Doe run.
It dips 8. 30° E. 20° at Fulton’s quarry and appears to be the same
at the other outcrops, though less favorable for measurement. Mr.
Walter J. Baldwin informs me that it occurs in West Bradford a
little over a half-mile southeast of Romansville, and also south-
southwest, the former its easternmost exposure, the latter on the
farm of R. M. Jefferis, where it has been quarried, and that there
is another quarry, Young’s, in Newlin township a little west of
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 301
Fulton’s. Its margins are concealed, so that no exact measure-
ment was possible, but apparently it is not a hundred feet thick.
The Doe run region differs markedly from the rest of the area,
though the high hill seems to be of the same gneisses and schists.
It was considered more fully when discussing the limestones. One
view of it is that its limestones are the continuation of the Cope-
Guest line merely interrupted for a very short distance by an anti-
elinal of sandstone and schists, that the schists which overlie the
limestone overspread the whole area west of Doe run. The former
is probably the fact, the latter more doubtful as some of the rocks
underlying the limestones may be traced into this western area in
which no limestone has been discovered. It is certain, however,
that hydromica schists like those which bound the Chester Valley
on the south do not overspread the area as represented on the map
in C*, and in the text, page 105, et seq.
This western area requires further and careful study. I have
not examined it as closely as the more easterly part, but so far as
observed the rocks are mica schists, often garnetiferous with but
little gneiss, and no hydromica schist such as forms the northerly
part of the South Valley hill. The rocks are much decomposed,
good exposures being few and far between, and even outcrops
comparatively rare.
A few may be mentioned: East of Gum Tree, Highland town-
ship, mica schist and garnetiferous mica schist, N. 55° W. 55°.
East of Rosenvick, in the same township, mica schist with
staurolite; adip opposite Michael McLoughlin’s is N. 60° W. 20°.
On the line between Penn and Londonderry townships, north of
_ Townsend’s mill, hornblende schist poorly exposed.
On the middle branch of White Clay creek, south of Town-
send’s mill, a very dark mica schist.
On the road to Oxford, about a mile and a half west of Jenner-
ville, Penn township, a cut in garnetiferous mica schist, S. 65°
E. 45°.
In Upper Oxford township, on the same road near Lincoln
University, a cut in mica schist near a branch of Big Elk creek.
In Lower Oxford township, a half-mile north a little west of
Elk View Station, on a mill race, very hard garnetiferous mica
schist ; dip uncertain.
Near the headwaters of the west branch of Doe run, near the
302 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
northwest corner of Londonderry township, on the farm of Susan
Cochran is a rock differing from any other of the region. Itisa
very quartzose biotite schist, the layers being very well defined and
often twenty or thirty to the inch, and these layers excessively
plicated. Across these layers are mica partings dividing the rack
into masses with roughly parallel sides. There appears to be but a
single outcrop covering perhaps a quarter of an acre.
South of the Doe run valley is a hill traversed east and west by
the State road. Mica schist with much loose quartz seems to be
the only rock. Three-quarters of a mile south is the Street road.
Along this mica schists dipping 30° to 45° S. 30° to 40° W, are
exposed with trap, while both east and west of the southwest dips
are southeast dips. A little west of Cook’s grist mill a schistose
gneiss dips S. 30° I. 50°, and near by a very sandy schist about
S. + 40° E. 15°. This is about a half-mile north of Chatham.
At Chatham we reach the westerly extension of the London Grove
outcrop of Cambrian sandstone, dipping S. 25° E. 55°. South of
this no exposures were seen except at the limestone quarries rang-
ing through the central part of London Grove township. The
schist outcrops are so associated with those of limestone that they
have been discussed with them. In brief, there are rather high hills
of garnetiferous schists, with pegmatite and sandstone, all dips
being southeast and gentle, some of the schists being apparently
below the limestone and some very clearly above it. Similar rocks
and gneisses continue to the Delaware gabbro area, being hard and
forming bold bluffs near Landenberg, and surrounding, or at least
on both north and south sides of, another limestone area. Usually
these are not well exposed, but along Red Clay creek they form
precipitous banks resembling those near Landenberg, dipping auite
regularly S. 60°-70° E. 60°-70°, the rocks being undecomposed
and hard, but to the westward they are decomposed and soft.
V. Tue Scuists AND GNEISSES LYING BETWEEN THE SANDSTONE
OF THE NortTaH VALLEY HILL.AND THE LIMESTONE.
These have been so referred to in discussing the adjacent rocks
that they require little more than mention here. The fact then is
that we have, between the well-marked Cambrian of the North
Valley Hill and the limestone, sandy mica schists, rarely carrying
feldspar and tourmaline, indistinguishable in their appearance and
on™ ole
5
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 303
lithological characteristics from some of the schists of the Phila-
dephia and Manayunk groups; especially do they resemble the
sandy schists of the Chestnut Hill group, and those on the Schuyl-
kill below Laurel Hill, and in the cuts of the Schuylkill Valley
Railroad southeast of West Laurel Hill.
VI. THe Scuists anD GNeEIsses NoRTH OF THE SANDSTONE.
At Valley Forge, northwest of the sandstone, as has been stated,
are slaty and schistose rocks, northwest of which is a conglomerate
of blue quartz pebbles, resembling very closely the lower Cambrian
conglomerate so well exposed near Willow Grove and to the south-
westward.
Only six miles to the westward is the Pickering creek gap. We
find here the easternmost of a series of outcrops of hard, usually
schistose gneisses which prevail thence westward far into Lancas-
ter county, bounded northwestward, in their easterly part, by
the northerly ancient gneiss, and their westerly by the hill of
Cambrian sandstone which stretches from west of the Gap in
Lancaster county to Wagontown, Chester county. These vary
much in their constitution as shown in Williams’ quarry near
Aldham, Charlestown township, where they dip S. 50° to 60° E,
60° to 65°, and in the adjacent railroad cut S. 80° E. 23° with
great regularity and are cut by a dyke eighty feet wide of trap.
This gneiss is very evenly bedded. It is sometimes hornblendic
and sometimes highly feldspathic, indeed almost entirely a white
feldspar; sometimes the feldspar is flesh-colored. This feld-
spathic variety contains small quantities of epidote.
I have termed it provisionally the Chester county gneiss.
Westward similar rocks are shown in all the gaps in the hill.
Some of the feldspathic varieties have weathered into kaolin, but
as a rule they are hard and undecomposed. A common variety to
the westward resembles a pegmatite but has a brecciated aspect;
beds of vitreous quartz occur and are quarried. It appears to
widen westward and to occupy much of the space between the
sandstone of the North Valley Hill and that of Copper Mine
Ridge in western Chester and eastern Lancaster counties.
THE SERPENTINES.
As to none of the rocks of this region has there been a greater
‘diversity of opinion than as to the serpentines, including in these
304 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
the magnesian silicates, usually hydrous, of which serpentine is
the type. Mr. Hall, after yery careful study in Philadelphia,
Montgomery and Delaware counties, concluded that all the serpen-
tines of the region were of the same geological horizon, and that
one of the most recent.’ Dr. Frazer recognized the two different
positions in which they occur, and states that the hypothesis that
the serpentine is a layer of magnesian schist altered in place, while
the most satisfactory in many respects, does not account for all
that may be observed with regard to it.” Dr. Genth'* showed
that most of the serpentine was derived from the alteration of
peridotite or bronzite.
Prof. Lesley thought them due, in part at least, to a meta-
morphism of the ‘‘ tale mica’’ (hydromica) schist formation, due
to the trap dyke which occasionally is close to the serpentine. My
own views have already been published,’” but in Prof. Lesley’s
Final Report (p. 107) are not correctly stated: ‘‘ And this agrees
pretty well with all Mr. Rand’s observations of the serpentines of
Delaware and Chester counties, which he shows pretty clearly to
be interbedded among the ancient gneisses of thas region.’’
It was my aim“ to distinguish the hard, nearly black serpen-
tines, derived chiefly from enstatite or bronzite, which I believe do
occur either in or on the margin of the ancient gneiss, from those
that are clearly in the mica schists and at some distance from the
gneiss. These are usually of a lighter color, with less serpentine
proper and with tale, steatite and antholite, which are rare in the
former, aud are probably altered peridotites in large part. The
serpentine north of Easton, by far the best exposed of any in the
region, appears at first sight to be interbedded in the ancient
gneiss, though I am convinced that the theory of Dr. Frederick B.
Peck,’ that it is due to the alteration of igneous rocks, and per-
169 (5, pp. 13 and 14.
10 GED, eae.
161 Second Geol. Survey of Pa., B., I, pp. 62, 113; Amer. Jour., Sec. (2),
XXXIII, 199.
162 Second Geol. Survey of Pa., Assoc. Report, 1886, IV, p. 1611; Pree.
Acad. Nat. Sci. of Phila., 1896, p. 21, 1890, p. 76, e¢ seg.
163 Second Geol. Survey of Pa., 1886, IV, p. 1611.
‘«Tf these steatite and serpentine belts’’ (the Philadelphia steatite and
the LaFayette serpentine) ‘‘ be compared, their unlikeness seems to point to
a different origin... .. The serpentine belt has undoubtedly resulted
from the alteration of enstatite.’’
16¢ Private communication to the author.
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ° 805
haps also of adjacent gneiss along a zone of faulting and shearing,
is in aJl probability the true one. I desire frankly to admit my
mistake in regard to the supposed pseudomorphs after staurolite in
the steatite quarry belt. The late Dr. Williams examined my
specimens and identified them as pseudomorphs after olivine, and
with this Dr. Bascom’s observations of sections agree; so that
Fic. 6. Serpentine after Olivine. Lafayette, Pa.
there seems no doubt that all the serpentines in southeast Pennsyl-
vania are altered igneous rocks, either pyroxenites or peridotites.
Fig. 6 is from a photograph by Dr. Schiiffer of a specimen from
Prince’s soapstone quarry.
* Proc. Acad. Nat Sci., Phila., 1896, p. 219.
20
306 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Mr. Hall, after examining the northerly Radnor belt, modified
his views, for he wrote (Annual Report, 1886, IV, p. 1617): <‘* In
all probability there are two groups of serpentines.”’
The change of pyroxenite into serpentine’ is followed at many
localities by the change of the serpentine into quartz, usually in
cellular masses and sometimes in stalactites. Fig. 7 is of a speci-
men from the Philadelphia and West Chester road, a mile east of
Newtown Square, photographed by Dr. Schiffer.
Fic. 7. Quartz after Serpentine. One mile east of Newtown Square.
To this recapitulation may be added some notes of observations
made since those papers were written.
THE Outcrops In CHESTER County WEST AND SouTH OF THE
GREAT BeLt Nortu or West CHESTER.
1. Cope’s Serpentine. This is on the land of Caleb Cope, about
a mile northwest of West Chester, and is referred to in C*, p. 89,
in a quotation from Rogers as Cobb’s serpentine. I described this,
166 Second Geol. Survey of Pa., Annual Report, 1886, p. 1614.
ve
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 307
in one of the papers referred to, as occupying a narrow stratum
in a synelinal of mica schists overlying a rock, apparently of the
ancient gneiss, though not so characteristic as to be beyond doubt,
and lying a very short distance north of undoubted ancient gneiss.
Further examination has satisfied me that the rock underlying
the steatite is not as supposed, but merely a portion of the belt of
hard gneiss which lies north of the serpentine further east, and
which outerops on the Brandywine above Cope’s bridge, referred
to by Mr. Hall as resembling the rocks of southern Delaware
county." It seems to be but a local variation of the schistose
gneiss, and is comparatively small in quantity.
Another occurrence of steatite, but of still less quantity, was
observed about a half-mile north of Cope’s, and the same distance
east of Copeland schoolhouse, where a narrow belt of tale schist
was embedded in the mica schist. These seem to have no relation
to the great serpentine belt.
2. Black Horse Serpentine. About 1.7 miles west of West
Chester the Strasburg road, having descended the gneiss hill on
which that city lies, crosses Black Horse run about a half-mile
southwest of the Cope locality and ascends a low hill on the sum-
mit of which stands the Black Horse Inn, an old Jandmark. This
is referred to (C*. p. 89) as follows: ‘‘ A still more trivial Jocal-
ity of steatite is at the Black Horse tavern on the road to Taylor’s
ford.** Ii is on the same general line with the previously men-
tioned localities of magnesian rocks.”’
The rocks here are fairly exposed in the road cutting, and are
microscopically heayy-bedded hornbiende schist with massive
hornblende, much of which has undergone deep decomposition.
Under the microscope thin sections show besides the hornblende
olivine and hypersthene, indicating a plutonic origin. In the de-
composed rock the steatitic mineral occurs in seams, from the
thickness of a knife-blade to an inch or more. No serpentine was
167 “Tn the vicinity of Copesville, East Bradford township, the rocks
exposed along the east branch of the Brandywine creek are a coarse mica-
ceous gneiss identical with those on the southern edge of Delaware county.
Syenite is found in large quantities in the micaceous gneiss at the north of
Copesville. Its occurrence is similar to that as found in the vicinity of the
White Horse Tavern in Ridley township, Delaware county ’’ (C*, p. 61).
188 Probably intended for Copesville or Cope’s bridge. Iam informed that
Taylor’s ford is in another part of the county and that this crossing of the
Brandywine was not known by that name.
308 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
observed nor any steatite except in the thin seams. This outcrop
is unlike any other of the region. In parts the hornblende has a
massive trap-like character, but other portions seem to be distinctly
foliated with strike of N. 40° to 60° E., dip uncertain.
3. Worth Serpentine. This locality, noted by Rogers and
barely mentioned by a quotation from Rogers (in C*, p. 89), is of
interest, inasmuch as the relation of the rocks so very closely coin-
cides with what may be observed in Delaware county, the ancient
gneiss axis being absolutely continuous. Like the Radnor serpen-
tine, it forms a prominent hill, striking + S. 40° W., dying down
steeply westward at a small affluent of the East Branch of the
Brandywine. The locality is on the Worth farm, about one mile
S. 30° W. of Copesville, or Cope’s bridge. To the south of it
the gneiss is prominent, though not visible in place close to it. On
the north a considerable dyke of trap, probably the diabase of the
Conshohocken dyke, appears within 300 feet, and then the gneisses
and mica schists dipping southeast or toward the serpentine. The
visible outcrop is not over 1000 feet in length; it is visibly 500
feet to 400 feet broad. It is distinctly foliated and dips N. 30 to
40° W. 30° to 65°.
A curious occurrence here is a stratum of serpentine of no un-
usual appearance, bui containing disseminated magnetite in such
abundance as to exhibit strong polarity.
About a mile and a half southwest of the Worth serpentine the
West Branch of the Brandywine and the Wilmington & Northern
Railroad, which here follows its right bank, give numerous and
good exposures of the gneiss on the southeast and of the schists on
the northwest, but no serpentine is visible. A mile further south-
west, near Northbrook, the serpentine again appears, and at this
point on both sides of the gneiss, which is here only a quarter of
a mile wide but forming a high hill. The outcrop of serpentine
—or rather outcrops, for there appear to be two on the northwest
side of the gneiss—have not, I think, been previously described.
They are inconspicuous and lie respectively S. 50° W. five-
eighths, and S. 60° W. one-half mile from Northbrook, on a road
running south-southwest, nearly parallel with and a little west of —
the Newlin-Pocopsin township line, from the Brandywine just west
of Northbrook to the State road. Enstatite or bronzite accom-
panies the serpentine. About a quarter of a mile north of these
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES. OF PHILADELPHIA. 309
a greenish mica schist dips +45° nearly due west. At North-
brook a road runs nearly south to the State road at Pocopsin Inn,
a point about a half-mile northeast of these outcrops. Near this
road the gneiss is exposed in place in the bed of a brook on the
northeast. Southeast of it and close to the summit and to the
State road signs of serpentine again appear, together with the feld-
spar porphyritic rock which appears at so many serpentine locali-
ties. The occurrence is so remarkable that I copy in full from my
notebook:
South of Northbrook, heavy-bedded gneiss in bed of brook N.
RGSAWE 75°.
South of this, ascending a steep hill, no rock in place but abun-
dant gneiss fragments for .2 mile. Then, at about 300 feet north
of the State road at Pocopsin Inn, loose honeycomb quartz was
seen, then as follows:
10’. Serpentine in gutter of road, not well exposed, but
apparently in place ;
20’. Concealed;
20’. Mica schists, decomposed, poorly exposed ;
40’. Schistose gneiss, highly feldspathic and full of nodules
of feldspar (probably orthoclase) mostly one-eighth
to one-half inch in diameter, but some two inches,
the rock much decomposed, dip + 20° S.E. It
varies from nearly mica schist to almost pure
feldspar;
3’. Feldspar (?) decomposed into nodules, with a stratum
+ 35 inches of a soapy schist;
50’. Mica schists with interbedded schistose gneiss, not
porphyritic. Overlying this (topographically) is
apparently the same rock decomposed, and, within
three feet of the undecomposed, tale schist in loose
masses;
50’. Mica schists, dip steeper southeast and then vertical,
then = 70° N.W.
These were observed on the westerly and higher side of the road,
where the exposures were best. On the easterly side .was tale
schist, about ten inches wide, clearly intercalated in the mica schist
and enclosing feldspar, decomposing apparently into the talcose
material.
From this to the State road was concealed, but on the State
road a quarter of a mile further west the serpentine makes a
well-known and conspicuous outcrop, and here the porphyritic
310 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
schistose gneiss or granulite, with spangled schists, appears east of
the serpentine and dips E. 10°.
West of this on the State road, close to a road leading north-
west to Glen Hall, is an insignificant outcrop, to the west and
north of which schists poorly exposed dip northwestwardly prob-
ably under 30°.
Going northwest on this latter road, and looking eastward, the
westerly end of Brag Hill (gneiss) may be seen as a promontory.
Close to the road running nearly west from Northbrook to the corun-
dum mines, the schists form the summit of a high hill, on the
strike of Brag Hill, and in this to the westward serpentine with
enstatite or bronzite appears, with much aplite, granite and peg-
matite, with some trap, covering an area over a mile in length and
of uncertain width, probably between a quarter and half a mile
wide. It is in this that the large quantities of corundum and
accompanying minerals have been found for which Newlin is
famous; large quantities of feldspar are now being obtained from
surface openings.
This is the westernmost exposure of serpentine adjacent to the
ancient gneiss, and it will be observed that as the gneiss disappears
beneath the schists, the flanking serpentine seems to unite in this
large outcrop directly in the strike of the gneiss.
We ought here to find evidence of the structure, but the dips in
the schist are obscure. It is sure, however, that we have the con-
tinuous ancient gneiss from near Trenton to this point, and that on
both sides of it for a distance of nearly twenty-five miles we have
outcrops of serpentine of closely similar character, not continuous
throughout, but often so for miles, and in all cases where outcrops
can be observed very close to the edge of the gneiss. At times
between the gneiss and the serpentine there can be found a thin
outcrop of the spangled schists or gneiss, and especially the feld-
spathie porphyritie variety. Beyond the serpentine, on both
sides, aresthe garnetiferous and spangled schists in large quantity,
which, or the feldspar porphyritic varieties, appear to divide the
serpentine whenever, as southeast of Malvern, at Sconneltown,
and at Strode’s mill, it appears in double outerops.
Following the southeasterly margin of the ancient gneiss east-
northeasterly from the serpentine at Pocopsin Inn, we find the next
outcrop at Sconneltown, about two miles southwest of West Ches-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. oll
ter, where the adjacent rocks are similar—the hard ancient gneiss
on the northwest, the softer schists and very feldspathic gneiss on
the southeast.
About a half-mile nearly southeast of the Sconneltown outcrop
are those at Strode’s mill. These are two, close together. The
ancient gneiss is apparent within less than a quarter of a mile
north of the larger outcrop on the right bank of Plum run, but
the road from Sconneltown to Strode’s mill does not expose the
hard gneiss, but only soft schistose gneiss, some highly feldspathic.
These have a dip of about 35° S.E. Within ten feet southeast
of the serpentine is a small outcrop of the massive hornblende rock
which appears at several outcrops of the serpentine. About .1
mile further southeast are schistose, very feldspathic gneisses with
a coarse granite of reddish feldspar and quartz S. 70° to 75° E.
00°, then another outcrop of serpentine, followed by coarse gneiss
dipping 30° to 50° N.W., beyond which schistose gneiss, feldspathic
and hornblendie (but to all appearance not the ancient gneiss),
dips 8. 10° W. 20°, forming Osbourne’s Hill, in which years ago
a mine was opened for manganic oxide derived from the decompo-
sition of a massive manganesian garnet.
About a mile further southeast is Brinton’s quarry, which will
be discussed hereafter as its serpentine appears not to belong to the
range of outcrops under consideration.
From Strode’s mill the border of the ancient gneiss passes nearly
east-northeast, but along it no serpentine appears for some six
miles. At this point, the southwest corner of Willistown town-
ship, is a well-known and extensive outcrop, where the Street road
diverges from the Philadelphia and West Chester road. The
ancient gneiss is to the northwest, but apparently separated from
the serpentine by spangled schist containing garnets and pebbles
(?) of quartz and feldspar.
About two miles to the eastward is the well-known ‘‘ Castle
Rock ’’ of massive enstatite or bronzite, forming a precipitous
cliff on the right (west) bank of Crum creek, while on the left is
serpentine and much honeycomb quartz from its decomposition.
East of this serpentine, which covers but a small area, is a narrow
outcrop of the gneiss, followed by another outcrop of serpentine
poorly exposed near the top of the hill, 1.5 miles west of Newtown
Square, beyond which the gneiss again appears. Except of the
312 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
gneiss, all the prominent outcrops are on the south side of the
Philadelphia and West Chester road. The gneiss is exposed in
the road and on both sides of it. It isin this vicinity, but per-
haps not far east of Willistown Inn, that the gneiss appears to
project toward the west-southwest a prong which forms a high ridge
south of the valley through which the Street road runs, and the
floor of which is of schistose rocks. On Crum creek, which flows
southeast, this prong is nearly two miles wide, and on its southeast
border are the Blue Hill and Marple outcrops of serpentine, which
ean be traced northeast to a probable connection with the LaFay-
ette belt.” South of the serpentine outcrops mentioned are a
number of exposures in both Delaware and Chester counties.
These are mostly small, scattered and, with few exceptions, insig-
nificant compared with those to the northward. Those east of
Chester creek have been fully described.” Those in Delaware
county west of Chester creek are shown on Mr. Hall’s map, C’.
All of them appear to be in the schists and schistose gneisses, and
they are of rock, usually light-colored and much softer than that
near the ancient gneiss, tale and antholite being often more
abundant than true serpentine, like the southerly outcrops to
the westward. Some show merely a small area of honeycomb
quartz. On but few of them have quarries been opened.
Probably the largest exposure is on the Smith's bridge
road, .1 mile east of Elam. Here some quarrying has been done
in a light-colored serpentine, very much jointed and showing abun-
dance of slickensides, on the Husband farm; east-northeast of it
.2 is hornblende schist.
Bullock’s quarry, in Birmingham township, Delaware county,
one mile west-northwest of Elam, shown on the map C° as serpen-
tine, was not in serpentine but in limestone.
In southeastern Chester county somewhat similar outcrops occur.
Of these the most important is that in which Brinton’s quarry’™
has been opened in a pale-green serpentine, so uniform in texture
and free from quartz that it is sawed into shape for building pur-
poses by a toothed circular saw nearly as s rapidly as if it were
169 Proc. Ey ie Nat. Sei t., 1885, p. 407.
" Tbid., March 25, 1890, p. 100, ete.
i pp. 63, 298, 299 ; C*, Plates xiii and xiv. Probably more serpen-
tine for building pur poses has been obtained from this quarry than from any
other in the United States.
9
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 313
wood. After sawing probably two square feet of surface in about
three minutes, the teeth of the saw were quite cool to the touch:
The rock is much jointed, so that there is a great deal of waste,
but much valuable stone is procured. A feature of the outcrop
is a huge mass of feldspathic rock, looking like a dyke. It is
mostly plagioclastic feldspar with tourmaline and a little quartz.
Occasional beryls occur.
“The nearest visible rock southeast of the serpentine is on the
Street road about .2 mile from the quarry, a spangled gneiss in
thin beds, the partings being nearly plane surfaces.
In 1892 a cut was made southward into the quarry, giving a
good exposure of the adjacent rock on the north. Next to the
serpentine was a narrow selvyage of decomposing chloritic rock,
then a highly schistose gneiss, with abundant feldspar in rounded
masses, then a vein or dyke of coarse very feldspathic granite, of
which the mica, probably originally biotite, is now Jefferisite, then
a decomposing schistose gneiss dipping N. 40° W. 65°, or away
from the serpentine. East of Brinton’s, trivial outcrops are said
to occur within a mile.
About two miles northeast of Brinton’s and east-southeast of the
old Pleasant Grove schoolhouse, fragments of a light-colored ser-
pentine are abundant in the soil. A small quarry for building
stone was wrought in ‘this vicinity on the farm of Mr. James S.
Rhoads. It is now filled in. All these are almost certainly in
direct continuation of the serpentine at Brinton’s quarry, which,
however, does not appear on Chester creek, Jess than half a mile
to the eastward.
West of the Brandywine and south of the margin of the ancient
gneiss are several outcrops. Of these, the most conspicuous is
that at Pocopsin Schoolhouse, Pocopsin township, about a’ mile
west-southwest from the Brandywine at Lenape. A hard dark
serpentine forms two quite conspicuous hills, surrounded appar-
ently by schistose porphyritic gneiss, and accompanied by a coarse
tourmaline-bearing granite. Nothing but the serpentine is well
exposed. West of this, a well-marked valley, occupied by Pocop-
sin creek and by a parallel public road, leading from Lenape to
Marlboroughville, trends a little south of west, very nearly parallel
with the Street road valley and with the southeasterly boundary of
314 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Pocopsin township. In this valley are two well-marked outcrops
of serpentine.
One of these lies southwest of Locust Grove and about 2.2 miles
west-southwest of Pocopsin Schoolhouse upon a small branch of ~
Pocopsin creek, quite near its mouth, and has an apparent irregu-
jar southeast dip. One measured was 8. 45° E. = 80°. The
outcrop is small, but a quarry was opened onit. The serpentine is
much jointed and rather light in color. No other rock is exposed
near by. A little less than a mile to the eastward is a quarry in
mica schist S. 20° E. 40°.
The other lies 1.25 miles further west-southwest, and about a
half-mile nearly south of Marlborough Meeting-house in East
Marlborough township, very near the head of Pocopsin creek. It
is interesting because contact is shown with the garnetiferous mica
schist on the northwest, dipping S. 30° W. 30°. The schist near
the contact seems to have been changed in part into serpentine,
and the strike changes suddenly from southeast to east-southeast.
The serpentine is of a dull yellowish green and has been quarried
to a small extent.
The two localities are on a line about a mile south of the Pocop-
sin Inn serpentine, which is near the margin of the ancient gneiss.
About half-way between is an outcrop of tale schist, north of lime-
stone on the L. M. Larkin farm, near the Pocopsin-Newlin town-
ship line and about a mile south of Northbrook Station, Wilming-
ton & Northern Railroad In the adjacent soil are abundant frag-
ments of mica schist and gneiss, with some highly feldspathic
gneiss and some decomposing hornblende rock.
About a mile and a quarter northwest of Northbrook Station,
hence northwest of the ancient gneiss, on the Lamborn farm, is an
outcrop of serpentine and steatite, the latter used by the Indians for
the manufacture of pots. The outcrop is not large. South of it
isa ridge of garnetiferous mica schist dipping 8. 30° E. 20° to
30°, so that we have here a very remarkable repetition of the rocks
of Radnor and Lower Merion.
1
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. BL!
Chester county. Delaware county.
N. ee Poorhouse Limestone Jf Stacker’s
Schists, Soe at GUAT Y;:. Schists, heen | quarry.
Steatite Steatite ) 6 ;
Schists, \ .--. 3 Lamborn’s. Schists, t 2 Judge Hare’s.
Serpentine, .... Northbrook. Serpentine, .... RadnorStation.
Ancient gneiss, .. South of Ancient gneiss, . . . South of Rad-
Northbrook. nor Station.
Serpentine Pocopsin Serpentine Rosemont to La-
} a 5-6 Inn. fayette,
Schists, Schists, Bryn Mawr.
S. Serpentine, ... . Pocopsin Serpentine and stea- Soapstone quar-
creek. tite, ry belt.
This may be only accidental coincidence, but it is curious.
There is an outcrop of tale schist and steatite very close to the
west line of West Bradford township on Buck and Doe run, about
a quarter of a mile from its mouth and about a mile south of Mor-
tonville. There is mica schist ou both sides; dips of N. 20° E.
45° and N. 85° E. 50° were observed.
Very recently Mr. Walter J. Baldwin pointed out to me an out-
crop of serpentine apparently within the hydromica schist, or on its
southern edge. It ison the Steele farm, near the west line of West
Bradford township and a mile and a half northwest of Romans-
ville, on the second road north of the Strasburg road and the first
road south of the Highland road. It is light green in color,
weathering nearly white. Most of it is intersected by numerous
irregular joint planes along which decomposition has begun. The
masses not so intersected are very tough. It forms the nose of a
hill on the south side of the road, and is visible about 1000
feet east and west and 400 feet north and south, the hili striking
about S. 70° W. No adjacent rock is exposed, the nearest being
the hydromica schist.
In the southwestern corner of Chester county, extending thence
into Lancaster county on the west and into Maryland on the south
and southwest, is a series of very extensive outcrops, perhaps the
best known of any in the State, as in them were Woods’ chrome
mine, Lowe’s mine, the line pit, etc., the extensive sand chrome
washings and the mines of magnesite. deweyite, etc., which sup-
plied Powers & Weightman, as a source of magnesia for many
years, and also Bye’s serpentine quarry in Harford county, Md.
The latter was opened on a very uniform compact serpentine,
about five miles from Conowingo on the Susquehanna. It is trans-
516 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1900.
lucent, and from a pale to deep green, taking a high polish and
making a beautiful ornamental stone, but the quarry was not suc-
cessful, probably owing to the great waste caused by the numerous
joint planes.
An analysis by Dr. F. A. Genth, quoted in a circular of the
company, is as follows:
Silicievacid, a. %. 2a +. 5 .'e- pales eee ee
PCM. oe AiR, ae tees. ee
Chromie-oxideM 4p9 we 19 HORS .20
Niccolous oxide get's Ae See. yf
FOTOS OXIGEe pi ha he ee ok iar ee aie
Manpanous: OX1d6,~ 90 Sie ie see ie .09
NMapnesia,’. 7 i. ot Eas! bee oe we nae
Waterss 200 Pe TO ee et Boy S| eae ae
Magneticiron; nae. has Blt 1) ee ae Reeve
S. G., 2.668; hardness, 4.
For many years these serpentine areas furnished all the chro-
mium compounds used in the United States except very small quan-
tities mined in Delaware county. The region has, consequently,
been more carefully studied than the others, and I can add noth-
ing of importance to what has been published.*”
An outerop of serpentine wholly within the ancient gneiss, and
the only one so located, unless possibly that east of Radnor Sta-
tion, which, if within, is very near the border, was discovered in
the spring of 1899 by Miss Ogilvie, a student under Dr. Bascom
at Bryn Mawr College. It is located near the Red Rose Inn,
north of the Spring Mill road, and about two miles east-northeast of
Villa Nova Station, a little west of the old Gulf road, and near
the source of Aramink creek. This would be probably three-
quarters of a mile from the northerly edge and a half-mile from
the southerly edge of the ancient gneiss. The rock has been
quarried for road purposes; no contacts are visible. The serpen-
tine is quite uniform, of a dull yellow-green color and not hard.
Whatever doubt there has been as to the origin of the serpen-
tines, petrographic studies seem to prove that almost, if not quite
all, are derived from the alteration of a basic igneous rock, peri-
1? William Glenn, Trans. Am. Inst. M. E., XXV, 481; ar. Frazer, Ct,
pp. 341-345 ; Dr. Frazer, C*, p. 89, ete., 170, etc., 190, etc.; Prof. Fred. D.
Chester: ‘‘All the rocks of this belt can be traced back to an original pyrox-
enic magma erupted through the azoie schists which surround the belt’’
(Second Geol. Survey of Pa., Annual Report, 1887, p. 105).
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 317
dotite, amphibolite or pyroxenite, except in the comparatively few
occurrences in limestone. In several of the outcrops in this region
the unaltered mother-rock may be found in all stages of altera-
tion, and this macroscopically. This may be seen at Rose’s quarry,
opposite LaFayette on the Schuylkill, and to the westward, and on
the same belt near Darby creek and in Marple; near the corundum
mines in Newlin, Chester county, and at Radnor. At most locali-
ties the original rock seems to have been an orthorhombic pyroxene
—enstatite or bronzite. In the neighborhood of Glen Riddle,
southwest of Media, some of the serpentine is after actinolite.
There are some facts in relation to the serpentines in this region
which have received no adequate explanation:
1. The occurrence of the dark pyroxenite serpentine on both
sides and close to or within the ancient gneiss from the Schuylkill
westward, but not eastward. If due to the alteration of an intru-
sive igneous rock, its occurrence along a definite horizon is remark-
able. If a sheet, it should be more closely continuous.’
2. The occurrence of parallel belts of peridotite serpentine sep-
rated by schistose rocks from the pyroxenite serpentine on both
sides of the ancient gneiss.
3. The occurrence at many serpentine localities of an acid rock,
chiefly of triclinic feldspar, in the form of veins or dykes. Can it
be explained by magmatic differentiation ?
4. The occurrence at many localities of a massive amphibolite
on the southeasterly side of the serpentine outcrops, at Willistown,
near Newtown Square, Strode’s mill, the soapstone quarry near
LaFayette and the outcrops in southwest Chester county, resem-
bling in this the dunyte beds of North Carolina.™
Besides the chromium, which is common in the enstatite serpen-
tine, nickel has been found in very small quantities as sulphide,
millerite and hydrous silicate, genthite, at the soapstone quarry,
near LaFayette, and as genthite and also in wad and in pimelite
northwest of Radnor Station.
Since the above was written I have found on the serpentine south
of Newtown Square, Delaware county, a very dark-brown, almost
black rock, apparently wholly unaltered and which appears to be
13 Cf. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1890, pp. 114, 118, ete.
“ae Dr. Julien, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. History, Vol. XX, p. 11, Dee. 6,
882.
318 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
hypersthenite ;*” some of the crystalline masses composing it are
nearly an inch across.
PEGMATITE.
In the schists and gneisses, particularly in the southeastern part
of the area, are more or less irregular masses of pegmatite, usually
composed of microlin, albite, quartz and muscovite, the minerals
ocurring in abundance relatively as named, with biotite, tourmaline
and garnet in small quantity, and more rarely beryl, autunite and
other uranium minerals.
Some of these masses seem to occupy fissures in the gneiss with
well-defined walls; others to be lenticular masses wholly suri1ounded
by the gneiss, while others seem to grade imperceptibly into the
gneiss. The first may be seen at Deshong’s quarry on Ridley
creek, northeast of Chester, where a large mass is exposed show-
ing sharp but very irregular contacts with the gneiss. In this
quarry, as indeed in all the quarries of that vicinity, pegmatite
was comparatively abundant, but usually in isolated masses, many
of them quite small. It occurred also in the Fairmount quarries,
at Frankford, and indeed at almost every place near Philadelphia
and Chester at which quarrying has been done extensively. It
occurs in large quantity in the porphyritic gneiss, composed almost
wholly of a reddish and a chalky white feldspar, with very little
quartz and still less mica, with tourmaline rarely and none of the
rare minerals.
Tn the more schistose rocks to the northwestward it is compara-
tively rare, though a large mass was quarried immediately south-
east of the ancient gneiss near LaFayette, Montgomery county,
almost wholly feldspar.
Southwest of Philadelphia it occurs at a number of localities, at
some of which it has been mined extensively, mostly for use by
manufacturers of china, etc. Most of these are open cuts, but
at the largest, near Elam, southwest of Brandywine Summit, there
are extensive underground workings. Most of these have been
described by Prof. Thomas C. Hopkins.**
There are some localities in addition to those referred to by Prof.
Hopkins that may be mentioned:
1% Dr. Bascom in a private communication identifies it as hypersthenue.
6 Journal Franklin Institute, July, 1899, Vol. CXLVIII, No. 1.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 319
1. Chandler’s Hollow. This was quarried about 1860-70, and
yielded besides feldspar much muscovite, most of which was filled
with markings of magnetite, making fine specimens, but ruining
the mica for commerce. This was not far south of the Brandy-
wine Summit mines, southwest of Elam.
2. Craig’s Pits, about a mile and a quarter southwest of Chadd’s
Ford. This is an open cut into the side of a hill; the feldspar
seems to be an irregular lenticular mass or vein with considerable
muscovite. The feldspar seems of good quality and a very large
amount has been quarried.
-~ 3. Butler’s Pits, one-half mile south-southeast of Fairville
Station. These are in level ground, and have been excavated to
and below water level. From the size of the opening an immense
quantity of feldspar must have been taken out, but when visited
in 1897 work had ceased.
4. Swayne’s Quarry. This is about half a mile south of But-
ler’s. The pegmatite seems to be an irregular chimney-like mass,
which has been followed to a depth of nearly one hundred feet.
At this place the feldspar was subordinate to the muscovite,
which when the mine was in full operation was obtained in
crystals, some measuring eighteen inches across and being over a
foot in length.
Much of it had the magnetite markings, but a large amount of
valuable mica was obtained.
West of Avondale as well as north of it are several outcrops of
pegmatite, one of which, immediately east of and in contact with
the limestone of the Avondale lime and stone quarry, was wrought
to some extent, but not largely. It seems to be a well-defined
vein or bed, striking nearly northwest and southeast. At nearly
or quite all of these the chief feldspar is microclin.
Adjacent to the serpentine areas are often outcrops of feldspar,
generally, if not always, triclinic. Two only of these are now
wrought, those in Newlin township near Unionville, and at Sylmar
in West Nottingham. Some of the other outcrops have yielded
cabinet specimens, but have not been tried commercially. That a
mile west of Media has yielded fine sunstone and moonstone,
beryl and columbite, some of the moonstone and beryl furnishing
gems. That near Dismal run furnished a nearly transparent
variety, as did also that at Brinton’s quarry, Westtown, Chester
320 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
county, and Blue Hill, Upper Providence, Delaware county,
which furnished alo the baryta-feldspar cassinite.
The feldspar from Sylmar resembles that obtained at the famous
Dixon’s quarries (and Way’s quarry) in New Castle county,
Delaware, but is remarkably tough and not easily cleaved, so that
before crushing and grinding for market it has to be roasted.
Besides the locality mentioned by Prof. Hopkins near Boothwyn
Station (Bunting’s quarry, Bethel township, Delaware county),
there are many outcrops in that township and the adjoining one,
Chichester, which have been explored to a slight extent for their
well-defined crystals of feldspar, garnet and beryl. One remark-
able one south of Boothwyn was very slightly exposed in low
ground on a small affluent of Naaman’s creek.
It consisted almost entirely of microclin and quartz, but almost all
the microclin was well crystallized, the crystals with rather rough
surfaces, but sometimes complete and doubly terminated. They
varied in length from an inch to a foot and were usually about
twice as long as broad. Quartz occurred in the feldspar in the
usual graphic granite form and also filled the interstices between
the feldspar crystals. One specimen was nearly an octahedron in
shape, with deep grooves parallel to a basal plane. This would
seem consistent with the theory that the feldspar crystallized first,
the quartz occupying the space remaining; but from the same place
I have, imbedded in the microclin, a crystal of quartz of its own
hexagonal form.
A little west of Boothwyn was a narrow vein or dyke about two
feet wide in decomposed schists, composed of quartz and feldspar, in
which were found fine crystals of garnet; this nad perfectly
straight well-defined smooth walls, striking N. 35° E. nearly
vertical.
The feldspars of this region are worthy of careful and systematic
study.
Ata number of localities the pegmatite has decomposed and
become wholly kaolin. Many of the pegmatite outcrops show
much kaolin, but at none of the kaolin outerops have I seen unde-
composed pegmatite. There is, however, much intermixed quartz
and mica, but both almost always in very small masses, little more
than sand.
There is, however, no appearance of water sorting, the quartz,
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 321
mica and kaolin being evenly intermixed. It would appear, there-
fore, as if the pegmatite which gave rise to the kaolin was a much
finer grained rock than that quarried for its feldspar.
Prof. Hopkins, in the paper already referred to, has described
the kaolin deposits. There is one curious fact to which I would
eall attention—the occurrence of limestone with nearly every kaolin
deposit, viz., near Glen Loch (Chester Valley), Kaolin (Broad
Valley), near Avondale, Hockessin, Elam, and also at Peach's
kaolin mines in Delaware, south of Hockessin. At all these six
localities limestone occurs close to the kaolin. The Wagontown
locality may be an exception, but inasmuch as the Cambrian sand-
stone which underlies the limestone occurs just north of Wagon-
town, the probability is that it is not an exception, simply that the
limestone is not exposed,
Trap DyKEs.
There are in Pennsylvania, southeast of the vicinity of the Red
Rocks, two well-defined trap dykes, besides a number of exposures
of igneous rocks not yet reducible to a system.
Fie. 8.—Columnar Diabase. The Gulf, Montgomery Co., Pa.
The easternmost of these is the well-known Conshohocken trap
21
322 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
dyke, specially studied by Prof. H. Carvill Lewis, and thought by
him to have a linear extension of some eighty miles, though
usually less than a hundred feet in breadth. Its best exposures
are at Conshohocken and at Gulf creek. At West Conshohocken
there was exposed an offset cutting the hydromica schists to the
eastward of the main mass. It was only two or three feet in
breadth. No change in the adjacent schist was observed.
The columnar structure is best shown at Spring Mill and at the
Gulf, as well shown in Fig. 8, from a photograph taken by Dr.
Charles Schiiffer. A remarkable feature is the absence of any notice-
able change in the rocks cut by it. Its strike is very nearly that of
the limestone, mica schist and hydromica schist, but it passes through
all of them. Near Flourtown it is in the limestone of the Plym-
outh Valley. It then crosses acutely from the north to the south
side of the hydromica schist hill, and in the cut of the Schuylkill
Valley Railroad at Conshohocken is in the southeasterly limestone
(that of Cream Valley). Directly across the river, in West Con-
shohocken, it is again in the schist.”
Near the Delaware county line it crosses the limestone, being
north of it at the Gulf, and south of its course north of St.
David’s Station, where it is in or on the margin of the garnetifer-
ous mica schist, and this seems to be its position also at Wayne,
where it is exposed in the railroad cut northwest of the schist and
southeast of Cambrian sandstone. West of Wayne the outcrops
are not continuous, but when found are in the comparatively low
ground between the ancient gneiss hill on the southeast and the
hydromica hill on the northwest. In Willistown township, Chester
county, immediately west of the Easttown line, it appears on the
road next south of the State road, and apparently exists in three
separate branches, one north of the serpentine, the next in it and
the next south of garnetiferous mica schist. All are within a
thousand feet. The dyke crosses the State road close to the-
easterly line of East Goshen, and thence westward appears to be
on the north border of the serpentine, though north of Goshenville
it cuts it. Northwest of the Gen. Greene Hotel the serpentine
appears to end in a rounded hill and the trap is concealed. South-
17 Phe exposure on the east side of the river indicated that the limestone
underlies the schist at that point, both baving, however, nearly the same
dip as if folded or rather crumpled together.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 323
west of this the trap may be traced, but no serpentine until the
east line of West Goshen is crossed. About a mile west of this
line, and near the Pennsylvania Railroad, the serpentine again
appears in great quantity, with the trap on the northerly side.
Thence westward the trap skirts the north side of the serpentine
ridge to its termination near Hoopes’ mill. On the road passing
the mill, the continuation of New street, West Chester, exposures
are poor, but loose masses of serpentine are north of trap masses;
this is near the westerly line of West Goshen. In East Bradford,
which adjoins, the trap is prominent on the side of the hill north
of Cope’s limestone quarry and south of Copeland Schoolhouse.
A half-mile to the westward is the East Branch of the Brandy-
wine, on which just north of Cope’s bridge Joose masses are abun-
dant, but the outcrop here appears to be somewhat south of the
strike of the easterly outcrops. West of Cope’s bridge it is con-
spicuous along the Strasburg road toward Marshallton, West Brad-
ford. Southeast and southwest of Marshallton it is exposed nearly
in line with the outcrops on the Strasburg road, but also northwest
of the serpentine at Worth’sin East Bradford, about a mile south-
east of Marshallton, considerably south of the outcrops on the Stras-
burg road. West of this is the valley of Broad run, but I am not
aware of any exposures until the Newlin serpentine is reached.
This is about two miles west-southwest of the outcrops near Mar-
shallton. Going west-southwest the first exposure is on a small
affluent of the West Branch of the Brandywine about three-quarters
of a mile west of Northbrook. Close southwest of this are two
roads about a quarter of a mile apart leading nearly south from
Glen Hall to the State road. On the easterly are serpentine, peg-
matite and mica schists, while on the westerly is a large outcrop of
trap, in loose masses only. Between these roads is the locality
famous for its large beryls, giving name to the elevation, Beryl
All.
West of Beryl Hill is Corundum Hill. On its easterly flank
and near the summit there is much trap, but only in loose frag-
ments apparently within the serpentine.
About a mile and a half nearly southwest of Corundum Hill,
and about a half-mile southwest of Unionville, there are outcrops
along the State road a little northwest of the diverging from it of
the Little Street road.
324 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Thus far the outcrops are probably of the Conshohocken dyke
much interrupted and somewhat curved, but the outcrops to the
southwest are scattered and not referable to a line. The northeast-
ern one is about two miles nearly west of that last mentioned, and
a little west of the E. S. Baily limestone quarry west of Marl-
borough Inn (Upland). This also is on the State road, and is
about a mile west of the east line of West Marlborough. On the
same road a mile further west is another outcrop.
About a mile south of the State road is the Street road, on the
line between West Marlborough and London Grove townships.
Along this road are several outcrops, the easternmost nearly south
of the outcrops on the State road last mentioned. The next isa
half-mile further west near Woodville, the next three-quarters of
a mile further west and a little east of the Pomeroy & Newark
Railroad, both on the Street road and on a lane running south
from it.
All these outcrops west of Unionville are of loose masses only and
none of them are extensive. To the southwest are other similar
outcrops, some of which are probably continuations of the dyke
next to be described.
THE DowniIncTown DYKE.
This dyke was described’* as extending in a nearly straight line
from a bold outcrop on the Brandywine, over twenty feet high at
Downingtown, in a south-southwest direction into Penn township,
being largely exposed only occasionally, as on the Brandywine in
Downingtown and on the Pennsylvania Railroad a quarter of a mile
west of Downingtown Station, where a cut some twenty feet in depth
has been made through it, but clearly to be traced by intermediate
loose masses. It is here probably 125 feet in width, with limestone
visible ten feet east of it and very little further west of it, and
strikes about N. 15° E.’”
178 Rand, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philadelphia, 1895, p. 540.
179 Dr. Frazer, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1896, p. 206, apparently regards my
brief description of this dyke as a reflection upon his work, saying that “* he
refrained in a great many instances from connecting together scattered local-
ities where trap fragments occurred, on the assumption that these repre-
sented a dyke, because he was often unable to assure himself that these
fragments where anywhere near the place of their origin,’’ and, further,
‘€ the second dyke which begins in Downingtown is probably the same to
which the following reference is made (C*, p. 274); at several points on the
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 325
Recently Mr. Walter J. Baldwin, formerly of Romansyville, and
now Professor in the Manual Training High School of Brooklyn
called my attention to the fact that the dyke does not end with
the outcrop on the Brandywine, and took me to a series of out-
crops extending in a north-northeast direction for a distance of
three miles up and over the summit of the North Valley Hill, the
trap being in a nearly straight narrow line and in quantity. For
this distance there seems no reasonable doubt of the continuity of
the dyke.
The road to Lionville diverges nearly north from the Lancaster
turnpike at a point about .7 mile east-northeast of Downingtown
railroad station. After going north a little over a half-mile, it
turns north-northeast. Near this bend the dyke may be seen
crossing the bend—i.e., crossing the road twice and bearing a little
more northwardly than the road. A quarter of a mile or less
beyond this curve, a road goes northward through the woods. The
dyke crosses this road, a little north of the road to Lionville.
Further north there is an east-and-west road, on or very near the
north line of East Caln township. On this road, about a quarter
of a mile east of the woods road, it is again apparent on the land
of Jacob Lewis, and Mr. Baldwin informed me that it occurs also
on the intermediate land of Clara Fox. Beyond this I did not
follow it, but Mr. Baldwin states that he has traced it across
Uwchlan township, south of the graphite mines near Byers’ Sta-
tion, across West Vincent, crossing the two branches of Birch run
a little west of Birchrunville, crossing French creek at Cook’s
ford in East Vincent township, and close to Brownback’s Church
on the Ridge road in East Coventry, the Schuylkill at Frick’s
lock below Sanatoga Station, and through Sanatoga Park to the
road leading south from the Downingtown railroad station occur fragments
of trap.”’
In the paper referred to the writer intended and made no criticism of any
one, but it seems to him that to identify ‘‘fragments of tiap’’ on the road
south of Downingtown Station with a dyke more than a hundred feet wide,
quarried to a depth of many feet, west-northwest and southwest and not
south of Downingtown, is possible only upon the assumption that Dr.
Frazer never saw the exposures. No geologist can be expected to see every-
thing. It will be many years before it will be difficult for new facts to be
discovered.
The writer would also contend that in a non-glaciated region numerous
trap masses in a straight line with a large and unmistakable dyke, all being
of a uniform coarse diabase, are evidence of connection though possibly not
of the absolute continuity of a dyke.
326 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
large outcrop at Pruss’ Hill, Montgomery county. If the dyke is
continuous, of which there seems little doubt, it is triassic diabase,
an offshoot from the great outbursts through the Red Rocks near
Pottstown, and must be more than thirty-four miles long. Near
Downingtown, concentric or boulder decomposition is well shown
in the sides of the railroad cut.
Southwest of Downingtown the dyke is exposed at intervals
toward and at Mortonville, also on Buck run and northwest and
southwest of Doe run village, thence almost continuously and very
largely to the south bend of the Pomeroy & Newark Railroad.
Thus far there seems no reasonable doubt that all the outcrops
should be referred to one dyke. The next two are probably, but~
not certainly, of the same; one of them is on the line between
London Grove and Londonderry townships, very near the north-
west corner of Penn, and about two miles west of Chatham. It
is small, as also is the next, a mile south-southwest on the road
from West Grove to Daleville, .1 mile east of Townsend’s mill,
but these probably belong to the same.
The next two are about five miles west-southwest on branches of
Big Elk creek, respectively a half and three-quarters of a mile
southwest of Lincoln University.
The rock at all these outcrops isa diabase. That of the Con-
shohocken dyke, uniformly fine-grained in texture, has been
described by Dr. Bascom.** That of the Downingtown dyke is
much coarser in grain, and very much alike at all the outcrops.
That near Baily’s quarry is of much finer grain, finer even than
that of the Conshohocken dyke, as is also that east of Townsend's
mill, while that west of Chatham and also that at the Street road
and Pomeroy & Newark Railroad is intermediate.
That of the easterly outcrop on Big Elk creek seems to have
much less feldspar than the others, while that of the westerly
shows a coarse variety and also one very fine-grained.
Inasmuch as the coarseness or fineness may be due simply to
slower or more rapid cooling it cannot be regarded as an important
feature. Indeed, as a rule we should expect to find a coarser grain
in the middle portions of a dyke and finer towards the edges, as
indeed is the case at Downingtown, but the persistency of the char-
acter in the Conshohocken and Downingtown dykes is remarkable.
18 Dr. F. Bascom; Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philadelphia, 1896, p. 220.
5
1900. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 327
In the ancient gneiss are numerous dykes of trap, usually small
and not to be traced any distance. Some were very clearly ex-
posed in Johnson’s quarry at Wayne. Here the trap, a fine-
grained diabase, was from an inch to a foot in breadth, and could
be seen to fork, to include masses of the gneiss, ete. Some of the
dykes are hornblende schist, and are suggested by Dr. Bascom" to
be altered diorites. Dykes of norite also occur, one near Van
Artsdalen’s quarry in Bucks county,*” and one on the property of
Miss Brown near the crossing of the Lancaster turnpike by the
Radnor and Chester road, about .3 mile south of Radnor Station,
identified by Dr. Bascom. Thin sections shown by her before the
Mineralogical and Geological Section of the Academy of Natural
Sciences show very beautifully the reaction rims of garnet around
the crystals of pyroxene. About a third of a mile northwest of
Radnor Station occurs a diabase (determined by Dr. Bascom) in
the ancient gneiss, of coarse texture and having a reddish tint.
Besides those mentioned there may be named the following promi-
nent outcrops:
Railroad cut east of Radnor Station.
Erben’s, Ithan creek, northwest of the Radnor and Chester
road, Radnor.
Ellison’s, Ithan creek, north of the Roberts’ road.
Montgomery avenue, east of the Spring Mill road, Lower Merion.
State road, west of Pocopsin Inn, East Marlborough township,
Chester county.
All these are apparently diabase, or diorites altered into horn-
blende schist.
In northern Chester county, besides the great outcrops of
diabase in the north, there are scattered outcrops which remain for
further examination. The more important may be mentioned:
1. Williams’ quarry, near AJdham, Charlestown township,
Chester county,’ a gabbro in a very distinct dyke about 100 feet
wide with porphyritic feldspar crystals.
2. A porphyry, near Barneston, Chester county.
3. South of Honeybrook, two outcrops, the northerly weathering
18! Private communication to the author.
182 Dr. J. F. Kemp, Jrans. N. 8. Acad. Sci., Vol. XII, p. 71, February,
1893.
183 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philadelphia, 1895, p. 540.
328 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
white and Jooking like chalk flints, instead of the usual rusty
yellow.
4. Beaumont’s quarry, near Glen More.
5. J. H. Schrack’s, West Caln, altered diorite, about three-
quarters of a mile north of West Caln Meeting-house.
OrHER Icnrous Rocks.
When we shall have a careful microscopic study of sections of
the rocks of this region doubtless many rocks now doubtful will
be found to be igneous or derived from igneous rocks, but at present
a few only can be identified.
Prominent among these is the gabbro which, entering the State
from Delaware, itself, with its accompanying hornblende rocks,
spreads over much of the southeastern part of Delaware county,
and apparently sends tongues into the mica schist and gneiss areas.
Surface decomposition renders accurate mapping almost impossible.
Some exposures, as near Concordville and Locksley Station,
Delaware county, look as if comparatively thin dykes or sheets
had been intruded into gneisses, after which both had been folded
and crumpled.
The gabbro proper is well exposed at Claymont, Del., just over
the line. A variety consisting almost wholly of a triclinic feld-
spar forms a part at least of Cedar Hill, in Bethel township, near
the northwest corner of Chichester. In this region pegmatites are
abundant but not well exposed.
There are exposures of a trap-like rock in Middletown township,
Delaware county, about a mile northwest of Lima. The large
loose masses forming the outcrop extend N. 60° W. nearly a half-
mile.
A still smaller outcrop occurs in Edgemont township, one mile
northwest of Cheyney Station, about two feet wide, and striking
near north and south in hornblende and feldspathic gneiss.
CONCLUSION.
In the whole region southeast of the Red Rocks three localities
only are known to have yielded fossils in rocks in place. The
North Valley Hill sandstone in some places, notably west of Val-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 329
ley Forge, shows abundance of Scolithus. The same fossil was
found by Dr. Frazer at Avondale, Chester county.
Fossiliferous pebbles occur in the Delaware river gravels, also on
the northeast slopes of Barren Hill, where Scolithus was found
abundantly in large pebbles of the Cambrian sandstone, the source
of which is obscure. They were exposed by the digging out of
material for the Roxborough reservoir.
There should be mentioned also the fossils found in Shainline’s
quarry south of Henderson Station, referred to on page 204. In
1899 Mr. Lewis Woolman discovered in the limestone of this
quarry what appear to be fossils resembling some of those in the
orbicular quartzite. They were exposed by the weathering of the
rock. Mr. Woolman thinks them suggestive of the flat-coiled
forms such as Raphistoma, etc., rather than the elevated spiral
forms like Murchisonia.™
The important locality is that described by C. D. Walcott, Amer.
Jour. Science, XLVI, January, 1894.
It is north-northeast of Gap, Lancaster county, Pa., where in
a sandy stratum in the limestone fragments of QJlenellus and a
species of Obolella were found. ‘These identify the limestone of
the Pequea Valley, a part of the great Lancaster county limestone
region, with the Cambrian. As there seems no reason to doubt the
identity of the limestone of the Lancaster and Chester Valleys,
this would seem, as stated by Mr. Walcott, to identify the Ches-
ter Valley limestone as Cambrian, and the underlying sandstone as
Lower Cambrian.
Accepting, then, that the sandstone of the North (Chester)
Valley Hill is lower Cambrian, are we justified in assigning the
scattered outcrops of similar rock to the same? It must be
admitted that lithological evidence is untrustworthy, but in this
case we have a peculiar rock, not only in the constituents, but also
in its aggregation, and also in the fact that its characteristic tour-
malines are always stretched and broken. The possibility that such
rock should occur abundantly at two different horizons is remote.
Not only is there the lithological evidence, but also the strati-
graphical, that the peculiar sandstone is almost always overlaid and
underlaid by schists, and that above the upper schist almost invaria-
18 Personal communication to the author.
330 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
bly a limestone is found. I think, therefore, there is little doubt
that all the limestone and tourmaline-bearing sandstone may be
considered of Cambrian age."
The schists and gneisses present a more difficult question, which
may be subdivided :
1. the age of the hydromica schists of the South (Chester)
Valley Hill—in other words, are they above or below the lime-
stone ?
Dr. Frazer believed the schists to have been uplifted by a fault
running along the south side of the valley, and that the southerly
limestone was probably once continuous over the South Valley
all
This hypothesis necessitates making the hydromica schists continu-
ous with the very different rocks of the North Valley Hill, at times
only a little over a quarter of a mile off, each haying a thickness
of certainly much over a half-mile, which constituted one of the
gravest objections to Prof. Rogers’ theory that the valley was a
synclinal and the north and south hills of the same age, the sand-
stone of the north hill represented by small sandstone outcrops on
the northerly foot of,the south hill, the lower primal slates by the
hydromica schists. This view has not been held by any later geol-
ogist and need not be discussed further.
Mr. Hall, demonstrating the synclinal structure of these schists
at their northeastern end, where they very clearly lie in a basin of
the limestone, which in its turn is surrounded north, east and south
by the sandstone, and it by the ancient gneiss, argued that its con-
tinuation westward must be a synclinal overlying the limestone;
the underlying synclinal of the limestone, however, is shown in
his sections in C* to extend to the left bank of the Schuylkill only,
on the right bank and also a mile to the westward to be cut off by
a fault, the syenite underlying the limestone and in depth abutting
against the hydromica schists at the fault line. Had Mr. Hall
found the sandstone south of the limestone at Gulf Mills, I believe
his sections G' and H would have conformed at this point to his
section G,
18 There is confirmation in Dr. Frazer's interesting discovery of Scolithus
in the sandstone adjacent to the limestone in London Grove township south
of Avondale. C‘, p. 324.
ar an. oc
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 331
Prof. Lesley, agreeing with Mr. Hall as to the structure east of
the Schuylkill, agrees in part with Dr. Frazer that at or west of
the Schuylkill a great fault raises rocks underlying the rocks of the
North Valley Hill belt above the surface to form the South Valley
Hill”
It this fault really exists and is of magnitude so great and so
extensive east and west, it is strange there is not clearer evidence
of it. Would it be possible, if it exists, for the dips in the lime-
stone and the hydromica to agree as well as they do? Thus Dr.
Frazer gives (p. 269) ‘‘ along the south border of the Salisbury
township limestone belt . . . . S. 10° E. 70° gneiss’’ (layers in
limestone, p. 268), ‘‘S. 10° E. 40°; mica schist S. 53°. 6.159 RH:
Nees ee The dips in the eastern part of the township are S.
Oe Pan OO 7.1107 EK. 60°, 5. 30° E. 60°, S. 60° to 80°, ete.”
«« Kast Caln . . . . the dips in the beit of mica schists which
passes south of the limestone vary in strike from E. 10° N. to
KE. 30° N. and from 80° to vertical. Some of the dips in the lime-
stone are as follows: S. 10° E. 85°, S. 10° E. 60°; strike E. 10°
N. vertical (= dip S. 10° E. 90°),’’ pp. 273, 274.
a) shea Wihitelaud...). =. schists. .S. 10°: EK. 80°...
limestone . . . . shows very constantly throughout its entire ex-
tent dips of S. 10° E. 70° to 85°,” pp. 274, 275.
«« East Whiteland . . . . Indian King road’’ (which is on the
hydromica hill) . . . . ‘‘ the dips at first all lie between or near
S. 10° E. and S. 30° E. + 80°.’’ Anexception is noted:
** Along the main track of the Pennsylvania Railroad numerous
dips in the same strata agree at about S. 10° E. 75°.”’
Dr. Frazer then gives dips in the limestone 8. 15° E. 85°, S.
eter o0-n eo. 1o° E. 75°, S. 15° E. 85°, S. 20° E. 78° (pp.
75, 276).
These dips with others are tabulated in C* (pp. 119 et seq.). If
a fault exists it should be brought out by these tables, but they seem
to show greater accordance than is common throvgh this region,
particularly on pp. 121, 122. Sixteen pairs of southeast dips
being tabulated, seven agree, two show western convergence, seven
eastward convergence. ‘The table of dips is remarkably accordant.
Abbreviated it is:
181 Final Report, 1, 174.
332 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
In the Schists. In the Limestone.
Northward, 73° and less, 3 2
85°. to 90°, 4 4
Southward, 80° to 85°, 8 9
10> “to. 80°, 7 7
60> to 70°, 1 6
5HO° “0 60", 4 2
27 30
The arguments in favor of the fault seem to locate it at the
north foot of the South Valley Hill.** By Prof. Lesley’s theory
it must be sufficiently profound to uplift the schists from a position
beneath the North Valley Hill rocks, and by that of Dr. Frazer
to uplift some two miles of schists. What becomes of it eastward
and westward ? Near King of Prussia the straight southerly line
of the limestone ends, the hydromica curves gently southeast, form-
ing two promontories, the limestone following, forming, as it were,
a bay extending more than a mile south of a line in prolongation
of the north foot of the hill in Chester county.
At McFarland’s mills, where the Gulf creek flows northward
through the hydromica schist hill, the margin resumes its east-
northeast direction to the Schuylkill, still bordering as before the
hydromica schist hill, which has narrowed to less than half a mile.
A fault, to satisfy the conditions, would be of incredible shape.**”
Mr. Hall’s view that the hydromica schists are synclinal over the
limestone was controverted by Prof. Lesley :"”
188 “<The existence of such a fault would make it easier to comprehend the
very extraordinary straightness of the south edge’’ (C*, p. 113).
‘*Valley limestone, . . . . terminating eastward at Willow Grove in
Montgomery county and westward at Quarryville in Lancaster county.
Its extreme length is fifty-five miles in an almost perfectly straight line N.
18CH.22 (Ch op. 12),
Mr. Hall’s map C° shows clearly that east of the King of Prussia the line
is very far from straight. Particularly is this true of the portion just west
of the Schuylkill.
18 Rand, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1892, p. 445.
19 C4, 115 et seg., who sums up the arguments pro and con briefly as
follows :
In its favor—1. The acknowledged synclinal structure in Montgomery
county.
2. The apparent necessity for considering it synclinal at Quarryville.
3. If synclinal ‘‘ we can comprehend the existence of outlying troughs of
limestone still further south.”’
4. The face (?) that the limestones at the foot of the south hill are non-mag-
nesian.
Against iti—‘‘ Merely transferring the difficulty a few miles south, viz. : to
the southern edge of the tale mica schist belt.”’
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 333
The first argument in its favor is so cogent as to be irresistible in
the absence of a most remarkable and almost impossible fault.
The second is of force if we admit that the limestone cannot
thin out, but as we find it does become exceedingly thin in some
places compared with others adjacent, why may it not thin out and
disappear under the hydromica, which would then rest upon the
newer schists and gneisses ?
The third is not of great force. The southerly outcrops can
be reconciled with any of the theories.
As elsewhere stated, Dr. Frazer thinks them an argument in
favor of his theory.
The fourth, in view of the fact that the composition of the lime-
stone varies so greatly, would require many more analyses to estab-
lish its basis, and certainly the arguments in C‘, pp. 103 and 117,
are fallacious, for the ‘‘ tale mica’’ contains little or no magnesia
and cannot properly be called ‘‘ intensely magnesian.’’
The argument against it seems rather to be in its favor, for it
admits a line of limestone outcrops consistent with Mr. Hall’s
theory, giving them, however, no weight because they do not com-
pare (in extent it is to be presumed) with those of the valley.
A glance at Mr. Hall’s map in C* shows very plainly the ad-
mitted synclinal of the limestone northeast of the Schuylkill, the
northerly leg two miles in width, the southerly less than one
thousand feet. Even the latter, I think, is excessive. This is
roughly as ten to one. Now as the Chester Valley limestone nar-
rows to a quarter of a mile and perhaps less, the corresponding
width of the southern leg would be but 132 feet, a width that is
certainly much exceeded at the Poorhouse and Guest quarries.
The narrower the outcrop, too, the greater the probability of con-
cealment by the erosion of the limestone and the falling in of the
adjacent rocks. ‘>
But not only do we find the limestone, but also accompanying it
the sandstone, in scattered outcrops and very thin, it is true, but
with its peculiar and definite characteristics.
It is true we meet with one difficulty: to the eastward the sand-
stone is southeast of the limestone and close to it; to the westward,
to the northwest of it with an area of schists between. Exposures
are not good and no explanation at present appears.
It will be noticed that in southwest Chester county that the sand-
334 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900-.
stone, while at somewhat varying distances from the limestone, is
much closer to it if regarded as underlying. If so regarded we
have here five successive outcrops of limestone underlaid by sand-
stone within five miles, all dipping nearly alike. The explanation
of this must be by abler hands than mine. Repetition by close
folding is not likely with dips so regular and gentle; of faults there
is no evidence.
2. The Age of the Mica Schists.
A. Can they be clearly distinguished from the hydromica schists?
As already stated, there is no difficulty in tracing a line with
gentle curves northwest of which are hydromica schists only, while
to the southeast are the mica schists. That the hydromica schists
widen westward and attain a width of twelve or thirteen miles on
the Octorara’ is not the fact, unless no distinction be made
between the soft smooth nacreous and unctuous schists of the South
Valley Hill and the hard rough mica schists well exposed on all
the creeks from east of the Brandywine to west of the Octorara.
The following table of dips in the two rocks is instructive:
Distance
Apart of
Measured
Locality of Dip Mica Dip Hydro- Locality Outcrops,
Mica Schist. Schist. mica Schist. Hydromica. Miles.
West Consho- \ S. 289 E. 74° 8. 15° E. 859° West Consho- 0.2
hocken, S. 20° E.+90° hocken, At
Near Water
Works, Bae | S. 230. 70° 8. 100 E.990 Creek South gy
Road, Radnor, Ss ,
W. of Greene ft Kirk
Hill Station, | 8. 230 E. 60° §. 100 £.1990 §:‘f Kirkland = 9
W. Goshen, J Station.
Wrangle S. H. KOR BNO 8 ANCE 5 [mile N. W. of
ree ian? } S. 250K, 50° 8. 40° E. +90 WrangleSH. 10
MeMinn'sMill, ) 8S. 25° E. 45° Half mile N. 0.5
E. Bradford, f S. 30° E. 60° +90° of McMinn’s,
) §. 350, 459
Jey S. 70° E. 259 « ago 85° North of Haw-
Hawley’s Mill, SO a) ee Eee ray 0.1
j S. 45° E. 65°
Broad Run, \ 8. 15° S. 40° E. 70° Broad Run, 1.
West” “Branolt ) (6. 200 8. 500 ong saceegisabrentie ide ae
S. 10° W. 200 peo of creek, =
near Modena,
Buck Run N. of 2 35 Buck Run N. of 0.1
8. 259 E. 35° =. 50° E. 80° Hosslinifin:
Newlin Sta.,
10 Ct, p. 14.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 335
B. The Relation of the Mica Schists to the Sandstone. We
find mica schists both above the Cambrian sandstone, between it
and the limestone, and also above the limestone, so that we have
at least three horizons. Those below the sandstone are best seen
near London Grove, Chester county; those above it, at the south
foot of the North Valley Hill from Caln Meeting-house westward to
the Octorara; those above the limestone at the Poorhouse quarry,
Chester county, and at the quarries of the Avondale Lime and
Stone Co., west of Avondale, Chester county, Pa. Those near the
sandstone are sandy, not very micaceous and not garnetiferous,
these above the limestone much more micaceous, frequently quite
garnetiferous, in both cases conformable almost without doubt; but
there is much variety, and between visible outcrops of the sandstone
and limestone are large areas apparently wholly of mica schists, which
are usually to be seen only as abundant fragments in the soil, but
occasionally in extensive outcrops, and which cannot with cer-
tainty be placed above or below the limestone. These frequently
contain garnets and occasionally staurolite and kyanite.
While in some cases these minerals may be due to contact
metamorphism, as, for instance, in the vicinity of the soapstone
quarry on the Schuylkill, in most of the region plutonic rocks are
absent from the garnetiferous schists. In Cream Valley and
westward the garnet and staurolite-bearing schists are near the
Conshohocken diabase dyke, but where its contacts can be ubserved,
as on the Schuylkill, in West Conshohocken and at the Gulf, the
adjacent hydromica schist and limestone appear to be unchanged.
The exposures suffice only to prove that much of the mica schist is
of the age of the sandstone or more recent. In Chester county,
at least, there appears to be no evidence whatever that any of the
mica schists are older than the lower Cambrian. The same is true
of the schists northwest of the ancient gneiss (Cream Valley and
westward ).
The schists of the valley between the forks of the ancient gneiss
in Newtown, Edgemont, Willistown, Westtown etc., can be traced
continuously into the sandstone and limestone region of Chester
county without essential change. Similar schists are found on the
southerly side as well as the northerly of the gneiss. On the
southerly side they are very sandy, resembling those adjacent to
the sandstone, but further south and especially eastward they are
336 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
highly garnetiferous, like those of Chester county associated with
the limestones. The schists may be traced northeastward until at
Glenside and in Huntingdon Valley, Montgomery county, we find
them apparently overlying the sandstone and limestone.’* Mr.
Hall placed the sandstone and limestone in the upper Cambrian or
lower Silurian and contended that these schists cannot be below the
Hudson river group,” but the limestone being recognized as Cam-
brian, there seems no reason to doubt the adjacent schists being of
that age.
3. Are the hard gneisses of southern Delaware and Chester
county of the same age as those of the Buck Ridge, or more
recent ?
My reasons for thinking they are more recent are:
A. The lithological difference which has already been discussed.
This would have been of little weight in districts widely separated,
but here we have a hill of gneiss of similar lithological character
fifty miles long and at times five miles broad, and with another belt
of similar rock stratigraphically connected to the northeastward,
while the gneisses and gabbros of southern Delaware county, only
one to three miles distant southward, are lithologically very different
and maintain this difference throughout their whole extent.
B. These gneisses can be traced eastwardly among the schists,
the gneisses diminishing, the schist increasing, until they are
reduced to narrow beds interbedded (or interlaminated) in the
schists.
192 Charles E. Hall, C®, p. 62.
193 (5p, 9,
1% Dr. Frazer, in an argument against Mr. Hall’s views (Proc. Am. Philos.
Soc., December 15, 1882, p. 517), says: ‘‘ There are small tongues and iso-
lated patches of Laurentian rocks occurring in the midst of these southern
schists. One comes into Chester county from the east in lasttown and
Tredyffrin townships and another occupies a small area near West Chester.
These patches are bordered on all their sides by these schists with no
intervening rocks. The bordering rocks therefore cannot belong to a group
above the Potsdam and the Lower Silurian limestone.”’
This does not agree with my observations. The ancient gneiss does come
into Chester county from the east as stated, but it is about five miles wide
at its entrance into Chester county, and the tongue which underlies West
Chester is from one to three miles wide and extends west of the Brandywine,
continuous and frequently exposed. I have been over the area carefully and
have been able to find no isolated patches surrounded by schists. It is true,
however, that between the ancient gneiss and the schists the sandstone and
Loko 5 do not occur, but they do occur in the schists close to the contact
ine.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 337
4, What light can be thrown upon the age of the schists and
gneisses embraced in Prof. Rogers’ first and second groups at the
Schuylkill and extending thence northeastward and southwestward ?
The advance of geological science has taught that schistosity,
formerly thought to be evidence of stratification, may be due sim-
ply to dynamic and metamorphic agencies, and that one frequent
result of such alteration, when not carried to an extreme, is the
formation, from a more massive rock, of augengneiss or gneiss
containing eyes or lenses of quartz, feldspar or other mineral
having a more or less drawn-out appearance. This is very common
in this region.
The remarks of Mr. Charles R. Keyes'® in regard to the Mary-
land Piedmont plateau are most pertinent: ‘‘ From all appear-
ances the gneiss area was originally largely granitic, but through
the agency of the enormous orographic pressure has been squeezed
into its present gneissic condition.’’
If we concede that this granite was penetrated by dykes or sheets
of basic rocks, the abundant hornblende schists may be readily
accounted for. In the ancient gneiss some of the dykes are now
hornblende schist, though retaining their clear dyke form with
sharp contacts. The exposures in or near Concord seem to indi-
cate that such intrusions exist.
But we certainly have in the region clastics, besides the Cam-
brian sandstone proper. It and the schists accompanying it and
conformable with it, together with the limestone and the schists
overlying it, are certainly of sedimentary origin. But in Brooks’
quarry, Radnor, the rocks between the sandstone and the lime-
stone are distinctly gneissic and apparently porphyritic, though
many layers are schistose. Here pebbles of the ancient gneiss
clearly attest the action of water. These are among the rocks
which can be traced westward and southward around the ancient
gneiss, and then eastward across the Brandywine and into Delaware
county.
But the sandy mica schists and garnetiferous schists, accompanied
by the sandstone as far as the southwesterly border of Delaware
county, can themselves be traced almost continuously further east-
ward, the breaks of continuity being not great, until they come
1% Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., II, 321.
22
338 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
again into contact with the typical sandstone and the limestone in
Montgomery county.
But there are also hard gneissic rocks, both hornblendic and
feldspathic, almost. always more or less schistose and dipping with
the adjacent schists.
Would not the conditions be satisfied by a theory that after the
deposition of the sediments they were deeply buried, penetrated
by intrusions of granite and basic eruptives, subjected to intense
dynamic action, of which the record is left in the plications and
close foldings, sheared and faulted, until almost all trace of the
original rocks is Jost, and a general schistose structure more or less
parallel to the strike of the ancient gneiss was developed ?
A change in the direction of the compressing force would ac-
count for the remarkable change of dip observed east and west of
the vicinity of Darby creek.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 339
Marcu 6.
Mr. CHarves Morris in the Chair.
Fifteen persons present.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication:
‘‘ Contributions to the Life-History of Plants. No. XIV.’’
By Thomas Meehan.
‘The Biddulphoid Forms of North American Diatomacez,”’
by Charles 8. Boyer, A.M.
The deaths of F. L. Harvey, a member, and of Hans Bruno
Geinitz and William A. Hammond, M.D., correspondents, were
announced.
Joan W. HArsHBERGER, PH.D., made a communication on
the history of botany in Philadelphia. (No abstract. )
Dr. Pilsbry withdrew a paper entitled ‘‘ Notes on some Southern
Mexican Shells,’’ presented for publication December 26, 1899.
Marca 13.
The President, SamureL G. Drxon, M.D., in the Chair.
Eighteen persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Notes on Ameiurus prosthistius,’’ by Henry
W. Fowler, was presented for publication.
Marcu 20.
Mr. CHarues Morris in the Chair.
Eighteen persons present.
The death of Stephen P. M. Tasker, a member, was announced.
Mr. FrRAnK J. KEELEY made a communication on the motion
of diatoms. (No abstract. )
340 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Marcu 27.
The President, SamueL G. Dixon, M.D., in the Chair.
Twenty-one persons present.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :
‘« Preliminary Notes on the Rate of Growth and on the Devel-
opment of Instincts in Spiders,’’ by Annie Bel] Sargent.
‘« New South American Land Snails,’ by Henry A. Pilsbry.
‘¢ Subterranean Waters,’’ by Charles Morris.
A resolution was adopted approving of a modification of the
deed of trust of the HayprEN GroLocicAL MEMORIAL Funp,
whereby a gold medal will hereafter be awarded every three years,
instead of, as heretofore, a bronze medal and the surplus interest
of the fund annually.
John W. Harshberger, Ph.D., and John H. Converse were
elected members.
The following were ordered to be printed:
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 341
CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE LIFE-HISTORY OF PLANTS. No. XIV.
BY THOMAS MEEHAN,
I.. Funer As AGENTS IN CROSS-FERTILIZATION.
My studies have convinced me that in the main all plants that
do not depend on insects for fertilization never fail to produce
seeds abundantly. The fact that any individual plant is prolific
indicates self-fertilization. Composite, as a rule, seed abundantly.
Hermaphrodite disk flowers rarely miss perfecting seed; and cover-
ing them by gauze to protect from insect visitors shows the full
potency of own-pollen. Even when the ray florets are pistillate,
the chances of receiving pollen from their own disk flowers are
great, and this is not cross-fertilization. In short, the rule in
Composite is that they are arranged for self-fertilization.
In Gray’s Synoptical Flora we read, under Vernonia: ‘‘ There
are spontaneous hybrids between such very different species as
V. Arkansana and V. Baldwinti, V. fasciculata and V. Baldwinii,
and even between V. Baldwinit and V. Lindheimeri!’’ Knowing
how apt botanists are to attribute any striking variation to hybrid-
ism, ignoring for the time being the well known fact that the
innate power of the plant is fully equal to such phenomena, Dr.
Gray’s statement seems liable to a different interpretation.
In the Meehan nurseries are large quantities of V. Baldwinii
and V. Arkansana growing side by side. Adjoining were a few
plants of V. Jamesii. Desiring to increase the quantity, the seeds
were saved and sown by the foreman in charge of the herbaceous
department. Hundreds of these flowered in the summer of 1889.
To our surprise there were not a dozen specimens of the genuine
V. Jamesii; the rest were either intermediate between the two
species named, or, where exactly the species, without any evidence
that they had ever sprung from the Jamesii plants. I could not
understand it. It seemed a blow to my deduction about close
fertilization in Compositze.
It so happened that I had been watching for several years past
342 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
the influence of root-fungus on species of Liatris, as well as on
Vernonia Jamesii, when the original plants were brought from the
West. They would grow well the first year, but there would
scarcely be one left after three years. The effect on the plants
was to induce a more branching habit. Even the spicate species
would become paniculate. This was especially so with Vernonia
Jamesii, though these plants were never wholly destroyed, as
the Liatris would be. A plant selected for special observation
in 1889 showed brownish-red blotches on the stems as_ they
pushed up in spring, which the practiced eye of the gardener would
attribute to fungus agency. Later in the season some of these
were sent to the eminent mycologist, Mr. J. B. Ellis, of New-
field, N. J. He could detect nothing satisfactory, and advised
that specimens should be secured just before frost, when the spore-
bearing organs might be formed. There was a gradual enlargement.
of the stem upward, and indeed the upper portion became almost
fasciate, and the branching particularly abundant, just as we often
see in some species of Solidago or in Erigeron Canadensis in the
autumn. ‘This was sent to Prof. Byron D. Halsted, of the New
Jersey Agricultural Experiment Station at New Brunswick, who
also could find no indications of fungus, but simply enlarged tissue
such as is usually represented in an insect gall. That it is a
development in some unknown way from the operation of the root
fungus is clear from the watching of the plant-growth through its
whole term.
It was after the discovery of the certain hybridity of the seed-
lings. above described that a careful examination of the flowers
of V. Jamesii was made. It was found that the normally white
anthers had turned brown, and had perfected no pollen. The
pistils only were perfect. A small bee, identified for me by Mr. Wil-
liam J. Fox, the well-known entomologist, as Halictus parallelus,
was an active visitor, its thighs loaded with the clear white pollen
from the other species. All this confirms Dr. Gray’s suggestion
of the hybrid origin of the forms he finds spontaneous; but the
probability is that this is not due to any specific arrangement for
cross-fertilization, but the consequence of some accidental derange-
ment of the anthers in some one of the species, which gives the
opportunity for the reception of pollen by any given plant from
some of its neighbors.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 343
II. MorpeHouocy or Twin AND TRIUNE PEACHES.
There are under cultivation double-flowered peaches of several
varieties. The stamens have mostly been transmuted to petals,
but a few continue polleniferous around the pistil, which remains
in its normal perfect form. There is nothing, therefore, to inter-
fere with fruit bearing, and peaches are often found on these
double-blossomed trees.
The singular feature of these cases is that the fruits are usually
borne in sets of two or three. What we might term the carpellary
suture in the peach fruit is on the interior line, with a slightly
recurved apex. Any cursory observer might be pardoned for sup-
posing that the peach had returned to the pluricarpellary condi-
tion, which we are taught is the original plan. Four out of five
of the primary carpels are supposed to be atrophied in the forma-
tion of the single-stoned peach.
This note has been prepared because this supposed pluricarpel-
lary condition is so commonly used as an illustration of the develop-
ment under special conditions of organs usually arrested. The
author had conceived this position to be sound, and yet was unable
to satisfy himself in regard to any physiological law by which the
condition could be brought about. The conversion of stamens to
petals is a retrograde movement—a movement that could scarcely
aid in the acceleration of development in parts usually dormant.
A new opportunity for observation shows that the condition
arises from the union in an early stage of two or three distinct
gyneeciums, and not
from the unusual de-
velopment of carpels
in the one’gyneecium.
The illustration
shows the bases of .~
distinct gynophores Fie. 1. Fie. 2.
(fig. 1), while the full-face view (fig. 2) shows how the suture of
one carpel ‘had grown into the carpel of the other by the simple
coiling of the spiral faintly outlined at the base in the other drawing.
The double flower in these peaches is the result of the arresta-
tion of normal parts, and this arrestation has extended to the axis
on which the flower-buds are borne. These buds have thus been
drawn so closely together that they have met in a very early stage
of their development, and the carpels of the distinct blossoms
344 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
become united. It is not the result of a multiplication of normal
parts, but a union of distinct individuals.
III. GaLronta CANDICANS—SELF-FERTILIZATION AND GROWTH-
ENERGY.
- Noting from the abundance of seed vessels on this plant that it
was a self-fertilizer, I set myself to observe it closely with some
specially interesting results.
In all plants growth is rhythmic, not continuous. In this case
the pauses are of unusual length, while the advances, between the
rests, are proportionately rapid. The flower-stalk jis strong and
very leafy. Some of the leaves are in verticils of three. Then
follow two, alternately disposed and widely separated, followed
by three arranged in a verticil. This is the rule throughout the
whole growth. The time occupied in forming the verticil seemed as
long as in constructing the interval, but the foundation for this
arrangement occurs in an early stage of development, and could
not be positively determined.
In a later stage of approaching anthesis, the rhythmic inter-
vals are still more infrequent. The pedicel curves near the apex,
and the flower-bud is drooping. At the curve there is a rest
of two weeks, when the flower, which by this time has gone
through all its functional purposes, starts on to an ultimate erect
position. This renewal of motion in the curve seems to be rapid,
but unfortunately a record of the time occupied was omitted. It
was, however, discovered that the motion was in the form of a
straightening and upward curving of the pedicel, and not by any
spiral movement. It may be here observed that the method
employed to note these motions and their directions, is by the use
of small pins inserted in the stems at or near the points under
observation. Most species of plants have their special hours and
methods of opening, and it depends on the growth-rhythms
whether the various functions operate simultaneously or each set
of organs are functional at different times. The corolla occasion-
ally expands before the stamens finish their growth, and not infre-
quently the pollen is not ejected till some time afterwards. In
some, as in Antirrhinum and other Scrophulariaceze, the pollen
is ejected in advance of opening. In many kinds of flowers the
stigma is not receptive till long after opening, while in other
cases this period is reached simultaneously with other functional
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 345
activity. In the case of Galtonia my observations have usually
commenced at sunrise, but by that time the perianth has ex-
panded, the two series of stamens have perfected their growth and
discharged the pollen on the stigma that the anthers closely cover,
the pollen evidently actively at work. Only once was I able to
see the pollen in process of ejectment from the anther-cells. These
are horny, resembling miniature mussel shells. The pollen was being
forced out from the lower portion of the anther-septum, before
dehiscence, in the form of small sections of silken thread.
Though seeing this remarkable phenomenon but on one occasion,
it is probably the normal manner, judging from the fact that the
pollen collected on the thighs of the honey bees, that had been
at work before the rising of the sun and the beginning of my task,
was of a rough and stringy character.
The observations sustain my points : that fertility is mainly de-
pendent on self-fertilization, and that form is governed by varying
rhythmic movements of growth-energy.
TV. Evorution in WALNUTS AND HICKORIES.
From time to time during past years reports have been received
of curious hybrids between the black walnut, Juglans nigra, and
the butternut, or between the black walnut and the English walnut,
Juglans regia. Specimens have now come to hand through the
courtesy of Mr. H. G. Shelby, of Burlington, Iowa. The popu-
lar impression that a hickory ( Carya) was growing out of the husk
Gnvolucre) of the black walnut might well be par-
doned, as indeed might those botanists who see hybrid-
ization in any serious departure from the normal form.
The departure can, however, be readily ex-
plained under well known morphological laws,
and it furnishes us at the same time with
some direct evidence in regard to the morphologi-
cal conception of the structure of the fruit and its en-
velopes that has hitherto been but theoretical. Though p fe : eee
seemingly of a single piece, so uniform in structure that Juglans ni-
the husk of the walnuts—the black walnut and butter- eae
nut especially—has to be separated from the nut by half devel-
heavy blows, morphology teaches us that it is pri- ee cas
marily composed of several bracts that have become terior series
wholly consolidated, and that it is really the analogue Saree
346 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
of the involucre of the hazel-nut, or the cup of the acorn. In
the specimen before us the husk has been but partially developed,
and. is seen to be composed of two leaflets. It has the ordinary
rough exterior of the walnut husk. From the interior proceeds
what appears to be-a hickory nut with something of the flattened
sharp-ribbed form that characterizes the shell-
bark series, Carya alba. It is, however, still
green and papery, divided into four parts at
the apex, reminding one somewhat of the in-
volucre of the bitternut, Carya amara. After
soaking well the parts in water, we find that
these two layers, though apparently united,
Fic. 2.—Another 4re easily separable, and the inner layer, of
specimen, less de- which the four-cleft apex of the abnormal
velpped- walnut is the continuation, remains as a cov-
ering to the true nut-shell. If the husk be removed hastily,
we have the ordinary rugose character of the nut, but when
it is carefully separated the lower layer remains as a shining
brown pellicle, obliterating the usual roughness, and presenting the
nut to us as smooth as a nut of an ordinary
hickory. The conclusion derived from the study
is that the fruit of the walnut is made up from
an indefinite number of floral bracts, and that
the different species, or even genera of the walnut
Fia. 3, — family, differ from each other mainly in the vary-
Cross section of ing power of consolidating and transforming these
B mut. bracts.
The disturbance reaches the carpels. The section of the nut,
showing a tricarpellary structure, is especially interesting.
It is not necessary to call in hybridism to account for the phe-
nomena. They are explainable under the theory of varying
degrees of growth-energy as advocated by the author.
V. Evo.iutrron By GROWTH-ENERGY—ILEX OPACA AND CorR-
NUS FLORIDA.
In a general view of vegetation, there seems no escape from the
hypothesis of evolution. In the study of the individual plant, we
know to a certainty that every organ, from the seed-leaves to the
various parts of the fruit, is simply modified leaf-blade. This is
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 347
the foundation of the doctrine of morphology. In this study of
the individual we frequently note missing links, as, for instance, a
less number of floral organs than we know might have been, the
absence of leaves or buds in positions they might have occupied,
or suppressions, or, indeed, productions in other instances. When
we compare one species, genus or family with another, we may
note the same law prevailing. We conclude that acceleration
or retardation of growth—the union or the separation of parts
involved in the structure of plants—are the chief foundations of
the great variety we see.
How this manner of development is brought about is the great
question yet unsolved. At times it seems that the whole character
of the future individual should be moulded by protoplasmic
action in the primordial cell. The most powerful microscope
reveals to us nothing of the oak in one cell or of the elm in an-
other, but from the invisible activities of the cell contents the final
results are unerringly evolved. All this seems so logical as to
account for the whole character of the individual plant. But
when we make a broad study of the individuals of a group we
know as species, we see so many differences that we have to con-
clude there must have been intervention somewhere. We see in
the Rocky Mountains of Colorado what must have been originally
the same species of pine, fir and spruce as are found at lower ele-
vations on the Pacific slope. The only difference is a sturdy dense
growth, and a general compactness of all the parts, which enable
them the better to resist the cutting winds at a low temperature
that are so destructive to the weaker branches of conifers during
the winter season. We have no difficulty in deciding that this
arrestation of development has been the result of environment—
that is to say, the elevation of the land on which their ancestors
grew. And yet, for the many ages that the Pacific forms and the
Colorado forms have been under such widely different conditions,
there is no difference except in this general arrestation of luxuriant
growth. Again we are disappointed. Environment does not
wholly satisfy us. It may induce slight geographical variations.
That is all. Much greater local differences can be shown in which
external conditions can have had no part. For instance, in vari-
ous parts of Florida a large proportion of the holly trees, Ilex
opaca, have saliciform foliage. Of the many thousands of leaves
348 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
on a single tree there may not be one that has the margins ‘‘ undu-
late, with spiny teeth.’’ Not unfrequently the leaves are from
two to three inches long, with here and there one with a spiny
tooth to show its relationship. Only for the occasional tooth an
expert in classification would with good reason regard it as a dis-
tinct species. At any rate, seeing these for the first time as I did,
‘“‘a remarkable geographical form’’ is the mental comment.
But at length we note as many or more trees with leaves as spiny
as any manual of botany would describe them. Geography can
have little place here, and we have to conclude, as of other agents
in variation, that it cannot be a material power in effecting change.
My thought has been, as my papers to the Academy in past
years indicate, that we have to look to growth-energy in connec-
tion with the rhythmic nature of the growth-waves for the true
solution of the theory of evolution. My purpose in this paper
is to illustrate this by a comparison of two species of dogwood,
Cornus florida, of America, and Cornus Mas, of the Old World.
The characters of branches and leaves are similar, the lead-
ing difference being in the greater production of twiggy branches,
the absence of the large white involucre, and the pedunculate
fruit that characterizes the European form. When the au-
tumn season of rest has arrived and flower-buds for next spring
formed, we find in each instance that two pairs of leaves have
been changed to scales covering the embryonic head of flowers.
A slight difference now occurs. The growth-energy in Cornus
florida was expended in elongating the axis below the flower-head,
forming a few bracts along its course, and then resting ; in Cornus
Mas it rests at once at the base of the flower, and then proceeds to
elongate the pedicels of the flower within the bud. Vertical and
horizontal sections of the buds show this clearly. When the
rhythmic growth is renewed in spring the energy is directed in the
same line. The bud scales enlarge slightly, but continue as small
green ‘‘ involucres’’ below the flower-buds ; the energy is toward
the pedicels. The flowers elongate, and we have finally the pedi-
cellate fruits. In Cornus florida the energy is sufficient only to
cause the expansion of the flowers, and the red fruit finally
appears as a conglomerate head, the mass of the foree being spent
on the four winter scales, which are projected to appear as four
large white structures simulating bracts.
1900.1] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 349 |
We may look to the direction and degree of energy, in connec-
tion with rhythmic growth, as the leading factor in evolution. It
explains facts otherwise unaccountable. In two plants of dande-
lion, growing side by side, one may have leaves so deeply laciniate
that little but midrib and nerves are seen, while the other have
broadly lanceolate leaves, almost entire. To compensate for this,
one may have tall strong flower-stems, the other short and weak
ones. The growth-force has simply been exerted in different Jines,
or may have been weak from the start.
Evolution, directed by varying degrees of growth-energy, recon-
ciles many conflicting hypotheses. Granting, what must be true,
that the machinery for the production of energy is all constructed
by or in connection with the protoplasm in the primary cell; and
that this is fed, as the plant grows, by food at its command,
results must depend on the strength of this machinery. It must
affect the plants variously, and indeed their several parts. The
machinery at a given point may suddenly become defective, though
not in a vital point; and the energy, obstructed in one direction, is
diverted to another channel and we have the ‘‘ sporting branch,’’
as florists term these changes. These cells in the ‘‘ sport,’’ with the
new energy imparted to them, have the same power of heredity
as the original cells. In the willow-leaved hollies, the energy
arranged for in the original particles of protoplasm have been kept
intact through the whole growth process. Above all it explains
what otherwise seems a mystery, the existence of the same species
in widely separated localities. There is no necessity for presup-
posing that all traveled from one central home. If in one locality
the powers of the protoplasm in the primary cell of Ilex opaca is
so nicely balanced that it may give us willow-leaved forms, there is
no reason why they may not all do that in time, and the prickly-
leaved form gradually die out. A block of hollies hundreds of
miles apart might follow a similar course. We may, in fact, pic-
ture to ourselves large areas varying in a few generations by very
slight changes in the mechanical arrangement of the protoplasmic
particles, forming the general energy-producing machinery in the
primordial cell.
VI. Cypress KNEES--THEIR NATURE AND ORIGIN.
While in Florida for a few weeks in the winter season, when
ordinary botanical attractions are rare, I took the opportunity of
350 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
reviewing my conclusions in regard to the nature and origin of the
so-called knees of the Cypress tree, Taxodium distichum. During
two weeks’ travel these trees occupied my chief attention. It is
no exaggeration to say that thousands of trees in various localities
and under different conditions were under close observation. I
believe them to be simply root-excrescences, of no more service
in the life-economy of the plant, than are the excrescences that
often abound on the weeping willow, or on other trees. Indeed,
they are not uncommon on the roots of trees. As I saw on this
occasion, they abound on the roots of the water oak, Quercus
aquatica, in this case taking on a hemispherical though eften de-
pressed form.
The exerescences were not always present ; indeed, trees free
from this condition were in the majority. In one case near Green
Cove Springs, I found a group of many hundreds of trees that
had been left standing after the great monarchs had been cut
away, that had none whatever in the whole group ; nor were there
any evidences around the old stumps that there had been any
borne by them. In a group of several hundred trees evidently
under fifty years old, none were supposed to have any; but on
looking carefully over them I found ten that bore them pro-
fusely, some of the excrescences protruding over a foot above the
ground.
The base of the main trunks of those trees that bear these ex-
crescences are usually hollow, as are the excrescences themselves.
In the block that had no execrescences about them the old trunks
appeared to have been wholly sound. Though satisfied that there
was no ground for the prevalent beliefs that the excrescences were
for the purposes of affording air to the roots, for collecting surface
food, or were abortive suckers—were, in fact, excrescences of no
value to the plant—I failed to understand why they should be
hollow, any more than the excrescences in other trees.
Since my return the clue seems to be furnished by a paper in
the Eleventh Annual Report (1900) of the Missouri Botanic Garden,
just issued. The author, Hermann von Schrenk, deals with
‘a disease of the Taxodium known as peckiness.’’ In this case
the wood of the trunk is eaten out in vertical holes, leaving a
clear line of demarcation between the part destroyed and the part
uninjured. The mycelium of a fungus is always found in con-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 301
nection with it, and is without doubt the cause. No fruiting
organs have yet been found, and therefore the name of the fungus
cannot be determined. I have examined specimens of these
“« knees ’’’ in the collection of the Academy. A large one is toa
great extent hollow, but a portion of the outer wood several inches
thick is still left. The ‘‘ pecky’’ holes described by Mr. Schrenk
are in this wood, and it is quite clear that the cavity is formed by
decay induced by the fungus. The smaller one, about eight
inches high, had the wood in a gnarled and twisted condition, but
so far with no evidence of decay through fungus operations.
The conclusion is that the so-called cypress ‘‘ knees’’ are mere
excrescences, probably in this case superinduced by fungus action,
and that the trees that show no evidences of producing these
excrescences are probably free from fungus attacks. It is not to
be supposed that every tree in a group, or any considerable num-
ber of trees, would be equally infested by the parasite.
352 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900
NOTE ON AMEIURUS PROSTHISTIUS.
BY HENRY W. FOWLER.
Ameiurus prosthistius Cope.
Amiurus prosthistius Cope, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883, 132.
Ameiurus erebennus Jordan and Evermann, Bull. U. 8. Nat. Mus.,
No. 47, I, 1896, 139 (part).
Upon a recent examination of the typical and other specimens
of the present species I have arrived at the conclusion that Amiu-
rus prosthistius of Cope is specifically distinct from Amiuwrus
erebennus of Jordan.’ The material at hand, consisting of seven-
teen specimens from the collection of the late Prof. E. D. Cope,
is in excellent preservation and is at present the property of this
Academy. As four specimens, Nos. 20,546, 20,547, 20,548 and
20,549, are typical, I have selected No. 20,546 as the type, as
it is the first one mentioned in the description, and also from the
fact that it had a smal] label in Prof. Cope’s handwriting placed
in the branchial aperture which reads, ‘‘ Amiurus prosthistius Cope
type.”’ All of the specimens mentioned were collected in the
Batsto river, N. J., June 15, 1883, by Prof. Cope. Other speci-
mens collected by him are Nos. 20,927, 20,928, 20,929, 20,930,
20,931, 20,932, 20,933, 20,934 and 20,935 from Pool Tolsoms,
and Nos. 20,616, 20,617 and 20,618, also from pools at the head
of the Egg Harbor river, N. J.
The form of the body is much as in Ameiurus natalis (Le Sueur).
Head longer than broad, convexly flattened above, the upper
profile line nearly straight to the origin of the D., though the
region directly before the D. is swollen on each side. The snout
is blunt, obtuse, with the upper lip projecting slightly beyond the
lower. The lips are moderately thick, fleshy and generally papil-
lose. Nares situated laterally and anteriorly, the anterior pair
abvut an eye diameter from the posterior pair and near the edge of
the snout. The posterior nares are slightly more distant from each
other than the anterior pair, but not so distant from each other as
? Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., X, 1877, 85, Pl. xiii, Figs. 19 and 20.
Es
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 303
the eyes, and the aperture is larger than that of the anterior pair.
The nasal barbels, which originate directly in front of the pos-
terior nares, are not as long as the head, but in younger examples
are much longer than in the adults. The maxillary barbels are
the longest and reach to the origin of the D. in the young, but
do not extend much, if any, beyond the head in the aduits. The
tips of the outer mental barbels do not reach as far posteriorly as
those of the maxillary, though they reach beyond the base of the
P. in the young, and to its base in the adults. The inner mental
barbels are not as long as the outer at any age. Mouth broad
and somewhat semi-lunar, and furnished with bands of teeth of
about equal width. In the type a system of minute pores extends
along the lower edge of the mandibles, and this is also discernible
in other specimens. The gill-membranes are broad, not over-
lapping, and the angle formed at the isthmus would be equilateral.
Gill-rakers short and of moderate number. The eye is lateral
and superior, anterior to the centre of the length of the head, and
of a very deeply elliptical shape. The posterior and lower mar-
gins of the operculum form a small fleshy gill-flap. The occipital
process does not reach the interspinal bones, and the bridge of
bone is thus incomplete. The origin of the P. is anterior to the
posterior opercular margin, and the tip of the spine extends, when
depressed, to or beyond the origin of the D. The P. spine with
or without several shallow indistinct denticulations on its outer
edge near the tip, the inner edge is strongly serrated, and most of
the rays of the fin are longer than the spine. Humeral process
only slightly rugese and extending slightly beyond the middle of
the P. spine. The tip of the P. fin reaches the last D. ray in the
vertical and the origin uf the A., or very near it, in the young,
though in the adults it falls cunsiderably short. The A. en-
croaches on the V. for at least a third of its length in the young,
though very little in the adults. Posterior margin of the base of
the Adipose fin nearer to the tip of the caudal than the tip of the
D. spine in the adults, but about median in position in the young.
Upper rudimentary caudal rays developed and extending ante-
riorly at least to below the tip of the Adipose fin. Color of the
body blackish-brown, darkest above, belly to the origin of the A.
whitish. The terminal portions of the fins are blackish and the
bases of the P. and V. lighter. In all of these examples the nasal
23
304 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
and maxillary barbels are blackish colored like the prevailing
body-color, though the latter are somewhat paler on their terminal
portions, and all of the mental harbels are distinctly of the same
whitish color as the belly and lower anterior surface of the body.
The lower lip is also margined narrowly with brownish. The fin
formule and measurements are as follows (the latter in milli-
meters) in the typical specimens:
Radit (rss Le 4, fiuioes, Sab. 6h eae
Sith SueAL (counting muslirneate: oe! V2 . SY. Sane ae
Oa - Clubs, I8 1 &-Loeme
RERMOSS WNT gine, 8 8 8 8
Length of D. spine, AL of 444-15) 4a
of £6 (Pigpines ho 6 lo Bae! (. wi 200 OLE) Gee
Longest D. ray, MM ik lw) 2608 2 eee
PSAP Spar ate. eer ork | Mt le Bolen, WEE ea AS
i WN erga, Cen, Sah Wee Oe. EE 4 ed ee
othe AAG Pray Aa eh 2 Gi. ao 9230626) Gas
Head without opercular ap, soy, 2 944 (46> 7 ae
Depth wr body; -: Vie sl ah a) Be obS oe Se EE
Between outer edges of P. spines, 35 389 42 48
Humeral process, pp Soo ee LM Oe ee
Postocular part of head,. 9. 6.) . 0. .925) ©3009 2a
Length of eye;. ... Ht RES Biel. 6 6 6 6
Tip of snout to origin of De 3 > Ft etk6e0) 0. hei
Interorbital spacey < ).295 4 So Sm 2D 2b) eee
Posterior internasal ‘region; . 9... . 916 16» ae
Least depth of caudal peduncle,.. . . . 23 28 21 24
Baseor as. Ae Ok eer’, Gh ie eee 49. 55 +638 &6
Totals lengthy 6. (ital he we PA , OOS Ee
The fin formule and measurements of the remaining specimens
(the latter also in millimeters) range as follows:
Radi: or Ms, Gwe oo wow HON IRE ARR S I, 6
ee 8 AS (counting manic) se Vea 20?) 26a
O86 QO NUS ene Be MU NES OES ine ty TR ee I, 8
5, (Nis VER: PEE aca filtade 8
Length ‘of .D. spine; 4 he Maes: on A
$F re Pempiaes Gs) es hl BG. os
Longest Dittray, ri... - 1G) eRe ei 0) a
—_
(Jo
feo) (Ding e* Greist he Uy aL” eee ee Ye
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 309
Reamer ee «10 tor 16
nay! SER, eg wae 5) A a
Head without opercular Aap ie Ta Ba Oe erties
Wegmyamipady, . . . . . . . . « .. (eirea) 16 to 27
Between outer edgesof P. spine, . . . . . . . I15to 25
Humeral process, .. Wa ee ee a. OOO) RO
Postocular part of end We Ot) gee a ere asd 3 oh LOY OO
Length of eye, . . Yee a es Soto, Oo
Tip of snout to origin of D., ie Re alae dots DA tON «AD
iteroebil space, «. . . .+. «. »« » « - « Pto 17
Pegetermbermasalrepion,-~ . . |. . . . . . 6to 12
Least depth of caudal peduncle, . . . . . . . QYto 17
EGRET lk tle we 8 DE tor 3S
Total leneth, hee 83 to 142
As Prof. Cope has wratended, hig species proves to be closely
allied to Amiurus natalis (Le Sueur), of which it may be found
to be a subspecies, but at present it seems advisable to consider it
distinct. Amiurus erebennus of Jordan is certainly different, as
the caudal of that species is stated as being short and truncated ;
in the figure it is represented with somewhat acute tips and with
the posterior margin a little emarginated; all the barbels are said to
be black, the A. with 22 to 24 rays and the occipital process only
little free behind. Ameiurus prosthistius is easily distinguishable
as the shape of the caudal is altogether different, the upper rudi-
mentary rays greatly exceed the development of the lower, the
caudal itself is rounded, not at all truncate, emarginate or pointed,
the inferior barbels are all whitish like the lower anterior surface
of the body, and the A. has as many as 28 rays. Inall the smaller
examples examined, all possessed at least 26 A. rays, except one of
which I am doubtful that has 25?, while the majority had 27.
356 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW BEES COLLECTED BY MR. H. H. SMITH
IN BRAZIL.—I.
BY T. D. A. COCKERELL.
Genus AUGOCHLORA Smith, 1853 (sens. lat.).
Series I. Hind spur of hind tibia of 2 pectinate (subg. AUGOCHLO-
ROPSIS CkKI1L., etc.).
A. Larger species, length over 8 mm.
I. Teeth of hind spur of hind tibiz three, large, more or less
broad even to the tips.
(i) Femora and tibiz ferruginous.
Megalopta idalia Smith, 1593. '
2. Length 12 mm. Head and thorax shining brassy or yel-
lowish green, with faint coppery tints; metathorax, abdomen and
legs ferruginous, the apical half of the abdomen above fuscous.
Antenne ferruginous, scape long; ocelli large; face narrow, eyes
large, subreniform, space between the orbital margin and lateral
ocellus much less than the diameter of the ocellus; front with dense,
more or less confluent, small punctures; clypeus and supraclypeal
area (which is quite convex) with large scattered punctures; lower
margin of elypeus and sides of face broadly, and the Jabrum, pale
ferruginous; process of labrum large but low and rounded, a little
depressed in the middle; mandibles dark ferruginous, blackish at
their bidentate tips. Pubescence of thorax wholly pale, scanty and
short, like a fine mould; mesothorax with numerous but very shal-
low punctures of two sizes; scutellum with very minute punctures,
and a few larger ones interspersed; basal area of metathorax
feebly enclosed, finely roughened, with a few longitudinal ridges at
the extreme sides; pubescence of legs wholly pale, tinged with
golden; tegule pale ferruginous; wings hyaline, slightly yellowish,
nervures and stigma pale ferruginous, subcostal nervure black;
second submarginal cell very small; second recurrent nervure
joming third submarginal cell near the beginning of its apical
fourth; abdomen broad and convex, sericeous with scattered indis-
tinct punctures on its apical half; dorsal surface bare, apex and
ventral surface with abundant pale golden hair.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 357
Hab.—Chapada, October. One specimen. Differs from typi-
eal Megalopta in the much longer third submarginal cell, with the
second recurrent nervure entering it considerably before its end
also by the first recurrent joining the second submarginal cell at its
-end.
(ii) Femora and tibiz green.
Augochlora spinole nD. Sp.
2. Length 11 mm., stoutly built, bright green; head and thorax
yellowish green, with coppery tints, abdomen a bluer green, with
bluish tints in certain lights; legs green, the tarsi, and hind tibiz
behind, very dark brown. Antenne black, flagellum less than
twice the length of the long scape; eyes rather small, subreniform ;
face broad, ocelli ordinary, distance between lateral ocelli and eyes
equal to at least four times the diameter of an ocellus; vertex
strongly coppery; front roughened with small, very close punc-
tures; a short, low keel between the antennz; clypeus with rather
numerous punctures, its anterior part blue-black edged with pink,
these colors extending as a narrow tongue upwards in the middle
line; mandibles black, scimitar-shaped, the blunt inner tooth a con-
siderable distance from the end; mesothorax strongly suffused with
coppery red, microscopically tessellate and closely punctured with
punctures of two sizes; scutellum shining, with punctures of two
sizes; basal area of metathorax minutely roughened, not enclosed;
tubercles with a dense short fringe of white hair; pubescence of
legs all pale, more or less yellowish; tegule green at base, other-
wise ferruginous; wings rather dusky, nervures and stigma dark
ferruginous; compared with M. idalia the marginal cell is much
shorter, the second submarginal larger, and the third higher in
proportion to its length; abdomen with moderately dense small
punctures, marking the insertion of the hairs; second and follow-
ing segments with some inconspicuous short black hairs ; hind
margins of third and fourth segments white-pruinose; apex with
short biack hair, slightly mixed with pale; extreme sides of abdo-
men with shining pale hair.
Hab.—Chapada, April. One specimen.
Augochlora berenice Smith, 1879.
Hab. —Corumbi, April. One 2. Uruguay (Smith).
The Corumbd4 specimen is about 9 mm. long, and the basal area
358 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
of the metathorax is not enclosed by a ridge; still, it accords so
well with the description of berenice that it must be assumed to be
identical until a comparison with the type proves otherwise. The
punctures of the mesothorax are extremely strong and dense.
The distance between the lateral ocelli and the eyes is equal to
about 24 times the diameter of an ocellus. The process of the
labrum is deeply bifid.
II. Teeth of hind spur of hind tibia four or more, pointed.
(4) Seutellum with Jarge punctures, sparse at sides of middle.
a. Abdomen black.
Augochlora polychroa n. sp.
2. Length about 11 mm., general build of an Andrena. Face
brilliant coppery red, vertex green; mesothorax dull green, with a
slight coppery-red lustre; scutellum, postscutellum and base of
metathorax shining brassy green, with a coppery lustre; pleura
greenish black; abdomen dull black; legs black. Antenne black,
flagellum about twice the length of scape; ocelli ordinary, dis-
tance between lateral ocellus and eye about three times the diame-
ter of an ocellus; front very closely and strongly punctured; cly-
peus strongly punctured, a broad black triangle on its anterior
margin; mandibles piceous, the tooth on inner margin very short;
mesothorax and pleura very strongly and closely punctured; base of
metathorax microscopically tessellate, shining, with a beautiful
purple iridescence in certain lights, not enclosed; sides of meta-
thorax white-hoary; pubescence of legs shining grayish; tegule
piceous, a little green in front; wings smoky, nervures and stigma
piceous, stigma quite small; abdomen microscopically tessellate,
well punctured, but the punctures shallow, very slightly hairy,
hair at apex black, at sides beneath white.
Hab.—Santarem; one specimen. The coloration is partly as in
A. hebescens, but the present species is easily separated by the
black abdomen, color of pubescence of legs, ete.
b. Abdomen green, or cupreous-green.
a. Vertex and mesothorax green.
§. Abdomen with a coppery lustre.
Augochlora smithiana 0. sp.
2. Length 124 mm., stoutly built. Brilliant yellowish-green,
the abdomen with a strong coppery lustre. Pubescence short and
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. BOD
scanty, pale mixed with black on face, vertex, mesothorax and
abdomen except the first segment. Face broad; clypeus and
extreme sides of face coppery; front extremely closely punctured;
clypeus and supraclypeal area sparsely punctured; antennz black,
scape punctured; sides of anterior margin of prothorax strongly
angulate; mesothorax very strongly and closely punctured, it and
the scutellum often tinged with coppery red; base of metathorax
granular, the extreme base with short and vague longitudinal
ridges; femora and tibiz green, tibiz tufted with black hair api-
cally; tarsi piceous, with pale hair; tegule fulvotestaceous, green
at extreme base; wings smoky, nervures and stigma dark testaceous;
abdomen green with a coppery lustre, punctured, the hind margins
of the segments with a very narrow and even fulvous fringe;
fifth segment and apex covered with black hair, sides of apical
segment with little silvery patches; ventral surface with pale hair,
For the o’, see below.
Hab.—Chapada, March and April; 12 specimens. The species
is named after its dicoverer.
Var. a. Basal portion of metathorax longitudinally plicate, the
plicze distinct and covering its surface.
Hab.—Chapada, September. One specimen.
$$. Abdomen with a purple-blue lustre.
Augochlora heterochroa n. sp»
~ 2. Length 10 mm.; blue-green, with beautiful purple reflec-
tions on the metathorax and abdomen; extreme sides of face, and
edge of the black anterior margin of clypeus, coppery. Femora
and tibiz olive green, tarsi dark reddish brown. Antenne black;
face broad, front extremely closely punctured, clypeus sparsely
punctured in the middle; maxillary palpi with the last joint slen-
der, longer than the penultimate one; thorax with fairly abundant
woolly-looking white hair; mesothorax extremely closely punc-
tured; scutellum, between the punctures, microscopically tessellate;
base of metathorax with numerous longitudinal ridges; pubescence
of legs pale with a brownish tinge; tegule rufotestaceous, with a
green patch at base in front; wings faintly smoky toward the
apex; nervures and stigma dark testaceous; abdomen white-hoary,
with small punctures at the insertion of the hairs ; the middle
(purple) portions of the segments after the first with more or less
short black hair, the apical (green) margins with very short white
360 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
hair; apex with black hair, sides beneath with white hair. For
the 6’, see below.
Hab.—Chapada, March, October. Two specimens.
Var. a. Longitudinal plicee of base of metathorax feeble or
absent. |
Hab.—Chapada, April, September, October. Four specimens.
The sculpture of the base of the metathorax is usually consid-
ered of specific value, but in this and the last species it is certainly
variable.
&. Vertex and mesothorax cupreous.
Augochlora goeldii n. sp.
2. Length 103 mm. Differs from A. smithiana by the smaller
thorax, the angles of the prothorax in front much less prominent
and less acute; the face, vertex and mesothorax coppery red, the
other parts of the head and thorax yellowish-green with coppery
tints, nowhere blue-green; middle tibise more slender; abdomen
blue-green, hind margin of second segment, and of third more or
less, steel-blue ; narrow hair-fringes white instead of fulvous.
Hair of apical segment black; base of metathorax granular;
antennz black; punctures of mesothorax of two sizes.
Hab.—Chapada, one specimen. I thought at first this might
be an extreme variety of A. smithiana, but there are so many
differences that I can only treat it as a distinet species.
(i) Secutellum with punctures of two sizes, the small ones the
more numerous.
a. Abdomen crimson.
Augochlora wallacei n. sp.
. Length nearly 9 mm. Head and thorax bluish-green, abdo-
men shining crimson. To the naked eye this is exactly like A.
subignita from Mexico, except that the wings are a little more
smoky. ‘The lens reveals the following differences: Lateral angles
of prothorax more produced; scutellum shiny, with the punctures
conspicuously of two sizes (in subignita the scutellum is granular
and closely punctured all over); punctures of second abdominal
segment very distinct, resembling those of the first, but not quite
so strong. Antenne black, flagellum pruinose with very short
yellowish-gray pubescence. Process of labrum bifid. Basal en-
closure of metathorax plicate, surrounded by an obtuse but con-
spicuous microscopically tessellate rim.
a ea
ae
As
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 361
Hab.—Chapada, March, April, December. Five specimens.
Dedicated to A. R. Wallace.
b. Abdomen green.
a, A transverse groove behind the ocelli; margins of abdominal
segments black.*
Augochlora chapadz n. sp.
2. Length 10 to 11 mm.; blue-green with purple tints, some
specimens much bluer than others. Face broad only just above
the antenne, the eyes being deeply emarginate; antennz black,
1 Tt will be useful to give a separate table of the species of Augochlora
having the hind margins of the abdominal segments black. The new
species will be found described in detail further on. A. labrosa Say, from
Mexico, cannot be included because of the inadequate description, though
it probably may be recognized when specimens come to hand (see Canad.
Entom., 1897, p. 68). There is only one species (A. chapade) in the fol-
lowing table known to belong to Augochloropsis :
Punctures of mesothorax extremely large (Chapada), foriana, Ckll., 2, ¢.
Punctures of mesothorax small and close, . : ‘
1. Margin of clypeus, labrum and mandibles yellow
graminea (Fabr.) Smith,
Mandibles dark ; clypeus usually without yellow (apically m margined
with yellow in binghami). 2
. Smali, 6 mm. long, wings rufohyaline, base of metathorax with radiating
plice, and surrounded by a shining ridge ; head and thorax brassy
green, , urania, Smith, 2 °
Larger, 7 mm. ; long at least, and ‘of thes se the smaller species (Zhering?.
cerulior and feronia) with the enclosure of the metathorax not
wo
bounded by a shining ridge, . : 2
3. Punetures of scutellum large ; blue- green " species with purple tints, 4
Punctures of scutellum of two sizes, small and large (not described in
feronia); ventral surface of abdomen without a tooth, : ; 6
Punctures of scutellum extremely dense, not of two sizes ; abdomen with
a sub-basal ventral tooth (Corumba) . : mulleri, Ckll., ©
4. Abdomen black, tinged with green and blue ; apical joint of antenna
normal (Mexico), : : townsendi, Ckll., %
Abdomen brilliantly colored, green to purple, : ; : : 5
5. Base of metathorax with regular radiating DHGE ; apical joint of antenna
normal (Pedra Branca, Bolivia), belti, CkI1. . Oo; perangusta, Ckll., 3
Base of metathorax labyrinthine with irregular vermiform ridges ; apical
joint of antenna hooked (Mexico), : : binghami, CkIL., Ss
6. Larger, about 10 mm. long; base of metathorax with fine vermiform
ridges, . : chapade, Ckll.,
Smaller, 7 to 8 mm. long ; base of metathorax with longitudinal ee: 3
hind spur of hind tibia in © simple or merely ciliate (not pectinate), 7
7. Punctures of mesothorax extremely close ; greener species ; wings strongly
smoky ; legs with green only on hind Coxe (Santarem),
theringt, Ckll., o
Punctures of mesothorax not nearly so close ; bluer species; wings
almost clear ; green of legs confined to cox and anterior femora
(Corumba ) ; cerulior, Ckll., ©
Differs from cerulior by the "pubescence of the legs being black ; from
theringi by the wings being only faintly clouded: at apex,
feronia, Smith.
362 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
scape dull, with short black bristles; front extremely densely punc-
tured; clypeus with large shallow punctures, its anterior edge
broadly black; mandibles only faintly rufescent at the ends;
process of labrum entire; pubescence of cheeks white, of lower
parts of face white with a little black intermixed, of front and
vertex black, of mesothorax and scutellum black, of postscutellum
black in front and white behind, of metathorax white, of legs
pale (a dense white floecus on hind femora), of hind tarsi fuscous,
of hind tibiz fuscous in front and white behind, of abdomen pale,
with some black on the second and following dorsal segments, of
apex of abdomen dirty grayish; mesothorax dullish, densely punc-
tured, rather sparsely on disc; scutellum with well-separated
punctures, conspicuously of two sizes; base of metathorax with
oblique wavy ridges; tegule dark reddish-brown, green at
extreme base; wings slightly smoky, with a yellowish tinge; ner-
vures and stigma dark brown, the latter rather reddish; legs dark
brown, the femora and tibiz in front green; abdomen with very
close strong punctures, green with purple tints, apical margins of
segments broadly black.
Hab.—Chapada, March, April, December; Corumba, April
(with label h. 1.); Maruru, April. Five specimens.
8. No transverse groove behind the ocelli; margins of abdom-
inal segments green.
Augochlora brasiliana n. sp.
2. Length 8+ to 10$mm.; bluish-green, the abdomen with tints
of purple-blue ; occasionally the head and thorax are yellowish-
green, with coppery tints. Face rather broad, emargination of
eyes shallow; antenne black; front closely punctured; clypeus
with semilunar punctures, a dark purple or purple-black triangular
area on its anterior margin; process of labrum deeply bifid ; pubes-
cence of cheeks white, of face yellowish-white, some bjack hairs
on front and vertex, of mesothorax and scutellum black with a
little pale intermixed, of pleura, postscutellum and metathorax
dull white with a brownish tint, of legs brownish-white and rather
abundant, of abdomen brownish-white, with inconspicuous black
hairs on the second and following dorsal segments, of apex of
abdomen brownish-gray to blackish, but never altogether black;
mesothorax minutely granular, the punctures extremely dense at
the sides, but in the middle well separated, some larger than others;
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 363
scutellum with punctures of two sizes, but the smaller ones not
very small; base of metathorax microscopically tessellate, not
plicate nor enclosed; legs dark brown, femora, and tarsi in front,
green; tegulee reddish-testaceous, green at base; wings yellowish-
hyaline, nervures and stigma dull testaceous; abdomen with only
small punctures marking the insertion of the hairs, dorsal seg-
ments shot with brilliant purple, hind margins of first two segments
very shortly and regularly ciliate with yellowish-white hair, apical
margins of third and fourth segments broadly pruinose; ventral
surface more or less tinged with green.
Hab.—Corumba, February, April, two marked ‘‘ lowland;’’
Chapada, December; Pedra Branca (Bolivia), April. Fifteen
specimens. This differs from the description of A. paphia Smith,
by its somewhat larger size, flagellum not testaceous beneath,
margins of abdominal segments green instead of purple, the purple
color being on the middle and anterior portions of the segments.
It is just possible that paphia is one of the forms of this variable
species, but the probabilities are against it.
There is also a specimen of brasiliana marked Uacarizal, Feb-
ruary.
Gili) Seutellum with large close punctures all over.
a. Abdomen coppery, clothed with short fulvous hair, the seg-
ments also with narrow even fulvous fringes.
Augochlora vesta Smith, var. cupreola n. var.
2. Length 8 to 9 mm.; yellowish-green, abdomen brassy green,
tinged with coppery-red, or even entirely coppery-red except the
extreme base. Differs from the description of vesta by the rather
larger size, flagellum hardly or not testaceous beneath toward the
apex, pubescence of legs very pale fulvous, instead of ‘‘ dark
fuscous,’’ abdomen usually more or less green, and with only
small, though distinct, punctures marking the insertion of the
hairs. Apex of abdomen black; base of metathorax not enclosed
by a shining rim, variably roughened, but without distinct plice;
punctures of mesothorax and front strong and as dense as is possi-
ble; anterior margin of clypeus with a semilunar black area,
usually narrowly edged with crimson; process of labrum bipartite.
For the o, see below.
Hab.—Chapada, February, March, April, September, October,
December; Corumba, April, one only; Maruru, April, two; San
364 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
tarem, three. Twenty-three specimens in all. A. vesta was
described from Columbia. and it is quite likely that it is a distinct
species from cupreola, though closely allied. The specimens of
cupreola from the basins of the Amazon (Santarem) and the Para-
guay (Corumbé, ete.) do not seem to differ.
A. pandora differs from cupreola by having the metathoracic
enclosure bounded by a distinct elevated margin, and the flagellum
fulvous beneath. A. acidalia differs in the same respects.
b. Abdomen green.
Augochlora calypso Smith, 1879.
?. Process of labrum bipartite; base of metathorax longitu-
dinally plicate, with a raised rim.
Hab.—Two from Santarem, the type locality. Also two
closely allied species, or subspecies, separable as follows:
Wings strongly smoky ; ridge of metathoracic enclosure not
marked by a groove; hair-fringe at apex of first abdomi-
nal segment entire; extreme sides of face deep blue vary-
ing to bluish-green. (Santarem) . . calypso, s. sir.
Wings clear or almost.
Ridge of metathoracic enclosure marked by a groove; ex-
treme sides of face coppery; hair-fringe at apex of first
abdominal segment broadly interrupted in the middle.
(Chapada, February).
calypso subsp. cupreotincta, n. subsp.
Ridge of metathoracic enclosure not marked by a groove;
extreme sides of face coppery; hair-fringe at apex of
first abdominal segment entire; head smaller, and face
more narrowed below than in the other two forms. (Rio
de Janeiro, November).
calypso subsp. eucalypso, n. subsp.
All three agree in having the pubescence of the abdomen light
fulvous, the mandibles with a green spot near base, the flagellum
testaceous beneath at apex, and the ventral surface of the abdo-
men green, or mostly so.
Augochlora monochroa 0. sp.
2. Length 8 to 9 mm. Brilliant bluish-green, the abdomen
varying from green to almost entirely purple, always very shiny.
No coppery tints, except sometimes on the margin of the large
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 365
black elypeal patch. Coxe, femora and tibize green, hind tarsi
more or less green at base; tarsi otherwise piceous, the small
joints deep ferruginous; pubescence of legs pale fulvous, becoming
golden on tarsi, of face and cheeks pale, some black on vertex, of
mesothorax black and pale mixed, of postscutellum and sides of
metathorax pale and rather long, of apex of abdomen brown-black
with a coppery lustre. Base of metathorax rugose, with vague
plicze. Process of labrum bifid. This is very similar indeed to A.
heterochroa, but difters as follows: It is smaller, with the abdomen
shorter and more convex, shining and without distinct pruinose
bands; the even fringe at the apical margins of the first two seg-
ments is somewhat shorter, and the apical portions of these seg-
ments are not pruinose; the apical portions of the third and fourth
segments are white-pruinose, but the fact is not conspicuous except
in certain lights; most of the ventral surface of the abdomen is
metallic green; the hind tibize are green on both sides; the sides
of the metathorax near the truncation are smooth and shining (in
heterochroa they are covered with punctures); the scutellum is
much more densely punctured; the mesothorax is also much more
densely punctured, and the punctures are stronger; the stigma
usually has a more ferruginous tint.
Hab.—Corumba, April, one is marked ‘‘ h. ].’’; Pedra Branca,
April. Ten specimens. Four from Chapada, March and August,
and one from Uacarizal, February, represent a slight variety,
averaging a yellower green, with the fringe at apex of first two
abdominal segments usually a trifle longer, and pale fuivous.
Augochlora monochroa subsp. noy. moreire.
2. Brassy green with coppery tints; abdomen rather longer
and less shiny than in monochroa, decidedly less globose; anterior
lateral edges of prothorax prominent but rounded (in monochroa
they are distinctly angulate); fringe at apex of first and second
abdominal segments pale and short; a smooth punctureless area
on each side of metathorax just below the basal area (in hetero-
chroa and brasiliana this place is covered with punctures). Pro-
cess of labrum bipartite; hairs at apex of clypeus orange-fulvous;
mandibles with a green spot; wings rather strongly suffused with.
brownish.
Hab.—Rio de Janeiro, November. One specimen, Named
after Carlos Moreira.
366 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Both monochroa and moreire are easily distinguished from the
calypso forms by the rugulose base of the metathorax; in calypso
-and its subspecies this is plicate, with a shining rim.
Augochlora janeirensis n. sp.
2. Length 8 to 10 mm; blue-green, with purple tints on the
abdomen in certain lights. Process of labrum bipartite; wings
rather smoky, especially toward the apex; base of metathorax finely
rugulose, not plicate; sides of metathorax just below the basal area
punctured.
This is so very close to monochroa, heterochroa and brasiliana
that it is only necessary to mention the comparative differences.
A. janeirensis differs at once from all these three by the compara-
tively long and quite fuscous hair-fringes of the first and second
abdominal segments, and by the stronger punctuation of the abdo-
men, although the punctures are still only those at the bases of the
hairs. It agrees with heterochroa and brasiliana, and differs from
monochroa, in haying the sides of the metathorax just below the
basal area punctured; it differs from heterochroa and brasiliana in
the punctuation of the scutellum, which is very strong, the punc-
tures large and close, and not of two sizes.
Hab.—Rio de Janeiro, November; two specimens. For the
3, see below.
In calypso, monochroa, janeirensis, and the various subspecies,
the distance between the lateral ocelli and the orbital margin is not
(usually not nearly) so great as that between the outermost mar-
gins of the ocelli. In the next species (bucephala) the ccelli are
small and close together, and the distance between the lateral
ocelli and the orbital margin is as great as the distance between
the outermost margins of the lateral ocelli. A. bucephala will
also be recognized by its relatively large size, and very broad face.
Augochlora bucephala Smith, 1853.
2. Length about 11 mm.; process of labrum bipartite; base of
metathorax minutely roughened, not plicate. In our specimens
the flagellum is not ‘‘ testaceous beneath,’’ though pruinose, and
the tarsi are much darker than I should call ‘‘ ferruginous.”’
The mesothorax has punctures distinctly of two sizes, as described
by Smith.
Hab.—Rio de Janeiro, November. Seven specimens. For the
3’, see beiow.
LL eC CC UC CUCU
© at fp BESS GQ PT I,
— ben < 4"
~1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 367
Series II. Hind spur of hind tibia of 2 simple or not pectinate.*. Here
also will be found males which belong to AUGOCHLOROPSIS.
1. Abdomen with a subbasal ventral tooth.
Augochlora mulleri n. sp.
2. Length 9 to 12 mm., rather narrow, dark shining pea-
cock blue or blue-green; hind margin of first abdominal segment
very narrowly black, of second broadly black, of the third and
fourth deep purple with the extreme edge black; a tooth, directed
obliquely backwards, on the first ventral segment. Punctuation
of face, front, vertex, mesothorax, scutellum and sides of meta-
thorax excessively close; punctures of clypeus large, on a shining
surface, clypeus only very narrowly edged in front with black;
front with a strong if low median keel; flagellum fulvous beneath;
lower part of face with sparse short white pubescence; mandibles
with a dark purple spot at base, only seen in certain lights; pro-
cess of labrum truncate, not bifid, but the truncation nodulose; base
of metathorax longitudinally plicate; the truncation, and the area
between the truncation and the basal portion, coarsely roughened,
this roughening gradually changes at the sides of the metathorax
into dense strong punctures; tegulz piceous with a blue and green
patch on the anterior portion; wings rather smoky, especially
toward the ends; nervures and stigma dark; legs piceous with white
pubescence, tarsi dark ferruginous, front and hind cox tinged
with blue; middle coxe very small, their trochanters broad and
flattened, with the hind edge sharp; abdomen with the first and
second segments strongly punctured, the punctures not connected
with the pubescence, which is lacking on these parts.
Hab.—Corumba, April (two are marked h. 1|.); Chapada,
December, January; Pedra Branca (Bolivia), April. Sixty-four
specimens. Dedicated to the memory of Fritz Miller.
2. Abdomen without a subbasal ventral tooth.
(i) Femora and tibiz green, tarsi yellow: males with anterior
margin of clypeus not at all yellow. These appear to be all males
of Augochloropsis.
a, First joint of flagellum swollen in front, honey-color, con-
trasting with the rest of the antenna, which is black; antennse
rather short for a male.
368 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Augochlora callichroa n. sp.
3. Length 84 mm.; brilliant yellowish-green, the abdomen
slightly brassy. Head rather densely covered with very pale
yellowish hair, becoming white on cheeks; front very densely punc-
tured; clypeus with large punctures ; mesothorax shining, with
large, strong and well-separated punctures, except at the sides,
where they become confluent; scutellum with very large punctures,
a round impunctuate space on each side of the middle; base ef
metathorax enclosed by a rim, and covered with strong wavy
plice; sides below the enclosure with very strong punctures; wings
perfectly hyaline; nervures and stigma rather dark testaceous;
abdomen very shiny, punctures of first segment strong, of second
much more minute; hind margins of first two segments with a
narrow even pale fulyous band, the surface generally on the apical
half thinly covered with pale fulvous hair.
Hab.—Chapada, December, one. This may be the & of A.
calypso subsp. cupreotincta. The rather peculiar sculpture of the
base of the metathorax is quite of the same type, but the punc-
tures of the scutellum are larger and much less dense in the present
insect than in cupreotincta.
8. First joint of flagellum normal in color and form. Hind
coxee furnisned above with an apical tooth.
§. Small, not over 8 mm. long: abdomen strongly tinged with
coppery red.
Augochlora vesta var. cupreola, Ckll., /) (© supra),
Hab.—Chapada, December.
S§. Larger, at least 9 mm.; abdomen at most slightly coppery.
x. Blue-green species, the abdomen shining purple in certain
lights.
Augochlora janeirensis Ckll., “) (9 supra),
Hab.—Rio de Janeiro, November. ‘Variable in size, like the °.
xx. Yellowish-green, the abdomen often more or less brassy, or
even slightly coppery.
y. Enclosure at base of metathorax smooth and shining; abdo-
men narrow, parallel-sided.
Augochlora bucephala Smith ) (Q supra),
Hab.—Rio de Janeiro, November. The head is only of the
ordinary size, not large as in the &.
a ee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 369
yy. Enclosure at base of metathorax covered with vermiform
plicze, more or less longitudinal.
Hab.—Chapada, April, October. Less bulky than the ©, with
the punctures of the mesothorax and scutellum more dense.
(11) Tarsi dark,
a. Base of metathorax longitudinally plicate.
§. Scutellum with very small close punctures.
Augochlora smithiana CkKll., ) (© supra),
Augochlora iheringi 0. sp.
2. Length about 8 mm.; rather dull blue-green, the middle of
the face yellowish-green, the clypeus marked with peacock blue, the
middle of the basal area of the metathorax purple, the legs very
dark brown, only the hind coxze with some green; abdomen biack
dorsally, blue-green at the sides, the hind margins of the segments
broadly black; wings grayish-fulvous. Punctures of front, meso-
thorax and scutellum small and very dense, the front may be said
to be minutely rugose; base of metathorax longitudinally plicate,
the plicze numerous, strong and distinct; sides below the basal area
minutely roughened, with no shining rim; truncation of meta-
thorax dull, its lower part striate; abdomen impunctate dorsally,
sides of first segment with very small punctures; flagellum ob-
securely ferruginous beneath; mandibles ferruginous in the middle;
process of labrum truncate, not bifid; ventral surface of abdomen
piceous, with long pale hair ; scutellum and postscutellum with
sparse black hairs, the latter with also pale hairs.
Hab.—Santarem. One specimen.
Augochlora cerulior 1. sp.
2. Length 8 mm.; shining prussian green, the hind margins of
the abdominal segments black. Legs piceous, tarsi and anterior
tibize dark ferruginous, front and hind cox green; process of labrum
entire, broadly truncate, longitudinally plicatulate; antennz piceous,
flagellum ferruginous beneath; punctures of front extremely dense,
of clypeus large; mesothorax minutely granular, punctures very
distinct, in the middle well separated; punctures of scutellum
extremely small, with a few larger ones interspersed, but even
these not so large as those of the mesothorax; base of metathorax
strongly longitudinally plicate, no shining rim; tegule dark ferru-
ginous; wings slightly dusky, nervures and stigma dark brown;
24
370 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
abdomen with minute punctures; ventral surface very dark brown.
Hair of legs all pale.
Hab.—Corumba, April. Two specimens.
S§. Scutellum with large punctures.
Augochlora batesi n. sp.
3. Length 9 to 104 mm.; brifliant green, more or less golden
about the middle of the face, abdomen with purple shades in cer-
tain lights; head ordinary, antennze very dark brown, not very
long; punctuation of front and vertex extremely close; lower sides
of face and clypeus, and cheeks, conspicuously bearded with white
hair; mandibles with a green spot at base; process of labrum bifid ;
mesothorax microscopically tessellate, with close large punctures;
scutellum the same; base of metathorax irregularly longitudinally
plicate, no shining rim, sides below base very densely and strongly
punctured ; truncation of metathorax quite densely punctured:
tegule green and punctured at base; wings hyaline, nervures and
stigma dull pale reddish-brown; cox, femora and tibiz green,
tarsi very dark brown, pubescence of legs wholly pale and quite
dense; abdomen strongly punctured, even the depressed margins
cf the segments punctured; hind margins of the first two segments
with a narrow even fulvous hair-band; hind margins of third and
fourth segments broadly white pruinose; sides and base of abdo-
men quite hairy; on each side, from beneath the margin of the fourth
segment, projects a little brush of hair, slightly fulvous in color ; first
three ventral segments green, the others dark-brown.
Hab.—Chapada, September, October. Several specimens.
Evidently a male Augochloropsis. It greatly resembles A. hetero-
chroa, but differs in several particulars, such as the more prominent
lateral angles of the prothorax. It is also very similar to A. acis
Smith, but that is smaller.
Augochlora belti n. sp.
3S. Length 10 mm.; blue-green, with strong purple tints, espe-
cially on the abdomen, strongly punctured, and little hairy. Eyes
deeply emarginate; face considerably narrowed below; clypeus
with large close strong punctures, its apical margin narrowly
black; front and vertex extremely densely punctured; mandibles
slender, pointed, with no inner tooth; process of labrum a broad
erenulate ridge, not at all bifid; tongue long and slender; flagellum
1900.) NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 371
clear ferruginous beneath; anterior lateral angles of prothorax
prominent; mesothorax and scutellum with dense strong punctures ;
base of metathorax with strong longitudinal plicze, the intervals
between them shining; truncation of metathorax ill-defined and
densely punctured; punctures of sides of metathorax conspicu-
ously larger than those on and near the truncation; a small
minutely granular area, free from punctures, on each side below
the enclosure; tegulz shining piceous, convex, punctured and green
at the extreme base; wings rather dusky toward the tips, nervures
and stigma dark-brown; legs piceous; coxze, anterior femora and
the other femora more or less, green; tarsi becoming ferruginous
at the ends; abdomen with subparailel sides, strongly punctured,
the punctures on the first segment largest; hind margin of first
segment very narrowly, of second segment broadly, of the other
segments rather broadly, black; first, third, fourth and fifth ven-
tral segments tinged with blue; apex with two pale orange fimbri-
ate processes.
Hab.—Pedra Branca, April. One.
Var. perangusta 0. var.
S. Length 84 to 9} mm.; narrower; second submarginal cell
narrow, higher than its breadth at base, whereas in be/ti it is much
broader.
Hab.—Corumba, April, several; Pedra Branca, April, one.
This looks as if it might be a distinct species, but the characters
mentioned are the only ones I can find to separate it. The punc-
tureless space at the sides of the metathorax just behind the en-
closure is wanting in the Corumba examples.
Augochlora foxiana n. sp.
2. Length 9 to 10 mm.; head ordinary, front rough with large
and extremly close punctures; face and front greenish golden to
golden green, strongly tinged with coppery-red, especially on the
supraclypeal area; vertex and cheeks green; antennz dark, flagel-
lum faintly tinged with ferruginous beneath; mandibles bidentate
at apex, ferruginous in the middle, with no green spot at base;
process of labrum bifid, consisting of two little nodules; anterior
lateral angles of prothorax approximately right angles; thorax
except the middle of the mesothorax (which is dull black) bluish-
green, verdigris color; mesothorax with extremely large and more
or less confluent punctures, the area between them dull because
372 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
microscopically tessellate; scutellum with large not very numerous
punctures, and numerous minute ones between; basal area of
metathorax narrow in a longitudinal direction, delicately longi-
tudinally plicate, with no shining rim; sides and truncation of
metathorax rough with large punctures; tegule very dark brown,
without any green; wings smoky, nervures and stigma very dark
brown; second submarginal cell about as broad as long; legs very
dark brown, anterior coxze tinged with greenish; pubescence of legs
pale fulvous; abdomen black, with the segments (especially the
first) showing a variable amount of green, the margins, however,
always black, that of the first only very narrowly so; where the
segments are green, they are punctured (the first segment strongly
so), where they are black, impunctate; apex with short sooty hair;
ventral surface without any green.
cS. About 8 mm. long, in most respects similar to the female,
but more slender, with somewhat longer antennze; face greener,
mesothorax with less black; anterior margin of clypeus, labrum,
and mandibles except their ferruginous ends, dull yellow; anterior
and middle femora green; anterior tibiz and middle and hind
tibize in front, lively ferruginous, or orange-ferruginous.
Hab.—Chapada, January, March, April, September, November,
December. Fifty specimens (c' in November).
Var. perimelas n. var.
?. Perhaps a trifle larger; face and vertex coppery-red; flagel-
lum distinetly ferruginous beneath; mesothorax with the punctures
a trifle smaller, black, with only the extreme Jateral and hind
margins greenish; scutellum black; postscutellum black tinged
with blue or green in the middle; basal enclosure of metathorax
deep blue, varying to green; pleura black, or faintly tinged with
blue; abdomen black, with only a little blue or green at the sides
of the first, and sometimes second and third segments. Process of
labrum binodulose or entire, really a fair intermediate between the
two types (bifid and entire), varying in both directions.
Hab.—Corumba, April, two; Rio de Janeiro, November, one.
Perhaps a distinet species.
The species is named after Mr. William J. Fox, who has con-
tributed so much to the knowledge of Brazilian Hymenoptera.
8. Base of metathorax granular.
S$. Green species.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 375
Augochlora heterochroa CEll., var. a (© supra),
Hab.—Corumba, April, several; Chapada, December. Very
similar to the 2; no yellow on clypeus, labrum or mandibles.
The anterior lateral angles of the prothorax are not prominent as
in batesi.
§§. Black species. (Megaloptidia, subg. n. )
Megalopta contradicta 0. sp.
3. Length 9 to 11 mm., brown-black with sometimes the faintest
suggestion of blue about the face and pleura. Ocelli very large,
their distance apart and the distance of the lateral ocelli from the
eyes considerably less than the diameter of an ocellus; these ocellj
resemble those of Sphecodogastra; eyes very large, emarginate,
strongly converging below, so that the lower part of the face is
very narrow; sides of face with short white plumose pubescence;
vertex with a few dark hairs ; scape rather dark ferruginous; flagellum
delicately pruinose, dark reddish-brown, inclined to be compressed
basally; face and front dull, minutely granular; labrum ferrugin-
ous, convex, not at all bifid; maxillary palpi light ferruginous,
with slender joints, the last two longer than the two before; man-
dibles short and simple, without any inner tooth; mesothorax and
scutellum rather shining, subsericeous, with shallow indistinct
punctures and scattered inconspicuous erect hairs; basal area of
metathorax shining, minutely granular, with a few very small in-
distinct plicz at its extreme base; truncation and sides of meta-
thorax hoary-pubescent; lower parts of thorax white-hoary; tegulze
shining red-brown; wings yellowish-hyaline, hairy, nervures and
stigma dark ferruginous, second submarginal cell narrow; legs
very dark brown, small joints of tarsi ferruginous; pubescence of
legs pale, more or less black on the hind surfaces of the hind
tibiz and tarsi, and pale ferruginous on the small joints of the
tarsi; all the claws deeply cleft; abdomen very sparingly pubes-
cent, subsericeous, impunctate; two brushes of hair projecting
from the middle of the apical margin of the fourth ventral seg-
ment; apical segments strongly retractile within the others, so as
to make the abdomen appear truncate.
Hab.—Santarem, two; Benevides, July, one. A very singular
species. The first recurrent nervure in one specimen joins the second
transverse-cubital, but in another enters the third submarginal cell
at its extreme base. The second recurrent nervure joins the third
submarginal cell well before its apex.
374 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Divisions oF AUGOCHLORA.
The arrangement of the species given above is artificial, in-
tended merely to make easy their identification. It is by no means
so simple to construct a natural classification, and the present
attempt must be regarded as more or less provisional.
It will be observed that the first and last species are assigned to
Megalopta Smith (not Megaloptera, as Ashmead has it in Tr. Am.
Ent. Soc., XX VI, 92). They do not agree in detail with the type
of that genus, but they have the large ocelli, whereby Megalopta
differs from <Augochlora as Sphecodogastra does from Halictus.
Smith figures the second recurrent nervure of Megalopta as inter-
stitial with the third transverso-cubital, and Ashmead so has it in
his tables; but Smith’s description says that the second recurrent
enters the second (error for third) submarginal cell near its apex.
In both our species this nervure enters the third submarginal
cell a very appreciable distance before the apex. Smith figures the
first recurrent as entering the second submarginal cell near its
middle, but he describes it as entering near or at its apex, as it does
in M. idalia, one of the species he had before him.
M. bitubereulata Smith is to be regarded as the type of Mega-
lopta. M. idalia may prove not to be truly congeneric, when the
mouth-parts are properly examined: I have not been able to
determine the characters sufficiently from the single example seen.
M. contradicta is certainly subgenerically distinct, at least. It
may be regarded as the type of a new subgenus Megaloptidia,
distinguished by the first recurrent nervure being interstitial with
the second transverso-cubital, or even entering the third submar-
ginal cell, the conspicuously hairy wings, the scutellum convex but
not bituberculate. and doubtless other characters which would be
apparent on a comparison of specimens.
The remaining species, with normal ocelli, are assigned to
Augochlora.
Augochlora s. str. may be held to include those species in which
the hind spur of hind tibia is not pectinate in the °, and the pro-
cess of the labrum is not bifid.
Augochloropsis Ckll. contains species in which the hind spur of
the hind tibia is pectinate in the 2, and the process of the labrum
is bifid.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 375
Each of these groups is numerous in species, and they differ
appreciably in general appearance, Augechloropsis being usually
broader and less parallel-sided, with more brassy or even coppery
colors, while Augochlora s. str. tends to be longer, more blue-green
tending to purple, with the hind margins of the abdominal seg-
ments commonly black. These characters of form and color, how-
ever, are by no means absolute.
An argument against the separation of these groups as distinct
genera is found in the existence of certain intermediate types.
A. chapade Ckll. has the colors of an Augochlora s. str., and
also the labrum; but the tibial spurs of Augochloropsis. It may
be regarded as an aberrant Augochlora s. str.
A. foxiana Ckll. has the spurs of Augochlora s. str., but the
process of the labrum is of an intermediate type, and quite vari-
able.
A. mulleri Ckll. is peculiar for the subbasal ventral tooth of the
abdomen, recalling Acanthosmia and Acanthosmioides.* This could
be regarded as a subgeneric character. In mulleri 2 the labrum
is triangular, produced to a point at an angle of about 50°, the
sides ciliate with long stout bristles, from 120 to almost 200 » long.
The shape is much as in Megalopta.
The palpi throughout the series have not yet been examined.
The following measurements (in ») relate to two species:
A, (Augochlora s. str.) mulleri, Ckll. ©.
Joint1. 2. 3.
4.
Labial palpi, 200. 100. 100. 110.
A. ( Augochloropsis) vesta var. cupreola, Ckll. ©.
Labial palpi, 150. 100. 100. 110.
The first joint is long and slender in mudleri ; shorter and stout
in cupreola.
Jointl. 2. 3. 4, 5. 6.
‘A. mullert, 2. Maxillary palpi, 100. 140. 130. 120. 120. 115.
A. 0. cupreola, © se 130, 100: 2902. 1155 9 Oso:
Thus, while the total lengths of the palpi are so near together
as 725 and 715 », the proportions of the joints are very different.
Augochlora titania Smith, 1853, is not an Augochlora, and must
be called Corynura titania.
* Ashmead, Tr. Am. Ent. Soc., XXVI, 76, describes Acanthosmioides
under the head of species having the body black, which is incorrect ; it is
brassy green.
576 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Genus AGAPOSTEMON Smith, 1853.
Agapostemon semimelleus nu. sp.
?. Length 10 mm.; head and thorax brilliant yellowish-green;
apical margin of clypeus yellow, the yellow edged with blackish;
mandibles with the basal half yeliow, the apical portion dark
ferruginous; flagellum ferruginous beneath, its second joint ferru-
ginous, shorter than the third; tegule shining rufotestaceous;
wings dullish hyaline, apical margin smoky; nervures and stigma
dark-brown; apical half of anterior femora in front, and anterior
tibiz in front, yellow; hind tibiz with a patch of black hair
above at base; abdomen honey-color, bases of segments 2 to 4
with a broad band of yellowish-white pubescence; immediate sides
of anal rims with pale hair, but the segment on each side covered
with sooty hair; second to fourth segments with a dark spot at
extreme side at base, the first has also a more or less defined dark
spot. Anterior lateral angles of prothorax very prominent, acute.
Similar in appearance to A. melliventris Cresson; besides the differ-
ences which may be learned from the above description, it differs
from melliventris by its scape not being yellow in front, the meso-
thorax and scutellum having scattered dark hairs, the triangle at
the base of the metathorax less defined, the first abdominal seg-
ment not white-hoary, and the darker legs. The stigma is very
dark-brown in semimelleus, clear yellow in me/liventris.
3S. Head and thorax green like the 2; clypeus broadly mar-
gined with yellow, the yellow coming to a point above in the middle
line; scape yellow in front, flagellum ferruginous beneath; legs
yellow, hind coxze green above; hind femora swollen, dark-brown
above at apex; hind tibie with a broad stripe of dark-brown be-
hind on the basal half; abdomen strongly punctured, yellow, with
broad black bands on the apical portions of the first to sixth
segments.
Hab.—Chapada, January, both sexes.
Agapostemon chapadensis 0. sp.
2. Length 10 mm.; head and thorax brilliant green; abdomen
black. Yellow markings of clypeus and mandibles, sculpture and
pubescence of thorax (except that the scutellum is sparsely pune-
tured at the sides of the middle) as in A. semimelleus. Wings
dusky hyaline. Legs dark; hind cox green above; anterior
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 377
legs, from the second third of the femora down, orange-fulvous in
front. Flagellum ferruginous beneath.
_ Closely related to A. viridula (Fabr.), but differs by its smaller
size, yellower green, clypeus margined with yellow, stigma dark-
brown (honey-yellow in viridula), base of metathorax more
coarsely sculptured, abdomen more strongly punctured, and the
anterior lateral angles of prothorax much more acute.
S. Resembles that of semimed/eus, but differs by having the first
abdominal segment black at the base, the bands on the other se
ments very broad, toward the apex practically covering the se
ments; the anterior femora with a broad, the middle femora with
a narrow, greenish stripe behind; the hind femora mostly cark-
brown within, a little yellow blotch on the brown near the hind
margin; all the tibise, and the hind tarsi, marked with brown.
Hab.—Chapada, March, both sexes; a &° also in January.
378 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
APRIL 3.
The President, SAamueL G. Drxon, M.D., in the Chair.
Nineteen persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Arachnida from Alabama,’’ by Nathan Banks,
was presented for publication.
The death of St. George Mivart, a correspondent, was announced.
APRIL 10.
The President, SamueL G. Drxon, M.D., in the Chair.
Seventeen persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Trochocyathus Woolmani, a new coral from
the Cretaceous of New Jersey,’’ by T. Wayland Vaughan, was
presented for publication.
Remarks on Water Analysiss—Mr. 8S. Harspert Hamritron
desired to call the attention of the Academy to an observation he
had been enabled to make while engaged in the examination of an
unusually pure sample of water submitted to the Academy’s
laboratory by Dr. Dixon. The two standard works the speaker
had consulted before undertaking the analysis had directed that a
piece of previously ignited pumice stone be dropped into the alem-
bic to prevent bumping during the distillation of the albuminoid
ammonium compounds. It is possible this is a dangerous method
of procedure, for pumice, whether of natural (volcanic) or arti-
ficial (blast-furnace) origin is very likely to contain nitrogen,
either as sal ammoniac or cyanogen compounds, which would be
so held in the pores as to likely escape removal during ignition.
Mr. Hamilton was not sure whether this possible source of error
had been previously called to the attention of chemists.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 379
AprRIL 17.
The President, SamugeL G. Drxon, M.D., in the Chair.
One hundred persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ A Review of the Physe of Northeastern
Ilinois,’’ by Frank C. Baker, was presented for publication.
The death of Charles E. Smith, a member, on the 15th inst.,
was announced.
Respiratory Quotient and Loss in Volume of Expired Air.—Dr.
Henry C. Cuapman called attention to the fact that the so-
called ‘‘ respiratory quotient,’’ as originally defined by Pfltiger’ is
the ratio of the weight of the oxygen absorbed during inspiration
to the weight of the oxygen in the carbon dioxide exhaled during
expiration. Inasmuch, however, as the volume of carbon dioxide
formed is equal to the volume of oxygen entering into its forma-
tion, the ‘‘ respiratory quotient’’ is usually defined as being the
ratio of the volume of oxygen absorbed to the volume of carbon
dioxide exhaled. Thus, for example, on the supposition that
100 litres of air be inspired, that 4.78 litres = 6.834 gr. of oxy-
gen be absorbed, and that 4.34 litres = 6.205 gr. of oxygen be
exhaled, the respiratory quotient will be
Oxygen 6.205 gr. 4.34 lit.
—————— = —__ = —— = 0.907
Oxygen 6,834 4.78
or
Carbon dioxide 4.34 lit.
= ——— = 0.907
Oxygen 4.78
It will be observed that in making use of the expression ‘‘ respira-
tory quotient’? in the sense used by Pfltiger, it is indifferent
whether the oxygen absorbed and that exhaled in the carbon diox-
ide be estimated in grammes or litres, but that in the second case
the ratio will be only 0.907, when the ratio of volumes are com-
pared. It is also quite obvious, though it appears to have hitherto
escaped the attention of physiologists, that on the supposition that
the ‘‘ respiratory quotient’? = 0.907, the loss in the volume of
the expired air, as compared with that inspired, must be less than
the one-fiftieth of a volume, as usually stated, and as originally
determined by Despretz,’ rather the one-two hundred and fiftieth
ci pia s Archiv, XIV, 1877, 8. 472.
2 Annales de chimie et de physique, X XVI, p. 337.
380 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
of a volume, since 4.78 minus 4.34 = 0.4 the loss, and 122 = 250.
It may be mentioned in this connection that the loss in the vol-
ume of the expired air is due to the fact that all of the oxygen
absorbed does not reappear in the carbon dioxide exhaled, part of
it forming in the economy other combinations, such as water, and
to some extent also, sulphuric and phosphoric acids, etc. In order
to avoid misunderstanding, it should be stated that as a matter of
fact the volume of the expired air is greater than that inspired, on
account of the usually higher temperature of the former. When,
however, the volumes of the inspired and expired air are reduced
to standard temperature and pressure, then the volume of the ex-
pired air will be found to be less than that inspired, the loss being
about that just stated, varying according to the respiratory quo-
tient, the latter depending in turn upon the diet.
Mr. D. SHerpHERD Hoitman made an illustrated communication
on sound-waves. (No abstract. )
AprRIL 24,
The President, SAamurL G. Drxon, M.D., in the Chair.
Twenty-seven persons present.
Puitip P, Catvert, Ph.D., was appointed a member of the
Committee on Publications, to fill the vacancy caused by the death
of Charles E. Smith.
The deaths of William Camac, M.D., a member, and of Prof.
Alphonse Milne Edwards, a correspondent, were announced.
Walter T. Taggart and Milo G. Miller, M.D., were elected
members.
The following were ordered to be printed:
oe 2.
Cd ee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 381
NOTICES OF NEW JAPANESE LAND SNAILS.
BY H. A. PILSBRY.
Certain species of Japanese land mollusks, described by the
author in these Proceedings for 1899, pp. 525-530, have been rede-
seribed by Mr. G. K. Gude in Proceedings of the Malacological
Society of London, IV, March, 1890, pp. 8-23, Mr. Gude having
been unaware of their previous definition. The necessary cor-
rections of nomenclature will be made by Mr. Gude in an article
now about to be published. The diagnostic characters of a num-
ber of new Japanese land snails may be stated as follows:
Key to Japanese Species of Alycceus.
a.-—Operculum typical; thin, concave and nearly smooth outside.
b.—Last whorl moderately contracted behind the aperture.
e.—Broadly and perspectively umbilicated; last whorl
smooth near the aperture; whorls 34. Alt. 24,
diam. 44 mm. Operculum thin, tawny brown.
Yokohama, under the bark of pine trees.
A. japonicus Martens.
e’.—Umbilicus moderate and deep, its width contained 33
times in that of shell; last whorl constricted into
a smooth neck, beyond which it is striate again;
no spiral striz on ae early whorls; whorls 3 ot.
Alt. 2.6, diam. 3.75, umbil. 1 mm. Opere.
thin, tawny vallby, showing the edges of the
whorls slightly. Kashima, Harima.
A. harimensis n. sp.
b’.—Last whorl scarcely contracted, rib striate to the aperture.
e.—Umbilicus moderate, its width contained 34 times in
that of the shell : whorls 34, densely and almost
evenly rib-striate to the aperture, not spirally
striated. Alt. 1.7, diam. 3.2, width of umbilicus
.9 mm. Saag thin, yellowish. Kashima, Har-
11315. a . A. reinhardti n. sp.
e’.—Umbilicus open; ‘whorls 4, the post-nenionic one spi-
rally striate. Alt. 2, diam. 4mm. Yedo.
A. nipponensis Reinh.
382 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
a’.—Operculum thickened outside by conspicuous concentric or
oblique laminze, thin in the middle (Metalyceus n. sect.).
b.—Operculum with blackish concentric lamin. Shell
openly umbilicate, the umbilicus less than one-third
the diameter of shell; whorls 34, the post-nepionic
spirally striate, the last half of the last swollen and
straightened, more finely rib-striate, then contracted,
nearly smooth beyond the contraction. AJt. 2.6,
diam. 4, umbilicus 14mm. Hakone Mountains.
A, melanopoma n. sp.
b’.—Operculum with raised oblique laminz around the edge
of the outer face, like a single coil of tarred rope ; a
pit in the middle. Shell with the general shape of
A. japonicus, tne width of umbilicus one-third that of
the shell; whorls 34, the post-nepionic one not striated
spirally, all but the nepionic finely rib-striate, the last
moderately swollen and then somewhat contracted,
smooth or nearly so beyond the constriction. Alt. 2.7,
diam. 4.7, umbilicus 1.5 mm. Kioto.
A. hirasei n. sp.
Full descriptions have been prepared to be published as soon as
the necessary figures illustrating them can be drawn.
Diplommatina pusilla var. omiensis Nn. var.
Smaller than D. pusilla, and more closely costulate, the inter-
vals between the riblets smooth. Alt. 1.9, diam. 1 mm.
Ibuki, prov. Omi, Japan (Y. Hirase).
In the form I have identified as D. pusilla the riblets are more
spaced, about 12 to a millimeter, on the circumference of the last
two whorls, and the intervals are seen to be densely striated spirally
on the penultimate whorl, when viewed under a high magnification.
In var. omiensis there are about 18 riblets in the space of one
millimeter, and the interstices look smooth under the same lens.
The form is much alike in. the two species, but D. pusilla is a
trifle larger, a specimen measuring alt. 2.2, diam. 1.1 mm. Both
are sinistral forms. D. pusilla was collected by Prof. von Mar-
tens at Uweno, in the immediate vicinity of Tokyo.
Macrochlamys micrograpta 0. sp.
Shell narrowly umbilicate, the width of umbilicus contained
about eighteen times in the diameter of the shell, depressed, glossy,
pale corneous brown, adults a little whitish around the umbilicus,
subtransparent, the earlier whorls visible through the base. Sceulp-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 383
ture of slight growth striz and excessively close, deeply engraved
and minute spirals. Spire very slightly raised, narrow; whorls 43,
slowly increasing, the last much wider, double the width of the
preceding, rounded at the periphery. Aperture but slightly ob-
lique, rather broadiy lunate, the peristome simple and acute, a
little retracted toward the insertion above, the columellar insertion
produced forward and a little dilated.
Alt. 4.6, diam. 9.5 mm.
Similar in general form to Helix rejecta Pfr., as figured by Rein-
hardt,’ but mierograpta differs in the less oblique and less laterally
dilated aperture. No mention of spiral striz is made in the de-
scription of H. rejecta. In H. dénitzi Reinh. the last whorl is
conspicuously narrower, as seen from above.
Kaliella multivolvis n. sp.
Shell minute, imperforate, trochiform with convex base and
carinated periphery; thin and subtransparent, of a brownish yellow
tint. Surface smooth, glossy beneath, a little less bright above.
Spire regularly and straightly conic; the apex obtuse. Whorls
64-7, the first rather large, the rest very narrowly revolving,
decidedly convex, the last whorl depressed-globose, with a rather
acute peripheral keel and quite convex base, which is narrowly
but rather deeply impressed around the axis. Aperture mainly
basal, shaped like a narrow, weakly curved crescent, with blunt or
truncate ends. Upon the base may be seen, in most specimens,
one or two nearly straight white radial stripes, produced by low
radiating barriers within, the last one often visible within the
mouth, upon the basal wall.
Alt. 1.7, diam. 2.2 mm.
Kashima, prov. Harima (Y. Hirase).
Apparently allied only to K. stenogyra (A. Ad.), from Tsu-
Sima, described as a Conulus; but the present species differs in the
strongly convex whorls of the spire. It is also smaller with fewer
whorls. The low radial ramparts within the last whorl are similar
to those of the American Conulus chersinus dentatus Sterki,
Some species of the little group Taxeodonta Pils. have internal
armature of the same kind.
In K. multivolvis the barriers are placed at intervals of a third
1 Jahrb. d. d. Malak. Ges., IV, 1877, p. 316, Pl. 10, f. 1.
384 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF 1900.
of a whorl, when more than one is present. Two specimens of six
sent by Mr. Hirase show no barriers.
Vitrea harimensis 0. sp.
Shell narrowly umbilicate, small, depressed, thin, brownish-
yellow, translucent, the surface smooth and polished, growth-striz
being scarcely visible. Spire slightly convex. Whorls 34, the
first one rather large, the rest very slowly widening to the last,
which is much wider, about double the width of the preceding.
Sutures appressed and margined, the margin concave. Periphery
equably rounded, the’ base somewhat convex. Aperture somewhat
oblique, deeply crescentic.
Alt. 1.8, diam. 3.5 mm.; width of umbilicus 0.3 mm.
Kashima, Harima, Japan (Y. Hirase).
With much the form of V. radiatella Reinh., this species is dis-
tinguished by the smoothness of the brilliantly glossy surface.
Mr. G. K. Gude has recently piaced radiatella ander Zonitoides
nitidus as a synonym, but from the description and figure given by
Mr. Reinhardt I am quite unable to follow him.
Georissa japonica 1. sp.
Shell minute, imperforate, high-conic, flesh or salmon tinted,
rather thin, finely lirulate throughout, but the threads often almost
obsolete basally. Whorls 37, the nucleus large, globular and
projecting, glossy and rather translucent; following’ whorls very
convex, separated by deep sutures. Aperture slightly oblique,
half-round, the outer lip simple and thin, unexpanded, parietal
and columellar margin a little concave; the umbilical region covered
by a heavy white callus, triangular in shape, as seen from in
front.
Alt. 2, diam. 1.7, mim.
Operculum semicircular, whitish externally, bearing a long
curved process within.
Kashima, Harima (Mr. Y. Hirase).
I do not know that this genus has been reported from Japan
hitherto. The median field of the radula is nude, uncini ex-
tremely numerous, in very oblique rows.
meamid
te =
>
WG > me
>
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 385
NEW SOUTH AMERICAN LAND SNAILS.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.
For most of the specimens described, the Academy is indebted
to Dr. H. von Ihering, whose work in developing the zodlogy of
southern Brazil continues with unabated vigor. Others were col-
lected by Mr. J. B. Steere, in Peru, and submitted to me by Mr.
H. E. Sargent.’
STREPTAXIDA.
Scolodonta interrupta (Suter). Pl. XII, figs. 6, 7, 8.
Size and general form much as in Zonitoides nitidus. Umbilicus
showing all the whorls within, its width contained nearly 4 times in
the diameter of the shell. Surface glassy, subtranslucent white,
searcely showing growth-lines, but with several former peristomes
at unequal distances, each indicated by a slightly sinuous distinct
groove, with a whitish streak behind it. Whorls 5, slowly in-
creasing, the last decidedly wider, rounded at the periphery and
beneath; sutures moderately impressed. Aperture round-lunate,
about one-third of the circle excised by the preceding whorl,
slightly oblique; peristume a little sinuous, a trifle thickened
within, unexpanded, the columellar margin a little dilated.
Alt. 3.5, greater diam. 6.5, lesser 5.6 mm.
Os Perus, Prov. Sao Paulo, Brazil (Dr. H. von Ihering).
A small whitish species, No. 1,186 of von Ihering’s register.
Happia Theringi, nasp: Pl MEE, figs. 1, .2./3.
Shell umbilicated, depressed, discoidal, translucent, coneous.
Surface glossy, showing very slight, fine growth-wrinkles under
the lens, and occasional white lines indicating the positions of
former peristomes. Spire concave, very narrow, its width con-
tained 34 times in that of the shell. Whorls slightly exceeding
three, the last very wide, rounded at the periphery, convex
beneath, umbilicus narrow, rapidly contracting, its width contained
44 times in the diameter of the shell. Aperture broadly lunate,
1 Since this paper was in type, I have received an advance copy, without
plates, of a paper by Mr. H. Suter, published in Portuguese, anticipating
several of the species I had described as new. I have substituted Mr.
Suter’s names for my own.
25
386 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
deeply excised by the preceding whorl, a little oblique; peristome
thin and simple.
Alt. 2, greater diam. 5, lesser 4.5 mm.
Os Perus, Prov. Sao Paulo, Brazil (Dr. H. von Ihering).
A small nautiJoid species, No. 1,185 of Dr. von Ihering’s
catalogue. He notes (in litt.) that it has a small jaw, and a
radula of typically carnivorous type, with the formula 15. 1. 13.
The presence of a jaw suggests the pertinence of Happia to the
‘family Circinariide, rather than to Streptazide ; but we are still
profoundly ignorant of the anatomy of the South American Strep-
taxes.
Happia vitrina (Wagner).
Cubatao, Alto do Serra, Sao Paulo (No. 1.184 of Dr. von
Thering’s register). It is Streptaxis tumescens of Suter.
Another Happia, No. 807 of von Ihering’s register, is somewhat
like H. vitrina (Wagner), but with wider, less depressed spire,
wider umbilicus and rougher, wrinkled surface; diam. 15 mm.,
habitat, Piquete, Sao Paulo. This is evidently undescribed, but
as the lip of the single specimen sent is broken, I defer its formal
characterization. It is No. 71,247 Coll. A. N.S. P.
Guppya seminlini (Moricand).
Os Perus, Sao Paulo (No. 1,183 of von Ihering’s register).
Dr. von Ihering remarks (in Jitt..) that he can see no reason
for referring semindini to a different genus from fulvus ; and while
it is customary to separate the tropical and South American species
of this form as a genus Guppya, it must be acknowledged that
there are absolutely no differential generic characters in the shells
between the two species mentioned above. The typical forms of
Guppvya have a fleshy prominence or horn above the caudal gland,
which, so far as I know, is wanting in the North American and
Palearctic Conulus.
However, the name Conulus is preoccupied by Rafinesque; and
although his Conulus is a synonym of Conus Linné, still the
name cannot be revived. It is also in use in Echinodermata.
Under these circumstances, it seems that Guppya will stand as the
generic name for the tropical and South American species. A
rapid survey of the South American species in the collection of
the Academy shows that they are more numerous than the litera-
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 387
ture would indicate, and often various forms appear under one or
another of the older names. The true semin/ini has an excessively
minute sculpture giving a silky lustre to the upper surface, while
the base is glossy, with extremely fine, close, superficial circular
strie, A specimen measures: alt. 3.7, diam. 4.6 mm, whorls 54,
A smaller species or variety, alt. 2, diam. 2.6 mm., from
Os Perus (No. 1,182 of von Ihering’s register), is allied to
seminlini Moric., paraguayana Pfr., anguina Anc. and martinezt
Hid. The form is much as in seminlini; whorls a trifle over 5,
the last angular, surface with a silky lustre above and a band of
the same just below the periphery, just as in ‘‘ Conulus’’ chersinus
var. polygyratus Pils. The rest of the base is glossy, but under
sufficient magnification shows spiral striz in places. This may be
called var. subseminlini.
ENDODONTIDA.
Stephanoda pleurophora (Moricand). Pl. XII, figs. 4, 5.
This species, described from the Province of Bahia, has been
found by von Ihering at Sao Paulo. As the original description
and figures leave much to be desired, new figures are here given.
There are 44 whorls, the earlier one and one-half smooth, the
rest with raised, lamellar rib-strie, which are sinuous, and about 8
to a millimeter on the front of the last whorl, becoming more
crowded near the aperture. The width of the umbilicus is con-~
tained nearly four times in the diameter of the shell. Alt. 2.3,
diam. 3 mm.; width of umbilicus .5 mm.
The jaw and radula have been examined by Dr. von Ihering.
The former is but little arcuate, composed of twenty well-united
narrow plates, being like that of Charopa, Endodonta, etc. The
radula has the formula 15. 1. 15, the central teeth tricuspid, with
the middle cusps much shorter than the basal plates; laterals also
tricuspid, the middle cusps longer than the basal plates; mar-
ginals wide, multicuspid, the cusps being split into some five acute
denticles.
Stephanoda patagonica (Suter). Pl. XI, figs. 9, 10, 11.
Shell minute, depressed, subdiscoidal, umbilicated, the width of
the umbilicus contained nearly four times in the diameter of the
shell. Spire slightly convex; whorls 33, convex, separated by deep
sutures, the earliest 14 whorls smooth, the rest finely and densely
388 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF . [1900.
rib-striate, the strize rather low, straight, about 20 in the space of
a millimeter on the last whorl; last whorl rounded at periphery
and below. Aperture rounded-lunate, slightly oblique.
Alt. 1.15, greater diam. nearly 2 mm.; width of umbilicus
.O mm,
Santa Cruz, Patagonia (No. 1,181 of Dr. von Ihering’s reg-
ister).
The specimens of this very minute species were obtained from
dried mud. It is smaller than any other described form from the
region.
HELICIDZ.
Polygyratia Sargenti n. sp.
Shell planorboid, flat above, having a deep, broadly funnel-
shaped or conical umbilicus below; yellowish-corneous, subtranslu-
cent, glossy; finely striatulate, and showing some faint spiral lines,
visible only under a strong lens, above. Whorls 74 to 8, the first
one wider than the next, very closely coiled and slowly widening,
the last whorl deviating and somewhat descending toward the
aperture, rounded peripherally and below, flattened and impressed
behind the upper lip. Umbilicus half the width of the shell, or
a little less. Aperture irregularly bilobed, quite oblique; peris-
tome slightly expanded, more so below, a little thickened, the
upper margin straightened and bearing a conic median tubercle;
outer margin arched, basal margin nearly straight or only weakly
arcuate; the terminations widely separated.
Alt. 11, diam. 3% mm.
This species is allied to P. Ortoni Crosse, from which it differs
in the smaller size, paler color, decidedly narrower and more
conical umbilicus, and greater height compared to the diameter.
It has one or two whorls less than specimens of P. Ortoni before
me from Boya, Peru. The aperture resembles that of P. Ortoni.
It is named in honor of Mr. H. E. Sargent.
Polygyratia affinis n. sp.
Shell planorboid, flat above, and somewhat concave in the
middle, having a broadly conic umbilicus below, pale yellow, very
glossy, faintly striatulate whorls 84, excessively closely convoluted,
the last whorl about four times as wide as the preceding, rounded
at the periphery, tangentially deviating and somewhat descending
near the aperture. Aperture quite oblique, deeply lunate, the
3)
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 389
peristome simple and unexpanded, the upper margin somewhat
straightened, sloping, outer and basal margins arcuate.
Alt. 4, diam. 114 mm.; width of umbilicus 5 mm.
Pere Coll. Aj N.S. P. No. 57,671.
This species was in the collection of the Academy under the
name H. stenogyra Pfr. It is nearly allied to P. polycycla Morel.,
but is less depressed, the last whorl wider, and the umbilicus is
much narrower. In P. systrophia the last whorl, seen from above,
is much narrower. PP. stenogyra is an allied but larger and
otherwise differing species.
Polygyratia stenostrepta var. declinata n. var.
Similar to stenostrepta, but with the last whorl much more
deeply deflexed anteriorly, the suture terminating at the middle
or lower third of the height of the whorl; groove above the
upper lip strongly developed; basal lip well expanded. Whorl 932.
Alt. 44, diam. 15 mm.
Alt. 4, diam. 114 mm.
Peru. Types No. 78,140, Coll. A. N.S. P.
Epiphragmophora oresigena Var. bernardius V. Ihering, n. var.
Shell similar to E. oresigena (Orb.), but smaller, and lighter
colored, yellow or greenish-yellow, with three blackish-brown
bands, two above the periphery, one wider band on the base.
Whorls 44, the last subangular at the periphery; surface lirate-
malleate, the wrinkles tangential to the last whorl of the suture.
Aperture white or purplish, and banded within, the lip white;
umbilicus partly or nearly covered.
Alt. 17, diam. 30 mm.
Alt. 16, diam. 28 mm.
Serra da Bocaina, State of Sao Paulo, Brazil (Dr. H. v.
Thering).
The typical E. oresigena is a larger, heavier and darker shell
from the northeastern slope of the eastern cordillera and the pro-
vince of Yungas, Bolivia. It will probably prove to be a variety
of the still larger E. audouinii Orb., from the same region. The
types of var. bernardius are No. 71,253 Coll. A. N. S. (No.
872 of Dr. von Ihering’s register).
Strophocheilus oblongus (Miiller).
The geographic range of this species is greater than that of any
other Strophocheilus. In the north there is one insular variety,
390 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1900.
albolabiata E. A. Smith,? of Tobago. In the south there are
several varieties, as follows:
Var. crassus Albers. Parana region (Orbigny, Giiich).
Var. alba Smith. As large as the type, but pure white, lip
rose-pink. Pampa Ruis, Bolivia (Orbigny).
Var. sanctepauli vy. Ther. and Pils., n. v.
Very slender and elongated, not compressed between face and
back, with narrow, produced spire. Substance of the shell red-
dish, with light subsutural band; cuticle persistent; surface typi-
cally costulate, but later two whorls without microscopic granula-
tion. Aperture small, half the shell’s length, pink within;
peristome brilliant rose colored. Whorls 6. Alt. 84, diam. 43
mm.; alt. of aperture 43 mm.
Botucatti, Sao Paulo, Brazil (von Thering).
This variety resembles S. santacruzii somewhat.
Dr. W. H. Rush found the typical form of oblongus at Fray
Bentos, on the Uruguay river, and with it a small, solid race with
obtuse spire, and small, brilliant rose-lipped aperture.
Strophocheilus paranaguensis Pils. and y. Iher.,n. sp. Pl. XI, figs. 1, 2.
Shell ovate, decidedly compressed dorso-ventrally, moderately
solid, the spire short, obtuse. Shell substance dull pink, with a
pale band below the sutures; cuticle mainly retained on the later
two whorls, yellow below the sutures and back of the outer lip,
elsewhere yellowish-chestnut, with rather numerous, narrow, obliquely
longitudinal chestnut streaks. Surface moderately shining, irregu-
larly, strongly wrinkle-costulate, as in S. oblongus; showing under
the lens a microscopic granulation (similar to that of the spire of
S. oblongus), which is largely or entirely lost on the last half
whorl. Nepionic whorls finely costulate, as in 8S. oblongus.
Whorls 5%, the earlier five regularly and moderately widening,
with slightly oblique sutures, the last half whorl (in a dorsal
view) rapidly descending, its sutwre extremely oblique. Aperture
somewhat oblique, whitish inside; peristome well expanded, bril-
liant rose-colored; columella with a moderate fold.
2 The synonymy of this variety is as follows :
Borus oblongus var. albus Mull., W. G. Binney, Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sei.,
iii, p. 115 (jaw and teeth; shell not described).
Bulimus oblongus var. albolabiatus E. A. Smith, Proc. Malae. Soe.
Lond., i, p.-137 (1894).
Strophocheilus oblongus var. tobagoensis Pilsbry, Man. of Conch
(2 Ser.), x, p. 30, Pl. 14, f. 70 (1895).
-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 391
Alt. 92, diam. maj. 55, min. 47 mm. ; length of aperture 62 mm.
Paranagua, coast of Prov. Parana, Brazil.
With the sculpture of S. oblongus, this species unites the con-
tour of S. ovatus. It differs from ob/ongus in the streaked cuticle,
dorso-ventral compression, short spire, and very oblique last
suture. It is more obese than S. granulosus Rang, with less
pronounced granulation, coarse surface costulation, and closer
apical riblets.
Strophocheilus globosus (Martens).
The locality of this species has hitherto been unknown. It
oceurs subfossil at Montevideo, Uruguay, whence specimens have
been sent by Dr. von Ihering. It will doubtless be found living
in the same region. The apical sculpture is that of the S. ob-
longus group. Some specimens are so globose as to suggest the
European Helix aspersa.
BULIMULIDA.
Bulimulus Steerei n. sp.
Shell umbilicate and broadly rimate, ovate-conic, with straight-
sided spire and convex last whorl, the base angular around a large
umbilical excavation; solid and strong, opaque soiled white, with
indistinct brown stains in most specimens, and usually an indis-
tinct whiter girdle at the periphery, the apex white. Surface
lustreless, finely wrinkled longitudinally, and densely granose in
spiral series, as in B. proteus or B. Montezuma; the granules small
but strongly expressed. Apex obtuse, earlier 14 whorls strongly
vermiculate-wrinkled, the wrinkles anastomosing and largely
transformed into a netted pattern. Sutures not impressed, being
filled by the peripheral keel of the young shell. Whorls 63, the
first two convex, those following almost completely flat, the last
whorl convex, without trace of a peripheral angle or carina,
usually ascending in front. Aperture subyertical, ovate, built
forward nearly to the level of the ventral convexity, brown tinted
within; peristome broadly expanded, thickened within, brown or
white, acute at the edge. Columella oblique, making an angle with
the basal margin; its edge dilated; parietal callus moderate or
slight, whitish.
Alt. 58, diam. 21, longest axis of aperture 204, greatest width
134 mm.
392 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Alt. 35, diam. 20, longest axis of aperture 21, greatest width,
134 mm.
Alt. 36, diam. 19, longest axis of aperture 20, greatest width,
124 mm.
Peru, J. B. Steere expedition. Types in Coll. A. N. S&S, No.
78,144, and Coll. University of Michigan.
The granose surface gives this species some resemblance to B.
Proteus, but it differs in the characters of the aperture and the flat
whorls of the spire. The young and half-grown shell is evidently
acutely carinate at the periphery. In this respect B. Steerei is like
B. Cora Orb., and other forms referred to the genus Neopetreus ;
but it has the apical sculpture of a true Scutalus, wholly unlike
that of Neopetreus.
The deeply excavated tract behind the columellar lip leads to a
tubular umbilicus, which is evidently large and open in the imma-
ture shell, but is more or less constricted in most adults.
Bulimulus hematospira Nu. sp.
Shell rimate, pillar-shaped, the last 4 whorls of about equal
diameter and white, those above tapering and deepening to a blood-
red color; thin, but moderately strong, opaque, nearly lustreless.
Apex obtuse, the earlier 14 whorls convex and sculptured with
delicate, spaced and straight longitudinal riblets ; next whorl or two
nearly smooth, with merely some series of long granules; longitu-
dinal ribs gradually appearing; the white, cylindrical portion of the
shell being sculptured with strong, arcuate ribs, narrower than their
intervals, and several spiral series of long, narrow, crowded gran-
ules. Whorls 83 to 9, the earlier convex, the later 3 or 4 some-
what flattened. Aperture small, oval, longer than wide, white
within; peristome simple and unexpanded.
Length 16, diameter above the aperture 3, length of aperture
3 mm.
Length 16.3, diameter above the aperture 3, length of aperture
3 mm.
Length 15, diameter above the aperture 3.1, length of aperture
5 mm,
Locality unknown, probably Peru. © Types in Coll. A. N. S.,
No. 78,135, and in Coll. University of Michigan.
This beautiful little Budimulus would be considered a Peroneus,
from its narrow form and calcareous texture, were it not for the
1900.) NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 393
apical sculpture, which is like Nesiotus, Protoglyptus and Orthoto-
mium. This shows it to be not a Peronewus, but a stock of diftfer-
ent ancestry, parallel to that group, such as I have shown to exist
in various Bulimulid groups.
Odontostomus kuhnholtzianus (Crosse). Pl. XII, fig. 12.
An enlarged view of the aperture is given to show the arrange-
ment of teeth. The specimen figured is from Montevideo, col-
lected by J. Arechaveleta, Director of the National Museum of
Montevideo (No. 1,015 of Dr. von Ihering’s register, 78,037
Calli A. N_ Ss. P.).
HELICINIDA.
Helicina iguapensis 2. sp,
Shell depressed, the diameter about twice the altitude, lens-
shaped, acutely keeled ; very pale yellow, the apex and basal callus
white. Surface lightly striate, irregularly grooved and _ finely
striate spirally, this sculpture weaker on the last whorl, finer
beneath. Spire low conic; whorls 5, the first smooth, the last
slighty convex, becoming concave above the acute peripheral keel.
Base evenly convex. Aperture oblique, subtriangular, white
within; peristome rather broadly reflexed, white, angular at the
termination of the peripheral keel; the upper margin uearly
straight, basal margin moderately arcuate; columella very short,
vertical, produced below in a projecting angle. Callus thin, white.
Alt. 8.5, diam. 16 mm.
Operculum scarlet outside, fading to whitish at the nucleus,
lightly striate, irregularly triangular, the nucleus marginal, nuclear
edge straight, with reflexed scarlet margin.
Iguape, S. Paulo, Brazil. Type from Dr. H. von Ihering,
No. 78,028, Coll. A. N.S. P. (940 v. Ihering’s register).
This species resembles H. carinata Orb., angulata Sowb., and
gonochila Pfr. in the salient angle or tooth in which the columella
terminates below; but it is a far larger and more depressed shell.
In general form it is almost exactly like H. caracolla Moric.,
which differs in completely lacking any trace of an angle at the
base of the columella.
The sculpture above seems to consist of rather low, flat lire,
over which much finer spiral striz run. This is best developed on
the next to the last whorl.
394 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Helicina inequistriata n. sp. y
Shell thin, subglobose-depressed, rather bluntly carinated; vary-
ing from a dull reddish color to pale sulphur yellow. Surface
dull, sculptured with fine growth lines and numerous unequal, low
and flattened spiral lirze, with a sculpture of fine spiral strize over
them, giving the appearance of groups or fascicles of more promi-
nent, alternating with bands of less prominent spiral striz. Spire
low conic; whorls 44 slightly convex, the last decidedly angular
at the periphery, convex, not descending anteriorly. _Aperture
subtriangular, the outer angle rounded; peristome white, narrowly
subreflexed, its face thickened in old specimens; upper margin
but slightly arcuate, basal margin strongly arched, forming a
right angle with the straight and vertical columella, the base of
which is outwardly angular. Basal callus rather small, whitish.
Alt. 7, diam. 94 mm.
Raiz da Serra, Sao Paulo, Brazil. Types from Dr. H. von
Ihering, No. 78,058 Coll. A. N. S. (938 von Ihering’s register).
APPENDIX: DESCRIPTION OF A NEW STROPHOCHEILUS, BY
Dr. H. von IHERING.
Strophocheilus Pilsbryin.sp. Pl. XI, fig. 4.
Shell perforate, oblong, moderately solid, chestnut brown, with
a blackish line followed by an ill-defined yellow band below the
suture; irregularly plicatulate and beautifully granose micro-
scopically throughout, the granulation barely visible to the naked
eye, and arranged in regular spiral series; spire thick, obtuse.
Whorls 5, the first one planorboid, the next tumid above; last
whorl oval, convex, its later half more descending, shortly ascend-
ing at the aperture. Aperture ovate, bluish within; peristome
reflexed, red; columella oblique and straight above, concave
below, its margin dilated above, almost closing the narrow per-
foration.
Length 48, diam. 24 mm.; aperture 25 mm. long.
Piquete (Serra da Mantigueira), Sao Paulo, Brazil.
This species seems to be allied to S. rhodocheilus (Reeve), but
has not the color-pattern or columellar fold of that species, the
aperture is smaller, and the surface irregularly plicatulate as well
as granulous.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
(Su)
co
oO
PRELIMINARY NOTES ON THE RATE OF GROWTH AND ON THE
DEVELOPMENT OF INSTINCTS IN SPIDERS.
BY ANNIE BELL SARGENT.
The following work* was taken up in the fall of 1898 for the
purpose of determining how young spiders develop through the
winter, what instincts or intelligence they may possess and when
these appear.
In October I collected, on a vacant lot in Philadelphia, several
hundred cocoons, in all probability Argiope cophinaria, as that
was the adult spider most commonly found among the cocoons.
Dr. McCook in his American Spiders and Their Spinning Work
(7) has described the structure of these cocoons so exactly that I
need not go into it here.
Although the spider probably has not an intelligence comparable
to that found in higher animals, that it does possess complex in-
stincts is evident in the making of the cocoon. Four kindsof silk,
of as many colors, are found in each completed nest; the whole is
shaded over with a fifth, which renders it less conspicuous, and it
is moored to its place by a sixth, (see McCook, (7), Vol. II).
Each kind of silk has its respective place, which never varied in all
the cocoons I examined, although in some a layer was omitted.
However these differences are produced, an instinct that guides its
possessor through such intricacies is of a high order.
All the occupants of a single cocoon were in the same stage of
development, and until November cocoons containing all stages,
from the egg to the just-hatched embryo, were found. After No-
vember the eggs that had not hatched dried up.
GROWTH.
Before the time of Balbiani’s work (1) in 1873, the develop-
ment of Aranez had been studied chiefly with regard to the exter-
_ | Accepted as a thesis for the degree of Bachelor of Science in Biology,
University of Pennsylvania, June, 1899.
396 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
nal features by such writers as Herold (4), 1824; Rathke (10),
1842; Von Wittich (11), 1845; and Claparéde (3), 1862. Bal-
biani (1) has given a detailed description of the early development,
but does not describe completion of the abdominal organs. In 1880
Balfour (2) gave notes on the development from completion of
segmentation to completion of thoracic organs, but gave nothing
with regard to the eventual fate of yolk and the formation of intes-
tine. In 1886 Locy (6) gave a very complete account of the de-
velopment of Agalena from laying of the eggs to hatching of the
embryo. He showed that the intestinal tract is stil] incomplete at
time of hatching, and my observations tend to confirm this.
Kishinouye (5), in 1891, made observations on Lycosa and Agalena
from laying of the egg to hatching. He has not followed out the
completion of the intestine.
In the works of the last two writers, it is difficult to determine
whether by the term ‘‘ hatching ’’ they mean leaving the egg mem-
brane or leaving the cocoon. Locy speaks of one moult before
hatching in Agalena and Kishinouye says there are two or three
moults before hatching in Agalena and Lycosa. In Argiope there
was no indication of a moult before the leaving of the egg membrane,
but there were two or three moults before the leaving of the
cocoon. In this paper hereafter by ‘‘ hatching’’ is meant the
leaving of the egg membrane. My observations agree with those
of the above writers in showing that the spider leaves the egg in a
very embryonic condition, and that the intestine is not complete
until just before or just after leaving the cocoon.
For the purpose of determining how the young spiders develop,
I killed a number for sectioning from time to time through the
winter. Picro-sulphurie acid gave the best results as a fixing
fluid. Second to this was picro-acetic acid. Both require from
twelve to twenty-four hours to kill, because the many little hairs
on the body enclose a jacket of air which buoys the spider up and
keeps the fluid from reaching the skin. It is very difficult to make
stains penetrate the tissues and I found the following a very good
method. Having removed the legs, or, in the case of very young
spiders, pierced the abdomen with a fine needle, stain in foto in
picro-hematoxylin for twenty-four hours. It may be necessary
to harden in alcohol and again stain in picro-hematoxylin. Take
up to seventy per cent. alcohol and stain for twelve hours in aleo-
saa}
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 397
holic eosin. The picro-hematoxylin will penetrate the abdomen
slightly if at all; but the eosin stains it fairly well. The best
results were obtained by embedding in celloidin and paraffin and
fixing on the slide with hot water.
Argiope cophinaria.
As early as November the cephalo-thorax is complete ; the
stomach and cesophagus, the nerve mass surrounding them, the
blood vessels around the nerve mass, muscles, poison glands, pig-
meut and eyes are fully developed and throughout the winter I
observed no change in this part of the body. The abdomen is the
reservoir for the great quantity of yolk which remains even after so
much of the body is completed. The intestine and “ liver’’ have
not made their appearance in November, although all the other ab-
dominal orgaus have. This entire space is filled with solid yolk
masses divided by three main blood sinuses which run down from the
heart. The heart is much compressed at this time, and has few
corpuscles in it (Pl. IX, figs. 2, 3 and 4). In January the yolk
masses begin to break up and are slightly absorbed. In February
the intestine shows distinctly in section and the ‘‘ liver’’ can be
distinguished among the yolk masses. There is a decided change in
the shape of the abdomen—from rounded to elongated, flattened
dorso-ventrally. In March (Pl. IX, fig. 1) the alimentary canal is
almost complete from mouth to anus. The mouth is lined on both
upper and lower lip with chitinous ridges, which interlock to form
a strainer. A large quantity of yolk still surrounds the intestine
and is scattered among the abdominal organs. As the yolk masses
diminish, movements are noticed. At first there is a mere waving
of legs, then rolling and scrambling over each other, and finally
a definite, though awkward, climbing along the threads of the
cocoon. Increase in size is slight, and takes place very slowly
after the spider leaves the egg-membrane. Then follows a period
of slow-development, which lasts through the cold months and
consists in absorption of yolk, increase in pigment and change in
shape to that of the adult spider.
Agalena nevia.
In addition to the Argiopes there came into my possession the
cocoon of Agalena nevia Hentz. These eggs were laid on October
10, 1898, and hatched November 15. Within two weeks after
hatching these spiders were perfectly black, running about the box
598 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
in which the cocoon lay and making an irregular web all through
it. Their activity was in striking contrast to that of Argiope. In
the matter of spinning webs and climbing on them they were
skilled acrobats, and behaved as if this had been their habit for
months. At this time they did not eat and showed no fear of each
other, although they became wildly excited and ran in every
direction when the box was disturbed or anything was dropped
into the web.
In a few days they began to eat and increased notably in size.
From time to time I made camera drawings as the increase war-
ranted (Pl. X, figs. 5-14).
When the spider is full-fed and about to moult, the skin is very
tight and shiny; the abdomen seems out of proportion to the
cephalo-thorax. After the moult, the actual increase in size seems
slight. The expanse of the legs is greater, there is an increase in
length and in width of the cephalo-thorax, but the abdomen is
shrunken. As soon as the spider begins to eat again, it increases
rapidly in size until the limit is reached, when a moult again
occurs. It is possible that this increase is due to filling out of folds
in the skin.
DEVELOPMENT OF INSTINCT.
There has been some discussion as to whether the spiders have,
in any degree, intelligence. There have been many scattered
anecdotes and marvelous tales, such as those related in The
Naturalist in La Plata, that would credit the spider with intelli-
gence; but careful scientific investigation tends to refute all such
ideas and places the spiders among animals having complex in-
stincts. The most valuable work that has been done along this
line is that of George and Elizabeth Peckham (9) and Dr.
McCook (7).
It is certain that young spiders gain nothing by imitation, for
many of the most highly developed species lay their eggs in the
fall and give them no further attention. In the spring, when the
young leave the cocoon, and when they would be most benefited
by the example of others, they separate and each, with its own
inheritance of instincts and tendencies, starts out to do battle for
itself. And yet here as elsewhere in the animal kingdom, one is
impressed with individual differences, as will be shown later.
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 399
Among the hunting spiders (Lycosidw), too, there is no chance for
imitation, At the time when the young leave their mother’s back
they separate, as in the case of the weavers. This does not imply
that the spider leaves the cocoon, or its mother’s back, as skilled
and as agile as she is. It must learn and practice to perfect itself.
As early as February, and long before it leaves the cocoon,
young Argiope can spin a little drop line, but the line is short; it
requires considerable stimulus, as shaking, to cause it to spin; the
spinner in many cases seems unable to climb back, and when it
does climb back it is with exceedingly clumsy efforts. The young
hunting spider at an early age obeys its instinct to catch a moving
gnat, but its first attempts are rarely successful, and for some
time it is very awkward.
OBSERVATIONS ON ARGIOPE COPHINARIA, OCTOBER TO APRIL.
AU during October, spiders were hatching, and at this time gave
no indication of any sense except that of touch.
In November they had moulted once or twice, and were slightly
more active when disturbed.
In December they were decidedly more active, but seemed not
to notice light or heat.
In January development was very slow and no changes were
observed.
In February most of the little spiders could be made to spin a
little drop line by violently shaking the egg ball. They made
awkward attempts to walk, and did not use their hind legs in guid-
ing them along the threads of their cocoon. Off the cocoon silk
they were perfectly helpless, soon became tired and lay with legs
drawn up.
To try the effect of severe winter weather on young spiders out-
side of the cocoon, I placed a number of specimens in a little
pasteboard box and left them in an open window of an unheated
room. Some individuals were in the silk of the cocoon, others
were not. The following observations were made. Unfortu-
nately, the exact amount of cold to which these spiders were sub-
jected was not determined. In the absence of such data the offi-
cial records of the Weather Bureau of the minimum temperatures
for the nights in question are given:
February 9.—Removed spiders from cocoon as described above
400 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900-
and exposed all night. Weather Bureau record, —1° F. (= —
18.3°C.).
February 10.—Still living and active when touched. Exposed
again all night. Weather Bureau record, — 6° F. (= — 21°C.).
February 11.—Less active. Exposed all night. Weather
Bureau record, — 6° F. (= — 21° C.).
February 12.—No change. Exposed all night. | Weather
Bureau record, 4° F. (= — 15.5° C.).
February 18-16.—No change. Exposed each night. Weather
Bureau record, 7°, 9°, 11°, 21° F. (= — 13.8°, — 12.7°, —
11.6°,—6° C.).
February 17.—Seemed more active. No definite movement
toward any point or return to the ball on the part of those not in
the silk (p6°R. = 2°. €.).
February 18.—Several of those lying on bottom of the box and
outside of the meshes of the silk dead; others not so active (52°
Pe —0P Cs).
February 23. —All spiders lying on bottom of the box and not in
the meshes of the silk, dead, except three beneath the silk of the
cocoon; these three very sluggish (37° F. = 2.7° C.).
February 24-27.—Less active each day; nearly all the spiders
in the box died, including those beneath the silk. The lowest
temperature was 26° F. (= — 3.3° C.), on the 25th,
March 1.—Four living in the silk of the cocoon.
March 6.—AlII dead.
From observations made since, it is probable that these spiders
died, rather from their scattered condition, than from the cold.
As opening cocoons seemed to have no effect upon the occupants,
to determine how they would behave if deprived of the cocoon
entirely, I made these observations :
February 9.—A brood of spiders clinging to the cocoon silk was
removed from the cocoon and spread out ina glass globe. They
showed plainly that they were disturbed. Some moved along the
threads of the silk, although for the most part they simply waved
their legs and rolled over each other, trying to form into little balls
wherever a few were together. No attempt was made to return to
the cocoon, although it hung still? attached to the silk. Aphids
were offered as food, but the spiders did not seem to see these;
also water, but no attention was paid to it.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 401
February 10.—A decided grouping into balls was noticed at
points where most of the spiders happened to be as the silk was
drawn out. Moved awkwardly, or waved their legs, when
brought near heat. No attempt to spin. Turned the globe so
that light fell on it differently, but this produced no effect.
February 11.—No difference in position of balls; balls some-
what larger; fewer spiders moving along the web; all resting with
ventral side uppermost, but moving with dorsal side uppermost.
February 17.—I placed the globe so that rays from a lamp fell
on some of the spiders, while others were in shadow; after thirty
minutes there was activity among those exposed to light—a general
tumbling and rolling over each other, but no definite movement
toward the light or away from it. Activity evidently caused by
the light, as those spiders in the shadow remained quiet, with ven-
tral side up as before.
March 12.—Drew silk away from one of the groups, scattering
some of the spiders; all moved actively, apparently trying to get
into centre of the mass; in a few hours all the stragglers had gone
back to the group; acted as if stiff from cold, although tempera-
ture was not low.
March 13-31.—No change in groups; most of the isolated
spiders died.
April 1.—Still no attempt to weave webs.
April 2.—More active, and moved along web with less waving
of legs, using hind legs as guides; soon formed into groups when
scattered.
April 26.—Those spiders on outside of groups shriveled up.
At this time I took some of the spiders out on a sheet of paper
and noticed that they moved away from anything touching them,
~but were not aware of an approaching object until actually
touched.
On March 10 I opened twenty-six cocoons that had been kept in
a locker all winter. In these all were dead except six from differ-
ent cocoons. These six were further developed than those taken
from cocoons earlier in the year, were more active and moved as if
accustomed to using their legs. As they seemed able to take care
of themselves, I put them into a glass box, where they had ample
opportunity to weave, and made these observations. I put into
the box the tops of two cocoons, which they soon moored to the
26
402 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900. -
bottom, not as the result of a definite purpose, but of mere wander-
ing before settling down. Two finally crawled into a bit of the
sik still clinging to one of the tops.
March 11.—Moved at the least jarring; all hung, ventral side
up, on individual threads from lid of box.
March 22.-—Two dead, in same position as when alive.
March 23.—-Four survivors not so active.
April 9.—Not so active.
April 10.—Third one dead.
April 11.—Three remaining dropped to bottom of box as soon
as disturbed, lay motionless an instant, then ran actively about,
finally returning to original position—suspended from lid.
April 18.—Offered water, which they drank eagerly; bodies
seemed to swell. Still no attempt at regular web.
These observations indicate that during the winter months the
young Argiopes change very little in any way. In most of the
cocoons the spiders were all alive and active until March, when very
few cocoons had any living occupants. This must have been due
to the heat of the house, as the spiders were all shriveled in ap-
pearance. On March 14 I gathered twelve cocoons in a vacant
lot, and found that in all of them there were hundreds of living
spiders, all at the same stage of development as the ones living in
the house all winter.
The question arises here, what may be the use of the cocoon ?
It can scarcely be for retaining animal heat, as the amount of heat
generated by the young spiders must be extremely little; their
abdomens are packed with yolk and there is very little muscular
activity among them. If taken out of the cocoon they form into
close balls, and those which are able to keep in the centres of these
balls live just as well as those in the cocoons, while those on the
outside dry up. If kept in stoppered bottles they all live as well
as in the cocoon. The chief use of the cocoons seems to be to keep
the spiders together and to prevent evaporation of moisture. I
took a number of spiders from cocoons that had been indoors all
winter and from others that had been out of doors all winter, gave
them some cotton to burrow into, wrapped them in separate pieces
of very thin cloth and hung them outside where they would be
exposed to March snow and wind and April rain; yet those that
had been indoors all winter lived and kept pace with those in the
>
—————— =
ia)
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 408
cocoons until April 18. Those that had been out of doors all
died except one. From April 18 to April 26 the weather was
very dry and it became very warm where the spiders were hanging.
In that time they all dried up except the one from the cocoon that
had been out of doors all winter. This survivor was very active
and seemed ready to leave, the nest. Spiders in cocuons hanging
in the same place were all active and healthy, although every
cocoon had been opened. This shows that they can endure cold,
wind and rain, for the snow packed in all over the little bags of cot-
ton and cloth, melted and dried in the sun. Absorbent cotton was
used, and it must have been saturated many times. The cocoon
holds the little spiders together for the purpose, as I think, of
keeping them moist, and prevents evaporation of that moisture.
The silk furnishes a suitable support, as is shown by the fact that
they soon grow weary in attempting to walk on a surface, and that
without a place of attachment, moulting becomes a great difficulty.
The cocoon also prevents their being scattered into unfavorable
places by dashing rains and high winds. The view that the
cocoon prevents evaporation is borne out by the later life of the
spider; for as soon as it leaves the nest and begins an independent
existence, abundance of water is absolutely necessary. A spider
will live indefinitely without food, but without water it will survive
only a few days. The cocoon, of course, protects the young
spiders against numerous enemies—birds, wasps, toads, etc., some
of which, however, often pierce the cocoon. ‘The great majority
of the cocoons of Argiope which I examined had been bored
into, and in some the eggs were ravaged; but I failed to find any
traces of parasites (see McCook, 7). In other species I have
_ found ichneumons and I wondered at their absence here.
At first I thought the young spiders always kept the ventral side
uppermost, but later found that they always keep the ventral side
outwards. Why they maintain this position is an unanswered
question. Removing a nest from the cocoon I placed it in a
black bag and hung it in a recess where no light could enter.
On taking the nest out, at intervals for weeks, I saw that all the
spiders had the ventral side turned out, even those on the bottom.
It is evident that light has nothing to do with this phenomenon.
It is possible that respiration is facilitated by this position.
I have not been able to make any valuable tests as regards the
404 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
development of the senses in Argiope, since the spiders are never
hungry nor thirsty, and the first of these conditions is very im-
portant in determining range of sight. Fear has been shown only
in the case of the three spiders taken from the cocoon on March 10,
when they dropped on being disturbed. The other spiders would
not move away from an approaching object, and would even sit
still and be eaten up by older spiders of other species. Tests for
hearing and the sense of smell would also be useless because of
this lack of motive.
Argiope, then, in April, is about ready to leave the cocoon, can
drop itself from danger on a little line and drink water. It makes
no attempt to weave a snare, to eat its fellows or anything else,
has little more than a rudiment of fear, and if it sees, the stimu-
lus arouses no response.
OBSERVATIONS ON AGALENA NEVIA.
As the specimens of Agalena nevix grew too active and inde-
pendent to be kept in an ordinary box, I placed them in an olive
bottle, where all their movements could be easily watched.
About December 15, when put into the bottle, they showed unmis-
takable signs of fear and acted as if they were in a strange place,
running excitedly here and there. I gave them a little corner of
an envelope for a refuge and point to collect on. After an hour
they were quieter and set about weaving an irregular web from
side to side of the bottle. This web became denser from day to
day, and showed little tunnels running through it. The tunnel is
very characteristic of the adult of this species. No attention
whatever was paid to the refuge. They could see at least an inch,
and recognized each other as cannibals. I draw this conclusion,
because I observed that they charged upon each other when they
came within that distance. I could not measure these distances
accurately, but preferred to make the distance less, rather than
greater than it actually was, and I am sure it was no less. That
they feared each other was evident from the way the pursued ran
from the pursuer.
They ate aphids or one another indifferently, increasing notably
in size from day to day, or shriveling up and dying. Until
February 18 I allowed them to live together, the larger ones eating
the smaller and less active, and many dying. At this time seven
- 2 (ora
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 405
only survived. I put each one into a separate bottle, 6.3 cm.
high and 1.6 cm. wide. The bottles were lettered a, b, ¢, d, e,
f, g- From day to day each spider was observed and _ notes
recorded. They grew much more rapidly than Argiope and formed
an interesting study of specific and individual differences, as well
as of developing instinct. That these spiders also are able to
endure cold is proved by the fact that on February 9 they were
exposed to the same temperature as the Argiope spiders. The
moisture in the bottle froze all over the inside, but the spiders,
beyond being stiff; until] they were taken into a warm room, were
not at all affected. The following are the records that were
made. The spiders were kept under conditions as normal as possi-
ble, under the circumstances, and their behavior under these con-
ditions carefully noted.
SprpER A.—This spider busied itself for three days spinning a
web back and forth across the bottle.
February 21.—Afraid of a little fly offered as food. After a
few minutes it made an attempt to catch the fly. After five or
six attempts, it caught the fly by its hind legs; fly escaped and was
recaptured a number of times; spider spread its spinnarets and
made a motion as if to enshroud its prey and tried to push under
the fly’s wings to seize it by the abdomen.
February 22.—Decided increase in size of spider; skin tight
and shiny; color lighter than that of the other spiders.
February 24.—Introduced a little globule of water; no atten-
tion paid to it; finally I guided it until two feet dipped into the
water, but it would not drink; refused to eat.
February 28.—Placed the spider in a shallow box for drawing;
very much frightened and climbed out five or six times, then
began to weave a web, but, although it climbed to the edge many
times, it merely fastened the web and returned to the box. It
frequently rested and cleaned itself, as does an adult spider.
March 3-5.—Drank water eagerly, but refused to eat.
March 6.—Moulted.
March 7.—Seized small fy, when offered it, at once.
March 12.—Increase in size evident.
March 19.—Dead.
SprpER B.—February 18.—This spider was seen circling around
a black, winged aphis, occasionally approaching it from the rear,
406 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
as if to seize it. Beside the aphis and moved by every struggle,
Jay an old white spider skin. This the spider finally took hold of
aud tried to drag away. After fifteen minutes, it left the skin and
for fifteen minutes more seemed undecided, then seized the aphis
near the head and proceeded to eat it. This was the largest of the
spiders and the one that I had noticed most frequently devouring
aphides, as well as its own kin, in the olive bottle.
February 20.—Greatly increased in size.
February 21.—Leaped at once upon thorax of a little fly and
proceeded to eat it.
February 22.—Notable increase in size; skin of abdomen shiny,
tight.
February 23.—Web very evident half-way up the bottle, woven
irregularly from side to side.
February 24.—Dropped a small fly into the web; spider greatly
excited at once, but seemed unable to locate fly; ran to dead fly
in the web, then to one above, and back to lower one. Settled
down finally as if discouraged and made no further efforts even
when fly came immediately beneath its feet.
February 28.—Removed to shallow dish for purpose of making
a camera drawing; behaved much as a did under similar cireum-
stances, but quieted down much sooner (PI. X, fig. 10).
March 1-2.— Refused to eat.
March 3.—Moulted.
March 7.—Deftly seized a mosquito by the thorax.
March 10-11.—Body large and shiny.
March 12.—Unusually excitable (Pl. X, fig. 11).
March 17.—Dropped down on a line on being disturbed; never
did so before.
March 18,—Offered two little Argiopes—evidently a new kind
of prey; spider much excited; approached, circled around, draw-
ing out web all about and over little Argiope; an evident but
feeble attempt to enshroud the prey; did not guide the thread at
all with the hind legs and wasted much silk by not touching prey;
went away from the little spider and after a few minutes went to
other one, which it seemed not to see before, and, without any en-
circling movements, ate it.
March 20-22.—Skin very tight and shiny; refused to eat.
March 23.—Had moulted in the night; refused to eat.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 407
March 27.—Caught a mosquito and again made motions as if to
enshroud it (Pl. X, fig. 12).
April 4.—I turned the bottle on its side; in time the spider
came out of the bottle, walking away about two inches in an ex-
cited, jerky manner; touched it with a pencil and it instantly
rushed into the bottle; did not come out again.
April 5.—Would not come out of the bottle of its own accord.
April 6.—Increase in size noticeable.
April 7.—Pattern on ventral side of abdomen very distinct.
April 10.—Ate a small fly, but refused an ant.
April 11.-—Refused to eat.
April 12.—Moulted.
April 13.—-Decided difference in pattern and general shape;
now a long, slender spider, much more excitable; turned and ran
quickly to bottom of bottle on least disturbance.
April 14.—Attacked an ordinary house-fly and seized it by the
abdomen (Pl. X, figs. 13 and 14).
April 16-17.—Rapid increase in size.
April 18.—Returned to dead fly of April 14.
April 19.—Fixed itself at once on thorax of house-fly; made
movements as if to enshroud it.
Sprper c.—February 21.—Made attempts to catch a fly entirely
too large for it.
February 23.—Very sluggish.
February 24 —Three anterior legs of left side seemed crippled
and a white exudation appeared at their bases.
February 27.—Dead.
Sprper p.—This was one of the most active and excitable of
the spiders from the start.
February 21.—Offered a little fly twice as large asitself; sprang
at it and seized one hind leg; fly struggled violently and finally
escaped; spider seized it again by abdomen and held on until fly
was exhausted and gradually shifted its own position until it had
its chelicerze fastened into the back of the fly’s thorax; made weav-
ing movements with the spinnarets.
February 22.—Noticeable increase in size.
February 24.—Introduced little globule of water; spider was
moving about and finally wandered into water, which it drank with
evident satisfaction; made some cleaning movements afterwards.
408 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
February 28.—Very active; world not stay in shallow dish as
others had done, although put back many times (PI. X, fig. 5).
March 4-5.—Moulted some time in the night; refused to eat.
March 7.—Offered larger fly; spider attacked at once and seized
one hind leg; clung for several minutes; after fly was worn out,
the spider ran about it, excitedly spinning a web in a circle around
it, but not touching it; after some time, proceeded to eat it.
March 10.—Body large and shiny (Pl. X, fig. 6).
March 18.—Offered a little Argiope ; recognized a new kind of
prey; circled around and around, secreting silk, but very little of
the web touched the Argiope.
March 20-22.—Skin very tight and shiny; refused to eat.
March 23.—Had moulted in the night; refused to eat (Pl. X,
fig).
April 11.—More excitable; went through usual winding move-
ments before eating (Pl. X, fig. 8).
April 14.—Had become expert at catching prey.
April 15.—Body very large; skin tight and shiny (PI. X, fig. 9).
April 18.—Moulted.
April 19.— Looked exactly like B; more excitable than ever;
still made movements with spinnarets on catching prey.
SPIDER E.—This was an active little creature, although one leg
was missing on the right side.
February 21.—Made a number of attempts to catch a fly; finally
seized it by a hind leg; settled down on fly’s thorax; after twenty
minutes began to weave a web with fly as a centre; moving the
bottle did not disturb the worker; after eating there was a distinct,
but awkward, attempt to clean itself.
February 27.—Noticeable increase in size.
February 28.—When removed to shallow dish, made efforts to
escape, but after five or six trials began to weave a web contentedly.
March 2.— Dead; posterior abdomen white.
SprpEer F.—This was the smallest and weakest spider.
February 21.—Two hind legs on right side crippled; made un-
successful attempt to catch a fly.
February 22.—Dead.
SprpEeR G.—February 21.—Became excited when offered a fly,
but began to weave a web and paid no further heed, even when fly
walked over it.
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 403
February 22.—Made several attempts to catch a fly; finally |
succeeded.
February 23.—Dead.
In reading over these records of Agalena nevia, one is at first
impressed with the small number of survivors, but we must re-
member that they were not under perfectly normal conditions.
Had they been out in the fields, they would not have had so good
an opportunity to kill each other, but their enemies would have
had a better chance to prey upon them. In the bottles they were
protected from storms, but were more liable to disease. Whether
these factors counterbalance each other remains a question. These
records also indicate that the spider’s early life is greatly influ-
enced by the quantity of food and by individual as well as specific
differences. Some of the spiders are distinguished from the outset
by size, strength or quickness, and these are thus able to provide
themselves with more food and grow accordingly. When the
spiders were well fed the moults occurred closer together, although
they will moult or make the attempt to do so, after a long time
when food is scarce.
At first these spiders were all fed on aphides which they relished,
but as they grew larger and were offered other things, the aphides
were refused. Flies were eagerly caught, but ants were never
touched. This would indicate that they have some kind of dis-
crimination.
Another very interesting phenomenon has been the attempt to
enshroud prey. From watching these movements many times, I
am sure it is an instinctive impulse they attempt to obey, and
which is utterly useless because imperfectly performed. Adult
spiders that have this habit hold the victim firmly in their jaws
and twirling it around, wind it in a web drawn from the abdomen
by the hind legs. Agalena does not have this habit when adult,
but drags its prey into a tunnel. The young were frequently seen
attempting to drag the struggling flies, although they had made no
regular tunnels in their webs. The attempt to enshroud must be
the result of an instinctive return to a habit that is lost.
SUMMARY.
1. Growth is gradual through regular, successive stages, which
follow each other rapidly or slowly, according to the species and
the individual.
410 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
2. Increase in size takes place chiefly between the moults and is
largely dependent on the food.
3. Moulting does not occur at regular intervals after the spiders
leave the cocoon, but according to the amount of food.
4. Sensory reactions to external stimuli are poorly developed in
the very young animals, and are not manifested until the spiders
seem ready to put them to immediate use. They then develop and
become more acute with practice. The earliest reactions to appear
can be interpreted as fear.
5. Although at an early stage distinction between light and
darkness is possible, distinction between objects is not.
6. Cannibalism does not appear while the young are in the cocoon,
although in Aga/ena it is a marked characteristic afterwards.
7. Young spiders can withstand a very cold, moist atmosphere,
but not a warm, dry atmosphere.
8. Young Argiope always rest with the ventral side uppermost
when isolated; the ventral side is turned outwards when the spiders
are in a ball or group.
9. The cocoon prevents evaporation of moisture and serves as a
support for the young spiders, and, to a less extent, as a protec-
tion against enemies.
10. Young spiders differ in growth and habits, specifically and
individually.
11. Those instinctive reactions which are most advantageous to
the species become habitual through repetition and selection.
BIBLIOGRAPHY.
(1) Balbiani, M.—Mémoire sur Je Développement des Ara-
néides. Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., Sér. 5, XVIII, 1873.
(2) Balfour, F. M.—Notes on the Development of the Ara-
neina. Quart. Jour. Mier. Sci., XX, 1880.
(3) Claparede, E.—Recherches sur I’Evolution des Araignées.
Naturk. Verhandl. Utrecht, I, 1862.
(4) Herold, M.—De Generatione Aranearum in ovo. Mar-
burg, 1824,
(5) Kishinouye, K.—On the Development of Araneina.
Jour. Col. Sci. Imp. Univ. Japan, 1891.
(6). Locy, W. A.—Observations on the Development of
Agelena Neevia. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoél., Harvard Coll., XII,
1889.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 411
(7) McCook, H. C.—American Spiders and Their Spinning
Work. II, Philadelphia, 1889.
(8) Morin, J.—Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der Spinnen. Biol.
Centralbl., VI, 1886-1887.
(9) Peckham, George and Elizabeth.—Mental Powers of
Spiders. Jour. Morph., I, 1887.
(10) Rathke, H. —Entwicklungsgeschichte der Lycosa saccata.
Froriep’s Neue Notizen, Bd 24, 1842.
(11) Von Wittich, W. H.—Observationes quzedam de Arane-
arum ex ovo evolutione. MHalis, 1845.
(12) Id. Die Entstehung des Arachnideneies im Elierstocke;
die ersten Vorgiinge in demselben nach seinem Verlassen des Mut-
terkérpers. Miiller’s Archiv, Jahrg. 1849.
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
Pear EX
Fig. 1. Longitudinal section of abdomen of Argiope cophinaria
in March; approximate age, five months. Reichert
oc. 2, obj. 7a.
Fig. 2. Longitudinal section of <A. cophinaria in November;
approximate age, one month. Reichert oc. 2, obj. 3.
Fig. 3. Longitudinal section of cephalothorax of A. cophinaria
in November. Richert oc. 2, obj. 7a.
Fig: 4. Longitudinal section of abdomen of A. cophinaria in
November. Reichert oc. 2, obj. 7a.
PLATE X.
mevia, °° ad’? and *‘b,’’ x 9.
Fig. 5. ‘‘d,’’ February 28, age 105 days from hatching, length
of body 2.2 mm.
Fig. 6. ‘‘d,’’ March 14, age 119 days, length 2.28 mm.
Fig. 7. ‘‘d,’’ March 23, age 128 days, length 3 mm.
6
7
Big. 8. “‘d,”” April 11, age 147 days, length 3.65 mm.
. 9. “d,”? April 15, age 151 days, length 4 mm.
Bigs hO. b, eo February 28, age 105 days, “length 2.36 mm.
Fig. 11. ‘‘ b,’’? March 14, age 119 days, length 3.5 mm.
Fig. 12. A. nevia, ‘‘b,’’ dorsal view, March 23, age 128 days,
length of body A.) mama) See ae
Figs. 15 and 14. Dorsal and ventral views respectively of A.
nevia, ‘‘h,’’ April 14, age 150 days, length of body
comm." <7.
All the figures 1-14 are from camera drawings.
412 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
May 1.
Mr. Caarves Morris in the Chair.
Seventeen persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Flora of Willow Grove and the Edgehill
Ridge,’’ by Alexander McElwee, was presented for publication.
Mr. THomas MEEHAN was appointed to prepare a biographical
notice of the late Mr. Charles E. Smith for the PROocEEDINGs.
May 8.
Mr. Gnaeus Morris in the Chair.
Twenty-seven persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘A Review of the Phys of Northwestern
Illinois,’ by Frank C. Baker, presented for publication April 17,
was, at the request of the author, transferred to the editor of The
Nautilus.
Mr. Charles Morris was, at his request, granted permission to
withdraw his paper entitled ‘‘ Subterranean Waters,’’ presented
for publication March 27, 1900.
Mr. Cuarues Roperts was elected a member of the Council
to fill the vacancy caused by the death of Mr. Charles E. Smith.
May 105.
The President, Samuet G. Drxon, M.D., in the Chair.
Twenty-five persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Observations on the Anatomy of Hylobates
leuciscus and Chiromys madagascariensis’? by Henry C. Chap-
man, M.D., was presented for publication.
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 413
May 22.
The President, SamugeL G. Dixon, M.D., in the Chair.
Twenty persons present.
May 29.
The President, SAmurEt G. Dixon, M.D., in the Chair.
Sixteen persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ On the Osteology of Vulpes macrotis,’’ by
R. W. Shufeldt, was presented for publication.
The death of William Wynne Wister, Jr., a member, the 27th
inst., Was announced.
The following was ordered to be printed:
414 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
OBSERVATIONS UPON THE ANATOMY OF HYLOBATES LEUCISCUS AND
CHIROMYS MADAGASCARIENSIS.
BY DR. HENRY C. CHAPMAN.
HYLOBATES LEUCISCUS.
As the opportunity of dissecting a gibbon is comparatively
rare, it is hoped that a brief account of the results of the dis-
section of the young individual that recently died at the Philadel-
phia Zodlogical Garden may prove acceptable to the Academy.
The gibbons, of which there are several species, are found, as well
known, over a considerable area of Eastern Asia and the Malay
Archipelago. Together with the gorilla, chimpanzee and orang,
they constitute the group of Anthropomorpha, or anthropoid apes,
of which they are the least anthropoid in their nature, resembling
man more particularly in the character of the thorax. The gib-
bons are the smallest of the anthropoids, rarely attaining a height
of more than three feet. The head is small, and the body and
limbs are slender. They are the only anthropoids that exhibit
ischial callosities. The most striking peculiarity of the animal
externally is the length of the upper extremities, the fingers touch-
ing the ground when standing erect, which it often does. While
they can run very rapidly, putting the sole of the foot flat upon
the ground, which they often do, the genus is naturally arboreal in
its habit, passing quickly from bough to bough in the forests which
it inhabits, the movements being executed by means of its long
arms with marvelous accuracy and force, twenty feet and more
being covered at one bound.
Notwithstanding the small size of the gibbons, all observers agree
as to the great volume of their voice, the ery of the Siamang, Hy/o-
bates syndactylus, being heard in its native woods miles away, its
vocal sound being more powerful than that of any human singer.
It may be also mentioned in this connection that the gibbon
is the only mammal that ean be really said to sing. The Wouwoo,
Hylobates agilis, has been heard to emit at the London Zodlogi-
eal Garden the rising and falling scale of the semitones of the
ee
Pres ehnwee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 415
octave. The gibbon presented to the Academy by the Philadel-
phia Zodlogical Society, and upon the dissection of which this com-
munication is based, is that known to zodlogists, according to Mr.
Arthur E. Brown, Secretary of the Society, as Hylobates leuciscus,
the silvery gibbon. As the anatomy of the gibbons is more or Jess
well known, attention will only be directed to those parts of the
economy of the animal under consideration which differ more par-
ticularly from those of man and the remaining anthropoids.
Muscular System.—Our gibbon, a young male, measured from
the crown of the head to the heel 21.75 inches (55 centimeters).
The length of the upper extremity from the shoulder to the tip
of the middle finger was 17 inches (43 centimeters), that of the
lower extremity from the hip to the tip of the middle toe only
13.25 inches (33.5 centimeters).
The muscles of the face were undifferentiated. In the cervical
region the levator claviculz was observed extending, as in the other
anthropoids, from the transverse. process of the atlas to the
acromial end of the clavicle. The biceps arose by two heads, both,
however, being humeral in origin, the small head arising from the
lesser tubercle of the humerus instead of from the coracoid process,
asinman. ‘The latissimo condyloideus extended to the condyle of
the humerus, not merely to the centre of the humerus, as stated by
Hartmann.’ The brachialis anticus was well developed, though its
presence was not noted in the gibbon described by Bischoft.* The
pronator radii teres arose by one head. There was nothing especially
noticeable about the flexors sublimis and profundus digitorum. The
slip from the tendon of the flexor profundus supplying the ring
finger split, however, into two tendons, one of which, that ordi-
narily present, perforating the tendon of the sublimis, the other,
the accessory one, being inserted into the first phalanx of the index
finger. The latter disposition was probably an abnormal one. The
part of the flexor profundus supplying the thumb was so completely
separated from the rest of the muscle that it might almost be re-
garded as a distinct flexor longus pollicis, as is the case in man.
1C. L. Martin, A General Introduction to the Natural History of Mam-
miferous Animals, ete., 1841. Owen, The Anatomy of Vertebrates, Vol.
III, p. 600.
2 Anthropoid Apes, p. 164.
3 Beitrage zur Anatomie des Hylobates leuciscus.
416 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
All of the muscles of the thumb—viz., the abductor, opponens,
flexor and adductor pollicis—were present and well developed. In
addition to the muscles of the little finger usually present, the ab-
ductor, flexor and opponens, it was also supplied by a distinct
extensor proprius minimi digiti.
There was nothing particularly noticeable about the muscles of
the dorsal surface of the upper extremity. The extensor indices split
into three tendons, which supplied the ring, middle and index fin-
gers. The extensor ossi metacarpi pollicis gave off two tendons,
one of which passed to the metacarpal bone, the other to the trape-
zium, as is.often the case in man and monkeys. The extensor primi
internodii pollicis was absent; the extensor secundi was so inserted,
however, as to act on both the first and the second phalanges of the
pollex. The lumbricales were well developed. Of the contratentes
digitorum, or the little muscles passing from the deep fascia over
the metacarpal bones to the digits, two were observed, those sup-
plying the second and fifth digits. The palmar and dorsal inter-
ossei were much developed, indeed remarkably so considering the
size of the hand. The nerves of the upper extremity were exceed-
ingly well developed, the median ulnar and radial especially so.
There was nothing especially to be noted about the muscles of
the hip and thigh. ‘The soleus was observed to arise from the fibula
alone, and not as in man from both fibula and tibia. The plantaris,
peroneus tertius and flexor accessorius were absent. The flexor
longus hallucis gives a strong tendon to the big toe and three perfor-
ating tendons to the second, third and fourth toes, with Jumbricales
for the third and fourth toes only. The flexor longus digitorum
contributes to the formation of the tendon of the flexor longus hal-
lucis and supplies the third, fourth and little toes, the tendons sup-
plying the third and fourth toes only being perforated by the two
corresponding tendons of the flexor longus hallucis. The flexor
brevis digitorum appears to supply the second toe only; it is per-
forated by the corresponding tendon of the flexor longus hallucis.
The tendon to the fifth toe, corresponding functionally to that of the
flexor brevis digitorum in man, appears when present to be derived
from the flexor longus digitorum, as well as the deeper tendon from
the same muscle already referred to. The muscles of the big and
little toe, usually present, were noticed. Of the contratentes
digitorum, that supplying the little toe was the only one observed.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 417
The interossei were not as well developed in the foot as in the
hand,
The Larynx.—In accord with what has just been said as to
the voice being so powerful in the gibbon, one would naturally
expect to find the larynx large and well developed, with its
lateral ventricles dilated into enormous air sacs, as seen in the
gorilla, chimpanzee and orang, or some modification of the
hyoid apparatus such as occurs in the South American Howler,
Mycetes alouetta. Asa matter of fact, however, in our gibbon the
larynx was not unusually large nor were the vocal membranes or
ventricles specially well developed. Not a trace of a laryngeal sac
was to be seen, either as sacs communicating with the larynx by
the ventricles or by openings in the thyro-hyoid membrane, as
is said to be the case in the Siamang.* Indeed, it is only in the
latter species of gibbon that a large air sac has been found, the
sac in this species being globular and to be regarded morphologi-
eally as a development of the thyroid hyoid membrane.
It must be admitted that the manner in which the loud voice is
produced in the gibbons is not understood. That a laryngeal sac
exerts but little influence in this respect is shown by the fact that
the voice of the gibbon in which the sac is absent is as loud as in
that in which it is present. Indeed, beyond the statement that a
laryngeal sac acts as a resonator, there is little to he said as to the
function even of the enormous sacs present in the remaining an-
thropoids.
Origin of the Great Blood Vessels. —The manner in which the
great blood vessels are given off from the aorta in the gibbon
differs from that in man. In the gibbon the aorta gives off an
innominate and a left subclavian artery, the innominate in turn
giving rise to the right subclavian and the two common carotid
arteries, the disposition being similar to that observed in the
orang.
Alimentary Canal.—There was nothing especially remarkable in
the anatomy of the alimentary canal. The salivary glands were large
and the rugz of the palate were very prominent. The absence of a
uvula was noted. The stomach was rather of a globular form,
and resembled the human stomach much more than that of the
*Huxley, Anatomy of Vertebrated Animals, p. 412.
27
418 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
orang, which is much elongated. Valvule conniventes were
absent ; the patches of Peyer were, however, well developed. The
urogenital apparatus did not present any remarkable peculiarity.
The kidney exhibited, as in the case of the orang, only one papilla.
There was one pancreatic duct and it opened into the duodenum
close to that of the hepatic duct. The gall bladder was large and
elongated, which was possibly due to the presence of gall stones.
The vermiform appendix was present, measuring three centimeters
(14 inches), but was both relatively and absolutely smaller than
that of other anthropoids.
The Brain.—The brain in the present individual, as in the gib-
bons generally, was small. Unlike that of the Siamang,° however,
the posterior lobes of the cerebrum covered completely the cere-
bellum, as was also the case in the brain of the silvery gibbon de-
seribed and figured by Bischoff.° There was nothing particularly
noticeable about the gyri and sulci, the principal ones being iden-
tified. It should be mentioned, however, that the calcarine fissure
passed continuously into the hippocampal fissure, the gyrus forni-
catus being separated, therefore, from the hippocampal gyrus, a
disposition which, according to Ecker,’ does not obtain in the genus
Hylobates. The parieto-occipital fissure did not reach the calearine,
the two fissures being separated by the convolution known as the
‘“¢ deuxiéme plis de passage interne’’ of Gratiolet, or the ‘‘ untere
innere sheitelbogen-windung ’’ of Bischoff. The ventricle was well
developed and contained the hippocampus minor, and what
appeared to be the remains of the eminentia collateralis. The
brain of the gibbon resembles in some respect that of the Sem-
nopithecus and in others that of the orang. — Indeed, so much so is
this the case, that it may be regarded as bridging over to a consid-
erable extent the gap in cerebral development between the two.
The study of the organization of the gibbon, a résumé of
which has just been given, leads to the conclusion, long since
reached by the author, that the proposition advanced by the late
Prof. Huxley, that the difference between man and the anthropoids
is less than that between the anthropoids and the remaining Simiz,
except as regards the skeleton, is not true. The gibbon, for exam-
~ 5 Flower, Phil. Trans., 1862, I, p. 185.
5 Ope cit., S. 1G.
™The Cerebral Convolutions of Man. Translated by R. T. Edes, M.D.,
p. 76.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 419
ple, as regards the general character of the brain, in the pres-
ence and absence of certain muscles, in the origin of the great
blood vessels, and in other respects, resembles the lower Simize more
than it does man. Further, the association of the four anthropoids
in one group Anthropomorpha, as contrasted with the remaining
Catarrhine or Cynomorpha, is an artificial, not a natural one, since
there is no evidence to show that the anthropoids have descended
from a common ancestor or are directly related genetically to each
other. On the contrary, it is much more probable that each an-
thropoid has descended from some highly specialized Catarrhine—
the gorilla, for example, from some Cynocephalus, Macacque, or
like form; the gibbon from a Semnopithecoid one, and so on, the
gibbon and orang being closely related on the one hand, the chim-
panzee and gorilla on the other.
CHIROMYS MADAGASCARIENSIS.
The Aye Aye, so called on account of the natives uttering that
exclamation the first time the animal was seen, was discovered by
Sonnerat in the island of Madagascar about the year 1785, and
was first described and figured by that naturalist.* For a long
time after its discovery considerable difference of opinion prevailed
among systematists as to its exact zoological position. According
to Sonnerat the animal resembled a squirrel in some respects, in
others a lemur. Buffon regarded it as a squirrel, Cuvier as
a squirrel with quadrumanous affinities, Schreber as a lemur, ete.
Indeed, it was not until the year 1863, nearly a century after it
was discovered, that the Aye Aye was shown conclusively by the
researches of the late Prof. Owen’ to be essentially in its nature
a lemur.
As our knowledge of the organization of the Aye Aye is some-
what limited, the only works treating of its anatomy, so far as is
known to the author, being the monograph of Owen just cited and
the later supplementary account of Peters,” it is hoped that the
following observations will not be regarded as superfluous. The
individual upon whose dissection the present communication is
8 Voyage aux Indes des Orientales et a La Chine. Paris, 1806. Tome
IV, p: 121. Plate 92. ‘
®**On the Aye Aye,’’ Jrans. of the Zoological Society. London, Vol.
V, 1866.
10 Ueber die Saugethiergattung Chiromys. Abhdlg. d. Berlin, Akad., 1865.
420 * PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
based, though preserved in alcohol for several months, was in
fairly good condition. It was a female, and measured from crown
of head to the heel 45 centimeters (18 inches). The length of
the upper extremity from shoulder to tip of middle finger measured
22.5 centimeters (9 inches), that of the lower extremity from hip
to tip of middle toe 30 centimeters (12 inches).
Nervous System.—Owing to the softened condition of the brain,
necessitating its removal enclosed in the dura mater, and to the
subsequent unsuccessful hardening of the same, we have but little
Fig. 1. Fig. 2.
to say about it other than that in the general configuration, ia the
presence of a well-developed corpus callosum, in the simple charac-
ter and paucity of fissures, and in the almost entire exposure of the
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 421
cerebellum, the posterior lobes of the cerebrum being so little de-
veloped, it resembled that described and figured by Owen. As the
nerves of the extremities are not described by either Owen or Peters,
it should be mentioned that, as regards the distribution of the nerves
to the hand, it was observed that while the thumb and index finger
were supplied by the median nerve, and the little and ring fingers
by the ulnar nerve, the middle long slender finger was supplied
by two branches which came from somewhat of a plexus formed
through the union of the median and ulnar nerves, as shown in
Fig. 2. It need hardly be mentioned that such a disposition is
an unusual one, the little finger and ulnar side of the ring finger
being supplied in five-fingered animals by the ulnar nerve, the
radial side of the ring and remaining fingers and thumb by the
median nerve. We shall see, however, presently that the middle
slender finger is not only supplied by nerves derived from both
the median and ulnar nerves, but by a greater number of muscles
than ordinary.
Such disposition appears to be correlated with the function of
the long middle finger which, as is well known, the Aye Aye makes
use of in searching for its food, inserting it into pieces of wood
containing the grubs upon which the animal preferably feeds.
That the view just offered as accounting for the rich nervous and
muscular supply of the middle finger is the correct one is further
shown by the faci that in the case of the foot the big toe, second,
middle and tibial side of fourth toe are supplied by the internal
plantar nerve, and the little toe and fibular side of the fourth toe
by the external plantar nerve (Fig. 1).
Muscular System.—As the muscular system of the Aye Aye has
been described with considerable detail by Prof. Owen, attention
will be directed more particularly to such muscles as were not
noticed by that anatomist or which differed in regard to their dis-
position.
Of the muscles of the cervical region and upper extremity two
were observed not mentioned by Owen. They are especially in-
teresting as being found in all lemurs and monkeys, from the Aye
Aye to the gorilla. These are the elevator clavicule, extending
from the transverse process of the atlas to the acromial end of the
clavicle, and the latissimo condyloideus, passing from the latis
simus dorsi to the internal condyle of the humerus.
422 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
The three short muscles ordinarily supplying the little finger and
the four short muscles supplying the thumb were all well devel-
oped. The tendon of the flexor longus pollicis came off, however,
from the tendon of the flexor profundus digitorum, the muscular
belly of the pollicis being entirely undifferentiated from that of the
profundus. The four tendons of the sublimis were perforated as
usual by the four tendons of the profundus, four lumbricales being
‘given off by the latter, as was observed by Owen, instead of three,
the usual number. The interossei were well developed. The ex-
tensor muscles of the hand were four in number—an extensor com-
munis digitorum supplying the four fingers, a second extensor situ-
ated beneath the communis supplying the ring and middle fingers,
an extensor indicis supplying the index and middle fingers, and an
extensor minimi digiti supplying the little and ring fingers. It will
be observed, therefore, that the middle finger is supplied by three
distinct muscles, an unusual number, the significance of which
has been already referred to.
In addition to the four extensor muscles just mentioned, there
were present two long extensors of the thumb, an extensor ossi
metacarpi pollicis and an extensor secundi internodii pollicis.
Regarding the muscles of the lower extremity and more especially
of those of the leg and foot, it may be mentioned that the tibialis
anticus, the extensor proprius hallucis, the extensor longus and
brevis digitorum were well developed. In addition to the peroneus
longus and brevis, two other peronei muscles were observed not
noticed by Owen, viz., a'peroneus quarti digiti and a peroneus
quinti digiti, the two muscies being inserted into the terminal
phalanges of the fourth and fifth toes respectively. The two short
muscles of the little toe and the four short muscles of the big toe
were well developed. No trace was found, however, of the ex-
tensor brevis hallucis described and figured by Owen.
The tendon of the flexor longus hallucis enters largely into the
formation of that of the tendon of the longus digitorum, the
former supplying more particularly the big toe and the second and
fifth toes, the latter the third and fourth toes. The only portion of
the flexor brevis digitorum observed arising from the caleaneum
was the muscular slip supplying the fifth toe, the three remaining
slips coming oft from the conjoined tendons of the Jongus digito-
rum and longus hallucis. All four tendons of the flexor sublimis
were perforated by the tendons of the longus hallucis and longus
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 425
digitorum. Four Jumbricales were present, as in the case of the
hand, and the interossei were equally well developed.
The Viscera.—There was nothing especially noteworthy regard-
ing the alimentary canal and its appendages other than what have
already been described by Owen and Peters. The caput coli,
however, at least in the specimen dissected by the writer, exhibited
a decided constriction into two parts, a proximate portion cor-
responding to the cecum and a terminal one, much narrower,
about 2.5 centimeters (1 inch) in length, resembling very closely
the vermiform appendix of man and the anthropoids.
The great blood vessels arose from the aorta, as described by
Peters, the right subclavian and the trunk of the common carotids
springing from an innominate, the left subclavian separately from
the aorta.
No trace of a laryngeal pouch such as that described by Owen
was observed, its absence being perhaps due to the fact that the
animal was a female.
The uro-genital apparatus agreed essentially in its structure with
that described by Peters, the urethra passing into the vagina
through the anterior wall of the latter instead of perforating the
clitoris, as is usually the case in lemurs. The clitoris and external
orifice of the vagina were concealed externally by a circular fold of
integument. It is an interesting fact that while the imperforate
condition of the clitoris in Chiromys is exceptional among the lem-
urs, on the other hand the perforated condition of the clitoris, as
in Capromys, is exceptional among the Rodentia, the urethra
passing in the latter into the vagina.
According to many systematists, the Jemurs, including Chiromys,
together with the Simiadz and man, are classed together as Pri-
mates; according to others the lemurs are separated from the
Simiadze and man and classed apart as half apes or Prosimii, and
are regarded as being the ancestors of the Simiadz, Insectivora,
Cheiroptera and Rodentia. If the latter view be adopted, then the
slender Loris may be regarded as the ancestor of the Simiade,
Tarsius of the Insectivora, Galeopitheeus of the Cheiroptera and
Chiromys of the Rodentia, the rodent affinities of Chiromys being
shown not only by its general resemblance to a squirrel and the
form of its incisor teeth, but by the character of its alimentary
canal and uro-geuital apparatus.
424 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
JUNE 5.
Mr. CuHArLes Morris in the Chair.
Sixteen persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Notes on Hyacinth Roots,’’ by Ida A. Kel-
ler, was presented for publication.
A Collapsing Crater.—Mr. Epw. Goupsmiru referred to his
communication op a volcanic crater of the Mesozoic age near
Pottstown, a locality within easy reach by trolley cars. In fact,
it is a popular resort because of the peculiar formations occurring
there.
Several years ago the crater in question had a perfect cauldron-
like contour within; but this has changed in such a way as to indi-
eate its gradual collapse.
The southern and western sides apparently remain intact, but
all of the northern and part of the eastern sides show the recks to
have moved toward the centre of the crater.
The huge rocks which have moved inward were, two years ago,
in a vertical position, but were cracked straight down to the bot-
tom of the crater, probably from the main mass in situ.
These cracks at that time presented an opening of an inch,
more or less, but now, since their movement toward the centre,
they have become so large that a man can crawl through the
gap. Three masses, standing on edge, and weighing in the aggre-
gate one hundred tons or more, have taken part in the movement.
As the inner contour remains, there is evidence of the actual
former existence of a crater, although the clear cauldron-like
form is changed. When further movement takes place it will
entirely disappear, leaving an irregular pile of rocks grouped in
the greatest disorder, upon which the weather will work its smooth-
ing effects just as is now observable ina number of places on the
same hill, ail of which are, as he had formerly demonstrated,
collapsed craters.
That they were craters is clearly evidenced by the existence of
the enormous fragments of basaltic columns, by the tachylite
which is an opaque obsidian, by the four lava-flows forming the
terraces, and by the amygdaloidal rocks. The last crater in that
locality is now working toward its own annihilation.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 425
JUNE 12.
CHARLES SCHAEFFER, M.D., in the Chair.
Thirteen persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Note on the Australian Pupide,’’ by Henry
A. Pilsbry, was presented for publication.
JUNE 19.
Mr. CHartes Morris in the Chair.
Sixteen persons present.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :
<< A New Crayfish from New Mexico,’’ by T. D. A. Cockerell
and Wilmatte Porter.
«¢ The Structure of the Diatom Girdle,’? by T. C. Palmer and
F. J. Keeley.
JUNE 26.
The President, SamureL G. Drxon, M.D., in the Chair.
Seventeen persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ On the Osteology of Vulpes macrotis,’’ by
Dr. R. W. Shufeldt, was ordered to be published in the JOURNAL.
The following were ordered to be printed:
426 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
NOTE ON THE AUSTRALIAN PUPIDZE.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.
To ascertain the geographic range of the genus Bifidaria I was
led to examine the Australian species in the collection of the
Academy, and as no author seems to have indicated their place in
the system, it may be as well to put the facts on record.
Four genera of the family Pupide are represented, of which one,
Cylindrovertilla, has been found in Australia and New Caledonia
only, the others being widely distributed.
Fig. 1. Fig. 2. Fig. 3. Fig. 4.
Fig. 1. Pupoides pacificus (Pfr.), Facing Isl., Queensland. Fig. 2. Pupa
ficulnea Tate, Palm creek, central Australia. Fig. 3. Cylindrovertilla
kingt (Cox), Sydney, N.S.W. Fig. 4. Bifidaria stranget ( Pfr.) ,Narrabri,
N. 8. Wales.
Key to Genera.
a.—Aperture toothless except for a nodule (angle lamella) usually
developed at the posterior augle; peristome expanded or
reflexed; shell brown, tapering above, Bu/iminus-shaped,
Puporpes (fig. 1).
Pe ee ee!
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 427
=
a*,—Aperture with a parietal and a columellar lamella, and one or
two palatal folds, or toothless; form cylindric, blunt at the
ends, the whorls narrow, hardly oblique, Pupa (fig. 2).
a’.—Angle lamella developed, no parietal; a small columellar
lamella and upper palatal fold. Sinistral and minute,
CYLINDROVERTILLA (fig 3).
a’.—Angle lamella and a more immersed parietal Jamella devel-
oped, the two converging and usually more or less united; a
columellar lamella and two or three palatal folds generally
present. Shell whitish, teeth white, Brriparta (fig. 4).
Lamelle
(x Poo a te a
ia =
= o
o =
ics S
a
Qa > o a
By vey op Se
= ~
ec £ £3
= a «= pa
= '
; '
Subcolumellar -~--- ----\-
Supracolumellar - ----\- ; a _ >| =: Suprapalatal iu
RB
3 ~>-+~- Upper palatal =
E Columellar -------- = =
sj --- -]2 2 = Interpalatal S
—
8
~ ~ -- Lower palatal
———————— SS)
Y
~=--~-f£ — ==» |nfrapalatal
Fig. 5. Nomenclature of lamellz and folds.
The nomenclature of folds is indicated in Fig. 5. The palatals
may be identified, when the normal number of three is reduced, by
remembering that the lower palatal fold is about equidistant from
the columellar and parietal lamellze, and straight lines connecting
these three teeth form an approximately equilateral triangle. There
are sometimes accessory folds within the lip, designated infrapalatal,
interpalatal or suprapalatal, according to their positions.
I have confined my observations on Australian species to those
in the collection of the Academy, referring merely to Dr. Cox’s
Monograph, Mr. Smith’s paper on Western Australian shells, and
Prof. Tate’s report on the Horn Expedition for confirmation of
the identifications. A wider reference to the literature would
428 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
probably increase the number of species, but is unnecessary for
my present purpose.
Genus PUPOIDES Pfr., 1854.
Besides its distribution in the two Americas and Antilles, this
genus is represented in southern Asia (P. ceenopictus, P. lardeus), in
tropical Africa (P. senegalensis), and in Australia, where it is
represented by P. pacificus Pfr., P. adelaide A. and A., P. con-
trarius Smith, P. ischnus Tate, and I suppose P. lepidulus A. and
A. (described as Chondrula), and P. myoporine Tate, the latter
two not known to me by specimens.
Some Australian and African species are sinistral, and at least
one, P. contrarius Smith, either sinistral or dextral. Prof. Tate’s
P. ischnus is perhaps the most aberrant of the Australian group,
but they all seem closely allied.
Genus PUPA Drap., 1801.
The Australian species exhibit the common characters of this
genus, which, though wanting in Polynesia and South America, is
pretty generally distributed elsewhere. Even when twothless, like
the original type of P. muscorwm, the contour of the shell readily
distinguishes it from Pupoides. Generally a parietal and a colum-
ellar lamella and the lower palatal fold are developed, frequently
the upper palatal also, in Australian forms.
Pupa australis A. and A., P. ficulnea Tate and P. lincolniensis
Cox belong here, and also, judging from description and figure, P.
nelsoni Cox.
Genus CYLINDROVERTILLA Boettger, 1881.
The arrangement of folds is quite peculiar in this group, which
was founded for the New Caledonian P. fabreana Crosse. The
single lamella upon the parietal wall is not the usual parietal
lamella, but the supraparietal or angle lamella; and the larger
denticle on the palatal side is apparently the upper palatal fold
rather than the usually persistent lower palatal.
C. kingi Cox, the only Australian species, is shorter, more oval
than fabreana, but both species are alike in being sinistral and
quite minute. The dentition varies somewhat, a lower palatal fold
often being developed.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 429
Genus BIFIDARIA Sterki, 1889.
The converging, often united, angle and parietal lamelle, and the
whitish shell with white teeth are characteristic. The extra-Aus-
tralian distribution of the genus is wide, though less extended than
that of Pupa or Pupoides. In America the greatest modifications
as well as most species occur; but in eastern Asia, from Japan to
India, it occurs, and B. pediculus, or slight modifications thereof,
are widely spread in Polynesia and the East Indies.
The Australian group of species is closely allied, to B. pediculus,
and falls into the typical section of Bijfidaria. Some American
forms, such as B. prototypus Pilsbry and B. dalliana Sterki, are
very similar, though in most other American, as well as the Chinese
forms of the typical section of Bifidaria, the angle lamella and
parieta] Jamella are more intimately united, forming a single sinu-
ous, bifid, or emarginate Jamella. But this varies by easy stages
from complete union to separation of the lamellee.
Some of the Australian species, like B. /arapinta Tate and B.
rossitert Braz., have the form of the American B. procera group,
with teeth like B. prototypus, while others are rather more conic.
B. strangei Pfr. is usually sinistral, but not aberrant in dentition.
In B. mooreana Smith the augle lamella is much reduced or even
ubsent, a reduction parallel to what has taken place in the Ameri-
ean B. pilsbryana and B. pentodon.
I have not seen P. wallabyensis Smith, P. macdonnelli Braz., P.
margarete Cox, and P. moretonensis Cox, species probably refer-
able to Bifidaria ; the latter two certainly belonging there.
The occasional presence of an infraparietal lamella in some
Australian species is unlike most of the Aimericans, in which this
tooth is very rarely developed.
I do not regard Bifidaria as related to the Polynesian groups of
which P. lyrata Gld. and P. tantilla Gld. are representatives,
further than by the general bond of common ancestry which con-
nects Bifidaria, Hypselostoma, Torquilla, Faula and these Poly-
nesian forms.
Summary.—Three of the four Australian genera of Pupide are
common to that continent and Indo-China, extending thence to
Africa and America, and one (Pupa) to Europe. One genus, Bifi-
daria, is represented also in Polynesia by the widely spread species
430 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
pediculus.* 'The only local group is Cylindrovertilla which occurs
elsewhere in New Caledonia. There is no ‘* Antarctic’’ type in
the Pupide. So far as their Australian distribution is concerned,
the Pupide agree with the Epiphallogonous Helices ard probably
reached Australia by the same land connection and at the same
time, from the northward.
1 Probably the range of B. pediculus has been greatly extended by human
agency.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 431
NOTE ON POLYNESIAN AND EAST INDIAN PUPIDE.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.
Inquiries bearing on the origin and affinities of the land snails
of Polynesia caused me to investigate the Pupa groups of the
region. The chief work upon them is that of Boettger, who gives
in the second volume of Prof. von Martens’ Conchologische Mit-
theilungen a review of the species, illustrating those known to him
by specimens. Several later papers by the same industrious author
have appeared in the Berichte der Senckenbergische Gesellschaft,
dealing with East Indian forms. The general grouping adopted by
Boettger seems to be supported in the main by my own observa-
tions; but a few minor points may require revision. In referring
East Indian forms to the Madeiran group Stawrodon of Lowe, it
seems to me that a mere analogy has been given undue weight.
The form and structure of the angle twbercle-—for it can hardly be
called a ‘‘ lamella angularis’’—is quite different in the Madeiran
Staurodon saxicola and the Oriental so-called Stauwrodon species.
In the latter it has the form of that in the group I cal)? Nesopupa,*
only much shortened. I would therefore remove Stauwrodon from
the nomenclature of Oriental Pupide.
We have, then, four groups remaining, as follows:
1. Bifidaria Sterki. The characters and synonomy of this
genus have been discussed in my paper on Australian Pupide, and
will be more fully considered in that by Mr. Vanatta and myself
on the American forms. :
The species of the area under discussion are widely distributed
over Polynesia, except the Sandwich group, the single species B.
pediculus Shuttlw. having a tremendous range, probably in part
owing to human transporting agencies. There are several other
closely allied forms, such as B. pfeifferi Bttg. and B. recondita
T.-C., of more limited range, all of them allied to Australian
1T am aware that this name is of mixed parentage, but a mongrel in this
case may be more convenient than a thoroughbred.
432 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
forms. The smooth surface, white teeth, and more or less united
angle and parietal lamell readily separate this type from Neso-
pupa.
2. Cylindrovertilla Boettger. So far as known, confined to New
Caledonia, where there are two species, and eastern Australia, one
species. It therefore scarcely enters the region we are considering.
3. Costigo Boettger.” This group resembles Nesopupa in the
dull brown, costulate or striate surface. It differs in having no
angle lamella, only a simple parietal on the parietal wal], a colu-
mellar always present, palatals two or none. It is probably a
Nesopupa, in which the angle lamella has become obsolete. Dis-
tribution, Saparua Island and Philippines.
4. Nesopupa Pils.* Small, dark brown, opaque and lustreless;
ribbed, costulate or striate; the aperture armed with an angle
lamella and a parietal, which remain distinct, not uniting as in
Bifidaria ; columellar lamella and palatal folds as usual, the latter
rarely absent; lip expanded. Type JN. tantil/a Gld.
This is par excellence the Polynesian type of Pupa. It is absent
in Australia, but occurs in the Philippines, Borneo, ete., and also
'in Mauritius and Mayotte. A number of sections may perhaps
eventually be distinguished, but only one seems to me to have any
foundation in nature. This may be defined thus:
Nesopupa ss. Peristome discontinuous above; palatal folds of
moderate length. ;
Iyropupa n. sect. Peristome continuous; upper palatal fold
very long; shell strongly costate. Type '. /yrata Gld.
The section Iyropupa contains several Hawaiian species, /yrata
Gld., perlonga Pse., costata Pse.*
Typical Nesopupa includes tantilla Gld. with the numerous forms
recognized as varieties by Boettger (/. ¢.), eapensis Bttg., and
* Bericht Senckenb. Naturforsch. Ges., 1891, p. 270. Type Vertige ( Cos-
tigo) saparuana Bttg.
* The following are synonyms :
Pugodella H. Ad., P. Z. S., 1867, p. 304. Type Pupa (Pagodella) ven-
tricosa H. Ad. (Mauritius). Not Pagodella Swainson, 1840.
Ptychochilus Boettger. Conch. Mittheil., 11, p. 47,1881. Type P. tantilla
Gld. (Polynesia). Not Ptychocheilus Agas., Pisces, 1855.
Staurodon Bttg., olim, for minutalis Morel., moreleti A. D. B. Not of
Lowe, 1852.
* Vertigo cubana Dall, Proc.U. S. Nat. Mus. XIII, 1890, pp. 1, 2, f. 1, 2,
is identical with costata Pease. My friend was naturally misled by the
false locality, ‘‘Cuba,’’ of his specimen. The figures are excellent.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 433
the Hawaiian forms, newcombi, admodesta, parva, which have the
angle lamella shorter. The Philippine forms referred to Stawrodon
also belong here, moreleti A. D. Brown, quadrasi Mlldff. (Guam),
ete., and likewise minutalis Morel. (Mayotte), ventricosa H. Ad.
(Mauritius), and incerta Nevill. (Bourbon). The forms with a
short angle lamella are probably not closely allied to each other,
but nearer the species with a long angle lamella, occurring in their
respective regions.
434 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
A NEW CRAYFISH FROM NEW MEXICO.
BY T. D. A. COCKERELL AND WILMATTE PORTER.
Cambarus gallinus 2. sp.
Specific Characters. —Agrees with C. simulans Faxon, except that
the apical portion of the rostrum is shorter; the areola is not
carinate, or at best there is only the faintest indi-
cation of a carina; the first abdomina) append-
ages of the o (form I) have the apical process of
the inner side long, straight, reaching considerably
beyond the inner processes as shown in the figure.
It has, with simulans, the broad, excavated ros-
F 1 abe. app. trum; the lines of dots on the areola; the antennse
C. gallinus. shorter than the body (when folded back reach-
ing about to middle of third abdominal segment) ;
the long, tuberculate chela; the sternum hairy; the third pair of
legs alone hooked,ete. The sides of the carapace have a double
punctuation, small punctures being interspersed among the larger.
Color. —Carapace and abdomen light pinkish-brown, flecked
with olive-green; abdomen with dorsal markings consisting of
oblique broad stripes on the segments, forming a row on each side,
these stripes darker than the general surface, and edged with a
somewhat paler tint. Ventral surface decidedly pink. Ends of
claws reddish.
Measurements. —The numbers in brackets are the percentages of
the total length. The measurements are in mm.:
Length
Srom tip of
rostrum to Breadth Length Length Widthof Length Length
end of of car- of car- of areolain of ros- of
teleon. apace. apace. areola, middle. trum, chela.
Las Vegas spn.... 78 21(26.9) 41 (52.5) 15 (19.2) 25(.03) 11 (14 ) 87 (47.4)
Roswell spn. ..... 69 18 (26 ) 35 (50.7) 18 (18.9) 1 (.01) 10 (14 ) 20 (43.4)
[C. simulans, .coece 97 27 (27.8) 61 (52.5) 18 (18.5) 1.3 (.01) 11.5 (11.8) 50.5 (62 )]
It will be seen that while C. stmudans is a larger animal than
ours, the proportions of the parts are about the same. The Ros-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 435
well specimens, though containing eggs, are all small. The size of
the chela is variable, as thus:
Specimen......cseecseee 4g @2 3)o (4) 62 (AP
Total length............... 73 72 71 91 72 65
Length of chela......... 28 22 32 38 22 28
The first of these is from near Watrous, the other five are from
the Gallinas river.
Hab.— Abundant in the Gallinas river at Las Vegas, and in
neighboring waters; also found in lakes near Watrous, N. M.
(Edward Springer), and at Roswell (J. D. Tinsley). Belongs
to the Pecos River basin in New Mexico, and is closely allied to C.
simulans from Dallas, Tex., and Fort Hays, Kans. It would be
reasonable to regard it as a slight geographical race of simulans
but for the quite distinct character of the first abdominal appen-
dages, which remains constant in the very considerable series, both
from Las Vegas and Roswell, which we have examined. No
Cambarus has heretofore been recorded from New Mexico.
The types will be placed in the U. S. National Museum, and
cotypes in the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia and
the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy.
A brief semi-popular notice of this species appeared in The
Southwest, April, 1900, p. 133.
436 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
TROCHOCYATHUS WOOLMANI, A NEW CORAL FROM THE CRETACEOUS
OF NEW JERSEY.
BY T. WAYLAND VAUGHAN.
The two specimens upon which the description of the following
species is based were sent me from the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia in compliance with the request of Mr.
~ Lewis Woolman:
Trochocyathus woolmani sp. noy.
1898. Platytrochus speciosus C. W. Johnson, Geol. Survey N. J., Ann.
Rep. for 1897, p. 265 (in Lewis Woolman’s Report on Artesian
Wells in New Jersey).
1898. Platytrochus speciosus C. W. Johnson, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Phila., 1898, p. 462 (non Platytrochus speciosus Gabb and Horn,
Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 2d ser., Vol. IV, 1860, p. 399, Pl.
LXIX, figs. 15-17).
Corallum short, inversely conical, living attached, transverse
outline circular.
Dimensions. —Diameter of calice, 3.5 mm.; altitude of coral-
lum, 4 mm.; diameter of area of attachment, 1mm. Wall rather
thick, naked, ornamented externally by twenty-four costs, corre-
sponding to all cycles of septa, and showing a fairly regular alterna-
tion of larger and smaller—i.e., there are twelve larger costze of the
same size corresponding to the septa of the first and second cycles,
and twelve smaller corresponding to the septa of the third cycle.
Near the calice they are prominent, with acute edges and broad
bases; as the base of the corallum is approached they decrease in
prominence. They possess granulations along their edges, and
some scattered granulations on the sides.
There are three cycles of sepia, divided into six systems. The
members of the first cycle are appreciably larger than the other
septa, and pass directly from the corallum wall to the columella
space without forming part of any septal group. The members of
the third eycle bend toward the members of the second, and fuse
to the sides of the latter below the level of the calice. The septal
margins project very slightly above the upper edge of the corallum
wall. The septal faces are ornamented with distant subconical
granulations.
The inner end of each of the primary septa is thickened, the
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 437
thickening apparently representing a palus, and before each group
of the members of the second and third cycles is what appears to
be a slender palus; therefore, there are apparently slender pali
before the septa of the first and second cycles.
The columella is not large; it is fasciculate, with a papillary
upper termination.
The ecalicular fossa is shallow.
Fig. 1. Fig. 2. Fig..3.
Figs. 1 and 2 drawn from the type (No. 685, Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.).
Fig. 1, upright view of corallum, altitude of specimen4 mm. Fig. 2, cal-
icular view of the same, diameter of calice 3.5 mm. Fig. 3, cost of an-
other specimen, much enlarged, length specimen 4 mm.
Locality.--From artesian well, Mt. Laurel, N. J., between 150
and 160 feet below the surface. *
Geological horizon.—Cretaceous, Matawan clay marls.*
Type.—No. 685, Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.
Mr. C. W. Johnson had identified this species with Platytrochus
speciosus Gabb and Horn,’ but it certainly is not that species.
According to Gabb, Platytrochus speciosus is .5 in. high and the
calice is .57 in. in diameter. It would be three times as large as
Trochocyathus woolmani, besides it possesses a deep calice. It
should be added that Platytrochus speciosus is certainly no Platy-
trochus, and it is impossible to identify it from Gabb’s description
or figures. The type, I believe, is at the Vanderbilt University,
Nashville, Tenn., but I have been unable to see it. As I could not
by any means find out what Gabb meant, I have discarded the
species altogether. The species is almost surely not Cretaceous but
Eocene.
11. Woolman, Geol. Surv. N. J. Ann. Rep. for 1897, 1898, p. 262 ; C. W.
Johnson, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. for 1898, p. 461.
2 Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 2d ser., Vol. IV, 1860, p. 399, Pl. LXIX,
figs. 15, 16, 17.
438 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
NOTES ON HYACINTH ROOTS.
BY IDA A. KELLER.
Last October I purchased a dozen hyacinth bulbs which were
said to be specially selected and intended for water-culture. They
were placed in appropriate glasses and treated according to ap-
proved methods ; that is, they were kept in the dark during the fol-
lowing eight weeks. At the end of that time six had produced
extensive root-systems, five showed but a meagre development in
this respect and had begun to decay, the odcr being extremely
offensive. I was about to dispose summarily of the weaklings
when I determined to give them another trial. I carefully re-
moved the decayed tissue and washed the bulbs with a solution of
listerine. The odor soon disappeared and in a short time roots
began to form. Soon other bulbs began to decay and they were
treated in like manner, and then they also proceeded to form new
roots. JI had no success with hyacinth culture, but 1 believe the
fault lay in the bulbs, which seemed to fail quite generally during
the season. In no case did I see the flower stalk push out with
that fine vigor which is so characteristic of the well-formed bulb.
Even the six plants above referred to with the normal root-system,
which indeed had become so extensive that it made a heavy mat in
the bottom of the glass, produced nothing but a much-shriveled
flower stalk with the blooms wilted before they had an opportu-
nity to expand. In these cases, however, the leaves unfolded
quite normally.
Although convinced that the bulbs were not worth keeping for
the purpose of floral display, I continued watching them, having
become interested in the formation of the new roots. Some of
these were particularly thick and vigorous, and differed greatly in
appearance from those which are normally first formed. They
seemed to be a second crop of adventitious roots, the first formed
also belonging to this category since they originate from mature
tissue of these metamorphosed stems. Some slender roots were
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 439
also formed, but the thick roots were far the more numerous. On
one of the bulbs whose originai roots had all decayed and which
I had treated in the manner described above, thirty such roots had
made their appearance with not a single slender root among them
(Plate XIII, fig. 1). On the six healthy plants with normally
developed root-systems, some of these thick roots were to be found
after some time among the first formed more slender roots, and
both continued alive (figs. 2 and 3).
Is this secondary formation the expression of a more vigorous
growth of the plant which follows with the expansion of the foliage,
or is it due to the greater need because of the increase of the tran-
spiring surfaces ? Perhaps both of these factors come into play as
they both bear a direct relation to root development —the foliage
depending entirely upon the absorbing action of the roots; the roots,
in their turn, being the result of the protoplasmic activity of the
leaves.
I endeavored to discover whether these roots differed in their
anatomical structure from those first formed. A great difference
was not to be expected, since roots, in general, are of very uniform
construction These organs seem particularly indisposed to varia-
tions in the relative positions and character of their elements.
A cross section of an ordinary root showed the usual arrange-
ment—the epidermis, the cortical parenchyma, the endodermis,
and the central cylinder with its axillary bundle of fibrovascular
tissue, a little distorted, but with a hexarch radial structure, the
six very small component bundles converging to the centre, and
separated from each other by a few interstitial cells (Plate XIII,
fig. 4). Further examination showed that there was some varia-
tion in the number of these bundles. In fig. 5 the bundles con-
verge toward two wide vessels, and a tendency to a diarch arrange-
ment is quite pronounced, the rays forming two more or less dis-
tinct masses. In a cross section of the thick roots near the base this
diarch arrangement was quite plain; there are two distinct bands
of vascular tissue (fig. 7).
The polyarch radial structure was striking in a cross section
about one and a half inches from the base and at this point
there was no trace of a diarcn tendency. ‘This is probably the re-
sult of later development. In this section are to be found ten
groups of vascular tissue, with a comparatively large quantity of
440 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
undeveloped tissue in the centre (fig. 6). This is quite usual in
roots, the tissue in the centre remaining in an undeveloped state
for a time after the peripheral vessels are fully developed. Cross
sections such as shown in fig. 8 illustrate this point clearly.
The large circular spaces represent the lumina of vessels with as
yet unthickened walls.
Comparison of the drawings will show to what extent these two
kinds of roots differed from each other in their histological ele-
ments. The greatest difference lies in the relative quantity and
development of the vascular tissue. On counting the number of
cells in the cortical parenchyma I found that, in the cross section
represented in fig. 4, that of the thread-like root, there were ten
layers of cells, while in the cross section represented by fig. 7,
that of a thick root, there were twenty cells in the corresponding
tissue, just double the number. Of course here also variations were
to be found, but this was an average.
These thick roots were particularly good objects for the study of
root structure and development. They are easy to section and
show interesting variations in their radial symmetry.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 441
9
JULM 3.
Mr. CHAarues Morris in the Chair.
Eight persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Certain Antiquities of the Florida West
Coast,’’ by Clarence B. Moore, was presented for publication.
JULY 10.
Mr. CHARLES Morris in the Chair.
Eleven persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Additions to the Japanese Land-Snail Fauna,
No. II,” by Henry A. Pilsbry, was presented for publication.
The death of Wilfred H. Harned, a member, May 31, was an-
nounced.
ouLY 17.
Mr. Benyamin SmitH Lyman in the Chair.
Six persons present.
The death of Dr. John Ashhurst, Jr., a member, July 7, was
announced.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication:
** Notes on Certain Mollusca from Southwestern Arkansas,’’ by
Henry A. Pilsbry.
‘The Musculus cruciformis of the Order Tellinacea,’’ by H.
von Thering.
442 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
JULY 24.
Mr. CHARLES Morris in the Chair.
Seven persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ On the Zodlogical Position of Partula and
Achatinella and their Zodgeographical Significance,’’ by Henry A.
Pilsbry, was presented for publication.
Juy 31.
Mr. Useima C. Smiru in the Chair.
Eleven persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Description of a New Rabbit from Liu Kiu
Islands and a New Flying Squirrel from Borneo,’’ by Witmer
Stone, was presented for publication.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Certain Antiquities of the Florida West
Coast,’’ by Clarence B. Moore, presented for publication the 3d
inst., was ordered to be printed in the JouRNAL.
The death of Franklin Platt, a member, the 24th inst., was an-
nounced,
The following were ordered to be printed:
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 443
ADDITIONS TO THE JAPANESE LAND SNAIL FAUNA. II.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.
The discovery of the forms described herein is due to the well-
directed industry of Mr. Y. Hirase, of Kyoto, Japan, to whom
the Academy is indebted for many Japanese land snails. There
ean be little doubt that the land molluscan fauna of Japan will
prove to be very prolific in specific forms, like most insular faunas.
The Clausilias of Japan have been worked up by Dr. O. Boett-
ger, who in his masterly Clausilienstudien has laid a firm founda-
tion for future builders. Subsequent work has been done by
Kobelt, von Moellendorff, Smith, Sykes and the present writer.
Arthur Adams’ contribution to the literature of Japanese Clausi-
lias is, like all of his Japoniana, quite worthless.
Clausilia hakonensis un. sp. Pl. XIV, figs. 1, 2, 3.
Shell rather slenderly fusiform, moderately attenuated above,
the earlier 34 whorls scarcely increasing in diameter, then gradu-
ally increasing to the penultimate whorl which is widest, the last
whorl being distinctly compressed and tapering. Whorls 12.
Reddish or olivaceous brown, paler below the sutures, glossy where
not eroded, distinctly, finely striated obliquely. Aperture subver-
tical or slightly oblique, ovate, the peristome continuous, white,
well expanded. Superior lamella strong, oblique, reaching the
margin, continuous with the spiral lamella, but becoming abruptly
lower at the junction. Inferior lamella converging to the superior,
strongly folded, rapidly tapering below, becoming very high, stout
and very strongly spiral within. Subcolumellar lamella very
deeply immersed, not visible from the aperture. Principal plica
rather short; upper palatal plica short, oblique, passing into a
strong, curved lunella, which is connected below with the middle
of the rather short lower palatal plica, somewhat like a Greek
letter + inverted.
Length 32, diam. of penultimate whorl 7 mm.; length of aper-
ture 7.7, width 5 mm.
444 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Hakone Mts. (B. Schmacker), types No. 60,370, coll. A. N.
i a
A Hemiphedusa, differing from all of the platydera group by
the strongly spiral and heavily developed inferior lamella and wholly
immersed subcolumellar lamella. The clausilium has the character-
istic parallel-sided contour of the section. ©. hakonensis will
become the type of a new group or ‘‘ Formenkreis’’ in Hemi-
phedusa, characterized by the strongly spiral, Stereophedusa-like
inferior lamella.
Clausilia awajiensis n. sp. Pl. XIV, figs. 15, 16, 17.
Shell shortly rimate, obesely fusiform, thin, a little transparent,
strongly but shortly attenuated above, the last whorl decidedly
tapering. Corneous-brown; the last whorl reddish, glossy, dis-
tinctly, finely striate. Whorls 94. Aperture small, pyriform, the
peristome white, moderately expanded, rather thin. Superior
lamella rather thin, oblique, continuous with the spiral lamella.
Inferior lamella very low and inconspicuous, stronger within and
almost vertically ascending. Subcolumellar lamella not reaching
the lip-edge, even immersed. Principal plica Jong, reaching
almost to the lip, extending inward beyond the lateral lunella.
Upper palatal plica very short, its outer end connected with a
rather strong, oblique Junella, recurved toward its lower eud; no
lower palatal plica. Clausilium slender, tongue-shaped, emar-
ginate posteriorly, slowly tapering below.
Length 124, diam. 34 mm.
Fukura, Awaji Island (Mr. Y. Hirase).
A Hemiphedusa near C. aurantiaca Bttg., but with fewer
whorls, the lunella more lateral, not I-shaped, a lower palatal
plica being absent.
Clausilia subaurantiaca n. sp. Pl. XIV, figs. 5, 6, 7.
Shell slenderly fusiform, attenuated above, the last whorl rather
narrower; brown, but slightly glossy, weakly striate, more strongly
so on the last whorl. Whorls nearly 11, the upper convex, the last
two nearly flat. Aperture small, somewhat oblique, retracted and
with a well-marked sinulus above, pyriform, produced; peristome
thick, well reflexed. Superior lamella strong, oblique, continuous
with the spiral lamella. Inferior lamella immersed, inconspicuous
in a front view, becoming strong and subvertical within. Subeol-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 445
umellar lamella very weak, not extending upon the expansion of
the lip, or immersed. Plica principalis very long (the whorl out-
side a little swollen above it), extending nearly to the lip. Upper
palatal plica extremely short, united with the lateral, nearly straight
lunella; no lower palatal plica. Clausilium long, tongue-shaped,
somewhat tapering toward the blunt apex.
Length 16, diam. 3 mm.
Deyai, Prov. Nagato (Mr. Y. Hirase).
This Hemiphedusa differs from C. aurantiaca Bttg. by wanting
a lower palatal plica (which in C. aurantiaca makes an I-like
figure with the lunella and the upper palatal plica); by the
lateral, not ventral, position of the Junella, and the more slender
contour. C. awajiensis is much more obese.
Clausilia aulacophora n. sp. Pl. XIV, figs. 18, 19, 20.
Shell small, slender, moderately attenuated above, opaque, dull
reddish brown, paler above; finely striate, the last whorl more
coarsely so. Whorls 10, convex, the last short, compressed later-
ally, hardly narrower than the preceding, a little turgid below the
suture and at the base. Aperture small, pyriform, with well-
defined and slightiy retracted sinulus. Peristome white, thick-
ened and well expanded, the outer margin excavated above.
Superior lamella strong, oblique, continuous with the spiral Jamella,
and extending to the margin; a groove on the right side of it,
usually producing a notch or emargination in the upper margin of
the lip, and followed by a small rounded tubercle, to the right of
which there is sometimes a second shallow groove in adult shells.
Inferior lamella immersed, becoming strong and subvertical within.
Subcolumellar lamella completely immersed. Principal plica a
half whorl long, visible within the aperture. Upper palatal plica
short, continuous anteriorly with and curving into the lunella,
which is united with the middle of the lower palatal plica. There
is a punctiform plica below the latter. Clausilium long, tongue-
shaped, emarginate behind, the margins slowly converging toward
the apex, which is bluntly attenuated.
Length 10, diam. 2.1 mm.
_ Fukura, Awaji Island (Mr. Y. Hirase).
Belonging to the Hemiphzedusan group of C. platydera, as defined
by Dr. Boettger, this small species is well distinguished by the
groove in the peristome on the right side of the superior lamella.
446 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Clausilia Hirasei 0. sp. Pl. XIV, figs. 8, 9, 10, 11.
Shell small, solid, slenderly fusiform, regulariy tapering above
to an obtuse apex; glossy, irregularly striate, chestnut brown.
Whorls 8-84, rather weakly convex, the last two long, Jast whorl
somewhat narrower, compressed. Aperture small, rather rhombic;
peristome narrowly expanded, a little thickened. Superior lamella
low, separated widely from the spiral lamella. Inferior lamella
immersed, becoming strong and vertical within. Subcolumellar
lamella weak but emerging. Principal plica less than a half-whorl
long, extending well inward beyond the lateral lunella. Upper
palatal plica oblique, not united with the lunella,which is nearly
straight above, curved below. Three short sutural plice are
developed above the upper end of the lunella, the second one
shortest, upper one low; within the upper end of the spiral lamella
there is sometimes an inserted lamella (lamella inserta), or perhaps
this is a recrudescence of the inferior lamella; and outside of it
there is a short fulcrum (lamella fulerans, fig. 10, Lf.) and a
longer parallel lamella (/amella parallela, fig. 10, l.p.).
Length 9.3, diam. 2.2, length of aperture 2.2 mm.
Length 7.3, diam. 2.2 mm.
Kagashima, Satsuma (Y. Hirase).
This is, so far as I know, the smallest Japanese Clausilia known.
Internally it has the straightly vertical inferior lamella of Hemi-
phedusa, but in several fresh specimens opened I found no clau-
silium. In the development of the sutural plice it resembles C.
hyperoptyz. The superior lamella is widely separated from the
spiral lamella, and there is a lamella inserta developed in some
examples. The internal complication is greater than in any other
Japanese species known to me. Fig. 10 of Plate XIV, is diagram-
matic.
It is named in honor of Mr. Y. Hirase, of Kyoto, who has
brought to our knowledge a large number of interesting Japanese
land snails.
Clausilia hyperoptyx n. sp. Pl XIV, figs. 12, 13, 14.
Shell small, slender, moderately attenuated above, glossy, of
a dark, rich reddish-chestnut color, finely and rather irregularly,
not deeply, striate, the last whorl densely and more deeply so.
Whorls 83, convex, the last more flattened, a trifle narrower than
the preceding. Aperture ovate, the peristome thick, expanded,
A Citi ee.
—_— =
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 447
whitish at the edge. Superior lamella rather low, vertical, attain-
ing the margin, widely disconnected from the spiral lamella. In-
ferior lamella immersed, scarcely visible in a front view, strong
and vertical within. Subcolumellar lamella emerging, continued
to the edge of peristome. Principal plica about a half-whorl
long, visible within the aperture. Upper palatal plica very short,
slightly united with the nearly straight, oblique lunella, which is
lateral in position. Two short sutural plice developed a little
further inward than the upper end of the lunella. Spiral lamella
and inferior lamella of equal length within, a rather long lamella
fulerans and a lamella parallela developed, each standing free.
Clausilium rather narrow, parallel-sided, bluntly tapering at
the apex.
Length 10, diam. 2.2, length of aperture 2.1 mm,
Loo Choo Islands (Mr. Y. Hirase).
This slender, dark-colored Hemiphedusa is a beautiful little
species, distinguished by the two sutural plicze and the development
of a fulcrum and parallel lamella, as in C. Hirasei. It differs
from that species in the dark color, attenuated and concave spire,
stronger superior lamella, and various other details of the closing
apparatus.
C. Hirasei and C. hyperoptyz form a new group of Hemi-
phedusa characterized as follows:
Superior lamella widely separated from. the spiral lamella; a
fulerum and parallel lamella present; sutural plicse developed ;
upper palatal plica independent or united with the well-developed
lunella; no lower palatal plica.
Just what relation this group holds to Dr. von Moellendorft’s
group of C. sublunellata I do not know, but as he does not
describe the complicated closing apparatus I find in my species, I
presume it to be quite different.
Clausilia japonica var. suruge, n.v. Pl. XIV, fig. 4.
Similar to C. japonica but smaller, strongly attenuated above
for a longer distance, the aperture smaller with rather stronger
principal lamella; upper palatal fold shorter, the lower palatal
short or obsolete.
Mikuria, Prov. Suruga (Mr. Y. Hirase).
Having examined some hundreds of specimens of C. japonica
from several localities, collected by Mr. Stearns, Mr. Hirase,
448 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Prof. M. R. Gaines and others, I conclude that C. nipponensis is
hardly tenable as a variety. The gibbous penultimate and slender
last whorl occur sporadically among typical japonica. The size
varies a good deal in C. japonica, but the above-described variety
presents a peculiar and quite recognizable contour.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIV.
Figs. 1-3. Clausilia hakonensis n. sp. Fig. 2, natural size.
Fig. 4. Clausilia japonica var. suruge n. var., natural size.
Figs. 5-7. Clausilia subaurantiaca n. sp.
Figs. 8-11. Clausilia Hirasei n. sp. Fig. 10, diagrammatic.
i., lunella; Z.f., fulerum or lamella fulcrans; 11.,
inferior lamella; /.p., parallel lamella; /.s., superior
lamella; /.sp., spiral lamella; p.p., principal plica;
p-s., sutural plicee; u.p.p., upper palatal plica.
Figs. 12-14. Clausilia hyperoptyx n. sp.
Figs. 15-17. Clausilia awajiensis n. sp.
Figs. 18-20. Clausilia aulacophora n. sp.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 449
NOTES ON CERTAIN MOLLUSCA OF SOUTHWESTERN ARKANSAS.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.
During February of this year, Mr. James H. Ferriss explored
for land shells the western tier of counties in Arkansas, from
about midway up the western boundary of the State to the south-
western corner. He also collected at Hardy, in the northeastern
portion of the State, and in some northeastern counties of Texas.
An account of the trip has been given by Mr. Ferriss,’ with a
catalogue of the species collected, accompanied by valuable notes
on the localities and habits of the several forms. The following
notes on a portion of the species may be regarded as supplemental
to his article, which should be consulted for the full list.
Helicina orbiculata tropica (Jan.).
Denison, Tex.; Rocky Comfort and Lanesport, Ark.
Polygyra leporina (Gld.).
Horatio, Chapel Hill, Rocky Comfort and Hardy, Ark.;
DeKalb and Mt. Pleasant, Tex. Nowhere in abundance.
This species has especial interest from its intermediate position
between the sections Stenotrema and typical Polygyra. The struc-
ture of the basal lip clearly foreshadows what we find in P. hirsuta
uneifera or pilula; while the form of the parietal lamella shows
that the upper branch, which makes the parietal V-shaped in typi-
cal Polygyra, is merely a further development of the callous ridge
which runs from the lamella to the outer end of the lip in such
species as P. stenotrema.
Polygyra dorfeuilliana Lea.
Throughout the western counties of Arkansas, from Polk county
south, and in the northeastern counties of Texas, this is an ex-
tremely abundant species, and the collection made by Mr. Ferriss
contains hundreds of specimens. The very widely umbilicated
form, with glossy base, var. sampsoni, did not occur, all the speci-
mens being more or less ribbed beneath and varying within wide
1 Nautilus, XIV, July, 1900.
29
450 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
limits in the size of the umbilicus. They are referable to what I
called var. percostata, but not so strongly sculptured as the types,
and in fact pretty well bridge the gap between ‘‘ percostata’’ and
typical dorfeuilliana.
Specimens were taken at the following localities:
Hardy, Sharp county, northeastern Arkansas. Typical dorfeu-
illiana, none of the several hundred specimens having the wide
umbilicus of var. sampsoni. Diam. 74-9 mm.
Mena, Polk county, Ark. Small specimens, 7 down to 6 mm.
diam.; and varying from the typical form with comma-shaped
rimation to widely umbilicated, showing over a full whorl below;
more or less ribbed there.
Hatton Gap, Polk county. 64 to 53 mm.; umbilicus moderate
or ample.
Horatio, Chapel Hill, Gilham and Cove, Sevier county. Simi-
lar to the last.
Morris Terry, Little River county, Ark. Similar to the pre-
ceding.
Ultima Thule, Sevier county. Diameter varying from 7 to 84
mm.; umbilicus variable, as in the Mena specimens. In copious
supply.
Rocky Comfort, Little River county, Ark. Similar to the pre-
ceding Jot.
Denison, Tex. Similar to preceding.
It is rather peculiar that Polygyra jacksoni occurred during this
trip only at Mena, Polk county, Ark. Possibly its southeastern
limit does not reach the western counties of Arkansas below Polk.
Polygyra cragini (Call).
Ultima Thule, Sevier county, in southwestern, and Mena, Polk
county, in western Arkansas, typical specimens. Also taken at
Hardy, Sharp county, in northeastern Arkansas.
Polygyra inflecta (Say).
Mena, Rocky Cove and Hatton Gap, Polk county; Horatio,
Sevier county; Morris Ferry, Little River county; all in south-
western Arkansas. Also at Little Rock in central and Hardy in
northeastern Arkansas. Most of the specimens from Hatton Gap,
Horatio and Hardy are small, often under 10 mm. diam. Those
from Mena vary from 10 to 138 mm. This variation is merely
individual.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 451
Polygyra binneyana Pilsbry.
The specimens coliected fully confirm the specific characters of
this fine snail. While rather variable, it does not approach any
known species.
The largest examples sent were taken at Gilham, Sevier county,
Ark., and measure alt. 14, diam. 26 mm.; the umbilicus is par-
tially overhung by the lip. The smallest seen from this locality is
23 mm. in diameter. All have 5$ whorls. Entirely similar
specimens come from Mena, in Polk county; but from the Chastat:
Mts., near Mena, the shells are smaller, alt. 10, diam. 194, and
alt. 9, diam. 174 mm.; the smaller ones have not quite 5 whorls.
The size approaches that of Polygyra kiowaensis arkansaensis, but
the aperture, lip and sculpture are as in the typical binneyana, and
very unlike any form of kiowaensis.
Polygyra albolabris alleni (Wetherby).
This Western subspecies extends from Iowa to southwestern
Arkansas. About 1885 I ‘‘ planted’’ about a quart of living
specimens from Des Moines, Ia., on the island of Rock Island, in
the Mississippi river, opposite Davenport, Ia., where the species
did not exist before. It does not occur in the vicinity of Daven-
port, nor around Iowa City, Ia.
Ferriss’ localities are Hardy, Sharp county; Mena, Polk county,
and Little Rock, Ark. The specimens from Hardy are as small
as var. maritima, 23-24 mm. diam., but in other characters are
typical alleni. Those from Mena are large, up to 30 mm. diam.;)
and in some cases the umbilicus is partially open, in apparently
mature shells.
A single dead shell from Little Rock is more solid than most
alleni, with the basal lip broader, somewhat as in an undescribed
form from northern Alabama; but I think it only an old alleni.
Polygyra appressa (Say).
Finely developed specimens at Hardy, Sharp county, in north-
eastern Arkansas. They measure 18 to 20 mm. diam. Most
specimens have a small upper denticle on the lip (the mark of
“var. a’’ of Say), but I regard this as a merely individual vari
ation.
Polygyra appressa perigrapta Pils.
Typical specimens were taken at Little Rock, Ark
452 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900,
Polygyra thyroides (Say).
The variations of this species in the Southwest are extremely
perplexing. From the standpoint of the collector in the Ohio or
the upper Mississippi valley, the shells are small; but they are as
large as most Philadelphia specimens.
It is obvious from an inspection of Mr. Ferriss’ shells that
bucculenta Gld. is scarcely definable as a variety, although the
globose, narrowly perforate clausa-like shells, such as one lot from
Hardy, Ark., seem by themselves quite distinct. Many of the
other shells, such as those from Denison and DeKalb, Tex., are
practically intermediate; and I can find neither geographic nor
conchological boundaries for bucculenta well enough defined to
warrant its retention.
It remains to notice a small, rather depressed and decidedly red-
dish form, occurring at numerous localities in western Arkansas,
and slightly unlike any thyroides I have seen from other localities.
Specimens were sent from the following places:
Hardy, Sharp county, in northeastern Arkansas. Three forms
collected: (a) P. thyroides, with flat lip, toothed parietal wall;
alt. 124, diam. 20 mm., or somewhat smaller. (6) Similar but
red, depressed and glossy, rather openly umbilicate; alt. 11,
diam. 19; alt. 10, diam. 164 mm. (c¢) Typical buceulenta, with
globose shell, narrow umbilicus, light color and rather rounded
lip; alt. 12, diam 17; alt. 114, diam. 16 mm. Rocky Comfort,
Little River county. <A form of thyroides with reduced or even
imperforate umbilicus, the parietal tooth small or wanting ; shape
normal, and size as in lot ‘‘a’’ from Hardy. Also four speci-
mens of the smaller, depressed, ruddy form mentioned above.
Cove, Polk county. Small and very narrowly umbilicated
shells, diam. 15-17 mm., varying from yellowish-corneous to
reddish. They are too depressed for bucculenta.
Ultima Thule, Sevier county. Similar to the shells from Cove;
rich reddish.
Mena, Polk county. A single specimen of the small reddish
form was taken; diam. barely 15 mm.
DeKalb, Bowie county, Tex. Specimens intermediate between
thyroides and bucculenta.
Denison, Grayson county, Tex. Specimens less globose than
typical bucculenta, but having the rounded (rather than flattened)
fe
aR
ees. t
<_
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 453
lip and narrow umbilicus of that form. They vary from 17 to
20 mm. diameter.
Polygyra labrosa (Bld.).
Little Rock, Ark.
Polygyra stenotrema (‘Fér.’ Pfr.).
Spur of Chastat Mts., near Mena, Ark.; Hardy, Ark. Size
varying from 9 to 10 mm. diam.; form typical.
Polygyra hirsuta uncifera n. var.
Similar to P. hirsuta in general form; very densely hirsute
throughout, the hairs short, silvery; parietal lamella more sinuous,
recurved in a hook at the outer end; basal lip formed much as in
var. pilula, the median sinus oblique, separating two irregular
nodules, the edge of the lip projecting above the notch; outer lip
bearing a conical tooth.
Alt. 53-6, diam. 8 mm. (types, Mena).
Alt. 4.7, diam. 7 mm. (Chastat Mts., near Mena).
Alt. 4, diam. 6 mm. (Chastat Mts., near Mena).
Mena and the adjacent Chastat Mts., Polk county, western
Arkansas. Types, in the collection of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia and of James H. Ferriss.
An extraordinary form, in which the parietal Jamella is hookea
at the distal end, as in P. mazillata, and the basal lip is pecu-
liarly modified. The ‘‘ hook’’ is evidently homologous with the
upper branch of the parietal fold in the typical Polygyras, and
this form may fairly be regarded as to some extent a transition
form, at least in this one character. The group of small Poly-
gyras of the plicata-dorfeuilliana type have evident relationships
with Stenotrema, having a similar internal ‘‘ fulerum,’’ and some
species being hairy.
Tn this connection it might be mentioned that the single West
Coast species, P. germana, usually referred to the subgenus Steno-
trema, is in my opinion much more closely allied to the P. colum-
biana group, and might better be grouped therewith. Binney,
however, has pointed out its peculiarly intermediate character.
The varieties of P. hirsuta now known, pilula, altispira and
uncifera, are remarkably distinct; no intergradation with the typi-
eal form has yet been observed in any of them. In fact, typical hir-
suta is much closer to P. stenotrema than to the varieties mentioned.
454 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
The small series of var. uncifera collected by Ferriss show that
it has a smaller form on high ground. This peculiarity has been
noticed in other species, such as P. hirsuta and P. monodon, which
may have a small and a large form on higher and lower ground
respectively, in the same region.
Polygyra monodon (Rack.).
This species was originally described from near Thindae Bay,
Lake Huron. This is in Alpena county, Mich. The type, as
well figured in the Linnean Transactions, was undoubtedly what
became known later as ‘‘Helix (Stenotrema) leai Ward’’—a
smal], widely umbilicated shell, which many collectors have con-
sidered to be a distinct species from the traditional monodon, and
which is confined to the middle West, north of the Ohio river and
west to Iowa.
This state of affairs renders a rearrangement of the nomenclature
necessary. HH. leai will be deleted from the roll of valid species,
and its place usurped by P. monodon, which name will henceforth
be used for the small, glossy, widely umbilicated shells formerly
known as leat.
The larger, more hirsute form now universally known as mono-
don will hecome P. monodon fraterna (Say). This subspecies is
far more widely distributed than the true monodon. It varies
from as widely umbilicated as monodon to quite imperforate. The
widely umbilicated forms are chiefly northern, especially in western
New York.
In the Little Tennessee river valley the much-depressed, umbili-
cated subspecies cincta Lewis occurs.
In the Southwest, from western Arkansas and Louisiana to
southern Texas, several ill-defined races occur. Var. alicie is a
small form, 8-9 mm. diam., with narrow umbilical chink, more
or less globose contour and 54 whorls. Var. friersoni is larger,
the size of well-developed northern fraterna, with 6 whorls and
an umbilical chink. Both of these have the umbilical region
deeply impressed. The propriety of separating them from var.
fraterna or from one another is open to question, and requires more
study; but it must be said that the series of some hundreds col-
lected by Mr. Ferriss can be assorted without grave difficulty, and
the two forms, a/icie and friersoni, coexist in numerous localities,
just as typical monodon (‘‘leai’’) and fraterna do in the North.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 455
However, I do not consider either of these varieties to have any-
thing like the standing the several varieties of P. hirsuta have, and
their discrimination may be an unnecessary refinement.
Then we have a third form of monodon which I shall call var.
imperforata, collected by Mr. Ferriss at Mena, Cove and Rocky
Comfort, Ark., apparently living with var. friersoni. It has 53
whorls, an elevated spire, much less swollen, rather flattened base,
which is very little impressed or sunken in the centre, is imperforate,
and has scarcely a trace of the flange along the basal lip so
prominent in fully adult friersoni. The pile is harsh to the touch,
and the surface without lustre. Although I may have overdone
the naming of monodon varieties, I do not see how to avoid distin-
guishing this race by name. It is by all odds the most distinct of
the southwestern varieties, and apparently is confined to the rough,
mountainous country. Types from Rocky Comfort, Ark.
The following forms of monodon were taken by Ferriss:
Mena, Polk county, Ark. Var. imperforate Pils. Rather
globose, imperforate shells, 84 to 10 mm. diam., remarkable for
having the umbilical region very little impressed. Whorls 5} to
6. Pile rather stiff.
Horatio, Sevier county, Ark. Var. aliciew. Two small speci-
mens, diam. 8 mm., with narrow perforation and short, straight
parietal tooth, as in typical monodon, though this may indicate
immaturity; 54 whorls. The spire is only moderately raised.
Ultima Thule, Sevier county, Ark. Small shells, 8-84 mm.
diam., with 54-5? whorls, the spire more or less conoid, umbilicus
narrow, nearly closed, the umbilical region impressed. The speci-
mens are referable to the form I called var. alicie.
Cove, Polk county. Three of four specimens taken are the
variety imperforata, with scarcely impressed umbilical region,
mentioned from Mena. The other is an ordinary friersoni with
partially open umbilicus.
Rocky Comfort, Little River county. Three forms occurred at
this place: (a) Var. imperforata, the imperforate shells with
elevated spire, scarcely impressed umbilical region and rather
harsh pile mentioned above as occurring at Mena. (0b) Small
specimens such as those described above from Ultima Thule, refer-
able to var. alicie; 54 specimens. (c) Large specimens with
deeply impressed umbilical region and 6 whorls, diam. 9-104 mm.,
referable to var. friersoni.
456 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
DeKalb, Bowie county, northeast Texas. Var. friersoni, 5
specimens, Var. alicic, 20 specimens.
Mt. Pleasant, Titus county, Tex. Var. alicie, one specimen.
Pupoides marginatus (Say). (Leucocheila fallax Auct.).
Cerro Gordo, Sevier county, and Cove, Polk county, Ark.
Bifidaria armifera (Say).
DeKalb, Tex., and Hardy, Ark.
Bifidaria contracta Say.
Cove, Polk county, Ark.
Vitrea simpsoni (Pils.).
Hardy, Mena, Hatton’s Gap and Morris Ferry, Ark. The first
locality is further east than it has before been reported.
Conulus chersinus trochulus Reinh.
Cerro Gordo and Hatton’s Gap, Ark.
Gastrodonta demissa (Binney).
Two southwestern races of this species have received names:
var. brittsi, an imperforate form, and var. lamellata, which has an
internal lamina, like G. gularis. It must freely be confessed that
the abundant series collected by Mr. Ferriss show these forms to
intergrade to a perplexing extent, and it is not easy to define
them. Both toothed and toothless forms apparently come from
the same log; although the fact remains that, except in this partic-
ular region, demissa is not toothed. Gastrodontas are, however,
proverbially difficult to classify ; they defy our neat, conventional
arrangements of species and subspecies, and proclaim the eternal
sway of variation. We name them as we can, and have trouble
when the intermediate forms have not become extinct. At all
events, the varieties of demissa I have erected should not be esti-
mated too highly.
Mena, Polk county, Ark. 16 specimens of the brittsi type;
the largest 9 mm. diam.; imperforate or barely perforate.
Thirty specimens of the damellata type, the largest 8} mm.
diam. ; narrowly perforate; lamella varying from well developed
to a heavy callous lump.
Seventeen specimens with no lamella, 94 mm. diam., 6 alt.; 7
whorls.
Hatton Gap, Polk county. 11 specimens of Jamellata, the
largest 8 mm. diam. Also 33 specimens of demissa, up to 9 mm.
diam. ; perforate.
eS ee eee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 457
Cove, Polk county. Both laminate and toothless specimens.
Ultima Thule, Sevier county. 17 specimens of the var. brittsi.
These approach the typical G. acerra in general appearance, but
are imperforate. Whorls 7; alt. 84 to 9, diam. 134 mm. The
var. lamellata also occurred at Ultima Thule.
Horatio, Sevier county. Both the lamellate form and toothless
demissa of all ages.
Chapel Hill, Sevier county. 26 var. lamellata and 18 demissa,
the largest having 7 whorls, alt. 6, diam. 9.8 mm. ALI per-
forate.
Gilham, Sevier county. Both damellata and demissa.
Pyramidula alternata (Say).
Mena, Polk county; Horatio, Sevier county; Rocky Comfort,
Little River county, and Hardy, Sharp county, Ark. Specimens
all rather strongly ribbed. The var. rarinotata occurred at Deni-
son, Tex., further north than it has hitherto been noticed. The
western Arkansas shells are the opposite of the middle Texas vari-
ety, being unusually dark and copiously maculated.
Limnza desidiosa Say.
Hardy, Sharp county, Ark.
Ancylus rivularis Say.
Ancylus haldemani Bet.
A few specimens of each from Hardy, Sharp county, Ark.
Physa gyrina Say.
Hardy, Sharp county, northeastern Arkansas.
Thysa integra Hald., var.
Hardy, Sharp county, Ark.; Mt. Pleasant, Titus county, Tex.
The specimens are small, and of the variety with a dark-brown
jip-rib.
Pleurocera elevatum (Say). Fig. 1, upper line.
Spring river, Hardy, Sharp county, northeastern Arkansas.
Extremely variable, in color being yellow, banded, or almost
black; and varying from nearly smooth to singly or doubly cari-
nated above the sutures, the last whorl with a slight peripheral keel or
two or three acute keels, as in the variety /ewisii Lea. The speci-
mens are unusually beautiful and wholly free from erosion.
458 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Pleurocera subulare (Lea).
More slender and smoother than elevatum, with which it occurs
at Hardy. Spring river flows into Black river, a tributary of the
White river.
Goniobasis plebeius (Anth.). Fig. 1, lower line,
Spring river, Hardy, Sharp county, northeastern Arkansas.
The specimens show the usual variation from almost rounded
through angulate to strongly keeled at the periphery; the unicol-
ored examples of the carinated end of the series being indistin-
guishable from G. cubicoides (Anth.), which is a mere synonym.
The carina, when present, may either project at the sutures or
merely fill them, leaving an even surface. These variations of
form occur in the young as well as in adult examples, some half-
grown shells being almost rounded at the periphery.
Nearly all the specimens from Hardy are straw-colored, with a
blackish band above the periphery and another in the middle of
the basal slope; sometimes the upper band or both of them are
absent; and in one or two shells the whole surface is dark save for
the pale carina. The columella is usually dark-stained at the
root, but occasionally white throughout. The apices are not
eroded.
The series from Hardy is so interesting in its variations that I
reproduce here photographs of the leading forms.
a4 FTI SGN =. so ASE ARC - SE
Upper line, Pleurocera elevatum. Lower line, Goniobasis plebetus.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 459
The vast amount of variation among individuals living side by
side, under absolutely identical external conditions, is an inexpli-
cable characteristic of the Pleuroceride. This variation is gener-
ally in the line of retention by the shell of characters of extreme
youth or immaturity (carination, costation or other sculptural
feature) into mature life, or the early loss of sculpture, Jeaving a
plain, rounded last whorl. This particular phase of variation
stands on quite a different basis from that of Jo, in which the or-
nate forms are farthest removed from the young stages, the spines
of the later whorls being apparently a new and lately acquired
character, which has not had time to become impressed upon the
young.
460 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
DESCRIPTIONS OF A NEW RABBIT FROM THE LIU KIU ISLANDS AND A
NEW FLYING SQUIRREL FROM BORNEO.
BY WITMER STONE.
Several mammals collected in the East Indies and adjacent
islands have recently been submitted to me for examination for
the Wistar Institute of Anatomy.
Two of these prove to be of exceptional interest and are, so far
as I can ascertain, undescribed.
The first is a rabbit obtained on the Liu Kiu Islands by Dr. W.
H. Furness and Dr. H. M. Hiller, February 26, 1896.
It would naturally be expected that a rabbit from this locality
would prove to be allied to the Japanese Lepus brachyurus, but
curiously enough the two specimens before me represent a species
of the genus Caprolagus, and are apparently nearest to C. hispidus
of Assam.
The larger of the two specimens may be regarded as the type
(No. 5,314, collection Wistar Institute) of a new species which I
propose to name in honor of its discoverer.
Caprolagus furnessi n. sp.
Size approximately that’ of Lepus americanus. Hind foot, tail
and ears remarkably short, claws very large and strong, nearly
straight on the fore feet, decidedly curved on the hind feet.
Color very dark for a rabbit. Soft under-fur plumbeous, long
hair coarse and hispid, brownish black, many with buff annula-
tions or tips, becoming mahogany on the rump and brighter yel-
lowish brown on the feet (except about the base of claws) and
tail. The long hairs on both tail and feet retain their bristly char-
acter. From the hind neck to the beginning of the mahogany
shade on the rump there is a jet-black longitudinal band. Under
parts with stiff hairs fewer and mostly pale buff, the gray under-
fur’more prominent, giving a general plumbeous hue to the pelage.
a ee
|
oa
1900. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 461
The cranial characters agree pretty closely with those of Capro-
lagus hispidus as described and figured by Blyth.*
Skull strong and solid, incisive foramina short and narrow
(length 18 mm.), terminating fully 3 mm. anterior to the ante-
rior margin of alveolus of first premolar. Bony palate corre-
spondingly ,produced fully as long as broad (length 12.5 mm.).
Bony network over the anteorbital foramina entirely coalesced and
solid. Nasals very broad and solid, line of juncture with fron-
___ tals exactly opposite anterior margin of orbit and on line with
posterior edge of second premolar. Supraoccipital process very
short with no anterior projection, the usual notch in front of it
being entirely absent; frontals scarcely constricted, the width
behind supraorbital processes being equal to the interorbital width
(20 mm.).
Teeth strong and heavy, and no trace whatever of the small
posterior upper molar.
In the lower jaw the anterior extension of the mandibles sup-
porting the incisors is somewhat slender, and there is a distinct
hump or bulge in the jower contour just anterior to the first pre-
molar.
The measurements of this specimen are as follows:
fombicnetwer Aabskin,=§ . 7°. . . 2... . . 850mm.
Ear, . Pere Sei G se Fb aS, 42 mm.
Hind foot, ‘ik renee Raye oe! Oe mn,
Tail vertebree Gaipianite), A yd ipa andi) he SH 8 mm.
Length of whiskers, . . . pe 28 0 to Go Hime
Length of skull (occipito-n asa) Ne Le eh oes. 2 “OORT
Zygomatic breadth (minimum), . . . . . . . 40mm.
Picrormimerenaden, SS kw SC 20
Length Logic 0) \ oF | eee arte
Length of upper molar series Gil¥eali), a’ 15 mm.
Another example (No. 5,315, Wistar Inst. Coll. ) is Sgpavently
smaller and has the mahogany tints suffused over the whole back,
with many of the hairs on the sides and shoulders light yellowish
brown, giving it a much brighter richer coloration. The black
dorsal stripe in this specimen is not quite so pronounced.
With only the skins and skull at my disposal, 1 am unable to
describe the clavicles in this interesting animal, but from the many
1 Journal Asiatic Society of Bengal, XIV, p. 247.
462 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
other peculiarities exhibited by it I regard the genus Caprolagus
as established by Blyth in 1845 as quite worthy of recognition.
In 1896 Dr. Merriam established the genus Romerolagus* for a
peculiar little rabbit from Mt. Popocatapetl, Mexico, many of the
characters being parallel to those of Caprolagus as described by
Blyth fifty years before. While in no way questioning the valid-
ity of Romerolagus, we must take exception to Dr. Merriam’s state-
ment that ‘‘ Heretofore the genus Lepus has enjoyed the distine-
tion of coincidence in characters with the family to which it
belongs.’’ Flower and Lydekker also seem to have totally over-
looked Caprolagus in making their diagnosis of the family Lepo-
ride. The family characters must certainly be modified and we
must recognize three distinct genera:
Lepus ;
Caprolagus Blyth, 1845;
Romerolagus Merriam, 1896.
Three species of Caprolagus are now known:
C. hispidus (Pearson), Bengal Sporting Magazine, August,
1843, p. 131 (fide Blyth).
C. netscheri (Schlegel), Notes Leyden Mus., February, 1880,
p- 59;
C. furnessi Stone, antea.
The other apparent nondescript in the Wistar Institute collec-
tion is a flying squirrel obtained by Messrs. Alfred Harrison, Jr.,
and H. M. Hiller on the Menbuang river, Sarawak, Borneo, Jan-
uary, 1898 (No. 5,298).
Notwithstanding the numerous species of Sciuropterus that have
been described from this region the present specimen seems to
differ from all, so far as I can judge from the descriptions, though
lack of material for comparison is much to be regretted.
This species is dedieated to Mr. Harrison, whose researches in
Borneo have resulted in most valuable zodlogical collections.
Sciuropterus harrisoni 2. sp.
Size and general appearance similar to S. horsfieldi, S. thomsoni,
etc., but distinguished at once by the uniform dull brown of the
tail on both the upper and under surfaces.
? Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., Vol. X, pp. 169-174.
— ee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 463
The general appearance above is bright rusty red, darker and
more inclined to chestnut than in S. davisoni.* This color extends
from the nose to the root of the tail, the dark blackish plumbeous
bases to the hair everywhere show through, the rust color being
confined to the tips. The sides of the face are paler and there is
a black ring around the eye. Flight membranes black, the hairs
tipped with white or very pale buff, passing gradually into the
rusty color as they approach the body, outer edge of the mem-
-branes white. Ears triangular, with a sparse covering of black
hairs on the outside. Feet with scattered blackish hairs. Lower
surface dull white; cheeks, throat and sides of abdomen tinged
with rufous. Under side of membranes dull blackish with pale
rufous tips to the hairs.
Tail pale buff or fawn color at the base, below; otherwise en-
tirely uniform dull brown above and below; decidedly distichous and
tapering somewhat from root to tip. ‘‘ Whiskers’’ long—50 to
70 mm.; one or two short cheek bristles, no tufts at base of ears.
Incisors orange.
WemeIORESRIM,S 8... Ut wt Cw eT, . hCe)6800 mm.
Meumueamiatie ver we ww el Cw Ce «60 mm.
elindcfootsine. i). fs s ve oOLmm,
I wish to acknowledge my indebtedness to the collectors and
to Dr. Horace Jayne, Director of the Wistar Institute, for the
privilege of examining these specimens.
3Figured in P. Z. S., 1886, Pl. VI.
464 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF ~ [1900.
Auveust 14.
Mr. Bensamin Smite LyMAn in the Chair.
Eight persons present.
A paper entitled, ‘‘ Lower California Species of Ccelocentrum
and Berendtia,’’ by Henry A. Pilsbry, was presented for publi-
cation.
The Raubsville Cave.—Mr. BENJAMIN SmitH Lyman, refer-
ring to a communication made at a previous meeting by Mr. Lewis
Woolman but not reported, remarked that the Carpenter Caye,
three-fourths of a mile northwest of RaubsviJle and three miles
south of Easton, Pa., was discovered a few years ago in quarrying
limestone near a hilltop about four hundred feet above sea-level
and over two hundred feet above the Delaware. It seems to be
at the axis of an anticlinal, for at the north side of the quarry
the dip is 20° northerly, and some three hundred yards nearly
eastward the dip is perhaps 45° southerly, while half a mile east-
ward, at the Delaware, both north and south dips are very gentle,
and the anticlinal sinks easterly. The explored part of the cave,
perhaps one hundred and fifty yards east from the entrance, is a
mainly straight, east-and-west, nearly vertical, roughly broken
fissure, or series of fissures, up to some teu feet in width, with
occasional blocks of stone lodged between the walls; and exactly
resembles the original, yet unfilled fissures of many ore veins. The
water from the small drainage surface above has but slightly
deposited stalactites and stalagmites, and the walls are partly bare
and angular, according to their inclination. No human traces
have been found in the cave; but reported traces of small animals
and the excellent ventilation indicate that there must be some
natural opening into the cave, though none has yet been found.
It is one of the numerous caverns that Lesley’ has shown to have
aided in effecting, by solution rather than by abrasion, the great
lowering of the neighboring limestone region that has evidently
taken place since glacial times. No undisturbed glacial traces
have persisted, or perhaps ever existed hereabouts. Glacial boul-
ders are found four miles southward, but it is not clear they were
not waterborne, possibly on ice-cakes, from the great terminal
moraine twenty miles to the north.
The following were ordered to be publishe1 :—
} State Geological Report, D3.
—
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 465
THE STRUCTURE OF THE DIATOM GIRDLE.
BY THOMAS CHALKLEY PALMER AND F. J. KEELEY.
~— Usually the girdle of the diatom is easily separated from the
valve to which it pertains. A strewn mount of cleaned diatoms
will show most of the girdles so separated. If any doubt as to the
structural distinction between valve and girdle were possible previ-
ously, Printz removed it, so far as the large forms of Navicula
were concerned, by his study of sections.1 The girdle, therefore,
is understood to be, not a part of the valve, but a closed hoop of
silica, more or less narrow, wedged into the rim of the valve or
otherwise held in place not very firmly. Deby even asserts that
in the case of many species old girdles are ‘‘ caducous’’ and
detach themselves spontaneously. The account? which this author
gives of the process of multiplication by cell-division—an account
agreeing in the main with the views of diatomists in general—
implies a rapid and necessary decrease in size as an inevitable result.
So also Pfitzer* and, following him, most writers on diatoms.
The closed hoop structure is taken as typical of the whole family
by such recent writers as F. Schuett* and George Karsten,° the
former of whom, Peeaunine upon the ‘‘ Zwischenbaender’”’ of
O. Mueller, remarks: . die Zwischenbaender sind .
nach Art der Guer iacnder ah geschlossene Ringe eee ice ae
erscheinen dann als secundaere Guertelbaender, oder,’’ ete. ; and
lW. Printz: ‘‘ Etudes sur coupes de diatomeés observeés dans les lames
minces de la roche de Nykjobing,’’ Brussells, 1880.
2J. Deby: ‘‘Ce que c’est qu’une Diatomeé?’’ Soc. B. de Microscopie,
Bruxelles, 1877.
35. Pfitzer: “ Untersuchungen ueber Bau und Entwickelung der Bacil-
lariaceen,’?’ Bonn, 1871. Also, ‘‘ Die Bacillariaceen,’’ Encyklopaedie der
Waturwissenschaften. Botanik, I, p. 485, where the matter is thus tersely
expressed: . bei jeder Theilung die groessere der beiden entstehenden
Tochterzellen genau eben so lang ist, “als die Mutterzelle war, waebrend die
andere etwa um die doppelte Dicke des Guertelbandes kuerzer ist.”’
*F. Schuett: “ Bacillariacee.’’ Engler and Prantl’s Pflanzenfamilien, I, 1,
b., p. 39, 1896.
5 George Karsten: ‘‘ Die Diatomeen der Kieler Bucht,’’ Wissenschaftliche
Meeresuntersuchungen, Vierter Band., 1899.
30
466 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
the latter simply takes the closed ring structure for granted. This
structure being admitted, the deduction as to progressive decrease
in size is undoubtedly sound. In point of fact, wide variations
in size do, in the case of a vast number of species, occur continu-
ally. In filamentous forms it would appear that a decrease does
occur step by step with the process of reduplication. Yet facts are
not wanting that do not agree altogether with the theory. The
demonstration has seemed to demonstrate too much. ‘‘ If the
matter is as simple as Mr. Deby has made it out to be,’’ writes
Van Heurck, ‘‘ sexual reproduction would be very frequently
observed, which, however, is not the case.’’® Possibly what is
meant here is not exclusively sexual reproduction, that is to say
conjugation (which does not, in the algz, wait upon decrease in
size), but also rejuvenescence of the cell by auxospore formation.
The scarcity of auxospores in Melosira and similar forms, com-
pared with the number theoretically called for, is one of the strik-
ing facts in this connection. The details of the process of redu-
plication were therefore studied exhaustively by Otto Mueller’ in
the case of a single species of the genus. The study culminated
in the celebrated ‘‘ law of Mueller,’’ a statement of the sequence
of events in the growth of this particular species, which shows
why it is that after forty-three successive reduplications there is
but one auxospore in place of the 1,042,100,000,000 which ought
to produce themselves according to the theory of plain geometrical
subdivision.
Studies of the character of this upon Melosira arenaria are not
so plentiful that we should desire to do aught but award it the high
appreciation which is its just due, and which it has compelled
from diatom students in general.
We must, however, be allowed to remark that it has yet to be
shown that the sequence of events is the same in all species; and,
further, that it is not quite certain, as will appear later, that even
the fundamental structure of the silicious parts is the same in all
the genera and species of the diatoms.
In all the literatnre upon diatoms with which we are familiar
6H. Van Heurck: Treatise on the Diatomacee. English translation by
W. E. Baxter, London, 1896.
7 Die Zelihaut und des Gesetz der Zelltheilung folge von Melosira are-
naria Moore,’’ Berlin, 1883.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 467
there is noticeable a curious tendency to neglect the structure of
the girdle, to take for granted that it is everywhere the same, and
that it is typically a closed hoop.* Only in the Lauderiinz and
Rhizosoleniinz, which include the genera Lauderia, Guinardia,
Rhizosolenia, Dactyliosolin, and one or two others, is any other
structure figured or described; and in those cases a distinction is
made by calling the numerous girdles either annule or interbands.
In short, the girdles here are considered non-typical and peculiar.
Peculiar in certain aspects they may be. But that either these
‘‘annule’’ or the ‘‘ Zwischenbaender’’ in other genera, differ
from the usual girdle in being incomplete hoops is a proposition
we dare to call in question. Our theme may be stated thus: The
closed hoop structure is unusual. With some very important excep-
tions, the girdle is a two-ended band of silica, with the ends vari-
ously and characteristically rounded or otherwise modified, and
approximated or overlapping without being joined. The position of
the gap or joint is, within limits, constant in a given genus with
relation to salient features of the valves. In case of each simple
pair of primary girdles, the two gaps are usually at opposite points
of the diatom; and in general, in the forms we have studied, the
gaps are normally so situated with respect to each other as to
** Jap joints.”
In ealling attention to a fact at once so elementary and fun-
damental, and so in opposition to views generally held, we could
desire to present a large number of particulars. But we cannot
claim the merit of setting forth at this time the results of any
adequate study of the girdle. The field is vast, and the difficulties
are various. We content ourselves now with the presentation of
certain typical examples, mainly or almost exclusively among the
larger forms. It seems, indeed, almost or quite safe to infer the
main structure of the girdles of minute species from the main
structure of those of larger species in the same genus.
The facts presented are almost all morphological and static, and
so, however incomplete in some respects, they have the advantage
of being easily verified by any student of the Diatomacee. Om
observations have been primarily among the Pennatze, and first of
® This is by no means to ignore the ‘‘ Zwischenband’’ developments of Otto
Mueller and F. Schuett. But, as we have shown, the latter authority at least
implies the closed-ring girdle structure. The ‘‘ Zwischenband ’”’ issomewhat
apart from our present subject, which confines itself to girdles proper.
468 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
all in the genus Surirella. It therefore seems necessary to begin
with this genus—a genus that partakes of some of the character-
istics of both Pennatze and Centric. Especially in the location
of the girdle gap would Surirel/a seem to be anything but a typi-
cal member of the Pennatz. Following this we shall consider the
Pennatae, and lastly certain typical Centrice.
SURIRELLA.
It was a study of a pure and very large gathering of Surirella
elegans Ehrenb. that first drew our attention to the real structure
of the girdle. ‘The diatom was found in greatest abundance, prac-
tically free from other forms and from inert matter, in a shaded
rill of cold water during the month of August. It formed a dark-
brown or even blackish patch upon the bottom, about a foot in
diameter and more than a fourth of an inch deep. Several ounces
of purest material were dipped up and placed in bottles. Some
of the gathering remained in good living condition for four
months. <A part was boiled in strong nitric acid, and mounts were
made in balsam. Girdles separated from their valves were plenti-
ful in these preparations. Many girdles were broken into several
pieces, but many more were uninjured. Those latter, however,
always showed an opening that was not a break. Though sep-
arated from their valves, the girdles remained in general bent
nearly as when attached. In every case, with absolutely no real
exception, the gap was on one of the flat sides of the oval, and
mostly not far from a point midway of the length. This was true
of all the girdles, of which there were two main types observable.
The first of these is the mature girdle, mostly broad and thick;
and the second is the young or immature, narrow and thin. The
latter kind, in addition to the gap, showed also, at a point nearly
opposite, a little stem or cleat of silica, in shape somewhat like an
hour-glass, extending at right angles from the edge to a distance
equal to or greater than the breadth of the girdle itself. This
cleat was absent in older, or what may be called primary, girdles.
The gathering was, and long remained, rather quiescent as respects
reduplication, and successive preparations continued to show the
two kinds of girdles with practically no intermediate gradations.
These two kinds are represented at d and ge, fig. i, Pl XV. It
being manifesily impossible to understand the relations of these
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 469
girdles to each other and to the valves when the elements were in
this state of dislocation, preparations were made with parts in situ
by burning the crude frustules upon cover-glasses and mounting
dry and in balsam.
Persistent study of all those preparations, as well as of living
frustules and mounts made by other preparers, has, most unfortu-
nately, left many points still obscure. Yet we are able to present
the following definitely ascertained facts.
__ The complete frustule, in this gathering, shows first of all two
broad and thick primary girdles, the inner and the outer. Each
of these exhibits a gap between its approximated ends, substan-
tially as shown in diagram ¢, fig. 1, Pl. XV.
These gaps are on opposite sides of the diatom in every case
observed by us; and while the exact location varies, it is always
between the smaller end and the middle point of the length.
Long before there is any other evidence of coming reduplication,
two secondary girdles.make their appearance, one for each of the
primary girdles. One of these extends as a narrow, thin band
around the edge of the outer primary, and projects a cleat through
the opening in the primary, attaching itself thereby to the outer
valve. This outer secondary girdle shows in optical section at the
end of the diatom, as if attached to the inner edge of the primary.
At the same time, upon the edge of the inner primary girdle
appears in like manner a secondary growth, with cleat extending
through the opening in the primary to the inner valve. But in
optical section, at the end of the diatom, this inner secondary
appears as an outward thickening, as if attached to the outer edge
of the primary. We have, therefore, now four girdles, the two
primary and the two secondary, for each pair of valves. Dia-
grams of these parts, separated and in contact with each other,
are included in fig 1, Pl. XV.
That which arrests attention is, that the inner secondary girdle
apparently overlaps the inner primary. If these secondary girdles
are, by any possibility, destined to become primary girdles in the
daughter-cells, the arrangement as described will admit of but two
results: either the new valve will attach itself to the new girdle,
the old valve remaining as before the inner or smaller valve of the
two, or, on the other hand, the new valve may join to the old girdle,
which parts from the old valve and is replaced by the new girdle.
470 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
But that the secondary girdles do develop and function in either of
these ways is what we have been quite unable to prove. It is next
to impossible to trace the disposition of parts in a frustule of
Surirella after the two new valves have formed and before the
daughter-cells have parted company. We can only say that we
have looked carefully, but hitherto in vain, for any evidence of
the growth of new girdles from the young valves of. Surirella
elegans in accordance with orthodox views. In some other genera
we have observed facts that seem to indicate that similar secondary
girdles, formed before the young valves, broaden and lose their
cleats, becoming finally indistinguishable from primary girdles. In
the case of Surirella we are more in doubt, and we desire to pursue
the subject further. As bearing on the doctrine of a necessary
decrease in size during successive cell-divisions, the matter is plainly
of importance. And in the same connection we would state that
among the millions of frustules in our gathering of S. elegans,
products of along series of divisions and redivisions, the small
ones were few compared with those well toward the maximum of
220 ». It would certainly seem that, with the expansible girdles
which pertain to this species, new valves might be formed as large
as the old; and that the quite small frustules, 170 » long, which
are present only to the extent of ten per cent., must owe their
existence to some less familiar and simple, but more real, influence
than a supposed, but non-existent, stony inexpansibility of the
mother-cell girdle.
The girdles of Surirel/a elegans are apparently hyaline, but
under favorable conditions transverse strive are visible. When
well resolved, the appearance is similar to that of Amphipleura
pellucida, but the strize are more delicate and the resolution much
more difficult. Attempts further to resolve into dots were unsuc-
cessful.
Pure gatherings of S. splendida Kuetz, less rich than that above
described, yet ample, showed essentially the same girdle structure.
That is to say, there were primary and secondary girdles, the latter
with and the former without cleats, but both with gaps situated as
in S. elegans.®
® Many mixed mounts of diatoms were examined, and Swrirella girdles
of several species were recognized. All showed lateral gaps, and many
secondary girdles were seen with cleats. In Mueller’s type-plate of one
hundred forms in styrax, a Jateral gap was observed in the form listed as
S. norwegica, Eul. (II, 3).
Py
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 471
S. elegans may stand as a type, not of its own genus only, bu
apparently also of the Surirelloidexe. Cymatupleura solia W. Sm.,
according to our too few observations, has girdles with gaps situated
one on each side of the diatom, not far from the place of greatest
constriction midway of the length. As for Campylodiscus, the
remaining genus, we have been unable to find any preparations
showing girdles in a condition admitting of study.
NITZSCHIA.
We have not been fortunate enough to identify satisfactorily any
large variety of girdles in this genus. Such girdles as are in situ
show nothing of importance except occasionally certain apparent
lines running out at a sharp angle from the termination of the
valve on the girdle face—such as have been figured frequently
(e.g., Nitzschia linearis, in Van Heurck, Pl. 16, fig. 542). Dis-
located girdles, however, were found plentifully in a gathering of
JV. sigmoidea. As in Surirella, the girdles are of two kinds.
The first is, when in place, in contact with its valve along its whole
length. The second is narrower, and connected with the valve
only at one point—the cleat. Both have one end open, the other
end closed. The free ends of a girdle are uniform]y beveled in a
characteristic way, so as to form two sharp points. These points
meet each other at the end of the diatom. The inner girdle of a
simple pair has its opening at the end opposite to the opening in
the outer. The cleat on the secondary girdle is situated at the
opening in the primary, and partly closes it without at any time
fusing it into a solid, unbroken band. Fig. 5, a and b, Pl. XV,
illustrate these two forms of girdle in this species very well, except
that breadth is less in proportion to length than these drawings
would indicate.
NAVICULA.
. Among the vast number of species of this genus we have paid
attention mostly to the Pinnularia group, such as Navieula viridis,
nobilis and major. Pure gatherings of these large forms have not
been at our command. But though nowhere in great abundance,
some are to be found in almost all good fresh-water gatherings.
The girdles are easily assigned to their proper species as a rule,
because even when quite detached they generally still retain
approximately their original shapes. Even in fossil deposits it is
472 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
not difficult to recognize many Navicula girdles as belonging to
this or that particular form also represented therein by valves.
In these large forms the girdles, when viewed as they stand upon
their edges—that is, in valve view, but with valye removed—show
each one a closed end and an end more or less widely opened.
When the exact shape is retained, the free ends, which are much
thinned or drawn out, approach each other closely or perhaps over-
lap a very little in some cases. As a rule, however, some little
distortion occurs during the preparation of the slide. A diagram
of the edge-view is given in fig. 2a, Pl. XV.
When seen flatwise, or in girdle view, the ends are found to be
narrowed in the other direction also. When the heat used in
mounting has been particularly high, it often happens that girdles
lying on their sides are softened, and the preparation will then some-
times show both the free ends nearly or quite in the same place,
and not superposed. The appearance then is somewhat as in fig. 20,
Pl. XV. The terminations of the band of silica appear always of
nearly this same shape in the large Navicule. The joint which is
formed by them is uniformly at the end of the diatom; and, as
may be expected, the joint or gap in the outer girdle is at one end of
the diatom, while that in the inner girdle is at the otherend. Sec-
ondary girdles, homologous with those described above for Suriredla,
we have seen but in a single doubtful case; and anything resembling
a cleat, either in situ or detached from the valve, is equally hard
to find. Richer gatherings will probably be necessary before the
secondary girdles, if such exist in Navicula, ean be described.
The terminal gap or joint of these large forms is typical of the
girdle structure of the whole vast genus. WN. gibba Kg., N.
Bombus Ehr., and many others, some in nearly pure gatherings,
yield girdles with gaps situated at the ends. It is, indeed, very
striking to see how uniformly the dislocated girdles of all species,
even the smallest, are open at one end and closed at the other.
Girdles in situ, unless happily broken at the right place, do not
show the gap satisfactorily; and even a pair of girdles, one within
the other, with valves removed, often cling together so tightly that
the gaps are not obvious, and the observer might think he had
here a completely closed single hoop. Buta real case of a single
girdle with both ends closed has not, among either large or small
forms of this genus, been noted by us.
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 473
STAURONEIS.
The girdles of S. Phenicentron Ehr. are very thin and narrow,
and the free ends forming the gap, which is situated at the end of
the frustule, have a less constant and definite shape than in the
case of most diatoms. Owing to their tenuity, and consequent
proneness to soften and become distorted, these girdles are not
easily identified in mixed gatherings. From an examination of
some pure gatherings we are able to state that the gaps in inner
~and outer girdles are at opposite ends of the diatom, and that
exceedingly minute cleats are often present on secondary girdles.
These cleats are merely little rod-like projections at right angles to
the edges of the girdles.
NA VICULOIDEA and ACHNANTHOIDEZ.,
Terminal gaps in the girdles of the following have been observed
with uniformity: Plewrosigma angulatum W. Sm., Pl. Spenceri
Bailey, Pl. Balticown W.Sm., Pl. elongatum W. Sm., Pl. strigo-
sum W. Sm., Van Heurckia rhomboides Breb., Gomphonema gemi-
natum (Lyngb.) Ag., Rhoicosphenia curvatum (Kuetzy Grun. In
the case of Plewrosigma, the termination of the free end of the
girdle is somewhat like that in species of Nitzschia, but less sharply
pointed, and more rounded on the side of the termination away
from the valve. In the above genera we have not seen any very
definite cleats.
Cymbella, Amphora, Amphiprora and Mastogloia remain unin-
vestigated. Hpithemia has claimed our attention without yielding
any clear understanding of its girdle structure. Achnanthes
brevipes Ag. and Cocconeis Pediculus Ehr. yield girdles in which
terminal gaps can generally be distinctly seen.
RHABDONEMA.
Among the crowd of genera and species of the Fragilarioidee,
Rhabdonema adriaticum Kuetz. is the form that most clearly shows
the essential structure of the girdle. This structure seems, in addi-
tion, typical of the whole group, with the exception, apparently,
of some species of Synedra. Practically the same arrangement-—
apart from the interposition of the Zwischenbaender—is found
with clearness in Hunotia, and indicated sufficiently in Meridion,
Diatoma and Fragilaria.
474 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Two girdles of R. adriaticum are shown in fig. 3, Pl. XV. One
bears a thin band which joins it throughout its length to the valve
or Zwischenband. The other is more narrow, and connects with the
valve only by the very distinct cleat. Intergradations are observ-
able in rich gatherings which show a gradual increase of breadth,
starting from the cleat and extending toward the open end. The
ends are rounded, and half-inclined to be spatulate on the side
removed from the valve, but come to a point on the side next the
valve. The cleat is of considerable breadth, comparatively heavy,
and calculated, from its shape, to fit snugly on the inner edge of
the valve attheend. A few specimens, only partly dislocated during
mounting, showed the usual alternation of parts—that is, the outer
girdle of a pair is open at one end of the diatom, the inner girdle
of the same pair is open at the other end.
EUNOTIA.
E. major Rab. was studied at some length, both mounted in
filaments and mounted after disruption and separation of parts.
The mounted filament yields but unsatisfactory results. The
features of importance being at the ends of the cells, and the parts
being here so overlapped and confusing, an optical section of the
end of the cell, especially of one in course of division, will show
‘‘a mass of things, but nothing distinctly.’’ Nevertheless, a
rapidly growing filament does afford some evidence that prevalent
ideas as to what goes on during cell-division of diatoms are not
altogether unmixed with error. We desire to return to this subject
at no distant date. For our present purpose, we simply show, in
fig. 4, Pl. XV, two separated girdles of this species. We have
been able to discover no other kind of girdle than these, and such
as are of an intermediate character, either in this species or in
others of the genus. Filamentous and non-filamentous, all species
examined yield only girdles open at one end and closed at the other.
MELOSIRA.
The fresh-water species of this genus are mostly small, and the
girdles are, previous to the formation of new valves, excessively
tenuous—so much so that any structure is only to be made out with
the greatest difficulty. J£ Roeseana Rab., however, occasionally
shows a typical structure, which is also dimly seen in certain speci-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 4795
mens of VW. varians Ag. The long, tubular ‘‘ connective’’ which
separates the old valves, and within which new valves grow, is
made up of numerous imbricated hoops. Each of these hoops is
incomplete. The openings in them are situated with respect to
each other somewhat irregularly. The species MW. Borreri Grev.,
being much larger, reveals a distinct structure. The arrangement
of the hoops is essentially like that in Lauderia annulata Cleve.”
These bands or hoops, when separated, show openings; and ina
few cases, in the species Jf Roeseana, delicate cleats extending
to the valyes have been seen. These cleats are much like those in
Biddulphia, which are described below. After the formation of
the new valves within this system of rings, the tube seems to
increase in thickness, and to become more or less firmly united with -
the outer surfaces or edges of the valves into a stiff and stout
construction not easily separated again. So the filamentous state
is conserved. But the openings or joints in the rings can still be
made out, with proper management. The tube composed by these
rings is, therefore, originally somewhat expansible. If it becomes
non-yielding, that is after the formation of the new valves; so
that, if these latter are smaller, as they undoubtedly are, this fact
also has possibly another explanation. Numerous published figures
indicate the rings composing the tube in Medosira and its relatives,
but the openings and cleats have not been figured so far as we can
find.
We have not investigated the girdles of the other genera of
Melosirinz nor those of the Sceletoneminz.
COSCINODISCUS.
Particularly distinct structures are to be found in the girdles of
this genus. In fig. 7, Pl. XV, is shown diagrammatically a pair
of girdles of C. subtilis Grun. with two secondary girdles in place.
In fig. 8, Pl. XV, is given an inner primary, with two second-
aries adhering. These two figures will sufficiently elucidate the
arrangement and relation of parts in this species. We have here
the openings in all the girdles and stem-like cleats joining the
secondary girdles to the valves. It is worthy of note that here, at
least, whatever the import may be, the secondary girdles both
10See Van Heurck, Zveatise on the Diatomacee, p. 418. Figure in the
text.
476 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
overlie the inner primary. Here again, however, our information
is incomplete. It is a question whether these secondary girdles are
destined to serve the yet unformed valves of the daughter-cells, or
whether they are nearly constant features of the mature mother-
cell, and designed simply to strengthen the whole structure. We
desire to pursue this inquiry further.
A somewhat similar structure is that in C. robustus Grev. (at
least as to the primary girdle), but more pronounced owing to the
greater thickness of the girdle, as will be noted in figs. 1 and 2 of
Pl. XVI, which show photographically botk views of the opening
in the primary girdle. Here the cellular structure of the girdle,
which is similar to but much finer than that of the valve, has
comparatively broad hyaline margins continuous through the gap.
We have observed secondary girdles with cleats in this same spe-
cies, but not in a shape to indicate clearly their relations with
primary girdles.
The structure and arrangement as given will probably explain
the form described by J. Brun” under the name of Coscinodiscus
crassus cum Placente ; also the appearance, according to J. Rat-
tray,” of certain specimens of C. robustus from Santa Monica,
Cal., wherein a striated border (of the valve) was ‘‘ surrounded
by a second more sharply defined but narrower band, with a
slightly convex surface; . .. . at one place this band is inter
rupted and somewhat more convex on the two sides of the break.
This gives it the appearance of an elastic spring enveloping the
valve.”’
Our material representing C. robustus is from Sendai, Japan,
and while rich in girdles, it has failed to afford one that was com-
pletely closed.
ACTINOCYCLUS.
We have studied the girdles of A. Ehrenbergii Ralfs. from
Florida. The structure is essentially the same as that of Cosei-
nodiscus subtilis as given in figs. 7 and 8 of Pl. XV. In addition,
we have seen at least one secondary girdle apparently developing
in a most interesting and curious manner into a girdle of full width.
More observation is needed here before we feel warranted in
1 J.Bron: Diatomeés Especes Nouvelles Marines, Doel.
2 J. Rattray: A revision of the genus Coscinodiscus Ehr. Edinburgh,
1890.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 477
drawing any final conclusion; but the single example referred to
would seem to indicate only one possibility, namely, that the
secondary girdles do indeed eveutually become indistinguishable
from the primary.
AULACODISCUS.
- In this genus the girdles are composed of hoops, imbricated as in
Melosira, Lauderia, etc. The arrangement of the hoops and the
_ location of the gaps are shown photographically in figs. 4 and 5 of
PEXVI, where the first figure is of the upper side of a semi-
frustule of A. Kittonii, and the second is of the lower side of the
same specimen. The girdle is in this case composed of four
hoops, but the number varies from two to six or even more in
different individuals. The opening of the hoop next the valve is
vn the lower side, that of the next is on the upper side, the third
on the lower, the fourth on the upper. The cleats, which may be
anticipated here on all except the first hoop, have not been seen.
BIDDULPHIA.
The typical species, B. devis Ehr., so abundant along the coasts,
has a complicated system of hoops. Two oft-reeurring shapes are
shown in fig. 4, Pl. XVI. The cleat on the narrower hoop
passes through the gap in the wide hoop and attaches itself to the
valve within the sulcus. In fig. 3, Pl. XVI, is shown a frustule
with three hoops in the outer girdle. In fig. 6, Pl. XV, is given
diagrammatically, but with essential] faithfulness, a frustule with
two valves and four approximately equal girdles. No cleats could
be discovered in the specimen from which this figure was con-
structed. The arrangement shown would certainly indicate the
possibility that secondary girdles may function as primaries in the
daughter-cells.
As to the location of the girdle gaps, it is worth remarking that
in this and neighboring species the gaps and cleats are always
situated almost vertically under the knobs of the valves—that is
to say, at the ends of the oval diatom, nct on the flat sides as in
Surirella.
Dratoms With CLosEeD GIRDLEs.
Apparent or real exceptions to the open-girdle structure are
noted as follows:
Synedra superba Kuetz. Whether the girdle is or is not closed
478 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
at both ends in this species remains quite doubtful. Certainly
there is much appearance of complete closure in many specimens
examined by us. In any case, the girdle is furnished with a stout
hook-shaped cleat at one end, and generally at the other end with
either precisely the same thing or else with two hooks only separable
from each other with difficulty.
Arachnoidiscus Ehrenbergii Bailey. Such girdles of this species
as we have examined have been narrow and comparatively thick.
They are attached to the under side of the valve by an inward-
bent rim of great tenuity, quite continuous all around the circle.
No manipulation we could bring to bear has made any opening
evident in either rim or girdle, and the girdles usually show as
perfect and complete circles.
Triceratium favus Ehr. The girdles are attached by a rim like
that in Arachnoidiscus. They are broader, however, and of a
thickness that would make any opening or gap very obvious. Con-
sidering the close relationship now thought to obtain between
Triceratium and Biddulphia, we confidently expected to find a
similarity in girdle structure. Our material, though not in endless
profusion, has not been exactly meagre. Yet we end by saying
not only that we have not found any girdle gaps in T’riceratium,
but also that we do not believe any will be found. This is the more
curious, since it would appear from published figures that Litho-
desmium has possibly a complicated system of open girdles. But
we have not examined the latter, and cannot state the facts as to
this matter. It may be that the closed hoop structure is a charac-
teristic of all the Triceratiinz.
Terpsine musica Ehr. seems to have closed girdles. Being a
large form, any opening ought to be seen with ease. If such
exists, it is in the form of a very narrow slit at the end of the
diatom, and so invisible in the specimens as usually mounted.
Tsthmia nervosa Kuetz. This very large diatom has completely
closed girdles. These are all the exceptions to the general rule tliat
we have detected. Their importance is undeniable. Others
among the Centrice may quite possibly be found; though, if our
present classification is not overrated as an expression of natural
relationships, the probabilities are all in favor of the open-girdle
structure in most of the genera intervening between Me/osira and
Biddulphia. As to the Pennate, terminal gaps may be expected
in nearly all genera.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 479
We desire to thank Messrs. J. E. Schultz, Lewis Woolman and
C. S. Boyer for diatom material, and the last-named gentleman
for certain references to the literature of diatoms.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
PLATE XV,
Fig. 1. Surirelia elegans Ehr. a, inner primary girdle; 6, outer
primary girdle; a’, inner secondary girdle; 6’, outer
secondary girdle; c, arrangement of parts in situ; d,
separated primary girdle; e, separated secondary girdle
with cleat.
2. Pinnularia sp. a, girdle on edge; 38, girdle on flat side,
distorted.
3. Rhabdonema adriaticum Kuetz. a, primary girdle; a,
secondary girdle.
Fig. 4. Eunotia major Rab. a, primary girdle; a’, secondary
girdle. a
5. Niteschia sigmoidea Ehr. a, primary girdle; 6, secondary
girdle.
6. Biddulphia levis Ehr. Two valves and four girdles, the
front of outer girdles broken away to show gaps on the
farther side.
Fig. 7. Coscinodiscus subtilis Grun. <A pair of primary girdles,
with two secondaries in place.
Fig. 8. Coscinodiscus subtilis Grun. An inner primary girdle,
with two secondaries adhering.
Puate XVI.
Fig. 1. Valve view of girdle of Coscinodiscus robustus Grev.
x 350.
Fig. 2. Girdle view of girdle of Coscinodiscus robustus Grev.
2
x 350.
Fig. 3. Biddulphia levis Ehr. X 425. Showing three hoops
in outer girdle.
4, Biddulphia levis Ehr. <A primary and a secondary gir-
dle, the latter with cleat. x 200.
Figs. 5 and 6. Aulacodiscus Kittonti Arnott. X 370. A semi-
frustule, mounted on its girdle, and photographed
first on the side in contact with the cover-glass
fig. 5), then on the far side (fig. 6).
Photographed with Tolles $ 1.20 N. A.
Fig.
480 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
THE MUSCULUS CRUCIFORMIS OF THE ORDER TELLINACEA.
BY H. VON IHERING.
During the winter of 1876-1877, I spent my time in studying
the animals of the Pelecypoda in the rich collection of the Museum
of Copenhagen, which were with great liberality placed at my dispo-
sal. Among the numerous still unpublished observations then made,
there is one which I believe may be useful now, as it seems that
no other zodlogist has hitherto observed and published the same.
All the members of the Tellinacea (Dall) have at the base of
the siphons in the connected ventral parts of the margins of the
mantle a singular muscle,
formed by two crossing muscles
which are inserted in the valves
in the region of the angle formed
by the mantle-impression and
the sinus, or between it and the
borders of the shell. Our fig. 1
shows their positions in Sangui-
nolaria sanguinolenta (Gm.).
One of the two branches per-
‘forates the other, both being
united into a cross-shaped mus-
cle, which functionally may serve
as asecondary adductor, I have
examined this muscle in the
following species: Macoma
Fig. 1. Siphonal apparatus of San- lucern = Hanley and calearea Ch.,
guinolaria sanguinolenta (Gm.). ap, Tellina interrupta Wood and
posterior adductor ; 7p, posterior Te- <¢.ja¢q Ch., Soletellina violacea
tractor ; c7”, cruciform muscle. ai oak 2 ;
Lam., Sanguinolaria sanguino-
lenta Gm., Psammobia ferroensis Ch., Asaphis coccinea Mart.,
Donax cuneatus L., Semele reticulata L., Iphigenia brasiliana
Lam., Tagelus gibbus Spengler.
In all these different forms the general arrangement is the same,
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 481
but the development of the muscles, their insertions, etc., offer
great variability. In Tagelus the muscle is very small and
included in the mantel-edges, not producing separate scars of inser-
tion. Somewhat stronger are the muscles in Psammobia and
Donazx, but as a rule they produce also no distinct scars of inser-
tion. Iphigenia has the muscles strong but short. In the true
Tellina and in Macoma the branches are slender and very long,
and always the scars of in-
sertion are quite well devel-
oped, as shown by our fig. 2. ajo _
Sometimes the insertion is S
different in relation to the
distance of the scars in both
valves, and sometimes one of
the muscular branches is sub-
uZ7
Cc «
eps : Fig. 2. Tellina striata Ch. aa, ante-
divided, producing thus two rior adductor; ap, posterior adductor ;
scars. . c’ and c/’, scars of the insertions of the
All these differences are of Te Lee
secondary value. There can be, however, no doubt that the Telli-
nidz offer the best and most typical development of the apparatus,
and Tagelus the most rudimentary one. The conditions of the
muscle in the genera Solecurtus and others apparently related to
Tagelus, should be examined. Evidently the cruciform muscle is a
special development of fibres of the mantel-edge which only sec-
ondarily have been isolated from these margins. This is, as I
believe, the true origin also of the adductor muscles, which in
their earliest state were situated in the mantel-edge and secondarily
isolated and removed from it. The cruciform muscle forms a new
an¢ important character of the super-family Tellinaceze, confirming
the views of Prof. W. H. Dall.
dl
482 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
THE FLORA OF THE EDGEHILL RIDGE NEAR WILLOW GROVE AND
ITS ECOLOGY.
BY ALEXANDER MAC ELWEE.
The village of Willow Grove, Montgomery county, Pa., is
situated near the eastern edge of the Chester Valley limestone for-
mation, and just at the northern base of one of the highest points
of the Potsdam sandstone, commonly known as the Edgehill
ridge. This ridge is part of an almost continuous belt of sand-
stone, quartzite and conglomerate rocks, which extends from the
Delaware river near Trenton almost to the Schuylkill river. The
section of the belt studied extends from the village of Willow
Grove southeast about one mile, then southwest for about five
miles, terminating at a point one mile southwest of the village of
Edgehill. The average elevation of this ridge is about 400 feet.
This elevated region is an important factor in determining the flow
of the streams in its neighborhood. Sand Run, rising about a half-
mile east of Rubicam, drains the valley between this ridge and the
hills of the same formation on the north and unites with the
Wissahickon on the west side of Fort Hill. Various little streams
starting on the south side at Laverock, Edgehill, Weldon and
Abington, unite a short distance above Jenkintown and form the
main volume of Tacony creek. The southeast, east and northeast
sides are drained by the Pennypack creek and its tributaries,
Paul’s Brook, Terwood Run and other minor streams. Numerous
good roads traverse the region in different directions, and many fine
views of the surrounding country may be obtained.
The flora of this ridge is very interesting, owing to its difference
from that of the surrounding country. It isa flora peculiar to
many barren districts on the Atlantic seaboard which contain
numerouspecies and v arieties.
The plants of this region resolve themselves into three societies
or associations of species. These are as follows:
wi
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 483
1. Sunshine plants:
(a) Roadside,
(6) Dry open woods,
(ce) Introduced annuals of the cultivated fields.
2. Shade plants.
3. Bog plants.
1. SunsHInE Piants.—The old road leading over the hill near
Willow Grove is an excellent place for the study of this society.
A great variety of plants are found here in bloom, from the first
early violets of spring until the last asters and golden-rods of
autumn. The varied colors and scents of the Virginia goats-beard,
golden ragweed, clumps of pink azaleus, lousewort, blue-eyed
grass, fragrant pennyroyal, bracken ferns and kindred plants make
the road gay in early summer. Later, the many forms of sedges,
grasses, tick-seeds, and compositz interest the lover of plants. It
is interesting to note the number of young trees of rock oak, red
oak, tulip poplar, sassafras, mocker-nut, hickory and others which
are springing up among the belt of blackberries skirting the road.
Wagons passing at long intervals just manage to keep the track
open and prevent the forest from reclaiming its own. The follow-
ing is a select list of plants of this society:
Pteris aquilina, Viola sagitatta,
Agrostis alba, Viola villosa,
Danthonia spicata, Chamenerion angutifolium,
Panicum pubescens, Iysimachia nummularia,
Panicum spherocarpon, Sabbatia angularis,
Carex virescens, Pedicularis Canadensis,
Sisyrinchium graminoides, Campanula rapunculoides,
Rubus Canadensis, Adopogon Virginicum,
Rubus villosus, Aster ericoides,
Baptisia tinctoria, Aster lateriflorus,
Lespedeza hirta, Bidens comosa,
Ascyrum hypericoides, Eupatorium aromaticum,
Helianthemum majus, Gnaphalium obtusifoliwn,
Viola communis, Hieracium Gronovii,
Viola dentata, Hieracium scabrum,
Viola emarginata, Solidago bicolor,
Viola fimbriatula, Solidago nemoralis.
484 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
(6) The dry open woods contain a society of plants, some of
which are frequently met with along the road. Huckleberry Hill,
so named by me from the variety and abundance of these plants
found there, may be taken as a type locality. The species of
plants are few and comprise the following:
Carex nigro-marginata, Vaccinium atrococeum,
Scleria pauciflora, Vaccinium vacillans,
Hypoxys hirsuta, Vaccinium stamineum,
Pogonia verticillata, Kalmia augustifolia,
Comptonia peregrina, Kalmia latifolia,
Quercus Marylandica, Dasystoma flava,
Quercus minor, Gerardia tenuifolia,
Rubus hispidus, Aster patens,
Cracea Virginiana, Aster undulatus,
Tanum striatum, Aster undulatus triangularis,
Linum Virginianum, Chrysopsis mariana,
Gaylussacia resinosa, Sericocarpus asteroides.
Gaylussacia frondosa,
(c) The weeds of the cultivated fields will form the basis of
later study.
2. SHADE OR Forest Piants.—The woods of the hill consist
principally of second-growth rock-chestnut oak, with a sprinkling
of white and red oak. Beech trees are also quite numerous, and
in the thicker portions are a few tulip trees conspicuous by their
tall, straight, light-colored trunks. Along .the outskirts are
juniper, sassafras, white and shellbark hickory, cherries and
dogwood.
The undergrowth consists of arrow-wood, young beeches and
high bush huckleberries, while clambering up and over the trees
are tangled masses of frost-grape and briar. At the highest point
of the hill the woods have been cut over in recent years, hence the
timber is very thin and averages about twelve feetin height. Fur-
ther north, nearer the village, the timber is heavier and is at its
best in the woods on the northeast side of the road. All these
woods give shelter to herbaceous plants according to their density
and depth of vegetable mould. The following plants, among
others, may be found;
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 485
Adiantum pedatum, Pyrola rotundifolia,
Panicum Porterianuin, Monotropa uniflora,
Smilax herbacea, Hypopitys Hypopitys,
Polygonatum biflorum, Pieris mariana,
Cypripedium acaule, Iyeopus Virginicus,
Populus grandidentata, Chelone glabra,
Agrimonia hirsuta, Galium triflorum, i.
Aronia nigra, Galium lanceolatum,
Geranium maculatum, Viburnum acerifolium,
Viola pubescens, Aster divaricatus,
Viola sororia, Aster Lowrieanus,
Sanicula Canadensis, Aster Lowrieanus lancifolius,
Deringa Canadensis, Aster macrophyllus pinguifolius,
Chimaphila maculata, Nabalus trifoliatus.
Chimaphila umbellata,
3. Boc PLants.—This society of plants is very interesting, not
in its size, but in its peculiar flora. The little bog of this region
is in the centre of a three-acre field. The trees in it consist mainly
of sweet bay, Magnolia Virginiana, willows and alders. The rills
from the base of the hill all centre here. At different times in the
year the following plants may be found in bloom:
Panicum sphagnicolum, Juncus marginatus,
Panicum longifolium, Aletris farinosa,
* Agrostis altissima, AXyris flexuosa,
Dulichium arundinaceum, Pogonia ophioglossoides,
Eleocharis tuberculosa, Limnodorum tuberosum,
Ehyneospora alba, Drosera rotundifolia,
Rhyncospora glomerata, Polygala cruciata,
Eriophorum Virginianum, Bartonia tenella,
Carex Atlantica, Aster Nove-Belgi,
* Carex alata, Eupatorium verbencefolium.
Some of the above plants are frequently met with in bogs here
and there throughout the State, but almost all are common to the
pine-barren regions of lower New Jersey. How they got into this
little bog is an interesting question which is hard to solve.
* Collected by Mr. C. F. Saunders.
32
486 * PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
In addition to the above, the following plants are also found in
this bog:
Paspalum leve, Viola primulefolia,
Carex interior, Oxypolis rigida,
Scleria Torreyana, Gentiana saponaria,
Juncus scirpoides, Asclepias rubra,
Juncus dichotomus, Scutelaria integrifolia,
Alsine uliginosa, Campanula aparinoides,
Viola eucullata, Senecio balsamite,
Viola blanda, Vernonia Nove-boracensis.
The study of this flora has given rise to numerous questions
regarding the origin and distribution of many species, some of
which I shall endeavor to explain. The factors which influence
the flora are soil, light, heat, water, wind, plants and animals.
(1) Soil.—The soil of this region, excepting the denser woods,
is of a light brown or gray color, open and porous in texture and
usually strewn on the surface with numerous pieces of the native
rock. From its porous nature it cannot retain water, hence the
plants have adapted themselves to this condition and usually have
long roots. The absence of annuals in this region is striking.
Out of a total of about 120 species, collected by me in 1899, but
few were annuals. My collecting was confined mainly to those
places where the indigenous flora is not influenced by the opera-
tions of man. Annuals are characterized by a fibrous root system,
which is usually not very extensive. They are not, therefore,
adapted for existence in this porous soil. Two of the annuals
referred to, Bidens comosa and Erechites hieracifolia, were collected
along roadsides, where they were partially protected from the sun
and received a fair share of moisture in the rich soil of such loca-
tions. Another annual, Gerardia tenuifolia, of the dry woods, has
small and very narrow leaves, and is thus fitted for existence under
these conditions.
2) Light and Heat.—The effect of these two factors on the
distribution of plants is very marked. The elevations in this
limited area do not peceptibly influence the prevailing tempera-
ture; but as the amount of light regulates, to a greater or less ex-
tent, the degree of heat or temperature, we will consider the two
together.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 487
Light has a marked effect on the area and texture of leaves ;
while it reaches its minimum in dense woods, it attains its maxi-
mum in the open and exposed locations. Between these two ex-
tremes there are many variations and each has its peculiar plants.
In the minimum condition—that is, in dense woods—plants are
characterized by broad, thin leaves; for instance, note the leaves
of May-apple, Podophyllum peltatum; Indian turnip, Arisema
triphyllum; Punicum Porterianum; Aster Lowrieanus; Aster
macrophyllus, and others, and compare these with the same or
allied species growing in the sunlight. The first two, May-apple
and Indian turnip, decided woodland plants, when growing in the
open where woods have been recently cut off, are smaller in height
and area of leafage. In the sunlight the leaves of most grasses
and sedges are narrow, many of them are erect or placed edgewise,
so as to receive a minimum of light. Aster ericoides, Solidago
bicolor, Euthamia Caroliniana, Helianthemum majus, and others
have all comparatively small leaves. Leaves of many plants in
sunlight have protective coverings of hair or scales to prevent a
too rapid evaporation of moisture. Others, particularly plants
belonging to the Leguminose, have the power of changing their
position when the light is too strong. On a cloudy day such leaves
assume the usual position, but if the day is bright and the sun
strong they turn on edge, close up or turn directly away from
the sun.
While we notice that plants in the shade develop large leaves
and long stems and that those in the sun are retarded in their
development, we also note a tendency toward an optimum condi-
tion. Shade plants along edge of woods or around clearings in
dense forests develop to a remarkable degree and have a strong
directive tendency toward the light. Sun plants, on the other
hand, dispute the ground with them, and an intense struggle for
supremacy takes place. This battle-ground of the plants is 2om-
mon along roads in wooded districts. It is in this disputed terri-
tory of intermingling individual plants that differentiation begins
and gives place to a variety of forms of species. As we recede
from it to either extreme of light we encounter the well-marked
species, specialized for adaptation to their particular surroundings.
(3) Water.—Water or moisture considered as food of plants
has an important bearing on the development of plant life. On
"3
488 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
this ridge its presence is not at once very evident. Rock-chestnut
oak, post oak, black oak and beech, trees of rocky, sterile regions,
are everywhere found. We have reason to believe that much
moisture ascends through the porous subsoil by capillarity, enough
at least to reach the plants peculiar to this soil. The moisture ne-
cessary to support the woodland plants is conserved through the aid
of the thick covering of vegetable mould.
No streams cross the ridge, but, as described above, many take
their rise along its base. There is a little bog at the southern base
of the hil) at Willow Grove, where Terwood Run takes its rise.
The moisture here seems to ooze out from the base of the sandstone
on to the loamy soil of the flanking formation on the south.
In studying the plants of this bog, I have been impressed with
the comparatively smaller area of the leafage, and have come to
the conclusion that abundant moisture does not necessarily imply
an increased growth of leaves. A glance at the accompanying
table will show the striking difference in this respect between typi-
eal plants of the woods and those of the bog.
FOREST PLANTS. CM. Sq. Cm. BoG PLANTs. CM. Sq. CM
Agrimonia hirsuta.....-| 7 X 3.5 | 24.5 Magnolia Virginiana... 11 X45 55
Phryma Leptostachya...| 11 x 7 77 Dulichium arundinaceum 5 X .2 1
Viola pubescens ...+++00+ pe 28 1G) 64 Aletris farinosa ...0+.66- 13 X1 13
Galium triflorum..... Aull esahe-< a 3.5 | Drosera rotundifolia ....,5 xX A 2
Chimaphila maculata.... 3 X 1.5 4.5 || Asclepias rubra ........ 13 x45) 52.5
Pyrola rotundifolia..... 4.5 4.5 20.25 Scutellaria integrifolia... 25x .6 1.5
Galium lanceolatum,.... 3.5 X 1.5 5.75 | Campanula aparinoides., 2 xX .5 1
Aralia nudicaulis....0+. 18 X 7.5 97.5 | Limnodorum tuberosum. 15 xX .5 7.5
Smilax herbaced........| 7 X 5 35 | Oxypolis rigidus ......+++ Aa EE Ag 2
Deringa Canadensis..... ee ee 77 Eupatorium — verbencefo-
Sanicula Canadensis....) 7 X 3 21 HUM .csasccue eoccee| 7 X25 17.5
Panicum Porterianum.. 8 xX 2 16 Aster Nove-Belgi ..se00. 4 X 5 2
Nabalus trifoliatus......| 10 xX 7 70 | Polygala cruciata .......| 2 X 3 6
Viburnum acerifolium... 8 xX 8 64 Gyrostachys cernud.....- 1 x15 22.5
Iycopus Virginicus....., 8 X 3 24 Eriophorum Virginicum. 30 xX 3 9
Chelone glabra.....+. Sea ON amas D 31.5 || Scleria Torreyana ...... | 12 x .2 2.4
Aster Lowrieanus...... | 7 X 3.5 24.5 || Xyris fleruosa ....... mere ters Mee | 2,1
Aster macrophyllus..... 16) x2 192 Panicum sphagnicolum. 4 xX A 1.6
Podophyllum peltatum.... 15 xX 10 150 Rhyncospora glomerata .. 12 X .1 L2
Ariseema triphyllum.... 110 x 5 50 Eleocharis tuberculosa ... 10 X .02 2
Sanguinaria Canadensis. 12 X 7 84 Gentiana saponaria ..... Ay Sok 4
—-~ —-— Alsine uliginosa ...-..+6- i ee A
Total area ......sceeee.| 1136 ——-—
Total area ...ceeecccee, 198.2
Average of 21 species. ‘| 54.1 ———.
Average of 21 species .. 9.4
In making these measurements, I took the average-sized leaf—in
the case of pinnate leaves, one leaflet-—and multiplied its length by
its breadth in centimeters. The result, though not the exact area
of the leaf, is approximate enough to show comparative values.
——————E—EEE—
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 489
The average area of the leaves of the swamp plant is 9.4 sq. em.,
while that of the forest plant is 54.1 sq. cm., or a ratio of_nearly
1 to 6. ‘
Conversely, this also proves that the large leaves of the wood-
land plants are the result of a lack of light, as noted above, and
not a lack of moisture, since this element is usually present in such
localities.
It can’ also be shown by comparing typical bog plants with typi-
‘eal dry-soil plants, that the size of the leaves is not dependent
upon the amount of moisture.
Here are a few plants of each class:
7a its (X “
*Boc PLants (HyPROPHYTES). Dry-Sorn PLants (XERO
PHYTES ).
Pogonia ophioglossoides, Pogonia verticillata,
Panicum sphagnicolum, Panicum nitidum,
Seleria Torreyana, by Scleria pauciflora,
Aster Nove-Belgi, Aster ericoides,
Juncus marginatus, Juncus buffonius,
Viola cucullata, Viola communis,
Asclepias rubra, Asclepias syriacus,
Carex interior. Carex virescens.
There is practically no difference in the size or structure of the
leaves of the two groups. Many other plants of either group not
related to each other might be quoted as having features common
to both, but I have only chosen in the above list the allied species.
Asa rule, the root system of the bog plant is extensive, but it is
not more so than that of the dry-soil plant. The roots of the dry-
ground plants have further and deeper to go in order to get suffi-
cient moisture, hence their system is more extensive and much
greater than that of the bog plant. A familiar instance of this
outside of the region under discussion is that of the root systems of
the sand-binding plants of the coast sand dunes, plants which live
under rigorous xerophytic conditions.
This difference of root systems constitutes the only difference
between the bog plants and the dry-soil plants of the Willow
Grove hill. In the first, the food is abundant and close at hand,
and the system compact; in the other, the food is scarce, and the
system extended. I have therefore concluded that the swamp
490 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1900.
plants are nothing more or less than xerophytes in moist surround-
ings, oY vice versa.
(4) Wind.—Wind is an important factor in distributing plants.
Seeds of many of the plants of this region are provided with
wings or hairs by means of which they are blown considerable dis-
tances.
(5) Plants.—The rich vegetable mould of the woods and other
places support plants which cannot exist where this factor is absent.
In the woods north of the road on top of the Willow Grove hill,
the vegetation is well developed. In the deeper recesses may be
found the colorless and leafless saprophytes, Monotropa uniflora,
Hypopitys Hypopitys, Aphyllon uniflora and Leptamnium Virgin-
ianum, also the plants in table above. The change of this flora
as a result of the removal of vegetable mould may be seen a little
southeast of the above point on Huckleberry Hill. Here the
woods have been cut off, the slope is steep and the elements have
done their work too well. Vegetation is scant, and stunted second-
growth trees and shrubs give but little shade to the few clumps of
wiry grasses, sedges, huckleberries and a few other flowering plants.
Sphagnum moss in the bog supports small plants like Drosera
- rotundifolia and Polygala cruciata.
(6) Animals.—The distribution of plants is effected by insects
in aiding cross-fertilization and by birds, squirrels and other animals
in distributing seeds selected as food.
A summary of my observations shows that there is a distinct
ridge having a peculiar geological structure and a flora different
from that of the surrounding country; that perennials as a rule
are only fitted to exist in the porous soil; that the large thin leaves
of the wood plants are the result of a lack of light and not of
nourishment; that variation of species commences in the optimum
condition of light, and that the distinct forms are found in the
extremes of this element; that the abundant moisture of the bog
does not tend to develop much vegetable growth, and that the differ-
ence of structure of swamp plants and dry-soil plants is slight or
none at all; that all the factors of soil, light, heat, water, wind,
plants and animals regulate the distribution of the plants into
three well-marked societies, the first two depending on the amount
of light and the third on the amount of available moisture.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 491
SEPTEBMER 4.
Mr. CHARLES Morris in the Chair.
Seven persons present.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication:
‘* Contributions to the Ichthyology of the Tropical Pacific,’’? by
Henry W. Fowler.
«« Sonorella, a New Genus of Helices,’? by Henry A. Pilsbry.
SEPTEMBER 11.
Mr. Benzsamin SmitH Lyman in the Chair.
Six persons present.
’
A paper entitled ‘‘ The Genesis of Mid-Pacifie Faunas,’’ by
Henry A. Pilsbry, was presented for publication.
SEPTEMBER 18.
Mr. CHarztes Morris in the Chair.
‘en persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ A Partial Revision of the Pup of the
United States,’’ by Henry A. Pilsbry and Edward G. Vanatta,
was presented for publication.
SEPTEMBER 25.
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M.D., in the Chair.
Fifteen persons present.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication:
‘¢ Note on Some Post-Larval Changes in the Vertebral Articula-
tions of Spelerpes and Other Salamanders,’’ by J. Perey Moore.
492 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [190.
‘¢ An Ecological Study of the New Jersey Strand Flora,’’ by
John W. Harshberger, Ph.D.
The following were elected members:
Charles B. Lamborn, Lowndes Taylor, Helen Taylor and Emily
Hinds Thomas.
The following were ordered to be printed:
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 493
CONTRIBUTIONS TC THE ICHTHYOLOGY OF THE TROPICAL PACIFIC.
BY HENRY W. FOWLER.
T. Tat Sanpwicu IsLANDS.
Among the more important collections of fishes presented to the
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia during the earlier
days of its existence, was one made by the celebrated naturalist
and traveller, Dr. John K. Townsend, in the tropical Pacific.
In the year 1834 it seems that an expedition was formed under
the auspices of a Captain Wyeth, who intended to travel over the
United States to establish trading posts along the Pacific coast.
Dr. Townsend joined the expedition at the suggestion of Mr.
Thomas Nuttall, the distinguished botanist, who was also a mem-
ber of the party. After proceeding to Fort Vancouver, they
embarked for the Sandwich Islands, arriving in Honolulu, January
5th, 1835, and after visiting the various islands returned to the
Columbia river in April. On the first of October, 1835, Nuttall
left Townsend, who remained in the West till November, 1836,
when he again left the Columbia for the Sandwich Islands, making
Oabu in December, and after making a second tour of the islands,
he proceeded to Tahiti.
For detailed information concerning the route, reference should
be made to the account which he published in 1839, entitled
‘‘ Narrative of a Journey across the Rocky Mountains to the
Columbia River, and a visit to the Sandwich Islands, Chili, ete.’’
Subsequently Dr. William H. Jones, of the United States Navy,
was enabled to make collections in various branches of zodlogy
while in the tropical Pacific, among which was one of fishes, which
has found its way into the Academy.
Dr. Benjamin Sharp, who visited the Sandwich Islands in 1893,
made collections, mostly of invertebrates, among which was a
small collection of fishes which he purchased in the markets of
Honolulu during October or November.
All the specimens are alcoholic, except a number in the Townsend
and Nuttall collections which are dry preparations.
494 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
LEPTOCEPHALIDA.
1, Leptocephalus sp.’
No. 1,042. Thomas Nuttall. A larval specimen.
OPHICHTHYIDA.
2. Leiuranus semicinctus (Lay and Bennett).
Ophisurus semicinetus Lay and Bennett, Zool. Capt. Beechey’s
Voyage, 1839, p. 66, Pl. XX, fig. 4.
Nos. 16,477 and 16,478.
3, Myrichthys magnificus (Abbott). Plate XVIII, fig. 3.
Pisoodonophis magnifica Abbott, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1860,
p. 476.
Nos. 1,013 and 1,014. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
Types of Abbott’s Pisoddonophis magnifica.
MURASNID ZA.
4. Lycodontis eurosta (Abbott). Plate XVIII, fig. 4.
Thyrsoidea eurosta Abbott, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1860, p. 478.
No. 984. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
Type of Abbott’s Thyrsoidea eurosta.
5. Lycodontis acutirostris (Abbott). Plate XVIII, fig. 5.
Murena acutirostris Abbott, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1860, p. 476.
No. 998. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
Type of Murena acutirostris Abbott.
6. Lycodontis kaupi (Abbott). Plate XVIII, fig. 6.
Thyrsoidea Kaupti Abbott, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1860, p. 477.
No. 916. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
Type of Thyrsoidea Kaupii Abbott.
7. Lycodontis pseudothyrsoidea (Bleeker). :
Murena pseudothyrsoidea Bleeker, Natuurk, Tijdsch. voor Nederl.
Indie, Jaarg. III, 1852, p. 778.
No. 996. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
No. 16,476. Dr. W. H. Jones.
8. Lycodontis parvibranchialis sp. noy. Plate XVIII, fig. 1.
No. 16,483. Type.
The form of the body is elongate and compressed, and resembles
that of the preceding species. Mouth closing, but when closed the
lips do not conceal the sharp teeth completely, as some of these are
always visible laterally; lateral teeth of the upper jaw in 2 rows
till posterior to the eyes at least, those in the inner row somewhat
_@ *% ie
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 495
the Jarger and occasionally a canine-like form is assumed; about
9 large, fang-like teeth in the anterior portion of the upper jaw,
which has but 1 row of bordering teeth; the teeth in the lower
jaw in 2 rows which are close together and rather irregular;
this is the case in the upper jaw directly below the eye, and there
are also enlarged fang-like teeth in the anterior part of the man-
dible like those above, vomerine teeth in a single series, the median
being slightly larger than the others. The neck has the swollen
appearance of most of the Morays, and is thicker than the body.
The branchial apertures, which are very small, inconspicuous, and
which might easily be overlooked, have the cleft of the mouth con-
tained in the space between themselves and the tip of the snout
about 3 times. The eyes are rather large, contained in the
snout more than once their diameter, situated laterally, directly
above the jaws, and nearly midway between the tip of the snout
and the corners of the mouth. The anterior nostrils are placed in
fleshy tubes, the posterior pair are situated in the antero-inter-
orbital space, and midway between the eyes and the tip of the
snout are also a pair of nostril-like pores. The depth of the head
in the ocular region is greater than its width in the same region, its
general shape is moderately attenuated and compressed laterally.
The interorbital space is about equal to the diameter of the eye and
is nearly level. The D., whose origin is at a point anterior to the
branchial aperture, though not median in position in the space
between the latter point and the corner of the mouth, is of moderate
height and, like the A., is continuous with the caudal. The P.
are absent. The vent is situated about an eye-diameter in advance
of the origin of the A. Lateral line absent. The general color
of the body is a dark, rich brown, variegated with about 4 rows
of longitudinal whitish spots, all of which are not larger than the
pupil of the eye. The space intervening between the whitish
spots is marked with blackish blotches of a similar size as the
white ones, but not so sharply defined.
One small specimen.
9. Echidna zonata sp. nov. Plate XVIII, fig. 2.
No. 16,484. Type.
Form of the budy elongate, compressed, especially the caudal
region. The branchial aperture about equal to the eye, and with
the cleft of the mouth contained in the space between the foremost
496 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF {1900-
point and the tip of the snout 3 times. The snout is bluntly
obtuse, though slightly compressed laterally, and it projects beyond
the lower jaw. Eyes placed directly above the mouth, laterally,
and slightly posterior to its centre, so that they are contained
in the snout at least 14 times. Anterior nares in tubes near the
tip of the snout, posterior nares situated superior to the eye and
in the interorbital space, and with the nostril-like pores as in the
preceding species. The eyes are covered with thin skin, and are
not equal to the interorbita] space which is convex. Teeth obtuse,
molar like, in 2 series laterally in the Jower jaw; anterior teeth in
both jaws enlarged, vomerine teeth in a single series. Mouth
capable of being completely closed, so that no teeth are then
visible. Neck not much greater in depth than the rest of the
body. There are no P. Origin of the D. midway between
the tip of the snout and the branchial aperture, the fin itself
of moderate height, and like the A., confluent with the caudal.
Anus midway in the ventral region of the body and directly
in front of the origin of the A. The general color of the body
is a very pale brownish-white, pure white on both jaws anterior
to the eyes and the extremity of the caudal. Upon the light
ground color of the body are Jarge, rich umber blotches, which are
clearly and evenly defined and which extend upon the D. and A.
fins, but do not cross the abdominal region. Length about 5
inches.
10. Echidna polyzona (Richardson).
Murena polyzona Richardson, Zool. Voy. Sulphur ; Ichth., I, 1844, p.
Pl. LV es. ddeand 12.
No. 16,485.
Head anterior to the eyes, white. On the anterior half of the
body the white rings which encircle the trunk widen censiderably,
and all the region anterior to the vent is whitish; there are 27
white rings, if the snout and tip of the caudal are counted. The
tail is a little longer than the body.
ELOPIDZ.
11. Elops saurus Linnzus.
Elops saurus Linnsus, Syst. Nat., Ed. XII, 1766, p. 518.
No. 1,181. Dr. W. H. Jones.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 497
ENGRAULIDIDZ.
12. Stolephorus purpureus sp. noy. Plate XIX, fig. 1.
Nos. 23,329 and 23,330. Types. Dr. W. H. Jones.
This species is close to the Stolephorus isechanus of Jordan and
Gilbert.
Form of the body elongate and compressed, the greatest depth
of the body contained in its length without the caudal nearly 6
times and the head in the same 34 times. Head laterally com-
pressed. Eyes lateral, anterior to the centre of the head, in which
they are contained 34 times, and about equal to the snout. Mouth
Jarge, the maxillaries with their distal portion produced backwards
beyond the posterior margin of the eye equal to an eye diameter and
with their lower edges with minute teeth. Teeth in the lower jaw.
Gill-rakers numerous. The D. is inserted a little behind the base of
the V., and nearer the tip of the snout than the tip of the caudal
or as in Stolephorus ischanus midway between the anterior margin
of the eye and the base of the caudal. Radii of D. 11 and 15; of
A. 13? and 16. The origin of the A. is at a point posterior to the
base of the last D. ray. The P. are short but reach beyond the
centre of the space between their bases and the bases of the V.
Seales apparently not firm or closely adhering to the body, very
few remaining on these examples. <A broad silvery lateral bar from
the upper part of the head passes to the caudal and widens _pos-
teriorly as in Stolephorus commersonianus Lacépede. Color of the
head silvery and the silvery lateral band and remaining scales shot
with delicate purple. The caudal is faintly spotted with brown-
ish dots. Total length of both specimens about 22 inches.
SYNODONTIDZ.
13. Synodus sharpisp.noy. Plate XIX, fig. 2.
Nos. 16,084 to 16,086. Types. Dr. W. H. Jones.
This species is near Synodus evermanni of Jordan and Boll-
man. Form of the body elongate, the depth contained in the
total length without the caudal 62% to 7 times, and the head in the
same about 4 times. Head blunt, strongly compressed above and
with the interorbital space concave and equal to the diameter of
the eye. Eyes superior and anterior in the head in which they
are contained 44 to5 times. The nares are placed about midway
between the tip of the snout and the anterior margin of the eye,
498 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
the snout itself greater than the eye. Jaws equal, the teeth large
and the space between the tip of the snout and the posterior
extremity of the maxillary about 2 the length of the head. The
P. short, rounded and not equal to 4 the length of the head. The
V. large, radii 10, inserted anterior to the tip of the P., the inner-
most rays the longest, and when depressed reaching beyond the base
of the last D. ray. Origin of the D. more posterior to the tips of
the P. than the origins of the V. are anterior, the anterior rays of
the fin reaching the tips of the posterior when depressed, the radii
10, and the origin also nearer the adipose fin than the tip of the
snout. The origin of the A. nearer the origin of the V. than the
tip of the caudal. Radii of A. 9, without the first rudiment.
Base of the V. with a long flap. Caudal forked and with acute
points. Lateral line distinct, straight, but without any distinct
keel. Scales about 52. The general color is brownish, ¢arker
above, and spotted or indistinctly marbled with darker brown.
Along the sides are 9 large, well-defined dark brown blotches which
are disposed at regular intervals. All the fins and also the man-
dible are barred with brown. ‘Total length of the specimens
372;, 24 and 142 inches.
Named for Dr. Benjamin Sharp.
14, Saurida tumbil (Bloch).
Salmo tumbil Bloch, Ichthyologie, Vol. 4. pt. 11, 1797, p. 100, Pl. 430.
Nos. 7,956 and 7,957. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
MYCTOPHID 4.
15. Rhinoscopelus coruscans (Richardson).
Myctophum coruscans Richardson, Voyage of the Erebus and Terror ;
Ichth., 1844-48, p. 40, Pl. 27, figs. 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Nos. 7,972 to 7,975. Near the Sandwich‘Is!ands. Dr. W. H.
Jones.
16, Myctophum sp.’
No. 14,897." Dist. 27°" Ne? bone Per Tee ee
Jones.
HEMIRAMPHIDA.
17. Hyporhamphus sp.’
Nos. 7,507 and 23,333. Near the Sandwich Islands. Dr. W.
H. Jones.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 499
18. Hemiramphus depauperatus Lay and Bennett. Plate XIX, fig. 3.
Hemirhamphus depauperatus Lay and Bennett, Zool. Capt. Beechey’s
Voyage, 1839, p. 66.
Nos. 7,530 to 7,532. Thomas Nuttalland Dr. J. K. Townsend.
Form of the body elongate, strongly compressed, the greatest
depth contained in the total without the beak and caudal 7 to 74
times, and the head including the beak is contained in the entire
length of the fish not 3 times. The greatest depth of the head
which is in the occipital region is about 4 its length without the
beak, and the latter equals about } the length of the projecting
beak. The eye is situated in the upper anterior part of the head
and is contained in the space between its anterior margin and
the tip of the upper jaw 14 times. in the length of the head from
the latter point to the margin of the opercles 4 times, in the
greatest depth of the head about twice, and once in the flat inter-
orbital space. In all these measurements of the eye the eye is
measured horizontally, as its shape is that of a somewhat con-
tracted ellipse, and the pupil is also the same shape, and larger
than the nasal aperture, which is placed anterior to the eye and
superior in position. The internasal region is equal to the vertical
diameter of the eye. The rostral flap is produced considerably
anterior to the tip of the upper jaw. Gill-rakers numerous,
strong, the longest about equal to the pupil of the eye, but the
last are not as Jarge as the others. Branchiostegal radii about 12,
and in all the examples those on the left ceratohyal overlap those
on the right. Top of the head with pores and somewhat laterally
and above the przoperculum rugose tracts are seen. Origin of the
P. superior, on & level with the upper margin of the eye, and but
little behind the posterior margin of the branchial-aperture, about
equal to the head in length (without beak), and much longer than
the base of the D., its length contained in the space between its
origin and that of the V. twice. Radii of P. I. 10. The origins
of the V. nearer the tip of the P. than the base of the caudal and
nearer the latter than the branchial-aperture, before the origin of
the D. and reaching more than half-way in the space between
their own bases and that of the A. Radu of V. 6, rather short
and flattened, and the innermost the strongest. Nearly 4 of the
D. is anterior to the origin of the A., whose base is about 3 the
length of that of the D. The radii of the D. differ from the
D500 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
number given by Lay and Bennett, as there are 14 in all 3 of
these examples, and there are also a few small scales at the bases
of several of the foremost. As most of the rays of the fins have
been more or less damaged, it is not possible to give a comparison
of the length of the rays of the D., yet I do not think that the
second, if any longer at all than the third, was very much so, and
in 2 of the examples the last ray, which is better preserved than
some of the others, is longer than the shorter rays of the fin and
which immediately precede it. The radii of the A. vary from 12
to 14, the first the shortest, and the second and third the longest.
Caudal deeply forked, the lower lobe the longest and the rays
strenethened as in many of the other species. The rudimentary
caudal rays are flattened and the lower are much larger than the
upper. Lateral line present, running inferiorly along the ventral
region to the lower rays of the caudal and its course traversing
about 60 scales. As so many of the scales have been lost and the
specimens have been in alcohol so many years, any traces of the
color in life would naturally be supposed to have disappeared, yet
there is a bright silvery lustre about the head, and the eyes are
yellowish. Total length 13} inches, the beak measuring mostly 24
inches.
EXOCCETIDZ.
19, Parexocetus mesogaster (Bloch).
Erocetus mesogaster Bloch, Ichthyologie, Vol. 4, pt. 12, 1797, p. 12,
Ploo9:
No. 7,482. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
:20, Exocetus volitans Linnzus.
Hxocetus volitans Linnzus, Syst. Nat., Ed. X, 1758, p. 316.
No: 7,457. Dr. W. H. Jones.
AULOSTOMID&.
21. Aulostomus chinensis (Linnsus).
Fistularia chinensis Linnzus, Syst. Nat., Ed. XII, 1766, p. 515.
No. 9,763. Oahu. Dr. W. H. Jones.
MUGILID.
22. Mugil kelaartii Gunther,
Mugil kelaartii Giinther, Cat. Fish, Brit. Mus., III, 1861, p. 429.
Nos. 9,804 and 9,805. Dr. W. H. Jones.
‘Seales about 33; D. VI, I, 8; A. ILI, 9; P. extending to the
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 501
eleventh scale of the lateral line and to the origin of the D. and
shorter than the head; base of the A. not quite as long as the
longest D. ray, both fins scaly; 19 scales between the tip of the snout
and the origin of the D.; adipose eyelids broad, and the maxillary
is entirely hidden; caudal emarginate and scaly; total length 7 to
71+ inches.
SPHYRAINID A.
23. Sphyrena commersonii Cuvier and Valenciennes.
Sphyrena Commersonii Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss.,
III, 1829, p. 260.
No, 11,459. Dr. W. H. Jones.
POLYNEMIDA.
24. Polydactylus pfeifferi (Bleeker).
Polynemus Pfeifferi Bleeker, Natuurk. Tijdsch. voor Nederl. Indie,
Deel IV, (New Series I) 1853, p. 249.
Nos. 11,504 to 11,507. Dr. W. H. Jones.
HOLOCENTRIDZ.
25. Myripristis murdjan (Forskal).
Sciena murdjan Forskal, Descript. Animal., 1775, p. 48.
No. 17,122. (Dried skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
No. 22,947. Honolulu. Dr. Benjamin Sharp.
26. Holocentrus diadema Lacépéde.
Holocentrus diadema Lacépeéde, Hist. Nat. Poiss., III, 1801, Pl. 32, fig.
4; IV, 1801, pp. 372 and 374.
No. 17,125. (Dried skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
27. Holocentrus diploxiphus Giinther.
Holocentrum diploxiphus Gimther, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1871, p.
660.
Nos. 17,124and 17,126. (Driedskins.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
CARANGIDA.
28. Trachurops crumenophthalmus (Bloch).
Scomber crumenophthalmus Bloch, Ichthyologie, Vol. 4, pt. 10, 1797,
p. 65, Pl. 343.
Wor 1280 and 11,281. Dr. W. H. Jones.
29. Caranx latus Agassiz,
Caranz latus Agassiz, Genera et species Pisci. Brasiliam, 1829, p. 105,
tab. LVIO., fig. 1.
Nos. 22,948 and 22,949. Honolulu. Dr. Benjamin Sharp.
33
502 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
EQUULIDA.
30. Equula sp.?
No. 15,231. “Dr. °W. H. Jones.
KUHLIDA.
31. Kuhlia malo (Cuvier and Valenciennes).
Dules malo Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., VII, 1831, p.
360.
No. 17,099. (Dried skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
Nos. 22,922 and 22,923. Dr. Benjamin Sharp.
CHEILODIPTERIDA.
32. Apogon sp.?
Nos. 13,434 to 13,487. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
SERRANIDZE.
33. Epinephelus fuscoguttatus (Forskal).
Perca summara, var. Pusco-guttata, Forskal, Descript. Animal, 1775,
p. 42.
No. 13,463. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
LUTIANID.
34. Aprion microlepis (Bleeker).
Chaetopterus microlepis Bleeker, Versl. Mededeel. Konink. Akad-
Wetensch., Tweede Reeks, Derde Deel, 1869, p. 80.
No. 13,290. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
SPARIDZ.
35. Sparosomus unicolor (Quoy and Gaimard).
Chrysophrys unicolor Quoy and Gaimard, Voyage de l’Uranie, Zool.,
1824, p. 299.
No. 12,326. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
CIRRHITIDZ.
86. Cirrhites forsteri (Bloch and Schneider),
Grammistes Forsteri Bloch and Schneider, Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 191.
No. 12,220. Dr. J. K. Townsend. :
No. 17,253. (Dried skin.) Thomas Nuttall.
No. 17,254. (Dried skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
Nos. 22,944 to 22,946. Honelulu. Dr. Benjamin Sharp.
ee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 503
POMACENTRIDA.
37. Tetradrachmum trimaculatum (Rippell).
Pomacentrus trimaculatus Rippell, Atlas zu der Reise im Nordl.
Afrika, 1828, p. 39, taf. 8, fig. 3
Nos. 9,615 to 9,618. a Nuttall.
No. 9,619. Oahu. r. W. H. Jones.
38. See adencontens nigricans (Lacépéde).
Holocentrus nigricans Lacépede, Hist. Nat. Poiss., IV, 1801, pp. 332,
367 and 370.
Nos. 9,661 and 9,662. Oahu. Dr. W. H. Jones.
Form of the body short, much compressed, and the greatest
depth contained in the total length, without caudal, about 14 times.
The head is small, contained in the body, without caudal, 34
times and in the greatest depth of the body a little over twice.
Eye placed superior and anterior to the centre of the head in which
it is contained 3 times. The eye is also a little smaller than
the interorbital space, which is strongly convex and contained itself
24 times in the head. Nostrils placed anterior to the eye to which
they are nearer than the tip of the snout, though they are a little
below the level of the pupil. The orbitals are broad, though none
attain a breadth equal to the diameter of the eye, those situated
postero-inferiorly with the lower margin with very distinct denti-
culations and equal to at least 4 the breadth of the przorbitals.
Lips and jaws naked, without any scales. Mouth small, reaching
as far as the anterior margin of the eye. Teeth compressed and
in a single band-like series. The przeoperculum slopes forward,
the posterior margin denticulate and the lower margin smooth, and
the angle would be formed anterior to the posterior margin of the
eye in ithe vertical and also a little below the base of the upper-
most P. rays. The operculum is furnished superiorly with.2 small
spinous processes along the posterior edge. The profile-line of the
head from the snout to the origin of the D. is convex, though
compressed in the occipital region. The origin of the D. is ata
point directly over that of the P. and both are posterior to the
posterior opercular margins; radii XIII, 17, the median branched
rays produced, much higher than the spinous part of the fin, the
base of the posterior ray more posterior in position than the same
of the A. and with the result that the tip of the former approaches
nearer the tip of the caudal than the latter. Upper part of the
504 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
base of the P. nearly level with the mouth, radii 20, not extend-
ing so far posteriorly as the V. and about equal to the length of the
head. Origin of the V. posterior to the same of the P., radii I,
5, and the first ray with a filament-like point which reaches the
anus. Origin of the A. below that of the soft D., radii II, 14,
the soft part of the fin similar to the soft D., and the first spine
greatly inferior to the second in size. Body covered with scales,
except the lips, jaws and the edges of the D., A. and caudal, and
also the greater part of the P. and all of the V. The P. without
scaly flap, though several of the scales above its base are enlarged,
and the scales on the base of the fin itself minute. The V. are
furnished with scaly flaps and there is also one between their bases.
The scales along the base of the unpaired fins, with the exception
of those at the base of the spinous D., which are as large as those
on the sides of the body, are all very smal] and extend over the
greater part of the fins. There is a line of demarcation between
the bases of these fins showing where the fin-rays articulate with
the interneural and interhzemal spines. Caudal deeply emarginate
and the upper lobe a little longer than the lower. The lateral line
is strongly arched and not extending as far posteriorly as the last
A. ray. Scales about 32, tubes 20. The caudal peduncle is
rather strong and much compressed, and its depth is more than 4
the length of the head. In alcohol these specimens are dark
brownish with the bases of the soft D. and A., and also the cau-
dal, spotted. The P. shows faint traces of spots or blotches.
Entire length about 4+ inches.
39. Abudefduf sordidus (Forskal).
Chetodon sordidus Forskal, Descript. Animal. , 1775, p. 62.
No. 9,606. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
No. 9,618. Oahu. Dr. W. H. Jones.
No. 17,214. (Dried skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
40. Abudefduf sexfasciatus (Lacépéde).?
Labrus sexfasciatus Lacépéde, Hist. Nat. Poiss., III, 1801, pp. 430 and
477, Pl. 19, fig. 2.
Nos. 9,604 and 9,605. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
No. 15,228. Oahu. Dr. W. H. Jones.
41. Abudefduf limbatus (Cuvier and Valenciennes).
Glyphisodon limbatus Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., V,
1830, p. 357.
No. 17,215. (Dry skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 505
The form of the body somewhat ellipsoid, compressed, the
snout not conspicuously or abruptly blunt and with the greatest
depth of the body contained in its length without the caudal
twice. The head is contained in the body without caudal 355
times, and the head is about equal to 4 the greatest depth of the
body. The eye is superior and anterior in position, a little over
3 in the head and its diameter greater than thesnout. Nostril very
near the front margin of the eye and slightly inferior to its centre.
Orbitals broad, none equal to the eye, the anterior the deepest
and about equal to the eye and the margin of the preoperculum
is distant from the posterior margin of the eye about the same.
Mouth small, most likely reaching to the front of the eye when
closed. The orbitals are furnished with a single series of scales
below the eyes, but they do not reach as far as the anterior margin
of the eye. The margin of the przoperculum is inclined for-
wards and the angle would form below the posterior margin of the
eve in the vertical. here are four series of scales on the cheeks.
‘The snout, lips and chin are naked. ‘Teeth long, narrow, in a
single series and with the apical portion slightly serrate. Origins
of both the V. and P. in advance of the D., the former furnished
with a scaly flap and the P. with the scales enlarged above its base.
The basal third of the P. covered with minute scales, the radii
of the fin about 20, the radii of the V. I, 4, the first soft ray pro-
duced (the tip of which is broken) and reaching for about 4 the
distance from its base te the origin of the A., and entirely destitute
of scales. The spinous D. much longer than the soft D., but not
equal to the latter in height, radii XII, 18, the first spine the shortest,
the next longer and all the rest stili longer and about equal. The
base of the D. is covered with scales, those on the spinous D. larger
and entirely covering the basal half of that portion of the fin, while
those on the soft D. are rather minute. Origin of the A. below
the last D. spine, radii I!, 15, the soft part of the fin similar to
the soft D. and also covered with minute scales though there are
some large ones anteriorly. Caudal peduncle broad and com-
pressed. Last ray of D. not reaching as far posteriorly as the last
A. ray. Caudal deeply emarginate, the upner lobe the longest and
the basal part covered with minute scales. Lateral line not paral-
lel with the dorsal outline of the back, puncturing 21 scales and
stopping considerably short of the terminal branched D. rays in the
506 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
vertical. Scales, about 30, in a lateral series to the base of the
caudal, and 3 scales between the lateral line and the profile-line of
the back at the articulations of the interneural and D. rays. Total
length 44 inches.
LABRIDZ.
42. Anampses ceruleopunctatus Riippell.
Anampses ceruleopunetatus Riippell, Atlas zu der Reise im Nordl.
Afrika, 1828, p. 42, taf. 10, fig. 1
Nos. 9,622 and 9,623. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
43. Anampses cuvieri Quoy and Gaimard.
Anampses Cuvier Quoy and Gaimard, Voyage de l’Uranie, Zool., 1824,
Pp» 2”6,)Pl. 55; fig. a
No. 9,624. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
Nos. 17,197,.17;198 and 17,212. (Dried skins.) Dr. J. EK.
Townsend.
Form of the body oblong, compressed, the greatest depth con-
tained in the total length exclusive of the caudal about 24 times
and the head in the same, excluding the opercular flap 53 times.
The head has a rhomboid appearance, due to the produced opercu-
lar flap which is not as long as the diameter of the eye. The eye
is situated in the upper anterior part of the head in which it is
contained, exclusive of the opercular flap, a trifle over 4 times, in
the snout about 14 times, and in the interorbital space the same.
The angle formed by the snout would not be a right one. The
upper profile is concave in front of the interorbital space, then
straight to the occiput after which it is convex to the origin of
the D. ‘The nostrils are placed anterior to the eye and not an
eye diameter distant, the anterior a little lower than the posterior
pair which are placed about midway in the space between the
anterior pair and the anterior margin of the eye. The przorbital
greater than the diameter of the eye, and the infraorbitals barely 4
the diameter of the eye, both are unevenly striated. Mouth pro-
tractile, capable of considerable distension, furnished with 4 con-
spicuous projecting compressed teeth which are turned forwards
and provided with a grinding edge; there are two teeth in each
jaw, the lower pair are closer together than the upper and fit in
between the latter when the jaws are closed. The corners of the
closed mouth fall a little posterior to the anterior nostrils in the
vertical. The lips are well developed and fleshy. The preoper-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 507
culum, operculum, suboperculum and the interoperculum striated.
The entire head is naked, the snout, interorbital and cranial regions
have the skin finely roughened, the cheeks smooth. The angle of
the preoperculum, which would be an obtuse one, falls below the
posterior margin of the eye. Branchial aperture moderate, gill-
membranes united to the isthmus, gill-slits small and the gill-rakers
also small and short. Pseudobranchize developed. Origin of the
D. in advance of that of the P., which is in advance of the ori-
gin of the V., about over the posterior margin of the opereulum
(the flap excluded). The D. spines are firm, the first the shortest,
the next larger, and the third longer and together with the others
about equal, though none are as high as the highest soft rays. The
P. shorter than the head, though longer than the V., which are
attenuated, having their first rays reaching the anus, and they
have the basal portion of the innermost ray connected with the
body by a membrane. The origin of the A. falls below the first
ray of the soft D., and also the tip of the P. which reaches that
“far posteriorly. The A. spines are much shorter than any of the
rays of the fin, and they are graduated from the first, which is the
smallest, to the third. The soft A. rays of nearly equal height,
though the terminal one is the shortest and not situated as far pos-
teriorly as the last soft D. ray, yet both reach the base of the
caudal. No scales along the bases of any of the fins except some
at the base of the caudal, which are very fine. The lateral line is
not absolutely parallel with the dorsal outline of the back, travers-
ing about 20 scales in the form of single tubes, when it decurves
and runs along the sides of the caudal peduncle to the base of
the caudal. Lach scale is furnished with a small rounded whitish
spot. The D. and A., together with the head, are also furnished
with similar spots, and on the former there are several longitu-
dinal lines. All the spots of the dorsal region of the body much
smaller than those on the sides and the scales being also smaller
they appear to form longitudinal bands. ‘The measurements, fin
formulz, scales, etc., as follows:
No. 9,624. No. 17,197. No. 17,198. No. 17,212.
Total length.......... 522 in. 4,5 in. isin. 83 in.
CLT ES a ee a 29? 29 27 28
MRA GE TN: conc ajo oocars IX, 12 IX, 12 IX, 12 IX, 12
EMPVIGE (As nw as wo, 0.5: III, 12 ITI, 12 III, 12 III, 12
Madivot Bs yee. 2. ke. I, 12 I, 12 I, 12 1
FEST OF \ BRA poeereeneicic 5 5 5 5
508 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
44, Stethojulis albovittata (Lacépéde).
Labrus albovittatus Lacépede, Hist. Nat. Poiss., III, 1801, pp. 443 and
509.
Nos. 9,415 and 9,418. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
45. Stethojulis axillaris (Quoy and Gaimard).
. Julis axillaris Quoy and Gaimard, Voyage de ]’Uranie, Zool., 1824,
p. 272.
Nos. 9,407 to 9,414. Oahu. Dr. W. H. Jones.
Nos. 9,419 to 9,420. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
46. Macropharyngodon geoffroyi (Quoy and Gaimard).
Julis Geoffroy Quoy and Gaimard, Voyage de 1’ Uranie, Zool., 1824, p.
270.
No. 17,196. (Dried skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
47. Hemipteronotus copei sp.noy. Plate XX, fig. I.
No. 521. Type. Oahu, Dr. W. H. Jones.
Form of the body elongated, much compressed, deepest in the
pectoral region, from which it diminishes backwards to the caudal.
The greatest depth is contained in the total length, without caudal,
3 times. The head is elevated, 3% times in the total length, with-
out caudal, much compressed, snout not produced and the anterior
profile very parabolic though slightly convex. Lower profile line
of the head a very slightly inclined oblique line. The eye is
situated in the upper part of the head, nearly median in its
length, about once its diameter from the occiput, contained in the
greatest depth of the head about 64 times, contained in the space
between its anterior margin and the tip of the upper jaw 3 times,
contained in the total length of the head 61 times and it is also
equal to the interorbital space. The interorbital space is convex
and greatly produced. The nares are small, both very close
together, the anterior pair about an eye diameter from the anterior
margin of the eye. The prorbital is very long and broad, the
infraorbitals narrow and about equal to half an eye diameter.
Mouth narrow, the distal extremity of the maxillary below the
anterior margin of the eye in the vertical. Teeth strong, the
outer lateral teeth larger than the others except the canines which
are in two pairs on the anterior portions of the jaws, those in the
lower jaw closer together than the upper pair and fitting in between
the latter when the mouth is closed. The lips are large and fleshy,
those on the sides of the lower jaw forming 2 thin flaps. Mouth
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 509
beiow the upper basal portion of the P. The angle of the przo-
perculum is a very obtuse one, and would form very little posterior
to the posterior margin of the eye. The opercular bones, which
shiéld the branchial aperture, have their lower and posterior mar-
gins furnished with membraneous flaps. The gill-membranes are
very thick and tough, though they are not connected with the
isthmus., Gill-rakers moderate. Pseudobranchize developed.
The head is naked, except a series of 6 scales, which descend
obliquely forwards from the postorbitals, though not extending
anterior to the centre of the eye in the vertical. There are also 2
scales, anterior and superior, on the upper margin of the opercu-
lum. The origin of the D. is at a point a trifle posterior to the
median vertical keel of the przeoperculum. ‘The first radii of the
D. are developed as 2 pungent spines, the tip of the first ending
in a short filament, and about the same height as the spines which
succeed them and which are rather strong and firm and not at all
pungent. The branched rays of the D. are longer than the spines
‘and the terminal ray, when depressed, reaches the base of the
caudal. D. I, VII, 12. Origin of the A. below the first D.
ray and the terminal ray is produced like the same of the D., so
that when it is depressed it also reaches the base of the caudal.
Spines of the A. short, graduated from the first to the third, which
is the longest, and the radii of the fin III, 12. Base of the last
A. ray slightly posterior to that of the soft D. The P. is con-
tained 1# times in the head, radii of the fin I, 11, and their origins
are below the centre of the body and above the origin of the V.
Innermost ventral ray joined to the body by a membrane and the
tips of the fin do not reach the origin of the A. though they
extend beyond the tips of the P. The lateral line with 24 single
tubes, the greater portion parallel with the dorsal outline of the
back from which it is distant a scale’s breadth, interrupted after
traversing 20 scales, then appearing on the caudal peduncle in a
medio-lateral position and continuing to the base of the caudal.
There are 26 scales in a lateral series from the operculum to the
base of the caudal. Caudal rounded. <A narrow bluish band from
the lower anterior portion of the eye running downwards to behind
the corner of the mouth, parallel with this are other vertical lines
running from the eye and the upper part of the head, one on the
preoperculum is broad and the opercles are furnished with narrow
510 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
lines on their posterior portion. General color dull brownish, the
fins immaculate. Total length 74 inches.
Named for Prof. E. D. Cope.
48. Thalassoma aneitensis (Giinther).
Julis aneitensis Ginther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., IV, 1862, p. 183.
Nos. 9,431 to 9,484. Oahu. Dr. W. H. Jones.
49. Thalassoma hebraica (Lacépéde).
Labrus Hebraicus Lacépede, Hist. Nat. Poiss., III, 1801, pp. 455 and
526, Pl. 29, fig. 3.
No. 9,426. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
No. 17,201. (Dry skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
50. Thalassoma purpurea (Forskal).
Scarus purpureus Forskal, Descript. Animal., 1775, p. 27.
Nos. 17,199 and 17,202. (Dried skins.) Dr. J. K. Town-
send. ;
No. 17,200 (Dry skin.) Thomas Nuttall.
51. Halicheres sp.’
No. 17,195. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
52. Gomphosus tricolor Quoy and Gaimard.
Gomphosus tricolor Quoy and Gaimard, Voyage de 1’Uranie, Zool.,
1824, p. 280, Pl. 55, fig. 2.
No. 9,406. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
No. 17,213. (Dry skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
53. Gomphosus varius Lacépéde.
Gomphosus varius Lacépede, Hist. Nat. Poiss., III, 1801, pp. 100 and
104, Pl. 5, fig. 2.
Nos. 9,404 and 9,405. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
54. Coris gaimardi (Quoy and Gaimard).
Julis Gaimard Quoy and Gaimard, Voyage de l’Uranie, Zool., 1824, p.
265, Pl. 54, fig. 1.
No. 9,330. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
No. 17,203. (Dried skin.) Thomas Nuttall.
55. Coris aygula Lacépéde.
Coris aygula Lacépede, Hist. Nat. Poiss., III, 1801, p. 96, Pl. 4, fig. 1.
Nos. 9,331 and 9,332. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
No. 17,207. (Dried skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
The form of the body is elongate, the depth is contained in the
total length about 4¢ times and the head in the same 44 times.
The anterior profile of the head is in the form of an isosceles trian-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Sif
gle. The eye is placed anterior and superior in the head, about
equal to the preorbital, which is broad and contained in the head
about 42 times and is also about equal to the interorbital space.
The depth of the head is contained 1? in its length, and the P.
about the same. Nostrils small and anterior to the eye. Four
canines in the anterior part of each jaw, the two median lower
ones fitting in between the upper pair, both of these median pairs
inclined and considerably larger than the others, which are nearly
vertical. Remaining teeth diminish in size as they approach the
corners of the mouth. Lips rather thick. The head is furnished
with pores on the preoperculum and there is also a rather imperfect
circumorbital system. The posterior margin of the operculum is
produced into a fleshy flap which is a trifle less than the diameter
of the eye. The origin of the D. falls a little behind the origins
of the P. and V. Radii of D. TX, 12, the spines much shorter
than the rays, the first the shortest and the last spine the tongest,
soft rays equal and the terminal like the same of the A. reach to
the base of the caudal. Origin of the A. nearly below the last
D. spine, the radii III, 12, the first spine the shortest and the
third the longest, but more equal to the soft rays. The V. not so
long as the P., radii of the former I, 5, avd of the latter I, 11.
Scales in the posteriorly decurved lateral line about 50. Scales of
the occipital region small. Caudal rounded. Opercular flap with
a black posterior marginal spot. Base of the soft D. with brown-
ish spots and the bases of the terminal rays with a distinct blackish
ocellus. Total length of the alcoholic specimens about 54 inches.
56. Coris flavovittata (Bennett).
Julis flavo-vittatus Bennett, Zoological Journal, IV, 1829, p. 36.
No. 9,333. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
No. 17,208. (Dried skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
57. Cheilio inermis (Forskal),
Labrus inermis Forskal, Descript. Animal., 1775, p. 34.
Nee Grati. Dr: J. K: Townsend.
Nos. 93312-14. Oahu. Dr. W. H. Jones.
SCARIDA.
58. Scarichthys auritus (Cuvier and Valenciennes).
Scarus auritus Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., XIV, 1839,
p- 161
No. 486. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
5 4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
59, Cryptotomus sandwicensis (Cuvier and Valenciennes),
Callyodon sandwicensis Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss.,
XTV, 1839, p. 219.
Nos. 9,316 and 9,317. Dr. Jj. K. Townsend.
60. Scarus oviceps Cuvier and Valenciennes,
Scarus oviceps Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., XIV, 1839,
p. 181.
Nos. 9,277 and 9,278. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
CHAITODONTID 2.
61. Forcipiger longirostris (Cuvier and Valenciennes).
Chetodon longirostris Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., VII,
1831, p: 67, .Pl; 175,
No. 28,324. (Dry Skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
62. Chetodon miliaris Quoy and Gaimard.
Chetodon miliaris Quoy and Gaimard, Voyage de l’Uranie, Zool., 1824,
p- 380, Pl. 62, fig. 6.
Nos. 12,299 and 12,300. Oahu. Dr. W. H. Jones.
No. 17,257. (Dry skin.) Thomas Nuttall.
No. 17,258. (Dry skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
63. Chetodon setifer Bloch.
Chatodon setifer Bloch, Ichthyologie, Vol. 4, pt. 12, 1797, p. 99, Pl.
426, fig. 1.
No. 12,295. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
64. Chetodon biocellatus Cuvier and Valenciennes.
Chetodon biocellatus Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., VII,
1831, p. 48.
No. 12,296. Oahu. Dr. W. H. Jones.
No. 17,263. (Dry skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
65. Chetodon unimaculatus Bloch.
Chetodon unimaculatus Bloch, Ichthyologie, Vol. 2, pt. 6, 1788, p. 54,
PI 20k ties ae
No. 17,176. (Dry skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
66. Chetodon quadrimaculatus Gray.
Chetodon 4-maculatus Gray, Zoological Miscellany, 1831-42, p. 33.
Chetodon quadrimaculatus Ginther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., I, 1860,
p. 12.
Nos. 12,297 and 12,298. Oahu. Dr. W. H. Jones.
No. 17,175. (Dry skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
2
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 515
67. Chetodon ornatissimus Cuvier and Valenciennes.
Chetodon ornatissimus Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss.,
VIL, 1831, p. 22.
No. 17,259. (Dry skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
68. Chetodon tau-nigrum Cuvier and Valenciennes.
Chetodon tau-nigrum Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., VII,
1831, p. 29.
Wo. 12,292. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
ZANCLIDA.
69. Zanclus cornutus (Linnzus).
Chetodon cornutus Linnus, Syst. Nat., Ed. X, 1758, p. 273.
Nos. 11,059 and 11,060. Dr. W. H. Jones.
No. 17,174. (Dry skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
THUTHIDIDA.
70. Monoceros unicornis (Forskal).
Chatodon unicornis Forskil, Descript. Animal., 1775, p. 63.
Nos. 9,768 and 9,769. Oahu. Dr. W. H. Jones.
Nos. 10,337 to 10,339. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
No. 17,285. (Dry skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
No. 17,286. (Dry skin.) Thomas Nuttall.
71. Teuthis triostegus (Linn:eus).
Chetodon triostegus Linneus, Syst. Nat., Ed. X, 1758, fig. 270.
Nos. 10,295 and 10,296. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
Nos. 10,297 to 10,313. Oahu. Dr. W. H. Jones.
No. 17,277. (Dry skin.) Thomas Nuttall.
72. Teuthis guttatus (Bloch and Schneider).
Acanthurus Guttatus Bloch and Schneider, Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 215.
No. 17,279. (Dy skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
73. Teuthis annularis (Cuvier and Valenciennes).
Acanthurus annularis Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., X,
1835, p. 153.
Nos. 10,327 to 10,331. Oahu. Dr. W. H. Jones.
Nos. 10,333 to 10,336. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
74. Teuthis achilles (Shaw).
Acanthurus Achilles Shaw, General Zoology, IV, 1803, p. 383.
Nos. 10,319 to 10,321. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
No. 17,280. Dr. J. K. Townsend. brane
514 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
BALISTIDA.
75. Balistapus bursa (Bloch and Schneider).
Balistes Bursa Bloch and Schneider, Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 476.
No. 16,472. | Dr. W. H. Jones.
76. Balistapus rectangulus (Bloch and Schneider).
Balistes Rectangulus Bloch and Schneider, Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 465.
No. 790. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
77. Canthidermis oculatus (Gray).
Balistes oculatus Gray, Illustrations of Indian Zool., I, 1830-32, Pl. 90,
figs. 1 and 1a.
Nos. 802 and 803. Dr. J K. Townsend.
MONACANTHIDA.
78. Cantherines sandwichiensis (Quoy and Gaimard).
Balistes sandwichiensis Quoy and Gaimard, Voyage de l’Uranie, Zool.,
1824, p. 214.
No. 1,032. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
79. Monacanthus spilosoma Lay and Bennet.
Monacanthus Spilosoma Lay and Bennett, Zool. Capt. Beechey’s Voy-
age, 1839, p. 70, Pl. XX, fig. 4.
No. 17,309. (Dried skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
TETRAODONTID&.
80. Spheroides florealis (Cope). Plate XX, fig. 4,
Tetrodon florealis Cope, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc., (new ser.) XIV,
1871, p. 479.
Nos. 1,109 and 1,110. Types of Tetrodon florealis Cope. Dr.
J. K. Townsend.
No. 17,386. (Dried skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend. .
MOLID 2.
81. Ranzania makua Jenkins,
Ranzania makua Jenkins, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., (2) V, 1595, Colored
frontispiece, p. 779.
No. 17,369. (Fine dried skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
It is interesting to observe that this specimen was taken nearly
sixty years before the one described by Dr. Jenkins, and even
yet it shows well-preserved traces of its once brilliant colors. The
markings of the head are especially distinct, and are in the form
of somewhat irregular crescents, with the convex side bending
anteriorly. Three of these markings radiate from the inferior
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 515
margin of the eye, though there is 1 anterior to these and more
horizontal, and they all become more vertical posteriorly. There
are also 2 broad vertical bars between the eye and the P. On the
sides of the head below and somewhat posterior to the eyes and
anterior to the base of the P. are a number of blackish spots
which are distributed over the bands. P. 13; D. 19; A. 20;
Caudal 22. Total length of the body without the caudal 18%
inches.
SCORPAENID A.
82. Sebastopsis guamensis (Quoy and Gaimard),
Scorpena guamensis Quoy and Gaimard, Voyage de l’Uranie, Zool.,
1824, p. 326.
No. 12,207. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
83. Sebastopistes strongia (Cuvier and Valenciennes).
Scorpena strongia Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., IV,
1829, p. 237.
No. 12,206. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
This poorly preserved specimen has the following fin formula:
D0 AL a 5; P) 162 V. 1, 5.
84. Scorpenenopsis diabolus (Cuvier and Valenciennes).
Scorpena diabolus Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., IV,
1829, p. 229.
No. 17,165. (Dried skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
CARACANTHID 2.
85. Caracanthus maculatus (Gray). Plate XX, fig. 5.
Micropus maculatus Gray, Zoological Miscellany, 1831-42, p. 20.
No. 23,048. Honolulu. Dr. Benjamin Sharp.
Head and body greatly compressed, the greatest depth of the
latter about 14 in its length without the caudal. Upper profile of
the head somewhat parabolic. Eye over once in the snout, greater
than the interorbital space and about 34 in the head without the
opercular flap. Head 24 in the body without the caudal. Nares
well developed, the posterior pair the largest. Mouth rather broad,
horizontal, when closed the jaws are equal and also furnished with
small teeth. Lips moderately developed. The maxillary, which
is very oblique, extends posteriorly for 4 of the diameter of the
eye. The preorbital is armed with a broad sharp spine projecting
obliquely downwards parallel with the maxillary. The inter-
516 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
operculum is armed with a spine and the preoperculum has 5
curved spines along its posterior margin, the lower the largest.
On the upper posterior part of the operculum are 2 broad flattened
spines. The top of the head and the interorbital space is vil-
losely osseous and over the eyes are 2 Jarger ossifications. The
branchial aperture is moderate, lateral in position, and the gill-mem-
branes are joined to the isthmus which is large and fleshy. Gill-
rakers moderate, most numerous posteriorly. _Pseudobranchiz well
developed. No slit after the last gill-arch. Origin of the D. over
the tips of the opercular spines, a little before that of the P., and
the fin is divided, the spinous portion with VIII spines and the soft
portion with 12 rays the last of which is adnate, along its posterior
margin to the caudal peduncle by a membrane. The third D.
spine is the longest and the second is longer than the seventh and
eighth, while the soft rays are more even, those anteriorly the
longest, and the rays gradually become shorter posteriorly. P. with
VIII simple and 5 branched rays. V. more or less rudimentary
radii I, 3. A. spines II, isolated from the soft rays of the fin
which are 12, and the last is adnate to the caudal peduncle by a
membrane. The 2 spines of the A. are a little pusterior to the
origin of the soft D. The lateral line is conspicuous and runs from
above the branchial aperture to the base of the caudal. Body
naked, papillose. Caudal small and rounded. Color in alcohol —
brownish, much darker above and with numerous small round
whitish spots. Total length 14 inches.
CEPHALACANTHID A.
86. Cephalacanthus orientalis (Cuvier and Valenciennes).
Dactylopterus orientalis Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss.,
IV, 1829, p. 98; Pl. 76.
No. 11,648. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
No. 17,067. (Dried skin.) Dr. J. K. Townsend.
Nos. 25,351 and 23,852. Dr. W. H. Jones.
GOBIID2.
87. Eleotris fuscus (Bloch and Schneider).
Pecilia Fusca Bloch and Schneider, Syst. Iehth., 1801, p. 453.
Nos. 22,924 to 22,943. Honolulu. Dr. Benjamin Sharp.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 517
88. Gobius albopunctatus Cuvier and Valenciennes.
Gobius albopunctatus Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., XII,
1837, p. 48.
No. 10,703. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
89. Gobius papuensis Cuvier and Valenciennes.
Gobius Papuensis Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss. , XII, 1837,
p. 80
No. 23,350. Dr. Benjamin Sharp.
90. Gobius sp.?
Nos. 23,345 to 23,348. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
More than one species may be included here, but the specimens
‘are so poorly preserved that I have not attempted to identify them.
91. Awaous genivittatus (Cuvier and Valenciennes).
Gobius genivittatus Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., XII,
1837, p. 48.
No. 10,746 and 10,747. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
92. Awaous crassilabris (Ginther). ;
Gobius crassilabris Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., III, 1861, p. 63.
Nos. 10,744 and 10,745. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
ECHENEIDID 2.
98. Remora albescens (Temminck and Schlegel).
Echeneis albescens Temminck and Schlegel, Fauna Japonica, Poiss.,
1842, p. 272, Pl. 120, fig. 3.
No. 11,413. Thomas Nutiall.
BLENNID.
94. Petroskirtes filamentosus (Cuvier and Valenciennes).
Blennechis filamentosus Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., XI,
1836, p. 206, Pls. 325, 326, lower fig.
No. 16,665. Dr. W. H. Jones.
95. Salarias edentulus (Bloch and Schneider).
Blennius Edentulus Bloch and Schneiler, Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 172.
No. 10,489. Dr. W. H. Jones.
96. Salarias gibbifrons Quoy and Gaimard.
Salarias gibbifrons Quoy and Gaimard, Voyage de l’Uranie, Zool.,
1824, p. 253.
No. 10,492. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
In this specimen the A. is marked with a number of spots.
3B4
518 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
97. Salarias variolosus Cuvier and Valenciennes.
Salarias variolosus Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., XI,
1836, p. 235.
No. 10,493. Dr. W. H. Jones.
? No. 10,494. Thomas Nuttall.
Nuttall’s specimen is very badly preserved.
98. Salarias brevis Kner.
Salarias brevis Kner, Sitzungb. Akad. Wissensch. Wien., LVIII, 1868,
p. 334, taf..6, fig. 18.
No. 10,495. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
BROTULIDAS.
99. Brotula townsendi sp. nov. Plate XX, fig. 3.
No. 8,981. Type. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
Form of the body elongate, the greatest depth a trifle over 5
in the total length. The head is compressed, and including the
opercular flap is contained in the total length about 5 times. The
eyes are anterior and high in the head, small, contained in the head
with opercular flap nearly 8 times, in the interorbital space 14 times
and nearly 2 in the snout. Mouth rather large and prominent and
with the lower jaw projecting. Lips large, thick and fleshy, there
are 4 superior buccal barbels of about equal length and 6 inferior
mandibular ones which are longer than the former. The anterior
nares which are near the posterior pair are furnished with a pair of
barbels which are also larger than the rest of the upper ones. The
anterior nares are about an eye diameter from the eyes, and their
aperture is smaller than that of the posterior pair. Teeth of the jaws,
vomer and palatines, small and in many series forming broad and
well-defined patches. The maxillary is oblique, very broad at the
distal extremity, reaching beyond the posterior margin of the eye,
and its width at that point is equal to the length of the snout.
The supplemental maxillary is well developed thus accounting for
its broad distal extremity. The maxillaries themselves are more
or less partly concealed by the orbital flap of skin. The branchial
aperture is large, the gill-membranes joined to each other and
crossing the isthmus but not joined to it. No pseudobranchiz.
Gill-rakers as long as the eye and aslit after the last gill-arch.
On the superior and anterior part of the operculum is a partly
erectile spine directed backwards, which is about as long as
the eye. The V., which are bifid, are jugular in position, and
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 519
their origin is not quite an eye diameter posterior to the distal
extremity of the maxillary, and their tips extend posteriorly as
far as the tips of the P., which is about half-way between the base
of the P. and the anus. The origin of the P. is anterior to that
of the D., and the fin is contained nearly twice in the head. The
D., A.-and caudal are continuous, the latter terminating in a
point. D. A. and caudal 176? Body covered with small cycloid
scales, about 96 in the lateral line. The lateral line is dorsal in
position and nearly parallel with the dorsal outline of the body
throughout its whole course. General color uniform brownish.
Total length 5 inches.
Named for Dr. J. K. Townsend.
ANTENNARIDA.
100. Antennarius commersonii (Lacépéde).
Lophius commersonit Lacépede, Hist. Nat. Poiss., I, 1801, p. 327.
Nos. 10,648 and 10,649. Thomas Nuttall and Dr. J. K.
Townsend. ;
101. Antennarius sp.?
No. 10,647. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
Specimen badly preserved.
Il, Tawrrt.
The collections illustrating the ichthyology of this region, in the
Academy, are those made by Dr. J. K. Townsend and Mr.
Andrew Garrett. Dr. Townsend’s collection was made while on
his second Pacific expedition, and after the visit to the Sandwich
Islands.
CLUPHIDZ.
1. Sardinella atricauda (Gunther).
Clupea atricauda Ginther, Cat. Fish. Brit Mus., VII, 1868, p. 426.
Nos. 14,504 to 14,506. Andrew Garrett.
SYNGNATHIDA.
2. Doryrhamphus brachyurus (Bleeker).
Syngnathus brachyurus Bleeker, Verhandel. Batavia. Genootsch.
Kunst. Wetensch., Deel X XV, 1853, p. 16.
Nos.*14,848 to 14,868. Andrew Garrett.
520 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Dumeril has placed Dorichthys mille-punctatus of Kaup in the
synonymy of this species (Hist. Nat. Poiss., 1870, p. 575).
SPHYRAENIDA.
3. Sphyrena commersonii Cuvier and Valenciennes.
Sphyrana Commersonii Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., III,
1829, p. 260.
No. 11,466. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
HOLOCENTRIDZ.
4. Holocentrus diploxiphus Gimther.
Holocentrum diploxiphus Giinther, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1871, p.
660.
No. 14,140. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
MULLIDZ.
5. Upeneoides vittatus (Forskil).
Mullus vittatus Forskal, Deseript. Animal., 1775, p. 31.
Nos. 12,473 and 12,476. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
6. Upeneus trifasciatus (Lacépéde).
Mullus trifasciatus Lacépede, Hist. Nat. Poiss., III, 1801, pp. 383 and
404, Pl. 15, fig. 1.
No. 12,475. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
7. Upeneus pleurospilos Bleeker.
Upeneus pleurospilos Bleeker, Natuurk. Tijdsch. voor Neder]. Indie,
Deel IV, (New Series I) 1853, p. 110.
No. 12,474. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
KUHLIDZ.
8. Kuhlia marginata (Cuvier and Valenciennes),
Dules marginatus Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., IIT, 1829,
jon tite, Jelena)
Nos. 16,008 to 16,010. Andrew Garrett.
9. Kuhlia malo (Cuvier and Valenciennes).
»)
Dules malo Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., VIJ, 1831, p. 360-
No. 12,647. Dr. J. K. Townsend.
POMACENTRIDZ.
10. Tetradrachmum aruanus (Linneus).
Chetodon aruanus Linneus, Syst. Nat., Ed. X, 1758 p. 2
Nos. 9,620 and 9,621. Andrew Garrett.
o
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 521
LABRIDA.
11. Pseudocheilinus hexateznia (Bleeker).
COheilinus hexatenia Bleeker, Acta. Societ. Scient. Indo Neerlandice,
Vol. II, 1857, p. 84.
Nos. 9,667 to 9,673. Andrew Garrett.
; SCORPAINIDA.
12. Sebastopsis guamensis (Quoy and Gaimard).
Scorpena guamensis Quoy and Gaimard, Voyage de l’Uranie, Zool.,
1824, p. 326.
Nos. 12,192 to 12,198. Andrew Garrett.
Body moderately elongate, robust, greatest depth in the region
of the P. and about 3 in the total length, excluding caudal.
Head 2% in the body without the caudal, broad, somewhat conical,
and furnished with sharp spines, as the preocular, supraocular,
postocular, tympanic, parietal, nuchal, preopercular and opercu-
lar, all of which are present and many are furnished with small
filaments. Top of the head without occipital depression and the
interorbital space concave, not equal to the diameter of the eye.
Eye large, about 34 in the head and nearly once in the snout.
Snout very protractile and with a depression between the premax-
illaries into which the slightly knobbed symphysis of the mandible
fits when the mouth is closed. Maxillaries broad distally and
extending posteriorly for nearly # the eye diameter. Villiform
teeth on the premaxillaries, dentaries and vyomer, but none on the
palatines. Gill-rakers small, short and moderate in number. No
slit after the last gill-arch. Pseudobranchiz well developed. The
gill-membranes are not broadly connected across the isthmus.
Branchiostegal radii strong, becoming larger, longer and more
robust as they ascend the ceratohyals which are rather broad.
The jaws are equal. Opercular flap scaly below like the rest of
the operculum and preeoperculum, also the region below the eyes
and on the top of the head. The branchial aperture is very large
and with a distinct depression. There is a small spine above the
P. near the opercular flap. Origin of the D. about over that of
the P., and both before the posterior edge of the opercular flap.
Base of the D. very long, the base of the terminal ray more pos-
terior than that of the terminal A. ray, and with its posterior
margin joined to the caudal peduncle by a membrane. The rays
of the soft D. exceed the length of the longest D. spine. The P,
522 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
has an exceedingly broad base, inclining somewhat anteriorly,
radii of the fin very long, much longer than the V., whose origin
is posterior to that of the P., and its tips reach beyond the anus
and nearly to the origin of the A. The inner V. ray is joined to
the body by a membrane at its base and the tips of the fins do not
reach the anus. The origin of the A. falls below that of the soft
D., the first spine is the shortest and the second the Jongest,
though not equal to the longest soft rays. The caudal is small and
rounded, and the median rays somewhat the longest. Color in
alcohol mostly of a rich brown, beautifully variegated with darker
marblings and spots. A broad light band across the soft D., caudal
peduncle and soft A. All the fins irregularly and somewhat
narrowly barred with darker brownish. A large blackish spot
about the size of the eye upon the upper part of the operculum.
Scales mostly ctenoid, except those of the thoracic region, which
are cycloid, and together with the ctenoid scales of the head, those
along the bases of the D., A. and P. much smaller than those on
the rest of the body. The lateral line descends from above the
gill-opening to the centre of the base of the caudal in nearly a
straight line, not traversing the caudal peduncle medio-laterally.
There are about 38 to 42 scales in the lateral line. Radii of the
D. mostly XIII, 9, only seldom XIV, 9 or XIII, 10. Radii of
P. mostly 19, occasionally 18. Raddii of V. I, 5. Radii of A.
III, 5. The entire length of the specimens ranges from 1432 to 32
inches.
18. Pterois radiata Cuvier and Valenciennes.
Pterois radiata Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., IV, 1829,
p. 271.
No. 11,807. Andrew Garrett.
CARACANTHIDA.
14, Caracanthus maculatus (Gray).
Micropus maculatus Gray, Zoological Miscellany, 1831-42, p. 20.
No. 12,199. Andrew Garrett.
This specimen is very much like the one obtained by Dr. Sharp at
Honolulu, but differs a little in the larger eye, and the coloration is
also different, but this is due, I think, to the method of preservation
as Dr. Sharp’s specimen was discolored by being placed in a cop-
per can.
oO
bo
W
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
GOBIIDZ2.
15. Eleotris fuscus (Bloch and Schneider).
Pecilia Fusea Bloch and Schneider, Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 453.
Nos. 11,006 to 11,025. Andrew Garrett.
16, Gobius ornatus Riippell.
Gobius ornatus Riippell, Atlas zu der Reise im Nordl. Afrika, 1828,
p- 135.
No. 10,668. Andrew Garrett.
PSHUDOCHROMIDA.
17. Pseudochromis polyacanthus Bleeker.
Pseudochromis polyacanthus Bleeker, Natuurk. Tijdsch. voor Nederl.
Indie, Deel X (New Series) 1856, p. 375.
No. 14,647. Andrew Garrett.
FIEBRASFERIDA.
18. Fierasfer homei (Richardson),
Oxybeles homei Richardson, Voyage of the Erebus and Terror, Ichth.,
1844-48, p. 74, Pl. 44-figs. 7 to 18.
~ Nos. 8,933 to 8,937. Andrew Garrett.
19. Fierasfer parvipinnis Kaup, Plate XIX, fig. 5.
ee iad parvipinnis Kaup, Cat. of Apod. Fish., 1856, p. 160, Pl. 16,
@ 2:
No. 8,938. Andrew Garrett.
A fine specimen with the very elongate tapering body peculiar
to the genus, in which the greatest depth, which is a little posterior
to the P., is contained 114 times. The head is contained in the
body 9 times, its greatest depth contained in its own length 12
times, though its breadth isa trifle greater than its greatest depth.
The eyes are circular, anterior and superior, greater than the snout:
and contained in the length of the head about 6 times. Top of
the head broad, nearly flat, or only very slightly convex, the cheeks
swollen, and the interorbital space equal to 14 eye diameters. The
snout is obtuse, blunt and with the jaws equal when closed. Teeth
in the jaws pluriserial, well developed. Vomerine and palatine
teeth larger and more conical than those of the jaws, especially the
former. Maxillaries oblique, the distal extremity expanded and
posterior to the posterior margin of the eye. Branchial aperture
large, the gill-membranes free from the isthmus, but forming a
fold which passes over it. Branchiostegals robust. Pseudo-
branchiz absent. Gill-rakers in moderate number and nearly as
524 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
long as the eye. Nares small. The operculum is prolonged posteri-
orly into a little flap. Genito-anal apertures anterior to the origin
of the very short P., which is contained in the length of the
head 4 times. Both the D. and A. are very little developed, so
that I am unable to locate the origin of the former, but that of
the latter falls a short distance behind the base of the P. The
body is completely naked and the latera] line is distinct and
straight from above the branchial aperture to the tip of the caudal.
The color in alcohol is at present a rich light brown with very
minute dark spots or dots, and there also appears to have been
marblings of another darker color than the ground color, but not
so dark as the dots. The cheeks are also somewhat darker than
the ground color. Total length 7 inches.
III. Samoa.
The following specimens were collected many years ago by Dr.
H. C. Caldwell, by whom they were presented to the Academy.
ANGUILLIDZ.
1. Anguilla bengalensis (Gray).
Murena Bengalensis Gray, Illustrations of Indian Zoology, I, 1832, Pl.
95, fig. 5 (after Ham. Buch. MS.).
No. 1.087.
This specimen is labeled as the type of Anguilla planirostris
Abbott MS.
MURASNID.
2. Echidna nebulosa (Ahl).
Murena nebulosa Ahl, De Murzena et Ophichtho, 1789, p. 5, Pl. 1, fig. 2.
No. 966.
MUGILID&.
3. Mugil caldwelli sp. noy. Plate XIX, fig. 4.
No. 9,841. Type.
Form of the body oblong, the greatest depth 4% in the total
Jength, head about the same, but much longer than deep. The
eye is situated in the anterior part of the head and above the
centre of its depth, contained once in the snout, 32 in the head,
and 1% times in the interorbital space which is evenly though
shallowly convex and also contained in the head 2} times. The
—
ee =e St—
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 525
eye is furnished with an adipose eyelid the posterior portion of
which is broader than the anterior portion and also covers the greater
part of the iris. The nostrils are placed superiorly, both pairs
closer together than the width of the interorbital space, and when
viewed laterally the anterior is half an eye diameter anterior and
superior to the centre of the eye and is rounded. The posterior
nostrils are slit-like, superior to the anterior and nearer the front
margin of the eye than the centre of the space between the ante-
rior pair and the anterior margin of the eye. Mouth very pro-
tractile, lips moderately thin and the symphysis of the mandible
is elevated and fits into a depression in the centre of the roof of
the upper jaw when the mouth is closed. The depth of the mouth,
that is the space between the symphysis of the mandible and the
corner of the mouth, is more than 4 the width of the breadth
between both corners of the same. The angle made by the man-
dibulary bones would be an obtuse one. The maxillaries are com-
pletely hidden when the mouth is closed. The corners of the
~ mouth are a trifle posterior to the posterior nostrils. The preor-
bital is small, scaleless and with the lower margin denticulate.
Head covered with scales, except the jaws, and the opercles at
present are also nude, but they were most likely scaled during life.
Gill-rakers Jong and well developed. Pseudobranchize well devel-
oped. Origin of the P. above the centre of the body, though the
base of the fin is not as high as the upper margin of the eve,
directly behind the branchial aperture, shorter than the head and
extending posteriorly a trifle beyond the origin of the spinous D.
Radii of P. I, 15. The origin of the V. is about half-way
between the origin of the P. and its tip, and it reaches posteriorly
beyond the centre of the space between their bases and the anus.
The anus is directly below the tip of the second D. spine, when the
fin is depressed. Radii of V. I, 5, the innermost rays joined to
each other and to the body by a membrane at their bases and there
is also a large arrow-shaped scale between their bases. The P.
are also furnished with a scale at their bases. The soft D. differs
from that of any other species of Mugil known to me by having
5 rays, and they all appear to be branched rays, as there is no
anterior spine present in this fin. The origin of the soft D. is
over the fourth or fifth soft A. ray. The spinous D with IV
spines, the first 3 large and well developed, the third thin and
526 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
shorter than the second and fourth is about 2 the length of the
second, which is the longest. There are 2 elongated scales at the
base of the spinous D., which lie on the back. Origin of the A.
posterior to the anus, radii III, 9, the anterior rays the longest
and ihe terminal longer than the median. The A. is covered with
small scales, especially anteriorly, the scales extending on the fins
as far as the tip of the third spine, which is the longest, the first
being the shortest. The soft D. appears to have had the basal
portion covered with scales. Caudal very deeply emarginate, the
lobes pointed and the basal portion scaled. Caudal peduncle com-
pressed and equal to the interorbital space. As the scales on the
anterior part of the body have been removed, I shall count the
scales from the upper posterior margin of the operculum to the
base of the caudal, yet they are in places removed so that the
count is approximate—34. The color is a dull silvery, without
any conspicuous markings. Total length 54 inches.
I have named this species for Dr. Caldwell, who collected the
type.
HOLOCENTRID&.
4. Holocentrus diadema Lacépéde.
Holocentrus diadema Lacépéde, Hist. Nat. Poiss., III, 1801, Pl. 32, fig.
4, IV, 1801, pp. 372 and 374.
Nos. 14,139 and 14,140.
5. Holocentrus spinifer (Forskal).
Sciena spinifera Forskal, Descript. Animal., 1775, p. 49.
No. 14,142.
6. Holocentrus sammara (Forskil).
Sciena sammara Forskal, Descript. Animal., 1775, p. 48.
No. 14,141.
MULLIDZ.
7. Upeneus indicus (Shaw).
Mullus Indicus Shaw, General Zodlogy, IV, 1803, p. 614.
Nos. 12,471 and 12,472.
EQUULID.
8. Equula fasciata (Lacépéde).
Clupea fasciata Lacépéde, Hist. Nat. Poiss., V, 1802, pp. 425, 460
and 463.
No. 11,064.
Ol
bo
a |
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
KUHLIDZ.
9. Kuhlia rupestris (Lacépéde).
Centropomus rupestris Lacépede, Hist. Nat. Poiss., IV, 1801, pp. 252
and 273.
No. 12,648.
SERRANIDZ,
10. Epinephelus merra Bloch.
Epinephelus merra Bloch, Ausl. Fische, VII, 1793, p. 17, fig. 329.
No. 18,456.
LUTIANIDA.
11. Genyoroge marginata (Cuvier and Valenciennes).
Diacope marginata Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., II,
1828, p. 320.
No. 15,288.
POMACENTRIDZ.
“12, Eupomacentrus lividus (Bloch and Schneider).
Chetodon Lividus Bloch and Schneider, Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 235.
No. 9,651 and (?) 9,652. .
Of the latter, which is in bad preservation, I am not positive of
the identification.
LABRIDA.
13. Hemigymnus melapterus (Bloch).
Labrus melapterus Bloch, Ichthyologie, Vol. 3, pt. 8, 1797, p. 111, Pl.
285.
Nos. 9,591 and 9,653.
SCARIDA.
14, Scarus viridus Bloch.
Scarus viridus Bloch, Ichthyologie, Vol. 3, pt. 7, 1797, p. 20, Pl. 222.
No. 9,274.
15. Scarus globiceps Cuvier and Valenciennes.
Scarus globiceps Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., XIV, 1839,
pe ia:
Nos. 9,279 and 9,280.
16, Scarus sp.?
No. 9,275.
528 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
CHAITODONTIDA.
17, Chetodon setifer Bloch.
Chetodon setifer Bloch, Ichthyologie, Vol. 4, pt. 12, 1797, p. 99, Pl. 426,
fig, 1.
No. 12,294.
18, Chetodon vagabundus Linnus.
Chetodon vagabundus Linneus, Syst. Nat., Ed. X, 1758, p. 276.
No. 12,293.
BALISTIDZA.
19. Balistapus aculeatus (Linneus).
Balistes aculeatus Linneus, Syst. Nat., Ed. X, 1758, p. 328.
Nos. 801 and 23,349.
These two specimens represent the Balistes diva Cope MS., but
are undoubtedly the young of the above.
TETRAODONTIDZ.
20. Ovoides immaculatus (Bloch and Schneider),
Tetrodon Immaculatus Bloch and Schneider, Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 507
(after Lacépéde).
Noa hy?
The writer would like to call attention to errors in the Proe.
Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1899, p. 496, where Arothron is spelled
Arathron and Arothron reticularis (Bloch and Schneider) is
referred to as Arathron reticulatis (Giinther). The species should
all be referred to the present genus, Ovoides, then they would
stand:
Ovoides nigropunctatus (Bloch and Schneider).
Tetrodon Nigropunctatus Bloch and Schneid. Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 507.
Ovoides reticularis (Bloch and Schneider).
Tetrodon Reticularis Bloch and Schneider, Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 506.
21. Ovoides ophryas (Cope). Pl. XX, fig. 2.
Arothron ophryas Cope, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc., (New Series) XIV,
1871, p. 479.
No. 651. Type of Arothron ophryas Cope.
ECHENBEIDIDZ.
22. Echeneis naucrates Linneus.
Echeneis naucrates Linneus, Syst. Nat., Ed. X, 1758, p. 261.
No. 11,423.
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 529
SOME ARACHNIDA FROM ALABAMA.
BY NATHAN BANKS.
The following spiders and allied Arachnids were collected in
Alabama, for the most part, by Prof. Carl F. Baker and his
students. Some, however, were gathered by Prof. Baker’s prede-
cessor, Dr. L. M. Underwood. A few very interesting ones were
taken by the late Mr. Hugo Soltau near Mobile. When no locality
is given the specimens come from the vicinity of Auburn. The
following students assisted in making the collections: Messrs.
Allen, Dixon, Dobbin, Eppes, Farley, Houghton, McCalla,
Minge, Ransom, Shevers, Stewart and Warwick from Auburn,
and Hudnion from Opelika. All the localities are in the southern
_portion of the State; collections in the hilly northern part’ would
doubtless add many forms to the list, while on the Gulf coast a
few semi-tropical forms would be found.
The Arachnid fauna of Alabama is of much interest to the
modern student since this State was one of the collecting grounds
of Prof. Hentz, the father of American Arachnology. A number
of species described by Hentz have been unknown to later natu-
ralists, and the systematic position of some of them in much doubt.
In this collection several of these forms appear which enables me to
place them in their proper position.
Perhaps the most interesting of these species is the one described
by Hentz as Katadysas pumilus. Hentz believed this spider to be
intermediate between the two great divisions of the Araneida—those
with four lung-slits and vertically moving fangs, and those with
two lung-slits and laterally moving fangs. Aatadysas was reputed
to have but two lung-slits, yet with vertically moving fangs. The
general appearance of Hentz’ figure led several writers to believe
that Katadysas was a Zora or near that genus. In this collection
there is one specimen of Katadysas pumilus which proves to belong
to the genus Zora, a genus new to our country.
Of scarcely less interest was the scorpion, of which Prof. Baker
sent me many specimens. This scorpion proves to be quite differ-
530 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
ent from the ordinary scorpion of the Southern States, long known
as Centrurus carolinianus Beauv. This species is the form described
by C. L. Koch as Vejovis carolinus. I had no idea that there
were two scorpions common in the Southern States, and its dis-
covery was of much concern to me. In looking up the literature
on the subject, however, I found that what was evidently the same
species had been recorded by Mr. J. P. Stelle in 1870, in the
American Entomologist, as occurring in Tennessee. This species is
abundantly different from our common Centrurus, belonging to
another family and exhibiting many minor points of difference.
A few other interesting species may be mentioned: Myrmecophila
foliata Atk., which proves to be the same as Mygale fluviatilis
Hentz; Anyphena piscatoria Hentz, one of the lost species, easily
recognized by the peculiar shape of the male palpus; Dolomedes
albineus Hentz, a pale species of the genus, and Lycosa missou-
riensis, @ curious species which I described several years ago from
ove Missouri specimen, is represented by many examples.
Mr. Soltau sent several small forms that add interest to the list;
one, anew genus of Dictynide, is remarkable on account of its
near approach to certain six-eyed forms.
Except in the small Theridiide, where the woodland species have
not been well collected, this collection gives one a fair idea of the
spider fauna of the region. Most of the species are widely
distributed in the Atlantic States, very few but are found in more
northern regions. A few forms are more common in regions to the
south; such are Anyphena striata, Gaucelmus angustinus, Argy-
rodes nephile, Prostheclina aurata and. Lyssomanes viridis. Alto-
gether one hundred and thirty-three spiders are recorded and twelve
other Arachnids—a total of one hundred and forty-five species.
The Epeiride leads with twenty-four species; then follow the Ly-
coside and the Attide. Twenty families are represented, seven
by but one species. One hundred of the spiders were described
by Hentz; three are described as new.
THERAPHOSID 2.
Pachylomerus carolinensis Hentz.
One female.
Myrmeciophila fluviatilis Hentz.
M. foliata Atkinson.
Several specimens.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 531
FILISTATIDZA.
Filistata capitata Hentz.
Many specimens; also Opelika.
DYSDERIDA.
Ariadne bicolor Hentz.
One specimen.
PHOLCID5.
Pholeus phalangioides Fuess.
Several specimens. September.
Spermophora meridionalis Hentz.
A few specimens.
DRASSIDA.
Sergiolus variegatus Hentz.
Several examples, one from Mobile.
Prosthesima atra Hentz.
A few. October.
Prosthesima ecclesiastica Hentz.
~ Several specimens. October.
Prosthesima decepta n. sp.
Length 2 7.5 to 8 mm.; tibia plus patella TV, 3 mm. Cepha-
Jothorax yellow-brown, rather darker on head, mandibles red-
brown, legs brownish yellow, sternum pale reddish brown, abdomen
above and below dark gray, spinnerets yellowish. Cephalotho-
rax as long as tibia plus patella IV, much narrowed in front;
posterior eye-row slightly procurved, P. M. E. largest, oval and
oblique, not half their diameter apart at their posterior ends,
much farther from the P. S. E., A. M. E. nearly their diameter
apart, closer to the equal A. 8. E., S. E. quite widely separated;
mandibles stout, vertical; legs of usual length, no spines under
tibize I and II, a pair under metatarsus II, none under metatarsus
I, posterior pairs with many spines, none above; sternum plainly
longer than broad, truncate at base, broadest in middle, pointed
at the tip; abdomen once and one-half as long as broad, truncate
at base, depressed; the epigynum shows a broad area, traversed
by a rather narrow pale septum, and a dark ridge on each side.
Several specimens. Resembles P. insularis Banks, but the
epigynum is quite different and the P. M. E. are larger and closer
together.
532 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Gnaphosa sericata Koch.
Herpyllus bicolor Hentz,
Many specimens, some from Opelika.
CLUBIONID 4.
Clubiona abottii Koch.
A few small specimens.
Chiracanthium inclusa Hentz.
Many examples. October.
Chiracanthium albens Hentz.
One young specimen.
Phrurolithus alarius Hentz.
One from Mobile.
Thargalia bivittatus Keys.
Young specimens from Mobile.
Anyphena striata Becker.
One male of this rare species. Readily known by small size and
dark color, as well as by structure of palpus.
Anyphena piscatoria Hentz.
Two males are evidently this species, which is easily recognized
in this sex by the very long process to the tarsus of the palpus.
One is from Opelika.
Gayenna celer Hentz.
Anyphena incerta Keys.
One young specimen from Opelika.
ZOROPSIDZ.
Zora pumilis Hentz.
Katadysas pumilis Hentz.
One immature specimen. It has the characteristic appearance
of the other species of the genus.
AGALENIDZ.
Agalena nevia Hentz.
Various specimens, some of the form described by Becker as A.
hentzi, which I do not think is specifically different. September.
Tegenaria derhami Scop.
Several examples.
Celotes medicinalis Hentz.
One specimen.
Or
Go
Ww
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
THERIDIIDA.
Theridium tepidariorum Koch.
Great numbers of specimens. There is considerable variation
in color and markings, and the males vary in size and length of
legs.
Gaucelmus angustinus Keys.
One female.
Theridula spherula Hentz.
A few specimens. October.
Teutana triangulosa Walck.
Numerous examples, some from Opelika. September.
Lathrodectes mactans Koch.
Many specimens. September.
Lithyphantes fulvus Keys.
One female.
Crustulina guttata Rossi.
One from Mobile.
Mysmena bulbifera Banks.
One specimen. March.
Argyrodes trigonum Hentz.
A few specimens. September.
Argyrodes nephile Cambr.
One specimen. October.
Argyrodes cancellata Hentz.
Two from Mobile.
Spiropalpus spiralis Emer.
One example.
Linyphia communis Hentz.
Several specimens. September.
Bathyphantes maculata n. sp.
Cephalothcrax black on sides and above in the middle,
leaving an irregular pale yellowish area each side, eyes on black
spots, with a black line extending back from each P. S. E.; man-
dibles dark on base, pale on apex; legs pale, a dark band on
middle of the tibiz, and frequently a spot above on middle of
femora; sternum black, a narrow black band on apex of each
35
534 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
coxa; abdomen black, a pale space at base and three chevrons
behind, four spots on each upper side, the posterior ones often con-
nected to the chevrons, toward the base on each side is a long pale
spot, and two smaller near the spinnerets; venter black. Head
rather high; the P. M. E. less than their diameter apart, scarcely
as far from the P. S. E.; A. M. E. smaller, hardly their diame-
ter apart, farther from the larger A. S. E.; legs long and slender;
abdomen high and convex, rounded at the base, pointed behind;
epigynum shows a finger bent in, and holes each side much as in
B. zebra. Length 9 1.8 mm.
Two specimens from Mobile. Differs from B. zebra in larger
size, markings, etc.
DICTYNIDZ.
Dictyna sublata Hentz.
Many specimens. October.
Dictyna volucripes Keys.
A few examples. October.
Dictyna foliacea Hentz.
D. volupis Keys.
Several specimens.
DICTYOLATHYS n. gen.
Much like Dictyna, but apparently six-eyed, three in a group
each side; but the A. M. E. are present, although very small, and
situate close to and a little higher than the A. 8S. E. Head not
much elevated; legs of moderate length, not spined, but very
hairy; accessory spinning organs like Dictyna.
Dictyolathys maculata n. sp.
Cephalothorax, legs, mandibles and sternum pale, rather yellow-
ish, eyes on black spots; abdomen whitish, with a basal black
mark and four rows of transverse dark marks, the submedian pairs
being more or less connected, the lateral rows extending obliquely
down on the sides, the hind ones converging to the spinnerets,
venter with a few median black dots, region of epigynum reddish.
P. M. E. are more than their diameter apart, close to the equal
P.S. E; A. S. E. of about equal size; A. M. E. very small and
close to and slightly higher than the A. S. E.; sternum broad,
sides rounded; abdomen rather truncate at base, moderately
broad; genital region semicircular, showing a dark mark on each
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 53d
outer lower side, with a narrow median septum, and each side at
base an oval opening. Length 1.4 mm. ,
Several specimens from Mobile; also from Meridian, Miss.
ULOBORID Zi.
UDloborus plumipes Lucas.
A few specimens. September.
EPEIRIDZ.
‘Gasteracantha cancer Hentz.
Several specimens.
Aorosoma spinea Hentz,
A few specimens.
Acrosoma rugosa Hentz.
A few examples of several color varieties.
Mahadeva verrucosa Hentz. _
One female.
Ordgarius cornigerus Hentz.
One female from Mobile.
Argiope aurantia Lucas.
Epeira riparia Hentz.
Several specimens.
Argiope transversa Emer.
Many examples.
Epeira soutulata Hentz.
A few, mostly young specimens.
Epeira insularis Hentz.
Many specimens.
Epeira trifolium Hentz.
One specimen.
Epeira domiciliorum Hentz.
Several examples, some very dark.
Epeira thaddeus Hentz.
A few examples.
Epeira prompta Hentz.
E. parvula Keys.
Many specimens, representing many color varieties.
536 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
Epeira globosa Keys.
[1900.
A few specimens. October. It is curious that Hentz did not
find this species, which he certainly would recognize as distinct.
Epeira displicata Hentz.
Several specimens.
Epeira trivittata Keys.
A few examples.
Epeira labyrinthea Hentz.
A few specimens.
Epeira vulgaris Hentz.
E. volucripes Keys.
A few young specimens.
Abottia gibberosa Hentz.
Several examples. October.
Abottia placida Hentz.
A few specimens.
Argyrepeira hortorum Hentz.
Many specimens.
Plectana stellata Hentz.
A few, mostly young specimens.
Cyclosa conica Pallas.
Many examples. September.
Larinia directa Hentz.
A few specimens. October.
TETRAGNATHIDA.
Tetragnatha grallator Hentz,
A few specimens.
Tetragnatha laboriosa Hentz.
More common than the preceding species. October.
Opelika.
THOMISID.
Xystious gulosus Keys.
A few specimens.
Xysticus quadrilineatus Keys.
Several examples. October.
Xysticus nervosus Banks.
Several specimens. October.
Also
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 537
Xysticus maculatus Keys.
One specimen, probably this species. October.
Synema parvula Hentz.
An immature specimen.
Oxyptila monroensis Keys.
One female from Mobile.
Coriarachne versicolor Keys.
A few specimens. October.
Runcinia aleatoria Hentz.
Several specimens.
Misumena vatia Clerk.
Two females. May.
Misumena rosea Keys.
Many specimens. October.
Misumena georgiana Keys. —
_A few examples. October.
Tmarsus caudatus Hentz.
Several specimens. October.
Tibellus duttoni Hentz.
A few specimens. October.
Thanatus rubicundus Keys.
Several examples. October.
Philodromus rufus Walck.
A number of young specimens.
Philodromus aureolus Walck.
Three females.
Philodromus vulgaris Hentz.
Many specimens.
Philodromus laticeps Keys.
One immature specimen; the species is quite rare, but very dis-
tinct.
Philodromus infuscatus Keys.
One male.
LYCOSIDZ5.
Pisaurina undata Hentz.
Several specimens; also from Opelika.
538 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Dolomedes sexpunctatus Hentz.
Many specimens, mostly young.
Dolomedes scriptus Hentz.
Three specimens.
Dolomedes albineus Hentz.
A few specimens of this rare species.
Dolomedes urinator Hentz.
Several examples.
Lycosa scutulata Hentz.
Many specimens. October.
Lycosa punctulata Hentz.
A few specimens. October.
Lycosa carolinensis Hentz.
Several specimens.
Lycosa missouriensis Banks.
Many specimens of this very distinct and pretty species. Sep-
tember.
Lycosa fatifera Hentz.
L. tigrina McCook.
L. vulpina Emer.
A few specimens.
Lycosa erratica Hentz,
Many specimens, most of them small and with the black venter
with a large median yellow area. Also from Opelika. March,
October.
Lycosa ocreata Hentz.
L. rufa Keys.
Many specimens, both of pale and dark varieties. Also from
Opelika.
Lyoosa lenta Hentz.
L. ruricola Hentz.
Many specimens. Quite readily known by the generally pale
color and black venter; there is much variation in size.
Lycosa babingtoni Blackw.
L. nidicola Emer.
Smaller than L. lenta ;' darker above, with three pale stripes on
cephalothorax, the median one extending between M. E. Several
specimens; also from Opelika.
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 539
Lycosa riparia Heniz, :
One female. This has the pale median stripe like L. babingtoni,
but with banded legs.
Lycosa sp.
One female; dark; legs dark; venter dark, but not black;
somewhat like L. floridana Banks.
Lycosa sp.
One male; pale, resembles L. ocreata Hentz, but there are no
stiff hairs on the anterior tibiz.
Trochosa cinerea Fabr.
A few specimens.
Allocosa funerea Hentc.
Several specimens. March, October.
Pardosa milvina Hentz.
Many specimens.
Pardosa minima Keys. “
Several examples. October. Also from Opelika.
OXYOPIDZ.
Oxyopes salticus Hentz.
Many specimens. October.
Oxyopes scalaris Hentz.
A few specimens. October.
Peucetia viridans Hentz.
Many specimens.
PODOPHTHALMIDZ.
Thanatidius dubius Hentz.
One specimen.
CTENIDZ.
Ctenus punctulatus Hentz.
Several specimens; also from Opelika.
‘ATTIDA.
Phidippus mystaceus Hentz.
One example.
Phidippus audax Hentz.
Attus tripunctatus Hentz.
Many specimens. September, October.
540 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
Phidippus rufus Hentz.
Several specimens.
Phidippus insolens Hentz.
A few specimens.
Phidippus cardinalis Hentz.
Three specimens. October.
Phidippus obscurus Peck.
One female.
Dendryphantes octavus Hentz.
Many specimens. October.
Dendryphantes retarius Hentz.
A few examples. October.
Icius palmarum Hentz.
A few specimens. October.
Icius mitratus Hentz.
A few specimens. October.
Icius elegans Hentz.
One example.
Cyrba teniola Hentz.
Many specimens. February, October.
Marptusa familiaris Hentz.
Many specimens. September, October.
. Habrocestum cecatum Hentz.
Two specimens.
Habrocestum cristatum Hentz.
A few examples; also from Opelika.
Prostheclina aurata Hentz.
P. cambridget Peck.
Several specimens.
Saitis pulex Hentz.
Many specimens, mostly young.
Zygoballus parvus Hentz.
A few examples. October.
Homalattus cyaneus Hentz.
One femaie. October.
[1900.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 541
LYSSOMANID.
Lyssomanes viridis Hentz.
Two specimens. October.
PHALANGIDA.
-Liobunum vittatum Say.
Several specimens.
Liobunum politum Weed.
One specimen.
Liobunum hyemale Weed.
Two specimens.
Liobunum flavum Banks.
One specimen.
Liobunum speciosum 2. sp.
The female shows two pale Jines extending from the eye-tubercle
to the anterior margin; the male has black trochanters.
Color of female brown; a dark central mark on the cephalo-
thorax, with two pale lines extending from the eye-tubercle to the
front margin; eye-tubercle dark brown; palpi pale; legs pale,
_patelle light brown, tips of tibiz brown; venter pale; dorsum of
abdomen with a vase-mark margined with clear pale yellow, the
mark extending to near tip of body; sides of cephalothorax brown,
widest behind, and enclosing a yellow dot. Male nearly uniform
reddish yellow above, pale beneath; palpi paler; trochanters black
as wel] as the bases of the femora, rest of legs pale, except light
brown patellee and tips of the tibize; eye-tubercle black.
Legs long and slender, eye-tubercle with a few spinules above.
Body of female not very slender, of male broad and short, finely
granulate, the skin rather hard. Femur I of female twice as long
as body; of male two and one-half times as Jong as body.
A few specimens. September. Separated from LL. bicolor by
pale color, absence of the tubercles mentioned by Wood, markings
of the female, etc.
Cynorta sayi Simon.
Several specimens, some in December.
SCORPIONIDA.
Vejovis carolinus Koch. Die Arachniden, vol. 10, p. 7.
Body nearly uniform light reddish brown, palpi same color, legs
and venter paler, under side of tail dark like the upper side,
642 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
cephalothorax with pale spots. Cephalothorax longer than broad
behind, with a median sulcus throughout, anterior margin emar-
ginate, about one-half as long as posterior margin, surface with
groups and rows of granules, these are dark, elsewhere the surface
is pale. Median eyes at anterior third, three small side-eyes in a
curved row, the third smaller than the others; abdominal segments
with granules most numerous on the posterior portion, and a row of
larger ones along the hind margin, and a faint median ridge indi-
cated on the middle of the segments, last segment with four granu-
late ridges, the side pair not reaching the hind margin, the sub-
median pair outline a broad area, slightly wider in front than
behind; tail short, stout, the first four segments short, each a little
longer than the preceding one, the fifth nearly twice as long as
the fourth; the first segment has three granulate ridges on its
sides, the second and third segments have the intermediate ridge
arising from near the middle of the upper ridge, while on the
fourth segment the intermediate ridge is wanting; all have a ridge
each side above, in the fourth terminating much before the tip; the
fifth has a ridge each side above, an upper lateral one on the
basal part and a lower lateral one for the whole length; on the
lower side the first four segments have a low submedian ridge each
side, and the fifth has a median ridge; the bulb is nearly smooth
above, granulate below, leaving a submedian smooth space each
side, the sting is black at tip, of moderate length and curved, no
spine below. The palpi are short, about the length of the cephalo-
thorax and abdomen; femur four-sided, broader than high,
scarcely broader in the middle than at either end, a granulate
ridge at each angle; tibia about as long as femur, broader than
high, broader in the middle, being swollen on the inner side, four-
sided, with a granulate ridge on each angle and one on the middle
of the inner side; hand scarcely as long as tibia, swollen, with
seven faint ridges and granules near some of them; fingers rather
longer than hand, paler, gently curved, finely denticulate, and
with five pairs of larger teeth at about equal distances apart.
Sternum five-sided, broad in front; thirteen teeth in each comb;
each ventral segment paler on posterior part. Length, 36 mm.
Many specimens. Easily separated from Centrwrus carolinianus
by darker nearly uniform color, by broader five-sided sternum, by
absence of spine under the sting, by broader central area of last
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 543
abdominal segment, by stouter hands and shorter fingers, by
lateral eyes farther from anterior margin, by shorter second joint
of tail, and by fewer number of teeth in the comb.
PSEHUDOSCORPIONIDA.
Chelifer cancroides Linn.
Several specimens crawling over moss in February.
Chelifer muricatus Say.
One specimen.
ACARINA,
Bdella oblonga Say.
One under stones, January; another from Mobile.
Gamasus spinipes Say.
Two specimens of this large and well-marked species.
Gamasus sp.
Many specimens of a small pale species, probably new; abundant
in greenhouses in January,
544 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
THE PINE BARRENS OF NEW JERSEY.
BY C. F. SAUNDERS.
Lying between the New Jersey Southern Railroad and Barnegat
Bay and north of Mullica river there is an area of about four
hundred square miles of wilderness, traversed by no railroad and
practically uninhabited. This region, which is the very heart of
the Pine Barrens of southern New Jersey, is so inaccessible that,
so far as I can learn, it has been visited of late years by only an
occasional botanist, although its outer borders, at such places as
Atsion, Hammonton, Tuckerton, Whitings, Woodmansie, and
the Upper or West Plains, have been visited more frequently.
A forty-mile trip iu midsummer across the Pine Barrens has
drawbacks enough to make even the most enthusiastic flower-lover
think twice before entering upon it. The sands are heavy, the flies
and ticks and mosquitoes are numerous, the heat is excessive,
springs are few and far between, and forest fires are apt to be at
their devastating work in the very place to be visited. However,
we decided to chance these things, and on the evening of July 3,
1899, found ourselves landed at an old-fashioned hotel at Tucker-
ton, and bargaining with a resident South Jerseyman—half
farmer, half sportsman, and altogether a pioneersman, to use his
own expression—for a team to take us across to Atsion with board
and lodging en route, and the next morning bright and early we
were jogging along the road that leads from Tuckerton northwest
toward the Lower Plains.
Mile after mile of oak and pine barrens were passed without sign
of human habitation, and when five miles were registered we
came to the spot which is marked upon the maps as Munyon Field.
Here, in old times, had been a house, and a family had lived here,
scratching some sort of a living from the sand and fattening hogs
on the abundant mast which strewed the ground under the little
chinquapin oaks. Now no vestige of human occupation remains
save a little clearing which is rapidly filling up with wildings
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 545
from the surrounding forest, prominent among them that charac-
teristic primrose of the Pine Barrens, Oenothera sinuata L. Two
or three miles more of similar wilderness and the forest growth
thinned out and dwindled down to dwarf proportions as we
emerged upon the rolling heathlike expanse of the East or Lower
Plains. These plains are about nine miles northwest of Tuckerton
and lie south of the East Branch of the Wading river. The West
or Upper Plains, which are reached most easily from Woodmansie,
lie north of the said branch of the Wading river, and are of less
extent than the Lower Plains. The latter possess an area (aceord-
ing to Pinchot’s report) of about 7,700 acres, or, roughly, five
miles long by two and one-half miles across. Nothing could be
more restful to the eye than this rolling expanse of green plain
melting away in every direction into the misty distance, the white
sand gleaming out here and there like white caps on an emerald
sea. The flora appears to be identical with that of the Upper
Plains, which have more than once been the objective point of
visits by members of the Academy. The luxuriant vines of the
bearberry (Arctostaphylos uva-ursi) lay sprawling everywhere in
the sun, their dry, astringent berries not yet tinged with the crim-
son that makes them so conspicuous in winter; the pyxie, trailing
arbutus, hudsonia, laurel, tephrosia and Jeiophyllum were so
abundant that the whole place must have been like a garden in
the spring. Corema Conradii is on the Lower Plains as weil as on
the Upper, a characteristic plant, growing in masses of sallow
green. On July 3 we found it in mature fruit—in fact, past its
prime, so that the dry little drupes easily shattered off after
being transferred to the press.
The same growth of stunted scrub and blackjack oaks and
pitch pine covers these Lower Plains as covers the Upper. The
average height of these curious little trees, which are abundantly
fruited with acorns and cones, is hardly over three feet. Occa-
sionally a clump six feet high or so occurs, and we noted a sassafras
or two about six feet high, but for considerable stretches one may
walk with his knees in the tree tops. Gifford Pinchot, in his
account of the Plains, appended to the last annual report of the
New Jersey State Geologist, calls attention to the fact that while
the pine is chiefly of coppice growth—that is consisting of sprouts
from stumps or from creeping branches of trees which have been
killed back by fire—many of the small specimens which appear like
546 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
sprouts will, if examined, be found to be in reality seedlings with
stems and branches creeping on the ground. The prostrate seed-
lings, he states, exhibit a remarkable similarity to the forms assumed
by trees near the timber line on high mountains, and it is a fair
inference that the very harsh and exposed situations in which they
grow on these South Jersey plains has had an effect analogous to
that of great elevation.
About half-way across the Lower Plains, where the road dips
down into a little hollow in the bosom of the hills, we found a
good-sized pond with sphagnum border, and bearing on its waters
several floating islands of sphagnum supporting luxuriant growths
of Cassandra calyculata, Eriocaulon, sedges, sundews, ete. This,
our driver told us, was called Watering Place Pond, and was well
known to old hunters, who in former days had killed many a
deer on its margin. Castalia odorata, Pogonia ophioglossoides,
Limodorum tuberosum, Azalea viscosa, Drosera filiformis and
intermedia, Polygala Nuttallii and lutea, Proserpinaca pectinacea,
Hypoxis erecta, Lysimachia stricta were in bloom. Carex Walter-
dana—a graceful southern sedge, which finds its northern limit in
the southern New Jersey Pine Barren swamps, luxuriated along with
Woodwardia Virginica, in the shallow water of the pond’s margin,
and on the dryer banks the dwarf huckleberry, Gaylussacia
dumosa—called by our driver, grouseberry—was abundant. The
fruit of the other Gaylussacia common throughout this region—G.
resinosa—the same authority invariably spoke of as hog huckle-
berries, or more familiarly ‘‘ hoggies.’? The swamp blueberry
( Vaccinium corymbosum) also grew by this pond, its luscious fruit
just maturing and tempting one to forget home and linger forever
by the loaded bushes, as the lotos tempted the companions of old
Ulysses.
After leaving the Plains, the old road wound now through dry
sandy pine woods, bare of conspicuous flowers, save, perhaps, for
the ever-present Melampyrum lineare and the yellow banners of
Baptisia tinetoria—now through damp savanna lands, where we
had as roadside companions the thread-leaved sundew’s purple
flowers, the orange heads of Polygala lutea, the magenta blos-
soms of the grass pink and the snake-mouth Pogonia. Lephiola
Americana was just coming into blossom, and nothing could be
more exquisite than the beauty of its white flannelly corymbs
in a condition of half bud, half bloom. The expanded blossoms
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 547
of this characteristic plant of the damp barrens, though individu-
ally small, are wonderfully rich in color, with orange anthers and
rich reddish-brown sepals crested with lines of golden wool. In
some places the bearberry formed a veritable carpet. The gather-
ing of this plant for shipment to the cities, where it has been more
or less extensively employed in medicine, used to be a considerable
industry in southern New Jersey. A reminiscence of this oldtime
trade still lingers in one of the common names of the plant down
there, viz., wursy—the shop name of the bearberry being wa-urst.
In a savanna through which we passed just before reaching the east
branch of the Wading river we were greeted with the sight of
Abama Americana in the height of bloom, studding the grass as
thick as buttercups. This beautiful little plant, which bears a
spike of fragrant yellow blossoms, and is no Jess beautiful in fruit,
when the whole plant, stem and capsules, is suffused with a ver-
milion glow, is interesting as being found nowhere else in the world
except in the wet pine barrens of southern New Jersey. In this
same savanna we were delighted to find another most interesting
plant, Tofieldia racemosa, a_liliaceous ‘herb covered with a
rough, glutinous pubescence, that makes it anything but pleasant to
handle. This species is truly a southerner, and, though the
books give its northern limit as southern New Jersey, is credited
in Britton’s Catalogue to only one locality in that State—namely,
near Manchester. There it is very scarce and not recently reported,
-so that our discovery of it would seem to be worthy of note.
Crossing the east branch of the Wading river, and passing
through a cedar swamp which was still fragrant (July 4) with the
perfume of the blossoms of Magnolia Virginiana, we came out
upon some cultivated fields and a farmhouse—the first sign of
-human life that we had met with since leaving Tuckerton eight or
nine hours before. It was interesting to note the establishment
here in this little cultivated spot in the wilderness, of such familiar
weeds as the ox-eyed daisy, English plantain, sheep sorrel, rabbit’ s-
foot clover and Plantago aristata, as well as the white hoarhound,
Marrubium vulgare. A mile or so west of this place and at least
four miles from the Plains, we came again upon Corema Conradii,
this time growing in pine woods, though by no means so abundant
as on the Plains.
That evening we pitched our camp on the banks of the Wading
river, at a crossing called Allen’s Bridge, and while our driver was
548 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
engaged in preparing supper, we made a sortie across the river and,
where the sphagnum was sprinkled with plants of Drosera filiformis,
with Lycopodium Carolinianum growing hard by, we discovered
Schizaea pusilla in fair abundance. The plants were scarcely fully
developed yet, many of them indeed just uncoiling. A number of
fertile fronds of the previous year still persisted, but brown and
dead and with spore-cases empty. It may not be generally known
that this little fern, as well as its relative, Lygodium palmatum, is
evergreen, at least so far as the sterile fronds are concerned, and
a very good time to search for it is in mild midwinter, when, the
snow being off the ground and the earth rather bare of green
vegetation, the tiny corkscrew fronds are comparatively con-
spicuous. Growing in the water along the shore of the river at
Allen’s Bridge, Juncus militaris was abundant—a stately rush,
which is of especial interest as possessing two sorts of leaves, one
of the usual rushlike kind, and the other submerged, borne in
dense fascicles, and developing threadlike, knotted blades a foot
or more in length—in fact, one would be inclined to regard them
as roots, instead of leaves. Near here, also, Rhyncospora Torrey-
ana was collected—a beak rush peculiar to the pine barren swamps
of the coast between New Jersey and South Carolina, and one of
rare beauty.
On the edge of a cedar swamp near Calico—a half-day’s travel
further west—we again found Schizaea pusilla at home, but spar-
ingly, and growing in the same locality, like so many little black-
headed pins stuck in the sand, were plants of the tiny Utricularia
cleistogama. Not far from here we came upon the rarity of an
inhabited house. There was an old stone-lined well in the shady
yard, and as we leaned on the curbing while the bucket was bringing _
us up a drink, we were greeted with a beautiful sight of scores of
fern plants clinging in the cool damp crevices of the stones far
down in the well. Phegopteris Dryopteris, Asplenium filiafoemina,
Asplenium platyneuron, and one of the varieties of Dryopteris spi-
nulosa were collected. These are not at all Pine Barren species;
indeed, Phegopteris Dryopteris is a typical mountain form, and as
far as New Jersey is concerned, Britton’s Catalogue gives for it but
two stations, both of which are in northern counties of the State,
more than a hundred miles away. How it and its companions hap-
pened to get in that old well in the heart of the Pine Barrens is an
interesting mystery.
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 549
From Calico to Batsto, where we had planned to pass the night,
our road (which, by the way, was no easy one to follow) led
through ‘‘ Old Martha.’’ This forlorn and desolate spot, a sort of
Tadmor in the wilderness, marks the scene of a former hive of
industry—for here, in old times, stood and flourished an iron fur-
nace, drawing its supplies of ore from the bogs close by, while the
abundant pine forests on every side furnished a wealth of charcoal
for fuel. Now nothing remains but a heap of ruins where the
furnace stood, and an occasional chimney stack where the houses of
the operators had been. A grove of catalpa trees and a wilderness
of white poplar suckers helped to give an uncanny look to the
place, and we were glad to be off again under the familiar shadows
of the pitch pines and scrub oaks.
The road to Batsto is through a very barren stretch, and we
found the botanizing poor. From Batsto, where we passed the
night, we took a northerly route through sandy pine barrens be-
tween the Atsion and Batsto rivers to Quaker Bridge, a spot
classic in botanical annals as the first-discovered station of Schizaea
pusilla. Here we built our last camp-fire,and made a farewell
tea of Solidago odora leaves, which turned out to be a rather palat-
able brew—if taken hot. The beautiful greenbrier, Smilax lauri-
folia, another southerner which attains its Ultima Thule in the New
Jersey pines, was noted here, while deep in the cedar swamp we
found Abama Americana in bloom, though not nearly so abundant
as we had seen it in the savanna near the Plains. The stream
at Quaker Bridge was quite a wild water-garden, with the white
water lilies, the blue spires of Pontederia, the yellow helmets of
the flowers of the bladderwort (Utricularia fibrosa), and the
showy red blossoms of Rhexia Virginica, while here and there in
the midst of the green grasses along the river, Sabbatia lanceolata
would display its ample cymes of white bloom, like showers of stars
half fallen. From here to Atsion is four miles, and there we ar-
rived in time for the evening train citywards.
Among the grasses gathered on this trip, and which were sub-
mitted to a close examination later on, were found specimens of
Panicum which Mr. Nash describes as Paniewm Clutei,* in honor
of W. N. Clute, my companion on this excursion.
1 Bul. Torrey Bot. Club, Nov., 1899.
36 Y
(by |
oO
fo)
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
LOWER CALIFORNIAN SPECIES OF CEHLOCENTRUM AND BERENDTIA.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.
The Lower Californian species now known of these genera are
contined to the plateaux of the middle portion of the peninsula.’
Thus far none have been found in the mountainous region ex-
tending from La Paz southward.
Celocentrum is rather widely distributed in Mexico, though none
are known in the States immediately bordering upon the Gulf of
California.
W. M. Gabb described Calocentrum irregulare® from the high
table-lands cf the interior, especially about ‘‘ Moleje’’ (Muleje),
where it lives hidden under loose volcanic rocks. This is on the
east coast of the peninsula, a little below the twenty-seventh
parallel.
Mons. J. Mabille has more recently described two species belong-
ing to this group, under the generic name Berendtia. His B.
Digueti* is costulate with sculptured interstices, or, in his words,
<¢ eostellis lamellosis, obtusis, pulcherrime ornata ; interstitiis costella-
yum striis minutissimus, costellisque arcuatis, sat regulariter dis-
positis, solum oculo armato perspicuis, munita.’’ For the rest, it
has 19-20 convex whorls, the embryonal 4 or 5 cancellated and
beautifully granulose; the last whorl is solute, keeled at the
insertion, and with an obtuse, short keel about the umbilical tract;
aperture oval, angulate above; the columella is ‘‘ contorto-arcuata,
1 J. G. Cooper, in the American Journal of Conchology, IV, 1868, p. 212,
footnote, states that ‘‘Mr R. H. Stretch has recently brought from near
Carson Valley, Nevada, lat. 39°, fossils, or rather casts, closely resembling
the Holospira Newcombiana and H. irregularis Gabb, of Lower California.
They occur, he says, in the same formation that contains Carinifex,”’ ete.
Nothing further is known on this topic.
2There is a genus Celocentrus in Mollusca (Hnomphalide), based upon
the Devonian Hnomphalus Goldfussi d’Arch. and the Triassic Cirrus Poly-
phemus Laube. Its date is unknown to me, but I have not seen it men-
tioned earlier than about 1882.
8 Cylindrella (Urocoptis) trregularis Gabb, American Journal of Con-
chology, III, p. 238, pl. 16, f. 4, 1867.
4 Bulletin de la Société Philomathique de Paris (8), VII, 1895.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 551
b
ad basin obscure denticulata’’ from the slight basal channel.
Length 303-33, breadth 5 mm. It is from the ‘‘ Plateau de San
Zavier, N. lat. 25°.’ Probably this should be lat. 26°, as a
Mission similarly named lies near this parallel.
B. minorina Mabille is presumably smaller, though no dimen-
sions are given. It is also costellate, with 4 embryonal whorls
minutely sculptured with spirally descending lines, handsomely
gceanulose. The intercostal spaces of the rest of the shell are
smooth. Whorls 17, with deep sutures. The last whorl is angu-
late toward the suture, very obtusely keeled on the back, solute
and a little descending. The aperture is angulate above, ovate.
Other features are alluded to under the description of C. Gabbi,
below. It is from ‘‘ Plateaux above the Arroya de la Purissima.”’
This is doubtless the Mission de la Purissima,
above the twenty-sixth parallel of latitude, in
W. longitude 112°.
Upon examining Gabb’s type lot of C. irrequ-
lare it became obvious at once that two species
were included therein: one (irregulare) with’ the
general features of the mainland Ccelocentrums,
the other, represented by three specimens, with
the last whorl free anteriorly and the aperture
shaped like that of Berendtia. The latter may
be described as follows :
Celocentrum minorinum var. Gabbin. vy. Fig. 1.
Shell very slender and lengthened, cylindrical
below, tapering and attenuated above, retaining
the apex perfect; thin, rather fragile, covered
with a light brown cuticle; composed of 163-184
whorls, of which the initial one is globose, the ear-
lier 44 form a cylindric or apically swollen por-
tion ; increase in the diameter of the shell begin-
ning with the fifth whorl and continuing for about
6 whorls, the remaining whorls of about equal
diameter; all whorls decidedly convex, separated
by well-impressed sutures, the last somewhat more
lengthened, a little flattened peripherally, its
latter portion becoming free ( Cylindrella-like),
the solute portion variable in length, somewhat descending, de-
552 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
cidedly carinated above, obtusely angular at base, with a slight
spiral groove within the margin of the umbilical tract, the umbili-
cus pervious but small. Sculpture: earliest 2} whorls with close,
fine, straight vertical riblets only, the next 2 whorls with the rib-
lets cut into beads by spiral strize; following whorls with strong
arcuate riblets separated by intervals of their own width, and
about 62 in number on the next-to-the-last whorl. Aperture ir-
regularly ovate, decidedly oblique, its length contained about five
and one-half times in that of the shell; peristome thin, moderately
expanded throughout, the inner margin dilated and obtusely an-
gular in the middle; columella slightly concave, a little exca-
vated below. Internal column rather slender, smooth, oblique and
slightly gibbous below, less swollen within each whort than in C.
irregulare.
Alt. 24.5, diam. of Jast whorl above aperture 4.5, longest axis
of aperture 4.5 mm.; diam. of second whorl 1.7 mm.
Compared with C. irregulare Gabb, this form is somewhat more
attenuated, with the latter part of the last whorl projecting
free, the aperture more oblique and of a wholly different form,
strongly resembling that of Berendtia Taylori. The riblets are
more slender and threadlike; finally the retention of the early
whorls may be another difference, but too few specimens of
either species are known to warrant insistence upon this character
at present.
This form differs from C. Digueti in being smaller, with fewer
whorls, without sculpture between the riblets, and with scarcely
any observable twist to the columella. It is evidently more nearly
allied to C. minorina; but the riblets are arcuate rather than
“* fere rectilineis ;’ only the third and fourth whorls have spiral
granulose striz; the last whorl can hardly be said to be ‘‘ versus
suturam angulato, dorso obtusissime carinato ;’’ the aperture is not
“«naululum obliqua,’’ but decidedly oblique; and the columella is
simply concave above, channeled at base, not ‘‘torta, /eviter ineras-
sata.’? Whether these differences indicate specific distinction can-
not well be decided in the absence of a figure or dimensions of
Mabille’s species, or of specimens for comparison.
In the figure the sculpture is omitted, except on the earlier and
later whorls.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 5d3
Celocentrum Eisenianum n. sp. Fig. 2.
Shell excessively slender and lengthened, the upper half much
- attenuated, retaining the apex in adult individuals; thin, rather
fragile, light brown. Whorls 21-22, the first
globose, the second slightly wider, then decreasing
slightly in calibre to the fifth; the earlier 44 whorls
thus forming a pupoid or slightly club-shaped nepi-
onie portion, below which the diameter slowly
increases; Jast 4 or 5 whorls of nearly equal diam-
eter. All whorls strongly convex; the last whorl a
trifle flattened peripherally, its latter third becoming
free and deviating tangentially somewhat, the free
portion carinated above, having a cordlike keel
about the umbilical region below. Umbilicus small.
Sculpture: first 24 whorls bearing very close, fine,
aelicate vertical riblets; next 2 whorls with these
riblets cut into granules by spiral decussating lines;
following whorls with close, fine, slightly arcuate
ribiets, about 47 in number on the next-to-last
whorl. Aperture decidedly oblique, rhombic, its
length contained nearly eight times in that of the
shell; peristome thin, continuous, slightly ex- |
panded throughout. :
Alt. 25.5, diam. of last whorl above aperture
2.7, length of aperture 3 mm.; diam. of second
whorl 1.3 mm.
Lower California (Fred L. Button).
This species differs from C. minorinum Gabbi in the following
respects: With the same length it has a much more slender form,
more numerous and narrower whorls, coarser costulation and a
smaller aperture. The apical whorls are, moreover, rather more
club-shaped. It is not closely related to any other species known.
Celocentrum irregulare (Gabb). Figs. 3, 4.
After eliminating the specimens of C. minorinum Gabbi, there
remain four imperfect examples of this species in the collection
presented by Gabb to the Academy. Two of these are young or
broken shells, showing only the tapering early growth, without the
embryonic whorls. They are about 11 mm. long. Another (fig.
554 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
3) is Gabb’s figured type, which likewise lacks the attenuated early
portion; and the fourth example is an adult shell
of which only the lower 34 whorls remain (fig.
4). The apical characters are therefore still to
be ascertained, as well as the total number of
whorls, although the species will
probably prove to be constantly /
truncated when adult.
The type (fig. 3, sculpture
omitted) retains 12 whorls,
which are convex and sculp-
tured Jike those of B. minori-
num Gabbi, except that the rib-
lets are stronger. The whorls
are shorter, so that a greater
number is contained in the same
length of shell than in the other
species mentioned. There are 58 riblets on the
next-to-the-last whorl. The last whorl does not
in the least become free but remains adnate, as in
the Mexican species. The aperture is rounded,
squarely truncate above, and but very slightly oblique, the peri-
stome is moderately expanded, the outer and basal margins arcuate,
columellar margin broadly dilated; parietal margin adnate to the
preceding whorl, nearly straight and nearly horizontal. The
figured type (fig. 3), which is decollate, measures: Alt. 19, diam-~
above aperture 4.2 mm. ; ali. of aperture 3.5mm. Another speci-
men (fig. 4), broken, but with the aperture perfectly adult, meas-
ures: Diam. above aperture 4.8mm. ; aperture, alt. 4, diam. 4mm.
C. irregulare is much like the species of the Mexican mainland
except in being smaller and especially more slender. All the speci-
mens known are bleached to a faint brown tint or white.
BERENDTIA.
Berendtia was based by Crosse and Fischer upon the single species
Taylori of Pfeiffer, with which Gabb’s Cylindrella Newcombiana is
identical. The species is from the same region inhabited by
Ceelocentram irregulare. The apex of Berendtia is retained in the
adult state, asin Celocentrum minorinum Gabbi and C, Eisenianum,
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 555
but unlike most other species of that genus. Beginning with a bul-
bous tip as in C. EHisenianum, there are two finely costulate whorls;
then spiral strie appear and continue for a half whorl, when the
termination of the nepionic stage is reached and the oblique
costulation of the adult stage begins. The apical characters are
therefore essentially as in Cclocentrum. The aperture is ovate
with free and entire peristome, very similar to that of Celocentrum
minorinum Gabbi.
The only feature remaining to differentiate Berendtia from
Celocentrum is the extremely slender axis, imperforate throughout.
It is evident that Berendtia is a tangent from Celocentrum, and
distinguished from certain Lower Californian species of that genus
solely by the reduction of the columella from a tube to a solid
style, as in the genus Eucalodium.
556 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
SONORELLA, A NEW GENUS OF HELICES.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.
In a former volume of these Proceedings,’ the writer in collab-
oration with Prof. Cockerell established a new genus for certain
externally Polygyra-like Helices from Arizona and New Mexico,
under the name Ashmunelia. It was there stated, with some
reserve (p. 191), that ‘‘Ashmunella is a member of the Belogona
euadenia or Asiatic-American group of dart-bearers, which has lost
the dart apparatus and developed apertural characters of the shell
similar to those of Polygyra.’’ So far as exterior and shell are
concerned, Ashmunella converges so completely to the Polygyra
type that the most experienced malacologists in America were
deceived, although, if my view be correct, their phylogenetic his-
tory has been widely different.
It was therefore with unusual interest that I found that alcoholic
specimens of ‘‘ Epiphragmophora’’ hachitana Dall, recently for-
warded by the Rev. E. H. Ashmun, confirm the position in classi-
fication proposed for Ashmunella, or at least they supply a new
genus allied to Ashmunel/a in the degeneration of the appendages
of the sexual organs, while some other viscera and the shell have
the characters of the Belogonous genus Epiphragmophora.*
SONORELLA n. g.
Gen. Char.—Shell umbilicate, depressed heliciform, similar to
Epiphragmophora, but neither malleate nor spirally striate; uni-
form or having a dark shoulder-band usually pale-bordered; the
lip more or less expanded. Genitalia without accessory organs on
the 2 side, the spermatheca globose on a very long duct; vagina
long; penis small, continued in a much longer epiphallus, the
lower portion of which is embraced by the penis retractor; flagel-
1 Proc. A. N. 8S. Phila. 1899, p. 188. See also 1900, p. 107.
2 Conf. note on a young specimen of F. hachitana received from Prof.
Cockerell, this volume, p. 109, last paragraph.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 557
lum extremely small. Jaw high, arcuate, with few (five or six)
strong ribs grouped in the median part. Teeth with side cusps
obsolete on centrals and laterals, otherwise as in Ashmunella and
many other ground Helices. Salivary glands connected merely by
some narrow bands above. Lung with simple pulmonary vein or
‘* rachis,’’ the venation chiefly transverse and on the intestinal side;
double the length of kidney. Kidney band-like, three times the
length of the pericardium (in the type species).
Type.—Sonorella hachitana (Dall).
Distribution.—New Mexico, Arizona (and probably southern
California and adjacent portions of Lower California and Mexico).
Affinities. —Sonorella is like Ashmunella in genitalia except that
‘the spermatheca is normally developed and the epiphallus is more
embraced by the penis retractor muscle. It also agrees in the
pallial organs except that the lung is shorter. The shell differs
widely from that of Ashmunella, being like the dart-bearing Califor-
nian Helices, from which Sonorella differs greatly in genitalia, and
to a less degree in the shorter lung, with but slightly developed vena-
tion on the cardiac side of the rachis. The new genus therefore
stands decidedly nearest to Ashmunella, but in some important
characters (spermatheca, jaw and shell) it is like Epiphragmophora,
and thus is a connecting link between the two groups.
Sonorella hachitana.
The specimens examined were collected by Rev. E. H. Ashmun,
at Oak Creek, Purtyman’s, Arizona.
Genitalia (Pl. X XI, fig 5).—Atrium extremely short. Penis
slender and small, continued beyond its apex in an epiphallus of
about the same diameter, its lower portion somewhat sinuous and com-
pletely enveloped in the lower portion of the penis retractor muscle,
which has the usual insertion on the lung floor. Latter portion of
the epiphallus free, ending in an extremely short flagellum (fig.
5, fl.). The vagina is much longer than the penis; spermatheca
ovate and very large, with the duct enlarged for some distance
near it; lodged near the heart, and caught in the cephalic loop
of the aorta. Duct of the spermatheca very long and slender.
Other © organs as in Helicide generally.
Measurements: length of penis 6 mm.; of epiphallus, portion
imbedded in penis 5, free portion 6 mm.; of flagellum .7 mm.
558 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Length of vagina 8 mm.; of spermatheca and its duct 35 mm.;
diam. of spermatheca 3.5 mm.
Pallial tract (Pl. X-XI, fig. 2).—Lung reticulation almost wholly
confined to the intestinal side, where the venation is transverse
and branching. Cardiac side almost plain, with only a few faint
branches, except toward the anterior extremity. Pulmonary vein
simple and direct, with no large branches.
Kidney half the length of the lung, three times that of the
pericardium, narrow and band-like. Ureter reflexed, as usual.
Digestive tract.— Jaw (Pl. X XI, fig. 4) similar to that of many
Epiphragmophora species, short and stout, with five or six strong
ribs a little wider than their intervals, and grouped in the median
portion, denticulating both margins; the ends of the jaw smooth.
Teeth (PI. XXI, fig. 3), 37, 1, 37; 13 laterals. Rachidian
with the cusp shorter than the basal plate, laterals with it longer,
the side cusps obsolete. Marginals with the cusps split, as in Ash-
munella and Polygyra.
Salivary glands (Pl. XXI, fig. 2, s.g.) long and irregular, con-
‘erescent above the crop by several bands and filaments; separate
below. Crop long and tapering. Stomach thick. Folds of the
intestine mostly exposed on the lower (inner) face of the left lobe of
the liver, part of G only immersed.
Free muscles (Pl. X XI, fig. 1).—Left ocular band uniting with
the pharyngeal retractor (on its ventral face) at about the posterior
third of the length of the latter; all the other main muscles fiee
except at the columellar insertion where they unite. Buccal retrac-
tor (ph.r. ) split into three bands anteriorly, the two lateral branches
once forked. Ocular bands giving off a group of pedal retractors,
and the tentacular retractors (7.t.7.). Tail retractor (t.r.) rather
long (pulled to the left in the figure). The right ocular retractor
passes between the dc’ and & branches of the genitalia.
COMPARISON WITH OTHER GENERA.
The genitalia of Sonorel/a agree with Ashmuned/a in wanting any
trace of dart-sack or mucous glands. The duct of the sperma-
theca is very long, as in that genus, but it expands into a large
ovate spermatheca, as in Epiphragmophora, while in Ashmunella
there is no distal enlargement. The structure of the male organs is
like Ashmunella, even in the minute vestigial flagellum; but while
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 559
Ashmunella has a double insertion of the penis retractor, which is
attached to both penis and epiphallus, in Sonorel/a the retractor
muscle envelopes the lower portion of the epiphallus, down to the
penis. This is a further development of the other structure. In
one species of the subgenus Micrarionta examined by Mr. Vanatta
and myself,* the dart-sack is much reduced in size, but the mucous
glands remain, the flagellum is long, and the right ocular retractor
does not pass between o and 2 branches of the genitalia. These
features are all unlike hachitana.
The pallial organs are much alike in Sonorella, Ashmunella* and
Epiphragmophora (exarata and fidelis the only species examined ) ;
but the venation of the cardiac side is decidedly sparser in the
former two, and the kidney is comparatively longer (or perhaps it
should be said the lung is shorter) in Sonorella, being only about
twice the length of the kidney. The proportionate length of peri-
cardium is nearly the same in Ashmunella and Sonorella. Polygyra
has a somewhat longer kidney than any of the other genera men-
tioned.
The teeth are like Ashmunella except in the obsolescence of side
cusps on the central and Jateral teeth. The jaw is decidedly like
that of Epiphragmophora in both shape and ribbing.
In the free muscles, Sonorella agrees with Ashmunella, Epi-
phragmophora fidelis and infumata, and even with Helix aspersa, in
having the left ocular and pedal band united with the pharyngeal
retractor, the right ocular and pedal band separate to its insertion.
This arrangement may prove to prevail in the whole of the Belo-
gona, though my observations so far cover too few species to gen-
eralize upon. In Polygyra a widely different arrangement obtains:
the right ocular and pedal band being united with the left to a
point anterior to the origin of the pharyngeal retractor. This
arrangement recalls Limaz, and is widely different from Sonorella
or Epiphragmophora.
3 Epiphragmophora (Micrarionta) guadalupiana Dall. These Proceed-
ings for 1898, p. 68, PI. I, fig. 11.
*The lung of Ashmunella thomsoniana portere is shown in fig. 6 of Pl.
XXI. Except for the pulmonary vein it appears plain unless viewed by traus-
mitted light, when a sparse venation similar to that of Sonorella appears,
chiefly on the intestinal side. The kidney is about 35 times the length of
the pericardium, the lung decidedly over double the length of kidney.
Measurements are as follows: total length of lung 26, of kidney 12 mm.;
and another specimen, lung 24, kidney 11 mm.; the Jast was measured from
the outside through the transparent mantle. The specimens were from the
type locality, Beulah, N. M., sent by Prof. T. D. A. Cockerell.
560 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
SPECIES OF SONORELLA.
The anatomy is known only in hachitana; but from conchologi-
cal indications, the following species, originally described as
“« Helix’’ or ‘* Epiphragmophora,’’ probably belong to Sonorella :
magdalenensis Stearns, coloradoensis Stearns,’ arizonensis Dall,
rowelli Newe., indioensis Yates and lohrii Gabb, possibly also the
true carpenteri Newc., though if Binney’s description of the gen-
italia of this species was from a correctly determined specimen, it
will belong to Epiphragmophora. In the Classified Catalogue
published in the Nautilus, p. 5 of separate copies, the new genus
will probably include numbers 29 or 50 to 35,
Sonorella is probably not much nearer Epiphragmophora in shell
characters than Ashmunella is to Polygyra; but in this case the
distribution is less restricted and compact, and the prediction of
generic position by shell characters may perhaps not have the
brilliant fufillment that further material has demonstrated in the
case of Ashmunella. Still I feel some confidence in the list as
given.
This is the third American genus of Belogona established since
the publication of my Guide to the Study of Helices, in 1895, the
others being Ashmunedda Pils. and Ckll. and Metostracon Pils. In
internal structure the American Belogona euadenia are vastly
more varied than any known in the Old World.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXI.
1. Sonorella hachitana (Dall). Free muscles, dorsal aspect,
the tail retractor brought to the left side. /.r., left la-
bial retractor; pn.7., pharyngeal retractor; pp.r., pedal
retractors; r.o.t.7., right ocular tentacle retractor ;
r.t.r., right tentacular retractor; ¢.r., tail retractor.
Fig. 2. Pallial region and digestive tract, Xx 2, G*, G*, second
and fourth folds of the intestine; &., kidney; m., Man-
tle; p., pneumostome; s.¢., salivary g ‘glands; u., ureter.
Fi
vw (o}
Fig. 3. Teeth.
Fig. 4. Jaw.
Fig. 5. Genitalia. epi., epiphallus; jl., flagellum; p., penis;
p.r., retractor muscle of the penis ; sp., spermatheca;
Sp. d., duct of the spermatheca.
Fig. 6, As shmunella thomsoniana portere P. and C. Pallial organs.
2 I have not seen authentic specimens of coloradoe? nsis and arizonensis
and insert them with some reserve.
1900. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 561
ON THE ZOOLOGICAL POSITION OF PARTULA AND ACHATINELLA.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY, SC.D.
The classification of the land snails has an attraction ‘for the
systematic or morphological malacologist disproportionate to the
rank of the group; and once entered upon, the phylogenetic prob-
Jems presented for solution are surpassed in interest by those of no
other group, unless it be the Chitons. The great amount of work
along sound lines that has been done since the days of Beck and
Held has merely opened the mine, as it were; and the wealth in
sight is more abundant than our generation can develop.
In dealing with Partula and Achatinella’ it appears that nothing
yet written upon their structure and its meaning goes to the root
of the matter. Fischer, in his admirable Manuwe/, subordinates
Partula to Bulimulus as a subgenus, and places the family
Achatinellide between the Stenogyride and the Succineide.
Kobelt* considers Partula to be closely allied to Placostylus, a
genus of the Bulimulide; and others have held a like opinion.
Semper grouped Partula with Placostylus, but in his posthumous
appendix on the pulmonate kidney, he recognizes that it has the
basommatophorous arrangement of kidney and ureter (p. 70).
It is generally agreed that the primary division of the Stylom-
matophores into Monotremata and Ditremata® is a just one, though
the fact expressed in the names has a significance quite secondary
to that of the diverse modification of the pallial organs in the two
groups.
From the Monotr neta arose a lateral line, profoundly modified
in the structure of cae lung, ete., the ee mas or Janel-
1] have been assisted in the examination of these snails ae Mr. E. G.
Vanatta.
2 Syst. Conchyl. Cabinet, edit. 2, Placostylus, p. 5, 1891.
3 J used the more expressive term Teletremata in my Catalogue of Ameri-
can Land Shells, but as stability is better than meaning in nomenclature,
the innovation was probably unwise.
562 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
lide. Our knowedge of the morphology of this branch is largely
due to Dr. Ludwig Plate, who proposes the term Tracheopulmonata
for the Janellide, the remainder of the monotremate group taking
that of Vasopulmonata.
The two groups Ditremata and Tracheopulmonata are strongly
specialized, and far from the main line of descent of the mass of
the Stylommatophores.
The group of Vasopulmonata, comprising a vast majority of the
air-breathing snails, has been divided into families by characters
of the jaw, teeth, shell, caudal pore, scarcely any two authors
agreeing in the number or limits of the families so established.
No one can review the classifications given by various authors dur-
ing the past decade without being impressed by the chaotic condition
of the subject. This is largely due to the use of external or peri-
pheral organs in taxonomy; the jaw, teeth, caudal pore and form
of the shell being directly acted upon by external conditions or
food, consequently changing rapidly, and subject to deceptive
convergent development.
The truly primary divisions of the Vasopulmonata rest upon the
modifications of the pallial region. In one series of forms, of
which Buliminus, Partula and Achatinella are prominent members,
the ureter passes directly forward from the kidney, toward the
anterior margin of the lung. This is also, as is well known, the
condition of these organs in the Basommatophora, or fresh-water
Pulmonata, which have been generally, and I believe rightly, con-
sidered ancestral to the Stylommatophora.* Compare Partula
(Pl. XVII, fig. 8) and Limnea (Pl. XVII, fig. 2). This direct
form of kidney and ureter, together with various other characters,
indicates, in my opinion, that Partuda and its fellows with a direct
ureter are members of an ancient and ancestral group lying at the
very base of the vasopulmonate phylum. This group I propose to
call Orthurethra.
In all the other groups of Vasopulmonata the position of the
ureter relative to other pallial organs has been changed, though
least in the Succineide and certain macrodgonous genera. From
the apex of the kidney the ureter is abruptly reflexed, passing to
the posterior end of the lung-cavity. Thence an open groove or
* Compare Semper, Reisen im Archip. Phil., III, zweites Erginzungsheft,
py <0.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 563
-a closed tube continues across to the last fold of the gut, which it
follows forward to the mantle-edge. This continuation of the
ureter is morphologically merely a narrow strip of the erating
surface of the lung set apart by a slight ridge to form a canal, or,
in more advanced forms, a tube. It has been aptly called the
“secondary ureter,’’ or the gut ureter—Darmharnleiter of Ger-
man anatomists. The snails having this sigmoid form of ureter
(Pl. XVII, fig. 6) I propose to segregate as a group, Sigmurethra,
taxonomically standing equal in rank to its parent group, the
‘Orthurethra. The open or closed condition of the secondary
‘ureter is a matter of very little importance. The backward flexure
-of the primary or true ureter is the significant character, indicating
as it does a total change in the route by which the ‘‘ urine’’ is
‘conducted from the system.
The group Orthurethra consists, so far as I know, of some four
‘or five families, not separated by characters of great importance.
‘The Sigmurethra, on the other hand, contains numerous family
-groups of very unequal relationships inter se. The further division
-of the group is based upon characters of the foot, lung, central
nervous system, radula, etc.,° the main outlines or skeleton of the
-system being about as follows:
I. Margin of the foot defined by grooves, etc., . AULACOPODA.
II. No pedal grooves.
A. None of the teeth of the aculeate or thorn-like type;
jawepresent, distinct; . . . 5. : . «+ HoLopona:
B. All of the teeth aculeate, thorn-shaped; jaw often obso-
lete. Carnivorous.
a, Cerebral ganglia concentrated, in close contact,
AGNATHOMORPHA.
8. Cerebral ganglia separated, a rather long commis-
sure connecting them, . . . .'. AQGNATHA.
* Full discussion of the divisions of Sigmurethra is not practicable in this
rplace as it will require extensive illustration. Moreover, material in some
families is still eluding me. I have therefure not attempted a partial treat-
rment, but merely give a synopsis of results.
564 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900-.
The system of Vasopulmonata may then be roughly tabulated
thus :
Partulide.
Subdivisions, if | Papide.
f Orthurethra. any, to be de- + ? Valloniide.
[ termined. ? Cochlicopidze.
Achatinellide-
Heterurethra. Elasmognatha. Succineide.
Acavide.
Helicide.
| Holopoda. Bualimulide.
Vasopulmonata. + Urocoptide.
Clausiliide.
| Achatinidz.
4 Glandinide-
Agnathomorpha, | Rbytididze.
Streptaxidx.
Circinariidz.
Sigmurethra. + | Agnatha. Testacellidx-
Zonitide.
Limacide.
Aulacopoda. Endodontide.
| Arionide.
Philomycide.
Probably there are some other groups of family value, though,
of course, no anatomist could multiply families with the liberal
hand of some recent writers.
The family Acavide is here understood to be equivalent to the
Acavine of my arrangement of Helices, with the addition of
Strophocheilus, which forms a remarkable and archaic subfamily.
The Helicide is not the group so called by Fischer, but stands
as defined in Man. Conch. (2), ix, minus the Macroégona. Cir-
cinariide is a new name for Selenitide, Selenites being preoccupied.
I have elsewhere discussed the families of Aulacopoda. The
Urocoptide (Cylindrellide) and Pupide haye been sadly mixed
by Fischer; the former family has been the subject of a paper by
Mr. Vanatta and myself.° Other families need no special remark.
The foregoing is sufficient to show the general position in the
system of Achatinella and Partula, which may now be considered
in more detail. What follows is the joint work of Mr. E. G.
Vanatta and myself.
Partula rosea Brod.
The specimens dissected were collected by Andrew Garrett.
Pallial organs (Pl. XVII, fig. 8).—The pulmonary vein is the
6 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1898, p. 264.
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 565
only blood-vessel visible on the lung wall, the general surface being
‘smooth, densely peppered with white specks in parallel liues; the
heart is placed obliquely against the kidney (fig. 8, &.), which is
short and triangular. From the apex of the kidney arises the
ureter (fig. 8, u.), which runs directly forward, opening by a
lateral pore at its end, which is remote from the mantle edge.
Digestive system.—The’ jaw and teeth have been described by
Binney and others. There is a fusiform crop and moderately
dilated stomach (fig. 8).
Genitalia (Pl. XVII, fig. 1).—The penis is quite stout with ter-
ninal retractor, and divided internally into a lower, coarsely wrinkled
portion and an upper densely granulose and coarsely plicate por-
tion. The vas deferens opens above a papilla at about the lower
third of the granulose part. The vas deferens is bound to the
penis, to the vagina and basal portion of the spermatheca (the
adnate portion being shown by dotted lines in fig. 1); it is then
free as far as the upper portion of the oviduct, where it is again
shortly adnate. The ovisperm duct is strongly knotted as usual.
The basal portion or duct of the spermatheca is much swollen,
the upper part being conspicuously smaller and tapering. There
is an egg in the oviduct in the preparation figured.
. Free muscles (Pl. XVII, fig. 4).—The buccal retractor is free to
its proximal insertion. At about the middle of its length the left
ocular and tentacular retractor joins it, and a little further out the
anterior foot retractors branch off. ‘The broad posterior pedal or
tail retractor is united far forward with the right ocular and tenta-
cular retractor, which gives off a group of anterior pedal retractors
(fig. 4). The right ocular retractor passes between 3 and @
branches of the genitalia.
This muscle system differs from that of Achatinella chiefly in
the union of the right ocular retractor with the tail retractor. In
the latter genus both ocular retractors are free.
Achatinella dolei Baldwin.
The specimens dissected were received from Mr. D. D. Baldwin.
Pallial organs (Pl. XVII, fig. 3).—The broad pulmonary vein
is the only couspicuous blood-vessel. The surface of the lung is
heavily pigmented and intensely black, except anteriorly near the
rectum, where it is paler. It is traversed by very fine veins trans-
verse to the pulmonary vein. The heart lies parallel with the
37
566 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900-
kidney. The anterior end of the pericardium and the adjacent
surface of the kidney are blotched and dotted with black pigment.
The kidney is bulbous or ovate, passing into a wide, pale-colored
ureter, which runs directly forward nearly to the anterior edge of
the mantle. From its apex a narrow ridge or thread runs back-
ward ashort distance on the side toward the rectum; the space
between this thread and the ureter having the pigment arranged in
oblique striz.
Digestive system (Pl. XVII, fig. 3).—The jaw and teeth of Achati-
nella have frequently been figured, and need not be described here.
The salivary glands (s.g. and fig. 3a) are united above and
below the cesophagus, forming a complete ring. The cesophagus is
Jong and unusually sjender, not dilated into a crop. The stomach
is much lengthened, curved at the end. Intestine unusually long,
especially the fourth fold (fig. 3, on the right side).
Genitalia (Pl. X VU, fig. 7).—The external orifice is on the left
side, as usual in sinistral species. The penis is moderate in length,
cylindrical, with terminal retractor muscle and vas deferens.
From the middle of its length arises a very long, vermiform appen-
dix (ap.), which is irregularly coiled, and between the lower third
and fourth of its length is conspicuously constricted for a short
distance. Near the base of the appendix a branch of the retrac-
tor muscle is inserted, passing to the apex of the penis. The
lumen of the penis is narrowed above by two large pilasters, at the
apicai end of which the vas deferens enters. The orifice commu-
nicating with the cavity of the appendix is situated at the lower
end of one of the pilasters.
The vas deferens is completely free from the other organs, from
its lower insertion to the base of the albumen gland, where it
becomes adnate.
The vagina is quite short. The spermatheca is small and ovate,
upon a very long, slender duct, and is imbedded in the albumen
gland (but shown removed therefrom in the figure). There is a
long free oviduct, and a sacculated uterus, much distended by the
young contained in the individual figured. The albumen gland is
divided into slender cxeea (fig. 7a), clustered in a dense mass.
Free muscles (Pl. XVII, fig. 5).—The retractor muscles of the
tentacles are free from the tail retractor, and both divide into three
branches, ocular, tentacular and anterior pedal, at about the mid-
e
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 567
dle of their length. The left ocular band passes between ¢ and
2 branches of the genitalia. The buccal retractor (ph.r.) unites
with the left tentacular band at about the posterior fourth of the
latter; it is deeply bifurcate anteriorly. The retractor of the tail
(t.7.) is normal except in its freedom from both tentacular bands.
While Achatinella is obviously allied to Partula by the direct
ureter and plain erating surface of the lung, it differs so conspicu-
ously in other characters that no very close relationship can be
admitted. The ureter in Achatinella approaches nearer to the
anterior edge of the mantle, and has a terminal ridge, apparently
homologous with that of Limnea. The digestive system is length-
ened, though of the ordinary four-folded type. The genital
system approaches that of Buliminus in the appendix of the penis,
but is peculiar in the freedom of the vas deferens from the ovi-
duct. In this peculiarity, however, Partula shares to a great
extent, the adhesions being superficial. The unique structure ‘of
the albumen gland and its envelopment of the spermatheca are
more aberrant characters. Usually a long-stalked spermathecatis
caught with the gut by the cephalic branch of the aorta, and lies
near the heart, separated trom the albumen gland.
The family Achatinellide is apparently a group of great an-
tiquity, the archaic pallial organs and male genitalia being
associated with peculiarly specialized female reproductive organs.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVII.
Fig. 1. Portula rosea. Genitalia.
Fig. 2. Limnea stagnalis. FPallial region and digestive tract.
Fig. 3. Achatinella dolei. Pallial region and digestive tract.
Fig. 3a. Achatinella dolei. Lateral view of salivary gland.
Fig. 4. Partula rosea. Free retractor muscles, dorsal aspect.
Fig. 5. Achatinella dolei. Free retractor muscles, dorsal aspect.
Fig. 6. Rumina decollata. Pallial region and digestive tract.
Fig. 7. Achatinella dolei. Genitalia.
Fig. 7a. Achatinella dolei. More enlarged tubules of the albumen
gland.
Fig. 8. Partula rosea. Pallial region
ap., appendix ; k., kidney; /.0.7., left ocular retractor ;
l.t.r., left tentacular retractor; ph., pharynx; s.g., sal-
ivary gland; sp., spermatheca; s.u., secondary ureter;
tr., tail retractor; w., ureter.
568 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
THE GENESIS OF MID-PACIFIC FAUNAS.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.
‘The new system and implied phylogeny of the Vasopulmonata
outlined in my paper on Partula and Achatinella throw a new
light upon the constitution of the island faunas of the Pacific, and
reopen the whole discussion of their origin and distribution.
Within the last decade a South Pacific continent, stretching its
great arc from New Zealand to Chili, has been postulated by Dr.
von Ihering’ and Professor Hutton,* while Dr. G. Baur* has also
adduced evidences toward a similar conclusion. This hypothesis
will be alluded to below. The views of Wallace regarding these
faunas, based upon the absence of amphibia and terrestrial mam-
mals, and upon certain geological considerations, have been accepted
by the great majority of zoogeographers, who hold that the Poly-
nesian faunas have been forever insular, and have derived their
constituents from circum-Pacific continents by over-sea drift, and
by wind or birds carrying animals or their eggs.
To the student of vertebrates such conclusions seem justified by
the facts; but a little reflection shows one that opinions based upon
the distribution of vertebrates may require radical revision when
1 Trans. New Zealand Institute, XXIV, 1892, ‘‘On the Ancient Relations
between New Zealand and South America.’’
2 Proc. Linn. Soc. of New South Wales, 1896, p. 36, ‘‘ Theoretical Expla-
nations of the Distribution of Southern Faunas.’’ Professor Hutton has given
so full a summary of the principal literature bearing upon the subject, that
T feel it unnecessary to lengthen the present communication by a bibliography.
Two Strong papers upon similar topics have appeared in the same periodical
since Hutton’s paper—Deane’s “ President’s Address,’”’ P. L. S N.S. W. for
1896, p. 821, and Hedley’s ‘‘ A Zoogeographic Scheme for the Mid-Pacific,’’
1899, p. 391.
8 American Naturalist, XX XI, 1897.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 569
invertebrate groups are taken into consideration. This is especially
true in zoogeographic matters because the higher groups have
changed rapidly, the lower slowly. Many genera of land snails
reach back to the oligocene unchanged save in specific characters,
and there can be no reasonable doubt that the modern family
groups of these snails diverged far back in mesozoic time; yet
how complete a revolution the brief pliocene wrought in mammalian
life! A land mass isolated in, say, mid-tertiary or oligocene times,
would necessarily be lacking in many important mammalian genera
and families developed subsequently, yet it might be quite identical
in molluscan genera with the tract from which it was insulated.
The existing families and genera of even the reptiles and batrach-
ians do not have the antiquity of groups of the same nominal rank
among non-marine mollusks. But no especial argument need be
made here in support of the thesis that the rate of structural dijfer-
entiation has been constantly accelerated as animals rose higher in the
scale; and therefore it follows that zoogeographic ‘‘ provinces ”’
based upon the distribution of land snails or earthworms, for
instance, recall older arrangements of sea and land than those
based upon the distribution of terrestrial vertebrates—mammals
and birds.
_ Now upon glancing at the table of mid-Pacific faunas on p. 576,
the student of continental molluscan faunas will first notice the
great rarity of Holopoda, and the total absence of Aynathomorpha
and Agnatha, and of the more specialized and presumably late
Aulacopod families Limacide, Arionide, Philomycide, as well as
the highly organized forms of Zonitide with complicated genitalia,
such as the Ariophantine.. This leaves a fauna composed almost
exclusively of Orthurethra, Elasmognatha, and the less specialized
families of Aulacopoda. The land operculates are chiefly Realiide
and Helicinide ; and in the fresh-water faunas, Limnea, Planor-
bis and Physa of the continents give place to ‘‘ Bulinus,’’ a stock
probably ancestral to Planordis; and ‘‘Melania’’ alone represents
the prosobranchs.
The significance of a fauna so constituted becomes startling when
we consider that the Orthurethra are a little-changed remnant of
the parent stock of all Vasopulmonata; the Elasmognatha are an
early branch of this stock, while the Aulacopoda are unquestion-
ably, on anatomical grounds, the lowest branch of the Sigmurethra
570 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1900.
or ordinary land snails.‘ Is not the whole fauna what we would
expect in a region populated near the time of divergence of the
earlier groups of Vasopulmonates, and isolated since? Or, to state
the question in its bald entirety:
Are the mid-Pacific snail faunas witnesses to the existence of a
paleozoie or early mesozoic land mass, probably continental in pro-
portions, and peopled by representatives of nearly all land-snail
groups then existing ?
A negative answer implies the alternate™hypothesis that these
faunas are assemblages of waifs, the survivors of many a precari-
ous voyage. An affirmative answer should give reasons for the
supposition of more extended land area than now exists, and for
the geologic date assigned.
The primitive or antique character of the Polynesian faunas,
commented on above, may be graphically represented by a table,
in which the families and genera of land;Pulmonates of continents
*See these Proceedings, p. 564, for a sketch of the classification of Pulmo-
nates. The earlier phylogeny of the main groups may be roughly represented
by the following diagram :
&
Succinea, ete.
Partula,
Achatinella,
ete
Aulacopoda
Holopoda
a
e ~
~
S $
s ey
S D
- A
(5) >
2 ‘S|
= 3
a0
os a
3
=
a
cp
>
~
5
a
—
EL
=
~
Basommatophora
The line 7-7 may represent the degree of differentiation reached hal the
Pacific land-faunas were established. Subsequent differentiation is not rep-
resented on the diagram.
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 571
or continental islands are contrasted with those of the mid-Pacific.
T select continental North America, Great Britain and the Philip-
pine Islands for this purpose, merely because good recent lists lie
on my desk ;° but practically the same results would be seen were
I to contrast South America, the Antilles, Africa, Europe or
Australia with the Pacific archipelagos.
Great Britain.
United States,
Polynesia.
| Philippines,
DITREMATA : ®
Veronicellidz, Rathouisiide ...........
ORTHURETHRA :
PAMHAHITIC IIMS. . cccceecscssc etseeccsscocsssces
TESST DD 258 54 ase eon ore acc an eeranee 3
TESTI DY < ccatcqoe sn ccOcc ee IU SCEC DEED See ee TOPCO
HETERURETHRA:
PUM ITTOTEL Serene cases ectes con smnccedeeieacewcee
SIGMURETHRA : (Aulacopoda):
PAMUEDIG Hine nce seen eee sees cebes wo eeseb cesses. |
NAT ROTOR Dee ces casos aco ds. ocsceescaccaeeeohs
TDA T TIGR ok crete ene Re eee ee |
BATT HIG ces encore es civics one Sade cpaicssveiess zi
AWG UY C1W a ecsess-nsascescacsceas-s-s5s<s-5-
[w)
_
we
oO
vo
oC
[\)
be
ay
=
18
wo or
oo
W W 8 OO
bt =F ew
(Agnatha aud Agnathomorpha):
PRGSGACENITGse Geceascincecss=coaccecasesscctecess ak |
Glam GIN eso ces ess ccccessscces ces cavsca-oeee | | i al
SERED DERI GEE Weaneosace<e sac scscseccee<soecses se
ROAD cacceoes cece towcrccavatccee case leat |
{ Holopoda):
MGIC ase ence ones cone cc asessceecs sss oteseacte 11
MES EUUVPYRIDING SBiricacecsoctcercsescesasiscenccecnce 1
WGCOUhUE se cecsscccosccecsessccs acess cs seasc
ANGE G EE Re ere
Circe i a et | 4
tw)
“I
me
or
(oe)
* In tabulating the genera I have taken a few liberties with the Concholog-
ical Society’s British list, in subdividing their ‘‘Helix’’ group, and with
Dr. von Moellendorft’s Philippine list in lumping some of his families of
Holopoda. These changes are made merely that the values of the groups
used may be more uniform. To count families and genera in the three lists
as they stand would give a false idea.
6 Existing Ditremata may be looked upon as excessively modified from a
very old branch of Pulmonates. I cannot accept Dr. von Ihering’s theory of
the primitive structure of Vaginulus, or the homology of the Stylommato-
phore lung with a renal duct.
™The Polynesian Zonitide are all unspecialized genera, the Philippine
mainly of more complex structure, and the British and American partly so.
This family is used here in the conventional sense, synonymous with
Fischer’s Stenogyride. We know little of the structure of many small mem-
bers, but probably they will group in two rather widely separated families.
572 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Note that the Sigmurethra in North America number 11 family
groups and 47 genera (with a vast preponderance of species), to 3.
families and 7 genera of all other (lower) Stylommatophores. In
Polynesia there are only about as many genera of Sigmurethra as
of Orthurethra, and nearly the whole of the former belong to low
and primitive types of Aulacopoda.
But, it may be objected, oceanic faunas are thus unsymmetrical
from the very nature of the accidental means by which oceanic
islands have been populated. Granted; but is there any reason
why the occasional and unusual vehicles by which such population
is effected should act with exclusive discrimination against whole
series of higher groups, in favor of the lower? It is very easy to
show that snails may have been carried from place to place by a
hurricane, a floating tree or ‘‘ floating island,’’ or their eggs may
find room in the pellet of earth clinging to a bird’s feather; but it
is incumbent upon the theorist who peoples the mid-Pacific islands
by such means to show why such dominant groups as the Helicide,
Bulimulide, Rhytidide, Streptaxide—in fact, the whole Holopoda
and Agnathomorpha, with higher members of Aulacopod families,
as well as the higher operculates—should have utterly failed to
take advantage of these means of transport.
To the possible objection that low forms survive an ocean voyage
better than high, may be urged the fact that such has not been the
case in Madeira, the Azores, Cape Verdes, St. Helena or Bermuda,
in all of which Holopod groups occur, and in many cases were
estublished long enough ago to become generically or specifically
differentiated. To the further objection that the primitive groups
may adapt themselves more readily to new environments, the same
argument applies. Moreover, it is well known that the most suc-
cessful emigrants of all snails are species of the highly organized
or specialized Helicide, Achatinide, Limacide and Arionide,
which have followed modern agriculture and commerce all over the
world. Although a number of snails have been introduced by
commerce into Polynesia from the East Indies, Europe or America,
I know of no single case of a Polynesian snail becoming
acclimated in any other part of the world.
The advocate of a Polynesian waif fauna is then compelled to
adopt the view either that accessions to the mid-Pacifie snail faunas
practically stopped a long time ago, from causes unknown or
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 573.
hypothetical, or that an unparalleled series of accidents intervened
to prevent the, in recent times, ubiquitous and prominent continental
groups of snails from effecting a landing in these islands.
Wallace derives the Polynesian faunas from his Australian
region, mainly on the evidence of the birds. But no such idea can
be entertained regarding the snails. In a rich development of
Endodontide, the two areas agree; but that family is of world-
wide distribution and known great antiquity, and therefore proves
nothing. Nowhere in Australia, New Zealand or adjacent islands
do we find a parent stock for the most characteristic of Polynesian
groups, the Orthurethra. Australia itself has of this group only
modern continental types of Pupide—-Pupa, Pupoides and Bifid-
aria,* which probably reached that continent with the epiphallo-
gonous Helices, from an East Asiatic center. If there were earlier
Australian Orthurethra, they became wholly extinct before the
higher snail groups which have long occupied Australian soil.
Most of the Pupide (except Bifidaria) and the few other Orthu-
rethra, such as TYornatellina and Partula, which extend into.
Melanesia, etc., are Polynesian in their affinities, and evidently to
be regarded as outlying colonies from that centre, derived from the
western edge of the Pacific land. Far from being a faunal depen-
dency of the Australian or Oriental regions, Polynesia has every
appearance of being a region which started with a fauna long
antedating the present Australian and Oriental faunas, developing
along its own lines, retaining old types because they did not come
into competition with the higher groups developed on the greater
and less isolated continents.” It is significant that the typical
Polynesian groups attain their acme of structural as well as specific
differentiation in the mid-Pacifie Society and Hawaiian groups.
Were these faunas derived from waifs drifted, blown or otherwise
carried from the Australian or Oriental regions, we might reason-
ably expect a diminution from the West outward, such as the
Azores show compared with Madeira, or Bermuda compared with
the Bahamas.
On the supposition that Polynesia has always had the constitu-
® These Proceedings, p. 426.
10 Tt seems characteristic of islands that while specific differentiation usually
proceeds apace, more fundamental! changes are retarded, or perhaps, more prop-
erly, are not induced ; and the faune lag behind those of the continents, old
types lingering on.
574 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
tion the name implies, it is difficult to see why agencies which
introduced representatives of some eight families of snails into the
Hawaiian group should totally fail to act during the late me-
sozoic and tertiary. Even Wallace felt that some explanation was
called for, and speaks vaguely of the ‘‘ extensive shoals to the
south and southwest ’’ and ‘‘ two deep submarine banks in the
north Pacific between the Sandwich Islands and San Francisco.’’™
Dr. G. Baur, in discussing the Galapagos fauna, applied the
terms ‘‘ harmonic ’’ and ‘‘ disharmonic’’ to island faunas and floras.
The fauna or flora of a continental island will be harmonie,
because it will share the several groups of the parent continent in
due proportion. An island elevated from the sea bottom and not
connected with other Jand will have a disharmonie fauna and flora
—‘‘ that is to say, it will be composed of a mixture of forms which
have been introduced accidentally from other places.”’
It is almost inconceivable that a number of widely separated
islands of oceanic origin should agree or be harmonic among each
other in their faunal constituents; but taking the Polynesian groups
included in or adjacent to a triangle with the Hawaiian Islands,
Marquesas and Samoan groups at the angles, we find a remarkable
agreement between their faunas. Comparing any one with the
nearest continental faunas of to-day, they seem disharmonic; but
among themselves there exists a remarkable homogeneity; and if we
compare them with what the continental faunas must have been
shortly after the divergence of the Holopod from the Aulacopod
Sigmurethra, it will be seen that Polynesia now possesses representa-
tives of what must have then been all the main groups of Vasopul-
monata; and the preponderance of Orthurethra is precisely what
would be expected.
The harmonic characters of these faunas is the more striking
when we compare them with the Atlantic islands admitted to be
«* oceanic’? —Madeira, the Azores and the Cape Verdes. In these
islands the genera are all clearly derived from Eur-African sources,
being all either genera still existing on the mainland, or more
nearly allied to existing or tertiary European groups than to those
Tn writing that ‘‘none of these oceanic archipelagos present us with a
single type which we may suppose to have been preserved from mesozoic
times’? (1. c., p. 305), Wallace makes a statement totally at variance with
the nature of their land mollusks.
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 575
of any other part of the world. Only two genera are common to
the three isiand groups and the mainland, and but one other genus
is common to the three archipelagos. Madeira and the Azores
have 7 genera in common, and Madeira and the Cape Verdes 7;
only 4 of these being identical in both cases, and this in a total
fauna of 21 genera, 16 of which are common to Europe and one
or another of the island groups. We eliminate from the account
all known or presumed introductions during the period of com-
merce. The sporadic or disharmonic character of the faunas is
strikingly illustrated by the almost omnipresent Palzearctic genera
Clausilia, found only in Madeira; Helicella, wanting in the
Azores, and, further, by the distribution of Cochlicopa, Helix,
Punctum, and especially Succinea and Buliminus, both groups of
great antiquity, the former found on almost all islands, but want-
ing in the Azores and Madeira. The presence of slugs (Plutonia)
on the outlying Azores, and their absence in Madeira (until Limax
was introduced by commerce) is also notable.
The distances are much less than those sundering many of the
Pacific archipelagos, and yet their faunas are less harmonic than
those of Polynesia. And still in all probability the older elements
of these Atlantic waif faunas do not much precede the tertiary, if
at all, and additions by natural causes have continued to, I sup-
pose, the present time. Indeed, part of the common element in
the three island groups may fairly be traced to a common ancestry
in the European tertiary, rather than to actual communication
between the archipelagos themselves.
576 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Contrast, now, a table of seven widely separated Polynesian
faunas:
si lls ; 4
E I S a 5 Ss aaa
os) a e S S a is
Orthurethra: | .
Mormmakellumar.ceccrsccaseeeere desea cae Ws * * * * %
Achatinella, €bCi<ccccsctacacescsoes *
iPantllaeeece- nes SaSaneeeen geste tee aoes % * * * * He
Repaeecscm: ERD O SAS OHE Boeiotonconmnecee * * * ae * x
Hlasmognatha: |
SUCCiNeA .......s5-008 Sesion neneeaceeas ee | gee 2 Fol tae
Aulacopoda :
SBNIGLOCYSbIS smiassesmriensensasseacses * * 267) ok ae |e * *
Trochomorpha .......... peeeeet eens \ * | * 2 é
Other larger Zonitide ............. lie 3 ae * cs
MLamimUlin ates. seesacseceseec seas cee oat
Charopa ....... sabvade oe taue daattetbiewees » * coma * =f
Wridodonitas<scccsceuctetlesceereee Wh ie Bc 2 a (Mak * *
Holopoda: | |
MOWERS cope deencenases hl Sas acee Modaehen eas * | = a3 ‘G
Aquatic snails : |
CUBIS ri ncscces ssctasecseacsaseceast * ate
Melania ....... Susece Watceseucee een eecs * See ea) ee
Rhipidoglossa:
Helicina........... Baidsieae Seo cmeneesaee * * * * * * =F
iy COGENT Ge eressmeresaecoceoee actos i 3
Tenioglossa :
NRG aT de BereeteeicesiGedsee de dace meee | cate * * “3 of
DDI PLOMMALIN Nees ccaenecaeceneocene * *
OStOD ES: ss ccowascotacsocenastccwausenses fogs
The remarkable homogeneity of faunas scattered over so wide an
area as Polynesia, indicates either a former great extension and
therefore approximation of the archipelagos, or that they actually
formed parts of a single Jand mass. Although the distances be-
tween them are generally far greater than separate the Atlantic island
groups, the faunas show a much greater common element; and had
they been derived from similar sources it is difficult to see why the
Atlantic faunas should be so much less harmonic than the Pacitie.
The former moderate extension of the Hawaiian and other islands
considered probable by Wallace, while a step in the right diree-
tion, is insufficient to account for the facts. The faunas are, in
2 Pupina and Hulota also occur in the Carolines. Flammulina will
doubtless be recognized in other island groups.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 577
fact, what might be expected were they remnants of a sunken con-
tinent; and the waif theory signally fails to account for their com-
position, although no such difficulty attends its application to the
Atlantic islands.
It may fairly be asked, Why have Polynesian snail faunas failed
to be enriched by the action of those means of dispersal which
peopled the Atlantic islands? (1) Because in mid-Polynesia the
distances between islands are great, and few snails are likely to
survive the voyage, whatever the means of transport. Similarly,
in the Atlantic we find no American snails in the Azores in spite
of favoring currents. (2) There has no doubt been a certain
amount of exchange between the island groups. It is only thus
that we can explain the presence on several archipelagos of iden-
tical species. But this diffusion has been almost entirely restricted
to small or minute species, such as Pupide, Realiide, ete.
‘* With the exception of the Auriculide it [Partula hyalina] is
the only species of Polynesian land shell of its size common to two
-or three distant groups of islands. As the above statement does
not harmonize with the distribution of the various species of Poly-
nesian shells as recorded by different authors, I will add that in Dr.
Pfeitfer’s last volume of his Mon. Heliceorum, where he enumer-
-ates 77 species of Polynesian (I exclude the Melanesian and Pelew)
Partula, there exist 26 errors in localities. . . . . AJl the species
which are diffused over one or more groups are invariably minute
‘Shells.’’ _ ;
These observations by the most experienced of Polynesian natur-
alists agree with my results in studying the Bermuda fauna,™
and confirms the opinion that the whole Polynesian fauna cannot
be due to drift or chance immigrants.
In the case of Bifidaria (Pupa pediculus), Opeas juneea, and
probably some other widespread species, I think it extremely likely
that they have been carried in vessels from island to island during
the period of human occupancy; in some cases probably before the
historic period. But there doubtless are a few cases where minute
jand snails have been carried from one archipelago to another by
natural means, and over vast distances. We can hardly explain
otherwise the scanty faunas of most of the ‘‘ low’’ islands, to say
13 A. J. Garrett, in Jowrn. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., VIII, 396.
14 Trans. Conn. Acad. Sci., X, 1900.
578 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
nothing of the unquestionable occurrence of Tornatellina in the
Galapagos,” this genus being a stranger and alien in America.
In the southwestern Pacific, in and near the area where Forbes
maps his ‘‘ Antipodea’’ and Hedley his ‘‘ Melanesian Plateau,”
comparatively recent groups have invaded a portion of what prob-
ably was part of the earlier Pacific land-mass. Some of the
early fauna remains, such as Partula and Tornatellina, but merely
as stragglers in a more powerful, more recent fauna, which seems
to justify the hypothesis of an early or mid-tertiary land extending
oceanward to the Fijis,! such as Hedley and others advocate. Ob-
viously later land connections have obscured the far earlier record
in this area.
That the hypothetical Pacific continent was finally separated
from any other land as early as the middle mesozvie would seem to
be indicated by the absence of numerous families of land snails
which had become fully differentiated by the end of the mesozoic;
and it is evident that the portion north of the equator must have
been isolated before the final separation of the remainder from the
mainland, not only from the high differentiation of the Achati-
nellide, but because certain operculates and some groups of
Zonitide, such as Trochomorpha, did not reach the Hawaiian area.
To the southward, it is likely that land extended from the Mar-
quesas (whence granite and gneiss have been reported) and the
Austral group to the Fijis or further, and northwestward possibly
to the Caroline and Marianne groups, although it is obvious that
these have been influenced by their proximity to the Oriental
region, by drift or other causes, chiefly shown in the presence of
Eulota, Diplommatina and Pupina, as well as certain lizards, ete.”
Where the Pacific continent may haye touched Australo-Asiatic
land is of course quite idle to inquire at present.”
18 See Dall, these Proceedings for 1900, p. 95. Tornatellina chathamensis
is the sole species of Polynesian affinities known in the Galapagos. The
supposed Hndodonta I would refer to Strobilops,and the Trochomorpha
to Guppya, both American groups.
16 OF. Baur, Amer. Nat., 1897, p. 676, where the Batrachians and Reptiles
of the Fijis are discussed, with a summary of Wichmann’s conclusions on
their geology.
17 See vy. Moellendorff, Land Shells of the Caroline Islands, Journal of
Malacology, VII, pt. 5, 1900. Baur, Amer. Naturalist, 1897, p. 879, et seq.
18 The following extract from a letter received from Mr. Charles Hedley
contains suggestions of value in this connection :
‘‘In a recent paper on the Caroline Island land shells by Moellendorff I
have been struck by the similarity to the Tahitian fauna. Can you make
19v0,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. WAS,
It may be noted here that the distribution of ants and lizards,
from which Baur argues, affords no support to the position I have
taken, because the former, by having a winged stage, could be
much more widely spread by wind than snails, and the distribution
of recent Pacific lacertilia cannot possibly date to nearly so early
an epoch as that of Polynesian land snails, but is rather traceable
to later elevations, after the main mass of the ancient Pacific con-
tinent had been isolated or largely submerged.
Returning to the hypothesis of Hutton and Von Ihering, it
remains to examine the evidence for a connection between the sup-
posed mid or South Pacific continent and southern South America
or ‘‘ Archiplata.’’ Prof. Hutton, in his temperate and judicious
paper of 1896, says:
‘‘ The theory of a mesozoic South Pacific continent not only
explains the origin of the Australian and South American mar-
supials, but also the almost simultaneous appearance of different
Eutherian mammals in North and South America. We must sup-
pose that this continent threw off first New Zealand, then Aus-
tralia, then Chili, and finally disappeared under the waves.
°
out any sequence between the Partula from North and South Pacifie? It
would be interesting to learn that those of the Carolines were a derivative of
the Tahitian or the reverse.
“‘Now if you accept my theory that the Marshall-Anstral chain is not a
phantom but a reality, an earth-fold or line of weakness in the terrestrial
crust, then we may suppose a former more or less continous land connection
between Tahiti and the Carolines. It would have served for the transmission
of Garretia, Partula and your other primitive snails. On its connection by
drift with the Placostylus land we are agreed. In the Gilbert and the Ellice
Islands, as I have previously said, the land sank, drowning the primitive
fauna, rose again and was repopulated by drift. I am inclined to think that
the same fate overtook Samoa. That, however, on rising pressed an earth-fold
against the Fijian massif and swelled into lofty mountains. That archipelago
derived Ostodes, ete., by drift from Fiji. Hence it lacked many character-
istic forms which survived in Tahiti.
““A grave objection to your hypothesis, and one which deterred me from
valuing Tahiti as continental instead of oceanic, is that it proves too much.
Although a palzozoic continent is so far back as to be almost out of sight, still
some other forms ought to be found to support your snail fauna. 1 do not
press the fact that the insect fauna is extremely poor, since insects are held
to be of comparatively recent date. But I do press for collateral evidence
from the vegetation. I should like to see an old proteaceous genus, for ex-
ample, produced. Most ofall I emphasize the absence of any peculiar marine
mollusea. I think that Clavella is peculiar, but I have found none other.
The argument that Nautilus, Onchidium and the Polyplacophora are in-
capable of drift and though ancient forms are conspicuously absent from
Polynesia is worth careful attention. I do not lean on the absence of fossil-
iferous beds, since circumstances may be imagined under which they might
have existed and disappeared.’’
580 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1900.
At a later date, as I pointed out in my former papers, New Zealand
must have formed part of a large island joined to New Caledonia,
but not to Australia. This has lately been called Antipodea by
Dr. Forbes, and the Melanesian Plateau by Mr. C. Hedley. Still
later again, New Zealand must have stretched south and obtained
its Antarctic fauna and flora from Patagonia through a number of
islands.’’”
Notwithstanding the able arguments of Hutton and Von Ihering
for a connection between Chili and a Pacific continent, it seems to
me to involve grave, in fact insurmountable, difficulties. To have
supported a marsupial fauna, to say nothing of Eutherian mam-
mals, this continent must have persisted af /east to near the end of
the cretaceous. But if so, it is inconceivable that there should be
no trace in Polynesia of characteristic land mollusks of South
America, and none in South America of typical Polynesian groups.
It is equally inconceivable that the Pacific continent completely
disappeared under the waves about the end of the mesozoic, and
that the present islands are of later appearance; for their faunas
bear the stamp of a vastly greater antiquity, and (always except-
ing the ‘‘low’’ islands) have not the characteristics of ‘‘ drift ’’
faunas. The common elements of Australo-Zealandic and Archi-
platan life, such as marsupials, Bulimulide, crawfishes, etc., are
conspicuously absent from Polynesia, and may better, it seems to
me, be accounted for by the much-discussed Antarctic route.” I
cannot trace any connection between the mid-Pacific continent and
either of the Americas, nor with any continental mass whatever
since the time of the advent of mammals.
One of the chief difficulties in the theory herein advanced is
that many of the island groups, notably the Hawaiian, seem to be
composed of only comparatively recent voleanic and coral rocks.
In this connection Wichmann (as quoted by Baur) remarks: ‘‘ No
older massive rocks or sedimentary strata are known from the other
‘* voleanic ’’ groups of islands of the Pacific Ocean, and on some
of these, for example, the Galapagos or the Sandwich Islands—it
seems really to be made out that they have been built up by
19 Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1896, p. 46.
0'The only Polynesian type in America known to me is Tornatellina, in
the Galapagos, as already noted. A minute straggler or two may reasonably
be expected. The present fauna of ‘‘Archiplata’’ is as remote as any on
earth from that of Polynesia.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 581
younger and recent voleanie masses. There is every possibility,
and even probability, however, that older formations served as a
fundament, the examination of which is prevented by the exten-
sive covering.”’ 3
Hedley urges the weighty objection that mesozoic plant forms
should have survived on so ancient a land. Possibly, the great
facility with which seeds may be transported over sea allowed a
new flora to displace the old one.
SUMMARY.
The hypothesis of a late palseozoic or early mesozoic mid-Pacifie
continent (upon the sunken heights of which the present island-
masses, volcanic or coral, have been superposed) is advanced to
account for the constitution of Polynesian land-snail faunas, which
are shown to be (1) nearly homogeneous over vast areas, (2) com-
posed of ancient types, with no admixture of the great series of
modern families, and (5) not derivable from any tertiary or mod-
ern continental fauna or faunas in the sense Atlantic island faunas
have been derived. The mollusca, land and marine, supply no
evidence that this Pacific continent was ever connected with or
faunally affected by the Americas, but emphatically deny such
connection.
582 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
A PARTIAL REVISION OF THE PUPE OF THE UNITED STATES.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY AND EDWARD G. VANATTA.
In the present communication we have endeavored to express the
morphology of the ‘‘ teeth ’’ or protective armature guarding the
apertures of these minute land snails, in a terminology of the
structures involved based upon their homologies, and applicable to
Pupze the world over. The remainder of the paper deals with
such particular genera and species of the United States as require
elucidation, and concludes with a list of the species of our fauna,
with a brief statement of their distribution.
Our Pupe were first systematically studied by Dr. Augustus is
Gould, who published his results in a well-considered monograph,
in 1840-43.' In 1867,’ Prof. E. S. Morse did some excellent
work on the group, particularly on the species of New England.
Mr. W. G. Binney, in his successive works of 1869, 1878, 1885
and 1892, included the species of our fauna then known. Finally,
in 1888, Dr. Victor Sterki published the first of a long series of
studies upon American Pupid,* which have marked a great ad-
vance in our knowledge of the group, not alone in an increased
number of species, but in the more just appreciation of their
interrelationships.
TERMINOLOGY OF THE ‘‘TEETH’’ OF PUP.
As is well known, most of the folds or teeth in the apertures of
Pupa have definite positions, and the principal ones are homologous
throughout the group. Pfeitter* adopted a system of terms for them
! Boston Journal of Natural History, July, 1840, Vol. III, p. 395; April,
1843, IV, p. 350.
2 Annals of the Lyceum of Natural History of New York, Vol III (1867),
p. 207.
8 Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1888; Proc. Acad. Nat. Sct. Phila., 1890;
Nautilus, 1890 to 1899.
‘ Monographia Heliceorum Viventium, I, p. 300.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 583
in 1848 which was excellent, but not sufficiently detailed. Most
later authors have followed this terminology more or less closely.
In 1888 Dr. V. Sterki,® in an excellent paper on Vertigo, proposed
to designate the principal folds by letters and the accessory ones by
numerals. This system, while justly discriminating between the
constant and variable folds, is not sufficiently self-explanatory to
be generally useful in descriptive work, and would require modi-
fications as well as additional symbols to adapt it to the description
of the numerous exotic Pupide with a great number of folds or
teeth.
We therefore offer below a revised terminology of the aperture
armature, applicable to all Pupide, and requiring no especial
reference to a key, as the terms are to a large extent self-explan-
atory.
The folds in Pupa are probably not truly homologous with those
of Clausilia, though some occupy the same positions. It is there-
fore not practicable to use the same set of terms; but we consider
it essential to adhere to the principles used in the terminology of
the aperture armature of Clausilia as set forth by Messrs. E. A.
Smith and B. B. Woodward.* The plan is to call all projections
upon the parietal wall and columella ‘‘ lamelle,’’ those within the
basal and outer walls of the aperture ‘‘ plice’’ or folds. The
nomenclature of particular folds is then as follows:
° Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XI, 1888, p. 369, Pl. XLII, fig. 5.
§ Annals and Magazine of Natural History (6 Ser.), V, 1890, p. 209. One
must actually use the perfected Clausilia scheme as set forth in this paper to
appreciate its great utility. Fifty years of development have resulted ina
plan of consummate simplicity for such a complex subject. Messrs. Smith
and Woodward deserve the gratitude of conchologists for their admirable
exposé. Compared to this, Pupa is simplicity itself. It is much to be re-
gretted that recent French authors do not adopt the Schmidt-Bcettger nomen-
clature in describing Clausilias.
Upon the Upon the
584 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Dr. V. STERKI. Dr. L. PFEIFFER, dine ROE
orresponding Fo
TERMINOLOGY ADOPTED, | in Clune
1888. 1889-1898. Monogr. II, 1848.
3 Angle lamella 1 /Angulo-parietal lamella angularis
ae Parietal lamella A |Apertural lamellze \Lamella superior
™ (Infraparietal lamella 2 |Infraparietal ee aa ) Lamelle
‘ | .
Supracolumellar lamella J Se
4
ee Columellar lamella B |Columellar SS eos Lamella inferior
Subcolumellar lamella L. subcolumellaris
Basal fold C |Basal
folie ;
3 2 | Infrapalatal folds 3,4 Plicse
sas] |
2 8 Lower palatal fold D_ |Lower palatal Plicwe plea
a 5 | Interpalatal folds ae
z EI Upper palatal fold E |Upper palatal Plica principalis
Suprapalatal folds 5, 6 Plice suturales
Lamelle
(SS
— s
ae cm
2 =
= — ix]
os os a
s 2 2c
< = PS
. - |. =. Suprapalatal
Supracolumellar ~ ~*~ ~ fom
& -~--}-- Upper palatal | 2
3S Columellar ~~ ~~~ --- } =
.& = 2 z Interpalatal 2
ao . Y s
Subcolumellar -~---- ~---( --3 : ----Lowerpalatal | =
8
eee - = >2 Infrapalatal
—.
Fig. 1. Terminology of lamell and folds.
It will be seen that this is merely an amplification of Pfeiffer’s
terminology of 1848.
But few Pupidee have all of the folds named, and some of them
fe rarely present in American species. Their positions are shown in
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 585
the annexed diagram, fig. 1, which is a composite, not representing
any special species. The infraparietal, supra- and subcolumellar
lamelle and the infra-, inter- and suprapalatal folds are ‘‘ sec-
ondary ’’ in nearly all groups, and often vary in the species. The
others are more constant, and vary but little in position when
developed. The parietal and columellar lamelle and the lower
palatal fold are at the angles of a nearly equilateral triangle, when
the said palatal is not deeply immersed. This is useful as fixing
the identity of the lower palatal, not always clear in multidentate
forms, or in those wheie there has been extensive reduction of
teeth; these three being usually retained when all others have dis-
appeared. Thus in Pupa blandi or triplicata only the lower of the
palatal folds is developed, and in P. armifera the lower and upper
palatals and a suprapalatal, but no basal fold.
With these preliminaries out of the way, we may proceed to
discuss certain American species requiring revision.
PUPOIDES,
Pupoides Pfr., Malak. Blatter I, p. 192, 1854, for B. nitiduwlus Pfr. and
B. marginatus Say.
Leucochila Martens in Albers, Die Hel. 1860, p. 296, type Pupa fallax
=marginata Say.
Leucochiloides Pfr., Nomencl. Hel. Viv. p. 292, 1878, for B. cenopictus,
ae sp., Bulimus sp. and Cyclostoma sp. of Say and authors generally.
A widely distributed genus of toothless Pup occurring in
equatorial Africa, scuthern Asia, Australia and both Americas,
most of the species closely resembling the one commonly known as
*‘Pupa fallax’’—the real ‘‘Cyclostoma’’ marginata of Thomas
Say.
Species“of the marginatus type occur in the United States and
West Indies, but in the Andean region of South America, northern
Mexico and the adjacent States, Arizona and New Mexico, a group
of somewhat dissimilar forms are found, represented by P. paredesii
Orb., limensis Phil., chordatus Pfr. and hordaceus Gabb.
The names of the leading United States species of Pupoides have
been involved in errors almost from the time of their description
to the present day; it is thus essential that we go to the original
descriptions for our nomenclature.
586 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1900.
Pupoides marginatus (Say).
Gyelosemn marginata Say, Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., II (1821),
Leucochila marginata Say, Tryon, Amer. Jour. of Conch., III (1868),
ane ‘allan Say of Gould, Binney and nearly all authors and collectors.
Pupa arizonensis Gabb, Amer. Journ. Conch., II, p. 331 (1866).
The name Pupa marginata was used by Draparnaud in 1805,
and hence when Say’s successors transferred his species from
Cyclostoma to Pupa they sought another and unprejudiced name,
in an unlucky day selecting that of ‘‘ fallax Say,’’ which has been
perpetuated and passed into general use everywhere. Say himself
used ‘‘P. marginata’’ in all his references to his species, carefully
distinguishing Pupa fallax from his marginata.
Pupa fallax was described in 1825 from a specimen sent to Say
by Dr. T. W. Harris, of Milton, Mass. In 1829, after Say had
cast his fortunes with the communist society at New Harmony,
Ind., he happened upon the shell again, and forgetting his former
descripiion, wrote another of the same specimen under the name
“¢ Pupa placida.”’
Say was a masterly diagnostician, and it is interesting to see both
how similarly he expresses the characters in the two diagnoses and
how excellently he pictures the shell, which was really nothing
else than the common European Buliminus obscurus Mill. !
1900.]
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
587
The two descriptions are as follows:
Journ. A. N.S., Vol. V, p. 121,
1825.
‘< PUPA.
“P. fallax. Shell turreted,
pale horn colour; wrinkles rather
obtuse, hardly prominent: suture
rather deeply impressed: volu-
tions nearly seven, a little con-
vex: apex somewhat obtuse:
aperture unarmed, suboval, trun-
cated above by the penultimate
whorl, less than 4 the whole
length of the shell: labium’ |
nearly transverse, colour of the
exterior part of the shell: col-
umella reflected, rectilinear,
longitudinal, forming an obvi-
ous though a rounded angle
with the labrum and _ labium:
labrum hardly reflected: wmbil-
icus narrow.
** Length more than three-
tenths of an inch.
** For this species I am in-
debted to Dr. T: W. Harris,
of Milton, Massachusetts.
‘It closely resembles P.
marginata Nob., but is much |
larger, and the labrum is not
widely reflected; when viewed
in front it has a reflected appear-
ance, but the opposite view pre-
sents only a very limited excur-
vature.’”’
The Disseminator of Useful
Knowledge, Il, No. 15,
p- 230, July 29, 1829.
SP UPA:
“© P, placida. Shell dextral,
eylindrie conic, pale yellowish
horn colour; apex whitish, ob-
tuse: whorls six & an half,
somewhat wrinkled : suture mod-
erately impressed: aperture un-
armed longitudinally oval, trun-
eate a little obliquely above by
the penultimate volution: colu-
mella so recurred® as almost to
conceal the umbilicus: /abrum,
with exception of the superior
portion, appearing a little re-
curved when viewed in front,
| but when viewed in profile this
'recuryature is hardly percepti-
ble: umbilicus very narrow,
‘¢ Length over three tenths of
an inch.
‘¢ TInhabits Massachusetts.
‘¢ For this sheli I am indebted
to Dr. T. W. Harris, of Milton,
from whom I have received
many interesting species of our
more northern regions.
‘¢ At first view it might be
mistaken for the P. marginata
Nob., but it is quadruple the
size, and the labrum is not re-
flected and thickened.’’
It follows from the foregoing that Pupa fallax and Pupa placida
Say become synonyms of Buliminus obscwrus (Mill. ).
Cyclostoma
marginata Say survives as Pupoides marginatus (Say) for our well-
known species.
7 Error for labrum.
§ Error for recurved.
588 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900
Pupoides hordaceus (Gabb). Pl. XXII, fig. 11.
Pupa hordacea Gabb, Amer. Jour. Conch., IT, p. 331, Pl. 21, fig. 7 (1866).
Pupa arizonensis Gabb, W. G. Binney, Tand and Fresh-Water Shells
of North America, 1869, Part I, p. 240, fig. 416 ; and in subsequent
works. Not P. arizonensis Gabb.
Pupa arizonensis W. G. Binney, Sterki, Nautilus, III, pp. 118, 119.
Pupa gabbi Dall, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus.. Vol. XIX, 1896, p. 367.
Bifidaria hebes Ancey, Pilsbry, Classified Cat., p. 19 ; Nautilus, XI, p.
117 (1898). Not of Ancey.
?Pupa arizonensis var. saxicola Ckll., Zoe, Vol. II, 1891, p. 18. (Round
Mt., Custer Co., Colorado.) Not 2. saxicola Lowe nor Moquin-Tandon.
Pupa ‘qabbi mexicanorum Ckil., Nautilus, X, p. 143.
Not Pupa hordeacea W. G. Binney ; ; not Bifidaria hordeacea Sterki or
Pilsbry.
The original description of this species is as follows:
“* Pupa hordacea Gabb.
‘* Description.—Shell very small, cylindrical ; apex obtuse ;
whorls 6, convex; suture well impressed, smooth, thin, horn-color;
aperture small, rounded below, unarmed, lip narrowly reflected
and white; base umbilicate, the umbilicus bounded by an angle.
‘« Dimensions. —Length .11, width .04 inch.
‘¢ Locality. —With the preceding ’’ [Fort Grant, at the junction
of the Arivapa and San Pedro rivers, Ariz. Collected by Dr.
G. H. Horn].
Gabb’s figure is very small and leaves much to be desired, but it
has the merit of agreeing with the diagnosis in being toothless.
His type lot was a mixture of several species. He did not even
take the trouble to separate out P. procera ; and consequently the
specimens he sent out misled conchologists who did not verify
them by the description. Mr. Binney figured and described the
true hordacea as ‘‘ arizonensis,’? and the associated procera as
“« hordeacea.*’? Sterki detected the incongruity between arizonensis
of Gabb and arizonensis Binney, but did not recognize the iden-
tity of the latter with hordacea Gabb. Dall renamed Binney’s P.
arizonensis, calling it P. gabbi. In the Catalogue published by
Messrs. Johnson and Pilsbry, the latter accepted Binney’s identifi-
cation of P. hebes Ancey with arizonensis W. G. B.,° and used
that name for the unfortunate species.
So far we have only wandered deeper into the labyrinth, and the
several gentlemen who have handled the matter certainly cannot
by any hyperbole be called Ariadnes. We find the guiding thread
® Man. Amer. Land Shells, p. 173, footnote ; 2d Gane. to Terr. Moll., V,
p. 40.
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 589
in Gabb’s original description and one of his original specimens
(Pl. XXII, fig. 11). The true Pupa hordacea of Gabb is arizo-
nensis of Binney not Gabb, hebes of Pilsbry not Ancey, gabbi of
Dall and mexicanorum of Cockerell.
The systematic position of this species has not been correctly
defined hitherto. It has real affinity to P. chordatus Pfr., of
Lower California and Mazatlan, and P. paredesii Orb., of Ecua-
dor. It has been considered by some to be a toothless Bifidaria,
allied to corticaria, but the characters of the shell seem clearly
against this view.
The degree of surface wrinkling or ribbing is somewhat vari-
able, but we have not seen a smooth example, and do not doubt
that it is always irregularly ribbed. The specimen figured has 54
whorls, and measures, length 3.5, diam. 1.6, diam. of penult.
whorl 1.36 mm. It is the same shell figured by Binney as P.
arizonensis and now deposited in the Binney and Bland collection
in the American Museum Natural History, New York city.
Some of the New Mexican specimens collected by Prof. Cockerell
are slightly Jarger and a little rougher.
We know nothing of the Colorado shells called P. arizonensis
var. saxicola by Mr. Cockerell.
PUPA.
This genus is well developed in Europe, Asia, Africa and
Australia, but is represented in America by only six species, so far
as we now know. Five of these belong to the holarctic group of
P. muscorum, while one, P. sterkiana Pils., is strongly differen-
tiated, and is the only member of the genus ranging south of the
United States. It belongs to the Lower Californian fauna.
Pupa hebes Ancey. Pl. XXII, figs. 9, 10.
P. hebes Anc., Le Naturaliste, 1881, p.389. Not P. Hebes Pilsbry, Nau-
tilus, XI, p. 117.
P. arizonensis W. G. Binney, 2d Supplement to Terr. Moll., V, p. 40,
PIS TE fig. 12:
Shell rimate, cylindrical, bluntly rounded at the ends, thin, light
chestnut colored, not glossy, very slightly striate. Whorls 64,
the earlier 3 rapidly increasing, the rest of about equal width,
quite convex, the last whorl ascending in front, its latter third
somewhat compressed, the base showing a blunt projection when
viewed in profile; a decided contraction behind the outer lip, but
590 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
scarcely any crest. Aperture truncate-oval, slightly oblique, without
lamellee or folds, though there is a slight projection on the colu-
mella, far within. Peristome thin, narrowly expanded, not in the
least thickened within Length 3.5, diam. 1.8 mm.
Near Jerome, Ariz.; Page’s ranch, Walnut Gulch and top of
Mt. Mingus (about 8,500 feet alt.) ; collected by Rev. E. H. Ash-
mun. White Pine, Nev., Ancey’s type locality.
Well distinguished from P. muscorum and P. blandi by the
absence of a callus within the lip, as Mr. Ancey pointed out in his
original description. The original types are lost,* but we have
no hesitation in identifying the shells found by Mr. Ashmun near
Jerome, Ariz., with Mr. Ancey’s species, as they completely fill
the requirements of his diagnosis. The senior author of this
paper formerly identified hebes with P. arizonensis of W. G.
Binney, following a statement by the latter authority that the two
were identical." Attention to Mr. Ancey’s diagnosis should have
prevented such a rapprochement.
BIFIDARIA.”*
This group was founded by Dr. V. Sterki to contain certain
Pupe in which the parietal and supraparietal lamelle converge to
form a single bifid, or twisted lamella, or lie adjacent; there is a
single columellar lamella and, as a general rule, two palatal folds
and one basal. He included a large number of American species
and afew forms from Asia, hunana Gredl., strophostoma Mlldft.,
armigerella Reinh., recondita T.-C., ete.
The most cursory acquaintance with Pupide develops the fact
that there is a widespread and general similarity in the lamelle
and folds, and in species of many groups, in Europe, South
Africa, Australia.and America the development of the principal
plaits is not conspicuously dissimilar. However, taking the entire
structure into consideration, there is no Pupa in Europe or South
10 «« Unfortunately I cannot forward to you a specimen of the typical lot of
my Pupa hebes. The two typical examples have been destroyed. The glass
tube containing them was broken when I removed from Boghari, my former
residence, and I could find no trace of the shells.’? Ancey in litt. July 16, 1900.
1 Second Supplement to Jerr. Moll., V, p. 40, Pl. ILI, fig. 12. It is only
fair to say that Mr. Binuey did not have his arizonensis by him for actual
comparison, else the union would probably not have been made.
2 Bifidaria Sterki, in Pilsbry, Proc. A. NV. S., 1891, p. 315 (for P. con-
tracta and P. servilis); Sterki, Nautilus, VI, pp. 4 (May, 1892) and 99
(Jan., 1893).
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 591
Africa which could be referred to the P. hunana group of eastern
Asia or the P. armifera group of America.
The distribution of Bifidaria outside of America is extensive.
In Japan (B. armigerelia Reinh.) and China (B. monas and atoma
Heude) the species are minute, and while referable to the typical
section of the genus, have affinities with Albinula. In India we
have the type of a new section in B. plicidens Bens.," with a
typical Bifidaria exceedingly similar to B. hordeacella Pils., in
B. mimula Bens. This type extends to the islands of the Indian
Ocean near Madagascar, where we find in B. seignaciana C. and
F., of Nossi-Be, and tripunctum Morel., of Mayotte, forms very
close to mimula and hordeacella, while B. lienardiana Cr. (Rod-
riguez Island), and exigua H. Ad. (Mauritius), are so near the
Antillean B. servilis Gld. that one can hardly believe them difter-
ent. Itis not impossible that these Indian and insular species,
which so wonderfully mimic widespread West Indian forms, have
really been imported on plants or otherwise from the Antilles, as
some Stenogyroid species, Ennea bicolor, Vallonia, ete., have been
carried over the globe. No South African species referable to
Bifidaria have been found.
In the East Indies Bifidaria is represented almost everywhere,
though not numerously so far as known. Von Mollendorff records
four species from the Philippines—artensis Montr., pediculus Shuttl.,
capillacea Dohrn and euryomphala Mildft.
Melanesia has the widely distributed B. pediculus (Shuttl.) and
in Australia there are numerous species of the type of B. pedicu-
lus.
In Europe there are apparently no recent species, but P. flexi-
dens, obstructa and didymodus Al. Br., of the Main Basin (Lower
Miocene), and heterodus Bttg. (Middle Miocene) may perhaps be
referred here. The recent P. theeli Westerlund, of Siberia, from
the description seems to be a Bifidaria.
It is worthy of note that it is only in America and eastern and
13 Section Bensonella nov. Peristome continuous, calloused within ex-
cept near the posterior angle of the aperture ; parietal lamellze long, sepa-
rate, the angle lameila deeply entering, an infraparietal developed. Palatal
folds standing in a row within the labial callus, their number increased by
accessory folds. Texture and whitish color of Bifidaria. Type Pupa pli-
cidens Bens.
4 This is not Pupa exigua Say, and if a valid species, which is doubtful,
the name must be changed.
592 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
southern Asia that any great diversity of type occurs. The East
Indian, Polynesian and Australian species are all of a single rather
generalized type characterized by the imperfect union of the pari-
etal and angle lamelle.
Hypselostoma is an allied genus, with dark-brown, opaque shell
and more produced ‘‘ neck,’’ though some Bifidarie, such as B.
perversa, parallel it in the latter respect. Genera are rather cheap
in Pupide, but on the whole Hypselostoma seems rather nearer to
Nesopupa and even Torquilla than to Bifidaria. As a subgenus
of Hupselostoma we would rank Boysidia,” in which the conic
spire, brown color of the shell-substance and continuous peristome,
as well as the dentition, agree. Both of these groups may have
the parietal and angle lamelle either independent or united.
We think it will be obvious to any one who will compare several
species of Boysidia, such as hunana Gredl., strophostoma Mlldft.,
moellendorffi Bttg., with a number of the less modified forms of
Hypselostoma, that the relationship is very close. Hyp. tubiferum,
the type of the genus, is one of the most extreme modifications,
and not a fair criterion.
Other Oriental Pupide, such as Boysia Pfr., which may perhaps
be a modification of Pupisoma Stol., and Aulacospira Mlldft.,
while finding their place in this family, in alk probability are not
at all closely allied to the forms under consideration.
Regarding the status of the name Bifidaria, it should be men-
tioned that in 1881, Dr. O. Beettger proposed to transfer P. fallax
Say from Leucochila to Buliminus, and retained the name Leuco-
chilus for the species allied to P. armifera Say, which would thus
replace Bifidaria. But as the type of Leucochila had been ex-
pressly stated by Prof. von Martens to be Pupa fallax Say (by
which marginatus Say was intended), such a restriction was unlaw-
ful; and as Boettger considered his group only a modification or
restriction of Jeucochila Martens, I do not see that by changing
the gender of the name he rendered it any more acceptable.
In America the Bifidaria group has been modified into several
subordinate groups, some of wide range and numerous species.
These groups may be tabulated thus:
17
16 Boysidia Ancey, Le Naturaliste, May, 1881, p. 407 (for P. hunana and
P. dorsata). Gredleriella Mildft., Jahrb. d. d. Malak. Ges., XI, 1884, p. 179
(for Pupa hunana), is a synonym.
46 Von Martens’ Conchologische Mitthetlungen, II, p. 64.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 593
Key to American Sections of Bifidaria.
a.—Parietal and angle lamellz independent, long; a columellar
lamella and palatal folds present.
b.—Palatal folds deeply immersed, hardly or not visible from
the aperture, the lower behind, rather than below, the
upper, the basal transverse; last whorl straightened and
free, the peristome continuous, . Immersidens P. and V.
b'.—Palatal folds normal in positon, not deeply immersed, visi-
ble from in front; last whorl normal in shape, not built
forward nor free, . . . Beuc ierictae bales
a'.—Parietal and angle lamellz very port small and tuberculiform ;
no palatal folds; shell cylindrical, . . Privatula Sterki.
bo
a’.— Parietal and angle lamellz elongate, more or less united, either
by a callous ridge or so extensively as to appear like a
single sinuous or emarginate lamella.
b.—Aperture not much contracted by the teeth. Shell eylin-
dric or cylindro-conic, rather narrow; parietal and colu-
mellar lamellze moderate or small, the latter a simple en-
tering lamella; palatal folds 3 (sometimes fewer), not
situated upon a callous ridge, . . . Bifidarias. str.
b'.—Throat nearly closed by the teeth. Shell oblong or conic,
rather wide; parietal and columellar lamelle long and
tortuous, the latter more or less vertical; palatal folds
several, situated on aridge, . . . Albinula Sterki.
a*.—Parietal lamella simple; no angle lamella; palatals norma! or
increased by accessory denticles, often standing upon a
CRNA IAP Rs ag 5 lw! |. m: Veritigopas Ck
Bifidaria dalliana Sterki. Pl. XXII, fig. 8.
B. dalliana Sterki, Nautilus, XII, p. 91, Dec., 1898.
Nogales (type locality), Santa Rita Mts., and Tempe, Ariz.,
also Mexican side of line near Nogales, Ariz.
A very small species, length 1.6 to 1.8 mm., differing from B.
hordeacella chiefly in the much less united angle and parietal
lameliz, the transverse position of the basal fold, and the more
deeply immersed lower palatal.
B. pilsbryana is an equally small species, with a simple parietal
amella and three subparallel palatal folds, the lower palatal not
immersed. It stands between the typical Bifidarias and Verti-
594 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
gopsis, but on account of the absence of an angle lamella we are
disposed to rank it with B. pentodon, in Vertigopsis.
Bifidaria hordeacella (Pilsbry). Pl. XXII, fig. 3.
Pupa hordeacella Pils., Proc. A. N.S. Phila., 1890, p. 44, Pl. 1, fig.
g tok.
Pupa hordeacella Binney, Fourth Suppl. to Terr. Moll., V, p. 193, Pl.
9
2, fig.
Pupa hordeacella Dall, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XTX, 1896, p. 367.
Pupa hordeacella Sterki, Nautilus. IV, p. 141 ; VI, p. 4.
Pupa hordeacella Ckil., Nautilus, X, pp. 42, 43.
Bifidaria hordeacella Pils., Nautilus, XI, p. 117 ; Classified Cat., p. 19.
Ranges from Cape May, N. J., and St. Simon’s Island, Ga., to
the St. John’s river valley and Sarasota Bay, Fla., west to Indian
Territory (Fort Gibson) and southern Texas, and New Mexico.
We have not seen it from the Antilles.
The small size (length 2.1, diam. .8 mm.) and slender con-
tour, nearly simple or slightly emarginate parietal lamella and
thin outer lip distinguish it from B. rupicola and procera. In
Texas and the West it is light brown, but in Florida is often
thinner and corneous. Almost always associated with B. rupicola
in the eastern Gulf States, and with B. procera in the West, but
readily separated from either by size alone.
Bifidaria hordeacella parvidens (Sterki). Pl. XXII, fig. 2.
P. hordeacella parvidens Sterki, Nautilus, XII, p. 128; XIII, p. 16.
Mescal Gulch, near Jerome, and Jerome, Ariz.
Easily distinguished by the very small size or obsolescence of
the upper palatal and basal folds.
Bifidaria procera (Gould). Pl. XXII, figs. 6, 7.
Pupa procera Gld., Bost. Journ. N. H., III, 401, Pl. 3, fig. 12 (1840);
IV, p. 359, Pl. 16, fig.12.
Pupa procera Gid. Sterki, Nautilus, IV, p. 140; VI, p. 4.
Pupa procera Gld., Ckll., Nautilus, X, p. 43.
Bifidaria procera Gld., Pilsbry, Nautilus, XI, p.117 ; Class. Cat., p. 19.
Pupa carinata Gld., olim, an abnormal shell.
Pupa gibbosa Say, Kiister, and P. minuta Say, Pfr. Not of Say.
Pupa rupicola Say, W. G. Binney, Land and Fresh-Water Shells of N. A.,
I, p. 248, figs. 423, 424; Man. Amer. Land Sh., p. 328, fig. 354. Not
of Say.
Pupa pellucida Pfr., Strebel, Beitr. Mex., Theil IV, p. 91, Pl. 4, fig.
12; Pl. 15, fig. 10.
Pupa hordeacea Gabb, W. G. Binney, L. and F.-W. Sh., I, p. 241, fig.
417; Man. Amer. L. Sh., p. 173, fig. 165 (bad). Not P. hordacea
Gabb!
The large size, subeylindrical form, distinctly bifid parietal
lamella and deeply situated lower palatal fold separate this
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 595
species from rupicola and hordeacella. It ranges from Baltimore,
Md., to South Carolina, west to Kansas, and southwest to Arizona
and Mexico. We have seen no specimens from Florida.
Binney’s description and figure of ‘‘ P. hordeacea’’ are surpris-
ingly inaccurate, and contradict each other. There is no species
known in America which agrees even approximately with either.
They were doubtless made from a specimen sent by Gabb, who had
procera mixed with his hordacea; but it is safe to say that they
inaccurately represent the shell.
Bifidaria procera cristata P.and V.,n. var. Pl. XXII. figs. 4, 5.
Pupa and Bifidaria hordeacea Gabb, Sterki, Nautilus, IV, p. 141; VI,
p- 4, 102; X, p. 42, 43. Pilsbry, Nautilus, XI, p. 117. Not P. hor-
dacea Gabb.
Angle and parietal lamellze more completely united than in B.
procera, hardly bifid; crest behind the outer lip very strong.
Average size slightly greater. ;
Length 2.8, diam. 1.2 mm.
Types No. 78,694, coll. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., from Camp
Verde, Ariz., collected by Rev. E. H. Ashmun.
This Southwestern form is readily distinguishable from B. pro-
cera by the above characters. It ranges eastward to central Texas.
Bifidaria rupicola (Say). Pl. XXII, fig. 1.
Originally described from Fort Picolato on the St. John’s river,
not far from St. Augustine, Fla., this species is before us from
South Carolina and St. Simon’s Island, Ga., southward to Miami,
Fla., and west to New Orleans, La. It is abundant along the
St. John’s river, has not yet turned up in the ‘Texas litoral, but
occurs in Cuba and Bermuda.
Compared with B. procera, this species tapers much more, a
point Say laid stress upon. The outer and basai margins of the
lip are broad, flatly spreading and thickened within, but at the
posterior or upper curve of the outer lip it abruptly becomes nar-
rower. The parietal lamella is moderately emarginate, and the
lower palatal fold is less immersed than in procera. There is a
very narrow but distinct crest close behind the peristome. The
color is subtransparent whitish-corneous or brownish-corneous.
Length about 2.4, diam. 1.1 mm. It is larger and more tapering
than B. hordeacella, which has not the spreading, calloused lip of
B. rupieola.
596 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Cf. also Sterki, Nautilus, IV, 139, where the characters are
well indicated.
In addition to the preceding species, another form, insufficiently
defined, calls for notice, B. riograndensis Sterki. In the Nauti-
lus, IV, p. 142, Dr. Sterki gives descriptive notes on a form from
Hidalgo, Tex., under the head ‘‘ Pupa *» Tt is stated to
resemble P. servilis Gld., except in having an infraparietal lamella
and*a very long lower palatal fold. In Nautilus, VI, p. 4, he
lists a ‘* P. riograndensis Sterki MSS.’’ from the same locality,
without description or reference to his previous note. Of course
there is no necessary connection between the nameless Pupa with
a description and the later nude name; but we have little doubt
that the two are identical, though Dr. Sterki in introducing a new
name into the list has left others to guess at what it may be.
We have not seen specimens, and in the eight years since the
name riograndensis was published it has not been made good by a
description. If our theory regarding its identity be correct, it
may be known by the infraparietal lamella, which is present in no
other known Bijidaria of the United States fauna.
VERTIGO.
This genus was established in 1774 for the single species V.
pusilla, of central Europe. Some authors have proposed to unite
Vertigo and Pupa in one genus, bearing the latter name;” but the
fact that Vertigo is the prior name seems to have escaped these
gentlemen. Pupa was not established until 1802.
Vertigo seems to be neither more nor less distinct than Bijidaria,
Torquilla, Fauculus, Hypselostoma and other Pupoid groups now
ranked as genera; and while we freely admit that the differences
between these groups are not great, it is obvious that if all be
united into one genus, that must be called Vertigo. The recogni-
tion of several genera among the Pupz seems to us to be a wiser
course, as otherwise the relationships of the forms would be lost
sight of in so vast and composite a genus.
Vertigo has a wide range in the three northern continents, but
apparently does not occur below the equator. The American
forms have been studied by Dr. V. Sterki, who has cleared up a
17 Even by Prof. von Martens, in the Biol. Amer. Centrali, 1898, this
course has been taken.
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 597
number of doubtful points and defined numerous species hitherto
unknown in the fauna. There yet remain some wholly undefined
names in the literature, which have been awaiting characterization
for many years; others, while known by brief diagnoses, call for
fuller exposition, while a species defined by Thomas Say seventy-
sIx years ago is now for the first time recognized as valid, and
restored to its usurped place.
In America there are several outlying species for which sectional
divisions of Vertigo have been established—Nearctula, Haplopupa,
Bothriopupa and Angustula. The last group was established for
V. milium and V. venetzii, the latter a European species, and (under
the synonymous name, V. plicata) one of the two types of Vertilla
Moquin-Tandon. V. pusilla Mill. was the other species of Ver-
tilla, and as it had been made the sole type of Vertigo by Miller, it
must be removed from Moquin-Tandon’s group, leaving V. plicata
(= venetzaii = angustior) the type of Vertilla. Or, to tabulate
the matter:
pusilla = Type of Vertigo Miller, 1774.
Types of Vertilla Moq., 1855
venetzii
Types of Angustula Sterki, 1889.
milium
It would seem from this that Vertil/a must replace Angustula as
a subgeneric name for V. miliwm and venetzii, the latter species
being the type. Severa) well-known experts in nomenclature to
whom we have submitted the case agree in this opinion. It is
rather a pity, because Moquin-Tandon had no idea of the really
peculiar characters of V. venetzii, which were first exposed by Dr.
Sterki.
The Group of Vertigo modesta.—The Vertigos of the californica
and modesta groups agree in lacking a basal fold, or tooth near the
base of the columella. The parietal and columellar lamellee and
lower and upper palatal folds are developed and nearly equidistant,
giving a somewhat cruciform outline to the aperture. Sometimes
the angle lamella appears, but never any others ; and in a few forms
several of the teeth become reduced or lost. The outer lip is not
very noticeably caught in at its upper third to form a “ sinulus,”’
as it isin most species of Vertigo. These features give a particu-
lar aspect to the group which Dr. V. Sterki has recognized in tax-
onomy by the name ‘‘ Nearctu/a.’’ This distinction, however, is
39
598 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
more apparent than real, the species of the modesta group really
being exceedingly close tosuch forms as V. gouldii, and in fact V,
columbiana is hardly separable specifically. For this reason, we
think Nearctula must be restricted to the single species V. califor-
nica, characterized by its ribbed, opaque shell, and the other spe-
cies associated therewith by Dr. Sterki will group better among the
true Vertigos.
The group of Vertigo modesta includes species with a crest vary-
ing from very low to strong, behind the lip; in this respect differing
from the group of V. californica, the species of which have no
crest, and are rather less glossy.
The American species are Canadian or boreal, extending south-
ward in the Rocky Mountain region. Their number has been
estimated at as many as eight species and three varieties (Sterki,
1892); but this seems to us to be too generous. We are able to
distinguish four species, and several varieties may conveniently be
recognized, though their determination is at times difficult from the
intergradation with parent stocks. We omit from the account P.
hoppii Moller, a Greenland species not shown to occur on the main-
land of North America (conf. Nautilus, XII, 104), and P. bore-
alis Morelet, described from Kamchatka, and not known to us
from America, the Alaskan Pupz of this type being referable to
V. modesta Say, so far as we have seen.*
The forms of the V. modesta type make a beautiful variation-
chain, or ‘‘ Formen-kette,’’ as recent German authors term these
series of species connected by intermediate variations in the living
fauna. The relationships of the forms may be expressed diagram-
matically, dashes representing breaks in the chain; figures referring
t> Plate XXIII :
castanea, fig. 5.
castaned, fig. 4.
modesta, fig. 3—modesta, fig. 6. corpulenta, fig. 7.
modesta parietalis, fig. 2.
parietalis, fig. 1.
concinnula, fig. 8.
arizonensis, fig. 9—utahensis, fig. 10—columbiana,
[fig. 11.
The group not separated by dashes is shown by our series to be
18 We have not seen Kamchatkan P. borealis, but it is evidently very near
V. modesta, perhaps only a form of that species.
1900. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 599
completely connected by intermediate specimens. This is not suffi-
ciently shown in the plate because, in order to emphasize the char-
acteristics of geographic races, we have selected the most strongly
differentiated individuals for figuring. In view of the fact that
the Rocky Mountain region is most imperfectly explored for small
snails, we hold the opinion that still more connecting links will be
found, and probably V. concinnula will become a subspecies of
modesta. It is not impossible that V. dalliana will fall into line
as a terminal member of the series, beyond castanea, in which all
teeth have been Jost.
Variation among individuals from one place, as well as geographic
racial differentiation, is ubiquitous among these pygmy snails, though
less striking to the eye than in larger forms, or those in which
color or sculpture is more modified. The development of the
teeth is greatest in the mountain forms, concinnula (Pl. XXIII, fig.
8) and arizonensis (Pl. XXIII, fig. 9), occurring at high altitudes;
while modesta (fig. 3) and castanea (figs. 4, 5) are at least mainly
from much lower levels. The form of modesta from the Iowa loess
is aiso more or Jess deficient in teeth. But we do not think to cor-
relate this character of the shells with mere elevation, for it is more
likely to be a reaction due to some unknown element of the faunal
environment, such as minute snail-eating insects.
Vertigo concinnula Cockerell. Plate XXIII, fig. 8.
Vertigo californica Ingersoll, Bull. U.S. Geol. Surv. Terr., I, p. 128
(1875). No description. Not of Rowell.
Vertigo ingersolli Ancey MSS. in Cockerell, J. of Conch., Leeds, VI,
1889, p. 64 (name only, substituted for P. californica Ing. non Row.);
British Naturalist, 1891, p. 100 (not seen); Sterki, Nautilus, VI, 1892,
p. 5, with varieties haydeni Anc. and accedens Anc. (names only);
Cockerell, Nautilus, X, 1897, p. 135 (identity with concinnula affirmed
from part of original lot).
Vertigo concinnula Cockerell, Nautilus, X, 1897, p. 135.
Pupa concinnula Ckll., Pilshry, Nautilus, XI, 1898, p. 119 ; Class. Cat.
L. Sh. Amer., p. 21; Nautilus, XII, 1899, p. 103.
Shell ovoid-cylindrical in outline, slightly tapering toward the
blunt apex; solid and somewhat opaque, so that the folds of the
outer lip are usually only dimly seen through from the outside.
Surface shining, irregularly, obliquely striate. Whorls 5, apical
2 whitish, the rest chestnut-brown, often with numerous irregu-
larly scattered spots and flecks of very light buff. Whorls quite
convex, the last slightly ascending toward the aperture, its latter
half very decidedly flattened on the outer-inferior portion, this
600 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
part bearing a low broad wavelike ‘‘ crest’’ or ridge behind the
lip, and then slightly constricted. Umbilical rimation short, im-
perforate. Aperture rounded, truncate above; peristome a little
expanded; parietal wall bearing a rather strong entering lamella
in the middle, and usually a smaller angie lamella to the right of
its outer end; columella with a strong deep-seated entering lamella;
outer lip with two rather low long palatal folds, the lower one
longest. Alt. .2, diam. 1.1 mm.
The dull, rather opaque shell, cylindrical and small, with Jong
palatal folds and parietal lamella, separate this from V. modesta
and its varieties, but it certainly approaches V. modesta parietalis,
which, however, is larger and smoother. The form of modesta
from Labrador agrees with concinnula in having the penultimate
whorl distinctly striate. The larger size, more cylindrical shape
and presence of an angle lamella distinguish it from typical colora-
densis.. According to Cockerell, it occurs at higher elevations
than V. coloradensis, between 6,000 and 10,000 feet.
Custer and Summit counties, Colo. (Ckll.); Jemez Mts., N. M.
(Ashmun). Numerous other localities in Colorado are given by
Ingersoll.
’ The specimens from the Jemez Mts. have a much stronger crest
behind the lip than those from Colorado, and are less opaque.
Vertigo modesta (Say). Plate XXIII, figs. 2, 3, 6.
Pupa modesta Say, Long’s Second Expedition, IT, appendix, p. 259, Pl.
15, fig. 5 (1824).
Pupa decora Gld., Proc. Bost. Soc. N. H., I, p. 263 (1848). Fig. in text.
More cylindrical than V. corpulenta, with one whorl more ;
crest moderate or low; teeth typically four, parietal, columellar,
upper and lower palatal; but sometimes a fifth, the angle lamella,
is added.
Fig. 3 is drawn from a specimen from Laggan, Alberta, col-
lected by Rev. George W Taylor. Length 2.5, diam. 1.3 mm.;
whorls 53.
Fig. 2, Dyea Valley, Alaska, collected by Mr. P. B. Randolph.
Length 2.4, diam. 1.3 mm. The form is a little stouter than
typical, and the crest perceptibly stronger. In some specimens the
teeth are slightly better developed than in typical modesta, and
some have a second parietal lamella. This lot is perfectly inter-
mediate between modesta and parietalis.
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 601
A Labrador specimen (PI. XXIII, fig. 6) is smaller, length 1.9,
diam. 1.2 mm., about the size of concinnula Ckll,, typical in
teeth, but closely and deeply striate on the penultimate whorl.
The crest is slighter than in typical modesta.
The type locality of V. modesta, Northwest Territory, was some-
where in northern Minnesota, southern Manitoba, or near the
western end of Lake Superior, on the route of Major Long’s
second expedition (see map in volume cited above). P. decora
was also described from Lake Superior. From this region the
species ranges to Labrador, to the Rocky Mountains and north-
ward to Alaska It also oceurs in the loess deposit at Iowa City,
Ta. ; many of these specimens having the upper palatal fold sub-
obsolete or wanting, as in the variety castanea.
P. modesta has been erroneously placed in the synonomy of
Vertigo ovata hitherto, but reference to the original description
shows it to be identical with decora. Say’s description is as follows:
«« P. modesta. Shell dextral, suboval, minutely wrinkled; ape
obtuse; whorls six; umbilicus distinct; aperture obliquely subovate;
labium with a prominent compressed semioval tooth equidistant
from the extremities of the labrum, and a somewhat conic one
rather below the middle of the columella; /abrum not reflected,
joining the preceding whorl at its upper extremity with a curve;
bidentate, lower tooth placed opposite to that of the middle of the
labium, the other smaller and placed a little above. Length less
than one-tenth of an inch. Inhabits the Northwest Territory.’’
V. modesta parietalis (Ancey),n.v. Plate XXIII, fig. 1.
Shape somewhat more obese than V. modesta ; whorls about 5;
teeth 5, the angle lamella being developed. This form is interme-
diate between modesta and corpulenta in contour and size. It may
be a case of dimorphism rather than a true variety, as it occurs in
some places with 4-toothed shells, and with the fifth lamella in
various stages of development in apparent adults, as in the Dyea
Valley. The figured specimen is from Ogden Cafion, Utah,
collected by Hemphill, with corpulenta.
¥V. modesta corpulenta (Morse). Plate XXIII, fig. 7.
Isthmia corpulenta Morse, Ann. Lye. Nat. Hist. of N. Y., VIII, p. 210,
fig. 7 (1865).
Typically much shorter than modesta, more obese, with only
about 45 whorls. Teeth 4, short. Type locality, Little Valley,
602 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Washoe county, Nev. It occurs also in Utah, the figured speci-
men being from Ogden Caiian. The lower palatal fold is decidedly
tubercular, at least in typical corpulenta, and the surface is
smooth. Length 2.1, diam. 1.3 mm.
Vertigo modesta castanea (Sterki),n.v. Plate XXIII, figs. 4, 5.
V. castanea Sterki, Nautilus, VI, 1892, p. 5.
P. castanea Sterki, Pilsbry, Nautilus, XI, 1898, p. 119; Class. Cat.
Land Shells Amer., p. 21.
Shell oblong or cylindric-oval, glossy, somewhat translucent;
chestnut, sometimes with some whitish stripes. Whorls 43-5, the
last; with a moderate crest behind the lip. Teeth very small, placed
as in corpulenta, the lower palatal largest, columellar usually devel-
oped, parietal very small or obsolete, upper palatal wanting or
minute. Alt. 2.3, diam. 1.4 mm.
Fish Camp, Fresno county. Cal. (Hemphill). Lake county,
Cal. (Sterki).
This stands toward V. modesta as var. diegoensis toward V.
californica. Both are subterminal members of series running from
toothed forms toward a toothless condition. The specimens de-
scribed and figured are from the locality first mentioned above. In
the series before us, this intergrades directly with modesta. The
specimens vary greatly in development of the teeth.
Vertigo columbiana Sterki MSS.,n. sp. Pl, XXIII, fig. 11
V. columbiana Sterki, Nautilus, VI, 1892, p. 5 (name only).
Pupa columbianae Sterki, Pilsbry, Nautilus, XI, 1898, p. 119; Class.
Cat., p. 21, No. 212; Nautilus, XII, p. 103.
V. columbiana var. utahensis Sterki, Nautilus, VI, 5 (name only).
Shell very minute, cylindric-oval, perforate, thin, pale corneous-
brown, somewhat transparent, glossy and weakly striatulate.
Whorls nearly 5, convex, the last expanded in a low crest very
close to the lip, not noticeably constricted in front of the crest.
Aperture truncate-ovai, 4-toothed, the peristome thin, hardly
expanded; parietal lamella short and high, columellar a little
smaller, lower palatal a short conic fold continued inward; upper
palatal smaller, shorter, almost tuberculiform; all the teeth white
and the palatals showing through the outside wall. Alt. 1.9,
diam. 1.1 mm.
Vancouver Island (George W. Taylor); Olympia, Tacoma and
Seattle, Wash. (Henry Hemphill) ; Douglas county, Ore. (F.
H. Andrus).'
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 603
Types of above description and figure are Nos. 60,468 and
68,881, coll. A. N. S., from Vancouver Island.
An exceedingly small species with four well-developed teeth.
The palatal folds are rather shorter than in V. coloradensis or V.
concinnula, both of which are, moreover, more striate and less
transparent. The specimens from Vancouver Island, Washington
and Oregon are quite uniform in all respects. The above refer-
ences to literature refer to the name in lists, as there has been no
definition of the species.
V. columbiana stands perilously near forms of V. gouldii with-
out the basal fold. It may be merely an occidental subspecies of
gouldii; but in a considerable series examined, there never seems
to be a trace of the basal fold. It is this which induces us to give
the form specific standing.
Vertigo columbiana utahensis Sterki MS., n. var. Plate XXIII, fig. 10.
Smaller, length 1.8, diam. 1 mm., and quite distinctly striate.
Aperture about as in co/umbiana, but a little shorter.
Box Elder Cation, Utah, elevation 4500 feet (Henry Hemphill).
Vertigo coloradensis (Cockerell).
Pupa coloradensis Ckll., Journ. of Conch., Leeds, VI, 1889, p. 63
(name only); British Naturalist, 1891, p. 100 ;!° and in Binney, Fourth
Supplement to Terr. Moll., V, Bull. M. C. T., XXII, No. 4, p. 191
(January), 1892.
Vertigo coloradensis Ckll., Sterki, Nautilus, VI, 1892, p.5. Cockerell,
Nautilus, X, 1897, p. 134.
Pupa coloradensis Ckll., Pilsbry, Nautilus, XI, 1898, p. 119; Classified
Cat. L. Sh. Amer., p. 21.
‘‘Shell brown, shiny, thinnish, translucent enough to show
teeth through (body whorl) from outside, striate,
especially on penultimate whorl. Outline oblong-
oval, barrel-shaped, apex blunt. Whorls four.
Aperture pyriform. Peristome brown, thick, con-
tinuous by a well-marked callus on parietal wall.
Outer lip not constricted; a crest is indicated behind
peristome, but not well developed. The teeth
within the aperture are brown, one long one on
parietal wall, one on columellar, and two, the lower
one largest, on outer wall. Length 14, diam. 1 mm.
‘« Near Swift creek, Custer Co., Colo. (T. D. A. Cockerell).
vo
Fig.
19 We have not seen Prof. Cockerell’s paper in this journal, and do not
kuow whether the species was described or merely mentioned there.
604 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
‘¢ This shell is nearest allied to corpulenta, but is decidedly
smaller, more striate, and slightly narrower. I have never ob-
served a second parietal tooth in coloradensis.”’
The above description, somewhat amplified from that published in
Binney’s Fourth Supplement, was received from Prof. Cockerell,
and the figure was drawn by him. It seems to us more nearly
related to concinnula than to corpulenta, on account of the long
palatal folds; but the very small size distinguishes it, if constant.
Only two or three specimens were taken, the type being in the
British Museum.
V. coloradensis basidens n. var.
Similar to V. ¢. arizonensis P. & V., but the parietal lamella
stands alone upon the parietal wall, and a small basal tubercle is
developed. The Jast character separates basidens from typical
coloradensis.
Bland, New Mexico (Rev. E. H. Ashman), with V. e. arizo-
nensis and V. concinnula.
Vertigo coloradensis arizonensis n. var. Plate XXIII, fig. 9.
Shell cylindric-oval, rimate, very small; very densely and
sharply but most minutely striate; light brown. Whorls 43, con-
vex, the last tapering below, the later half whorl narrow as though
pinched at base, flattened over the position of the palatal folds,
then rising in a low, hardly noticeable crest, obsolete except near
the base. Aperture irregularly truncate-oval, the peristome well
expanded, brown. JDenticles 5 or 6, the parietal high and strong,
a minute angle lamella usually standing near its outer end. Co-
Jumellar lamella obliquely entering. Upper and lower palatal
folds very long, rising conically in the middle, distinctly showing
through from the outside, the lower fold being a little stronger
and more immersed, its position marked by a depression outside.
Length 1.8, diam. .9 mm.
Top of Mt. Mingus, near Jerome, Ariz., about 8,500 feet eleva-
tion (E. H. Ashmun). :
This pygmy form differs from V. columbiana in being smaller,
duller, more slender and with much longer palatal folds, which
show their length well from the outside where they show through
the outer wal]. It is more slender and rather less coarsely striate
than V. columbiana utahensis, besides differing in its long palatals.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 605
V. coneinnula differs chiefly in being very much larger, and J.
coloradensis has only a single lamella on the parietal wall, and
seems less cylindric.
CATALOGUE OF SPECIES AND SUBSPECIES OF THE UNITED
STATES.
Genus PUPOIDES Pfeiffer, 1855.
(Leucocheila Martens, 1860, of former lists.)
Group of P. marginatus.
Pupoides marginatus (Say).
Canada to Florida, west to Arizona.
This is Pupa fallax of authors, not of Say. See notes.
Pupoides modicus (Gld.).
Georgia sea islands and Florida, west to Alabama.
Group of P. chordatus.
Pupoides hordaceus (Gabb).
Arizona and New Mexico.
Genus PUPA Drap., 1801.
Group of P. muscorum.
Pupa hebes Ancey.
White Pine, Nev. (Newcomb); around Jerome, Ariz.
( Ashmun).
Pupa muscorum (L.).
Canada and Northern States, southward in the Rocky Mountain
region. Typical muscorum is toothless. Form unidentata C. Pfr.,
parietal tooth developed. Occurs with preceding. P. badia C.
B. Ad. isasynonym. Form bigranata Rossm., a small, low lower
palatal nodule also present. Occurs with preceding. Fig. of
muscorum in Binney’s works belongs to this last variety.
Pupa blandi Morse.
Rocky Mountain region. Form obtusa Ckll., Colorado.
Pupa blandi sublubrica Ancey.
Nevada.
Pupa sonorana Sterki.
New Mexico.
606 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Pupa sonorana tenella Sterki.
Capitan Mountains, New Mexico.
Pupa syngenes Pilsbry.
New Mexico, Arizona, Montana.
Form dextroversa P. and V. (n. f.) isdextral, with 84-9 whorls.
San Rafael, N. M., collected by Rev. E. H. Ashmun.
Eighty-seven per cent. of the specimens taken at this locality
were of the dextral form.
Group of P. sterkiana.
Pupa sterkiana Pilsbry.
San Diego county, Cal. ; San Ramon, Lower Cal.
Genus BIFIDARIA Sterki, 1891.
Section IMMERSIDENS Pils. and Van., 1900.
Bifidaria ashmuni Sterki.
Arizona, Jerome; Santa Rita Mountains.
A form minor Sterki (Nautilus, XII, 92), Nogales, Ariz., is
smaller, thinner, with narrower lip and 1 to 4 whorl less.
Bifidaria perversa Sterki.
Nogales, Ariz.
Section STERKIA Pilsbry, 1898.
Bifidaria rhoadsi Pilsbry.
Miami, Fla.
Bifidaria calamitosa (Pilsbry).
San Diego, Cal., to San Tomas river, Lower Cal.
Bifidaria hemphilli (Sterki).
Same range.
Bifidaria clementina (Sterki).
San Clemente Island.
Section PRIVATULA Sterki, 1893.
Bifidaria corticaria (Say).
Canada and Minnesota south to South Carolina and Mississippi.
Section BIFIDARIA s. str.
( Hubifidaria Sterki, 1893. )
Bifidaria dalliana Sterki.
Arizona.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 607
Bifidaria hordeacella (Pilsbry)
Cape May, N. J., Georgia sea islands and Florida, west to
Indian Territory and Arizona.
Bifidaria hordeacella parvidens Sterki,
Arizona.
Bifidaria rupicola (Say).
South Carolina and Florida, west to New Orleans, La., also
Cuba, Bermuda.
Bifidaria procera (Gld.).
Maryland and South Carolina, west to Arizona and Mexico.
Bifidaria procera cristata Pils. and Van.
Arizona, New Mexico, Indian Territory and Texas.
Bifidaria quadridens Sterki.
Capitan Mountains, New Mexico.
Section ALBINULA Sterki, 1892.
Bifidaria contracta (Say).
Canada, United States and Mexico, east of Rocky Mountains.
Bifidaria armifera (Say).
Quebec and Maine to Minnesota, south to New Mexico and
Florida. A var. ruidosensis Ckll. has been described from New
Mexico.
Bifidaria holzingeri (Sterki).
Minnesota to Kansas and Illinois. A var. fordiana Sterki has
been described from Wichita, ixan.
Subgenus Vertigopsis ‘CkIl.’. Sterki.
Nautilus, VI, p. 4,101. Type Pupa curvidens Gld.
* Palatal folds two or three, in the typical positions; no palatal
callous rib.
Bifidaria cincinnatiensis (Judge).
Cincinnati, O.
Bifidaria pilsbryana (Sterki).
Arizona and New Mexico.
** Palatal folds tuberculiform, their number increased by some
accessory denticles, and standing upon a callous rib.
608 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Bifidaria pentodon (Say).
Quebec to Alberta, south to Nevada, Texas and Florida; Sterki
mentions a form curta from Ohio. P. montanella Ckll., unde-
scribed, is a synonym.
Bifidaria curvidens (Gld.).
Quebec to Minnesota and southward.
Sterki distinguishes a form gracilis from Rhode Island, Ohio,
Tennessee.
Bifidaria curvidens floridana (Dall).
Archer, Alachua county, Fla.
Genus VERTIGO Miller.
Section VERTIGO.
Vertigo rugosula Sterki.
South Carolina, Gulf coast to Texas.
Vertigo rugosula ovalis Sterki (ovulum Sterki, preoc.).
Volusia county, Fla.
Vertigo ovata Say.
Canada, United States and Mexico.
Pupa ovata antiquorum Ckll. is a synonym.
Vertigo morsei Sterki.
Kent county, Mich.; Sandusky, O.
Vertigo binneyana Sterki.
Manitoba to Seattle, Wash., south to New Mexico.
Vertigo pygmea Drap.
Lake Superior and New England, south to Pennsylvania and
west to Ohio. Synonyms: V. callosa Sterki, not Reuss; P. supe-
rioris Pilsbry.
Vertigo andrusiana Pilsbry.
Douglas county, Ore.
Vertigo arctica Wallenb.
Identified by Westerlund from Port Clarence, Alaska. We
have not seen it.
Vertigo tridentata Wolf. ’
New York and eastern Pennsylvania to Illinois.
Vertigo parvula Sterki.
Northern Ohio; Mitchell county, N. C.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 609
Vertigo ventricosa (Morse).
Quebec and Maine to Illinois. Synonym: V. approximans
Sterki.
Vertigo ventricosa elatior Sterki.
Western Alberta to Ohio. Synonym: V. gouldii lagganensis
Pilsbry.
Vertigo gould 1 Binn.
Ontario and Maine to Montana, south to Tennessee, Maryland
and New Jersey. V. gouldii paradoxa Sterki is an undescribed
variety from Woodland, Aroostook county, Me.
Vertigo gouldii bollesiana (Morse).
Middle and New England States.
Vertigo bollesiana arthuri Martens.
Little Missouri, Dakota. (Unknown to us. )
Vertigo columbiana Sterki.
Vancouver Island to Oregon.
Vertigo columbiana utahensis Sterki.
Box Elder Caiion, Utah.
Vertigo modesta (Say).
Synonym: Pupa decora Gld.
Lake Superior region to Alberta and northward; also loess of
Towa.
Vertigo modesta corpulenta (Morse).
Utah, Nevada.
Vertigo modesta parietalis (Anc.).
Utah and Colorado.
Vertigo modesta castanea (Sterki).
Fish Camp, Fresno county, and Lake County, Cal.
Vertigo coloradensis (Ckll.).
Custer county, Col.
Vertigo coloradensis basidens P. « V.
Bland, New Mexico.
Vertigo coloradensis arizonensis P. and V.
Jerome, Ariz.
Vertigo concinnula (Ckll.).
Colorado and New Mexico.
610 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
Vertigo rowelli (Newe.).
Oregon to middle portion of California.
Section NEARCTULA Sterki.
Vertigo californica (Rowell).
San Francisco, Cal.
Vertigo californica elongata Sterki.
San Clemente Island.
Vertigo californica catalinaria Sterki.
San Clemente Island and S. Catalina Island.
Vertigo californica diegoensis Sterki.
San Diego, Cal., to San Ramon, L. Cal.
Vertigo californica trinotata Sterki.
Monterey, Cal.
Vertigo californica cyclops Sterki.
Placer county, Cal.
Section HAPLOPUPA Pils.
Vertigo dalliana Sterki.
Lake county, Cal.
Section
Vertigo oscariana Sterki.
Florida to Texas; Tennessee.
Section BOTHRIOPUPA Pils.
Vertigo variolosa Gld.
Near mouth of Miami river, Fla.
Subgenus Vertilla Mog.-Tand.
Vertigo milium Glad.
Ontario and Maine, west to Minnesota, south to Florida
Texas.
(1900.
and
1900.]
ee
aR
wo
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 611
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
PLATE XXIT.
Figures 9, 10, 11 x 13; 1-8 X 20.
. Bifidaria rupicola (Say). Tick Island, Volusia county,
Fla. No. 69,500, coll. A. N.S.
. B. hordeacella parvidens Sterki. Mescal Gulch, Jerome,
Ariz. No. 78,717.
. B. hordeacella (Pils.). New Braunfels, Tex. No.
60,460.
Figs. 4, 5. B. procera cristata Pils. and Van. Camp Verde.
Fig. 3
Figs. 4,
Hig. 6:
Lew
Fig. 8.
Fig. 9.
Fig. 10
Fig. 11
Ariz. No. 68,694.
7. B. procera (Gld.). Washington, D. C.
. B. dalliana Sterki. Nogales, Ariz. No. 78,689.
10. Pupa hebes Ancey. Summit of Mt. Mingus, near
Jerome, Ariz. No. 78,709.
. Pupoides hordaceus (Gabb). Fort Grant, Ariz. One
of the original lot, probably the type specimen.
PuaTe XXIII.
All figures X 25.
. Vertigo modesta parietalis (Ancey). Ogden Canon,
Utah.
. Vertigo modesta parietalis (Anc.). Dyea Valley, Alaska.
No. 75,661.
. Vertigo modesta (Say). Laggan, Alberta. No. 76,375.
5. Vertigo modesta castanea Sterki. Fish Camp, Fresno
county, Cal.
Vertigo modesta (Say). Labrador. No. 4,552.
Vertigo modesta corpulenta (Morse). Ogden Canon,
Utah.
Vertigo concinnula (Ckll.). Jemez Mountains, Ariz.
No. 73,587. :
Vertigo coloradensis arizonensis Pils. and Van. Summit
of Mt. Mingus, near Jerome, Ariz.
. Vertigo columbiana utahensis Sterki. Box Elder Cafion,
Utah.
. Vertigo columbiana Sterki. Vancouver Island. No.
68,881.
612 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
OcTOBER 2.
Mr. CHARLES ROBERTs in the Chair.
Fifteen persons present.
OcTOBER 9.
Mr. CHarues Morris in the Chair.
Eleven persons present.
OcTOBER 16.
Mr. CHARLES Morris in the Chair.
Seventeen persons present.
«A Biographical Notice of Charles Eastwick Smith,’’ by
Thomas Meehan, was presented for publication.
OcTOBER 23.
Mr. CHARLES Morris in the Chair.
Eighteen persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Additions to the Japanese Land Snail
Fauna, II1,’’ by Henry A. Pilsbry, was presented for publication.
OcTOBER 30.
Mr. CHARLES RosBerts in the Chair.
Forty-one persons present.
Dr. Adolph W. Miller made a communication on his recent visit
to the zodlogical and botanical gardens of Paris and Germany.
(No abstract.)
Thomas S. Stewart, M.D., was elected a member.
The following were ordered to be printed:
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 613
POST-LARVAL CHANGES IN THE VERTEBRAL ARTICULATIONS
OF SPELERPES AND OTHER SALAMANDERS.
BY J. PERCY MOORE.
In defining the minor subdivisions of the Urodela, Cope and
Boulenger have given fundamental importance to the form of the
vertebral central articulations. Cope (’89, p. 33, and earlier
papers) arranges the families of Pseudosauria in two series, the one
characterized by amphiccelous, the other by opisthoccelus vertebra,
and on p. 190 he states that the peculiarity of the vertebrz chiefly
distinguishes the Desmognathidee from the Plethodontide. Bou-
lenger (782, p. 2), whose subfamilies of salamanders have nearly
the same content as Cope’s families, mentions the form of the cen-
tral articulations as the sole distinguishing feature between his
Plethodontinz and Desmognathine.
Apparently the only serious criticism of the value of this char-
acter has been made by Vaillant, who in a short note (’84)
describes the vertebree of Autodax (Anaides) lugubris as opistho-
celous. Boulenger, after an examination of the dissection made
by the French zodlogist, characterizes (’85) this statement as
erroneous. In a second note (’86) Vaillant explains the reason
for this difference of opinion and reiterates his former statement.
The vertebrz in question he describes as osteologically amphiccelous
but physiologically opisthoccelous, meaning by this that if the ac-
tual bone tissue alone be considered the centra are biconcave ; but
that the anterior cup is filled by a cartilaginous nodule, which pro-
jects freely in the form of a hemipshere whose free surface fits
into the posterior socket of the preceding vertebra.
If a full-grown larva of Spelerpes ruber be examined, the verte-
bral centra will be found to be very deeply concave. The apices of
the two cone-shaped cavities almost meet at the middle of the verte-
bra, where they communicate through a small foramen through
which the here constricted notochord passes. The cavities are
largely occupied by the notochord, which suffers a second (inter-
vertebral) constriction due to an annular thickening of the car-
40
614 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
tilaginous notochordal sheath by which contiguous vertebr are
bound together.
After the metamorphosis, when the young salamander has a
length of 90-100 mm., this cartilaginous ring increases in thick-
ness and extent so that it largely replaces and constricts the noto-
chord. The cartilage becomes firmer and may be removed in its
entirety as a fusiform nodule bearing fragments of the notochord
at its ends. If the vertebral column, either in its fresh state or
after preservation in alcohol, be beat sharply so that it parts inter-
vertebrally, this nodule will remain attached indifferently either to
the anterior or posterior contiguous vertebra.
Gradually the cartilage extends, encroaching more and more on
the notochord, and at the same time its posterior peripheral
parts begin to calcify, first in a post-equatorial zone which lies just
within the rim of the anterior cup of the succeeding vertebra. In
individuals having a length of 120 mm.’ this calcified ring is already
quite conspicuously developed and lias united with the anterior
vertebral rim. Dried skeletons of this stage show the anterior
vertebral cup with a thick, rather rough rim and a correspondingly
constricted opening, while the posterior cup remains almost exactly
of its previous form and proportions. Its opening is large, uncon-
stricted and has a smooth, thin margin which embraces the next
succeeding centrum; its inner surface is bounded everywhere by
hard, true bone lined by a thin layer of cartilage. Moreover, if
the column be forcibly broken as described above, the cartilaginous
nodule almost invariably parts from the preceding and remains
attached to the succeeding vertebra, showing its more intimate
organic union with the latter. A smooth articulation between this
cartilage and the posterior face of the preceding vertebra begins to
be evident and the contiguous centra are united by an annular
intervertebral ligament. A condition closely approximating that
just described is figured by Wiedersheim (’93, p. 61, fig. 41,C.).
With increasing age and size the calcified area continues tu en-
croach on the cartilaginous matrix. The ring becomes thicker and
its posterior margin extends toward the middle region of the cen-
trum. Asa result the anterior cavity of the bony vertebra grows
1 As there appears to be some individual variation in the rate of change,
the conditions described must be understood as belonging to individuals of
only approximately the lengths stated.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 615
smaller as it is filled up from the bottom and sides by the gradual
replacement of true cartilage by calcified cartilage. To a corre-
sponding degree the cartilaginous nodule becomes incorporated with
the succeeding vertebra and structurally separated from the pre-
ceding one. In ordinary breeding individuals, having a length of
130-150 mm., is reached the condition which Vaillant has happily
described as physiologically opisthoccelous, in which the actual
intervertebral centre of movement is between a cartilaginous ball
structurally united with the anterior end of one vertebra and a
deep cup borne on the posterior face of the other. There is no
synovial articulation formed at this stage but only a curved sur-
face of fracture which divides the intervertebral cartilage.
In still larger individuals, up to a length of 170 mm., which are
not rare, the process of calcification has extended all through the
cartilage within the anterior vertebral cup, at first leaving here
and there little lakes of unaltered cartilage, which are finally also
affected by the change. The transformation of tissue then over-
flows the boundaries of the cup, first at the rim, but gradually
extends into the centre and anterior superfices of the cartilaginous
head. At this period of development the unchanged cartilage has
been reduced to a cap which fits over a rounded calcified head of
its transformed substance and becomes constantly reduced in
thickness as the process of calcification extends. If the cartilage
be scraped away or shrunken by complete drying a larger or
smaller central depression appears in the anterior face of the ver-
tebra at the point where the notochord and its cartilaginous en-
velope longest persist.
inally, in the very largest individual which I have seen, which,
if the tail were complete, would measure upward of 180 mm.,
the vertebre are quite as opisthoccelous as even in the largest
individuals of Desmognathus. The anterior ball has become, with
the exception of a thin articular surface such as persists in all
opisthoccelous salamanders, completely calcified and as hard and
dense as the body of the vertebra. So far as microscopical exam-
ination has extended, this calcified tissue does not becume true
bone. In sections after removal of the lime salts the original
cartilage, except for the rearrangement of the cells, remains in a
nearly unaltered state. In many of the larger specimens the an-
nular intervertebral ligament ossifies, beginning at its anterior
616 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
attachment and extending caudad. By this means the rim of the
posterior cup is built up higher and the socket deepened. Between
the overlapping vertebral rims an annular synovial sac is developed.
Whether the vertebre of Spelerpes ruber are properly designated
as amphiccelous or opisthoccelous depends, therefore, on the age of
the individual under consideration, and whether attention is
directed to the bony parts only or to the cartilage as well. During
late larval life and for a time after the metamorphosis, the ver-
tebre are both osteologically? and physiologically amphiccelous.
During the prime of life they are still amphiccelous so far as the
strictly bony portions of the centra are concerned; but if, as seems
more logical, the cartilaginous structures also are considered they
cannot be characterized otherwise than as opisthoccelous. In old
age they are opisthoccelous in every sense in which that term can
be applied to the vertebree of Desmognathus. Developmental
progress in the structure of the vertebre from a primitive to a
more specialized type is continuous throughout life.
It is well known that the amphiccelous condition of the vertebrze.
of tht aigher salamanders is attained by a course of development
essentially similar to what has just been described for Spelerpes.
The examination of a large series of Desmognathus fusca and D.
nigra shows that this is true of these species. The species of
Desmognathus transform when of much smaller size relatively to the
limit of growth than those of Spelerpes. The just transformed D.
fusca is about one-half the length of S. ruber at a corresponding
period, although the breeding adults are only about twenty per
cent. inferior. Calcification of the intervertebral cartilage pro-
ceeds quite rapidly, so that individuals of 50-60 mm. are in the
same stage as Spelerpes ruber of 135-140 mm. Even before
attaining a length of 100 mm. the vertebre are as strictly opistho-
ccelous as in the largest S. ruber, and have attained that condition
by a similar series of steps. It is noticeable that the calcified
material of the ball is softer than the fully ossified portions of the
vertebre, and that small enclosures of unchanged cartilage may
persist, as well as a remnant in the centre of its free surface,
where a depression appears in the dry skeleton. The later develop-
ment consists simply in the completion of calcification.
Used in the sense of Vaillant in the papers cited, and of some system-
atists to denote the condition of actual bone and calcification.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 617
The vertebre of the two forms now under consideration do not
properly belong to two types, but differ only in the period of life
at which the steps in development are passed through and at which
the higher structural type is attained. The completely osseous
opisthoccelous condition is reached in Desmognathus fusca prior to
the period of maturity and reproduction, in Spelerpes ruber only
after that period.
It seemed desirable to ascertain whether these conditions are
general among the genera of the more primitive families of the
Pseudosauria.* As it was important to mutilate most of the
material as little as possible, but a single articulation was generally
exposed and studied on each specimen, and for the sake of uni-
formity this was always the same one, the fifth anterior to the
sacral vertebra being selected for various reasons. The following
notes show the character of typical genera:
AMBLYSTOMID.
The largest available specimens of Amblystoma opacum, <A.
tigrinum, A. punctatum and <A. jeffersonianum were examined with-
out the detection of any changes of the nature sought. Through-
out life the vertebree appear to remain deeply and equally amphi-
celous and the intervertebral cartilage to undergo no calcification,
Chondrotus tenebrosus.
It was fully expected that this species, because of its Jarge size
and robust build, might present calcified intervertebral cartilages,
but even an unusually large individual (282 mm.) remains in the
simplest amphiccelous condition. The two faces of the centrum
are equally and very deeply cupped. The notochord is largely
persistent. The intervertebral thickening of the cartilaginous
sheath is slight and extends into the concavities of the contiguous
vertebrze, from which it may be easily removed without injury.
PLETHODONTID&A.
The very small species of this family will require to be studied
by means of sections, but the following will illustrate the condi-
tions met with :—
3 This I have been enabled to partially do chiefly through the courtesy of
the Curators of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, and espe-
cially of the Conservator of Vertebrata, Mr. Witmer Stone, who placed at
my disposal the extensive collections of that institution.
618 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Hemidactylium scutatum.
The largest specimens examined measure 80-85 mm. and are
strictly amphiccelous.
Plethodon cinereus.
Always strictly amphiccelous. This species and the next are
among those which show that neither a terrestrial habit nor a long
period of growth between metamorphosis and maturity is the
determining factor in the complete calcification of the articular
head.
Plethodon glutinosus.
Many specimens of this species were examined, including two
large ones of 167 mm. and 177 mm., belonging to the collection
at the Academy. All have deeply biconcave vertebrze without any
visible sign of calcification of the intervertebral cartilage, though
in the larger individuals it is evidently more firmly attached to the
succeeding than the preceding vertebra. Although there is no
fully formed articulation, a definite curved surface of fracture
corresponding to one is developed.
Plethodon eneus. Plethodon oregonensis.
Both amphiccelous. Of the former the largest specimen examined
measured 164 mm.:; in this the whole body of the vertebra appears
to be somewhat imperfectly ossified.
Autodax lugubris.
In two examples of 90 mm. and 105 mm. length the vertebre
are biconcave, with the intervertebral cartilage unmodified and
most strongly attached by the articular ligaments to the anterior
vertebra. The intervertebral articulation is developed. Two
others of about 145 mm. have the posterior face deeply cupped,
the anterior, after removal of the cartilage, much more shallow
and rough from the development of calcified tissue. The uneal-
cified cartilage has a smooth surface which fits into the next an-
terior socket.
Geotriton fuscus.
Only one small specimen of 86 mm. was available for dissection,
and this was nearly equally amphiccelous, with the intervertebral
cartilage remaining attached to the posterior face on being frac-
tured. Murray (’97) has figured a section of a vertebra of this
species which exhibits no modification of the cartilaginous inter-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 619
vertebral ring. Probably older specimens would show changes
similar to Spelerpes ruber.
(dipus variegatus.
One with the tail missing and the body measuring 45 mm. in
length has the anterior face slightly less cupped than the posterior,
and retaining the intervertebral cartilage. In two specimens of
145 mm. and 147 mm. the anterior cup is about one-third filled
with calcified cartilage.
Gyrinophilus porphyriticus.
A larva of 78 mm. has the bony centra deeply biconcave, the
notochord largely persistent but constricted by a narrow but rather
thick intervertebral cartilaginous ring.
A specimen of 106 mm., probably recently metamorphosed,
exhibits a much more extensively developed intervertebral carti-
lage, but appears to be unchanged otherwise.
In one of 133 mm. the notochord is still largely persistent, the
intervertebral articulation has formed in the cartilage as a curved
plate of flattened cells and the widely flaring posterior rim of the
bony centrum begins to overlap and embrace the more constricted
anterior rim. This is nearly the stage figured by Wiedersheim.
One of 172 mm. shows aslight annular calcification of the inter-
vertebral cartilage within the anterior cup.
In individuals of Jarger size the process of calcification is rapid.
One measuring 185 mm. has the anterior cup filled flush to the
brim with calcified tissue which presents a rough, nearly flat surface
when the cartilaginous head is scraped away. ‘The largest speci-
men examined measured 200 mm., and in this the calcification
extends slightly beyond the cup’s rim.
Spelerpes bellii.
This large species probably undergoes intervertebral calcification,
if at all, relatively later than S. ruber. In specimens of 180 mm.
and 240 mm. no trace of calcareous infiltration could be detected.
In both eases the intervertebral cartilage is ‘more firmly attached
by the articular ligaments to the anterior vertebra than by direct
union to the posterior one.
Spelerpes longicudus.
Of all the species of Plethodontidse examined this appears to be
the most precocious in respect to the feature under consideration.
620 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
In an example measuring only 90 mm. calcification has already
progressed so far as to fill about one-half of the anterior cup, and
in one of 135 mm. the cup is filled to the brim, leaving only a
very slight central depression.
Spelerpes bilineatus. Spelerpes guttolineatus.
Exhibit changes similar in character but somewhat more tardy
in the time of their appearance.
DESMOGNATHIDZ.
Typhlotriton speleus.
The vertebree of a 90 mm. example of this interesting blind
salamander, of which only slightly larger specimens have been
taken, are in about the same condition as those of a 60 mm. D.
fusca, and consequently opisthoccelous only in the sense in which a
mature Spelerpes ruber is opisthoccelous.
Desmognathus nigra.
Similar to D. fusca, but somewhat more retarded in development.
Leurognathus marmorata.
Of this species only a single skeleton of a length of 117 mm.
has been examined. It differs from Desmognathus only in the
greater prominence of the articular head.
Of the Salamandridz and Pleurodelidz no specimens were
examined in this connection, as the vertebre are well known
through the researches of Wiedersheim (’75) and others to be
strongly opisthoccelous and to ossify early.
When recourse is had to sections of a sufficient series of stages,
other interesting changes and generic differences will no doubt
appear ; but from the study of gross features alone it becomes
evident that as regards the form of the vertebral articulations the
genera of the families of salamanders present an unbroken devel-
opmental series.
The Amblystomide are probably always amphiceelous through-
out life.
Within the Plethodontide the genera arrange themselves in two
groups, the one including Plethodon and Hemidactylium, the other
Spelerpes, Gyrinophilus, Autodax and Cédipus. The Plethodon
group remains in the primitive state with little or no post-larval
calcification of the intervertebral cartilages. The members of the
Spelerpes group all (S. bel/ii ?) tend toward the opisthoecelous con-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 621
dition, and earlier or later in life the intervertebral cartilages are
affected by a process of calcification which is progressive and may
finally involve the entire substance of the articular heads. It
may be observed that the grouping of the genera as suggested,
with the exception of Autodax, is confirmatory of Cope’s view of
their affinities.
Desmognathus and its allies arrive at the final opisthoccelous
stage much earlier but by a series of post-larval stages quite
similar.
Many peculiar structural features segregate the amphiccelous
Amblystomid, on the one hand, and the opisthoccelous Salaman-
dridz and Pleurodelid, on the other, into distinct family groups.
The failure of the only important character which has seemed to
make the family distinction of the Plethodontide and Desmog-
nathide desirable renders their separate continuance no longer
necessary. Although Lewrognathus resembles Desmognathus in
the absence of a prefrontal bone in the adult, this is a very
doubtful character, and in any case would probably have, with the
peculiarities of the tongue, no more than subfamily value. The
family should retain the prior name of Plethodontide. It seems
to represent a phyletic line connected directly with the lower
amphiccelous salamanders ; and distinct from the Amphiumide, on
the one hand, and the Pleurodelide and Salamandridz on the
other.
List oF Papers CITED.’
Boulenger, G. A. ’83. Catalogue of the Batraechia Gradientia
in the Collection of the British Museum. 2ded. London, 1882.
Boulenger, G. A. 785. Reptilia and Batrachia. The Zodlogical
Record for 1884.
Cope, E. D. ’89. The Batrachia of North America. Bulletin
No. 34, U. S. National Museum, Washington, 1889.
Gegenbaur, C. ’62. Untersuchungen zur vergleichenden An-
atomie der Wirbelsatileder Amphibien und Reptilien. Leipzig,
1862.
Murray, J. A. ’97. The Vertebral Column of certain primi-
tive Urodela. Anatomischer Anzeiger, XIII, 661-2.
Vaillant, T. ’82. Remarque sur la disposition des corps verté-
braux chez lAnaides lugubris Hallowell. Bulletin de la
Société Philomathique de Paris (7), VI (1882), 183.
622 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF | 1900.
Vaillant, T. ’86. Note complémentaire sur l’anatomie de
Y Anaides lugubris Hallowell. 2d. (7), X (1886), 42-45.
Wiedersheim, R. ’75. Versuch einer vergleichenden Anatomie
der Salamandrinen. (Genoa, 1875.
Wiedersheim, R. ’93. Grundriss der vergleichenden Anatomie
der Wirbelthiere. Jena, 1893.
1900. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 625
AN ECOLOGICAL STUDY OF THE NEW JERSEY STRAND FLORA.
BY JOHN W. HARSHBERGER, PH.D.
The development of the Atlantic sea coast from Maine to Vir-
ginia, and especially of the coastal Jands of New Jersey, as places of
summer resort has rendered a botanical survey of the shore line an
imperative necessity. With the rise of towns and cities and the
building of railroads, the primitive condition of the sea beaches
has been remarkably changed. Dunes have been leveled, marshes
have been filled in, old drainage areas have been removed, new
soil has been brought to cover the sand formations to prevent their
drifting, and these alterations have not failed to produce corre-
sponding changes in the vegetation. New plants, weeds and the
like, able, as well as the native plants, to withstand the saline con-
ditions of air and soil, have been introduced with the coming of
man as a permanent habitant; the old vegetation has been grad-
ually removed, or, no longer able to grow under the altered condi-
tions, has given place to the emigrants distributed by the aid of
human beings.
Recognizing these facts, the present study of the sea-beach flora
of New Jersey was undertaken by the writer, so as to preserve in
some permanent form a record of the plant life, the distribution of
the peculiar vegetation and the ecological relationships of the plants
before the rapid change of the old conditions rendered impossible
such an ecological survey. The material for this paper has been
collecting for a number of years. As far back as 1894 the writer
began his observations on the sea-beach flora, but during the pres-
ent season (1900) the major part of the facts recorded here were
gathered to form this permanent record.
During the summer’s field work a number of places were vis-
ited along the Jersey coast, so as to make the account of the coastal
flora as comprehensive as possible. The most exact reconnoissance
was made at Seaside Park, Ocean County, where the writer has
summered for a number of seasons, so that Barnegat Beach is
624 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
taken as typical, and the beaches of other situations visited (South
Atlantic City, Ocean City and Wildwood) are chosen as modifying
or strengthening the conclusions reached by a close study during
several seasons of the salt-strand formations at Seaside Park, N. J.
The choice of Barnegat Beach as a typical sea strand is not an
arbitrary one. Of all the beaches visited, it conforms most closely
to the ideal beach formation, and presents in its southern extension
the coastal vegetation undisturbed by the hand of man, and ina
condition as nature has left it.
While the collection of material was under way, a very impor-
tant and instructive paper! appeared from the pen of Thomas H.
Kearney, Jr., dealing with the plant covering of Ocracoke Island,
Ne:
In order to make the results recorded in this paper conform
with those obtained by Mr. Kearney, the nomenclature used is made
identical with his. The nomenclature is mainly that followed in
Britton and Brown’s Illustrated Flora of the Northern United
States and Canada, but, in order that those who are interested in
ecological work and are not familiar with this nomenclature may
find no difficulty in recognizing the species described, the names
used in the later works of Gray and of Chapman are quoted in
parentheses. It is hoped that by doing this—i.e., adopting the
same plan as used in the above-cited paper—an unbroken survey of
the coast vegetation from Sandy Hook to North Caroliua will be
presented to the botanist ecologically inclined. In Mr. Herbert J.
Webber’s paper, ‘‘ Dunes of Florida,’’ printed in Science,* we
have presented the conditions of plant growth as found along
the seashore of Florida. What is needed to complete an account
of the ecology of the Atlantic coast of temperate North America
is a study of the strand vegetation of Long Island, which I believe
to be much like that of New Jersey; a study of the New England
coast, from Rhode Island to Maine, and a survey of the condi-
tions to be found in Nova Scotia and Newfoundland, which work
may well be committed to some enterprising Canadian botanist.
The appended list is derived from three sources of information:
+1900, Kearney, ‘‘ The Plant Covering of Ocracoke Island : A Study in the
Ecology of the N. C. Strand Vegetation,’’? Contrib. U. S. Nat'l Herbarium,
Vol. V, No. 5, pp. 261-319.
21898, Webber, ‘‘ Dunes of Florida,’’ Setence, N. S. Vol. VIII, pp. 651-
660, 690-700.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 625
(1) The collections of plants made by the writer at Seaside Park,
South Atlantic City, Ocean City and Wildwood. (2) The speci-
mens in the herbarium of the Philadelphia Botanical Club. (3)
The ‘‘ Catalogue of Plants Found in New Jersey,’’ by Dr. N. L.
Britton.* Synonyms are also given in the list, so as to render it
more intelligible.
The several divisions under which the subject of the ecology of
the New Jersey strand flora is presented are the following: (1)
Physiography; (2) geology and soils; (3) climate; (4) the plant
formations, their composition and physiognomy; (4) ecological
forms—adaptations to environment; (6) phytogeography; (7) list.
PHyYSIOGRAPHY.*
From Bay Head, lat. 40° 4’ N., to Cape May City, lat. 38°
58’ N., stretches in front of the mainland of New Jersey a pro-
tective barrier of sand, in width from a few rods to a half a mile,
separated from the mainland by bays or shallow inlets of the
ocean, or where these have been gradually filled in by the depo-
sition of sand and the action of plants, by wide stretches of salt
or tidal marshes, consisting of tide-swept sand, or covered by a
luxuriant growth of salt-marsh plants. These narrow sand
beaches which fringe the coast have been cast up by the action of
the waves on the shallow continental ocean front. The sand thus
deposited is caught up by the wind, which exerts a shovel-like
action on the sand, greatest when an east wind blows, and is piled
up in dunes, which on the New Jersey coast rise usually from
3 Final Report State Geologist of N. J., Vol. Il, pp. 27-642.
‘The student of the New Jersey coast flora is referred to the following
excellent maps of the State and of the coast line:
“The Atlas of New Jersey,’’ comprising maps showing Geodetic and
Topographic Surveys of New Jersey, issued in 1889.
No. 9. Monmouth Shore, Sandy Hook to Manasquan.
No. 185. Vicinity of Barnegat Bay.
No. 16. Egg Harbor and Vicinity, including Atlantic shore from Barnegat
to Great Egg Harbor.
No. 17. Cape May Shore Line.
No. 18. New Jersey State Map. Geographic.
No. 19. New Jersey Relief Map. Hypsometric.
No. 20. New Jersey Geological Map.
Coast Charts U. S. Hydrographic Office.
Chart 8. Montauk Point to Cape Henlopen.
Chart 121. Sandy Hook to Barnegat.
Chart 122. Barnegat to Absecon.
Chart 123. Absecon to Cape May.
626 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
15 to 25 feet, but on Seven-mile Beach to a height of 43 feet.
In front of the dune formation extends the tidal beach proper
of varying extent. It may be divided into the lower, the middle
and the upper beaches, using the terms of Cowles.’ At high
tide the water never completely reaches to the base of the dunes,
but with exceptionally high water or during a storm the base and
even the top of the dune may be water-swept. Back of the pri-
mary dune formation are usually found other dunes more or less
broken up into rounded eminences by wind action, and presenting
deep gullies subject at all times to the scooping power of the
breezes which are active in the formation of the dune complex.*®
The upper beach exists at the places visited, according to the
observations of the writer, only at Wildwood. Its limits else-
where are vague and uncertain. The lower beach is the zone of
land limited by the wash of summer storms, and is in New Jersey
entirely barren of plant life. The middle beach is determined by
the presence of driftwood and extends to the foot of the dunes.
The hollows of the secondary dunes in depth usually correspond
to the level of the ground water, for digging a few inches into
the wet sand reveals the presence of fresh water, which has fil-
tered through the sand from the ocean on the one side, and from
the salt marshes or bays on the other. The force with which
this sand is blown against obstacles in its path may be realized
if one stoops down and faces it. The carving of dead and living
trees exposed to these sand blasts is another evidence of their
power.
Back of the dune coniplex, which is constantly shifting its posi-
tion on the broader beaches, is found the belt or zone which has
been captured by vegetation. Such belts are found at Seaside Park
(a mile below the town at Read’s Hotel), at South Atlantic City,
where it exists in the middle of the salt marsh, at Ocean City and
at Wildwood. I have denominated such areas thicket forma-
tions. in contradistinction to beach and dune formations. At
Seaside Park proper, where the thicket formation does not exist,
61899, Cowles, ‘‘Dune Floras of Lake Michigan,’ Botanical Gazette,
SXGNOVIL peels
* The dune complex consists of active or wandering dunes and of primary
and secondary embryonic dunes, or those just starting to form by the piling
up of the blowing sand around some obstacle. The most striking topo-
graphical effect of the dune complex is that of a vast, billowy sea of sand.
It illustrates almost all conditions of a dune’s life history.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 627
the dune complex gradually slopes to meet the salt marsh which
fringes Barnegat Bay, and is in turn followed by the sandy
bay beach, which is backed by low dunes or sand hills a foot or
two high. Where the thicket formation exists it may reach the
bay dunes proper, when the salt marsh is practically absent, or
exists as swampy depressions surrounded by shrubby or arbores-
cent vegetation in the centre or edges of the thicket formation
proper, as exemplified at Island Beach Life Saving Station, Seaside
Park. Allusion will be made to these later, when the plants of
the several formations are referred to. The position of these
swampy areas, in which grow many salt-marsh plants, seems to indi-
cate that at some time the sand has biown out upon the salt marsh,
covering it up with dunes, afterward captured by woody plants
which prevent them from wandering farther. At Wildwood and
Ocean City the thicket formation is succeeded toward the westward
by the low-lying, typical salt marshes.
The slope and position of these New Jersey beaches are constantly
changing. At» New Inlet, Long Beach extended three miles
farther southward in 1885 than it did in 1841, while the beach
south of Little Egg Harbor Inlet had grown one mile northward
in the same time. Five-mile Beach had its south end three-
quarters of a mile farther south and half a mile more to seaward
than its position in 1772.’ From Bay Head to Cape May, the
beaches are cut through by ten inlets, through which the tide
ebbs and flows to the bays inside. The interval between these
inlets is over 20 miles at the north, but decreases to 2 miles near
Cape May. ‘There has been a tendency to decrease in the number
of inlets and at least six have been permanently closed during this
ceutury. Inside of this line of beaches is a series of bays and
sounds connected by a network of narrow crooked channels, called
thoroughfares, in such a way that boats of light draft can pass
from the head of Barnegat Bay over 90 miles down to Cape May,
keeping entirely inside the beaches. Barnegat Bay is the largest
of these, being nearly 30 miles long, with an area of 72 square
miles. Its depth northward from Barnegat Inlet scarcely exceeds
10 feet, but southward it reaches a depth of 20 feet. It varies
from two to four miles in width, leaving the beaches well cut off
71888, Vermeule, Final Report Geological Survey of New Jersey, I,
pi 179;
628 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
from the mainland. Barnegat Beach, as the series of beaches
to the eastward of Barnegat Bay are called collectively, may be
taken, therefore, as the most typical beach of the New Jersey
coast, and the one most exhaustively described from an ecological
standpoint in this paper.
The salt marshes northward from Barnegat Inlet nowhere
exceed a mile in width and are usually much less, as at Seaside
Park. Southward they widen, encroaching more on the bays,
but there is back of Long Beach a width of from two to four
miles of water. Between Tuckerton and Beach Haven, Little
Egg Harbor Bay is four miles wide. It has a depth of from 5 to
10 feet at mean tide, but there is a channel running down from
Cedar Bonnets to the Inlet in which the minimum depth is 10 feet
and the maximum 32 feet. Through this bay are scattered many
islands of marsh, and at its foot a long tongue of marsh puts out
from the mainland toward the south end of Long Beach, 44 miles.
It is from 1 to 2 miles wide, and is cut up into numerous islands
by thoroughfares. Going from Great Bay southward to Great Egg
Harbor Bay, the tidal plain diminishes in width from 64 miles to
less than three. It is fronted by Island, Brigantine and Absecon
Beaches, back of which the marshes are cut up by a series of smal!
bays and broad channels into countless islands, the areas of marsh
and water being nearly equal. Southward in Cape May County the
plain varies from 2 to 4 miles, and the marshes exceed in area the
water. °
GEOLOGY AND SoILs.
From a geological standpoint, the sea beaches of New Jersey
are of recent origin. ‘They lie upon the older rock formations
which crop out in parallel series along the Delaware river side of
the State. These earlier rocky strata slant downward and south-
eastward, and presumably the whole of the overlying strata in
southern New foe are built upon gneiss, which is followed in
8 Under the caption ‘‘ Plant Formations, their Chimica and Physi-
ognomy,’’? more detailed reference will be made to the pbysiographical
features of the places visited. The above account must suffice at this point.
The student of the dynamics of dunes who desires to study the detailed
effects of the wind action on the formation of dunes and the modification of
vegetable organisms is referred to the papers of Dr. Cowles, where in an
elegant style his studies on the dunes of Michigan are set forth at some
length.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 629
order upward by deposits of Cretaceous, Eocene, Miocene and
Recent Periods. Numerous borings for artesian wells along the
Atlantic seaboard have revealed the extent of the deposits of the
several periods. These investigations have been pursued inde-
fatigably by Woolman, who has given in several papers the results
of his study.* The superficial deposits concern the ecologist,
but the following data are given by way of comparing the super-
ficial, recent soil deposits and the older, deeper-lying ones.
Artesian Well at Longport (803 feet deep).
SCCCHIMNIPONT, . fussbse Wi 'scsiia lace ded Us 75 feet.
PPOISEO@CTIOS Te cg et eet Gay ae
HEE EY Se O7.*6
Maacemews ee ts kl GS COA SS ~=— Diatomaceous:
803
Diatomaceous bed extends from 292 to 664 feet — 372 feet
thick.
Artesian Well at Wildwood (655 feet deep).
Soil and black muck full of roots of cedar and holly = 3
feet.
Beach sands, lower ten feet slightly darker in shade = 3
to 30 feet.
30-61 feet. Age?
61-152 feet. Marine and fresh-water diatoms.
61-290 feet. Age? Made up of mixed marine and fresh-water
deposits, say 61 to 185 feet.
290-665 feet — Miocene.”
The details given as to the most superficial deposits, which form
the soil in which plants grow, are instructive. At Seaside Park
the vegetable mold is of but slight depth and barely covers the
sand in the thicket formation. On the salt marsh it is about a
foot deep. The dunes are practically without any vegetable
detritus. At Wildwood, which, as will be shown later, possesses
Recent
®Woolman, Annuai Reports New Jersey Geologist.
101894, Woolman, ‘‘Vertical Sections of Wells at Atlantic City and
Wildwood,” Annual Report New Jersey Geologist, p. 188.
1 The oxidation or removal of decaying vegetation is almost complete on
the newer dunes, so that the accumulation of humus is not important. On
the old, established Gunes the mold becomes deeper and deeper, and after
the lapse of centuries the sandy soil beneath may become buried so deeply
that a mesophytic flora is able to establish itself, as beautifully exemplified
on Five-mile Beach.
41
630 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
a remarkable forest growth, the depth of the vegetable mold is
about three feet, indicating that the surface of Five-mile Beach was
one of the first to have been captured from the drifting action of
the winds. The soil of the dunes is chiefly quartz sand, consisting
of grains remarkably uniform in size, since the wind has made
a selection, being unable to pick up gravel or large sand parti-
cles. The sand, as a whole, appears whitish, but in the hollows
of the dune complex it is generally streaked with grains of black
sand, largely hornblende and magnetite. Such a sandy soil has
a marked effect upon vegetation, being extremely porous and
almost devoid of cohesion between the grains. Plants growing
upon such porous sand deposits show always a xerophytie charac-
ter. This is the character of the soil of most of the beaches of
the New Jersey coast with the exception of Five-mile, Two-
mile and Poverty, or Cape May Beaches, where the sand, being
finer, is more compact and not easily blown into dunes. Wild-
wood, Holly Beach and Cape May have long been known for the
silky or velvety character of their beach sands.
Another fact of very considerable interest must be mentioned
here. Many beaches of to-day rest on the tide marsh and a very
heavy storm will sometimes cut away the sand and expose the
marsh on the ocean front. This was shown at Sea Isle City in
1892, but never to the knowledge of the writer at Barnegat
Beach. The sand of the beach here, and in other places, has been
earried over and deposited on the marsh, which was west of where
the beaches formerly lay. This is shown at Island Beach Life
Saving Station, where the old marsh has been entirely covered up
with the exception of a few spots which exist as isolated marshy
places in the midst of the dunes long since captured by trees and
other plants. The drifting in of the beach and the wearing away of
the sand in front has caused the kind of soil deposits deseribed
above.
CLIMATOLOGY.
The introductory remarks concerning the climate of the Atlantic
coast of New Jersey are derived from the Final Report of the
Geological Survey of New Jersey, Vol. I, ‘‘ Topography, Magnet-
ism, Climate,’’ p. 347.
That part of the State which borders the ocean and is near enough
1900. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 631
to be more directly exposed to the ameliorating influence of its
waters is here designated as the Atlantic Coast Belt. The influ-
ence of the ocean’s waters is felt very decidedly to a distance of
four to eight miles from the line of beach, or outer coast tine, from
’ Sandy Hook to Cape May. The distribution of the open bays,
tides, marshes, rivers and clearings alter this distance very con-
siderably. In severe storms the salt spray is felt several miles
back from the shore. ‘‘ According to Eli Collins,” of Barnegat,
a dry storm, September 3, 1821, carried spray of salt water three
miles inland, upsetting stacks, etc. It lasted from 9 A.M. to
3 P.M. For two hours it was cloudy and dark as a hurricane.
It killed the leaves of the trees, and after they fell new buds and
flowers were developed the same year.’’ Col. B. Aycrigg, of
Passaic, says of the same storm: ‘‘Its violence may be estimated
from the fact that where I was staying, two miles from the bay
and six miles from the sea, the salt water was blown against the
windows and left a crust of salt, which had the effect of ground
glass, and the leaves on the southeast sides of the trees were killed,
turned brown and dropped off.’’ The effect of the prevailing sea
winds is not, however, noticeable far from the shore in the pine
districts. But the isolated and scattered trees of fields and the
woods on the beaches all show it in their unsymmetrical growths.
Water equalizes the temperature and renders it more even. The
winds from the sea are warmer in winter and cooler in summer.
The sea breezes of the hot season spring up generally about noon,
so that the maximum temperature of the day is in the forenoon,
just before the inblowing of the cool sea air. The influence of
these sea winds is to temper the extreme heat, to reduce both the
range and the mean temperature in the warmer months, and to
give a more humid character to the air.
The sea beaches situated, as they are in New Jersey, with the
ocean on one side and the tidal waters on the other, have a climate
partaking slightly of the insular type. Barnegat Station is sep-
arated from the mainland by four miles of water. There is a note-
worthy difference in the winter season between Cape May and other
coast stations. It is seen in the difference in the-average daily min-
imum, which at Barnegat and Atlantic City is four to five degrees
lower than it is at Cape May. The position of Cape May is more
2 P. 348, Lic.
632 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
insular than that of Atlantic City or Barnegat. It is warmer in
winter than Washington, and its mean daily range of temperature
is four degrees less than Norfolk, Va. The range is nearly as low
as Cape Lookout in North Carolina, and Key West, New Orleans
and Galveston in the Gulf States. Figures show that in the daily
range of temperature Cape May compares favorably with our most
southern localities. The effect of so high a mean temperature in
the spring is to produce crops of vegetables and small fruits quite
as early as Portsmouth and Norfolk, Va., and the season is gen-
erally a month in advance of the same season in the northern
part of the State.
The mild climate of Cape May appears in the character of its
flora. Britton says:
“* (1) All the southern counties of New Jersey have a some-
what Southern flora, and it seems true that the further south we
go the more pronounced does this become.
‘© (2) Although Cape May county has never been botanically
explored to the extent that discoveries already made should war-
rant, yet it has already yielded a number of species of more
southern distribution, and, so far as known, is the northern limit
of the following six: Gfnothera humifusa Nutt., Diodia virginica L.,
Conoclinium ceelestinum D.C., Galium hispidulum Michx., Pluchea
bifrons D.C., Paspalum walterianum Schultes.
“(3) In addition to the above list, it may be stated that there are
other species of a Southern character which probably occur in greater
abundance in Cape May County than in any other part of New
Jersey.’’ Pinus teda of the South has also been recently found
near Cape May City.
MerTEOROLOGICAL RECORD.
The data given in the accompanying tables represent the
meteorological record of one year, that of 1898. The tables are
compiled from the ninth annual report of the Board of Direc-
tors of the New Jersey Weather Service.
3 Britton, A Preiiminary Catalogue of the Flora of New Jersey.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 633
Temperature, 1898.
| ra 4s See | |
ae | sm = a
The Sea Coast. | QR | -.5 3 as A 3
Ba | aa < eon Mott teri si ae see
Barnegat......... 36 1 | | ;
Atlantic City-..| 53 | 16 | 53.1 |+1.2) 94 |July 1| 7 [|Feb.. 2
June 26 Jan. 30
Cape May....... i | 4 | 541|—o.3) 98] me 7a) 154 pore
The record for Barnegat Lighthouse is not complete for the
year, because no record was made for the months of January,
February, June and July.
654 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900,
ANNUAL MONTHLY SUMMARY FOR THE THREE STATIONS GIVEN
ABOVE.
Temperature.
E l
3 ea M
E Station. | Mean. | M@%) | Date. | min. Date ea) a ae
a | | } | Range.
; Barnegat... .|
& |Atlantic City! 36.0| 60 | 13 | 12 2 | 42.3 | 296 | 12.7
_*? |Cape May....| 38.0} 59 | 13 | 15 | 30 | 43.0] 33.0) 108
|Barnegat.... |
® |Atlantic City) 346 | 59 | 10 | 7 2 | 41.4] 27.8] 13.6
4 |Cape May...| 35.5] 50 | 12 | 16 2 | 40.6 | 30.4 | 10.2
¢ |Barnegat....| 45.2 | 67 chy Gel ie 1, | 516 | 38.9 aoe
© |AUantic City! 44.0 | 68 | 17 | 23 1 | 49.3 | 38.7| 106
= (Cape May...| 448, 64 | 20 | 296 | 1 | 489] 406] 83
|Barnegat....| 48.1 | 74 17 25 G | 55.9 | 403) iae
& \Atlantic City 46.9) 77 | 17 | 24 | 6 | 53.7} 40.1 | 13.6
_* |Cape May...| 48.2) 73 | 17 | 31 | 6 | 528) 43.7] 91
p, |Barnegat....| 54.2 | 84 | 20 | 41 9 | 60.6 | 47.8 | 12.8
& |Atlantic City 55.5 | 76 | 20 | 42 9 | 60.7) 50.3 | 10.4
wt |Cape May...| 56.2 | 71 20 | 42 8 | 60/1) 52:4) |e
2 Barnegat...» .
5 |Atlantic City) 66.6 | 92 | 26 | 50 | 23 | 73.3} 60.0] 13.3
> |Cape May...| 67.8 | 8 | 26 | 55 | 6 | 72.4| 631] 93
>, |Barnegat....| |
‘S |Atlantic City). 73.2 | 94 1 | 58 | 12 | 77.9| 686| 93
2. Cape, May...|. 73.0). 88 | 1 62 11 | 76.5 | 69.4/ 7.1
2p |Barnegat....) 75.8 92 31 63 27 | 82.1 | 69.5 | 12.5
= |Atlantic City) 74.2 | 91 | 25 | 60 | 28 | 79.1| 69.3] 9.8
_“t_|Cape May...| 74.4 | 83 2 | 6 | 28 | 77.3| 71.4) 5.9
4s |Barnegat..../ 70.8) 94 | 3 | 53 | 21 | 78.3) 63.2 | 15.1
& |Atlantic City, 68.0| 89 | 3 | 50 | 21 | 74.3/ 61.7] 12.6
«2 |Cape May...| 68.0) 83 | 38 55 21 | 71.4 | 64.3) 7.1
. \Barnegat....| 59.8 | 7 4,5 a¥e 28 | 66.6 | 52.9 13
© |Atlantic City) 57.5|/ 75 | 8 35 28 | 63.9] 52.1] 11.8
© |Cape May...| 58.8 | 72 | 5,6 | 35 | 28 | 62.5 | 55.0] 7.5
4; |Barnegat....| 45.5 | 66 4 | 24 | 27 | 52.9) 381] 148
© |Atlantic City) 44.1| 62 | 2 | 24 | 28 | 50.5| 37.7] 128
A |Cape May...| 46.4| 63 | 10 | 296 | 27 | 50.9| 420] 89
~s (Barnegat. ...) 36.4 | 54 | 5,31/ 20 | 9,10) 43.2 | 29.5 | 13.7
S |Atlantic City, 36.4/ 56 | 4 | 12 | 14 | 429] 288] 13.1
A Cape May...| 37.8| 50 | 31 | 21 | 14 | 424| 332] 92
The date of the last killing frost in spring for Barnegat City in
1898 was April 8; for Cape May City, April 7, and for Ocean City,
April 8.
The first killing frost in autumn (1898) occurred at Barnegat
City, Cape May City and at Ocean City on the same day, October
28. The length of the season in days at the several places was as
follows:
Barnegat City, . 4. «a0 8 WL Ms el
Océan ‘Gity, 3. < n° «© 60 ee ee
Gape May City,< o< «4s cx a (ee ee
1900.]
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
Precipitation, State of Weather, Wind, 1898.
635
Precipitation, in Inches. State of Weather. Wind.
See |. eee AGAR AESSEEE
$ = Bge| #2 aah le es g |G. |S9\SAlERISE ies od
2 | gg |SeH| 32) 2 | e2 | 2 eeezes@saclesea
£2 55 8 sé S |S"|Balseicolscien =
ee fa 7) os Sh et a 8 a0 2520 ae
Barne | | | | ey |
Tid aca 5.94 | Nov. | 1.52 | Sept. | | |
Atlan- | | |
tic C’y| 38.68 |—4.13] 5.51 | Nov. | 1.81 | Sept. 127 123 139|103| N. W
Cape | | |e | ae
May. | 40.80 |+ 7.68) 4.81 | Apr. | 1.55 | Feb. | 133/145, 96/124) N. W.
Precipitation. State of Weather. Wind.
co |
E Station Total | Great- Numb'r pantie | __ |Prevail-
= eae ein = Date. | OGL oe Clear Cloudy. |20Ud Rese
| more. |
. |Barnegat.... hae ,* |
& |Atlantic City) 3.39 | 0.97 | 15,16) 13 6 | 18 | 12 |N.w.
_'> |Cape May...| 3.06 | 0.86 | 15 13 On} 10" |. 12) NEWe,
. |Barnegat.... |
‘© |Atlantic City; 1.86 | 1.40/19, 20) 8 | 15 8 5 |N.W.
_ |Cape May...! 1.55 | 0.97 | 19 | 8 | 15 6 7 |N.W.
s Barnegat..../.3.54 | 0.90 | 4,5 | 8 u 19 oF le NeEs
2 |Atlantic City] 2.56°| 0.70 | 29,30 11 fo cde ol Gee
= |Cape May...| 3.00 | 0.94; 4 | 14 Bo ik 95 | 14 NEES
., |Barnegat....| 3.64 | 1.33 | 28, 29 7 11 12 7 | N.E.
=. |Atlantic City) 2.67 | 0.75 | 28,29 13 4 16 10 |N.W.
_“S [Cape May...| 4.81 | 1.98 | 28 | 13 | 9 9 | 12 |N.w.
>, |Barnegat....| 5.63 | 1.50 | 15 ez) 11 11 9 | N.E.
@ |Atlantic City) 5.17 | 1.22 | 12,13) 16 6) 132) deh save
_= |Cape May...| 3.92 | 0.93] 16 | 17 | 10 | 6 | 15 | N.E.
© |Barnegat....
& |Atlantic City) 2.49 | 1.59 | 28,29 10 13 14 3 Saws
> |Cape May...| 2.02 | 0.60 | 20 | 11 15 9 6 |S. We:
p, |Barnegat. .- . |
‘a |Atlantic City) 2.23 | 1.18 |12,13, 8 | 11 | 14 6 | S.W.
eutape May. 3| 413.) 1.15 | 13 | 12 | 11 | | 9 | s.
e, |Barnegat....| 2.70 | 1.30 | 10,11) 5 18 | 10 3 | SOW.
= |Atlantic City) 3.99 | 1.93 |10,11| 6 | 14 | 13 4 |S.W.
memlespe Mayes.) 476/121 | 12 | 6 | 15. | 8" | 8 |+8.
4 |Barnegat....| 1.52 | 1.10 | 22,23! 4 19) | St Py NSE:
& Atlantic City) 1.81 | 1.14 | 23 Be ins 4 7 | S.W.
® |Cape May...| 3.25 | 1.24 | 26 a 18), ||. 6 Cuaes!
.; |Barnegat....| 5.25 | 1.30 | 26,27; 10 | 17 | 10 4 | N.E.
© |Atlantic City) 4.60] 1.75 | 26 | 11 | 9 | 14 8 | N.W.
© \Cape May...| 8.94 | 1.42 | 296 | 10 |.13.| 8 | 10. | Nw.
; [Barnegat....| 5.94 | 1.30 | 29,30) 11 | 11 | 11 | 8 |N.W.
© |Atlantic City) 5.51 | 1.25 | 26, 27) 13 | 9 ‘9 1D) Se ENEWe
_@ |Cape May...| 3.83 | 0.72| 29 | 12 | 9 | 8 | 18 |N.W.
5 |Barnegat....| 3.54] 1.52/ 19,20) 9 | 14 | 8 | 9 |N.W.
© |Atlantic City! 2.40 | 0.79 | 19, 20) 10 | 10 9 12 |N.W.
Dr \Gape May...| 2:53 | 0.54 | 20 | 10 | 13 | 6 | 12°] Ww.
636 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Tue PLANT ForMATIONS, THEIR COMPOSITION AND PHYSIOGNOMY.
The various areas which are definitively marked by the character
of the vegetation pass in some cases insensibly into each other, so
that they overlap or are dove-tailed like wedges, these physio-
graphical features being brought about by the sort of topography
which prevails in a given area. For example, a mile below the
town of Seaside Park the dune complex, almost entirely bare of
trees, stretches completely across the beach, which is here about
half a mile wide. In making the ecological reconnoissance at
the four points chosen for study—namely, Seaside Park on Barne-
gat Beach, South Atlantic City on Absecon Beach, Ocean City on
Peck’s Beach, and Wildwood on Five-mile Beach—the follow-
ing belts or zones of the different formations may be given in
outline, the exceptions to the typical disposition of the belts or
zones being due to the physiographic changes brought about by the
closure of inlets, the drifting of sand, and the wearing action of
the waves on the beach front and their scouring action upon the
tide marsh:
T. Sea-strand vegetation.
1. Treeless open.
A. Beach formation.
(a) Succulent zone (middle beach).
Cakile-Ammodenia society at Seaside Park,
South Atlantic City and Ocean City.
Salsola society at Ocean City and Wildwood.
Atriplex society at Wildwood.
(6) CEnothera humifusa zone (upper beach only at
Wildwood).
B. Dune formation. .
(a) Ammophila zone at Seaside Park, South Atlantic
City, Ocean City and not clearly at Wildwood.
(b) Myrica zone at Seaside Park, South Atlantic City,
Ocean City.
(ec) Hudsonia zone, comprising the greater part of the
dune complex, at Seaside Park only.
Rhus radicans—Ampelopsis society at Seaside Park
and Wildwood.
Dune-marsh society at Seaside Park and Ocean
City.
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCE3 OF PHILADELPHIA. 637
Baccharis—Rosa society, bordering the dune-
marsh society and growing upon the captured
slopes of the dunes of the dane complex (Hud-
sonia zone), at Seaside Park only.
2. Tree clad (trees and shrubs).
A, Thicket formation at Seaside Park, South Atlantic (on
high dune in middle of salt marsh), Ocean City and
most luxuriantly at Wildwood, comprising two zonal
areas, the second surrounding the following associa-
tions (Kearney), or societies:
(a) Juniper zone.
(6) Zone of mixed vegetation.
Thicket marsh society at Seaside Park and Wild-
wood.
Hudsonia society at Seaside Park and Wildwood.
Scirpus society at Seaside Park.
Cat-tail society at Seaside Park.
Marsh Shield—fern society at Seaside Park and
Wildwood.
Osmunda society at Wildwood.
Ptilimnium society at Wildwood.
Polygonum society at Wildwood.
B. Marsh-dune formation at Seaside Park and elsewhere on
the coast, where isolated rounded hills of sand arise
from the centre of the marsh and are covered with a
variety of shrubs and occasionally one or two trees,
evergreen or deciduous. At South Atlantic City
such a dune island exists in the marsh, but its length
and the complexity and size of the growth upon it
compel us to classify it under 2. A. Thicket forma-
tion proper.
If. Salt-marsh vegetation.
A. Tidal-flat formation, covered at exceptionally high
tides, along the entire coast.
B. Saline-marsh formation at South Atlantic City and
Wildwood and many other places back of the
beaches.
C. Converted saline-marsh formation (fresh), redeemed
from the effect of the tidal brackish waters of the
638 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
bays by the formation of a sandy beach and a low
dune along its bay side. This sandy beach and dune
completely closes off the marsh from salt water, ex-
cept where the so-called slues are found which
permit the ingress and egress of the tidal water to
limited areas of the marsh. Such areas of the
marsh, therefore, are covered with vegetation more
truly adaptive in character. Such a marsh is found
at Seaside Park about 700 feet wide, and from the
drier portions of it salt hay is cut periodically.
ILI. Bay-strand vegetation (absent where the saline-marsh forma-
tion exists).
A. Dune formation as at Seaside Park, where the dune sup-
ports a variety of plants. This formation one mile
below Seaside Park merges itself insensibly with the
thicket formation proper. In fact, no line of demar-
cation between these two formations can be drawn at
that point.
8. Bay-beach formation at the limit of high tide, covered
with the dead and dried leaves of eel-grass, Vallis-
neria spiralis washed up by the waves.
IV. Bay-water vegetation.
(a) The Plankton (not investigated).
(6) Ruppia zone in the shallow waters along the
eastern shore of the bays (investigated at Sea-
side Park).
(ce) Nereid zone, comprising the alge which grow on
the pilings sunk into the sand for landings and
as jetties to prevent wave action. These alge
exist in considerable abundance, especially near
the inlets and open bays communicating with
them, where the salt water of the ocean has
full effect. This zone was notinvestigated. A
number of other zones and societies might be
delimited, but the above indicate that a careful
study of them would amply repay the ecologist.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 639
I. SeA-STRAND VEGETATION.
1. TREELESS, OPEN FORMATIONS.
A. Beach Formation.
The beach formation exists at the several places investigated in
several modifications of the typical one, which exists at Seaside
Park, N. J. The lower beach is limited by the reach of the
higher tides and is marked by the constant shifting and grinding
of the particles of sand against each other by wave action. No
plants can exist under such trying conditions—the pounding action
of the waves, the grinding of the beach sand, the desiccating
effects of the sun and wind when the beach is exposed at low
tide. The middle beach, where driftwood collects, supports a con-
siderable number of herbaceous annuals, which show in a striking
way their adaptation to unpropitious surroundi::gs. They possess
in the extreme a xerophytic character of succulence, and this
permits them to exist in a porous soil of drifting sand and within
the influence of the sali spray.“* The most abundant plant of the
middle beach in all the localities studied is Cakile edentula (Bigel. )
Hook., the sea blite, with long branching tap-root and jointed,
indehiscent, fleshy fruit of two compartments. The leaves of
this plant are thick and succulent and thus well adapted to the
extreme xerophilous conditions to which beach plants are sub-
jected. Associated with this succulent is also another, Ammodenia
peploides (L.) Rupr., which grows in clumps, and’ is of a dark-
geeen color with thick, fleshy leaves. It forms the so-called
annual dunes which are piled up around its succulent stems,
remaining as small hillocks of sand, through which this plant pro-
trudes, until autumn, when upon the death of the sand-binder
the sand is again caught up by the wind and carried away. Cukile
edentula (Bigel) Hook. is also instrumental in catching the sand
and holding it in the form of embryonic dunes. These two plants
are the only ones found commonly on Barnegat Beach at Seaside
Park.
At South Atlantic City, in addition to Cakile and Ammode-
nia, which are also found there, grow Salsola kali L., Euphorbia
polygontfolia L. and Cenchrus tribuloides L. Salsola kal L. is ex-
14 For physiological details the ‘reader is referred to Kearney’s “The
Plant Covering of Ocracoke Island,’’? Contrib. U. S. National Herbarium,
Vol. V, p. 275, 1900.
640 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
tremely xerophytic with succulent stem and leaves and spinous
habit. Euphorbia polygonifolia J.., a prostrate herb, possesses
latex, which is probably instrumental in reducing transpiration.
Cenchrus tribuloides L., of annual habit, depends upon its prickly
fruit for its distribution and very existence. It is abundant, asa
character plant, at South Atlantic City, along the dune faces in the
zone of succulents, and also as a component of the flora in
the zones more distantly removed from the ocean front. This is
true of this grass both at Ocean City and Wildwood, where it is
not conspicuous by its presence on the middle beach.
The most interesting distribution of plants is met at Wildwood.
Here the beach is extremely flat and very wide, trending to the
northeast, where apparently it is widest. The lower beach con-
sists of sand, packing well together, and when wet presenting a
hard, firm, floor-like surface. Just above the ordinary limit of
high tide are little hummocks of sand held in place by the stalks
of grasses and other herbaceous plants which have been washed
up by tidal action. This area of loose sand is succeeded by a line
of more elevated sand bordering a tidal depression inside it.
Upon this low ridge of sand Salsola kali L. grows in the greatest
abundance, and an inspection indicates that the tide must flow at
times between the Sa/sola patches. On the far side of the tidal
pool are found, in association with isolated clumps of the marram
grass, Ammophila arenaria (L.) Link., growths of an annual
Atriplex arenaria Nutt., a chenopodiaceous plant with reddish-
colored bushy-branched stem and fleshy leaves. Proceeding up the
beach in a straight line, a wind-swept area tenanted by marram
grass and isolated plants of Xanthiwm Canadense Mill. var. echin-
atum (Murr.) Gray, Euphorbia polygonifolia L., Salsola kali L.
(not as.a character plant), Seswvium maritimum ( Walt.) B.S. P.,
and Strophostyles helvola (L.) Britt., just in flower, trailing as a
prostrate vine over the sandy soil, are passed. The only area
which merits the name Ammophila zone occupies the portion of the
beach adjoining that just described, but the sand grass, Ammophila
arenaria (i.) Link., although abundant here, hardly can be called
a zonal plant at present, although it has commenced to build a
frontal dune, which when raised above the level of the beach (a
stage which it has not; yet reached) may separate the middle beach
from ihe upper beach sufficiently to merit the application of the
zonal name to this area of the Wildwood sea-strand. The sand
1900. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 641
grass growing here was found in full flower associated with Am-
modenia peploides (L.) Rupr., gathering the sand about it, and
Strophostyles helvola (L.) Britt., creeping out as a radiant plant
in all directions. As an introduced stray, the tomato plant,
Lycopersicon Lycopersicon (Iu. ) Karst., was picked up in this area,
much depauperate and beaten by the blasts of sand and wind and
hardly recognizable except by its odor and the lobed leaves with
smaller lobes interspersed in the sinuses.
The Cnothera humifusa zone, or upper beach, comprises the
hollow place in front of the low frontal dune and the seaward
face of the dune itself. Here grow in perfect harmony Gerardia
purpurea (L.), Strophostyles helvola (.) Britt. with narrower
leaflets, Solidago sempervirens L. with thick leaves, which is found
on the lee face of the sea dunes farther northward, Leptilon
canadensis (.) Britton and Gnothera humifusa Nutt.—the plant
which gives name to this interesting assemblage of species. The
latter is chosen as a character plant, because Cape May county
represents the northern limit of its distribution, which extends to
Florida. C£nothera humifusa Nutt. is essentially southern in its
range, occurring on the sea beaches of the Southern States. Its
presence is proof of the mild climate of Wildwood, which has
already been referred to. The lower face of the dune here sup-
ports Lactuca canadensis L. and life-everlasting, Anaphalis mar-
garitacea (L.) Benth. and Hook.
B. Dune Formation.
(a) Ammophila Zone.—Upon the top and lee side of the sea
dune at Seaside Park, which extends in some places uninter-
Tuptedly there for a distance of half a mile, with a uniform height of
about 15 feet, and at a uniform distance from the ocean front,
grows the best of all sand-binders, Ammophila arenaria (L.)
Link. A perennial dune such as at Seaside Park requires peren-
nial dune-formers, which must be also plants which possess the
power of growing out into the light when buried in the sand, and
of spreading radially by rootstock propagation. These require-
ments of a successful dune-former and holder marram grass pos-
sesses in the highest degree. Cowles’® gives an exhaustive account
of how this grass accomplishes this object so perfectly. Associated
181899, Cowles, ‘‘ Dune Floras of Lake Michigan,’’? Botanical Gazette, p.
180.
642 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
ina remarkable ecological way with this grass is the sand pea,
Lathyrus maritimus (l..) Bigel., which flourishes with it on the
dune summit. It has long been known that with the numerous
tubercles on their roots which store up nitrogen, leguminous plants
can thrive apace in almost pure sand. The beach pea does this on
these porous dunes and not only lives for itself, but upon its death
enriches the sandy soil with nitrogenous compounds. The clumps
of sand grass growing in immediate proximity to the leguminous
perennial herb seizes hold of the nitrogenous products with
avidity and becomes correspondingly thrifty, denser in growth and
of a darker green color than the same grass in the neighborhood,
growing outside of the benign influence of Lathyrus maritimus
(L.) Bigel. That the beach pea is not in danger of extinction,
but has a firm hold upon the dune, will be shown by a close in-
spection of the following statistics giving the result of the pollina-
tion of the flowers. Ten plants were chosen and a careful enu-
meration was made of the fruits and seeds produced.
Fruit and Seed Production Lathyrus maritimus (L.) Bigel.
a= abortive seeds; p= pierced; e=eaten; A, B, ete. = fruit clusters.
Ee reba of Pods Totes
Plant. mente "inthe | Number of Seeds in Each Pod. ° ener
Clust’s. Clusters. | Seeds.
| }
|
I 1 1 1 1
iat 2 AL Be 4 A1=0; B1=4, B2=8 7
IIL 2 Al Bliss] A—2;B=0 2
IV an aapmapC de! | PASS aie eee pital 6 i
| | a j z:
Vv 4 Al, 2, G2. D2) 0s 0 2 ae Sia cee We 22
| 7 iis
VI 1 A4 | Al=1, A2=2,A3=2+41a,A4=4e 5
VIL 1 A5 Al=la,A2=2+42a,A3=0,A4=0,A5=0) 2
: A1=1A2—2,A3=1,A4 2410, A5=2)
VII 3 A6,B3,C8 |<A6=2p;B1=5, B2=2, B8=5;C1=1 2
Re C2=2+43a, C8=0
. z ois de {false az=i, A38=2+1a,A4=3; B1)|
s z 2, B2= 2 + 2a, =¢, B4=3 + 22,B5=1 fa
IX 3 A4,B5,C5 1=2,B B3 I .B j 18
PP hime r, |fA1=2,A2=2 A8=2;B=1a;C1i=2a,)| jy
‘i : arn s pL C2=2,C8=1,4=3,05=5 "5 a
At South Atlantic City the frontal dune is very much broken
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 643
up into many summits, upon which and the lee side Ammophila
arenaria (L.) Link. grows as the principal character plant. This
is also true of the lower dunes at Ocean City, which are nowhere
so bold or prominent as at South Atlantic City. The Ammophila
zone at Wildwood, as previously stated, is doubtfully referred to
as an area between the middle and upper beaches and constituting
in reality the inner part of the middle beach. It seems apparent
that a dune is just beginning to form at that point of the beach,
and will grow much more rapidly as the timber is removed by
the march of so-called improvements which threaten the beauty of
Wildwood Beach.
(6) Myrica Zone.—Just behind the high dune which faces the
ocean and on its Jee slope, protected by the top of the dune, is
met an extensive belt of Myrica cerifera L., which occurs normally
at Seaside Park, South Atlantic City and Ocean City, but is
absent at Wildwood. It occurs typically at Seaside Park and
also clearly defined at South Atlantic City, but at Ocean City it is
broken up into two parallel areas behind the second and third
series of dunes. Normally it should occur behind the first or
frontal dune. Isolated specimens of Myrica cerifera L. are found
in the thicket formation, but as far as inspection showed it does
not grow as a zonal plant. Associated with the waxberry bushes -
at Seaside Park is the ubiquitous sand grass (Ammophila), an occa-
sional golden-rod (Solidago sempervirens L.) and a prostrate growth
of Euphorbia polygonifolia L., but that is all. At Ocean City
Strophostyles helvola (1.) Britten, Panicum virgatum L., Baccharis
halimifolia L., Rhus radicans L. are mixed together by reason of
the parallelism of the three dunes which occur there, and Myrica,
therefore, becomes an element of the dune complex. In becoming
an element in the dune complex (Hudsonia zone), Myrica cerifera
L. has also become a component of the Rhus radicans-Ampe-
lopsis society of the classification, and consequently it surrounds
typical marsh plants, such as Kosteletskya virginica (L.) A. Gray,
Hibiscus moscheutos L., Sabbatia stellaris Pursh., Ptilimniwm
capillaceum (Michx.) Hollick, Scirpus debilis Pursh., and the like,
composing the dune-marsh society."
(¢) Hudsonia Zone—the Dune Complex.—This zone is of espe-
16 This mixing of the several societies by the intrusion of the Waxberry is
further proof of the difficulty of a strict classification.
644 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
cial interest. The topography is kaleidoscopic. The dunes are con-
stantly changing their shape, being blown away on one side and
built up on the other. The hollows between them are filled up and
new valleys are scooped out by the resistless action of the wind.
This is true of this belt along the entire New Jersey coast, where
it is a dominant feature of the landscape, but the change is not so
rapid in some places as in others. Some of the dune complexes
change very slowly, others more rapidly; some, it may be, have
become stationary. While there is a general advance of the com-
plex as a whole in the direction of the prevailing winds, individual
portions are advancing in all directions in which winds ever blow.
All stages in the life-history of a dune may be seen—the begin-
ning, the climax, the destruction. Here and there great hollows
are formed, which reach down almost to the water level. Here
and there vegetation has obtained a foothold on the complex, thus
capturing such portions and forming them into established dunes.
The most striking feature of the dune complex, then, is its topo-
graphic diversity. At Seaside Park, the dune complex extends
from the limits of the Myrica zone already defined to the Juniper
zone of the typical thicket formation. In it are found troughs
running at all angles with the main troughs in the direction of the
influential winds. The dune complex exists in all the places
visited, but its vegetable covering is different. At South Atlantic
City it does not exist; at Ocean City it is an area of established
dunes clothed with a variety of plants; at Wildwood it is a nar-
row area of a low frontal dune and a hollow immediately behind
it, encroached upon by tree growth, and is, therefore, not clearly
demarcated at either of the places last mentioned.
At Seaside Park, where it typically exists, there is not an estab-
lished series of dunes, but the change is a slow one, motion being
arrested by the character plant, Hudsonia tomentosa Nutt., which
forms clumps or cespitose clusters closely set together on the top and
sometimes the slopes of the slowly moving dunes. This plant,
which is so characteristic and definitive zonally speaking, is densely
tufted, intricately branched, matted and hoary-pubescent with
densely imbricated and appressed leaves. Each clump is separ-
ated from its neighbor by a narrow channel of sand, so that to the
eye the belt has a hummocky appearance, such as to give it a
desert aspect, as so well illustrated in Schimper’s Pflanzen-
ea se eee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 645
geographie auf Physiologischer Grundlage, fig. 359, opposite p.
658; fig. 375, p. 671. The common names, beach heather and
poverty grass, are well chosen, and give expression, on the one
hand, to the appearance of the plant itself, and, on the other, to
its growth as influenced by surrounding conditions. Associated
with this low-growing perennial herb are found Solidago sempervi-
rens L., Rhus radicans L., trailing over the ground and with an
etiolated appearance, expressive of its struggle for supremacy, ,
Linum medium (Plarch.) Britton, Lechea maritina Leggett and
others, such as Ampelopsis quinquefolia Michx., which is an occa-
sional intruder on the more established dunes.'7 However, along
the geologic shore line of an old inlet which was gradually filled in
and converted into marsh, a line of dunes stretches from the ocean
to the bay front, forming a dune complex at right angles to the main
one, which at Seaside Park runs parallel to the seashore. This
dune complex is nearly stationary; even more so than the main
complex, because lying to the north of the thicket formation,
which it bounds in that direction; and the dunes are covered with
beach heather to an extent which makes it the dominant plant of
the transverse dune complex.“ Upon this transversely placed
Hudsonia belt exist isolated trees of the following species in
considerable numbers, but nowhere growing together, except it
may be in companies of twos or threes, usually, however, standing
alone: Quercus ilicifolia Wang. (Q. nana (Marsh.) Sarg.) is a
small tree of dense growth: Ilex opaca Ait. is strong-growing and
dark green in color; Quercus phellos L., the willow oak, forms a
dwarf tree about four feet high; Vaccinium corymbosum L., with
smooth leaves, and Vaccinium atrococeum (A. Gray) Heller, with
densely pubescent leaves and gnarled form, both loaded with
berries, were found to exist here, with Kalmia angustifolia L., in
fruit, and Rubus canadensis L. trailing at their base. » Pinus
rigida Mill. also is a component element of the transverse dune
complex, growing with the sassafras on the dune slopes and drier
1 Prunus maritima L., the beach plum, forms by its upward growth
small dunes, comparatively steep. It usually grows in isolated patches on
the slopes or summits of the dunes, near the centre or inside margin of the
dune comp!ex.
18In the subsequent descriptions of this transverse dune complex the geo-
logic beach of the old inlet will be spoken of in these terms as it exists one
mile below the town of Seaside Park.
42
646 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
dune hollows. Juniperus virginiana L. is also abundant here. The
landscape has, therefore, somewhat of a park-like aspect.
The dune complex (not Hudsonia zone) at Ocean City is a suec-
cession of dunes and dune hollows. Upon the top of the dunes
and covering their slopes to some extent the marram grass, Ammo-
phila, has almost full sway, but occasionally Sieglingia purpurea
( Walt.) Kuntze, Strophostyles helvola (L.) Britton and Solidago
. sempervirens L. are associated with the above-mentioned grass. In
the hollows are found Scirpus debilis Pursh., Strophostyles hel-
vola (L.) Britton, Panicum virgatum L., Cyperus Nuttallii Eddy,
Gerardia purpurea L., with Myrica cerifera L. and Baccharis
nalimifolia L. growing upon the slopes of the sand hills and the
drier depressions of the dune complex. The dune complex at
Wildwood is a narrow belt (50 feet wide) of established dunes.
It might be said to belong to the thicket formation, but for the
fact that it is open. Upon the low dune, 4 or 5 feet high, flourish
Rosa carolina Li., Rhus radicans L., Sieglingia purpurea (Walt. )
Kuntze, Phytolacea decandra L., and dead, badly wind-swept
cedar trees. Immediately behind the dune front Ampelopsis quin-
quefolia Michx., Panicum virgatum L., Andropogon virginieus L.,
in clumps, and Monarda punctata L. make up the list of con-
spicuous plants of the narrow dune complex of Wildwood Beach.
Several isolated trees, Juniperus virginiana L., Quercus minor
(Marsh.) Sargent, of dwarf growth stand here, ‘and form the
vanguard of the tree growth which so completely covers the
higher portion of Five-mile Beach.
The dune-marsh society is typically developed at Seaside Park,
and toa less extent at Ocean City. The plants which form it
inhabit the depressions of the dunes, which reach to water level.
The species, therefore, associated together as a happy family, are
essentially of a marsh habit. The dune marshes at Seaside Park
are somewhat different in character in different localities and under
varying surroundings. In one such marsh situated near the Island
Beach Life Saving Station grow Ptilimnium capillaceum (Michx. )
Hollick, Polygonum hydropiperoides Michx., Hypericum mutilum
L., Scirpus debilis Pursh., Carduus spinossissimus Walt., Gyros-
tachys cernua (Lu.) Kuntze, Teuerium canadense L., while as a
bordering growth on the dune slopes of the marshy depressions
oceurs the Baccharis-Ro:a society of our classification. Ecologi-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 647
cally the Baccharis- Rosa society comprises three dominant species:
Rosa carolina L., Baccharis halimifolia L., Rhus copallina L.
The marshy hollows of the transverse dune complex at Seaside
Park resemble, physiognomically, a typical pine barren swamp in
its constituent elements. Such a one, explored, yielded Juncus
effusus L., Panicum amarun EIl., Drosera filiformis Raf., the
cranberry, Oxycoceus macrocarpus (Ait.), Pers., as the character
plants of such situations, while near by, as already mentioned,
grow other pine-barren forms such as Sassafras Sassafras (L.) Karst.,
Quercus nana (Marsh. ) Sarg., Quercus phellos L., Vaccinium corym-
bosum L., Vaccinium atrococewm (A. Gray) Heller, Kalmia augusti-
folia L., and Pinus rigida L. The character of the dune-inarsh
growth of the dune complex at Ocean City has already been de-
scribed, and it is therefore not necessary to consider it further in
detail.
2. TREE-CLAD STRAND.
A. Thicket Formation.
The thicket formation developed typically at Seaside Park and
Ocean City reaches its greatest proportions at Wildwood. At
South Atlantic City it covers a long, high dune, which is situated,
as an island, in the middle of the salt marsh which everywhere
surrounds it. It will, therefore, be described in sequence with
the others, although it is misplaced, zonally speaking.
One mile below the town of Seaside Park the beach thicket
covers a considerable area, many acres in extent and quite impen-
etrable in some places. It is fronted by a belt or zone of juniper
trees, which are wind-tossed and gnarled by their long struggle with
the elements.
(a) Juniper Zone.—The vanguard consists of cedars, which
never rise above the dunes of the dune complex upon which they
grow. Young trees in the dune hollows are spire-shaped, but upon
reaching the general level of the dune summit they become flat-
topped, incline in the direction opposite to the prevailing wind,
and become gnarled and weather-beaten. The cedars of the zone
proper form an almost pure growth in front of the main thicket,
grow much larger and seem io be more independent of their sur-
roundings. Several well-marked varieties of this tree are met
648 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
with. The young trees have sharp, aculeate leaves, widely diver-
gent and loosely set on the twigs. In color they are either dark
green or yellowish green; the dark green specimens have longer
leaves than the light green ones, the twigs of which are more
elongated and widely spreading. Spire-shaped trees of the van-
guard have a close growth, the leaves are closely appressed and
overlapping, and are obtuse. The young twigs are essentially
similar in appearance, but more elongated. Another spire-shaped
tree of the same size and from the same locality showed leaves of
the closely appressed type on the older twigs, but more acuminate,
while on the younger twigs the primary leaves were large acumi-
nate, as were also the smaller appressed leaves of the same region.
This tree had a bluish green cast of foliage. The wind-swept
trees show the struggle they wage, not only in their gnarled,
inclined and flat-topped growth, but also in the closeness of the
twigs, the appressed condition of the leaves, which are small,
short and blunt. The younger twigs are also extremely abbre-
viated, as if the tree had to conserve all of its energies for the
apparently unequal struggle. The Juniper zone, clearly defined,
is not met with at South Atlantic City, Ocean City or Wildwood,
and is apparently absent from those places.
(6) Zone of Mixed Vegetation.—This at one mile below the
town of Seaside Park is a veritable jungle, composed of trees,
shrubs and lianes, broken there by dry or swampy open glades.
The thicket is impenetrable in a number of places owing to the
thick growth, and to Smilax rotundifolia L., covered with spines,
and. Ampelopsis quinquefolia Michx., which grow as climbing
vines, looping themselves from limb to limb and from tree to tree.
The most notable species entering into the formation are Juniperus
virginiana L., Ilex opaca Ait., Iva frutescens L. along the margins,
Quercus nana (Marsh. ) Sarg., Rosa carolina L., Pinus rigida Mill.,
Rhus copallina L., and the climbing form of Rhus radicans L.
It is worthy of note that here the holly trees are larger, more open
and provided with larger Jeaves than the trees of the exposed,
wind-swept transverse dune complex.
The thicket at South Atlantic City covers the high insular dune
and the hollows and minor dunes behind it. . The crest of the
dune is probably 30 or 35 feet above the level of the salt marsh,
and the hollow behind it is correspondingly depressed. Pinus
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 649
rigida Mill., Quercus minor (Marsh.) Sarg., Cassia chamecrista
L., Vitis estivalis Michx., Viburnum dentatum L., Juniperus
virginiana L. of three varieties are found, with Monarda punctata
L. on the front face and summit of the dune, while in the valley
behind grow Quercus digitata (Marsh.) Sudw., Ilex opaca Ait.,
one form with spiny margined leaves of the usual type and another
with spineless entire leaves, revolute margins, smaller in size and
ovate acuminate, Pinus rigida Mill., densely filled witn old cones,
Sassafras Sassafras (LL. ) Karst., and persimmon, Diospyros virginiana
L. These trees reach a large size, but when they reach the height
of the dune summit become flat-topped and wind-swept. The
ground of the valley is open, almost entirely destitute of smaller
growth, except the smaller trees of the species just mentioned, and
the bracken, Pteris aquilina L. The thicket at Ocean City is
formed of Prunus maritima L., which occupies the front of it,
Ilex opaca Ait., Juniperus virginiana L., Quercus nana (Marsh. )
Sarg., Rhus copallina L., Smilax rotundifolia L., Ampelopsis
quinquefolia Michx., and Vitis estivalis Michx., growing upon
the open sandy places in front, and among the trees a number of
herbaceous plants flourish, such as Monarda punctata ., Cenchrus
tribuloides 1., ete.
Wildwood forest, using a dignified term for a remarkable growth
of trees and shrubs, is part of the thicket formation on Five-mile
Beach, constituted by the association of the following arborescent
species: Juniperus virginiana L., Prunus maritima Wang., Quercus
minor ( Marsh.) Sarg., Quercus alba L. x Q. minor (Marsh. ) Sarg.,
Myrica cerifera L., Sassafras Sassafras (L.) Karst., Nyssa sylvatica
Marsh., Magnolia virginiana L., Acer rubrum L., Prunus serotina
Ehrh., Quercus digitata (Marsh.) Sudw., aud Vitis Labrusca L.
The vine which grows here reaches a foot in diameter, and is a
true liane. Upon the ground, usually in the sandy open places,
abound Cassia chamecrista L., Strophostyles helvola (L.) Britton,
Solidago odora Ait., Solidago fistulosa Mill., Panicum amarum
Ell., Eupatorium hyssopifolium L., Willughbea (Mikania) seandens
(L.) Kuntze, Lespedeza capitata Michx., Lycopus sinuatus EI1.,
LTippia lanceolata Michx., Ambrosia artemisiefolia L., near the
railroad, Helianthus giganteus L., Meibomia paniculata (L,)
Kuntze, along the railroad, with many other species, most native,
some introduced.
650 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900-
There are many peculiar growths in this forest area, due, it
seems, to a combination of causes. Vigor and density of growth
are due to a mild, moist climate and a soft, moist soil, which
Wildwood is known to possess. Strong winds and the work of
cattle, no doubt, in part account for the close, jagged growths
which are common there. Cattle for many years ran wild on this.
island, which two hundred and thirty-six years ago Charles IL
of England granted to his brother James, Duke of York,
March 12, 1664. The last of these wild herds were shot only a
few years ago. They may have roamed unmolested for two hun-
dred years since the great native chiefs Hohan Topatrapanning,
Hohan Kepanectamto, Takamony and Mothant Takomis by deed
perfected the title in the white grantees of the king, March 30,
1688. Or they may have been left by the fifty-two whalers who
lived here one hundred and thirty-five years ago, or be the descend-
ants of the domestic cattle of the shipbuilders who built craft
here to resist the British. However they came here, they without
doubt influenced the character of the growth by eating leaves
and twigs and by crushing the young growth under foot. Holly
disports itself peculiarly. It is not uncommon to find two hollies
grown together, or a limb of one grown fast to another holly, or
one limb uniting with another limb of the same tree, or joining the
trunk to form the so-cajled ‘‘ jug-handles.’’* | In one instance two
hollies are embracing and slowly killing a red cedar, several of the
dead limbs of which have been surrounded by the trunks of the
hollies. Here are countless examples of tree contention. The
limbs of the hollies are matted and zigzag. The trees are full of
limb-holes, favorite nesting-places for flickers, which, with the
robins, are potent agents in tree distribution. This forest was at
one time very dense and the underbrush a mass of green briars.
Freak trees are abundant. The ‘‘Siamese Twins,’’ two monster
hollies, grow up to a height of sixty-five feet. About fifteen feet
from the ground, yexrs ago, a branch nearly a foot in diameter
grew out from one tree and into the other, solidly joining them
together. A short distance from the curiously joined holly trees
grows ‘* Crookedness,’’ a cedar tree which has assumed a most
fantastic shape. ‘‘ Before Columbus’’ is a huge cedar tree nearly
191894, Gifford, ‘‘ Report on Forestry,’’ Annual Report of N. J. State
Geologist, 1894, p. 263.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 651
three feet in diameter, fifty feet high, with gnarled branches.
‘* Methusaleh ”’ is another huge cedar disputing with ‘‘ Before Co-
Jumbus’’ for preéminence as a wonder. ‘‘ Contwisted ’’ is a name
given by painted signboard to two large trees with trunks one and
one-half feet in diameter, twisted about each other. ‘‘ Laocoon’’
appropriately describes an oak tree supporting an enormous liane
or grapevine, Vitis Labrusca L. The stem of this liane is as
thick as a man’s leg. Another liane denominated ‘‘ Giant Grape-
vine’ is fully one foot in diameter. A magnolia tree growing up
through the hollow trunk of an old cedar is another noteworthy
sight. A wild cherry is called the ‘‘ arch or rainbow tree,’’ its
trunk assuming the shape of a perfect half-circle. Many of the
branches of the trees have been removed for rustic work. Some
perfectly represent the letters of the alphabet, as x, w, z, i and 0.”
Many of the larger trees, especially the red maples, are draped
with long festoons of the lichen, Usnea barbata, reminding one
of the live oaks of the South draped with the gray Florida moss,
Tillandsia usneoides L.
Within the area of the thicket formation are open spaces repre-
senting the depressions of the surface, as well as more elevated
sandy glades. Several well-marked associations of plants, or soci-
eties, take possession of these spaces, varying in ecological compo-
sition according to the physiography.
At Seaside Park (one mile below town) several such societies
can be delimited. Near the ocean front adjoining the old hotel,
long since abandoned, is a hollow accommodating the cranberry
and Drosera intermedia Hayne. Somewhat farther back is the
Marsh Shield-fern society, composed almost entirely of dense
growths of Dryopteris Thelypteris (.) A. Gray, surrounded by
jungles of Juniper, Baccharis, ete. A third hollow supports in
its damp, marshy soil a dominant growth of the sedge Scirpus
debilis Pursh., which forms the ‘‘ Scirpus society.’’ A fourth
depression, removed some distance from the other, is a favorable
place for the Hibiscus society, composed of three character plants,
Hibiscus moscheutos L., Scirpus debilis Pursh., and Dryopteris
Thelypteris (L.) A. Gray. Still another open space, much wetter
than the others mentioned, forms a nidus for Typha latifolia L.,
0 Forest Leaves, VII, pp. 67 and 92. Two articles describing the remark-
able tree growths on Five-mile Beach.
652 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
the margin consisting of drier ground having the marsh shield-
fern, Dryopteris Thelypteris (.) A. Gray (Cat-tail society).
The higher open sand glades are covered with clumps of Hudsonia
tomentosa Nutt. Such an assemblage might be denominated the
Hudsonia society.
This diversity is the more striking when one considers the small
number of plants which enter into the composition of the different
assuciations. The number of possible societies which might exist
under the varying conditions of dune and thicket life can be
determined mathematically by the rules of permutations and com-
binations, thus: If we have 10 plants which we wish to combine
into different societies, using 6 plants for each society, we find by
the rule of combinations that theoretically 210 such societies are
possible. If we have 8 plants, taken 4 at a time, 70 societies are
possible; if 6 plants, taken 3 at a time, theoretically 20 associations
are within the possibility. This number of societies does not exist
in a state of nature, because, although within a mathematical possi-
bility, yet specific characters, the condition of the soil, air and
illumination all prevent the theoretical realization of the mathe-
matical expression of the possibility of such combinations taking
place.
Occurring in the jungle of Wildwood are a number of well-
defined societies classified as follows, with the names of their com-
ponent character plants:
OsSMUNDA SOCIETY = Osmunda regalis L., Scirpus sp., Impatiens
biflora Walt., Lobelia cardinalis L.
PTILIMNIUM sOCIETY = Ptilimnium capillaceum (Michx.) Hol-
lick.
OXxyYPOLIs socrery = Oxypolis rigidus (L.) Britton, Hibiscus
moscheutos L.
PoLyGonum socrery, along the borders of a swampy area =
Polygonum lapathifolium L.
The following species also occur in the thicket formation of
Wildwood, but from the notes taken it is mpossible to place them
in their proper association: Asclepias pulchra Ehrh., Cassia
chamecrista L., almost pure, Dryopteris Thelypteris (L.) A. Gray,
Triadenum virginiewm (L.) Raf., Juncus acuminatus Michx.,
Carex lupulina Muhl., Cyperus strigosus L.
lop)
OT
iw)
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF FHILADELPHIA.
B. Marsh-dune Formation.
This formation consists of rounded hills of sand, which arise
from the centre of the salt marsh, are covered with a variety of
shrubs and occasionally one or two trees. At Seaside Park, such
elevated patches of sand support the following plant species:
Prunus maritima Wang., Baccharis halimifolia L., Iva frutescens
L., Rosa humilis lucida Ehrh., Rhus radicans L., Juniperus
virginiana L., Rhus copallina L., Myrica cerifera L., and some
herbaceous plants, as Achillea millefolium L., Eupatorium rotundi-
folium L.
II. SaLt-MARSH VEGETATION.
A, Tidal-flat Formation (not studied).
B. Saline-marsh Formation.
The saline marsh at South Atlantic City was the only marsh of
this class visited on the New Jersey coast, and nothing in a com-
parative way can be said of this formation, as it exists on the New
Jersey coast in general. Most of the species collected show a
xerophytic habit. Salicornia herbacea L., Tissa marina (L.)
Britton, Limonium carolinianum (Walt. ) Britton, Juncus scirpoidea
Lam., Juncus Gerardi Loisel, Spartina patens (Ait.) Muhl., Dis-
tichlis spicata (L.) Greene and Sabbatia stellaris Pursh. are all
components of the vegetation of the South Atlantic City salt
marsh. In the general list at the end of the paper other species
inhabitants of the New Jersey saline marshes will be given, but
they are excluded from the descriptive portion, because they were
not observed by the writer, and nothing can, therefore, be said of
their ecological relationships. In the near future an appendix will
be issued giving an account of the peculiar salt-marsh zones of
the New Jersey coast.
C. Converted Saline-marsh Formation.
Formation C. consists of marsh which has been redeemed from
tidal salt water by the formation of a sandy beach and a low
dune along its bay side. The low dune owes its origin to the
western winds which blow over the wide and shallow bays behind
the beach. This dune rises usually to a height of two or three
654 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
feet and is unbroken, as it runs parallel to the bay shore. The
marsh proper has been raised above the Jevel of high tide by
the blowing in of sand uniformly over its entire surface, and by
the collection of humus in the soil by the decay of the vegetable
covering. ln very dry weather this marsh can be traversed at
Seaside Park in any direction without wetting the feet ; but when
a rainy spell sets in, it becomes flooded with two or three inches of
fresh water, which in ordinary seasons remains constantly on the
surface, forming a shallow swamp. [Even if the surface is not
flooded, one’s feet sink into the surface of the marsh sufficiently
for the water to penetrate to the interior of the shoes.
The list of plants found here comprise the following species,
none of which show any remarkable xerophytic adaptation, except
such as is coincident with a marsh life anywhere:
Panicum amarum Ell. Sabbatia stellaris Pursh. *
Panicum proliferum Lam. Sabbatia lanceolata (Walt.) T.
Rhyneosphora glomerata (1. ) and G.
Vahl. Gerardia purpurea L,
Juncus Gerardi Lois. Hypericum canadense L.
Verbena hastata L. Triadenum virginicum (Ju. )
Limonium earolinianum (Walt. ) Raf. .
Britton. Drosera intermedia Hayne.
Gyrostachys cernua (Li..) Kuntze. Kosteletskya virginica (L.) A.
Ptilimnium capillaceum (Michx. ) Gray. Very commom as iso-
Hollick. lated plants, never growing in
Asclepias pulehra Ehrh., ecological groups.
This last malvaceous plant, common farther south, seems to hold
its own with the other components of the converted saline-marsh
formation, as the following statistical table shows :
STATISTICS OF FRUIT AND SEED PRODUCTION OF KOSTELETSKYA
VIRGINICA, GRAY.”
The plants for this enumeration were gathered in the salt marshes
at Seaside Park, N. J.
The ratio of the perfect to the abortive seeds is given.
*1 1898, Harshberger, “ Statistical Information Concerning the Production
of Fruits and Seeds in Certain Plants,’’ Contrid. Bot. Lab. Univ. ef Pa.,
Vol. Il, "p. 102.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 655
| CAPSULE NUMBER.
a |e
ae 2 | | | | | | |
oq oS | | | | | }
a2 lagi 1 bs 3 | 4] 5|6/7| 8 | 9 | 10] 11 | 12) 18 | 14 |15/16,17| 18 |19/20 21/22
he 5S| | } | |
A Zz
memory tk Pherae ae
Plant 1 5 5) 8 53:2) > el a a a la at SE
“- 214| 5/5) 3] 5] 5/3) 5/8:2) 51:4 suas 4) 3) 2) ae eo
| j | | } |
« g/12\1:3l-| 5] 5] 45) 54:1 4. 5) 5 7 —| -|- -)-| -+|-|-|-|-
« 4133| 5/5] 5] 40:4| 5) 42:2] 3] 52:314 8 Re Ge EAlpal aie:
| | | H |
« 5) 22 |3:1/54:1) 5] 5/4) 4) 4) 43:2 ic 5) 5) 5) 4) 58 2| 2 ae
| Eel | | |
“ 6| 18 4/5 5} 4) 5/515) 54:1 5 5 5 42p.| 5) 215 Stale:
I | | } | | { |
Alibiseus moscheutos L. forms societies over extensive areas to
the exclusion of most other plants. This plant grows abundantly
at Seaside Park, on the west side of the railroad at Fourteenth
avenue, covering several acres, and when in full flower is a
remarkable sight worth a long journey to see. The large bell-
shaped flowers, three and four inches across, are of a bright pink
or white color, through albinism. The plants grow so thickly
that at a distance the meadows seem one mass of color, and this
predominance is due to the large nnmber of seeds produced.
656 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
STATISTICS OF FRUIT AND SEED PRODUCTION OF HIBISCUS
MOSCHEUTOS, L.”
The ripe capsules on a number of plants of this species were
counted in 1894 at Seaside Park, N. J., where it grows abun-
dantly in the salt-water marshes. The results statistically are
displayed in the subjoined table (p — pierced by larve) :
CAPSULES.
No. One. || Two. |u| Three. |4]| Four. [| Five. |g] Six | aj
ees Seeds. 8 Seeds. ig ~ Seeds. 2 Seeds é Seeds 8 Seeds 8
Pe Pa | ES eee (| SOs ol ee cl ec. Be oa
Ties init See hiGeekcae
1 71) 55 | 3) 137) 14 | 4] 117) 30 | 5) 102) 46 | 5}—}] — | 4 — iy
2 | 82) 34 | 5] 105) 11 | 5) *47) 64 | 4) 82) 36 | 5}—|) — || — al
$ | 68} 23 | 5) 40) 51 | 5| 52] 46 | 5] 51] 49 | 5] #38] 57 | 5}— | —
4 | 113/5+12 p| 5] #49) 57 | 5)—| — |-}—| — |4—]| — |4— (fi
5 |107| 15 | 5} 88| 33. | 5) 114; 12 | 5] 78) 39 s 110] 10 | 5} 110) 16 | 5
6 | *50} 70 | 5]. 61] 61 | -) 113, 12 | 5) 115 10} }—| — -| — ote
7 | 59} 53 | 5| 84) 25 | 5}105| 4 | 5] 97} 5 | 5] 87] 1 |s}—] — | -
8 us ae) 11014415) 5 do} 36°} 5) 100) “aa a | -
| |
The slues at Seaside Park, where at every high tide the brackish
waters of the bay pass into a channel leading to a lower part of
the meadow, are breeding places for mosquitoes and the haunts of
the mud turtle. Along their edges grow Baccharis halimifolia L.,
Iva frutescens LL. and Scirpus robustus Pursh., the salt-marsh
bulrush, and floating upon the surface of the water a mass of
Scirpus nanus Spreng. torn away by tidal action from the under-
mined bank.
III. Bay-strRanp VEGETATION.
A. Bay-dune Formation.
The dune along the bay at Seaside Park has, as said before,
been formed by the action of western winds in piling up the sand
along the bay front. It consists of loose sand, and upon its top
and slopes flourish a considerable number of plants found nowhere
2 Harshberger, l.c., p. 105.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 657
else on Barnegat Beach. These peculiar plants are therefore of
ecological interest. One mile below Seaside Park on the bay side,
opposite the Island Beach Life Saving Station, the bay dune and
its vegetation merges itself insensibly with the thicket formation
proper. In fact, no line of demarcation can be drawn at that
point, where the height of the dune rises four or five feet above
tide level. The bay dune supports, among other plants, Baccharis
halimifolia L., Iva frutescens L., Teucrium canadense L., Ammo-
phila arenaria (L.) Link which binds the sand, but is not a char-
acter plant, Rhus radicans L., with common prolification of the
inflorescence, Rosa humilis Marsh., an extremely spinous form,
and Convolvulus sepium L. trailing over the ground and climbing
up over the higher plants.
B. Bay-beach Formation.
This formation and its ecological] constitution was studied only
at Seaside Park. At exceptionally high tides the whole beach is
subject to tidal action, but ordinarily, high-water mark is removed
several feet from the limit of vegetation. Along Barnegat Bay
large quantities of eel-grass, Vallisneria spiralis L., is washed
ashore. At low-tide mark it is still green, but at high-tide mark
it has become dry, hay-like, and of a chocolate-brown color. The
supply is derived from the fresh-water rivers which empty into
Barnegat Bay. The dried plant is gathered by the cartload and
spread upon graded areas to prevent the action of the wind upon
the sand. The high beach, out of reach of ordinary tides, sup-
ports the following plants: Amdranthus retroflerus L., Sueda
linearis var. ramosa S. Wats., Chenopodium album L., Salsola
kali L., Atriplex hastata L., Cakile edentula( Bigel.) Hook.,
Xanthium canadense Mill., Erechtites hieracifolia (.) Raf. and
Spartina patens (Ait.) Mubl., which is extremely abundant. All
of these are xerophytes and are mostly succulents, provided in this
way against the danger of death by transpiration. The only
plant of doubtful xerophytic habit is Erechtites hieracifolia (.)
Raf. Its morphological appearance belies the possibility of its
occurrence on this beach, constantly bathed by salt water—it is
true somewhat diluted by the fresh water of the rivers, but never-
theless strongly saline.
658 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
IV. Bay-waTeR VEGETATION.
(a) The Plankton (not investigated ).
(b) Ruppia Zone.
Ruppia maritima L. grows in the salt and brackish waters of
Barnegat Bay, just beyond the bay-beach wave action. The
plant is anchored in the sandy bottom, and at low tide floats in
about twelve to eighteen inches of water. It isa graceful plant,
as it moves backward and forward by wave action. The pollen
from the two naked flowers of the spike is discharged, as geniculate,
cylindrical grains, which float to the surface, and are carried by
the water to the pistillate flowers with sessile, peltate stigmas,
which now reach the surface at the end of a coiled peduncle and
are ready to receive the pollen carried by the wind. After fertili-
zation, the fruit which begins to form is drawn below the surface of
the water by the coiling peduncle.
(c) Nereid Zone (not investigated), comprising those alge
attached to the piles of landings or jetties, especially in the neigh-
borhood of the inlets.
This survey endeavors to present the fundamental facts concern-
ing the zonal distribution of the New Jersey strand plants and
their ecological relationship. A more detailed inspection of the
entire coast would doubtless reveal other peculiarities of the sea-
beach flora, but it is believed and hoped that the déscriptive account
given above presents an outline sketch of the more important
facts relating to the sand-strand vegetatiou of New Jersey.
PuHytTo-GEOGRAPHY.
The affinities of the New Jersey coast flora may be briefly
summed up by presenting in the following list the range of some
of the character plants which have been referred to in the above
ecological description. Of the total number of species of plants
collected, 228 in number, 5 are pteridophytes, 2 conifers, 66
monocotyledons, and 155 dicotyledons, as compared with 135
plants collected by Kearney on Ocracoke Island, N. C.
1. The following plants of the New Jersey stiand flora have
been collected on Presque Isle, Lake Erie:
Ammophila arenaria (L.) Link. Lathyrus maritimus (L.) Bigel.
* Porter, T. C., Rare Plants of Southeastern Pernsylvuania, Mch., 1900.
1900.]
Sieglingia purpurea (Walt. )
Ktze.
Cakile edentula (Bigel. ) Hook.
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
659
Euphorbia polygonifolia L.
Strophostyles helvola (1. ) Britt.
Hibiseus moscheutos L.
2. The dunes of Lake Michigan” are occupied by the following
Atlantic coast plants:
Cakile edentula ( Bigel.) Hook.
Euphorbia polygonifolia L.
Hudsonia tomentosa Nutt.
Rhus copallina L.
Ammophila arenaria (L.) Link. Lespedeza capitata Michx.
Polygonum ramossissimum Michx.
Lathyrus maritimus (.) Bigel.
Monarda punctata L.
3. Species of plants found on the New Jersey coast and ranging
southward to North Carolina and Florida:
Juniperus virginiana L.
Typha latifolia L.
Spartina patens ( Ait.) Muhl.
Distichlis spicata (LL. ) Greene.
Cyperus nuttallii Eddy.
Juncus scirpoides Lam. }
Myrica cerifera L.
Atriplex hastata L.
Salicornia herbacea L.
Salsola kali L.
Sesuvium maritimum ( Walt.) B.
54 P:
Tissa marina (L.) Britton.
Meibomia paniculata (L.)
Kuntze.
Linum medium (Planch. ) Brit-
ton.
4. Species ranging northward.
Euphorbia polygonifolia L.
Rhus radicans L.
Ilex opaca Ait.
Vitis estivalis Michx.
Kosteletskya virginica.
Hibiseus moscheutos L.
(Enothera humifusa Nutt.
Timonium carolinianum (Walt. )
Britton.
Monarda puncetata L.
Gerardia maritima Raf.
Solidago sempervirens L.
Baccharis halimifolia L.
Pluchea camphorata (L.) D. C.
Iva frutescens (Li. ) Raf.
Carduus spinosissimus Walt.
The northern limit is taken
from Britton and Brown’s Illustrated Flora:
Spartina patens (Ait) Muhl.
(Nova Scotia).
Distichlis spicata (1. )
(Maine).
Greene
31 Cowles, J. c.
L. (Massachu-
Iva frutescens
setts ).
Solidago sempervirens L. (New
Brunswick).
660
Sesuvium maritimum (Walt. ) B.
S. P. (New York).
Euphorbia polygonifolia LL.
(Rhode Island).
Kosteletskya virginica (L.) A.
Gray. (New York).
Timonium earolinianum (Muh. )
Britton (Labrador ).
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
[1900.
Aster subulatus Michx. (New
Hampshire ).
Baccharis halimifolia L. (Mas-
sachusetts ).
Hudsonia tomentosa Nutt. (New
Brunswick ).
Lechea maritima Leg. (Massa-
chusetts ).
5. Species occurring also on the sea coast of the northern hemi-
sphere in the Old World :5
Spartina stricta ( Ait.) Roth.
Atriplex hastata L.
Salicornia herbacea L.
Tissa marina (L.) Britton.
Ammophila (Psamma) arenaria
Salsola kali Li.
6. The plants which may be said to have been recently intro-
duced and to occur here, as elsewhere, as weeds are:
Holeus lanatus L. Anthemis cotula D. C.
Oenothera laciniata Hill. Carduus arvensis (.) Robs.
Daucus carota L. Lactuca canadensis L
Achillea millefolium L. Leptilon canadensis (L.) Brit-
Ambrosia artemisiefolia L. ton and others.
Lathyrus maritimus (L.) Bigel.
7. The following plants, mentioned in the descriptive text, also
occur on the dune formations near the Lake of the Woods:
Hudsonia tomentosa Nutt.
Rhus radieans L.
Lathyrus maritimus (.) Bigel.
List oF PLANTs.
This list comprises the names of those plants known to occur on
the beaches and salt marshes of the New Jersey coast. It is made
as complete as possible, so that the plants peculiar to the region are
brought together for ready reference. The nomenclature used is
that found in Britton and Brown’s Illustrated Flora of the
Northern United States, Canada and the British Possessions, but for
purposes of comparison the names according to Gray’s Manual of
25 Kearney, U. c., p. 313.
78 MacMillan, ‘* Observations on the Distribution of Plants Along Shore at
Lake of Woods,’’ Minn. Bot. Studies Bulletin, 9, p. 949.
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 661
Botany (sixth edition, 1890) are given in parentheses. The source
of information is designated as follows: Unmarked, collections made
by the writer at Seaside Park, July 19, 20 and 21; at South
Atlantic City and Ocean City on August 21; at Wildwood,
August 31, 1900; marked by asterisk (*), plants collected by
members of the Philadelphia Botanical Club;” with a dagger (+),
plant names given in Britton’s Catalogue of New Jersey Plants. **
Ta all cases omitting the dates, the locality where the species were
found is given by way of geographically fixing the plants. A
large number of plants from Wildwood in the herbarium of
the Philadelphia Botanical Club ~ were collected July 4, 1897.
When only one name is given without accompanying synonym, it
is common to the manuals mentioned above.
OPHIOGLOSSACE 4.
**OPHIOGLOSSUM ARENARIUM E. G. Britton. Wildwood.
OSMUNDACE£.
OsMUNDA REGALIS L. Wildwood.
POLYPODIACEA.
DRYOPTERBIS MARGINALIS (L.) A. Gray (Aspidium marginale
Sw.). Seaside Park.
DRYOPTERIS THELYPTERIS (L.) A. Gray (Aspidium thelypteris
Sw.). Seaside Park, Ocean City, Wildwood.
Preris aquittina L. South Atlantic City.
CONIFER.
Pinus rierpA Mill. Seaside Park, South Atlantic City.
JUNIPERUS VIRGINIANA L. Seaside Park (6 varieties),
South Atlantic City, Wildweod.
TYPHACEA.
TYPHA LATIFOLIA L. Seaside Park.
NAJADACEA.
Rurrra maritima L. Seaside Park. +Brackish water, com-
mon.
+ZOSTERA MARINA L.
27 For names of collectors the investigator is referred to the labels on the
herbarium sheets at the Acad. Nat. Sci. of Phila.
28 The marks of designation, when a species collected by the writer are also
mentioned in the two floras, are placed before the name of the locality in-
stead of before the name of the plant.
43
662 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
ALISMACEs.
*ALISMA PLANTAGO-AQUATICA L. Cape May.
GRAMINEZ.
*AGROSTIS ALBA L.. Wildwood
*ATRA PRACOX L. Anglesea.
AMMOPHILA ARENARIA (L.) Link. (Ammophila. arundinacea
Host.). Seaside Park, South Atlantic City, Ocean City, Wild-
wood, *Cape May.
ANDROPOGON vrretnicus L. Wildwood.
*ARISTIDA PURPURASCENS Poir. Anglesea.
*Bromus AsPER Murr. (Bromus asper L.). Wildwood.
CENCHRUS TRIBULOIDES L, Ocean City, *Wildwood. Sandy
soil on sea beaches.
Disticuiis spicata (L.) Greene (Distichlis maritima Raf. ).
South Atlantic City, “Atlantic City. Salt meadows, common.
*DIPLACHNE FASCICULARIS (Lain.) Beauy. (D._ fascicularis
Beauv.). Sea Isle City.
*FEstuca OVINA L. Wildwood.
**FESTUCA OVINA var. DURIUSCULA (L.) Hack. (F. ovina var.
duriuscula Koch). Holly Beach.
*Hoxtcus Lanatus L. Wildwood.
*“MUHLENBERGIA DIFFUSA Schreb. Anglesea.
*PANICULARIA FLUITANS (L.) Kuntze (Glyceria fluitans R.
Br.). Anglesea.
Panicum AMARUM Ell. Seaside Park, Wildwood.
*PANICUM BARBULATUM Michx. Wildwood.
**PANICUM COLUMBIANUM Scribner. Wildwood.
PANICUM CRUS-GALLI var. HISPIDUM (Muhl.) Torr. Seaside
Park, *Sea Isle City. {Salt or brackish marshes, common.
PANICUM PROLIFERUM Lam. Seaside Park. +Common along
borders of salt or brackish meadows.
*SPANICUM VERRUCOSUM Muhl. Anglesea.
PANICUM vIRGATUM L. Seaside Park, Wildwood.
**PantcumM viscrpuM Ell. Five-mile Beach.
+SAVASTANA ODORATA (L.) Seribn. (Hierochloé borealis R.
and §.). Borders of salt or brackish meadows. Seabright.
SIEGLINGIA PURPUREA (Walt.) Kuntze (Triodia purpurea
Hack. ). Seaside Park, *Atlantic City. +Common on sea beaches.
SPARTINA CYNOSUROIDES (L.) Willd. (Spartina cynosuroides
Willd.). Ocean City, Longport.
SPARTINA PATENS (Ait.) Muhl. (S. juncea Willd.). Seaside
Park, South Atlantic City, “Sandy Hook, “Anglesea, “Wildwood,
*Cape May. On salt marshes, common.
SPARTINA PoLysTacHyA (Michx.) Ell. (S. polystachya Willd. ).
Seaside Park. +Salt marshes, common.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 665
*SPARTINA STRICTA MARITIMA (Walt.) Scribn. (S._ stricta
var. glabra Gray). Cape May. 7+Ditches, salt marsh, common.
*Seaside Park, *Atlantic City, “Cape May.
CYPERACEA.
Carex LupuLina Muhl. Wildwood, *Five-mile Beach.
CarEX MONILIFORMIS (Tuck.) Britton (?). {Sea beaches,
common.
+CareEx Munuenserei Schk. Atlantic City.
*CAREX PSEUDO-cyPERUS L. var. AMERICANA Hochst. (Carex
comosa Boott.). Five-mile Beach.
+CAREX ALATA Torr. (Carex straminea Schk. var. alata (Torr.)
Bailey). Atlantic City, Cape May.
CAREX ALBOLUTESCENS Schwein (Carex straminea Schk. var.
fenea (Willd.) Torr.). Edges salt or brackish marshes, common.
*CAREX VIRESCENS Muhl. Wildwood.
*CYPERUS CyLINDRICUS (Ell.) Britton (Cyperus Torrey: Brit-
ton). Wildwood.
+CyprERus Grayit Torr. Sea beaches, common.
Cyperus Nutrauiia Eddy (C. Nuttallii Torr.). Seaside
Park, Ocean City, *Cape May. Salt or brackish marshes.
Cyprrus strigosus L. Wildwood.
*ELEOCHARIS OVATA (Roth.) R. and S. (EH. ovata R. Br.).
Anglesea.
FIMBRYSTYLIS. CASTANEA (Michx.) Vahl. (. spadicea var.
castanea Gray). “Anglesea, *Sea Isle City, “Cape May. Salt
or brackish marshes.
*FUIRENA SQUARROSA Michx. Cape May.
FUIRENA SQUARROSA HISPIDA (Ell.) Chapm. “*Cape May,
+Ocean Beach.
RHYNCHOSPORA GLOMERATA (L.) Vahl. (R. glomerata Vahl.).
Seaside Park.
*SCIRPUS AMERICANUS Pers. (S. pungens Vahl.). Wildwood.
Scrrpus DEBILIS Pursh. Seaside Park.
*SCIRPUS LACUSTRIS L. Anglesea.
+Scrrpus NANus Spreng. Salt or brackish meadows.
Scirpus ropustus Pursh. (S. maritimus L.). Seaside Park,
**Holly Beach, *Anglesea.
XYRIDACEZ.
*XYRIS FLEXUOSA Muhl. Anglesea.
JUNCACEA.
Juncus AcumrINATUS Michx. Wildwood, *Holly Beach.
*Juncos BuFontus L. Wildwood.
Juncus EFFusUS L. Seaside Park.
664 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900_
Juncus GERARDI Loisel. Seaside Park, South Atlantic City,
*“Holly Beach, *“Atlantie City.
*JUNCUS MARGINATUS Rostk. Wildwood.
;Juncus Rormerranus Scheele. Brackish marshes New
Jersey; reported by Pursh, but not found certainly since.
JUNCUS SCIRPOIDES Lam. South Atlantic City.
*JuNncus TENUIS Willd. Holly Beach.
LILIACEZ.
SMILAX ROTUNDIFOLIA L. Seaside Park.
**LILIUM SUPERBUM L. Cape May.
*POLYGONATUM CoMMUTATUM (R. and §.) Dietr. (P. gigan-
teum Dietr.). Five-mile Beach.
ORCHIDACEZ.
GyRosTaAcHys PR&COxX (Walt.) Kuntze (Spiranthes precox
Wats.). Seaside Park, *Anglesea.
MYRICACEA.
MyricA CERIFERA L. Seaside Park, South Atlantic City,
Ocean City, Wildwood, *Atlantie City.
FAGACEZ.
QueERcus ALBA L. X Q. minor (Marsh.) Sarg. Wildwood.
QueERcus piarrata (Marsh.) Sarg. (Q. faleata Michx.). South
Atlantic City, Wildwood.
QuERcus Minor (Marsh.) Sarg. (@Q. stellata Wang.). South
Atlantic City, Wildwood.
QueERCcUS NANA (Marsh.) Sarg. (Q. tlicifolia Wang.). Seaside
Park.
QurERCUS PHELLOS L. Seaside Park.
POLYGONACEZ.
*POLYGONUM DUMETORUM L. Anglesea.
*POLYGONUM SCANDENS L. (P. dumetorwm var. scandens Gray).
Holly Beach.
*POLYGONUM ERECTUM L. Anglesea.
POLYGONUM HYDROPIPEROIDES Michx. Seaside Park.
PoLYGONUM LAPATHIFOLIUM L. Wildwood.
+PoLyGonuM MARITIMUM L. Sandy sea beaches.
PoLYGONUM RAMOssIssIMUM Michx. *Sea Isle, +Cape May,
+ Atlantic City.
*“RUMEX BRITANNICA L. Holly Beach, Anglesea.
+RUMEX PERSICARIOIDES L. (R. maritimus L.). Salt marshes,
not rare.
*SRUMEX SALICIFOLIUS Weinm. Wildwood.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 665
CHENOPODIACEA.
ATRIPLEX ARENARIA Nutt. Wildwood, *Anglesea, “Ocean
City, *Cape May. {Sea beaches, common.
ATRIPLEX HASTATA L. (A. patulwm L. var. hastatum Gray).
Seaside Park.
CHENOPODIUM ALBUM L. Seaside Park.
{CHENOPODIUM LEPTOPHYLLUM (Moq.) Nutt. (C. leptophyllum
Nutt.). Atlantic City, Sandy Hook. Adventive from west.
+CHENOPODIUM RUBRUM L. Salt meadows.
DonDIA AMERICANA (Pers.) Britton (Sueda linearis Moq.).
Seaside Park, *Ocean City, *Sea Isle City, *Cape May.
7SALICORNIA AMBIGUA Michx. Wet sands of seashore.
*Atlantic City.
SALICORNIA HERBACEA L. South Atlantic City, *Sea Isle
City.
*SaxtcorntA Breetovi Torr. (S. mucronata Bigel.). Salt
meadows.
Satsora KALI L. Seaside Park, Wildwood, *Atlantic City,
*Cape May.
AMARANTACEZ.
+ACNIDA CANNABINA L. Brackish marshes.
+AMARANTHUS PUMILUS Raf. Sandy sea beaches, frequent.
AMARANTHUS RETROFLEXUS L. Seaside Park.
AIZOACEA.
SESUVIUM MARITIMUM (Walt.) B.S.P. (S. pentandrum EIL.).
Wildwood. Sea beaches, frequent. “Ocean City.
CARYOPHYLLACEA.
AMMODENIA PEPLOIDES (L.) Rupr. (Arenaria peploides L.).
Seaside Park, *Atlantic City, “Anglesea.
MceHRINGIA LATERIFLORA (L.) Fenzl. (Arenaria lateriflora
L.). *Anglesea, “Atlantic City, +Anglesea.
*SAGINA DECUMBENS (EIll.) T. and G. Wildwood.
TissA MARINA (L.) Britton (Buda marina Dumort). South
Atlantic City, *“Cape May, *Holly Beach. +Salt or brackish
marshes, common.
*TissA RUBRA (L.) Britton (Buda rubra Dumort). Sea Isle
City, Atlantic City.
MAGNOLIACE.
MAGNOLIA VIRGINIANA L. (M. glauca L.). Wildwood.
666 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
RANUNCULACEZ.
tOXYGRAPHIS CYMBALARIA (Pursh.) Prantl. (Ranunculus
cymbalaria Pursh.). Borders of salt marsh, Atlantic City.
LAURACEA.
SASSAFRAS SASSAFRAS (L.) Karst. (S. officinale Nees). Sea-
side Park, Wildwood.
CRUCIFERZA.
CAKILE EDENTULA (Bigel.) Hook. (C. americana Nutt. ).
Seaside Park, “Cape May, *Anglesea, *Sea Isle City.
DROSERACEZ,
DrRosERA FILIFORMIS Raf. Seaside Park.
DrosERA INPERMEDIA Hayne. Seaside Park.
ROSACEZ.
Prunus MARITIMA L. Seaside Park, Wildwood, *Five-mile
Beach.
Prunus serorina Ehrh. Wildwood.
Rosa CAROLINA L. Seaside Park, Wildwood.
Rosa wumriuis Marsh. Seaside Park, *Five-mile Beach.
Rusus CANADENSIS L. Seaside Park.
LEGUMINOS 4.
CassiA CHAM«CRISTA L. South Atlantic City, Wildwood.
LatTHyrus MARITIMUs (L.) Bigel: Seaside Park.
LeEsPEDEZA CAPITATA Michx. Wildwood.
MEIBOMIA PANICULATA (L.) Kuntze (Desmodium paniculatum
D. C.). Wildwood.
STROPHOSTYLES HELVOLA (L.) Britton (S. angulosa EIL.).
Ocean City, Wildwood.
GERANIACE.
+Gerantum RosertrAnum L. In old forest, Sandy Hook.
LINACEZE.
Lixyum mepiuM (Planch.) Britton. Seaside Park.
POLYGALACE.
+PoLtyGaLa crucraTa L. Abundant along the borders of salt
marshes with upland.
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 667
1900. |
EUPHORBIACE A.
+EuUPHORBIA HUMISTRATA Engelm.
EUPHORBIA POLYGONIFOLIA L. Seaside Park, **Wildwood,
*Cape May.
ANACARDIACEA.
Ravs copaLiina L. Seaside Park, *Cape May.
Ruvus RADICANS L. (Rhus toxicodendron). Seaside Park.
AQUIFOLIACE A.
Ibex opaca Ait. Seaside Park, South Atlantic City (form
with spineless leaves), Wildwood.
ACHERACEA.
Wildwood.
BALSAMINACE A.
ACER RUBRUM L.
IMPATIENS BIFLORA Walt. (I. fulva Nutt.). Wildwood.
VITACEA.
PARTHENOCISSUS QUINQUEFOLIA (L.) Planch. (Aimpelopsis
quinquefolia Michx.). Seaside Park.
Vitis #sTIvaALis Michx. South Atlantic City, Ocean City.
Vitis LABRUSCA L. Wildwood, forming lianes ; stem over one
foot in diameter.
MALVACEA.
Hisiscus MoscHEu1os L. Seaside Park, Wildwood, *Cape
May.
KostTELETsKYA virainica (L.) A. Gray. Seaside Park.
GUTTIFERZ.
HYPERICUM CANADENSE L. Seaside Park.
Hypericum mutitoum L. Seaside Park.
TRIADENUM virGINIcUM (L.) Raf. (Elodes caimnpanulata
Pursh.). Seaside Park, *Cape May.
CISTACEA.
HupsonrIA TOMENTOSA Nutt. Seaside Park, *Five-mile Beach,
*Atlantic City.
LECHEA MARITIMA Leggett (L. minor var. maritima A. Gray).
Seaside Park. +Sands of seashore, common.
LYTHRACEA.
;LyTHRUM LINEARE L. Borders of salt marshes.
668 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
MELASTOMACEZ.
*“RHEXIA MARIANA L. Cape May.
*“RHEXIA ViRGINICA L. Anglesea, Cape May.
ONAGRACEZ.
CENOTHERA HuMIFUSA Nutt. Wildwood.
*CENOIHERA LACINIATA Hill (CG. sinuata L.). Five-mile
Beach.
*KNEIFFIA PUMILA (L.) Spach. (Cinothera pumila L.).
Five-mile Beach.
HALLORAGINACEZ.
*“MYRIOPHYLLUM PINNATUM (Walt.) B.S. P. (ML scabratum
Michx.). Shaliow ditches, Wildwood.
UMBELLIFERZ.
*HRYNGIUM VIRGINIANUM Lam. Cape May.
*CAUCALIS ANTHRISCUS Hudson. Wildwood.
*“HYDROCOTYLE VERTICILLATA Thunb. Wildwood.
*KHYDROCOTYLE UMBELLATA L. Cape May.
Oxypouis ricipus (L.) Britton (Tiedemannia rigida Coult.
and Rose). Wildwood, *Anglesea. d
PTILIMNIUM CAPILLACEUM (Michx.) Hollick (Discopleura
capillacea D., C.). Seaside Park, Ocean City, Wildwood, *Five-
mile Beach.
Sium cicur#roriium Gmel. Five-mile Beach.
CORNACEZ.
Nyssa SYLVATICA Marsh. Wildwood.
ERICACEZ.
KALMIA ANGUSTIFOLIA L. Seaside Park.
Oxycoccus MACROCARPUS (Ait.) Pers. (Vaccinium maero-
earpon Ait.). Seaside Park.
Vaccinium atrococcum (A. Gray) Heller (V. corymbosum
var. atrococcum A. Gray). Seaside Park.
Vaccinium coryMBosuM L. Seaside Park.
PRIMULACE.
+GuLAUXx MARITIMA L. Deal Beach.
*TRIENTALIS AMERICANA Pursh. Anglesea.
*ANAGALLIS ARVENSIS L. Cape May.
*SAMOLUS FLORIBUNDUs H. B. K. (S. valerandi var. ameri-
canus Gray). Five-mile Beach.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 669
PLUMBAGINACEZ.
LIMONIUM CAROLINIANUM (Walt.) Britton (Statice limoniun
var. carolinianum A. Gray). Seaside Park, South Atlantic City,
*Ocean City, “Cape May.
GENTIANACEZ:.
*SABBATIA ANGULARIS (L.) Pursh. Wildwood, Cape May.
*SABBATIA CAMPANULATA (L.) Torr. (Sabbatia gracilis
Salisb.). Ocean Beach, Ocean Grove, Cape May.
SABBATIA LANCEOLATA (Walt.) T and G. Seaside Park.
SABBATIA STELLARIS Pursh. Seaside Park, South Atlantic
City, *Cape May.
ASCLEPIADACEA.
ASCLEPIAS PULCHRA Ehrh. (A. incarnata var. pulchra Pers. ).
Seaside Park, Wildwood.
CONVOLVULACEZ.
ConvoLvuLus sepium L. Seaside Park.
VERBENACEZ.
LIpPIA LANCEOLATA Michx. Wildwood.
VERBENA HASTATA L. Seaside Park.
LABIATZ.
Lycorus AMERICANUS Muhl. (Z. sinuatus Ell.). Wildwood.
Monarpa PunctTaTa L. Ocean City, *Cape May, Wildwood.
TEUCRIUM CANADENSE L. Seaside Park, *Anglesea.
SOLANACEZ.
LYCOPERSICON LYCOPERSICON (L.) Karst (Lycopersicum escu-
lentum Miller). Wildwood, in beach sand ; evidently introduced
by fruit brought as luncheon.
SCROPHULARIACE 5.
GERARDIA PURPUREA L. Seaside Park, Ocean City, Wild-
wood, *Cape May.
*GERARDIA MARITIMA Raf. Sea Isle City, Ocean City, Atlantic
City, Cape May.
GRATIOLA PILOSA Michx. Cape May.
PLANTAGINACEZ.
**PLANTAGO VIRGINICA L. Anglesea.
*“PLANTAGO MARITIMA L, Atlantic City.
670 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
RUBIACEA.
*DIODIA VIRGINIANA L. Cape May.
CAPRIFOLIACEA.
*“LONICERA SEMPERVIRENS L. Anglesea.
VIBURNUM DENTATUM L. South Atlantic City. :
CAMPANULACEZ.
LoBELiA ‘CARDINALIS L. Wildwood.
LoBELIA PUBERULA Michx. Cape May.
COMPOSIT A.
ACHILLEA MILLEFOLIUM L. Seaside Park.
AMBROSIA ARTEMISLEFOLIA L. Wildwood.
ANAPHALIS MARGARITACEA (L.) Benth. and Hook. Wild-
wood.
*“ANTHEMIS COTULA D.C.
+ARTEMISIA STELLERIANA Bess. Sea beaches, Sandy Hook.
*“ASTER LATERIFLORUS (L.) Britton (Aster dijfusus L.) Sea
Isle City.
*“ASTER LATERIFLORUS THYRSOIDEUS A. Gray (A. diffusus
thyrsoideus Gray). Sea Isie City.
*ASTER TENUIFOLIUS L. (A. flerussus Nutt.). Cape May,
Ocean City, Atlantic City.
*ASTER sUBULATUS L. (A. linifolius Gray). Cape May,
Wildwood. ,
BACCHARIS HALIMIFOLIA L. Seaside Park, “Cape May.
BipEeNns ConNATA Muhl. Ocean City. ;
*BIDENS LEVIS (L ) B.S. P. (B. chrysanthemoides Michx. ).
Cape May.
*CARDUUS ARVENSIS (L.) Robs. (Cnieus arvensis Hoff. ).
Anglesea,
CaRDUUS sPINOosIssIMUsS Walt. (Cnicus horridulus Pursh. ).
Seaside Park. +Junction salt or brackish marshes and upland.
*“CHRYSOPSIS MARIANA Nutt. Cape May.
ERECHTITES HIERACIFOLIA (L.) Raf. Seaside Park.
**KUPATORIUM ALBUM L. Anglesea.
*EUPATORIUM C@LESTINUM L. Cape May.
EUPATORIUM HyssopIFOoLiuM L. Wildwood, “Cape May.
EUPATORIUM ROTUNDIFOLIUM L. Seaside Park, Atlantic City.
HELIANTHUS GIGANTEUS L. Wildwood.
HierActumM MARIANUM Willd. Five-mile Beach.
*STONACTIS LINARIFOLIUS (L.) Greene (Aster linariifolius L. ).
Cape May.
Iva FRuTESCENS L. Seaside Park, *Atlantie City.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 6714
Lactuca CANADENSIS L. Wildwood, *Holly Beach.
*LACTUCA FLORIDANA (L.) Gaertn. Anglesea.
*Lactuca uirsutA Muhl. Atlantic City.
*KLACINARIA SQUARROSA (L.) Hill (Liatris squarrosa Willd. ).
Anglesea.
Lrarris spicata (L.) Willd. (LZ. spicata Willd.). Bay Head.
LEPTILON CANADENSIS (L.) Britton (Erigeron canadensis L. ).
Wildwood.
PLUCHEA CAMPHORATA (L.) D. C. Seaside Park, *Atlantic
City, *Ocean City, “Cape May.
SotrpaGo FistuLosa Mill. GS. pilosa Walt.). Wildwood.
SoLipaGco oporA Ait. Wildwood.
SoLIDAGO SEMPERVIRENS L. Seaside Park, Wildwood,
*Ocean City.
*SOLIDAGO sTRICTA Ait. Anglesea.
WILLUGHBHA SCANDENS (L.) Kuntze (Mikania scandens
Willd. ). Ocean City, Wildwood.
XANTHIUM CANADENSE Mill. Seaside Park.
XANTHIUM CANADENSE yar. ECHINATUM Gray. Wildwood.
672 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
ADDITIONS TO THE JAPANESE LAND SNAIL FAUNA. III.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.
The Japanese fauna is proving very prolific in Clausilias, and
may yet rival the richer portions of Eastern Europe in degree of
specific differentiation. It is obvious that until much more merely
descriptive work is done, no sound generalization upon the Japanese
species is possible. I have therefore been satisfied to add to the
accumulation of facts which can tell their story only when colleec-
tions from many more localities come to our hands. Many of
the species of Clausilia seem to be of restricted geographic distribu-
tion. Thus, the fauna of southern Hondo, Shikoku and Awaji
seems to have but few Clausilize in common with the Nikko region.
The fruitful researches of Mr. Y. Hirase now enable me to add
several species to the fauna of Shikoku Island, and a remarkable
Euphedusa to the Hokkaido fauna, the first Clausilia known from
that island. Moreover, he has discovered a very remarkable modifi-
cation of the Eupheedusan type, C. mikado, in the region of Lake
Biwa.
In a former paper I described two species, C. Hirasei and C.
hyperoptyx, remarkable among Asiatic Clausiliz for their compli-
cated internal armature. It is now proposed to erect a section for
the reception of these species.
Section ZAPTYX nov.
Clausilium tongue-shaped, about twice as long as wide, with
subparallel lateral margins, the apex much thickened on the
columeilar side; posteriorly emarginate or auriculate on both sides
of the filament or on the columellar side only; straight distally,
but abruptly and strongly curved near the filament.
Shell small, the superior lamella widely separated from the
spiral lamella; a fulerum and parallel lamella developed; sutural
1900.] | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 673
plicee present; upper palatal plica independent from or united
with the well-developed lunella; no lower palatal plica.
Type C. Hirasei Pils.
Distribution: Southern Kiusiu and the Loo Choo Islands.
The general shape of the clausilium is somewhat Hemiphedu-
soid, but the abruptly bent and emarginate posterior end and
heavily thickened apex differ strikingly from those parts in the
clausilium of Hemiphzedusa.
In C. Hirasei the clausilium (Pl. X XV, figs. 33, 34) is biemar-
ginate behind. In C. hyperoptyx the columellar side only is dis-
tinctly emarginate.
Section EUPHEZDUSA Bitg.
(Group of C. shang haiensis. )
Clausilia comes 0. sp. Pl. XXIV, figs. 1, 2, 3.
Shell small, rimate, slenderly fusiform, rather weakly striate,
the last whorl with delicate rib-strize; olivaceous brownish. Apex
slightly obtuse. Whorls 9, strongly convex, separated by deep
sutures. Aperture not oblique, pyriform, with a distinct sinulus
above, the peristome white, expanded and subreflexed, scarcely
thickened. Superior lamella rather small, though rather higher
than in C. digonoptyx, diconnected from or barely continuous with
the spiral lamella. Inferior lamella converging strongly toward
the superior, though somewhat less so than in C. digonoptyz,
strongly spiral within. Subcolumellar lamella immersed very
deeply. Principal plica short and small, wholly lateral. Lunella
shaped as in C. aculus, but so slight as to be all but imperceptible
except at the ends, which appear as small, short, irregular, upper
and lower palatal folds. Clausilium of the typical form for
Euphedusa, short and wide, broadest distally, strongly curved,
moderately thickened at the apex, the columellar side emarginate
behind (Pl. XXV, figs. 35, 36).
Alt. 10, diam. 2.3 mm.
Kashima, Harima (Mr. Y. Hirase).
Belonging to the little group of C. aculus, digonoptyx and tau,
this form is smaller and deficient in palatal armature. C. aculus,
which probably does not occur in Japan north or east of Kiusiu,
has a less developed superior lamella. In C. digonoptyx the
lamellz converge more, the lunella is better developed, and the
674 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
striation is stronger. C. tau is a widely distributed species with
long upper palatal plica and stronger lunella, ete.
Clausilia monelasmus n. sp. Pl. XXIV, figs. 4, 5, 6.
Shell rimate, slender, fusiform, strongly striate, brown. Apex
rather acute, but the nuclear whor] is somewhat swollen; spire
attenuated above. Whorls 83 to 9, quite convex, the sutures
well impressed, the last whorl narrower than the penultimate.
Aperture hardly oblique, pyriform, with rather indistinctly defined,
retracted sinulus. Peristome thickened, expanded, continuous,
white. Superior lamella wanting, represented by a slight thick-
ening of the peristome at its position; spiral lamella arising so far
within that it is not visible from the aperture, but becoming high
and continued to the ventral side, being longer within than the
other lamellze. Inferior lamella obsolete below, not emerging, but
high within, as in C. digonoptyx. Subcolumeljlar lamella deeply
immersed. Principal plica very short and small, lateral. Upper
palatal plica strong, its lower end bent downward; lunella want-
ing; lower palatal plica short, well developed. Clausilium (PI.
XXV, figs. 26, 27, 28, 29) short and broad, strongly curved,
not emarginate behind, and only slightly thickened apically.
Alt. 10.5, diam. 2.3 mm.
Kayabe, Ojima (Mr. Y. Hirase).
This is the first Clausilia to be made known from Hokkaido
(Yesso), to my knowledge. It occurred with a small Hemi-
phedusa. It is remarkable for the obsolete condition of the supe-
rior lamella, the deeply immersed spiral lamella and the wide
interruption of the lunella, the remaining ends of which appear
merely as upper and lower palatal folds. A white line may be
seen on the parietal wall, on looking into the aperture, caused by
the subcolumellar lamella showing through.
(Group of C. jos.)
Clausilia iotaptyx n.sp. Pl. XXV, figs. 7, 8, 9.
Shell rimate, turrited, the penultimate whorl widest, those above
nearly regularly tapering, then becoming almost cylindrical, the
apex obtuse; rather solid, finely striate, a little more coarsely so
on the back of the last whorl. Whorls nearly 11, but slightly
convex, the last compressed. Aperture hardly oblique, ovate-
pyriform, the peristome well expanded, slightly thickened, whitish,
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 675
a little emarginate above. Sinulus high. Superior lamella rather
small, oblique, contiguous to the spiral Jamella. Inferior lamella
deeply placed, but continued and emerging upon the peristome,
straightened within and giving off a branch toward the spiral
lamella. Subcolumellar Jamella emerging, and with the inferior
lamella, continued to the margin. Principal plica strong and
long, nearly reaching the lip, and extending inward well beyond
the lateral lunella. Palatal plicze two, short, the upper parallel
with the principal plica, the lower one oblique, a straight lunella
connecting them, inserted near the middle of each, and with the
plicse forming an I-like figure. Clausilium (Pl. XXV, fig. 40),
trapezoidal-oblong, not much curved, somewhat thickened at the
sides, and especially thick on the columellar side near the apex,
strongly emarginate posteriorly on the columellar side. It is
shaped very much like that of C. mikado.
Alt. 18, diam. 3.8, longest axis of aperture 3.6 mm.
Alt. 16.3, diam. 3.3 mm.
Ibuki, Omi (Mr. Y. Hirase).
A solid, opaque species, with peculiarly thick though attenuated
spire. The clausilium seems far too thick at the end for a Hemi--
phedusa, though it is more elongate than usual in Euphedusa,
being a good deal like that of C. mikado: and as in that species
the superior and inferior lamellz are very widely separated, even
within. Viewed from the back, in a specimen broken open, the
inferior lamella is but very weakly spiral, much as in many
Hemiphzdusas, and is thickened below. The spiral and sub-
columellar lamellz both enter very deeply and equally, while in
Euphedusa the spiral lamella should extend inward beyond the
other, according to Dr. Boettger, confirmed by the species I have
examined. This point is not very reliable perhaps, for in two
specimens of C. mikado opened, one has the spiral lamella dis-
tinetly longer, the other has the inferior a little longer. I fear,
therefore, that the sectional position of this species must be left in
uncertainty. I place it in Boettger’s Formenkreis von C. jos, of
Euphedusa, but probably it belongs elsewhere.
Compared with the Hemiphedusa species, C. iotaptyx is nearest
to C. aurantiaca ; but the closing apparatus is lateral, the superior
lamella is very low inside (while in C. awrantiaea it is high), and
the spire is thick and clumsy above. The lunella and associated
676 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1900.
palatal plicee are much as in C. auwrantiaca, but the clausilium
denies C. iotaptyx entrance in any group of Hemiphedusa.
Section TYRANNOPHEDUSA “nov.
Many-whorled, with distinct sinulus, deeply placed inferior
lamella, very remote throughout from the superior lamella, the
clausilium narrower than in Euphedusa, tapering and oblique at
the much-thickened apex. Other characters as in the C. jos group
of Euphedusa. I propose this section for the following remark-
able species:
Clausilia mikado n.sp. Pl. XXIV, figs. 10, 11, 12. :
Shell rimate, the lower half swollen, upper half exceedingly
attenuated ; livid gray, becoming dull red where worn, and over-
grown with alga in most specimens seen.
Sculptured with crowded, very fine striz, on the last two whorls
becoming very much coarser, Jast whorl rather irregularly rib-
striate. Apex obtuse and globose; whorls 18, the earlier 8 or 10
not increasing in diameter, even decreasing a little; the next few
whorls gradually, slowly increasing, the last 4 whorls forming the
rather swollen lower half of the shell’s length; last whorl de-
cidedly higher than the preceding, tapering, compressed at the
sides. Sutures impressed. Aperture small, oblique, retracted
above and below, irregularly pyriform, the sinulus strongly devel-
oped, high and narrow; peristome white, expanded and thickened,
continuous, emarginate above, where it is built out far beyond the
whorl. Superior lamella marginal, vertical, well developed, con-
tinuous with the spiral lamella. Inferior lamella not visible in a
front view, deeply immersed, continuing very distant from the
superior lamella within, but giving off a low branch toward it.
Subcolumellar lamella emerging, sometimes continued to the margin
of the peristome, and more or less distinctly bounded by grooves.
Principal plica strong and long, extending nearly to the lip, and
inward to the ventral side of the whorl. Upper and lower palatal
plicee short, oblique and parallel, connected by a nearly straight,
narrow, rather weak lunella, which, however, is hardly connected
with the upper palatal, and is lateral in position. Clausilium
(Pl. XXV, figs. 37, 38, 39) strongly thickened at the sides and
end, and especially along the columellar margin near the apex (fig.
38), abruptly emarginate on the columellar side posteriorly, the
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 677
apex oblique, angular at the outer-lower or palato-apical extrem-
ity, rounded at the inner-Jower or columellar-apical part.
Alt. 23, diam. 3.5, longest axis of aperture 3.5 mm.
Ibuki, Omi (Mr. Y. Hirase).
Remarkable for its many-whorled, slender spire, solute aperture
and peculiar clausilium. This species is the first one of its kind
to be made known, and is one of the most remarkable of Mr.
Hirase’s discoveries.
Section STEREOPHADUSA Bttg.
Clausilia oostoma MOlidif.
C. oostoma Molldff., Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng., LI, pt. 2, p. 4, Pl. 1,
fic. 2 (1882).
C. japonica var. suruge Pils., Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1900, p.
447, Pl. 14, fig. 4.
In my former paper on Japanese Clausilias I did not recognize
this species in my C. japonica var. suruge. 1 am now satisfied
that my variety is identical with the form defined by von Moellen-
dortff.
Clausilia brevior var. addisoni nov.
Larger than C. brevior, alt. 16-184, diam. 44 mm., more
coarsely striated, especially on the last whorl; three palatal plice
only. This form I at first considered to be the var. tetraptyx
Mlldff., having received but one specimen from Mr. Hirase. A
large series in the collection of Mr. Addison Gulick shows it to
be distinct. It is viviparous.
Kagashima, Satsuma, in southern Kiusiu (Gulick coll. ).
Clausilia hondana n.sp. Pl. XXIV, figs. 13-18.
Shell rimate, fusiform, dark brown, sculptured with fine but
sharp striz, which are sometimes perceptibly coarser on the back
of the last whorl; apex globose, the first three whorls of about
equal diameter, second whorl higher than the third. Whorls 104
to 114, the last compressed laterally. Aperture but little oblique,
a trifle retracted above and below, pyriform or quadrangular-
pyriform, the sinulus high and well defined; peristome rather
widely reflexed, somewhat thickened, continuous, the upper margin
shortly free and slightly or not emarginate. Superior lamella
subvertical, compressed, continuous with the spiral lamella.
Inferior lamella transversely converging to the other, strongly
4a
678 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
spiral within, not emerging upon the lip. Subcolumellar lamella
emerging, nearly or quite attaining the margin. Principal plice
rather long; paiatal plicee seven or fewer, the upper two curved,
diverging forward from the principal, longer than the others
except the lower one. Clausilium strongly curved, short, broader
and thickened distally, emarginate posteriorly on the columellar
margin (Pl. XXV, figs. 42, 43, 44).
Alt. 21, diam. 4.5, longest axis of aperture 4.6 mm.
Alt. 18, diam. 4, longest axis of aperture 4 mm.
Boshiu; Suruga coast (F. Stearns).
This species stands between C. oostoma and C. brevior in size,
and has the slender apical whorls and therefore concave-sided spire
of the latter, which differs in being more obese with a different-
shaped aperture. It is probably nearest to C. nikkoensis Mlldft.,
but that species, from the description, must be even more slender
and with the inferior lamella reaching the margin of the peristome,
which is not at all the case in C. hondana. Were it not for this
differential feature I would not distinguish my shells from Dr.
von Moellendorff’s species. The clausilium is much like that of
C. brevior.
Of five specimens opened, no two quite agree in the palatal
folds, and some are so different that one could scarcely believe
them variations of one species were not all the other characters,
including the clausilium, quite identical in the series. The follow-
ing variations occurred:
(a) Palatal plicee seven, as above described (figs. 15-15).
(6) Palatal plicz three, two above, one below, the third, fourth,
fifth and sixth wanting (fig. 18).
(c) Palatal plicee four, the lower and two upper undiminished,
the third small, a foldless space below it (fig. 17).
(d) Palatal plice three, a very low but distinct, straight lunella
running from the second to the lower plica (fig. 16).
These variations seem enough to make several species of, but I
feel confident that they belong to one species. Specimens a and
b are from Boshiu, ¢ and d from Suruga.
Clausilia subjaponica nu. sp.
General appearance of C. japonica Crosse. Whorls 12 to 154,
the apex very obtuse, not tapering as in japonica, and the atienu-
ated portion of the spire is thicker. Aperture with thickened, re-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 679
flexed peristome, the superior lamella separated by a hiatus from the
spiral lamella; subcolumellar lamella emerging, running to the mar-
gin. Principal plica short, extending but slightly or not at all in-
ward beyond the upper palatal plica. Palatal plice four, the upper
quite long, the lower bow-shaped or arched, the two ends bent
downward ; the two intermediate plicze short. Clausilium narrower
than in C. japonica, the palatal. margin obliquely sloping toward
the apex, which is thickened and obtusely rounded; columellar
margin slightly excised or subemarginate near the filament, or
merely tapering there.
Length 28, diam. 6 mm.
Length 28, diam. 53 mm.
Length 23, diam. 55 mm.
Ibuki, Omi (Mr. Y. Hirase).
The shell does not differ strongly from C. japonica, certain
forms of which have the superior and spiral lamellse disconnected,
and sometimes there are four palatal plicze; but the shape of the
lower palatal plica or fold is different, it being short and oblique
in C. japonica, not arched as in this species. The shape of the
clausilium, however, is strikingly unlike in the two species, that of
C. japonica (+ nipponensis + kobensis) being constantly broader,
with pointed apical end, in specimens examined from some four-
teen localities. This will be suitably illustrated in a future com-
munication, as the space on my plates does not allow figuring at
this time.
Section HEMIPH-EDUSA Bttg.
(Group of C. validiuscula. )
Clausilia Nolani n.sp. Pl. X XV, figs. 19, 20, 21.
Shel} rimate, fusiform, attenuated above, solid, of a dark-
brown color; distinctly but finely striate. Whorls 10, moderately
convex, separated by impressed sutures, the outlines of the spire
somewhat concave above; last whorl a little compressed. A per-
ture squarish-ovate, hardly oblique; sinulus short, retracted;
peristome brownish, expanded, subreflexed and thickened, contin-
uous and free above, and slightly or not emarginate there. Supe-
rior lamella somewhat oblique, very widely separated from the spiral
lamella, attaining the margin. Inferior lamella scarcely emerg-
ing, but slightly visible from in front, bifurcate and straightened
680 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
within. Subcolumellar lamella not emerging. Principal plica
strong, visible within the aperture, where it even approaches the
lip, extending inward but slightly beyond the palatal plice.
Palatal plicee two, parallel, rather long, diverging from the prin-
cipal plica anteriorly, and nearly ventral in position. No lunella.
Alt. 15.5, diam. 3.5, longest uxis of aperture 4 mm.
Fukura, Awaji Island (Mr. Y. Hirase).
This species has much the form and color of the otherwise very
different C. aurantiaca. It differs from C. caryostoma Mlldff. in
having no punctiform plica between the two palatals, and in
having the superior lamella very widely separated from the spiral
lamella; from C. interlamellaris vy. Mart. in the wholly immersed
subcolumellar lameljla, disconnected superior and spiral Jamelle,
and in having two, not four, palatal plice. C. gracilispira Mildft.,
described from Kobe, differs in being smaller, with three palatal
plicee, and continuous superior and spiral lamelle. C. validiuseula
var. bilamellata Bttg., of Kiusiu, has three palatal plicz and is a
larger shell.
The wide hiatus between the superior lamella and the spiral
lamella is characteristic of this species, which is named in honor
of the editor of the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia.
Clausilia tosanan.sp. Pl. XXV, figs. 22, 23, 24, 25, 41.
Shell small, slender, fusiform, solid, distinctly attenuated and
with concave outlines above; light brown; finely, rather irregu-
larly striate. Whorls 9 to 104, the upper ones convex, last three
less so, the last whorl compressed, tapering, becoming free for a
short distance in front (like a ‘‘ Cylindrella’’). Aperture slightly
oblique, pyriform, the sinulus a little retracted; peristome con-
tinuous, expanded, somewhat reflexed, thickened and white.
Superior Jamella small and rather low, oblique, attaining the mar-
gin, continuous with the spiral lamella, though there is a depres-
sion at their junction. Inferior lamella not emerging, hardly visi-
ble in a front view, but seen to be strong when viewed obliquely ;
inside it ascends almost vertically, and is stouter below. Sub-
columellar lamella very deeply immersed. Inside the spiral and
subcolumellar Jamellee terminate on the ventral side and are of
about equal length, while the inferior lamella is slightly shorter.
Principal plica strong, visible within the aperture, ascending to a
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 681
Jateral position. Palatal plicce Jateral, the upper rather long and
curved down at its outer end, lower plica shorter but well devel-
oped, two small, short, contiguous plicee (or sometimes one plica)
midway between them. Clausilium rather long, with parallel
sides and thin rounded apex; posterior end tapering (PI. XXV,
fig. 41).
Length 12.2, diam. 2.5 mm.
Length 10.5, diam. 2.5 mm.
Ushirohawa, Tosa, Shikoku Island (Mr. Y. Hirase). This
little species differs notably from the allied C. caryostoma and
C. gracilispira in the produced last whorl, the aperture standing
out somewhat like that of a Diaphora or Urocoptis, though only
shortly. The spire is more attenuated than in those species. It
is very solid and strong for so small a Clausilia. The specimens
vary a good deal in size. Types are No. 79,320 coll. Acad. Nat.
Sciences, from No. 550 of Mr. Hirase’s register.
(Group of C. aurantiaca.)
Clausilia shikokuensis n.sp. Pl. XXV. figs. 30, 31, 32.
Shell rimate, fusiform, somewhat inflated, attenuated and with
concave outlines above; solid; of a rather bright orange-brown
color; finely, rather obsoletely striated, the last whorl more
strongly and sharply so. Whorls about 104, moderately convex,
separated by impressed sutures, the last whorl compressed laterally,
shortly solute. Aperture ovate, somewhat oblique, the sinulus
rather high and retracted; peristome orange-brown, reflexed and
thickened, continuous, slightly emarginate above. Superior
lamella somewhat oblique, rather strong, continuous with the spiral
lamella. Inferior lamella scarcely emerging, inconspicuous in
the front view, but becoming strong and thickened within; viewed ;
obliquely from below it is seen to be distinctly bifurcate. Sub-
columellar lamella not emerging, invisible from in front, but seen
in an oblique view. Principal plica visible within the mouth,
extending inward a little beyond the lunella. Lunella lateral,
well curved, especially above, where it is continued backward in
and quite united with the anterior end of a short upper palatal
fold, being thus somewhat irregularly bow-shaped. Clausilium
narrow, tongue-like.
Alt. 16, diam. 3.8, longest axis of aperture 3.5 mm.
682 [1900.
Ushirohawa, proy. Tosa, Shikoku Island (Mr. Y. Hirase).
This species seems most nearly allied to C. ignobilis Sykes and
C. subaurantiaca Pils. The former species, also from Shikoku
Tsland, differs in the emerging inferior and subcolumellar lamelle;
is rather less attenuated above, judging by the figure, but is of
about the same size.’ ©. subaurantiaca is a more slender, smoother
species, in which the straighter lunella is united with the middle
of the upper palatal plica. In C. awrantiaca Bttg. the lunella
is I-shaped, and ventral in position, quite unlike the bow-like and
lateral lunella of C. shikokuensis.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
(Figs. 2, 5, 8, 10, 14, 20, 23, 24, 31 are natural size ; the others enlarged.)
PLate XXIV.
Figs.
Figs.
Figs.
Figs.
Figs. 13, 14,
Figs.
Clausilia (Euphedusa) comes n. sp.
Clausilia (Euphedusa) monelasmus nu. sp.
Clausilia (section ?) iotaptyx n. sp.
Clausilia ( Tyrannophedusa) Mikado n. sp.
Clausilia (Stereophedusa) hondana n. sp., type.
Clausilia (Stereophedusa) hondana varieties,
prov. Suruga.
Clausilia (Stereophedusa) hondana variety, Bo-
shiu.
PLATE XXYV.
2 AO, 20.21:
22,28, 24, 25.
Clausilia (Hemiphedusa) Nolani n. sp.
Clausilia ( Hemiphedusa) tosana n. sp.
Figs. 26, 28. Clausilia monelasmus. Inner view of clausilium.,
Fig. 27. Clausilia monelasmus. Columellar view of clau-
silium,
Fig. 29. Clausilia monelasmus. Outer and basal view of
clausilium.
Figs. 30, 31, 32. Clausilia (Hemiphedusa) shikokuensis n. sp.
Figs. 33, 34. Clausilia (Zaptyx) Hirasei Pils. Clausilium
in profile from palatal side, and view of inside.
1In the figure of C. ignobdilis, Proc. Malac. Soc. Lond.,,I, p. 262, fig. 5,
the lunella is represented as connected with the plica principalis.
Such a
structure would be unique in Japanese Hemipheduse, but I think it is
probably an error of the artist, and no such connection really exists.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 683
Figs. 35. 36.
Fig. 37.
Fig. | 38.
Fig. ph 39:
Fig. 40.
Fig. 41.
Fig. | 42.
Figs. 48, 44.
Clausilia .(Euphedusa) comes. Inner views of
the clausilium.
Clausilia (Tyrannophedusa) Mikado. Inner
view of the clausilium.
Clausilia (Tyrannophedusa) Mikado. Clau-
silium from columellar side.
Clausilia (Tyrannophedusa) Mikado. Clau-
silium from outside.
Clausilia (section ?) iotaptyx. Clausilium from
inside.
Clausilia (Hemiphedusa) tosana. Clausilium
from inside.
Clausilia (Stereophedusa) hondana. Clausilium
from columellar side.
Clausilia (Stereophedusa) hondana. Clausilium
from inside.
684 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
NOVEMBER 6.
Mr. CHAaru¥Fs Morris in the Chair.
Fifteen persons present.
NovEMBER 13.
The President, SamureL G. Dixon, M.D., in the Chair.
Thirty-three persons present.
Dr. Henry SKINNER made a communication on protective
resemblances in insects. (No abstract.)
NovEMBER 20.
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M.D., in the Chair.
Thirty-seven persons present.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :
‘« A Review of the Genera and Species of American Sna*es,
North of Mexico,’’? by Arthur Erwin Brown.
‘ Osteology of the Psittaci,’? by Dr. R. W. Shufeldt.
A paper by Miss Caro.ttne A. Buren on the edible and poi-
sonous mushrooms of the neighborhood was read by Dr. A. W.
Miller. (No abstract. )
NoOvEMBER 27.
The President, SAmuEL G. Drxon, M.D., in the Chair.
Sixty-nine persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Notes on a Geological Section from Iguala
to San Miguel de Totolapa, State of Guerrero, Mexico,’’ by
Charles E. Hall, was presented for publication.
The death of Otto Staudinger, a correspondent, was announced.
Pror, Oscar C. 8. Carrer made a communication on the petri-
fied forest and cave-dwellings of Arizona. (No abstract. )
T. Percival Gerson, M.D., was elected a member...
The following was ordered to be printed :
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 685
THE BIDDULPHOID FORMS OF NORTH AMERICAN DIATOMACEZ,
BY CHARLES S. BOYER, A.M.
The following article was prepared at the request of the editors
of the Systematic Botany of North America. It is intended to be a
description of all forms of the group found along the coast, ex-
cluding the West Indies, and of the fossil diatoms of California,
Virginia, Maryland and New Jersey. Some, although not new,
have not been hitherto described, while others have appeared in
volumes difficult of access or long out of print. In the examina-
tion of the bibliography the confusion appeared to be so great that
it was thought best to describe all forms from specimens in my
collection. This Jabor has been lightened by the use of the
Habirshaw Catalogue and of the admirable Sylloge Algarum of
De Toni. All ciiations given in either of these works have been,
with a few exceptions, carefully examined. It has been my pur-
pose to give the first description and figure published and to add
one or two citations to the best illustrations, especially to Schmidt’s
Atlas.
The classification adopted is, for the most part, that of Dr.
Van Heurck and Prof. H. L. Smith. No changes have been
made in the nomenclature except those demanded by the law of
priority.
My thanks are due to Mr. F. J. Keeley, for slides and photo-
graphs ; to Mr. Lewis Woolman, for numerous deposits from the
artesian wells and other localities, and, especially, to Mr. John A.
Shulze, for many vials of finely prepared material and for speci-
mens contributed from his collection.’
1 For thé history of the growth and reproduction of these forms the stu-
dent is referred to Ktitzing, Rabenhorst, Van Heurck and Pfitzer. My own
observations have been confined to biddulphia levis, a gathering of which,
sent me by Mr. T. Chalkley Palmer, from Reedy Island, Delaware river,
admirably illustrated the special cells corresponding to the ‘‘sporangium ”’
of authors. Certain of the ordinary cells had apparently assumed a new
function, expanding into spherical bodies three or four times the diameter
686 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Family DIATOMACE2,
Sub-Family CRYPTO-RAPHIDIE®.
Tribe BIDDULPHIE.
Frustules usually concatenate, more often found free. Zonal
view well developed, generally quadrangular. Valvular view
elliptical, angular or suborbicular. Surface varying from finely
granular or punctate to coarsely reticulate. Angles well devel-
oped and usually conspicuous, frequently elevated into horns or
processes.
Sub-Tribe I. Isthmie.
Frustules large, trapezoidal in zonal view, adherent to each
other by short mucous stipes, forming irregularly zigzag filaments.
Represented by but one genus.
1. Isthmia.
Characters of sub-tribe.
Sub-Tribe II. Biddulphie.
Frustules coucatenate or attached by alternate angles. Valves
with or without processes, spines or costs, but without transverse
internal septa. Surface definitely marked with reticulations,
granules or puncta.
2. Biddulphia.
Angles usually elevated into horns or processes or distinguished
by markings from the central portion.
of the normal cell and terminating the filaments. These spherical cells
contained granular masses and corresponded to the enlarged cells of Jelosira
varians. From observations made in Hunotia pectinalis for several years,
I believe that the granular masses found in many cells while in an absolutely
fresh condition are extruded by the partial separation of the connective
zones, and that there are formed later either new frustules by rejuvenescence
or by conjugation with other masses external to the filaments. The cells
from which these granular bodies emerge, after forming into one or two
larger spheres, are the fertile cells and are found in either larger or smaller
filaments, Examinations of material gathered at hourly intervals for many
successive days lead me to disbelieve in the theory of gradual diminution
of the frustules, and rather to accept the conclusion that they really increase
in size and that the flexibility of the connective zone will allow of a varia-
tion. .
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 687
Sub-Tribe IIT. Terpsinoee.
Frustules regularly concatenate. Valves distinguished by. the
presence of transverse internal septa. Surface without spines.
3. Porpeia.
Valves elevated into a rounded projection at each end. Zonal
view showing septa which are straight or curved.
4. Terpsinoe.
Surface of valve flat and indefinitely granulate. Outline more
or less undulate. Septa curved at the ends and usually resem-
bling musical notes.
5. Hydrosera.
Outline of valve elliptical or triangular, the angles separated
from the centre by short septa. A single indefinite and indistinct
septum usually found projecting from one of the sides.
6. Anaulus.
Valves elliptical or arcuate, with prominent and robust septa.
7. Huttonia.
Valves with truncate processes and transverse partial septa.
Sub-Tribe IV. Hemiaulidiee.
Valves usually distinguished by the separation of central part
from the ends or angles by costz or depressions; processes often
present, varying much in length and frequently tipped with a
curved spine. - Valves elliptical or angular, coarsely punctate.
8. Hemiaulus. ;
Valves elliptical or triangular, with or without transverse coste.
Processes prominent.
9. Ploiaria.
Valves without processes, inflated at the centre.
Sub-Tribe V. Hucampiee.
Frustules concatenate in straight or spiral lines. Surface of
valve undulating. Markings granular, generally indefinite. Con-
nective zone frequently annulate.
10. Graya. .
Valves elliptical, with undulating surface.
688 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
11, Eucampia.
Valves elliptical with undulating surface, and connected in a
spiral chain.
Sub-Tribe I. Isthmie.
I, ISTHMIA Ag. (1832).
Valves dissimilar and unequal, elliptical or ovate. In one valve
the surface is elevated at one end into a protuberance or ‘‘ beak;”’
in the other there is simply a gradual elevation toward one end.
Surface coarsely cellular, except at the ‘‘ beak,’’ where the cells
are much smaller. The wtimate structure of each cell appears to
be that of a ‘‘ delicate, perforated membrane,’’ of more or less
elliptical outline and with various arrangements of the perfora-
tions. *
In zonal view the frustules are more or less rhomboidal or trape-
zoidal, without definite relation between the width and length.
Connective zone varies greatly in width and is frequently per-
sistent, so that at the same time what appears at first to constitute
one frustule may be found to contain the two older valyes with
their connective zones and two new valves with, possibly, their
connective zones.
Analysis of Species.
Valves, costate: wilt aetbowis «2° Lina ie ee
Valves not costate :
Rhomboidal in zonal view,. . . . . «. . «2. obliquata.
Irregularly ridged as to one valve, . . «+. . 3. minina.
1. Isthmia nervosa Kitz.
Isthmia nervosa Kiitz., Bacill. (1844), 137, Pl. 19, fig. 5 ; Schmidt, Pl.
135; Pl. 145, figs. 10, 11.
Diatoma obliquatum Lyng, Hydropbyton Dan., 181, in part.
Isthmia obliquata (Lyng) Ag., Consp., 55, in part.
™ Valves traversed from the margin toward the centre by cost,
which vary in number from 10 to 50. Avy. 1. of fr. .264 mm.,
av. I. of v. .198 mm. Cells of the connective zone much larger
on the border.
“For details of structure v. Nelson and Karop’s ‘‘ Notes of Finer Strue-
ture,’’ etc., Journal of Quekett Club, Ser. 2, Vol. 2, p. 269, and Vol. 3, p.
41; also, Dr. Stokes on ‘‘ Minute Structure of Certain Diatoms’’ in Gd-
server, 1894, p. 369; and on ‘‘ The Structure of the Diatom Girdle,’’ by
Palmer and Keeley, in the current volume of the PROCEEDINGS of the
Academy, p. 465.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 689
Coast of California, where itis abundant; Leete’s Island, Conn.
(Terry); Rockaway, L. I. (Terry); Riviere du Loup (Lewis) ;
L. I. Sound (Lewis); Newport, R. I., in situ (Lewis); Boston
Harbor (Bailey); Portland, Me. (J. A. Shulze); Hudson Strait
(J. A. Shulze). Its occurrence on the Atlantic coast is extremely
rare. Fossil in the Miocene deposits of California.
2. Isthmia obliquata (J. E. Smith).
Conferva obliquata Smith, Eng. Bot. (1814), Pl. 1869.
Diatoma obliquatum Lyng, Hydrophyt. Dan., 181, in part.
Isthmia obliquata (Lyng) Ag., Consp., 55.
Isthmia enervis Ehr., Inf., 209 ; Schmidt, Pl. 136, figs. 1, 3, 6, 7.
Isthmiella enervis (Ehr.) Cleve, Diat. Arct., 10.
Valves as in nervosa, except that the coste are absent. The
cells of the ‘‘ beak’’ are not usually so small relatively as in
nervosa, While those of the connective zone are smaller and the
reticulations of the entire surface appear more angular.
Honduras (Janisch, Rabenhorst), and probably to be occa-
sionally found southward. As Ralfs remarks, nervosa appears to
be the northern and ‘‘ enervis’’ the southern species.*
3. Isthmia minima B. and H.
Isthmia minima Bailey and Harvey, Wilkes’ Expedition (1862), 176,
Pl. 9, fig. 11; Schmidt, Pl. 145, fig. 9.
Isthmiella minima (B. and H.) De Toni, 835.
Isthmia Lindigiana Grun. and Eul., Hedwigia, 6, 29; Schmidt, PI.
145, figs. 1, 2, (3.
Isthmia capensis Grun., Schmidt, Pl. 136, fig. 4, Pl. 145, fig. 4.
Frustules smaller and usually more elongated than in nervosa
and obliquata. Opposite valves showing greater inequalities, one
valve almost invariably having ridged elevations. Connective zone
with rather minute cells and usually without a border of larger
eells. Cells of valve average 14 in .01 mm. Cells of connective
zone average 3 in.01 mm. UL. of fr. .231 mm. L. of v. .013
mm. Secondary markings consist of minute puncta arranged in
longitudinal rows within the reticulations. Certain valves from
Barbados which appear similar to the present species are without
doubt distinct, having a rather coarse cellular reticulation within
the cells which thus appear beautifully stellate.
Not uncommon in Campeachy Bay, Honduras and southward.
3’ The forms usually known as nervosa and enervis are, aS 1emarked by
Wm. Smith, ‘‘ inextricably confused,’’ but the figure given by J. E. Smith
in English Botany, Plate 1869, under the name Conferva obliquata, is
undoubtedly enervis, as it does not show the coste, and, by the law of prior-
ity, the specific name of obiiguata should be retained for the forms with-
out coste.
690 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Sub-Tribe If. Biddulphie.
BIDDULPHIA Gray (1831) em. V. H. (1885).
Valves usually with processes which are globular, conical or
cylindrical, obtuse or truncate, or with spines imitating slender
processes. When processes are absent, the angles or ends of
valves, either by elevation or by variation in punctation, resemble
them.
The following analytical key to the species is artificial. While
the uncertainty as to the relations of these forms exists, it is difficult
to group them. At the same time, it will be seen that the genus
divides itself, more or less naturally, into groups represented by
such forms as Biddulphiana, Mobiliensis, Favus, turgida, Circinus,
arctica, vesiculosa, Tabellarium, trisulea, condecora, parvula and
semicircularis.
It seems unnecessary to separate the forms once included under
Denticella and Odontella. The genus Triceratium is necessarily
abandoned, the genus Amphitetras is no longer useful and the only
two groups which appear to be sufficiently distinet are Zygoceros
and Cerataulus, the former differing, however, from Biddulphia
only in the absence of true processes, while the latter is Biddul-
phoid in form, but appears to be a transition to Auliseus. I have,
therefore, followed Prof. H. L. Smith and Dr. Van Heurck in
uniting all the genera mentioned under Biddulphia. Although,
as has been remarked, an enormous number of species is thus
included, the distribution of many, hitherto considered as belong-
ing to Triceratium, under non-Biddulphoid genera will probably
result in a greater restriction than would be the case if most
angular forms are classified as T'riceratia.*
Analysis of Species.
1. Valves divided into three or more parts. Processes globular
( biddulphia proper).
Divisions of valve not elevated, . . . 1. Biddulphiana.
Divisions of valve elevated into rounded protuberances:
Cells regularly disposed and rounded, . . 2. tridens.
Cells irregularly disposed, pustuliform, . 3. pustulata.
* Various authors give ‘“‘ Bermuda” as a locality of fossil species. Refer-
ence to the islands of Bermuda is a mistake, as they are of coral formation,
and contain no fossil deposits. It should be regarded as indicating Notting-
ham, Md., and its immediate vicinity, which is situated in what is known as
‘‘Bermuda Hundred.’’
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 691
2. Valves not divided into parts. Usually furnished with spines.
Processes more or less conical and obtuse. Surface not coarsely
reticulate ( Odontella and Denticella, in part):
Spines very numerous and prominent:
Valves broadly elliptical, . . . . . 4. multicornis.
Valves narrowly elliptical, . . . . 5. Brittoniana.
Spines few but long and prominent:
Spines usually two on each valve:
Projecting from central elevation,. . 6. longicruris.
Projecting from small conical elevations near the ex-
tremities, . . emus os = 6s |) ho Mobileensts:
Spines usually six or raiehe = « »« «» 8. longispina.
Spines small, usually few, or sometimes wanting:
Valves elliptical:
With central elevation, . . .. . . .49. aurita.
Without marked elevation, . . . . 10. obtusa.
With central depression or simply convex:
Spines absent, . ~ « « 11. Roperiana.
Spines in circlet at centre, . . . . 12. Argus.
Spines one or two near opposite margins:
Surface with spurs, . 13. Edwardsii.
Surface without fine spurs, . . 14. Cookiana.
Surface divided by two transverse hyaline lines,
15. interrupta.
Spines curved, one near each process,. . 16. granulata.
Spines three to six, valve divided longitudinally,
17. seticulosa.
Valves rhomboidal or angular, surface with small spurs:
Processes hornlike, obtuse, valves 3-4-angled,
18. spinosa.
Processes small, short, . . . . . 19. Rhombus.
Valves suborbicular, . . . . . 20. suborbicularis.
Valves orbicular, . . . slags 21. Smithii.
3. Valves usually as in 2, but nih, pctade coarsely reticulate
(Lriceratium, in part):
Processes conical and obtuse :
Valves angular:
3—4-angled, |. of s. 15 mm. or less, . . 22. Favus.
3-7-angled, |. of s. usually exceeding 15 mm.,
23. grandes
692 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
3-angled, small, with more acute processes, 24. acuta.
3—4-angled, sides convex, usually with stout spines,
25. Robertsiana.
5-angled, small, sides turgid, . . 26. Campeachiana.
Valves elliptical or rhomboidal :
Without spines:
Rhomboidal with turgid sides, reticulations 2 in
Olvmims; AS OP, Oe) a ee
Rhomboidal or elliptical, reticulations 1 to 14 in
(Olmm, 2° Sos). SBE 28 ree
With two or three spines near the margin:
Surface depressed at centre, . . 29. Perwviana.
Surface not depressed, . . . . . 30. Keeleyi.
4. Valves with cylindrical, truncate processes, appearing hyaline
at the apex ( Cerataulus, in part):
Valves angular:
Reticulations coarse, hexagonal,. . . 31. consimilis.
Reticulations fine:
Processes short, truncate, . . . 32. converiuscula.
Processes large, elevated, . . . . 33. orbiculata.
Valves elliptical (or rarely angular) :
Reticulations coarse, . . . . . . 9&4. verrucosa.
Reticulations fine:
With two stout spines, surface spurred,. 35. turgida.
Without strong spines, . . . . . 36. Californica.
Surface without spurs:
Valves small, without spines, . . 937. ovalis.
Valves small, with two small spines, one near each
Bide, Eo es ore gy ae Ts BO © eee
Valves large, without spines, . . 39. Thumn.
5. Valves with processes replaced by spines (Zygoceros) :
Valves elliptical: . . . . « « « . 40. Cireinus
Valves suborbicular, . . . . . . 41. quadricornis.
6. Valves without true processes. Reticulations more or less
angular or irregular, those of the angles differing from those
of the central portion ( Triceratium):
Valves elliptical, . . . os « « , Aa. eles
Valves angular, with or without central elevations,
43. arctica.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 695
Valves triangular, with central and angular elevations,
44, Heilpriniana.
7. Valves mostly as in 6, but usually with very short, truncated
processes, which are hyaline at the ends (Amphitetras) :
Valves without web-like markings:
A-b-angled,. . - - . =. =. =. 48. vesteulosa.
Rhomboidal, . . . Se a ~ 6«. 400 deeepens
Valves with web-like nies:
Markings producing appearance of inscribed square:
Reticulations about 5in.01mm., . . 47. elegans.
Reticulations about 24in.01mm., . 48. biquadrata.
Markings not producing appearance of square:
Valves 4-5-angled, . . . . . 49. Pentacrinus.
8. Valves angular, the angles not elevated, separated from central
part by more or less definite cost ( Triceratium) :
Cost dividing angles from centre, . . . 450. Kainii.
Costz extending but short distances from sides:
Of the same length, usually curved, . 51. Tabellarium.
Indefinite in Jength and direction, . . 452. alternans.
9. Valves with round, scattered puncta. Angles elevated into
rounded processes ( Triceratium) :
Without septa,. . . Keg nS 0 ta) yaw Oo ERERIELOEE.
With partialsepta,> . . . . . . . «. 54. costulata.
10. Valves without marked elevation of surface and not divided
by costs or otherwise. Angles without processes. Spines
usually absent. Puncta generally indefinite, irregular and
unequal ( Triceratium) :
Valves flat:
Puncta in radiating, undulating rows, . 55. condecora.
Puncta rounded or subquadrate, not undulating, outline
suborbicular, . . . . . . 96. subrotundata.
Outline triangular, with more or ie ee sides
which are often sinuous, . . . . Americana.
Outline 5-6-angled,. . . . . 58. Antillarum.
Puncta interspersed with much finer puncta,
59. interpunctatum.
Puncta of one angle much smaller than those in the other
rete se et. COBO arse = a aly OOarhenemen.
694 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Puncta crowded at the oe and in parallel rows at the
margin, . i . . . 61. heteropora.
Valves with slight Senin at alte angles and often at the
centre:
Puncta much finer at the angles,. . . 62. tessellata.
Puncta nearlyequal, . . . . . . 63. Reticulum.
Puncta irregular, unequal and scattered, . 64. inelegans.
Valves as in 10, but with surface mostly hyaline, except at
the centre and angles where the puncta are minute,
65. parvula.
12. Valves semicircular or arcuate, more or less elevated at the
ends, and with mostly coarse, radiant puncta,
66. semicircularis.
13. Valves elliptical, coarsely punctate, usually traversed by hya-
line lines:
Hyaline lines prominent, . . . . . . 67. Testudo.
Hyaline lines indistinct, one at each end, . 68. Shulzet.
.
1, Biddulphia Biddulphiana (Smith).
Conferva Biddulphiana Smith, Eng. Bot. (1807), Pl. 1762, (upper figs) -
Biddulphia pulchella Gray, Arr. Brit. Plants, I, 294: Schmidt, Pl. 118,
figs. 26-32, Pl. 121, figs. 1, 2,
Diatoma Biddulphian um Ag.
Diatoma interstitiale Ag.
Diatoma liberum Ag.
Denticella Biddulphia Ehr.
Biddulphia trilocularis, quinguelocularis and septemlocularis Kitz.
B. Australis Mont.
B. elongata Menengh.
B. fasciata, unifasciata and transversa Wigand.
Valve, in general outline, elliptical. Surface convex, divided
tranversely by two or more costx. Sides undulating, the undula-
tions, which are sometimes angular, corresponding to the divisions -
of the surface. At each end a process rises which is more or less
globular, constricted at the base. The centre of the valve, usually
not so elevated as the processes, bears a few rather short spines.
Surface reticulated, the reticulations coarse, equalling .003 mm. in
diam., except. at the centre, where they are usually smaller and
arranged more or Jess concentrically around a somewhat elliptical,
panduriform or oblong space which is transverse to the major
axis of the valve. On the processes the reticulations are minute.
Between the coarse reticulations occur minute puncta.
Zonal view quadrangular, the connective zone having smaller
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 695
reticulations, about 5 in .01 mm., arranged in nearly parallel
vertical rows. L. of v. averages .115 mm.
A species variable in size, outline and the number of costz. In
a specimen from Campeachy Bay the cost are connected by
anastomosing lines,
Common along the Atlantic coast, especially southward, Fossil
in the Miocene deposits of California and New Jersey, and in
later deposits at Pensauken, N. J., and the blue clay of the
Delaware river.
2. Biddulphia tridens Ehr.
Biddulphia tridens Ehr., Abhand. Ber. Akad., 1838, 129.
Denticella tridens Ehr., Abhand. Ber. Akad. (1839), 73.
Denticella tridentata Ehr., Abhand. Ber. Akad. (1844), 79.
Denticella polymera E., Abhand. Ber. Akad. (1844), 266.
Odontella polymera Kiitz., Bacill., 137.
Zygoceros Tuomeyt Bail., Sil. Jour. (1844), Pl. 3, figs. 3, 4, 8.
Deniticella polymera (Ehr.) Bail., Sil. Jour. (1845), 342.
Denticella simplex Shadb., T. M.S (1854), Pl. 1, fig. 16.
Denticella margaritifera Shadb., T. M.S., Pl. 1, fig. 17 (1854).
Biddulphia tridentata Ehr., Mik., Pl. 18, fig. 52.
Biddulphia Tuomeyi (Bail.), Roper, T. M.S. (1859), 8; Schmidt, PI.
118; figs. 1=—7, Pl 119, figs. 1-7, 15, 17.
Biddulphia elegantula Grev., T. M.S. (1865), 50.
Valves rhombic-lanceolate, divided by septa into three or more
divisions, the centre one always largest, the undulations of the
sides corresponding to the divisions. Surface coarsely granular.
In zonal view the divisions of the valves are seen to consist of
more or less hemispherical elevations, becoming gradually smaller as:
a rule toward the ends. Processes usually rising higher than the
elevations, varying from short to slender and generally inflated at
the base. From the central elevation two or more slender, rather
short spines arise, and frequently smaller spines are seen in the
other elevations.
Variable in size, the valve, in the form of elegantula, reaching a
length of .3 mm.
The distinction between B. pulchella and B. tridens may be said!
to consist chiefly in the surface reticulation, in the elevation of the
sepiate divisions and in the outline. — In tridens, all of the septate:
divisions are usually more or less elevated, while in pulchella the
central one only is so found. The outline of tridens is rhombic,
while that of pulchella is elliptical. There are forms, especially
in the Redondo Beach (Cal. ) material, which appear to be inter-
mediate.
696 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Common along the South Atlantic coast of North America.
Fossil in the Miocene deposits of California, Virginia, New Jersey
and St. Augustine, Fla.
In a note on ‘‘ Ehrenberg’s Observtions on the Fossil Infu-
soria of Virginia and Maryland,”’ etc., in Sil. Jour. (1845), Prof.
Bailey states (p. 204) that, in a letter received, Ehrenberg says
that Zygoceros (Biddulphia) Tuomeyi equals Denticella tridentata.
Ehrenberg (Mik., Pl. 21, fig. 24) gives Biddulphia tridentata as
equaling Denticella tridens. The figure prevents it from being
considered as Biddulphia pulchella, as suggested by De Toni (Sy//.,
p. 870).
Roper remarks: ‘‘ In examining the synonymy of this species,
Ehrenberg’s name of Denticella tridens appears to have the priority
as to date, but as it occurs not infrequently with only one lobe
and occasionally with ten or twelve, as shown in the Denticella poly-
mera of Am. Jour. of Science, Vol. xlviii, tab. iv, fig. 20, clearly
only a Jarge specimen of the present form, the designation tridens
is so decidedly inapplicable that I am induced to retain that of
Tuomeyi, given by Prof. Bailey.’’ The reason for the violation of
the law of priority I do not consider sufficient, because, in the first
place, a descriptive specific name cannot, in many cases, apply to all
variations, and, in the second place, because, if all the variations
included by Roper and others are accepted as forms of one species,
it will be found that Ehrenberg’s form of tridens is so abundant in
recent and fossil deposits that it may be considered a type form.
Greville states that the form of elegantula difters from B.
Tuomeyi ‘‘ in the almost filiform horns, not inflated at the base,
aud which form a right angle with the base of the valve as in
Hemiaulus.’’ In a specimen from the artesian well at Atlantic
City I have noticed that while one process is not inflated, the
other is as much so as in many type forms of B. tridens. It
would appear that in some cases the process is extended after the
valve apparently intended to expand merely into an elevation, ard
that the inflation is occasionally accidental. As elegantula is
variable in the number of inflations or lobes, there appears to be
no way of separating it from B. tridens. I have, therefore, con-
eluded to unite all the forms.
A peculiar form, the photograph of which was kindly sent me by
Dr. Ward, of Poughkeepsie, shows the valve with three elevations
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 697
and with short slender processes extending from much-inflated
bases which appear similar fo the usual elevations. The valve is
arched longitudinally. In a form from Szakal, Hungary, the
arching of the valve is lateral. It may be considered doubtful
whether the numerous variations in B. tridens exceed those found
in many other species of Biddulphia.
8. Biddulphia pustulata Brun.
Biddulphia pustulata Brun, Diat. Esp. Nouv., 13 (1891), Pl. 13, fig.
10.
Valves rhombic-lanceoJate, divided by septa into three or more
divisions, as in B. tridens, with the central division turgid. Sur-
face ‘‘ with coarse, large, pustuliform granules, irregularly placed
or grouped,’’ which extend to the apices of the processes. Silex
robust and very thick, as in B. vittata Gr. and St. In zonal view
the appearance of valve approaches very closely B. tridens. L.
of v..09to.11 mm. (From Brun’s Diat. Esp. Nowv., in part.)
Fossil in Miocene deposit of Atlantic City, N. J. (Brun).
4. Biddulphia multicornis Grun.
Biddulphia multicornis Grun., V. H. Syn. (1881), Pl. 102, fig. 7.
Biddulphia multicornis var. Templum Brun., Schmidt’s Atlas, Pl. 173,
figs. 13, 14.
"Valve broadly elliptical-lanceolate, with rounded ends. Pro-
cesses short, obliquely truncate. Surface convex, finely reticu-
lated, the reticulations about 5 in .01 mm., with minute spurs at
intervals, as in B. turgida.
Arranged in a single row along each edge of the valve are about
twelve large, flattened spines, tumid at the base, extending to the
opposite valve, which they closely embrace. L. of v. .2 mm.
A rare and singular species. The spines, which have the
appearance of coming from the interior of the valve, are so firmly
attached to the opposite valve that they leave scars upon it when
separated.
Fossil in Miocene deposit of Redondo Beach, Cal.
As no illustration of the valve view of either type form or va-
riety has been given, I am unable to distinguish between them.
In the very few specimens sent me by Mr. John A. Shulze, the
variations appear to be chiefly in size and in relative width of
valve.
698 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1+00.
5. Biddulphia Brittoniana K. and §.
Biddulphia Brittoniana Kain and Schultze, Bull. Torr. Bot. Club (1889),
208, Pl. 102, fig. 1.
Valves elliptical-lanceolate, slightly convex. Surface traversed
by transverse rows of indistinct puncta, about 10 in .01 mm.,
extending to the ends of processes which are large, cylindrical,
truncate and curved in opposite directions. At the base of each
process one or two strong curved spines extend, meeting the surface
of the opposing valve of the next frustule and apparently acting
as braces. Around the margin and along the middle of the
valve extend rows of fine hairs which, meeting and interlacing
with those of the next valve, unite the two valves of different
frustules.
L. of v. .214 mm.
Fossil in the Miocene deposit of Atlantic City, N. J.
6. Biddulphia longicruris Grey.
Biddulphia longicruris Grev., T. M. S. (1859), 163, Pl. 6, fig. 10;
Schmidt, Pl. 118, fig. 10.
Valve elliptical-lanceolate. Surface with a rounded elevation
from which project two or more long spines. Processes long,
obtuse, slightiy inflated at the base. Surface with rows of puncta
radiating from the centre. On the connective zone the puncta are
in vertical rows.
L. of v. averages .033 mm.
Near B. aurita, from which it is chiefly distinguished by the
much longer processes.
Occasional on the Pacifie coast—‘‘ Californian guano,’’ Grey.
7, Biddulphia Mobiliensis (Bail.) Grun.
Biddulphia Mobiliensis ( Bail.) Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 101, figs. 4-6, Pl.
103, fig. A; Schmidt, Pl. 122, figs. 20, 21.
Zygoceros (Denticella?) Mobdiliensis Bail., Mic. Obs., 40 (1850).
Biddulphia Baileyi Wm. Smith, Brit. Diat., 2, 50, Pl. 45, fig. 322,
Pl. 62, fig. 322.
Zygoceros Mobiliensis (Bail.) Ralfs, Biddulphia tenuis L. W. Bail.,
Biddulphia trinacria L. W. Bail., Denticella Mobdiliensis ( Bail.)
Grun., Zygoceros occidentalis L. W. Bail., Denticelia triancria Bail.
Valve elliptical-lanceolate. Surface convex with a flat central
portion, separated from the other part of valve by a slightly ele-
vated ridge which extends in two more or less sigmoidal lines from
one process to the other. On opposite sides of this central portion,
and placed at distances variable in different specimens from each
process, is a small, conical projection from which extend one and
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 699
occasionally two long, slender spines or bristles. Processes slender,
capitate, about .023 mm. in length or about half the length of
the spines. Surface of valve ‘ delicately decussately-punctate,”’
the markings resembing those of Pleurosigma, about 15 in .01
mm. In zonal view the valve converges toward the central eleva-
tion. Frustules delicate, of a yellowish color, variable in size,
the length of valve in American specimens averaging .066 mm.
Common in the Gulf of Mexico and southward; Savannah
(Bail. ); St. Augustine, Fla. ( Bail.) ; Trichoplankton of the North
Atlantic (Cleve); Fossil at Richmond, Atlantic City artesian well
and in the Pleistocene clay from artesian well at Norfolk, Va.
8. Biddulphia longispina Grun.
Biddulphia longispina Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 102, fig. 6 (1881).
Odontotropis longispina (Grun.), De Toni.
Valve elliptical or elliptical-lanceolate, tapering as a frustum
into a narrowly elliptical-lanceolate flattened elevation surrounded
by a hyaline, unevenly notched ridge from which project robust,
hollow spines, 6 or 8 in number, about .092 mm. in length. From
each end of valve a slender, capitate process, about .046 mm. in
length, extends. Surface of valve traversed by rows of minute
granules, about 9 in .01 mm. on the elevation and 12 in .01 mm.
at the sides. The granules extend in transversely parallel rows
from a narrow median line to the edge of the crest and then
radiate toward the circumference.
L. of v. .072 mm.
The hyaline ridge in this species is not strictly a single keel, as in
Odontotropis cristata and O. earinata from the Mors deposit, but is
a double elevation enclosing an elliptical central portion*of valve.
The general structure, in this respect, resembles that of B. Mobi-
liensis ( Bail.) Grun.
Fossil at Redondo Beach and Santa Monica, Cal., and Atlantic
City, N. J.
9, Biddulphia aurita (Lyng) Bréb.
Biddulphia aurita (Lyng) ‘Bréb., Consid. Diat., 12 (1838); Wm.
Smith, Brit. Diat., 2, 49, Pl. 45, fig. 319, front, fig. 319; V. H. Syn..
Pl. 98, figs. 4-9.
Diaioma auritum Lyng, Hydrophyt. Dan., 182 (1819), Pl. 62, fig. D.
Odontella aurita (Lyng) Ag., Consp., 56.
Denticella aurita Ehr.
Denticella gracilis Ebr.
Zygoceros margaritaceum B. and H.
Valve elliptical-lanceolate. Surface with an elevation at centre,
700 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
generally more or less flattened at the top, from which usually a
few short spines project. Processes obtuse, inflated at the base.
Surface covered with rounded puncta, about 6 in .01 mm., radi-
ating from an obscure centre. In zonal view the frustule is quad-
rangular, the connective zone having vertical rows of parallel
puncta about 5 in .01 mm. Length of v. .082 mm. A vyari-
able species.
Common on the Atlantic and Pacific coasts.
10. Biddulphia obtusa (Kutz.) Ralfs.
Biddulphia obtusa (Kiitz.) Ralfs, Prit. Inf., 848 (1861).
Odontella obtusa Kiitz., Bacill., 137 (1844), Pl. 18, 8, figs. 1-3, 6-8.
Valve elliptical-lanceolate. Surface without marked central
elevation, the centre appearing usually flattened or somewhat
depressed. Processes obtuse and short, somewhat inflated at the
base.
Very near B. aurita, from which it is chiefly distinguished by the
absence of central spines and by the shortness of the processes.
As B. obtusa appears to include, however, according to various
authors, about all the forms whose processes are not acute, the
name is not particularly significant.
Atlantic and Pacific coasts.
[Biddulphia subequa (Kitz.) Ralfs.)
Biddulphia subequa (Kitz.) Ralfs, Prit. Inf., 848; Schmidt, Pl. 141,
fig. 11 (not var. Baltica, V. H. Syn., Pl. 100, figs. 5, 6).
Odontella subequa Kiitz., Bacill., 137, Pl. 18, figs. 4, 5.
‘¢ Frustules oblong, very smooth, with minute lateral spines and
without any median elevation’’ (Kiitz. ).
Campeachy Bay (Schmidt).
Prof. Smith remarks that both B. obtusa and B. subequa ** are
merely forms’’ of B. aurita, and, as Ralfs says, he ‘‘ is probably
right.’’
11. Biddulphia Roperiana Grev.
Biddulphia Roperiana Grev., T. M.S. (1859), 163, Pl. 8, fig. 11-13;
Schmidt, Pl. 120, fig. 20-24.
Odontella Roperiana (Grev.) De Toni, Syl. Alg., 863.
Triceratrium (Odontella discigera var.?) Californicum Grun.? V. H.
Syn., Pl. 108, fig. 11 (?).
Valve broadly elliptical-lanceolate or triangular (?). Surface
convex, with a central depression, punctate, the puncta averaging
7 in .01 mm., radiating from the centre. Zonal view quad-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 701
rangular, the connective zone having puncta in vertical parallel
rows. L. of v. .165 mm.
Distinguished by its prominent central depression from JB.
aurita, which it very nearly approaches.
Common on the Pacific coast. Fossil in the California
deposits.
12. Biddulphia Argus Boyer.
Biddulphia Argus Boyer, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil. (1898), 469, Pl.
24, fig. 6. Schmidt’s Atlas, Pl. 120, fig. 27, apparently represents an
intermediate form.
Valve broadly elliptical, convex, with an elliptical depression at
centre, which is encircled by from 10 to 12 short spines. Processes
rather short and obtuse. Surface with reticulations hexagonal,
about 3 in .01 mm. at the border and 5 in .01 mm. at the centre,
from which they radiate in curved lines. L. of v. .165 mm.
Port Antonio, Jamaica.
Distinguished chiefly by the central spines and by the size of the
reticulations. It approaches B. Roperiana Grev. and B. Peru-
viana Grun.,
13. Biddulphia Edwardsii Febiger.
Biddulphia Edwardsii Febiger (MSS.).
Odontella Edwardsit (Feb.) Grun., Diat. Fr. Jos. Land, 5, Pl. 2, fig.
20° V. Ho Syn. Pl. 100, figs. 9, 10:
Valve suborbicular or orbicular-lanceolate. Surface with
puncta from 5 to7 in.01 mm., radiating from centre and with
numerous evenly distributed short spurs, by which adjacent frus-
tules are united. One or two small spines usually occur near each
side. Processes short, truncate or obtuse. The prickly surface,
under low powers, somewhat resembles that of B. turgida. Con-
nective zone with puncta in parallel lines.
L of vy. .033 mm. to .105 mm.
Pacific coast. Occasional on the Atlantic coast.
Prof. H. L. Smith (A. J. M., 4, p. 101) considers this form
to be ‘‘ a hirsute variety of b. Roperiana Grey.’’ It is probably
intermediate between Bb. Roperiana and B. primordialis Brun. In
large specimens a hyaline ring is quite distinct in the connective
zone, as mentioned by Brun in his description of the latter species
(Esp. Nowv., 13). See also under B. polyacanthos Brun, J. ¢.,
pel 2.
702 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
14. Biddulphia Cookiana K. and §.
Biddulphia Cookiana K. and §., Torr. Bull. (1889), 73, Pl. 89, fig. 4.
Odontella Cookiana (K. and 8.) De Toni.
Biddulphia tumida (E.) Roper? T. M. 8. (1859), 15, Pl. 2, figs. 18,
19;
Roper gives as the synonymy of his species Denticella tumida ?
E. and Odontella tumida Kiitz., and states that the form agrees
with Ehrenberg’s description of a valve from ‘‘ Bermuda”
[Nottingham]. Roper’s figures and description appear to show
the identity of his form with B. Cookiana K. and S., an examina-
tion of the ‘‘ Old Well’’ deposit of Richmond showing a large
number of specimens, the smaller of which illustrate the globose
character of the valves.
Valve suborbicular or elliptical-lanceolate, convex, with pro-
cesses tumid at the base and small and obtuse at the apex. Sur-
face with radiating, unequal, hexagonal reticulations, about 4 in
-O1 mm. One or two stout spines are placed on each side near the
margin. Connective zone with parallel rows of puncta about 7 in
.O1 mm.
L. of v. .105 mm.
Fossil in the Miocene deposits of the Atlantic coast.
15. Biddulphia interrupta Boyer.
Biddulphia interrupta Boyer, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. (1898),
468, Pl. 24, fig. 2.
Valve elliptical, with small, rounded processes. Surface con-
vex, finely punctate, the puncta about 10 in .01 mm., radiating
in scattered lines from the centre, at which are three minute spines.
About one-third of the distance from centre to processes, at each
end, a hyaline band, produced by the interruption of puncta,
crosses the valve transversely extending nearly to the sides. L of
v. .112 mm. ;
Campeachy Bay. Rare.
16. Biddulphia granulata Roper.
Biddulphia granulata Roper, T. M.S. (1859), 13, Pl. 1, figs. 10, 11,
Pl. 2, fig. 12.
This form has been identified with Denticella turgida Ehr. =
Odontella turgida Kitz. = Biddulphia turgida (Ehr.) Ralfs
(not Wm. Sm.), and it appears to be equivalent, in outline at
least, to Denticella dubia Bail. <‘ It is impossible,’ as Roper re-
marks, ‘‘ to speak with certainty.’’
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 703
Valve elliptical-lanceolate. Surface convex with diagonal rows
of fine puncta about 12 in.01 mm., and with sparsely scattered
small spurs. Processes slightly inflated at the base, obtuse at the
ends, which are curved outward toward alternate sides. Near
each process and on opposite sides of the longitudinal axis is
placed a long, stout spine, bent or curved inward near the middle.
Connective zone with rows of diagonal puncta slightly smaller
than those on the valve. L. of y. .108 mm.
Vera Cruz. Fossil in the Pleistocene clay from the Norfolk
artesian well. Not common.
17. Biddulphia seticulosa Grun.
Biddulphia seticulosa Gran., V. H. Syn., Pl. 101, figs. 7, 8.
Denticella seticulosa (Grun.) De Toni.
Valve elliptical, acuminate at the ends, from which arise horn-
like, obtuse processes. Surface of valve divided longitudinally by
an indefinite, irregular Jine which does not reach the extremities
and from which proceed the rows of puncta parallel at the middle,
but radiating toward the ends. Minute spurs are scattered over
the surface in addition to longer spines, indefinite in number, but
usually three to six on each side near the margin. Puncta, about
6 in.01 mm., are arranged in vertical rows on connective zone
and also extend almost to the end of processes. :
L. of v. .198 mm. Width of v. .082 mm. L. of frustule
-O72 mm.
Fossil in the Petersburg, Va., deposit.
Van Heurck considers this as probably a form of T'riceratium
tridactylum Brightw. (== Biddulphia spinosa (Bail.)), and as
probably near B. reticulata var. 6. Roper. See remarks under
B. spinosa.
18. Biddulphia spinosa (Bail.).
Triceratium spinosum Bail., Sil. Jour. (1844), 139, Pl. 3, fig. 12;
Schmidt, Pl. 87, figs. 2, 3, 4, 5.
Triceratium tridactylum Brightw.
Triceratium armatum Roper.
Triceratium setigerum Bail.
Triceratium serratum Wallich.
Not Biddulphia spinosa Grev. = Denticella spinosa (Grev.) Grun.
Schmidt (Atias, Pl. 87) considers this form equivalent to Tri-
ceratium Pileus Ehr. (Mikrogeologie, Pl. 19, fig. 18), but Ehren-
berg’s figure certainly does not represent this form. Grunow states
that Triceratium spinosum is a triangular form of Biddulphia
704 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
granulata Roper. Specimens in my collection from Vera Cruz
and the Norfolk artesian well of Biddulphia granulata have a
finer reticulation than Biddulphia spinosa, but the two forms are
quite similar. Prof. Smith attributes Bailey’s Triceratiwm seti-
gerum to Triceratium comptum Ehr., but Bailey’s figure appears to
represent a form nearer spinosum.
Valve triangular or quadrangular, with straight or concave
sides. Angles produced into horn-like, obtuse processes. Surface
convex, reticulated, the cells hexagonal, 3 to 5 in .01 mm. at
centre, and slightly smaller toward the angles. At intervals of
three or four cells small spurs usually occur giving a prickly
appearance to the valve. Two to six or rarely more stout spines,
in length about oue-third to one-half the width of valve, and
often forked at the ends in perfect specimens, are placed at
unequal distances from the angles, two on each side, if of the
usual number. In fossil forms most if not all of the spines are
frequently broken off. In zonal view, the valve, as Bailey re-
marks, is constricted beneath the processes. The reticulations of
the connective zone are similar to those of valve. L. of side
.013-.156 mm. L. of frustule occasionally reaching .201 mm.
The dove-tailing of the lateral margins of the connecting zone
at the angles, as described by Wallich in reference to Triceratium
serratum, is well exhibited also in triangular forms in my collec-
tion from Yucatan. It is, however, merely the ‘‘ postage stamp ”’
fracture of the corners of the valve and is not always as regular
as shown by Wallich.
West coast of Florida; Campeachy Bay; Yucatan.
Fossil in the Miocene deposits of the Atlantic coast and the St.
Augustine artesian well.
19, Biddulphia Rhombus (Ehr.) Wm. Sm.
Biddulphia Rhombus (Ehr.) Wm. Sm., Brit. Diat., 2, 49, Pl. 45, fig.
320, Pl. 61, fig. 320; Schmidt, Pl. 120, figs. 11-13.
Zygoceros Rhombus Eby.
Denticella Rhombus Ebr.
Triceratium Biddulphia Heib.
Triceratium striolatum Ehr.
Triceratium membranaceum Brightw.
Valve orbicular-rhomboidal with produced ends, or triangular
with convex sides. Surface convex, with fine hexagonal reticu-
lations from 7 to 9 in .01 mm., which are irregular on an ellipti-
eal or triangular central part, but which radiate thence to the mar-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 705
gins and continue nearly to the ends of processes. Scattered over
the surface are minute spurs. Processes small, short and obtuse.
Near the convex margins strong, short spines occur, usually three
on each side near the middle and two additional ones next each
process. L. of v. .165 mm. W. of v. .112 mm.
The triangular form (var. trigona Cleve) differs apparently only
in outline. The reticulations are not always radiate. In a speci-
men from an artesian well at Harvey Cedars, N. J., they occur in
short, decussate, intermediate rows.
Common along the Atlantic coast. Fossil in the Miocene and
later deposits of the Eastern States.
20. Biddulphia suborbicularis Grun.
Biddulphia suborbicularis Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 100, figs. 15, 16.
Biddulphia angulata A. 8., Schmidt, Pl. 141, figs. 7,.8.
Denticella? suborbicularis (Grun.) De Toni.
Odontella angulata (A. 8S.) De Toni.
Valve suborbicular, frequently with several irregular, angular.
projections. Processes frequently unequal, inflated at the base and
truncate. Surface elevated half-way between the processes and
centre, at which a depression occurs, with reticulations from 5 to
8 in .01 mm., increasing in size toward the circumference and
radiating in slightly undulating lines. Two, rarely three or four,
stout spines are placed obliquely opposite half-way between centre
and circumference. L. of v. .089 mm.
Fossil in the Nottingham deposit.
21. Biddulphia Smithii (Ralfs.) V. H.
Biddulphia Smithii (Ralfs.) V. H. Syn., 207.
Hupodiscus radiatus Wm. Sm. = Biddulphia radiatus = Eupodiscus
velatus Grev.
Cerataulus Smithii Ralfs., Schmidt, Pl. 116, figs. 5, 6.
Cerataulus (Odontella) Smithii Ralfs., V. H. Syn., Pl. 105, figs. 1, 2
Zygoceros hemitropus L. W. Bail.
Biddulphia hemitropa L. W. Bail.
Not Auliscus radiatus (Ehr.) Jan. and Rab.
Valve orbicular, convex. Surface with reticulations 5 in. .01
mm., radiating from the centre and smaller near the processes
which are tapering and truncate. A short spine is usually found
on each side near the circumference about half-way between the
processes. Connective zone narrow, with vertical rows of puncta,
12in.01 mm. Diam. of v. .059 mm.
Charleston, S. C., and southward. Common at Vera Cruz,
Honduras and Campeachy Bay.
706 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
22. Biddulphia Favus (Ehr.) V. H.
Biddulphia Favus (Ehr.) V. H. Syn., 208, Pl. 107, figs. 1, 2, 3, 4.
Triceratium Faous Ebr., Schmidt, Pl. 82, figs. 1, 2, 3, 4.
Triceratium comptum Ebr.
Triceratium muricatum Brightw.
Triceratium megastomum Brightw.
Triceratium seitulum Brightw.
Triceratium fimbriatum Wallich.
Triceratium orientale Bail. and Harv.
Triceratium cuspidatum Janisch.
Amphitetras cuspidata L. W. Bail.
Valve three or four-angled, with straight or slightly concave or
convex sides. Angles obtuse, occasionally somewhat constricted, each
with an obtuse, horn-like process. Surface slightly convex, divided
into large hexagonal cells. Inner or lower surface of valve finely
punctate, the puncta radiating in undulating rows from the centre
and extending to processes, about 18 in .01 mm. in the common
forms. Zonal view quadrangluar, the connective zone marked
with puncta in quincunxes. FF rustules attached by alternate
angles zigzag in a chain, usually found free. L. of s. averages in
the common forms .15 mm,
Common in the triangular form along the Atlantic coast, more
especially southward, where it is associated with the smaller tri-
angular and. quadrangular forms known as Triceratium scitulum.
Rare on the Pacific coast in the quadrate form. Fossil in the
Eastern States in deposits later than the Miocene.
23. Biddulphia grandis (Br.),
Triceratium grande Br., M. J. (1855), 250, Pl. 4, fig. 8; var. pentagona
Grun., Schmidt, Pl. 86; var. septangulata Kitton, Schmidt, Pl. 85,
figs. 1, 2, Pl. 86, figs. 11,12, 13.
Triceratium ponderosum Edwards, Lens, 2, 105.
Triceratium Favus septangulatum Kitton.
Triceratium Strabo, Schmidt, Pl. 86, figs. 6, 7.
Valve as in B. Favus but larger, varying from triangular to
septangular, the sides occasionally reaching .28L mm. in length,
while the puncta of the lower surface of the valve are frequently
about 7 in .01 mm.
Colon. Fossil in the Miocene deposits of California.
24, Biddulphia acuta (Ehr.).
Triceratium acutum Ehr., V. H. Syn., Pl. 108, fig. 1.
The form known as Jriceratiwn acutum (Ehr.) is sometimes
confounded with acute forms of Triceratium punetatum Br.
Valve triangular, sides slightly convex and processes at the
1900.] = NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 707
angles somewhat acute. Surface flat, reticulated, cells hexagonal,
2 in .01 mm. at the centre, 3 in .01 mm. at the border, not
radiate. L. of s. .04 mm. to .122 mm.
Fossil in the Miocene deposits of the Eastern States.
[t is possible that B. grandis and B. acuta may be considered as
varieties of B. Favus. It is to be noted that B. Favus is recent,
not occurring in the Miocene deposits, while B. grandis occurs
fossil in California Miocene and recent in the south Atlantic.
25. Biddulphia Robertsiana (Grev.).
Triceratium Robertsianum Grev., M. M. J. (1863), 231, Pl. 9, fig.
9 (?); ib. (1886), Pl. 2, fig. 22; Schmidt, Pl. 83, figs. 2, 3, 4, 5,
6,7
Triceratium Robertsianum Grev. var. macracantha Grun., Schmidt.
Pl. 82, figs. 14, 15.
Valve triangular or quadrangular, with convex sides. Surface
convex with hexagonal reticulations averaging .008 mm. in diame-
ter, scarcely longer toward the sides. Angles very slightly pro-
duced, with elevated, obtuse processes. Inner plate of valve finely
but distinctly punctate as in B. Favus. One or more short, stout
spines are frequently found on each side near the border. W. of
v. .148 mm.
Gulf of Mexico (Griindler in Schmidt); Pacific soundings, 20°
10’ N., 158° 14’ W., 2507 fathoms. Rare.
26. Biddulphia Campeachiana (Grun.).
Triceratium Campeachianum Grun., M. M. J. (1874), 319; Schmidt,
Pl. 78, figs. 18, 19, 20.
Amphipentas Campeachiana (Grun.) De Toni.
Valve pentagonal with sides tumid at the middle, producing a
decagonal outline. Processes at the angles conical, obtuse.
Surface almost flat, reticulated, the cells hexagonal, nearly equal,
2 in .0L mm. The inner plate of valve is punctate as in B.
Favus. W. of v. .072 mm. to .125 mm.
Campeachy Bay.
27. Biddulphia dubia (Br.) Cleve.
Biddulphia dubia (Br.) Cleve. ‘‘ Vega,’’ 508.
Triceratium dubium Br., T. M.S. (1859), 180, Pl. 9, fig. 12; Schmidt,
Pl. 78, figs. 26-30.
Triceratium bullosum Witt.
Triceratium (or biddulphia) bicorne Cleve, Diat. West Ind., 17, Pl.
5, fig. 30; Schmidt, Pl. 78, figs. 24, 25.
Amphitetras bicornis (Cleve) De Toni.
Valve rhombic-lanceolate, the ends produced into obtuse pro-
708 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
cesses, While the sides are turgid and extended into rounded
projections. Abnormal forms are frequent. Surface reticulate.
the unequal, usually hexagonal cells averaging .005 mm. in
diameter. Within the cells indistinct granuJations are seen. L.
of v. .075 mm.
Atlantic coast, southward, not common; California (Cleve).
28. Biddulphia reticulata Roper.
Biddulphia reticulata Roper, T. M.S. (1859), 14, Pl. 2, figs. 13, 14,
15; Schmidt, Pl. 78, figs. 21-23, Pl. 121, figs. 11-15.
Odontella? reticulata (Roper) De Toni.
Valve elliptical-lanceolate or rhombie with turgid sides. Pro-
cesses conical and obtuse. Surface coarsely reticulate, the reticu-
lations 1 to 14 in .01 mm., the inner layer with puncta from 6 to
9in .01 mm., resembling those of B. Favus. Connective zone
with parallel rows of puncta about 5 in .01 mm. L. of vy.
.122 mm,
Honduras; Pacific coast.
29. Biddulphia Peruviana Grun.
Biddulphia (tumida Roper, var.?) Peruviana Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl.
101, figs. 2, 3.
Biddulphia tumida var.? Peruviana (Grun.) De Toni. (Appears to
differ from &. tumida (Ehr.?) Roper in the greater prominence of the
hyaline band.)
Valve orbicular-rhomboidal or elliptical-lanceolate, convex, with
depressions at the centre and toward the processes, slightly con-
stricted above the connective zone and surrounded by a narrow,
apparently hyaline, band. Processes swelling near the base and
small and obtuse at the apex. Surface with unequal, hexagonal
reticulations, from 2 to 4 in.0l mm., extending to the apices of
the processes on which they are smaller. The inner plate or floor
of cell wall is distinctly punctate. Two or three strong spines
are usually found on each side near the margin. Connective zone
with diagonal reticulations about 7 in .01 mm. L. of y.
138 mm.
Peruvian guano (Grun.); Callao, Peru. Possibly to be met
with northward.
30. Biddulphia Keeleyi Boyer.
Biddulphia Keeleyi Boyer, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. (1898), 469,
Pl. 24, fig. 4.
Valve broadly rhombic-elliptical, rounded at the ends. Surface
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 709
slightly convex, without depression, with unequal, hexagonal
reticulations, about 2 in .01 mm.; puncta within the reticulations
about 8 in.01 mm. Three stout spines are placed on each side
near the margin. Processes inflated at the base, small at the apex
and placed, not at the ends of the valve, but obliquely opposite,
near the ends. L. of v. .148 mm.
U. 8. S. ‘ Tusearora,’’ soundings, Lat. 36° 12’ N., Long.
123° 11’ W., 1605 fathoms. Coast of California (F. J.
Keeley); Monterey Bay (J. A. Shulze). Rare.
31. Biddulphia consimilis (Grun.).
Triceratium consimile Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 108, fig. 2; Schmidt, Pl.
84, figs. 13, 14.
Valve triangular, with sides slightly convex. Angles rounded,
filled with the prominent cylindrical, short and rounded processes.
Surface nearly flat, with reticulations which average .008 mm. in
diam., varying from triangular to hexagonal, with unequal sides.
The inner plate of the valve is rather coarsely punctate, the
puncta being about 5 in .01 mm.
L. of s. .120 mm. to .198 mm.
Campeachy Bay. Fossil in Santa Monica deposit.
32. Biddulphia convexiuscula (Grun.).
Triceratium convexiusculum Grun., Schmidt, Pl. 151, figs. 5, 6.
- Valve triangular, sides convex. Angles rounded, with short,
truncate processes. Surface convex, with puncta about 7 in .01
mm., radiating from the centre. On one or both sides of each
angle is a short spine. On the connective zone the puncta are in
diagonal rows. L. of s. averages .052 mm.
The general appearance is that of a three-sided form of Biddul-
phia levis, from which it differs in the puncta of the connective
zone which are usually larger in the former.
Campeachy Bay; Honduras; stomachs of fish from coast of
South Carolina; Tampa Bay, Fla.
33. Biddulphia orbiculata (Shadb.).
Triceratium orbiculatum Shadb., T. M. 8. (1854), 14, Pl. 1, fig. 6.
Triceratium (orbiculatum Shadb. var.) elongatum Grun.
Triceratium Shadboltianum Grev., Schmidt, Pl. 80, fig. 18-20.
Triceratium gibbosum Bail and Har., Schmidt, Pl. 80, fig. 13.
Lriceratium gibbosum var. elongatum Grun., Schmidt, Pl. 80, fig. 21.
Lampriscus Kittont A. S., Schmidt, Pl. 80, fig. 11.
Biddulphia crenulata W. C. Walker.
Valve triangular, with convex sides, or orbicular. Outline
46
710 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
entire or crenulate. Processes three or more, large, considerably
elevated and truncate. Surface slightly convex, with puncta radi-
ating from the centre, about 11 in .01 mm., becoming much finer
at the apex of the processes. A short strong spine is frequently
found quite near one or more of the processes. Connective zone
occasionally much elongated and annulate, with puncta in longitu-
dinal rows. Diam. averages .092 mm.
Honduras; Colon.
Both Greville and Ralfs separate Triceratium ordiculatum Shadb.
from the form described under that name by Brightwell and named
by Greville 7. Shadboltianum on account of the absence of spines
in the former. In material from Honduras many variations occur
in forms which, I believe, belong to one species. In some valves
no spines are seen, in others one or more may be noticed, and
occasionally two spines are found near one process. Some valves
are quite orbicular and occasionally somewhat elliptical, while
others, chiefly the smaller, are more nearly triangular. It is in
the smaller, triangular valves that the great extension of the con-
nective zone is seen, as in the form named 7. gibbosum var. elon-
gatum Grun. Owing to the incomplete description by Bailey and
Harvey, who state that forms from Tahiti have ‘‘ a surface as in
T. Wilkesii,’? and to the uncertain figure, it is difficult to reach
an absolute conclusion as regards the identity of their form with
the present species. The description above given is from valves
found at Honduras, where occur also forms with three or four
processes and with crenulate margins, as in Lampriscus Kittoni,
but otherwise similar to the triangular forms.
34, Biddulphia verrucosa Boyer.
Biddulphia verrucosa Boyer, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. (1898), 468,
Pl. 24, fig. 5.
Valve suborbicular, convex. Processes very large, cylindrical,
truncate. Surface coarsely reticulate, the reticulations unequal,
irregular, about 2 in .01 mm. Within the reticulations are
coarse puncta about 3 in .01 mm.
L. of v. .188 mm.
Fossil at Redondo Beach. Very rare.
This form, which approaches the Cerataudus group, is distin-
guished by the encrusted or warty appearance of the surface.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. (Gel
35. Biddulphia turgida (Ehr.) Wm. Sm.
Biddulphia turgida (Ehbr.) Wm. Sm., Brit. Diat., 2, 50, Pl. 62, fig.
384.
Cerataulus turgidus Ehr. Schmidt, Pl. 116, figs. 1-3, Pl. 115, figs.
Odontella turgida Wm. Sm.(?), De Toni.
Valve elliptical, convex. Surface with undulating rows of fine
puncta about 9 in .01 mm., and with numerous minute spurs at
irregular intervals. Processes very large, cylindrical, truncate,
placed obliquely opposite near the ends, and, owing to the torsion
of the frustule, directed sideways. Between the processes two
stout spines, frequently forked at the ends in perfect specimens,
are placed, one on each side, obliquely opposite, near the border.
Around the margin a row of very short spines frequently occurs.
fof Vv. 132 mm.
In zonal view the frustule appears subglobose and twisted on its
longitudinal axis in such a way that the edges of the valves appear
undulating and the connective zone ‘‘ sigmoid.’’ Puncta on the
connective zone in diagonal rows about 11 in .01_ mm. In var.
multispina Grun. the two large spines are usually replaced by from
two to four shorter ones on each side, and numerous short, stout
spines are found on the circumference, but variations occur.
(Biddulphia turgida (Ehr.) Ralfs, Denticella turgida Ehr. and
Odontella turgida Kiitz. are not equivalent. They are, possibly,
forms of Biddulphia granulata Roper. )
Atlantic and Pacific coasts. Fossil in the deposits of California,
Atlantic City and Bridgeton, N. J.
' In the Californian deposits numerous variations occur. The
form figured in Schmidt’s At/as, Pl. 115, fig. 15, under the name
of Cerataulus Johnsonianus var. appears to me to approach nearer
to turgida than to Greville’s form. Both it and var. multispina
Grun. are not uncommon in the Redondo Beach deposit.
36. Biddulphia Californica (A. S.).
Cerataulus Californica A. 8., Schmidt, Pl. 115, figs. 2, 3, 4.
- Valve broadly ovate-elliptical or suborbicular, with very short,
truncate, hyaline processes. Surface somewhat flat, studded with
minute spurs, finely reticulated, the reticulations hexagonal, about
8in .01 mm. _ Border of valve with a row of small spurs. Two
very short spines are usually found on each side near the border.
L. of v. .198 mm.
712 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Numerous forms are found in the Redondo Beach deposit, which
merely differ in outline and in the number and prominence of the
spines which are sometimes absent.
Fossil on the Pacific coast.
37. Biddulphia ovalis (A.S.).
Cerataulus ovalis A. S., Schmidt, Pl. 115, figs. 5, 6, 7.
Valve broadly elliptical with short, truncate processes. Surface
flat, with fine, hexagonal reticulations about 8 in .01 mm., with-
out spines or spurs. L. of v. .039 mm.
Fossil at Redondo Beach, Cal., and Weymouth, N. J.
38. Biddulphia levis Ehr.
Biddulphia levis Ehr., Berl. Akad. (4843) , 122.
Cerataulus levis (Ehr.) Ralfs, Prit., 847.
Cerataulus levis (Ehr.) Schmidt, Pl. 116, figs. 13, 14, 15.
Denticella levis Ebr.
Cerataulus levis thermalis Grun., Schmidt, Pl. 116, figs. 8-11.
Isthmia polymorpha Mont., Kiitz. Bacill., 138.
Odontella polymorpha Kiitz.
Cerataulus thermalis (Menengh.) Ralfs.
Pleurosira thermalis Menengh.
Melosira thermalis Menengh.
? Gallionella ? Bail., Sil. Jour. (1842), 104, Pl. 2, fig. 8.
(B. subequa K.? and B. obtusa (K.) Grun., of some authors, have
been confounded with B. levis Ehr. )
Valve suborbicular or occasionally subtriangular, convex, with
short, truncate processes. Surface with fine puncta, averaging
13 in .01 mm., which radiate in more or less curved lines from
the centre. Two small spines are placed obliquely opposite about
half the radius from the centre. Entire surface apparently cov-
ered with very minute spur-like elevations which are usually invis-
ible under ordinary illumination. The puncta on the connective
zone are slightly smaller than those on the valve. L. of v.
.066 mm.
Generally distributed along the Atlantic and Pacific coasts.
Abundant at Port Townsend, Wash. Fossil in salt marsh deposits
of Kansas, Utah, Nebraska and Michigan. Also occurs in fresh-
water lakes.
89, Biddulphia Thumii (A. S.).
Cerataulus Thumiti A. S., Schmidt, Pl. 115, fig. 1.
Cerataulus Hungaricus Pant.? Foss. Bacill. Ung., 2, Pl. 26, fig. 3752
Valve suborbicular, with large, short, truncate processes. Sur-
face with fine puncta confused and scattered at the centre, from
which they radiate in undulating lines toward the processes and
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 713
the circumference where they average 11 in .01 mm. In large
specimens the surface slightly undulates between the processes.
L. of v. .204 mm.
Fossil at Redondo Beach, Cal. Rare.
The Californian form is not distinct, I think, from the Hunga-
rian, except that in the latter, in the few specimens I have seen,
the puncta are larger and more confused.
40. Biddulphia Circinus (Bail.) V. H.
Biddulphia Circinus (Bail.) V. H., Diat., fig. 200.
Zygoceros Circinus Bail., N. Sp., Pl., figs. 19, 20; V.H. Syn, Pl.
105, fig. 13.
* Valve elliptical, rising into the form of a truncated cone, from
the top of which, at each end, extends a long, inwardly bent
spine. A few much smaller, intermediate spines are scattered
over the surface which is slightly rugose and punctate, the puncta
more or less radiate, averaging 7 in .01 mm. _ Processes wanting.
Connective zone well developed, with fine puncta, from 9 to
13 in .01 mm., in longitudinal rows. L. of v. .083 mm.
Fossil at Richmond (Bail. ); Santa Monica (Grun.). Rare.
41. Biddulphia quadricornis (Grun.).
Zygoceros quadricornis Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 105, figs. 5-7.
“' Valve orbicular or suborbicular, having four spines which rise
from the four corners of the summit of the truncated cone.
Otherwise apparently as in B. Circinus, of which it is, probably,
a variety.
Fossil at Nottingham (Grun. ).
42. Biddulphia Balena (Ehr.) Br.
Biddulphia Balena (Ehbr.) Br., M. M. J. (1859), 181, Pl. 9, fig. 15;
Schmidt, Pl. 121, figs. 5, 6.
Zygoceros Balena Ehr., Mik., Pl. 35, A, 38, fig. 17.
Zygoceros radiatus Bail.
Triceratium formosum Br., and Triceratium formosum pentagonalis
A.§., Schmidt, Pl. 79, figs. 2, 3, 4.
Valve elliptical or angular, in zonal view quadrangular. Sur-
face flat or somewhat concave, slightly elevated at the ends or
angles, finely reticulate, the hexagonal reticulations about 5 to
8 in .01 mm., radiating from the centre in the smaller valves, but
in the larger, elliptical forms, transverse in the middle. Connec-
tive zone with parallel rows of puncta, smaller than those on the
valve, about 5in.01 mm. L. of v. in elliptical form .231 mm.
714 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF 1900.
Near Biddulphia arctica (Br. ), but with much finer reticulations-
Cleve states (Arct. Diat., 15) that these forms are not specifi-
cally distinct, as he has seen a transitional form between Zygoceros
Balena KE. and Triceratiwm arecticum Br. I have noticed a tri-
angular form in material from McCormack Bay, Greenland. The
elliptical form of the same locality shows markings closely resem-
bling those of B. arctica, each reticulation containing 3 or 4
puncta on the upper surface of valve.
Greenland (Cleve); Nova Scotia; McCormack Bay, Greenland;
fossil at San Luis Obispo, Cal. (J. D. Cox); Nottingham (Br. ).
43, Biddulphia arctica (Br.).
Triceratium arcticum Br., M. M. J. (1853), 250, Pl. 4, figs. 10, 11;
Schmidt, Pl. 79, figs. 5-13, Pl. 81, figs. 3, 4, Pl. 94, figs. 1, 2, 3.
Triceratium Wilkesit var. Bail. and Hary.
Amphitetras Wilkesti Bail. and Harv.
Trigonium arcticwm Cleve.
Valve elliptical (?) or angular. Sides straight, convex or con-
cave, with rounded angles which are scarcely elevated. Surface of
valve rather coarsely reticulate or cellular, the cells irregularly
pentagonal or hexagonal, radiating from centre and usually
slightly larger near the semi-radius, distinctly punctate near the
perimeter. Angles finely punctate, the rows of puncta slightly
converging toward the apex where they are smaller. Connective
zone with coarse puncta in longitudinal rows. Zonal view usually
quadrangular but occasionally showing the surface much elevated.
A species quite variable in size and outline.
By careful examination a fine hexagonal punctation may be seen
around the margin of the cells and upon the wpper surface of the
valve, resembling the arrangement in certain forms of Coscinodis-
cus (see text of Pl. 165 of Schmidt’s At/as).
Abundant on the Pacific coast; Campeachy Bay (Grun. ); fossil
in California and very rarely at Asbury Park, N. J.
The following are considered varieties:
B. arctica Campeachiana (Grun.) = Triceratium arcticum forma
Campeachiana Grun., triangular, with straight sides.
B. arctica Californica (Grun.) = Triceratium areticum var.
Californica Grun., with produced angles, concave sides and hya-
line centre. Occurs three- and four-sided.
B. arctica Kerguelensis (Grun.) = Triceratium arctica var.
_—- —
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 715
Kerguelensis Grun., differing from Californica in not. having the
angles produced.
B. arctica Montereyi (Br.) = Triceratium Montereyi Br., differs
from the type merely in the elevation of the surface which is quite
pronounced in certain specimens, but differs in valves of the same
frustule. In specimens in my collection frustules show one valve
with no elevation and the other with a very marked central pro-
tuberance. In another frustule both valves are much elevated at
the centre as in those described by Grove and Stout (Diat. Oamaru,
PI. 11,. fig. 25).
B. arctica quadrangularis (Grev.) = Triceratium quadrangulare
Grey., which apparently differs only in a slight constriction of the
angles from other quadrate forms.
B. arctica pentagona = Triceratium arcticum, forma pentagona,
from Redondo Beach.
B. aretica sexangulata = Triceratium arcticum sexangulatum, a
very beautiful six-sided form occurring in a sounding from the
Pacific, west of California (not T. sexangulatum Grey.) (Coll. J.
A. Shulze).
According to Van Heurck (Diat., p. 61), the form known as
Triceratium formosum Br. is equivalent to Biddulphia Balena.
The pentagonal form shows puncta within the reticulations similar
to those in the type form of B. arctica. Owing to the numerous
variations of Balena and arctica, it becomes difficult to separate
them satisfactorily.
-44, Biddulphia Heilpriniana (K.and°&.).
Triceratium Heilprinianum (K. and. 8.) Torr. Bull. (1889), 208, Pl.
93, fig. 3.
Valve triangular, sides straight or but slightly convex or concave.
Angles elevated into conical, obtuse processes toa height about
equal to one-eighth of the width of valve. Surface, with its
central portion having about the same elevation as the angles and
flattened at the top, with rounded, unequal puncta, about 4 in
-01 mm., and extending to the summit of the processes where they
are slightly smaller. L. of v. .064 to .185 mm.
Atlantie City artesian well. Rare.
716 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
45. Biddulphia vesiculosa (Ag.).
Diatoma vesiculosum Ag., Sys., 7 (1824).
Isthmia vesiculosa Ag., Consp. ‘Crit., 55.
Amphitetras antediluviana Ehr., Berl. Akad. (1839), Kitz. Bacill.,
130; Pl19) dig.i3) (Pl; 20; figs 186!
Amphitetras crux Br.
Triceratium antediluvianum Grun.
Biddulphia antediluviana (Ebr.) V. H. Syn., 207, Pl. 109, figs. 4, 5,
Pl. 100, figs. 3, 4.
Valve quadrangular, or rarely pentagonal, with more or less
concave sides and rounded angles. Processes very short and trun-
cate, frequently unequal. Surface with coarse, rounded, quadrate
or hexagonal reticulations, smaller at the centre from which they
radiate, and averaging 3 in .01 mm., their walls often consider-
ably thickened. The secondary layer is punctate, but the puncta,
owing to the thickness of the cell walls, are difficult to see iu most
specimens. Ends of processes very minutely and indistinctly
punctate. L. of s. .059 mm. to .115 mm.
Edgarton Harbor (Bail.); L. I. Sound (Lewis); St. Mary’s
river, Ga. (Lewis); Savannah (Lewis); Provincetown, Mass. ;
Port Townsend, Wash. Fossil at Asbury Park, N. J. A pen-
tagonal form occurs fossil at Asbury Park, which is not the same
as Amphipentas alternans Ehr.
46, Biddulphia decipiens Grun.
Biddulphia decipiens Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 100, figs 4.
Amphitetras minuta Grev., M. M. J. (1861), cre ‘PL 9, fig. 11 ?.
Amphitetras (Biddulphia) ’alternans, A: Smith, Christian, in ‘‘ The
Micresvope’’ (1887), 67, fig., p. 113; Schmidt, Pl. 98, fig. 23
(without name).
The equivalence of Amphitetras minuta Grey., as doubtfully
given by Van Heurck, is too uncertain to give priority to the
name, as Greville, in both description and figure, omits any refer-
ence to processes, surface or spines. The processes are, however,
frequently quite indefinite and the spines are more often broken off.
Valve rhomboidal with the sides turgid and produced, giving,
therefore, a cruciform outline. Surface rising suddenly from
near the margin into an ellipsoidal elevation, the major diameter
of which is at right angles to the major axis of valve, with hex-
agonal reticulations, about 5 in.01 mm., at the centre, from which
they radiate toward the processes and rounded angles cf the sides
where they are about 9 in.01 mm. _ Processes inflated at the
a eee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. TAT
base, small and obtuse. At the margin of the elevation, placed
obliquely on each side, a strong spine projects.
L. of v. .059 mm. to .072 mm.
Fossil at Nottingham and Atlantic City.
47. Biddulphia elegans (Grev.).
Amphitetras elegans Grev., T. M.S. (1866), 9, Pl. 2, fig. 24.
Triceratium elegans (Grev.) Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 109, fig. 1;
Schmidt, Pl. 99, figs. 10-13.
Valve quadrangular, with sides slightly concave. Angles with
short, cylindrical processes. Surface depressed at the centre,
with rounded cells, averaging 5 in .01 mm., radiating toward the
angles where they are smaller and more crowded. The absence of
reticulation half-way between the centre and processes frequently
. produces, under low powers, the appearance of an inscribed square.
L. of s. .092 mm.
Campeachy Bay (Schmidt); fossil at Monterey, Santa Monica
and Redondo Beach, Cal.
48. Biddulphia biquadrata (Jan.).
Triceratium biquadratum Jan., Schmidt, Pl. 98, figs. 4, 5, 6.
Valve quadrangular with slightly concave sides. Angles
rounded, with short, truncate processes. Surface with coarse
reticulations, about 24 in .01 mm., the walls of which correspond,
for the niost part, with the meshes of a coarser network which is
unequally but symmetrically distributed, producing, by its peculiar
arrangement, the appearance, under low powers, of an inscribed
square.
Eek is. 112 mm.
The chief distinction between this form and B. Pentacrinus is
in the greater coarseness of the reticulations in the former and the
closer correspondence of its anastomosing network and the cell
walls. It is, apparently, intermediate between B. vesiculosa and
B. Pentacrinus.
Yucatan; Gulf of California.
49. Biddulphia Pentacrinus (Ehr.).
Amphipentas Pentacrinus Ehr., Berl. Akad. (1840), 10; Mik., Pl. 19,
fig. 59; Kiitz., Bacill., 136, Pl. 29, fig. 92.
Triceratium Pentacrinus (Ehr.) Wall., Schmidt, Pl. 98, figs. 7-13, 18.
Amphipentas alternans Ebr.
Amphitetras arisata Shadb.
Amphitetras ornata Shadb.
Triceratium quadrinotatum A. 8., Schmidt, Pl. 152, fig. 31.
Valve quadrangular or pentagonal, with concave sides. Angles
718 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
obtuse with short, truncated processes. Surface nearly flat, with
hexagonal reticulations, 5 to 7 in.01 mm., radiating from the
centre. The walls of the reticulations being more robust in some
parts than in others, there is produced an appearance of a coarse
network of various design extending over the entire surface. A
minute spur-like projection is frequently found between each angle
and near the circumference in both the quadrangular and pen-
tagonal forms.
L. of-s. .092 mm.
Atlantic and Pasific coasts More abundant in Gulf of Mexico
and southward.
50, Biddulphia Kainii (Schultze).
Triceratium Kainvi Schultze, K. and §., Bull. Torr. Cl. (1889). 76, Pl.
89, fig. 5, Pl. 92, fig. 3.
Triceratium Kainii constrictum Schultze, K. and §., 1. ¢.
Triceratium multifrens Brun., Diat. foss. Jap., 63, Pl. 6, fig. 2.
Valve triangular or quadrangular, with sides varying from
straight to deeply convex. Angles more or less cuneate, obtuse,
rarely constricted, separated from the other part of valve by
strong coste which are equidistant between centre and apices.
Surface slightly convex, with puncta about 5 in .01 mm., radi-
ating from a hyaline centre, or, occasionally, scattered L of s.
-056 to .138 mm. ‘
Fossil in the Miocene deposits of the Eastern States. A quad-
rate form has been found by Mr. John A. Shulze in material from
Mays Landing artesian well, N. J.
51. Biddulphia Tabellarium (Br.).
Triceratium Tabellarium Br., M. M. J. (1856), 275, Pl. 17, fig, 15 ;
Schmidt, Pl. 77, figs. 1-9.
Triceratium Tabellarium diplostictum Grun., Schmidt, Pl. 77, figs.
Triceratium Johnsonii Ralfs., Prit., 854.
Triceratium venulosum Grev.
Triceratium brevinervium Grev.
Triceratium pallidum Grev.
Valve triangular, with somewhat acute angles and straight or
slightly convex sides having an indented or scalloped appearance
caused by the extension inwards, for a short distance, of several
cost which are usually curved at the extremities. Surface
slightly elevated at the centre and at the angles, with a few scat-
tered puncta more numerous at the angles. L. of s. .06 mm. to
.14 mm.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 719
In certain specimens indistinct lines radiate from the centre and
in conjection with two of the partial costz from each side form a
three-lobed figure. In most of the specimens each of the angles
is distinctly separated from the centre by an irregular line.
Campeachy Bay; Honduras.
52. Biddulphia alternans (Bail.) V. H.
Biddulphia alternans V. H. Syn., 208, Pl. 113, figs. 4-7.
Triceratium alternans Bail., M. Obs., 40; Sil. Jour. (1845), Pl. 4, fig.
25 ; 1b., M. Ex. S., fig. 55, 56; Schmidt, Pl. 78, figs. 9-17.
Triceratium sp.? Bail., Sil. Jour. (1845), 336.
Triceratium variabile Br.
Valve triangular or rarely quadrangular, with sides straight or,
usually, somewhat unevenly concave. Angles obtuse, slightly
elevated, separated from central portion by costate lines. Central
part hexagonal in outline, marked by several lines resembling
cost which extend indefinitely from the periphery in various
directions, usually toward the centre. Surface with puncta of
irregular shape, larger at the centre, about 5 in.01 mm., and
diminishing toward the apices of the angles on which they are
usually arranged in rows about 8 in.0l mm. Zonal view quad-
rate, angles not prolonged. Connective zone narrow. L. of s.
-05 mm.
Abnormal variations occur with unequal sides.
Common along the Atlantic coast, especially in estuaries, but
not abundant; Puget Sound; fossil in rice fields of Georgia and
California (Bail. ), and in the Miocene deposits of the Eastern
States and of California; Pleistocene clay, Harvey Cedars, N. J.
53. Biddulphia trisulca (Bail.).
Triceratium trisuleum Biil., (Ms.) in Prit., 854; Schmidt, Pl. 78, figs.
5-8, Pl. 112, figs. 17, 18.
Triceratium validum Grun., Schmidt, Pl. 94, fig. 5.
Valve triangular with concave sides and rounded angles which
are elevated into large, globose processes. Surface with rounded,
scattered puncta averaging 1 in.01 mm. Angles with indefinitely
angular reticulations about 4in.01 mm. Connective zone with
puncta similar to those on the surface of valve. In one specimen
observed, from Redondo Beach, in a continuation of an unusually
well-developed connective zone overlapping one valve, the puncta-
tion assumed the character of large hexagonal reticulations about
24in.01mm. L. of s. averages .15 mm.
720 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Triceratium tumidum Grey. from Barbadoes, is very near this
form.
Campeachy Bay. Fossil at Redondo Beach, Cal.
54, Biddulphia costulata (Grun.).
Triceratium tumidum Grev. var. costulata Grun ; Schmidt, Pl. 78, fig-
pe rete sites ale,
Valve triangular with straight or slightly concave sides and
rounded angles, elevated into large, rounded processes. Surface
as in B. trisulca, except that the puncta on the angles in the
specimens observed are about 9 in .01 mm. Partial costz, two to
four on each side, extend inwards for varying distances from the
perimeter. L. of s. 148 mm.
Fossil at Redondo Beach, Cal. Rare.
55, Biddulphia condecora (Ehr.).
Triceratium condecorum Ehr., Berl. Akad. (1844), 272; Schmidt, Pl.
76, fig. 28 (not 27). See remarks under B. Americana.
Valve triangular, or irregularly quadrilateral, with sides straight
or but slightly convex or concave, and obtuse angles. Surface
flat or slightly depressed toward the centre, having rounded puncta
arranged in rows which radiate in undulating lines from the
centre at which and on the margin they are slightly smaller,
averaging 4 in.01 mm. L. of s. in type specimens .145 mm.,
but occasionally much smaller. Distinguished from b. Americana
not only by the undulations of the rows of puncta, but also by
their more pearly character. Specimens from Nottingham vary
considerably in outline, several haying but two angles and others
having the form of a trapezium.
Fossil in the Miocene deposits of the Eastern States.
56, Biddulphia (?) subrotundata (A. S.).
Triceratium subrotundatum A. 8., Schmidt, Pl. 93, fig. 1.
Valve orbicular-triangular, with very convex sides and indefinite
angles. Surface flat, with subquadrate or hexagonal reticula-
tions, radiating from the centre, where they are about 5 in .01
mm., and increasing to about 3 in .01 mm., but suddenly dimin-
ishing at the cireumference. W. of v. .092 mm. Scearcely differ-
ing, except in outline, from Coscinodiscus.
Fossil at Nottingham. Very rare.
ih, — ~
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 721
57. Biddulphia Americana (Ralfs).
Triceratium Americanum Ralfs, Prit., 855 ; Schmidt, Pl. 76, fig. 3 (?),
27 (see note).
Triceratium obtusum Ehr., Amer., 137 (?); Mik., Pl. 18, fig. 48 (?) (not
492),
Triceratium Amblyoceros Br.
Triceratium obscurum Grev. forma minor A. S., Schmidt, Pl. 76, fig. 5.
This is a smaller form of B. Americana. I have noticed several
intermediate variations which differ only in size and the convexity
of the sides. Greville remarks of his species from Naparima that
it resembles T. condecorum, except that ‘‘ the radiating lines of
puncta are perfectly straight ’’°
Valve triangular or occasionally irregularly quadrangular, with
straight, convex or slightly concave sides and obtuse angles. Sur-
face flat, having rounded or subquadrate reticulations, 3 or 4 in
-OL mm., which in well-developed specimens radiate from the
centre. At the margin the cells are smaller.
L. of s. averages .115 mm. Quite variable in size and outline.
Fossil in the Miocene deposits of the Eastern States.
°> Much confusion has arisen as to the distinction between Jriceratium
Americanum Ralfs and Triceratium condecorum Br., due partly to Ralfs’
description of the former as equivalent to 7. Amblyoceros Br., which in
turn has been confused with 7. Amblyoceros Ehr., and to the mistake made
by Schmidt, as suggested by Gr. and St., in numbering figs. 27 and 28 in
Pl. 76 of the Atlas, fig. 27 being 7. Americanum and fig. 28 condecorum.
As T. condecorum is described as having undulating rows of granules, and
as T. Americanum is said to resemble 7. arcticum (see Roper), except in
the angles, it may be as well to base the distinction between the two forms
upon the undulations of the rows of radiating granules and upon the
coarseness of the granules. It becomes, however, difficult to separate the
smaller forms of the two species. Some specimens from Nottingham vary
considerably in outline, some approaching 7. suwbrotundatum A. S., while
others are near 7. parallelum Grev., as has been noticed by Grove and
Sturt in forms from Oamaru.
Triceratium Americanum Ralfs is, probably, the same as 7. Amblyo-
ceros of Brightwell, but as Brightwell’s form is not 7. Amblyoceros of
Ehrenberg, which in outline, if not in its centre, is probably Actinoptychus
Amblyoceros A. S., Ralfs’ name must stand as representing form fig. 27,
Pl. 76, of the Atlas. De Toni unfortunately (p. 1396) gives Actinoptychus
Amblyoceros A. §., Atlas, Pl. 1, fig. 25, as equivalent to forms of Pl. 76,
figs. 3 and 28. A glance at fig. 25, Pl. 1, will show that it is entirely dif-
ferent from figs. 3 and 28 in Pl. 76. In fact, fig. 25, Pl. 1, isan Actinop-
tychus as given by Schmidt, while the other figures belong to Zriceratium.
Triceratium Amblyoceros E. and T. Marylandicum Br. may be abolished
as forms of TZriceratia and become <Actinoptychus Amblyoceros (Ehr. )
A.S., or, aS appears to be necessary, Schuettia Amblyoceros (Ehr.) De
Toni. It is probable that 7. obtwswm Ebr. as figured in Mik., Pl. 18, fig.
48, is the form under consideration, as there is apparently no other in the
deposit, except possibly 7. interpunctatum, to which it may be made to
apply. By priority, therefore, the name would become Biddulphia obtusa
(Ehr.), but on account of the uncertainty it may be as well to retain Ralfs’
name.
722 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1900.
58. Biddulphia Antillarum (Cleve).
Triceratium Antillarum Cleve, Diat. W. Ind., 16, Pl. 5, fig. 29;
Schmidt, Pl. 99, fig. 14.
? Triceratium punctatum Br. forme hexagona and pentagona Grun.;
Schmidt, Pl, 81, figs. 6, 7.
Amphipentas Antillarum (Cleve) De Toni.
? B. (Amphipentas) punctata V. H., Diat., fig. 206.
Valve polygonal, with produced angles and concave sides. Sur-
face slightly elevated at the centre, with puncta about 4 in
.O1 mm., rounded, radiating and extending to the ends of the
angles, which appear like processes. L. of v. .115 mm. Very
near certain forms of 5b. Reticulum (Ehr.), from which it appar-
ently differs in the radiation of the puncta and in the form of the
angles.
Campeachy Bay (Schmidt). Fossil at Redondo Beach, Cal.,
in the hexagonal form, but very rare.
59. Biddulphia interpunctata (Grun.).
Triceratium tnterpunctatum Grun., Schmidt, Pl. 76, fig. 7. According
to De Toni (947), near 7. elegans Grev., which in turn is said by
Grey. to be 7. obtuswm Ehr., but I think the form is quite distinct.
Valve triangular, sides straight, and angles rounded. Surface
flat, having rounded puncta nearly equal, about 3 in .01 mm., with
here and there at intervals much smaller puncta.
L. of s. .075 mm. to .115 mm.
A form apparently quite constant. Near B. Americana Ralfs,
from which it may be distinguished: not only by the interpuncta-
tion, but also by the large, round and scattered puncta. Under
low powers its color is blue.
Fossil in the Miocene deposits of the Eastern States.
60. Biddulphia hebetata (Grun.).
Triceratium tirregulare var. hebetata Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 111, fig. 10.
Lriceratium impar A. S., Schmidt, Pl. 151, figs. 31-34.
It is quite difficult to separate Triceratium impar A. S. from
certain forms of B. Americana and from the present form, which is
quite common in the Petersburg deposit. The peculiarity of the
angles, however, appears to be sufficient to separate it from 7.
irregulare Grev.
Valve triangular, with somewhat unequal sides and unequally
convex margins. Angles rounded, one of them having puncta
about 9 in .01 mm., while in the other two the puncta are about
din .01 mm, Surface flat, with subquadrate reticulations about
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 723
4 in .U1 mm., radiating from the centre toward the margin, where
they are about 5 in .01 mm.
L. of s. .072 mm.
Fossil in the Miocene deposits of Petersburg and Richmond, Va.
61. Biddulphia heteropora (Grun.).
woo” (Biddulphia) heteroporum Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 112,
Valve triangular, with nearly straight sides and siightly unequal
and somewhat obtuse angles. Surface slightly convex, with
rounded puncta which are scattered, except at the angles where
they are crowded, and at the margins where they are arranged in
short parallel rows, about 5 in.01 mm. At the centre a small
circle of very distinct puncta is seen. L. of s. .125 mm.
Fossil at Santa Monica (V. H.), Redondo Beach, Cal.
62. Biddulphia tessellata (Grev.).
Triceratium tessellatum Grev., T. M.S. (1861), 71, Pl. 8, fig. 14.
Triceratium robustum Grev., T. M. S. (1861), 71, Pl. 8, fig. 15.
Triceratium amoenum Grev., 1. ¢. 75, Pl. 9, fig. 7.
Triceratium secernendum A. S., Schmidt, Pl. 76, fig. 34.
? Triceratium Fischeri A. S., Schmidt, Pl. 76, fig. 34.
Valve triangular, with straight or slightly concave sides and
rounded angles. Surface usually somewhat convex at the centre,
with rounded, elliptical, hexagonal or subquadrate reticulations
about 3 in .01 mm., but smaller at the centre, arranged in more
or less concentric rows and much smaller at the extremities of the
ang)es which appear hyaline under low magnification, where they
are from 8 to 15 in .01 mm. Small puncta occasionally occur
scattered among the larger.
L. of s. .049 mm. to .099 mm. Quite variable in size and the
coarseness of markings.
Fossil in the Miccene deposits of the Eastern States.
As remarked by Cleve, the group to which the present species
belongs is ‘‘ extremely difficult to exactly determine.’’ The form
known as 7. tessellatum is well described by Greville, but in the
case of robustum and amenum no sufficiently accurate and distinct
differences are noted. 7. robustum is described as having hyaline
spaces at the extremities of the angles, but a careful examination
will disclose a fine and indistinct punctation extending to the
apices. 7. amenum is merely a small fourm, while 7. secernendum
differs from the type only in being somewhat irregular in outline
724 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
and in having more rounded angles. Familiarity with the Not-
tingham deposit will show so many intermediate variations that the
number of species might be indefinitely increased, if the distinc-
tions in the above forms are assumed to be specific. Many forms
are with difficulty distinguished from B. Reticulum E. The varia-
tions are well shown also in material from Weymouth, N. J.,
artesian well.
63. Biddulphia Reticulum (Ehr.).
Triceratium Reticulum Ehr., Berl. Akad. (1844), 88; Mik., PI. 18, fig.
50, Pl. 33, 16, fig. 13 ; Schmidt, Pl. 76, fig. 4.
Triceratium sculptum Shadb., T. M. S. (1854), 15; Pl. 1, fig. 4;
Schmidt, Pl. 76, figs. 9, 10, 11, 12, 31.
Triceratium obtusum Br. (not Ehr.).
Triceratium punctatum Br. (not Wall.), Schmidt, Pl. 76, figs. 19, 20.
Triceratium Browneanum Grev.
Biddulphia sculpta (Shadb.) V. H.
Valve triangular or polygonaj, with either straight or concave
sides. Angles rounded, sometimes produced. Surface slightly
elevated at the centre and at the angles, with puncta about 4 in
.O1 mm., angular, irregular and unequal, mostly larger at the
centre. Three or four spines are occasionally noticed about half-
way between centre and sides. Groups of puncta frequently occur
arranged in three or four small circles. Frustules in zonal view
but slightly developed. L. of s. .059 mm.
Generally distributed along the coast, especially southward.
Fossil in the Miocene and later deposits of the Eastern States.
An examination of many specimens from various localities leads
me to the conclusion that if we take the form usually called Tri-
ceratium punctatum Br. as the type, the forms named seu/ptum
Shadb., tessedlatum Grev., robustum Grey. and several others
may be included as variations of one species. In order, however,
to avoid confusion and because of the difference in the arrange-
ment of puncta between tessel/atum and robustum on the one hand
and Reticu/um and like forms on the other, I consider them for
the present as distinct. The puncta in all the forms aboye-men-
tioned are usually more or less irregular, the centre in large speci-
mens is more likely to show the slight depression within the central
elevation than in smaller forms, and the sides and angles vary
according to the ordinary laws of plant nutrition. Shadbolt
bases scu/ptum upon the presence of three ‘‘ pseudo-nodules,”’
but, as has been noticed by others, these do not always appear in
i ee eee ane 1).
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 725
specimens otherwise similar. A specimen in my collection from a
fossil deposit at Absecon, N. J., in which four ‘‘ pseudo-nodules ”’
are plainly visible, shows the unstable character of this distinc-
tion. ‘Two to four spurs may be seen on recent specimens from
Yucatan and west coast of Florida which show at the same time
the markings of T. sculptum. A specimen from a fossil deposit at
Newbern, N. C., which somewhat approaches robustum shows four
very small spines at about one-half the length of radius (see
remarks of Schmidt about figs. 4 and 26, Pl. 76).
64. Biddulphia inelegans (Grev.).
Triceratium inelegans Grev., T. M. S. (1866), 8, Pl. 2, fig. 21;
Schmidt, Pl. 81, fig. 16 (not 7. obtuswm Ehr., as suggested by several
authors, as the angles are not the same).
Triceratium Jucatense Grun., Schmidt, Pl. 76, fig. 13.
Valves triangular, with straight, concave or convex sides which
are frequently unequal. Angles obtuse. Surface with rounded,
irregular and scattered puncta, about 2 or3in.01 mm. At the
angles, which are sometimes slightly elevated, the puncta are about
T7or8in.0imm. L. of s. .089 mm. to .118 mm.
Var. areopora Grun. has straight sides and scattered puncta.
Var. Jucatensis Grun. has straight sides and larger puncta.
Var. micropora Grun. has usually smaller and more crowded
puncta.
Campeachy Bay. Fossil at Santa Monica and Redondo Beach,
Cal.
65. Biddulphia parvula (Jan. and Rab.).
Amphitetras parvula Jan. and Rab., Diat. Honduras, 4, Pl. 1, fig. 4
(not A. parvula Grev.).
Triceratium zonatulatum Grev., T. M. S. (1865), 102, Pi. 9, fi
Sehmidt, Pl. 77, figs. 33-37, Pl. 94, fig. 9
oes
Valve triangular or quadrangular, with deeply concave sides,
producing, in the latter form, a cruciform outline with rounded
angles. Surface of central part hyaline, excepting a few indistinct
puncta, but at the angles the puncta are in parallel rows about 8 in
01mm. W. of vy. .059 mm.
Honduras. Rare. The triangular form not yet noticed in,
North America.
47
726 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
66. Biddulphia semicircularis (Br.).
Triceratium semicirculare Br., M. M. J. (1853), 252, Pl. 4, fig. 21;
VoH. Syn; Pl. 126; tig: 20:
Triceratium obtusum Ebr. (in part), Mik., Pl. 18, fig. 49.
Kuodia Brigtwellii Ralfs, Prit., 852.
Valve lunate, appearing as if divided half-way between the cen-
tre and the obtuse ends by two very faint costate lines. Surface
elevated at the centre and at the ends, with rounded puncta, about
3 in .01 mm., concentric and radiating from a hyaline centre,
sinaller at the ends. L. of v. averages .099 mm.
Fossil in the Miocene deposits of the Eastern States.
Bideulp his semicircularis Asburyana Boyer, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. (1898), 469,
1. 24, fig. 3.
Valve arcuate with the ends produced and elevated into pro-
cesses. Surface not divided by costate lines, convex, with rounded
puncta, about 6 in .01 mm. near the hyaline excentric space, in-
creasing in size to about 15 in .01 mm. at the margin. L. of v.
181.
Not uncommon in deposit (Miocene) at Asbury Park, N. J.
67. Biddulphia Testudo (Brun.).
Biddulphia ?? K.and §., Bull. Torr. Cl. (1889), 208, Pl. 93, fig. 4.
Tabulina Testudo Brun., Diat. Jap., 59. Pl. 6, fig. 8; Schitt, 82, fig.
131. Referred by De Toni to Cheloniodiscus, which, however, I think
it does not resemble. It appears to be a true Biddulphia.
Valve suborbicular or oblong-elliptical, somewhat flattened, but
with four large process-like, slight elevations, two of which are
mear each end. Surface traversed by an indefinite number of
wide, hyaline, curved lines. Two of the lines are more or less
‘transverse to the major axis, while the others appear to radiate
indefinitely from a central space and anastomose. Surface with
unequal and scattered puncta, about 8 in .01 mm. L. of v.
.066 mm. to .089 mm.
Frustule in zonal view quadrangular, the connective zone having
transverse rows of puncta more distinct than those on the valve.
Fossil in the Miocene deposits of Atlantic City and Weymouth,
Neds
68. Biddulphia Shulzei Boyer.
Biddulphia Shulzei Boyer, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sei. Phila. (1898), 470,
Pl. 24, figs. 7, 8.
Valve elliptical, slightly elevated toward the centre, with a large,
rounded, process-like elevation at each end. Surface with
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 727
rounded, oblong puncta averaging 5 in .01 mm., but for the most
part scattering, leaving numerous hyaline spaces. Owing to the
irregularity in the distribution of the puncta the circumference of
the valve appears to show a scalloped border. L. of v. .115 mm.
Distinguished from B. Testudo in having but two processes and
in being without the hyaline lines which cross the valve of the
latter. A variety with three processes also occurs.
Fossil at Weymouth, N. J.
DouUBTFUL SPECIES.
Triceratium indentatum K. and §S., Torr. Bull. (1889), 210,
Pl. 92, fig. 4; Wolle, Pl. 78, fig. 7; De Toni, 942. From pho-
tographs sent me by Dr. Ward, of Poughkeepsie, and Mr. Kain,
the following description may be given: Valve triangular, sides
convex. Angles not elevated, bidentate. Surface flat, reticulate,
the reticulations subquadrate or hexagonal, 2 to 4 in.01 mm.,
radiating from the centre where they are larger. L. of s. about
.08 mm. This form may, possibly, be classed among the Pseudo-
Coscinodisci, unless it should prove to be abnormal. I have not
seen any specimens, but the photographs give the general appear-
ance of a small form of B. Americana (Ralfs) with the angles
notched at the apices. The absence of processes as well as angles
resembling the ordinary types precludes its admission among the
Biddulphie until it has been further examined. Fossil in the
artesian well, Atlantic City, N. J.
Triceratium (Biddulphia) obliquum Grun., V. H. Syn., PI.
110, fig. 11; Wolle, Pl. 106, fig. 10. Santa Monica, Cal.
Triceratium Pileolus E., Berl. Akad. (1844), 205; Mik., Pl.
30A., 21, fig. 17; K. S. A., 140; Weisse, 242, Pl. 1, fig. 20;
Prit., 856; Wolle, Pl. 108, fig. 1. This form is said by Bright-
well to be allied to T. brachiolatum Br. (M. M. J. (1853), 248,
and (1856) 272), which by Ralfs is said to equal 7. Pileus E.
Ralfs also gives it as equivalent to JT. odtusum Br. (not E.) (see
under B. Reticulum (E.), of which it may be a variation). As
T. obtusum Br. is the only one of the above forms said to be
American, it may be unnecessary to refer to the synonymy further.
Triceratium subcornutum Grun., Schmidt’s Atlas, Pi. 99, fig.
15-18. Campeachy Bay. Near T. elegans Grev.?
728 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Triceratium tripartitum Grun., V. . Syn., Pl. 110, fig. 8;
Wolle, Pl. 100, fig. 5; De Toni, 945. Campeachy Bay.
Triceratium uncinatum A, §., Atlas, Pl. 94, fig. 4; Wolle, Pt.
102, fig. 12. Pacific coast of Central America.
SpPEcIES KNown Onty By NAME.
Biddulphia gigas E., Berl. Akad. (1844), 265; Mik., Pl. 33,
12, fig. 11; Prit., 849; Wolle, PL 103, fig. 11. Ralfs (in Prit.)
gives the following description: ‘‘ Large, very turgid at the centre,
rough, without distinct granules, laterally five-jointed, having a
Jarge, oblong (pseudo-) opening at each attenuated apex.’’ Ap-
parently the above applies to large forms of B. tridens (E.) with
the processes broken off. The habitat attributed by Ralfs to
Ehrenberg is ‘‘ Bermuda’’ (Nottingham), but Ehrenberg in Mik.,
Pl. 33, 12, fig. 11, gives the Columbia river as the locality.
From the uncertainty as to description, figure and locality the
name may be dropped without loss.
The figure given by Wolle, Pl. 103, fig. 12, is, as he states, a
Melosira. See Bailey, Sil. Jowr., 1845, 322, under Gallionella.
Biddulphia perpusilla ‘* Bail. Coll.,’? Habirshaw Cat., De Toni,
878.
Triceratium aculeatum E. (not Grey.) E., Mik., supplement, 16;
De Toni, 972; Wolle, Pl. 25, fig. 21. There is no description
given of this form so far as I can discover. Wolle has made the
mistake of taking Greville’s description of a form from Barbados
( Triceratium aculeatum Grey., T. M. S. (1861), 45) for Ehren-
berg’s form, and has constructed a ‘‘ figure suggested by descrip-
tion’’! Ehrenberg’s form is said to be found in the rice fields of
Georgia.
Triceratium interruptum ‘* Bail. Coll.,’’ Habirshaw Cat.
Triceratium Parma Bail. Prof. H. L. Smith states ¢ The Lens,
I, p. 232) that Bailey’s ‘‘ Triceratiwn Parma is only a triangular
form ’’ of Stictodiscus Californicus.
‘* Triceratium regina Heib.’’ of Wolle, Pl. 105, fig. 17, is evi-
dently a typographical error and should be Trinacria regina Heib.,
but Wolle’s figure does not correspond to Schmidt’s, from which it
is said to be taken, and is not the figure of a Trinacria.
—— .
ee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 729
Species Excnuupep.
Amphitetras cruciata Jan. and Rab., Diat. Hond., 4, Pl. 1, fig.
5; De Toni, 905. This form is the same as Amphitetras crucifera
Kitton, Sciexce Goss. (1867), 271, fig. 285; Ralfs in Prit., 858;
De Toni, 908, and is also equal to Triceratiwm cruciatum Leud.-
Fort., ‘‘ Ceylon,’’ 59. It isa variety of Rhaphoneis, and is given
in V. H. Syn., Pl. 116, fig. 16, as Rhaphoneis amphiceros tetragona
Grun., and by Cleve, Vega, pp. 449, 507, Pl. 37, fig. 52, 6 and
ec, as Rhaphoneis amphiceros cruciata. _ Habitat, Honduras.
Amphitetras crucifera Kitton. See under Amphitetras cruciata.
Amphitetras parallela E.; Mik., Pl. 19, fig. 20; Kiitz., 8 A.,
134.
Triceratium parallelum (E.) Grey.; T. M. S. (1865), 104,
Eid ues. 22. 25; Schmidt, Pl. 75, figs. 3, 4, 5, 11, 12, 13, PI.
76, figs. 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 30; var. Coloniensis Grun., Pl. 81,
fig. 1; var. Balearica Grun., Pl. 81, fig. 2; Grun., Alg. Nov.,
24, 102; V. H. Syn., Pl. 111, figs. 1-6; Wolle, Pl. 100, figs. 11,
12, 15; Triceratiwm obtusum (E.) Cleve, Diat. W. Ind., 16;
Triceratium Gruendleri A. S., Pl. 75, fig. 10 (?); Nothoceratium ?
parallelum (Grev.) De Toni, 915.
The triangular forms of Triceratium parallelum (E.) Grey. and
the vars. Coloniensis and Balearica are abundant in Campeachy
Bay. As remarked by Van Heurck, J. obtuswm E. and T.
parallelum (E.) Grev. are the same in part. Ehrenberg’s form
from Richmond is possibly equivalent to Ralfs’ T. Americanwm
(q. v.), and approaches that from Campeachy Bay, but it is not
exactly like Cleve’s form in the markings at the centre. Both
these forms and Triceratium Harrisonianum Norm. are true
Stictodisci, having the definite arrangement of puncta and the
more or less faint parallel or serpentine Jines extending inwards
from the perimeter. Quite a large number of diatoms figured by
Schmidt and by Truan and Witt, among them the beautiful
Stictodiscus adspersus (A. S.) T. and W., are found at Campeachy
Bay and are easily mistaken for Biddulphoid forms, the absence of
granules at the centre, usually characteristic of Stictodiscus, not
being noticeable in small specimens.
Biddulphia bipons E., Berl. Akad. (1844), 275 = Hemiaulus
(Habirshaw).
730 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900-.
Biddulphia? lunata E., Berl. Akad. (1844), 77; Mik., Pl.
18, fig. 53; Prit., 849 = Eunotogramma amphiorys E., Berl.
Akad. (1855), 302. |
Biddulphia membranacea Cleve is not included among North
American forms.
Biddulphia Weissflogii Grun. in K. and S., Bull. Torr. Cl.
(1889), 208, as stated by Mr. Kain later, is Biddulphia Bailey
Wm. Sm. = Biddulphia Mobiliensis (Bail. ) Grun.
Biddulphia Woolmanii K. and S., T. B. C. (1889), 74, PI.
89, fig. 3; Wolle, Pl. 98, fig. 4; De Toni, 872. This form is iden-
tical with Salacia Boryana Pant., a specimen of which I have from
Borostelek, Hungary. Van Heurck (Diat., 359) considers
Salacia or Castracania (new genus created by De Toni for this
species, p. 750) as equivalent to Tetracyclus, and states that it
presents the closest affinity to T. Rhombus. There is no doubt, [
think, that it is a Tetracyclus, and I had considered it as probably
identical with 7. ellipticus (E.) Grun., having found it in a fossil
deposit from Oregon where it was very aburdant. Ehrenberg’s
material was from the ‘‘ Columbia river,’’ and, possibly, from the
same source (John Day Valley). There is no difference between
the forms from Oregon and those from Atlantic City, except that
in the latter they are frequently corroded. See Schiitt, 102,
fig..180, where it is given as Tetracyclus (Castracania) Boryanus
(Pant. ) De Toni.
Nothoceratium ? parallelum (Grev.) De Toni. See under Am-
phitetras parallela E.
Triceratium Amblyoceros E. = Actinoptychus. See under Bid-
dulphia Americana,
Triceratium Brightwelli West = Ditylum.
Triceratium cinnamomeum Grev., M. M. J. (1863), 252;
Wolle, Pl. 75, fig. 11, Pl. 105, fig. 18 = Cestodiscus cinnamomeus
(Grey. ) Grun.
Triceratium crenatum Kitton = Ditylum.
Triceratium cruciatun Leud.-Fort. See under <Amphitetras
cruciata.
Triceratium Ehrenbergii Grun. = Ditylum.
Triceratium Gruendleri A. 8S. See under Amphitetras parallela.
Triceratium Harrisonianum Norm. and Grevy., T. M. S. (1861),
76, Pl. 9, fig. 9; Schmidt, Pl. 75, figs. 14-16, Pl. 81, figs. 8, 9,
ee ee eee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 731
17, Pl. 150, fig. 19. A species of Stictodiscus. Habitat, Cam-
peachy Bay. The var. solida of Walker and Chase (L. N. and
R. Diat.), Pl. 3, fig. 12, is also found. See under Amphitetras
parallela.
Triceratium heterostictum A. S. = Cestodiscus cinnamomeus
(Grev.) Grun. var. minor Grun.; Schmidt, Pl. 151, fig. 28;
ee syn; Pl. 126, fig. 2
Triceratium Marylandicum Br. = Actinoptychus.
Triceratium obtusum (E.) Cleve. See under Amphitetras par-
allela.
Triceratium parallelum (E.) Grev. See under Amphitetras
parallela.
Triceratium pileatum Grun. = Pseudo-Coscinodiscus, V. H.
Syn., Pl. 112, fig. 3.
Triceratium receptum A. S. (see under T. Shadboltiz) ; Schmidt,
Atlas, Pi. 81, fig. 10. Santa Monica, Cai. Apparently near the
triangular forms of Biddulphia levis or convexiuscula.
Triceratium Shadboltii L. W. Bailey, B. J. N. H. (1862),
242, Pl. 8, figs. 60, 61. Not North American. Habitat, San
Antonio Bay, Para river, Brazil. From the figures it would
appear to be asmall form of Triceratiuvin spinosum Bail. Schmidt’s
comparison of Triceratium receptum A. S. (Atlas, Pl. 81, fig. 10)
to this form is evidently a mistake.
Triceratium striolatum Wm. Sm. (not E. ) = Ditylum.
Triceratium undulatum E. = Ditylum.
PORPEIA Bail. (1861).
Valve oblong, tumid in the middle, more or less constricted
near the rounded ends, and divided by two transverse septa which
extend inward, curving and becoming parallel to the surface.
Analusis of Species.
Septa curved, . oc ye 8 ye Queadriceps.
Septa parallel to os of aie pee ee | 2 Quadrald.
1. Porpeia quadriceps Bail. (in lit.).
Porpeia quadriceps Bail., Prit., 800, Pl. 6, fig. 6. Var. intermedia
Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 95 bis, fig. 14 ; Schmidt, Pl. 142, figs. 46-52.
Biddulphia clavulata Ehr., Berl, Akad. (1861), 94 2
Valve rounded at .both ends, which are constricted into lobes
and inflated at the middle. Ends of valve more or less elevated.
732 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
From the junction of each process with the valve a septum extends
downward curving more or less toward the centre. Surface of
valve usually flattened and covered with granules, which are more
crowded on the processes, about 6 in .01 mm. Zonal view quad-
rangular, the connective zone having puncta in parallel rows. L.
of v. averages .029 mm.
Campeachy Bay; Gulf of Mexico.
2." Porpeia quadrata Grey.
Porpeia quadrata Grev., T. M.S. (1865), 53, Pl. 6, fig. 20; Schmidt,
Pl. 142, fig. 33 and figs. 53-56 (fig. as guadriceps).
Valve as in quadriceps, except that the processes are but slightly
elevated and the septa extend inward in a direction more or less
parallel to the edge of the valve as seen in zonal view. L. of v.
.082 mm. Connected with the preceding by intermediate forms.
The variations in the curves of the septa are determined by the
length of the valve.
Fossil at Santa Monica, Cal.
TERPSINOE Ebr. (1843).
Valve elliptical or triangular, more or less constricted by septa
which are prominent and in zonal view appear either straight or
curved at the ends. Surface reticulated or punctate, sometimes
indistinctly so. Closely allied to Anaulus, from which it is chiefly
distinguished by the character of the septa.
Analysis of Species.
Valves elliptical, reticulate or coarsely punctate:
Septa curved:
Surface not reticulate, . . . . . . . =. 4J. Musiea.
Surface reticulate. . . . . . . =. =. 2. tniermedia
Septa not curved, . 3. Brebissonii.
Valves elliptical or triangular, AdiGoetly ee
Puncta radiating from hyaline centre, . . . 4. Americana.
Puncta scattered except at angles and centre, 5. Nove-Cesaree.
1. Terpsinoe Musica Ehr.
Terpsinoé Musica Ehr., Amer., Pl. 3, 4, fig. 1; 3, 7, fig. 30; Mik.,
Pl. 34, 6, A. 8; Schmidt, Pl. 199, figs. 9-13, Pl. 200, figs. 7, 8.
Terpsinoé magna Bail., L. W. Bail., B. J. N. H., 340, figs. 46, 50-54.
Terpsinoé tetragramma Bail., l. ec.
Terpsinoé minima Bail., l. c.
Valve elliptical, with undulating sides and lobed at the ends,
=
a ee ee ee RS ee ae
EEE
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 733
divided by septa into three or more parts. Surface with coarse
puncta, about 8 in.01 mm., not radiating, much finer at the
ends. On the connective zone the puncta are about 12 in .01 mm.
An irregular nodular centre is usually visible. Frustule in zonal
view quadrangular, the septa with their inner margins curved and
thickened on the edges, presenting the appearance of musical notes.
Variable in size and in the divisions of the valves. L. of v.
averages .165 mm.
Marine and fresh water. Delaware river mua (Lewis); St.
Mary’s river, Ga. (Lewis). More common southward.
2. Terpsinoe intermedia Grun.
Terpsinoé intermedia Grun., Diat. Franz Jos. Land, 59 ; Schmidt, PI.
199, figs. 1-8 ; Pl. 200, figs. 1-6; Pl. 198, fig. 65.
Valve elliptical with undulating sides, and divided by septa into
severa] divisions. Surface punctate and reticulated, sometimes
indistinctly so, the reticulations irregular and unequal, about 2 or
3in.0l mm. Septa usually not thickened as in Musica, but bent
near the edge. The nodular centre is, in most specimens, quite pro-
nounced. IL. of v. .174 mm.
Mobile (Schmidt). Fossil at Nottingham (Brun), Atlantic
City (K. and §.), Asbury Park and Longport, N. J.
Terpsinoé intermedia latecavata (Brun) differs from the type in
outline, which is rhombic-elliptical with produced ends. Brun
remarks that this form belongs to Terpsinoé as much as to Anaulus
and is near 7. intermedia Grun. See on Anaulus (Terpsinoé)
latecavatus Brun, Diat. Jap., 16, Pl. 1, fig. 15.
Fossil at Nottingham (Brun).
3. Terpsinoe Brebissonii (Kiitz.) V. H.
Terpsinoé (Pleurodesmium) Brebissonii (Kiitz.) V. H., Diat., 453.
Pleurodesmium Brebissonii Kiitz., Bot. Zeit. (1846), 248 ; Schmidt, PI.
200, figs. 15-19.
Valve elliptical with undulating sides and slightly lobed at the
ends. Surface divided by septa into five compartments, with
puncta averaging 6 in .01 mm. L. of y. .066 mm.
Frustule in zonal view quadrangular, with septa capitate but not
appearing curved. Connective zone with fine puncta, about 15
in.01 mm. The frustules are said by De Brébisson to be con-
nected by ‘‘ threads,’? and by Van Heurck by “‘ short processes
in the form of feet,’’ which are best seen in specimens mounted in
734 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
situ and appear to belong to the membrane enveloping the frus-
tules.
Cedar Keys, Fla., and southward
4, Terpsinoe Americana (Bail,) Ralfs.
Tetragramma Americana Bail., N. Sp., 7, fig. 1.
Terpsinoé Americana (Bail.) Ralfs, Prit., 859 ; Schmidt, Pl. 200, figs.
9-13.
Valve with undulating outline, lobed at each end, and Jobed or
inflated at each side; divided by septa into three or more parts.
Surface with coarse but rather indistinct puncta, about 6 in .01
mm., which radiate interruptedly from a hyaline centre. Frus-
tule in zonal view quadrangular with septa extending about half-
way into the valve. L. of v, .059 mm.
Marine and fresh water. Hudson river; Rockaway, L. I.;
Charleston; St. Augustine; Tampa Bay (Bail.). Fossil at
Atlantic City and Harvey Cedars, N. J.
5. Terpsinoe Nove-Cesaree Boyer.
Hydrosera (Terpsinoé ?) Nove-Cesarew Boyer, Torr. Bull. (1895),
263 ; Lewis Woolman, Ann. Rep. Geol. Sur. N. J. (1894), Pl. 6, fig.
2; Le Diatomiste, 2, 207.
Valve triangular, sides concave. Angles broad at the base,
equally three-lobed. Surface flat, divided by straight septa separ-
ating the angles from the central part, which is for the most part
hyaline, except at the centre, where a few puncta are seen.
Angles with faint, scattered puncta, about 7 in .01 mm. Connee-
tive zone with faint puncta. W. of v. averages.062 mm. Fossil
in artesian well, Wildwood, N. J.; Cold Spring, L. I. (Reis)?
HYDROSERA Wallich (1858).
Valves quadrangular in zonal view and elliptical or triangular
in valve view. The angles are separated from the central part by
septa which extend inward but a short distance. There is usually
present on one side of each valve an indistinct mark. Surface of
valves granular or cellular.
Hydrosera triquetra Wall.
Hydrosera triquetra Wall., M. M. J. (1858), 251, Pl. 13, figs. 1-12 ;
Schmidt, Pl. 78, figs. 36-38; Deby, Jour. de Micrographie (1891),
Fl-al, fig.
Not Triceratium Javanicum Cleve.
Cleve (N. and L. K. D., 24) considers this form possibly a
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 735
variety of Hydrosera triquetra Wall. Both Deby and De Toni
consider the two equivalent. A slide in my collection of 7. Ja-
vanicum Cleve, mounted by Brun, shows the valve with unequal
granular markings, more closely resembling those of H. Wham-
poense than the markings of H. triquetra.
Valve triangular or elliptical, sides slightly convex, the angles
constricted by strong septa which separate them from the central
part. Surface with angular reticulations, about 6 in .01 mm. at
centre and increasing outward to about 5 in .01 mm., the ex-
tremities of the angles appearing hyaline. Inner surface or sec-
ondary layer of valve punctate, somewhat asin Biddulphia Favus,
but the puncta are coarser. Near one of the sides is frequently
seen below the surface of the valve a line with two or three gran-
ules, which Mr. Deby well remarks are ‘‘ often illusory.’’ The line
appears to be a projection of a siliceous plate from the cell wall and
is more easily seen if the valve is examined from the under side.
Pritchard’s figures (Inf., Pl. 6, figs. 8, 13) exaggerate the
** stigmata.’’ Zonal view quadrangular, the septa entering the
valve obliquely. Connective zone appearing hyaline. I have not
been able to find in the fossil forms the minute spines said to occur
at the extremities of the angles. L. of s. .099 mm. to.152 mm.
Fossil at Atlantic City, N. J., in the triangular form only.
Carpentaria Bay (Schmidt).
ANAULUS E. (1844), Em. V. H. (1881).
Valves more or less eiliptical or lunate, divided into three or
more parts by septa which usually constrict the margins. Surface
without; elevation, with puncta usually radiate from an occasionally
nodular centre or arranged in transverse lines.
Analysis of Species.
Valves elliptical:
Without central nodule, ~ « « « « «© Ll. Mediierraneus.
With central nodule:
Not beaked at extremities, . . . . . . 2. birostratus.
Beaked at the extremities, . . . . . . . 3. acutus.
Valves lunate (Eunotogramma) :
Puncta somewhat scattered, Le gy) ee onion LA TEES
uncta m transverse rows, .. . . . . « « oO. debsles.
736 ; PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
1. Anaulus Mediterraneus Grun.
Anaulus Mediterraneus Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 102, fig. 8-11.
Valve elliptical, rounded at the ends, divided by two septa into
three parts. Surface convex with scattered puncta, 5 or 6 in
-O1 mm. No central nodule visible. L. of vy. .066 mm.
Fossil at Atlantic City, Asbury Park and Longport, N. J.
Occasional specimens from Weymouth, N. J., show but one septum.
Anaulus Mediterraneus intermedins Grun.
Anaulus Mediterraneus var. intermedia Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 102;
fig. 9.
Valve constricted at the centre and at the ends; otherwise as in
A. Mediterraneus.
Fossil in the Miocene deposits of California and the Eastern
States.
There are several intermediate variations found in the Notting-
ham, Longport and other deposits, which lead to the conclusion
that the above forms might be united under one specific name.
2. Anaulus birostratus Grun.
Anaulus birostratus Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 22 bis, fig. 15; Pl. 103,
figs. 1-3.
Biddulphia birostrata Grun., Wien Verhandl. (1863), 158, Pl. 13, fig.
23.
Valve elliptical-lanceolate, usually constricted near the ends;
angles obiuse. Surface divided by septa into three parts, the cen-
tral one being square in outline, with scattered puncta, about 4
in .01 mm., more evident near the centre, at which a nodule is
usually quite apparent. L. of v. .105 mm.
Fossil in the Miocene deposits of California and the Eastern
States. Found also living on the shores of Peru, Virgin Islands,
West Indies, ete., and may, therefore, be looked for northward.
3. Anaulus acutus Brun.
Anaulus acutus Brun., Le Diatomiste, 2, 231, Pl. 20, figs. 15-18.
Valve more or less constricted at the middle with the ends pro-
duced. Near A. birostratus, from which it differs, according to
Brua, in having its valves, seen in zonal view, ‘‘ joined by their
extremities in the form of beaks.’’ Puncta scattered, 5 or 6 in
Ol mm, L, of v.-.105 mm.
Fossil at Santa Crux (Brun); Wildwood, N. J. (Brun); Re-
dondo Beach, Cal.
1900. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 737
4. Anaulus levis (Grun.) V. H.
Eunotogramma leve Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 126, figs. 6, 7, 9, 15;
Schiitt, fig. 171, A, B.
Valve lunate, with obtuse ends; and with or without slight
constrictions at the prominent septa, which usually number from
four to six. Surface marked with rather indistinet puncta, some-
what scattered, about 8 in.01 mm. Zonal view sharply quad-
rangular, the connective zone having transverse but somewhat
distant rows of fine puncta. L. of v. .046 mm.
Coast of North Carolina and Florida; stomachs of fish, coast
of South Carolina. Not common. Fossil at Buckshuten, N. J.;
Atlantic City artesian well, N. J.
5. Anaulus debilis (Grun.) V. H.
Anaulus debilis (Grun.), V. H. Syn., 202.
Hunotogramma debile Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 126, figs. 17, 18, 19.
Valve lunate with margins entire. Transverse septa more
numerous than in A. /evis. Surface with puncta in transverse
rows, about 15 in .01l mm. UL. of v. .049 mm.
Very near A. /evis, with intermediate forms.
West river, Conn.; Campeachy Bay (V. H.).
SPECIES EXCLUDED.
Anaulus Campylodiscus E., Prit., 859; Euodia Frauenfeldi
Grun., Wien Verhandl. (1863), 158, Pl. 14, fig. 19; Eunoto-
gramma Frauenfeldii Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 126, fig. 14;
De Toni, 892. Habirshaw refers this to Grunow’s form, appar-
ently because Grunow says (/. c.) that the latter appears to bear
some resemblance to the quite insufficiently described Anaulus
Campylodiscus. The reference is probably incorrect. Ehren-
berg’s locality is given as ‘‘ Bermuda’’ (Nottingham), and his
form may possibly be Biddulphia semicircularis (Br. ).
Eunotogramma amphioxys E., Berl. Akad. (1855), 302;
De Toni, 892. This form is given as equivalent to Biddulphia ?
lunata E., Berl. Akad. (1844), 77; Mik., Pl. 18, fig. 53; Kiitz.,
S. A., 138; Prit., 849. It is described in Prit. as ‘‘ three-lobed,
smooth, slightly curved, lunate, with subacute horns.’’ The form
is unknown to me.
HUTTONIA Gr. and St. (1887).
The generic diagnoses not yet having been made and the genus
neluding species unlike the only American form thus far discov-
738 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
ered, it is considered unnecessary to do more than give specific
characteristics. De Toni remarks that the ‘‘ genus is scarcely to
be preserved’’ and that ‘‘ perhaps it should be united with
Triceratium or with Odontella.’’ The processes appear like those
of Cerataulus, while the outline and septa partake of the character-
istics of Anaulus Mediterraneus.
Huttonia Reichardtii Grun.
Huttonia Reichardtii Grun., Just’s Jahresb. (1887), 279; Schmidt,
Pl. 116, fig. 4.
Cerataulus (?) Reichardtii Gran., Wien Verhand. (1863), 158, Pl. 13,
fig. 22.
Valve elliptical, divided by two somewhat irregular, transverse,
imperfect septa. Surface not elevated, punctate, the puncta about
9in .01 mm., in irregular, somewhat oblique rows. Near each
end, on opposite sides, an indefinite, truncate process extends
obliquely outward. Zonal view quadrangular. L. of vy. .049
mm. Ip a specimen from Wildwood, N. J., one of the pro-
cesses is obsolete.
Fossil in the Miocene deposits of Virginia (Grun.); Auantic
City (K. and S.); Weymouth, N. J.; Wildwood, N. J. Rare.
HEMIAULUS Ehr. (1844) Em. H. L. Smith.
Valves elliptical or triangular, with the ends or angles usually
extended into robust processes which are frequently mucronate.
Surface usually more or less depressed at the centre, but occasion-
ally divided by costze into rounded elevations, with puncta usually
coarse and prominent. Valves of same frustule not always equal.
Analysis of Species.
Valves triangular, . . 3. 2 . 2)... 0. Tolan
Valves elliptical:
Processesishort,. £0 oS Se ee eee
Processes long :
Valves costate:
Surface divided into elevations, . . . 3. polymorphus.
Surface not so divided, . . . . . 4 polycistinorum.
Valves not costate :
With minute spine near end of process, . . 5. Kittonii.
With spine on end of truncate process, . . 6. Monice.
Without spines, . . . . . . . . 7%. Californicus.
ee
Se
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 739
1. Hemiaulus Solenoceros (Ehr.)
Triceratium Solenoceros Ehr., Berl. Akad. (1844), 273 ; Schmidt, PI.
ii ole et. 96, fie, 11) = Pls 97; figs. 6; 7.
Triceratium ligulatum Grev., T. M.S. (1864), 91, Pl. 13, fig. 9.
Triceratium Kittonianum Grey., T. M. S. (1865), 8.
Valve triangular, with deeply concave sides and angles produced
into slender arms, from the extremities of which extend at right
angles truncated, ‘‘ hammer-like’’ processes which are usually
less than .01 mm. in height. Surface elevated at the nodular
centre, from which puncta about 5 in .01 mm., although somewhat
larger toward the extremities, radiate along the produced angles
in three or four nearly parallel rows. W. of v. .132 mm.
Fossil in the Miocene deposits of the Eastern States.
Greville, in his description of Tvriceratium Kittonianum, lays
stress on the presence of the pseudo-nodule which, he says, ‘‘ like
a hammer,’’ projects above and below the connective zone, and
also upon the hexagonal reticulations as distinguishing his species
from Triceratium Solenoceros Ehr. An examination of numerous
specimens from the Nottingham deposit shows that the reticulation
is more or less hexagonal in ajl and that there is considerable
variation in the amount of elevation of the processes, as is men-
tioned by Heiberg in his description of Trinacria Regina, due
occasionally to their being broken off, but quite often to their
imperfect development, it being somewhat difficult to find valves
in which all three processes are of exactly the same height. While
I have not seen the curved spines characteristic of Trinacria at the
apices of the ‘processes, yet the roughened edges occasionally appear
to indicate the possibility of their having been originally present,
and the close resemblance of the American forms to those de-
scribed by Heiberg under Trinacria leave no doubt, I think, of
their generic character. :
Trinacria is united to Hemiaulus in accoruance with the views
of Van Heurck, Brun and others, the difference being chiefly
that of outline. T'rinacria excavata Heib., which is given by some
authors as equivalent to this form, differs from it in having much
larger marginal reticulations. The Habirshaw Catalogue gives
Trinacria Regina Heib. as a synonym, but [ think this is also
distinct. . ‘the three forms are, however, closely allied.
740 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
2. Hemiaulus bipons (Ehr. ?) Grun.
Zygoceros bipons Ehr., Berl. Akad. (1844), 273.
Hemiaulus bipons (Ehr. ?) Grun., Fr. Jos. L., 13; V. H. Syn., Pl.
103, figs. 6-9.
Valve elliptical-lanceolate, acute at the ends, divided into three
nearly equal parts by two robust transverse costze. In zonal view
the surface is depressed at the centre, the sharply defined edges of
valve extending into a double keel along the short processes,
each of which bears a short, stout, incurved spine. Puncta
rounded, 3in.01 mm. L. of v. .075 mm.
Fossil in the Miocene deposits of the Eastern States, especially
at Nottingham and Richmond.
3. Hemiaulus polymorphus Virginicus Grun.°
Hemiaulus polymorphus Virginicus Grun., Fr. Jos. L., 14. Pl. B, fig.
46 ; Schmidt, Pl. 143, fig. 31.
Valve elliptical-lanceolate, with the margin apparently but not
really constricted by the transverse costee which, variable in num-
ber, divide the surface into rounded elevations, of which the cen-
tral is usually the largest and more elevated. Processes robust,
seldom more than half the length of valve, each with a strong
inwardly curved spine .01 mm. in length. Puncta 6 or 7 in
.01 mm., not in regular rows. IL. of v. averages .048 mm.
Fossil at Richmond, Va.
4. Hemiaulus polycistinorum Ehr.
Hemiaulus polycistinorum Ehr., Mik., Pl. 36, fig. 43, a—d ; Schmidt,
Pl. 143, figs. 23-29.
Valve elliptical-lanceolate, acute at the ends, divided by two or
more cost which are usually but slightly depressed. Surface
either depressed toward the centre or flat. Processes usually long
and robust, terminated by a short, stout, incurved spine. Puncta
rounded, pearly and prominent, especially on the processes, where
they are about 3 in .01 mm. L. of vy. averages .033 mm.
Nottingham (‘‘ Stratford Cliffs,’’ Ehr.).
5. Hemiaulus Kittonii Grun.
Hemiaulus Kittonii Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 106, figs. 6-9 ; Schmidt, Pl.
142, figs. 2-8. 11.
Hemiaulus sp. Kitton., J. Q. C. (1870), Pl. 14, fig. 2.
Valve elliptical, without costze. Surface slightly raised at centre,
* Schmidt states (Atlas, Pl. 143) that, according to Witt’s opinion, Hemi-
aulus polymorphus Grun. is identical with Hemiaulus Proteus Heib., and
that the latter name has the right of priority. The variety Virginicus
Grun. and other forms known as H. polymorphus differ from H. Proteus in
not having the margins constricted at the middle.
1900.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 741
with puncta in irregular rows on the valve, but parallel on pro-
cesses, about 10 in .01 mm. Processes slender, .049 mm. in
length, incurved, terminated by a fine straight mucronate spine, at
the base of which, on the outer edge of each process, a minute
spine projects. L. of v. .019 mm.
Vera Cruz. Rare.
6. Hemiaulus Monice Grun.
Hemiaulus Monice Grun., Fr. Jos. L., 10.
Valve elliptical. Processes robust, short and truncate, tipped
with a minute spine. Surface slightly elevated at the centre, with
puncta somewhat irregular, 4 in .01 mm., but becoming smaller
toward the ends of the processes, where they are about 7 in
O01 mm. L. of v. .022 mm.
Near H. symmetricus Grev. (T. M. S., 1865, 53, Pl. 6, fig. 22),
from which it differs in having the puncta less regularly disposed.
Fossil at Santa Monica, Cal.; Richmond (De Toni).
7. Hemiaulus Californicus Ehr.?
Hemiaulus Californicus Ebr., Mik., Pl. 33, 13, fig. 15.
Valve elliptical with robust processes. Costze wanting, but in
zonal view a slight depression is seen where the processes join the
surface. Puncta more or less hexagonal, about 4 in .01 mm., in
longitudinal rows. L. of v. .019 mm.
Fossi) in California (Ehr.); Richmond, Va.
It is with some hesitation that the above description of specimens
in my collection is attributed to H. Californicus, as Ehrenberg’s
figure is not sufficiently clear, but it is evident, I think, that the
figure is intended to represent a small form having slight depres-
sions at the junction of processes with the surface, and with puncta
in longitudinal rows. The only other species, probably, to which
the American forms can be referred is afinis Grun., which, how-
ever, may be identical with Californicus.
PLOIARIA Pant. (1889).
Valves elliptical-lanceolate, elevated at the centre, which is
separated from the ends by depressions which appear like coste.
Puncta coarse. In general the valves resemble those of Hemi-
aulus, but are without processes. Includes but one species.
48
742 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Ploiaria petasiformis Pant.
peared ? petasiformis Pant., Foss. Bacill. Ung., I, 48, Pl. 29,
PGtanie Sioa orm Pant., J. c. 2, Pl. 28, figs. 403, 405.
Valve elliptical-lanceolate or elliptical-rhomboidal, acute at the
ends, divided transversely by two lines, apparently costz, into
three parts, the two outer being flattened or slightly concave, while
the central part is convex. Surface with puncta about 6 in .01
mm., more or less radiating from an apparent nodule which is
usually excentric. In zonal view the valves appear petasiform and
are slightly unequal. L. of v. .059 mm. to .082 mm.
Fossil at Nottingham and Atlantic City. Not common. Some-
times mistaken for Hemiaulus bipons Ehr.
GRAYA Grove and Brun. (1892).
Valve elliptical, appearing hyaline under Jow magnification.
Surface undulating, with fine puncta chiefly along the longitudinal
axis and radiating from a nodular centre. Represented by one
species which is closely related to Eucampia.
Graya Argonauta Grove and Brun.
Grayia Argonauta Grove and Brun., Schmidt, Pl. 192, fig. 11.
Graya Argonauta Brun. and Grove, V. H. Diat., 458, fig. 187.
Valve elliptical or elliptical-lanceolate, with rounded ends.
Surface convex, elevated at the centre and ends, but usually
appearing beveled at the middle of the sides; subtly punctate near
the margin, the puncta becoming more prominent along the longi-
tudinal axis, where they are about 7 in .01 mm., radiating un-
equally from a nodular centre. Zonal view quadrangular. The
connective zone appears to increase by the addition of successive
plates which overlap each other. L. of v. .099 mm. to .181 mm.
Av. 1. of frustule .099 mm.
Fossil in the elliptical form at Nottingham and in the elliptical-
lanceolate form at Redondo Beach, Cal.
EUCAMPIA Ebr. (1839.)
Valves elliptical with undulating surface. In zonal view the
frustules appear more or less cuneiform and are joined together in
spiral chains. They are imperfectly siliceous, notably so in the
connective zones which are annulate.
. »
EERE EE
S)
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 74:
Eucampia Zodiacus Ehr.
Eucampia Zodiacus Ehr., Kreideth, Berl. Akad. (1859), 71, Pl. 4,
fiz. 8; Wm. Sm., Brit. Diat., 2, 25, Pl. 35, fig. 299; Pl. 60, fig. 299 ;
V. H. Syn., Pl. 95, figs. 17, 18 ; 95 dis, figs. 1, 2.
Hucampia? Virginica Grun., V. H. Syn., Pl. 95, bzs, fig. 6.
Eucampia Britannica Wm. Sm., Brit. Diat., 2, 25, Pl. 61, fig. 378.
Valve elliptical with rounded ends. Surface with slight eleva-
tions at the nodular centre and at the ends, the puncta, about
7 in .01 mm., radiating from the centre to the sides where they are
about 10 in .01 mm. Ends of valves hyaline. Zonal view cunei-
form, the connective zone annulate and very indistinctly punctate.
ie Gb wv. .115 mm,
Newport, R. I. (Lewis). Fossil in the Miocene deposits of the
Eastern States. Rare.
I have not seen the connective zone of the fossil form known as
Eucampia Virginica, but as the valves correspond exactly with
those of E. Zodiacus, the two are doubtless identical.
The distinction made by William Smith between the two forms,
E. Zodiacus and E. Britannica, is not specific, as spiral filaments
may be seen in which some frustules have their sides ‘‘ exca-
vated,’’ while others, in the same filament, have merely undulating
surfaces without any ‘‘ foramina between the joints.’’
LirHopEsMiIuM, a genus included by Van Heurck. De Toni and
others among the Biddulphoid forms, is here omitted as it appears
to have scarcely any of their characteristics. Its frustules are
united by a reticulated siliceous membrane, and in other respects
it appears to be more closely allied to Ditylwm.
INDEX.
Synonyms are in Italies.
PAGE PAGE
aculeatum Ebr. (Triceratium). 728 alternans Bail. ( Triceratium). 719
aculeatum Grev. (Triceratium) 728 alternans Ehr. (Amphipentas). 717
acuta (Ehr.) (Biddulphia) .... 706 AmblyocerosBr. ( Triceratium). 721
acutum Ehr. (Triceratium).... 706 AmblyocerosEhr.( Triceratium) 721
acutus Brun. (Anaulus)....... 736 Americana (Ralfs)(Biddulphia) 721
affinis Grun. (Hemiaulus)..... 741 Americana ( Bail.) Ralfs (Terp-
alternans H. L. Smith (Amphi- BINGO Wt ne eet os st care 8 734
GIST’ I OSC re eee ee 716 AmericanaBail.(Tetragramma) 734
alternans ( Bail.) V. H. (Biddul- Americanum Ralfs (Tricera-
TES? Ne Gone AR eee eee 719 BUUMIED ie eter eerste ein Lia tenet tart 721
ie
744 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
PAGE
amenum Grev. ( Triceratium) . 723
amphiceros cruciata Cleve (Rha-
PW ONEIS) rete atee tea eee 729
amphiceros tetragona Grun.
(@Rhaphoneis) hee et ie ee 729
amphioxys Ehr. (Eunotogram-
STIVA)) Weye eiocont> iol ts nya eee R eh a 737
AOE RUUTE ED beeen aio oda bo ATA 739
angulata A.S. (Biddulphia)... 705
angulata (A. 8.) De ‘Toni
CODOMtCLUG) : tire cree o's an aieiete 705
antediluviana Ebr. (Amphite-
DR UUSN iaicet eset eevee ie etoka tee erate 716
antediluviana (Ehbr.) V. H.
(Biddulphia) .....:-2...-%- 716
antediluwianum Grun. ( Tricer-
GLUT) 5 sto ete. 0.ovnixistasttatoyeys ee 716
Antillarum (Cleve) (Biddul-
DAI eins eich ny Acetate eee ote 722
Antillarum Cleve( Triceratium) 722
Antillarum (Cleve) De Toni
(Amphipentas) ........+... 7122
arctica (Br.) (Biddulphia) .... 714
arcticum Br. (Triceratium) ... 714
arcticum Cleve (Trigonium)... 714
Argonauta Grove and Brun.
CGTaya) es utes ene ee eee 742
Argus Boyer (Biddulphia)..... 701
arisata Shadb. (Amphitetras). 717
armatum Roper (Tri iceratium). 703
poe eae ) Bréb. (Biddul-
SE ae aeRO IONS ss Pa. 699
curt (Tan) Ne ( Odontella) 699
aurita Ehr. (Denticella)...... 699
auritum Lyng. Gees ..- 699
australis Mont. (biddulphia). 694
Baileyi Wm. Sm. (Biddulphia) 698
Balena (Ebr. ) Br. (Biddulphia) 713
Balena Ebr. (Zygoceros)..... 713
bicorne Cleve ( Triceratium)... 707
bicornis (Cleve) De Toni (Am-
DRULOLN GR) in cktearsin nialnin ee inl \=ias 707
Biddulphia Gray.............. 690
Biddulphia Ehr. (Denticella).. 694
Biddulphia Heib. (Tricerati-
ATE) Be eee ee ee tee 704
Biddulphiana (Smith) (Biddul-
PHILA) ns cos ie eaters apes sien 694
BiddulphianaSmith( Conferva) 694
Biddulphianum Ag. (Diatoma) 694
bipons (Ebr.?) Grun. (Hemiau-
Tas) ice seid sate Cs Boe one tard 740
bipons Ehr. (Zygoceros)....... 740
bipons Ehr. (Biddulphia)..... 729
biquadrata (Jan.) (Biddulphia) 717
biquadratum Jan. (Tricerati-
RUNG )Nuieest ania ste ism Uatatey alee 717
[1900.
PAGE
birostrata Grun. ( Biddulphia). 736
birostratus Grun. (Anaulus)... 736
Boryana Pant. (Salacia)....... 730
Brébissonii (Kitz) V. H. (Terp-
SiNGe) x. 5,3. seier ee ee oe 733
Brébissonii Kiitz (Pleurodes-
TUM) x. Set HS.) eee ee 733
brevinervium Grev. (Tricera-
LUND) oe ne eee 718
Brightwellii West ( Triceratium) 730
Brightwellii Ralfs (Huodia)... 726
Britannica Wm. Sm. (Hucam-
PIG) sz seas. isobar 743
Brittoniana K. and §. (Biddul-
phiay.52; 2, Ah ee 698
Browneanum Grev. (Tricera-
TUM) a sig fog <6) eran She erates ye ele 724
bullosum Witt (Triceratium).. 707
Californica (A. S.) (Biddulphia) 711
Californicum Grun. (Tricera-
US OTC ee 700
Californicus A.S. (Cerataulus) 711
Californicus Grev. (Stictodiseus) 741
Californicus Ehr. (Hemiaulus). 741
Campeachiana (Grun.) (Biddul-
Dhia)é s 4c <a wee he see es 707
Campeachiana (Grun.) De Toni
(Amphitetras) ....---.-.25 707
Campeachianum Grun. ( Tricer-
IRIE) ois otc i= us in a 707
Campylodiscus Ebr. (Anaulus) 737
capensis Grun. (Isthmia)...... 689
cinnamomeum Grey. (Tricera-
WIN) tans eet ee ge 730
cinnamomeus (Grev.) Grun.
(Cestodiscusy 3.....t" oo. aemiee 730
Cireinus (Bail.) V. H. (Biddul-
PHB)» 6c eas ee ee 713
Circinus Bail. (Zygoceros).... 713
clavulata Ehr. (Biddulphia).. 731
comptum Ebr. ( T'riceratium).. 706
condecora (Ehr.) (Biddulphia) 720
condecorum Ehr. (Triceratium) 720
consimilis (Grun.) (Biddulphia) 709
consimile Grun. (Triceratium) 709
convexiuscula (Grun.) (Biddul-
DD IG) ia .. cis oe cateny sear 709
converiusculum Grun. (Tricer-
GIN) SF wisi oe. de 709
Cookiana K. and § (Biddul-
PRIA) << ose Go Ne Re Se 702
Cookiana (K. and §.) De Toni
COdontela) << ~s0<nce.ceneee 702
costulata (Grun.) (Biddulphia) 72
crenatum Kitton (7riceratium) 730
crenulata Walker (Biddulphia) 709
ee ——eeeEE—E—EeEeEEs™= wr. ee
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 745
7 PAGE PAGE
‘3 cruciata Jan. and Rab. (Amphi- Harrisonianum Norm. and
. HERE RE, CE ene 729 Grev. (Triceratium)......-- 730
s cruciatum Leud.-Fort. (T7ri- hebetata (Grun.) (Biddulphia). 722
. CORULUUM RAR se Ac.ohs ses stoi 729 Heilpriniana (K. and S.) (Bid-
, crucifera Kitton (Amphitetras) 729 Cuil phia)) eran toac kere 715
crux Br. (Amphitetras)....... 716 Heilprinianum K. avd S. (170-
cuspidata L. W. Bail. (Amphi- COTUUUUWM) 2.002.205 ucenens 715
UANRUE)) co SOD: COR at ID Oe eee AUG later jolhieimmeneecocse odor 738
cuspidatum Jan. (Triceratium) 706 hemitropus Bail. (Zygoceros).. 705
hemitropa L. W. Bail. (Biddul-
' debile Grun. (Hunotogramma) 737 DRAG ice vase tots eihoo <i eae 705
; debilis (Grun.) V. H. (Anaulus) 737 /eteroporum Grun. (Tricerati-
decipiens Grun. (Biddulphia).. 716 UATE Ware hts <2 sista vel he eae eke 723
dubium Br. (Triceratium)..... 707 heteropora (Grun.) (Biddul-
dubia (Br.) Cleve (Biddulphia) 707 WOU chs nso she eae eel ee 7123
heterostictum A. S. (Tricera- 4
Edwardsii io i 4 UU Wiraroe stay craw: Vests oteteye etek rave Te
pray : es Sai a Cisdal 701 Hungaricus Pant. ( Cerataulus) 712
Edwardsii (Feb.) De Toni Muttonia Gr. & St... 2-2). 137
COUGTCIT) ae 701 Hydrosera Wall........------- i34
Ehrenbergii Grun. (Tricera-
ICU) ae 6 RE ee ae 730 impar A.S. (Triceratium).... 122
elegans (Grev.) (Biddulphia).. 717 indentatum K. and S. (Tricera-
elegans Grev. (Amphitetras)... 717 HOWDY one ho HOB Ca DOES Colas & Sic Teas
elegans (Grev.) Grun. (Tricer- inelegans (Grev.) (Biddulphia) 725
(UID a dieio 6 OC OO ED OS 717 inelegans Grev. (Triceratium) . 725
elegantula Grev. (Biddulphia). 695 intermedia Grun. (Terpsinée).. 733
ellipticus (Ehr.)Grun. (Tetracy- interpunctata (Grun.) (Biddul-
COIS) oot pec taeppS honor poee 730 NAD ode goad goon a uabe oc pel 722
elongata Menengh. (Biddul- interpunctatum Grun. ( Tricer-
TOLD) COs 55 Cea one 694 WIT op Cho ee BES STE ae 722
elongatum Grun. (Triceratium) 709 interrupta Boyer (Biddulphia). 702
enervis Ehr. (Isthmia)........ 689 interstiale Ag. (Diatoma)..... 694
enervis (Ehr.) Cleve (Jsthmiel- interruptum Bail.? (Tricerati-
Ki) bo cate Sd ce ge Sec een 689 TD AOE Oe toe Dae b te h SOO 728
GAMA NTs 1c 5/3 < 12 as) oc.es 743 irrequlare hebetatum Grun.
| Ghinterarenhilooueacasopoade 722
fasciata Wigand (Biddulphia) 694 Isthmia Ag......-.--+-+++++-- 688
Favus (Ehr.) V. H. (Biddul-
[Elie 3.5 Ae Sa owes oa eee oe eee 706 Johnsoni Ralfs (Triceratiwm).. 718
Favus Ebr. (Triceratium)..... 706 Johnsonianus var. A. S. (Cera-
fimbriatum Wall. (Triceratium) 706 UTIOTD owes colcrcierele Do aero Hath
Fischert A. S. (Triceratiwm).. 723 Jucatense Grun. (Triceratiwm) 725
formosum Br. (Triceratium).. 713
Frauenfeldii Grun. (Hunoto- Kainii (Schultze) (Biddulphia) 718
OPREGIDID) 6 a De ee OES 737 =©Kainii Schultze (Triceratium). 718
Frauenfeldii Grun. (Huodia).. 737 Keeleyi Boyer (Biddulphia) ... 708
Kittonianum Grev. (Tricera-
gibbosum B. and H. (Tricera- RMI): 4 bob OOOH DDE RDC 739
WTO) 8s OOD EI a eee 709 Kittonti A. 8S. (Lampriscus)... 709
gigas Ebr. (Biddulphia)...... 728 Kittonii Grun. (Hemiaulus)... 740
gracilis Ebr. (Denticella)..... 699
grande Br. (Triceratium)..... 706 leveGrun. ( Hunotogramma).. 737
grandis (Br.) Biddulphia...... 706 levis Ehr. (Biddulphia)....... 712
granulata Roper (Biddulphiay.. 702 Jevis (Ehr.) Ralls (Ceratau-
Graya Grove and Brun........ 742 IN Be cro lO ONS CAO OE Doe c 712
Grundlert A. S. (Triceratium) 730 levis Ehr. (Denticella)........ 712
746 PROCEEDINGS OF
PAGE
levis (Grun.) V. H. (Anaulus) 737
latecavatus Anaulus (Terp-
BINDE) meses. le hineetee e 733
liberum Ag. (Diatoma) .....-- 694
ligulatum Grev. (Triceratium). 739
Lindigiana Grun. and Eul.
(CEILI, CAT Ne OS Aon oe 689
Mithodesminms: 222 leer -- 2 ee 743
longicruris Grev. (Biddulphia). 698
longispina Grun. (Biddulphia). 699
longispina (Grun.) De Toni
(COdontotropisiy- sees. ee - 699
lunata Ehr. (Biddulphia?).... 730
magna Bail. L. W. (Terpsinoe) 732
margaritaceum B. and H. (Zy-
GOCETOB) sci cin = a pinoin vie win xin wins 699
margaritifera Shadb. (Denti-
COULD) eae is ce) sitet eee 695
Marylandicum Br. (Tricerati-
TDI GB SES PCR IS I Ma Be BS 731
Mediterraneus Grun. (Anaulus) 736
megastomum Br. (Triceratium) 706
membranaceum Br. (Tricera-
ORD S6 Settee oo See See 704
minima B. and H. (Isthmia)... 689
minima (B. and H.) De Toni
(TBERMUUOUO) sin een ts sine ne es 689
minima Bail. (Terpsinoé)..... 732
minuta Grev. (Amphitetras)... 716
Mobiliensis (Bail.) Grun. (Bid-
GUPTA) oven ne oS oe oor = 698
Mobiliensis (Bail.) Grun. (Den-
PRCRIE) ucts Pa nk wm etae ae oor et 698
Mobiliensis (Bail.) Ralfs (Zygo-
CONOR) sce tcc te ie eect eye eee as:
Mobiliensis Bail. ((Denticella ?)
DUDEET OR)» 60s oem oem 698
Monicie Grun. (Hemiaulus).... 741
Montereyi Br. (Triceratium).. 715
multicornis Grun. (Biddulphia) 697
multifrons Brun. (7riceratium) 718
muricatum Br. (Triceratium). 706
Musica Ehr. (Terpsinée)...... 732
nervosa Kiitz. (Isthmia) ...... 688
Novie-Cxesarerze Boyer (Terp-
SINGE)! cess ous as om creer £734
obliquata (Smith) (Isthmia)... 689
obliquata (Lyng) Ag. Cisth-
IW) ne. Cece ero eaten te 688, 689
obliquata Smith ( Conferva)... 689
obliquatum Lyng (Diatoma)688, 689
obliquum Grun. (Triceratium). 727
obscurum Grev. (Triceratiuwm). 721
THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
PAGE
obtusa (Kiitz.) Ralfs (Biddul-
Dis) «cereees eee eee eee 700
obtusa Kiitz. (Odontella)....-. 700
obtusa (Kiitz.) Grun. (Biddal-
plila)? 42> ek eee eee 712
obtusum Ehx. ( Triceratium) 720, 726
obtusum Br. (Triceratium).... 724
occidentalis Bail. (Zygoceros).. 698
orbiculata (Shadb.) (Biddul-
phia}: «2 aco: roer eee 709
orbiculatum Shadb. (Tricera-
tium)
orientale B. and H. (Tvricera-
HUM) eS aes see 706
ornata Shadb. (Amphitetras).. 717
ovalis (A. S.) (Biddulphia).... 712
ovalis A. S. (Cerataulus)..... 712
pallidum Grev. (Triceratium). 718
parallela Ehr. (Amphitetras).. 729
parallelum (Ebr.) Grev. (Tri-
COT CAUIL) oon son ieee 729
parallelum (Grev.) De Toni
(Nothoceratium?).......... 730
Parma Bail. ( Triceratium).... 728
parvula (Jan. and Rab.) (Bid-
dalphia)'....-..< 0-5 >see eee 725
pareoula Jan. and Rab. (Amphi-
LOUTAB), smiles women cae exes eee 725
Pentacrinus Ehr. (Amphipen-
HbB yi ais mo ale eee See 717
Pentacrinus (Ehr.) (Biddul-
PDIR) nas sds ee bien ae 717
Pentacrinus (Ebr.) Wall. (T77ri-
COT GHA) 52 >» is a ee ee vai
Peruviana Grun. (Biddulphia). 708
perpusilia Bail.? (Biddulphia). 728
petasiformis Pant. (Ploiaria)... 742
pileatum Grun. (Triceratium). 731
Pileolus Ebr. (Triceratium)... 727
Pileus Ebr. (Triceratium)..... 727
Pioiaria Pants. :.2 s<cae ee ee 741
polycistinoram Ebr. (Hemiau-
Tus) koe poue oe tte eee 740
polymera Ehr. (Denticella).... 695
polymera Kitz. (Odontella)... 695
polymorpha Mont. (/Jsthmia).. 712
polymorpha Kitz. (Odontella) 7i2
polymorphus Virginicus Grun.
(Hemianlus) <<... assesses 740
ponderosum Edwards ( Tricer-
AUN ie es 3 Soe nee eee 7
Porpeia Bail. .5. <><. cc<neseap 731
pulchella.Gray (Biddulphia).. 694
punctata (Br.) V. H. (Biddul-
DNV) G55 Sean ee ne ee 722
punctatum Br. (Zriceratium).. 724
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES
s PAGE
punctatum Wall. (Triceratium) 722
pustulata Brun. (Biddulphia).. 697
quadrangulare Grev. (Tricer-
TEESLD TT ae POE EEO 715
‘quadrata Grev. (Porpeia)...... 732
quadriceps Bail. (Porpeia)..... 731
‘quadricornis (Grun.) (Biddul-
THE) ob > od 6.65, cu Re AeIEE Eee 713
quadricornis Grun. (Zygoceros) 713
quadrinotatum A. 8. (Tricer-
HOU od AB ODEO OLE TOC Le 717
quinguelocularis Kitz. (Bid-
CUYPTIOT) ob ees ARCA ASE OEE 694
radiatus (Ehr.) Jan. and Rab.
((AGITECTE) 2 Aaae oa 705
Tadiatus (Wm. Sm.) Roper
CBiddullphia) eae = sce «= 705
radiatus Wm. Sm. (Hupodis-
Bes) cheated ee 705
radiatus Jan. (Auliscus)...... 705
radiatus Bail. (Zygoceros) .... 713
receptum A. S (Triceratium).. 731
Reichardtii Grun. (Huttonia).. 738
reticulata Roper (Biddulphia). 7
reticulata (Roper) De Toni
COdombeua Dek ae wss es ss - 708
Reticulum (Ehr.) (Biddulphia) 7
Reticulum Ebr. (Triceratium). 724
Rhombus (Ehr.) Wm. Sm. (Bid-
dulphia)
Rhombus Ehr. (Denticella).... 704
Rhombus Ebr. (Zygoceros).... T04
Rhombus (Ehr.) Ralfs (Tetra-
GACHID)) 22 sea oe coeeeaeee 730
Robertsiana (Grev.) (Biddul-
TLL cn po 707
Robertsianum Grev. (Tricer-
OPI ec SLE Ae 707
robustum Grev. (Triceratium). 723
Roperiana Grev. (Biddulphia). 700
Roperiana (Grev.) De Toni
CGioritellagies.~ -.o2i-. 3+ »- 700
scitulum Br. ( Triceratium).... 706
-sculpta (Shadb.) V. H. (Biddul-
phia coc cttens coogoe soem 724
sculptum Shadb. ( Triceratium) 724
secernendum <A. S (Tricera-
GAIT) Peinctret fot ar one. 23) elas ova's/2 723
semicirculare Br. (Tricera-
UID) x0 RS AO AO COE 726
semicireularis (Br.) (Biddul-
“TT | peu a ena 726
seticulosa Grun. (Biddulphia).. 703
OF PHILADELPHIA. 147
PAGE
seticulosa (Grun.) De Toni
Dentireliayee eet eee 703
setigerum Bail. (Triceratium). 703
septemlocularis Kiitz. (Biddul-
IDE GEOR OA De COT IG Bese 694
serratum Wall. (Triceratium). 703
Shadboltianum Grev. (Tricera-
LOLI |S Sie) AIOE OE CERISE 709
Shadboltii L. W. Bail. (Tricera-
UCU) Ase oe ea ae 731
Shulzei Boyer ( Biddulphia) ... 726
simplex Shad. (Denticella).... 695
Smithii (Ralfs) V. H. (Biddul-
DHA). semetsets tases Se ae aie 705
Smithii Ralfs (Cerataulus).... 705
Solenoceros (Ehr.) (Hemiaulus) 739
spinosa (Bail.) (Biddulphia)... 7
spinosum Bail. (Triceratium). 7
Strabo A.S. (Triceratium).... 706
striolatum Wm. Sm. (Tricera-
WWM) as 5 So ede as 731
striolatum Ehr. (Triceratiwm). 704
subequa Kitz. (Biddulphia).. 712
subzequa (Kiutz.) Ralfs (Biddul-
phia)
subequa Kitz. (Odontella).... 700
subcornutum Grun. (Tricera-
EVUND ces «ise diel avs o Ssae ee ee
suborbicularis Grun. (Biddul-
phia)
suborbicularis (Grun.) De Toni
(Denticella)
subrotundata (A. S.) (Biddul-
phia
subrotundatum A.S. (Tricera-
tium)
Tabellarium (Br.) (Biddulphia)
Tabellarium Br. (Triceratium)
tenuis L. W. Bail. (Biddulphia)
Terpsinoe shri tein tee
tessellata (Grev.) (Biddulphia)
tessellatum Grev. (Triceratium)
Testudo (Brun.) (Biddulphia) .
Testudo Brun. (Tabulina).....
tetragramma Bail. ( Terpsinoé)
thermalis (Menengh.) Ralfs
(Cenataulis yas. Soest 2
thermalis Menengh. (Melosira)
thermalis Menengh. (Plewro-
siTa)
Thumii (A. 8.) (Biddulphia).. 712
Thumiit A.S. (Cerataulus).... 712
transversa Wigand (Biddulphia) 694
tridactylum Br. ( Triceratiuwm) 703
tridentata Ehr. (Biddulphia).. 695
tridentata Ehr. (Denticella)... 695
718
718
698
732
723
723
726
726
732
712
712
712
748 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
PAGE
tridens Ehr. (Biddulphia)..... 695
tridens Ehr. (Denticella)...... 695
trilocularis Kiitz. (Biddulphia) 694
trinacria L. W. Bail. (Biddul-
DIGS): se os eae Ree Me ee 698
trinacria Bail. (Denticella).... 698
tripartitum Grun. (Tricera-
TUES Ree tee Sen eee 728
triquetra Wall. (Hydrosera)... 734
trisulca (Bail.) (Biddulphia)... 719
trisulcum Bail, (Triceratium). 719
tumida (Ehr.) Roper (Liddul-
(DALAM fee tes atte Ath es Sie 702
tumida Ehy.? (Denticella)..... 702
tumidum costulatum Grun.
(Lricenatium) 2. eee ee 720
Tuomeyi (Bail.) Roper (Bid-
CUI Ass eines ssi dbt as eee 695
Tuomeyt Bail. (Zygoceros).... 695
turgida Ebr. (Denticella)..... 711
turgiuda Kiitz. (Odontella)..... 711
turgida (Ebr.) Ralfs (Biddul-
DIED) Meee Seats ahem i Mt 711
turgida (Ehr.) Wm. Sm. (Bid-
dulphia). 22.2 ute~ 2 sbse ce ee gla
turgida (Wm. Sm.)? De Toni
(Odontellg) S557. Rpt ves 711
(1900.
PAGE.
turgidus Ehr. (Cerataulus).... 711
uncinatum A.S. (Triceratium) 728
unifasciata Wigand (biddul-
DIAG) ) Mo otis ot J ee ee 694
undulatum Ehr. (Tricerativm) 731
validum Grun. (Triceratium). 719
oaribile Br. (Triceratium)..... 719
venulosum Grey. (Triceratium) 718-
verrucosa Boyer (Biddulphia).. 710
vesiculosa (Ag.) (Biddulphia).. 716
vesiculosa Ag. (Isthmia)...... 716.
resiculosum Ag. (Diatoma).... 716
Virginica Grun. (Eucampia).. 743
Wilkesii B. and H. (Amphite-
IPUR) ann wie le ae eae eee 714
Wilkesit B. and H. (Tricera-
PRU) oe es bie hee 714
Woolmanii K. and §. (Biddul-
VIRB) > cp aweite aan Se eee 730
Zodiacus Ehr. (Eucampia)..... 743.
zonatulatum Grev. (Tricera-
TUM) aris ek 25 2 - sade CS 725.
—
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 749
DECEMBER 4.
Mr. CHARLES Morris in the Chair.
Eighteen persons present.
DEcEMBER 11.
The President, SamugeL G. Drxon, M.D., in the Chair.
Fourteen persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ A New Weasel from Western Pennsyl-
vania,’’ by Samuel N. Rhoads, was presented for publication.
DECEMBER ,18.
Mr. CHarutes Morris in the Chair.
Twenty-nine persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Crustacea from the Cretaceous Formation of
’ New Jersey,’’ by Henry A. Pilsbry, was presented for publication.
DECEMBER 27.
Christmas Day falling on Tuesday, under the revised code of
By-Laws the meeting was held on the succeeding Thursday.
The President, SAamurL G. Drxon, M.D., in the Chair.
Twenty-six persons present.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication:
“‘ Crustacea and Pycnogonida Collected during the Princeton
Arctic Expedition of 1899,’ by Dr. A. E. Ortmann.
750 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1900.
‘ Report on the Echinoderms Collected off the West Coast of
Greenland by the Princeton Arctic Expedition of 1899,’’ by Wal-
ter M. Rankin.
‘© A List of Fishes from St. Croix, West Indies,’’ by Henry
W. Fowler.
The following were ordered to be published:
=~T
Or
poe
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
A NEW WEASEL FROM WESTERN PENNSYLVANIA.
BY SAMUEL N. RHOADS.
One of the most unlooked-for results of recent systematic field
study of smaller mammals inhabiting the settled and populous
areas of the Eastern States is the discovery of a small weasel in the
regions contiguous to the city of Pittsburgh. Fortunately three
specimens have been secured, each representing 2 phase of pelage
characteristic of the seasonal moult. This weasel is allied to the
minute Arctic and Canadian Putorius rixosus Bangs,’ being some-
what larger than rizosus and Jess than half the size of P. cicognani,
the smallest species hitherto recorded from the Middle States. It
may be diagnosed as follows:
Putorius allegheniensis sp. nov. Allegheny Weasel.
Type, No. 6195, adult, Museum of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia. Captured by Robert Hawkins, near
Beallsville, Washington county, Pa., about the year ‘1885 or
1886.
Description of the Type.—In size and color it resembles Putorius
rixosus Bangs from the Saskatchewan, B. A., but larger, darker
and more thinly furred. Skull broader and flatter, with inter-
orbital space high, tumid and constricted posteriorly. No supra-
orbital ridges. .
Color (summer pelage).—Upper parts walnut-brown, abruptly
separated from the pure white of under parts, the line of demar-
cation running from nasal pad along border of upper lip, through
base of whiskers, just below base of ear, along median lateral line
of neck to anterior base of shoulder; thence down anterior pro-
file of foreleg to elbow, rising thence along posterior profile of leg
to and along median lateral body line to flank, thence to heel and
posterior thigh as on foreleg, rising and encircling anal region to
lower base of tail. Tail colored like back with some scattering
white hairs at tip (extreme tip apparently missing). Forefeet and
1 Proc. Biol. Soc. Washn., 1896, p. 21.
752 ' PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
lower foreleg white; hind feet white only on toes and inside bor-
der. Whiskers mixed brown and white. ‘The color areas occu-
pied respectively by brown and white are almost exactly divided
in equal parts. Compared with the type of rizosus and another
summer specimen from Moose Factory, Hudson Bay, the type of
allegheniensis is much darker and duller hued. .
Measurements (of type, a well-mounted specimen, but undoubtedly
stretched ).—Total length, 199; tail without hairs of tip, 19;
hind foot, 20. Skull: Basilar length, 29; zygomatic width,
15.3; mastoid width, 14; interorbital constriction, 6; greatest
mandibular length, 16.5.
Description of two other specimens. —No. 4279, Coll. of S. N.
Rhoads; young adult (sex undetermined), cotype, in late winter
early pelage, collected by aforesaid R. Hawkins, near Beallsville,
Washington county, Pa., about the year 1885 or 1886.
Color.—Everywhere pure white except on head, where brown
summer fur is appearing, also about 15 dark brown and blackish
hairs at tip of tail.
Measurements (specimen is a mummy, preserved without skin-
ning, having been eviscerated, poisoned and wired to a stand erect
on its haunches. On this account its tail and body measurements
are of real value after allowing an increase of five per cent. for
shrinkage of intervertebral tissue).—Total length, 145; tail ver-
tebre, 22; hind foot, 20. Skull: Basilar length, 28; zygomatic
width, 14.7; greatest mandibular length, 15.8.
No. °17, adult female, Coll. of the Carnegie Museum, collected by
William Seager, near Leetsdale, Allegheny county, Pa., April 25,
1898. This interesting specimen is in the shape of a cabinet skin,
with anterior half of skull attached to lips and without sex mark or
measurements on label. 1 have determined its sex by the series of
teats, evidently those of a female having nursed young the previous
season. The skull and teeth indicate full maturity. The pelage
is changing from winter to summer garb, this change appearing to
have but recently begun.
Color.—White, except an irregular mottled stripe of brown,
well defined on head between nose, eyes and ears, narrowing along
neck and back with wider areas at shoulders and hips and dis-
appearing on hind rump. Tail white with about 20 brown-black
? All measurements in millimeters.
ae
es er
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF FHILADELPHIA. 753
hairs at tip almost concealed by surrounding white hairs. A faint
mottling of brown is appearing on all four legs and the upper hind
feet.
Measurements (skin stretched).—Total length, 175; tail, 22;
hind foot, 20.
The two Beallsville specimens were kindly loaned to me October
27, 1899, by Mr. Jacob Nease, of Washington, Pa., in response
to a circular, widely distributed in the State, requesting informa-
tion concerning certain rare mammals. The size of these tiny
weasels, so different from anything to be expected from that region,
raised the question of their being a genuine Pennsylvania product,
and I wrote Mr. Nease for particulars. In answer, Mr. James 8.
Nease, who conducted the entire correspondence on the subject for
his father, Jacob Nease, to whom the specimens belonged, sent
me the following letter:
‘* Beallsville, Pa., 11-6-1899.
‘*Mr. Jas. S. NEASE,
‘© WASHINGTON, Pa.
«¢ Dear Sir :—In reply to your letter of 2d inst., I have con-
sulted father in regard to the weasels which he sent your father to
have stuffed. They were caught under dead-falls set for skunks,
and of ccurse were wild as any weasel. Father remembers well of
catching them and sending them up, and got one or two he did
not serd, but has not seen any since then, some ten or fifteen
years ago, if memory serves him right. They were caught when
the bounty was on hawks and owls.* Very truly,
<¢ J. W. Hawxins.”’
While there seemed to be no question as to the statements of the
gentlemen above mentioned, the publication of them was deferred
nearly a year, when I was unexpectedly confronted with the speci-
men in the collection of the Carnegie Museum. As it had been
taken along the Ohio river, only a few miles below Pittsburgh, by
a resident collector regularly employed by the Museum, it was
accepted as conclusive evidence that these weasels are indigenous
and living in those parts.
3 This bounty act was passed in May, 1885, and repealed about eighteen
months later.
754 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Regarding the affinity of allegheniensis with rixosus, it may be
stated that the nearest localities from which the latter has been
recorded are Moose Factory, Ontario and Pembina, Minnesota, the
latter being the specimen mentioned by Prof. Baird under ‘‘ Puto-
rius pusillus Dekay’’ in the Pacific R. R. Reports. It will be
seen that there is an immense stretch of territory between these
places and Pittsburgh, besides the great difference in the faunal
position of the localities. That the habitat of these weasels shall
prove to be continuous through the Appalachian system from
Ontario southward is not impossible, but that specimens from the
intermediate country have as yet escaped notice is indeed strange.
The facts now known to us as to the differences between rixosus
and its southern ally in size, cranial proportions and color are
sufficient to indicate specific values. It is singular that all the
known specimens of rixosus and allegheniensis appear to be
females, though in every case the sex has not been absolutely
determined. If any of them are males the great difference in size
between the sexes, so notorious in all other species, is not apparent
among the least weasels. Mr. Bangs, in his monograph of these
mammals, gives us a special character of rixosus: ‘‘ Tail not
tipped with black ° —but I find that his type of that species has
several distinctly blackish hairs among the brown ones at the tail
tip, so also has the specimen examined from Moose Factory. I am
indebted to the Messrs. Nease for consenting to part with the type,
on condition that it be preserved in the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia, as well as for their cooperation in this in-
vestigation. Mr. Outram Bangs generously loaned me the two
specimens of rixosus mentioned above, one of them belonging to
the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy of Cambridge, Mass.
~l
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
NOTES ON CHIROPTERA.
BY JAMES A. G. REHN.
In the collection of Brazilian mammals made by Mr. H. H.
Smith on the Naturalists’ Exploring Expedition to southern Brazil
(1882-1883), and bequeathed to the Academy by the late Prof.
E. D. Cope, are some bats which are of great interest. Several
specimens of the same group from different sources were included
in the bequest, and together they form a number of interesting
subjects for close examination, the results of which seem to war-
rant publication.
Eptesicus arge (Cope).
peters arge Cope, American Naturalist, XXIII, p. 131, February,
Type No. 4899. Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.
Sao Joao, Brazil. Collected by H. H. Smith.
The type of this species is in a fair state of preservation, and a
comparison with the figures and descriptions of other South Ameri-
can forms, like Ailarii, dorianus and montanus, has convinced me
that it should be considered a very distinct species. The form of
the ear and the tragus, besides the extent of the antibranchial
membrane, are distinctive. The dental characters I cannot com-
_ pare satisfactorily, as few of the allied species have the teeth fig-
ured or weil described.
The placing of this in the genus Eptesicus is in accordance with
Lajos.?
Measurements :
MM.
Forearm, 42.2
Tibia, . Oe es Ree 15.5
ais ee ci. ; 15
Width of ear (flattened), . 9.5
Skull: Total length, Le
Basilar length, : 14.6
Greatest zygomatic breadth, Lit
1 Magyarorszag Denevéreinek Monographiaja (Monographia Chiropter-
orum Hungariev), pp. 206-208.
756 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Measurements : MM.
Skull : Depth of brain-case, EP. CRP AS
Depth'at first premolar, “9 2 ee
Length of palate, 6.9
Width of palate (including molars), z
Uroderma bilobatum Peters.
Uroderma bilobatum Cope, American Naturalist, X XIII, p. 130, Feb-
ruary, 1889.
Two specimens, Nos. 4883 and 4884. Sao Joao, Brazil. Col-
lected by H. H. Smith. The genera Uroderma and Dermanura
were separated from Artibews on the number of molars present.
Dobson’ states regarding this: ‘‘ The species of Artibeus have been
divided into three subgenera according to the presence or absence
of the minute last upper or lower molars; but as I find that the
presence of these small last molars, certainly of the last upper
molars, is variable even in the same species, it is evident that this
character can scarcely be considered of much importance.’? On
examining specimens of planirostris from southern Brazil, I find
that in one specimen the last upper molar is present on one side
and absent on the other, and in another both last upper molars
are missing. While the last upper molars may always be present
in young specimens of planirostris, the fact that they are sometimes
absent in the adult forces itself upon us. An examination of a
large series of bats of these three genera would probably show
that the presence or absence of the last molars is of secondary
consequence.
Peters’ founded the genus Uroderma on what he supposed was
the Phyllostoma personatum of Wagner, but later he concluded
the description of that species was too indefinite to be determined,
the description being equally applicable to specimens of either
Vampyrops lineatus or Chiroderma villosum. The name Uroderma
bilobatum was applied to the new species,‘ and accordingly the
type of the genus Uroderma is Phyllostoma personatum Peters (nec
Wagner) = Uroderma bilobatum Peters. The species Phy/lostoma
planirostre Spix was considered by Peters to be the same as Artid-
eus perspicillatus, but Dobson placed planirostris and bilodbatum in
- Catal. Chirop., p. 514.
3 Monatsber. K. Akad. Wissensch. Berlin, 1865, p. 588.
* Monatsber. K. Akad. Wissensch. Berlin, 1866, p. 394.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 757
the same subgenus solely on the number of molars, while the
cranial characters of the latter seem to have never been examined.
Prof. Cope did not remove the skulls of the two specimens in
the collection and the only reference to the skull of this species I
ean find is that of Thomas,* who simply makes the following com-
parison in describing Artibeus glaucus: ‘Skull . . . . almost as
elongated as that of A. bilobatus, and sharing with that species in
the less abrupt rise of the brain-case above the level of the muzzle;
but while in A. bilobatus it is the muzzle that is raised, in A.
glaucus it is the brain-case which is depressed, so that there is no
really close resemblance between the two.”’
A study of specimens of both dbilobatwm and planirostris shows
that the latter should be removed generically from the former, and
a comparison with perspicillatus gives no good reason for separating
it from Artibeus, the simple presence or absence of the last upper
molar being of too uncertain value.
A table of the characters of the two genera (disregarding the
number of molars entirely) would be as follows:
Genus URODERMA Peters.
Type—Phyllostoma personatum Peters (nec Wagner) = Uro-
derma bilobatum Peters.
Skull elongate, weasel-like, the anterior portion little lower than
the brain-case, the height (from centre of base of second pre-
molar) being decidedly greater than the width of the postorbital
constriction. Horseshoe laterally with two rounded lobes. Species
medium-sized.
Genus ARTIBEUS Leach.
Type—<Artibeus jamaicensis Leach = Vespertilio perspicillatus
_ Linneus.
Skull thick and massive, the anterior portion depressed, the
height being less than the width of the postorbital constriction.
Horseshoe without lateral lobes.
Species large (except A. glaucus Thomas).
° Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1893, p. 336,
49
758 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1900:
Comparative Cranial Measurements :
Artibeus Artibeus Uroderma
perspicil- planiros- bilo-
latus, tris, batum,
No. 5705, No. 4875, No. 4883,
Jamaica. Chapada. Sao Joao.
‘Total lencehy. >. enue: Vek ate LO 30 24
Basilar length, — ee th we eee gD 24 21
Greatest zygomatic width, oe tay ce eo 19 circa 12.6
Length of palate (from anterior face
of incisors), 13.6 16 13
Breadth of palate a and teeth at first
maglar,.; »*. oh seed ogee Cem pleas 13.25 9.5
Depth of brain- “Case, 2b 11 12.1 9.1
Depth at second premolar, | es 7 ff
‘Width of posturbital constriction, . 7.2 7.5 6.1
Artibeus eva (Cope).
Dermanura eva Cope, American Naturalist, X XIII, p. 130, February,
1889.
Types—Nos. 5783 and 5784. St. Martins, West Indies. Col-
lected by Dr. R. E. Van Rijgersma. <A study of the types of this
species proves that Prof. Cope gave them a rather superficial
‘examination when he placed them in the genus Dermanura, his
record of the molars present being incorrect. The skull of No.
5,783, which I have removed, shows that the specimen evidently
possessed six lower molars, as is generally considered to be the
case with Artibeus, one being in position and the alveolus of the
other being unabsorbed.
I can add little to the original description, the only point which
seems to have escaped attention being the shallow emargination of
the interfemoral membrane, which is of much greater expanse than
either perspicillatus or planirostris, The form of the nose-leaf
has induced me to place this species in Artibeus, the species of
which all seem to possess a nose-leaf which is little higher than
broad, while that of Dermanura is twice as high as broad.
Measurements :
Specimen No. 5784:
Total length, «a. oc.odpph? se “Pe ee
Foresrm,. .<.<0) of cS ee ee ee “te
A N10) a ele wend eS te r e 5
Footy. x) s'g"\ig 3) Sep ee ee a -
Ears: nein © se Ga et a, Se Se ve
Width of e ear (flattened), . et ee ee Pr vhs
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 759
Measurements :
Skull of specimen No. 5783:
‘Total length, . Mie side. 1) 32 tes) “all eeata 92. Oe
Basilar length, . . . x) Fecha depoe Aaa “ome Bele denon
Greatest zygomatic breadth, Ses. cap) oo ee ee eed led <
Depth of brain-case, . ed ORE” ce came “ote On EN kee
Depth of second premolar, Re Se tebe od Cee Pac A oF
Length of palate, . . i es ®t 5 eee
Breadth of palate (including molars), . serve ot Oe Ole) gee
Sphzronycteris toxophyllum Peters. Sitzungberichte der K. P. Akademie der
Wissenschaften, Berlin, 1882, pp. 988-990, taf. XVI.
* The discovery of an alcoholic specimen of this very remarkable
bat among the material received from Prof. Cope is of interest.
It was collected at Pebas, Peru, by John Hauxwell, and was not
identified by Cope. The specimen agrees perfectly with Peters’
description and plate, and forms a link in the chain of distribu-
tion. The type came from an unknown locality, and the only
other specimen of which we have information is one collected at
Merida, Venezuela. °
6Thomas, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7), I, p. 318.
760 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1900.
The following annual reports were read and referred to the
Publication Committee :
REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY
The average attendance at the meetings during the past year
amounts to 21. A quorum was lacking three times during the
heat of midsummer, while the largest number present at any ses-
sion was 112. Verbal communications have been made at nearly
all the meetings, but comparatively few have been reported for
publication, many of those dealing’ with original observations
being embodied in the formal papers presented by title and printed
as part of the Proceedings when reported on favorably by the
Publication Committee.
Among those who have thus added to the interest of the meet-
ings are Messrs. George and William §. Vaux, Jr., Johnson,
Woclman, Pilsbry, Stone, Calvert, Sharp, Saunders, Chapman,
T. H. Montgomery, Rand, Willcox, Goldsmith, Holt, Skinner,
Harshberger, U. C. Smith, Keeley, C. Morris, Balch, Dixon, A.
E. Brown, Carter, Hamilton, Holman, J. C. Morris, McElwee,
Meyer, Lyman, A. Miller, Seiss, Palmer and Mesdames Bladen
and Burgin.
One hundred and eleven pages of the Proceedings for 1899, with
five plates, and five hundred and ninety-six pages of the volume
for 1900, with twenty-three plates, have been issued, together with
the third number of the eleventh volume of the quarto Journal, the
latter consisting of one hundred and thirty pages and two plates.
For all but the plates and twenty-three pages of this part of the
Journal we are indebted to the liberality of Mr. Clarence B. Moore,
whose contributions in continuation of his papers on Southern
mound burials are profusely illustrated by figures in the text.
Fifty papers have been presented for publication, as follows:
Henry A. Pilsbry 14, Witmer Stone 2, J. Perey Moore 2, Thomas
Meehan 2, Henry W. Fowler 2, R. W. Shufeldt 2, H. A. Pils-
bry and E. G. Vanatta 1, Edward G. Vanatta 1, William and
George Vaux, Jr., 1, Charles T. Simpson 1, C. F. Saunders 1,
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 761
Vernon L. Kellogg and Shinkai I. Kuwana 1, William Healy
Dall 1, T. D. A. Cockerell 1, T. D. A. Cockerell and Wilmatte
Porter 1, Charles S. Boyer 1, Annie Bell Sargent 1, Charles Mor-
ris 1, Nathan Banks 1, T. Wayland Vaughan 1, Frank C.
Baker 1, Charlotta J. Maury 1, Alexander McElwee 1, Henry
€. Chapman 1, Arthur M. Edwards 1, Ida A. Keller 1, T.
Chalkley Palmer and Frank J. Keeley 1, Clarence B. Moore 1,
H. von Ihering 1, John W. Harshberger 1, Arthur Erwin Brown
1, Charles E. Hall 1. Forty-one of these have been accepted for
publication in the Proceedings and have been issued or are now in
press; two constitute the last number of the Journal, two were
reported on adversely, two were withdrawn by the authors, one
was transferred to another journal at the request of the author,
one is held for publication next year, and one has not yet been
reported on.
~ The Entomological Section (American Entomological Society)
has published three hundred and thirty-six pages and seven plates
of the Transactions and three hundred and thirty-nine pages and
seventeen plates of the Entomological News.
The Conchological Section has issued five numbers of the Manual
of Conechology, embracing three hundred and thirty-five pages and
ninety plates.
The Academy’s publications, therefore, since the last annual
report have consisted of 1847 pages and 144 plates, a very impor-
tant increase over the 1416 pages and 81 plates of the preceding
year.
Perhaps the most important advance in the work of the publica-
tion office has been the distribution of the Proceedings to all mem-
bers in good standing. It had long been the desire of the Council
to thus bring those interested in the society into closer relation
with its current work, but the annual income had not been such
as to warrant the increased expenditure. The distribution has been
made possible by the settlement of the estate of the late Dr. Robert
H. Lamborn, resulting in an important addition to the Academy’s
resources. It is believed that such extended distribution of the
Academy’s published work is in harmony with the desire ef our
generous benefactor to provide for the encouragement of scientific
research and to enlarge the sphere of the society’s usefulness.
The statistics of distribution are now as follows:
762 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Proceedings, delivered to members, 9..-. 9.5 5). 0° 2) Jee
o4 exchanged for other publications,. . . . . 561
gf sent, to subsertbers; ) 22. 2 2 ee uc ee
1,156
Journal, vexchanges,0)...) . 0500. i 0 rr
Subseriptions,» 1. sel tes Mites 2. oe ee
103
To provide for the additional distribution of the Proceedings, the
printed edition has been increased from 1,000 to 1,500 copies.
The plates damaged by the flood of 1898 have been reprinted as
far as was necessary to provide for a supply of back volumes to
exchanges and purchasers.
Eighteen members and two correspondents have been elected.
Resignations have been accepted from Gavin W. Hart, William
L. Whitaker, George W. Warren, John B. Deaver and Mrs.
Susannah M. Gaskill. The deaths of fourteen members have
been announced, and seven have been dropped from the roll for
non-payment of annual contributions.
The Hayden Memorial Geological Trust has been modified by
agreement with the founder so as to provide for the award every
third year of a gold medal instead of a bronze medal and the
interest arising from the fund annually.
Vacancies in the Publication Committee and in the Council,
caused by the death of Charles E. Smith, have been filled by the
election of Philip P. Calvert, Ph.D., to the former, and of Mr.
Charles Roberts to the latter. The death of Mr. Smith was
severely felt by his associates on the Publication Committee, his
work as an accurate proof-reader having been recognized as of im-
portance during several years of devoted service.
The resignation of the Rev. Henry C. MeCook, D.D., from the
office of Vice-President was tendered before the annual nomina-
tions were made, and was accepted with regret. By direction of
the Academy, a minute of appreciation of his services to science
and to the society has been placed upon the records.
The use of the lecture hall of the Academy was granted the
Pennsylvania Audubon Society for its meeting of January 6. The
meetings cf the Pennsylvania Mycological Society, Students’ Min-
_ a
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 763
eralogical Club, Students’ Entomological Association, Delaware
Valley Ornithological Club, the Philadelphia Botanical Club and
Philadelphia Moss Chapter have also been held on the premises.
Epw. J. NoLan,
Recording Secretary.
REPORT OF THE CORRESPONDING SECRETARY.
During the past year there have been received from seventy-four
societies, museums, libraries, etc., one hundred and thirty-two
acknowledgements of the receipt of the publications of the Acad-
emy, and from thirty-one societies, libraries, etc., forty-one notices
of transmission of their publications.
Eleven applications for exchange of publications and for sup-
plies of deficiencies, together with seven circulars and invitations
to the Academy to participate in congresses, etc., and four an-
nouncements of the deaths of scientific men, have also been re-
ceived and when necessary answered. ’
Two correspondents have been elected during the year and the
deaths of seven have been recorded.
Seven hundred and fifty-five acknowledgments of gifts to the
library and eleven diplomas to correspondents have been for-
warded.
Respectfully submitted,
Bens. SHARP,
Corresponding Secretary.
764
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN.
[1900.
The accessions to the library catalogued and placed since the
last annual report amount to 5,441, an increase of 567 over the
growth of last year.
periodicals, 752 volumes, 2
They have been received from the following sources:
Societies, are
I. V. Williamson Fund
Editors, .
U.S. Department of Inte-
rior,
Authors,
General Fund, :
U.8: Dapakatei of seer
culture,
Estate of Charles E. nich,
Meigs Fund,
Wilson Fund
Thomas Meehan,
Dr. H. C. Chapman, .
U.S. Department of State,
Ministtre des Travaux
Publics, France,
Comité Géologique Russe,
Victoria Department of
Mines,
Pennsylvania State
brary, .
Geological and Nawal
History Survey of Min-
mesota, << s 4
Wisconsin Geological dint
vey, :
Geological Survey of ‘asa:
Cid, 205) rr arena ge
Department of rare
ture, Cape of Good
Hope,
re
2.183 | Dr. E. J. Nolan,
1,263 | Dr. H. A. Pilsbry,
$11} -Dr W. We Rees! or,
Bernice Pauahi Bishop
278 Museum,
169 | California State Minnie
154 Bureau,
Commission canagats di
154 ~—s—~ Finlande,
79 | British Museum,
59 | Library of Congress, .
44 Geological Survey of Lou-
41 isiana,
19 | Geological Survey of ate
16 bama, .
Indian Museum,
14 Congreso Cientifico ating?
12 Americano,
Geological and Nuaneal
10 History Survey of
Canada,
11 Conchologeal Section of
the Academy, :
_ Department of Mines,
11, New South Wales, .
| Philadelphia Commercial
4124 Museums,
| Geological Survey of Sen
7 Jersey, ‘
_ Zodlogical Muascaihe ore
_-penhagen,
7 Kew Gardens. .
There were 4,427 pamphlets and parts of
61 maps and one photograph.
6
o1
de
Oo
wy)
wy)
ho
bo
:
=— eee. ae
ie eee
1900.]
Department of Mines,
Nova Scotia, :
Comision Geologica de
Mexico,
U.S. War Diitinent,
U.S. Commission of Fish
and Fisheries,
_ Joseph Willcox,
U. &. Treasury Depart-
ment,
Use: Goast wa Cooder
Survey,
Walter Faxon,
William J. Fox,
Maryland Geological Sur-
vey, F
Maryland State We Rhos
Service, ;
Government of Badia:
Massachusetts Commis-
sioners of Inland Fish-
eries and Game,
Miss L. H. Baird,
Henry A. Ward,
Illinois State Bureau of
Labor Statistics,
They were distributed to the several departments
as follows:
Journals,
Geology,
Botany, .
General eset! Eiistory.
Agriculture,
Entomology,
Conchology, :
Anatomy and Phy sila
Voyages and Travels,
Miscellaneous, .
Anthropology, .
Ornithology,
bo bo
j—. he
1
|
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
| Council of the Fridtjof
Nansen Fund for the
Adyancement of Sci-
ence, :
Institut Suliiee faites
pan Montevideo,
U.S. Civil Service Com-
mission, 5 a
Government,
Department of Geology
and Natural History,
Parigrce ;
. C. Geological i
E. Meehan,
Heirs of H. Git aaa
Dr. Fritz Sano, ;
University Geological Sur-
vey, Kansas,
William Beer, :
Survey of
Norwegian
Geological
Missouri, . ‘
Adams Ricatanl cae
mittee, -
Iowa Geological Siiuew
Estate of Robert H. Lam-
born,
) ) Physical Science,
Mineralogy,
Mammalogy,
Medicine,
Helminthology,
Ichthyology,
Bibliography,
Encyclopedias,
Herpetology,
Chemistry,
Geography, .
ro oa
1
of the library
or or
766 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
In addition to the above, 104 duplicate volumes and 112 pam-
phlets were received from the estate of the late Charles E. Smith.
Eight hundred and eighty-six volumes have been bound during
the year, and three hundred and thirty-five are in the hands of
the binders. This gratifying increase in this department of library
work over the accomplishment of recent years is the result of the
much larger appropriation than usual which the Council was able
to grant. It is estimated that nearly five thousand volumes,
mainly in the department of journals and periodicals, are still
unbound, although many of the most pressingly urgent needs
have been provided for during the past year.
A desirable addition to the space devoted to the arrangement of
journals and periodicals has been secured by erecting cases on the
entresol floor of the former staircase to the Museum, rendered
available by the present exclusive use of the door on Nineteenth
street as the public entrance to that department of the Academy.
This section of the library is so rapidly growing that the need of
additional accommodation is still urgently needed for the con-
venient use of the books.
About twenty books and pamphlets not related to the objects of
the Academy were transferred to the Free Library in addition to
those noted in my last report.
The Warner Library, consisting, for the most part, of books on
mathematics, received in 1892, has been rearranged, works on
general science being placed in their appropriate departments of
the main library and the catalogue incorporated with that of the
Academy. Nearly one thousand pamphlets belonging to the col-
lection are now in the hands of the binders.
In association with the work of preparing volumes for binding
constant effort is made to secure a supply of deficiencies as gifts
or from booksellers’ catalogues. Much remains to be done in this
direction.
It gives me much pleasure to assure you of the efficiency of my
assistant, William J. Fox.
Epw. J No.ay,
Librarian.
—
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCE3 OF PHILADELPHIA. 767
REPORT OF THE CURATORS.
The collections under eare of the Curators have been kept in
the excellent state of preservation reported last year, while
much has been accomplished toward their better display, arrange-
ment and cataloguing. During the year two large plate-glass
eases have been provided, one for large mammals and one for the
new ornithological floor which it is proposed to open during the
coming year. There have also been erected two handsome wall
eases in the Archeological depactment for the reception of the
Lamborn Collection of Mexican Antiquities, and two others for
a series of human crania.
For storage purposes a room in the basement has been fitted up
with fifty-two closet cases in which geological study collections will
be arranged. The specimens will thus be more accessible, and the
cases on the upper floor now occupied by them will be available
for more perishable material. Ten moth-proof tin cases for the
accommodation of the rapidly increasing study collection of birds
were also secured.
In addition to these improvements, the entire library hall has
been painted during the summer. Necessary improvements have
also been made to the roofs and the heating plant, and sunshades
' provided for several windows as a protection to the specimens.
The principal rearrangement in the Museum during the year
has been on the floor devoted to mammals. The new case provided
for the large mounted specimens rendered the old cases available for
osteologieal material, much of which had previously been without
protection. This not only insures the better preservation of the
specimens, but facilitates their systematic arrangement. With the
same object all the skeletons of Cetacea have now been placed
together at the east end of the floor protected by a railing, and
some of them articulated and remounted. The entire series of
mammals exhibited in the new cases has also been relabeled with
buff cardboard, which will not discolor on exposure to the light,
while nearly all of the study series of mammalian skeletons has
been labeled with permanent tags.
In addition to the above work, the assistant to the Curators
has devoted a large part of the year to the arrangement of the
aleoholic Batrachians and Reptiles. The entire series of some
768 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
thirty-five hundred jars has been cleansed and systematically
arranged in accordance with the British Museum Catalogue, and
many specimens misplaced when the collection was transferred
have now been located and properly classified. The entire Cope
collection of Ophidia and Tailed Batrachia, excepting some of the
largest specimens, was catalogued; many unnamed specimens were
identified and systematically arranged. The shelves have been
numbered and labeled, so that any specimen can be readily found.
The alcoholic mammals were at the same time systematically
examined and relabeled by Mr. J. A. G. Rehn, Jessup Fund
student, and the additions from the collections of the late
Prof. Edward D. Cope and Dr. Harrison Allen properly arranged.
Mr. Henry W. Fowler has completed the rearrangement of the
alcoholic fishes.
In the Botanical department, the services of Mr. Stewardson
Brown were secured in the spring as an assistant tu the Curators
and the work of mounting the herbarium has been pushed rapidly
toward completion. Much work has been done in this depart-
ment by Vice-President, Thomas Meehan.
Mr. Clarence B. Moore nas added many valuable specimens
to his collection in the department of Archeology, which is now
one of the most valuable in our museum, and Mr. Theodore D.
Rand has spent much time in the care and arrangement of the
William S. Vaux Collection of minerals.
By the liberality of Rev. Dr. Leander T. Chamberlain, the
Isaac Lea Collection of Eocene and Oligocene fossils has been
extended by a large series from the Chipola (Florida) bed, collected
by Mr. C. W. Johnson; a fine series from the Ballast Point Silex
beds, and less important collections from other American localities.
Substantial additions have also been made to the series from the
Oligocene and Eocene of Europe. In all, fifteen hundred and
thirty-two trays of fossils have been added to the collection during
the year, the total number of accessions catalogued now reaching
sixty-six hundred and eighty-two entries, with some material still
to be determined. Two new cases have been provided for the
accommodation of this material. The continued interest of Dr.
Chamberlain in this department of the Museum is a cause of con-
gratulation, as it secures important advancement of American
invertebrate paleontology.
Orel eee eee ee
1900. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 769
The Curators, considering the duplication of collections undesir-
able, have transferred certain Eocene and Oligocene fossils of Ja-
maica and Santo Domingo and of the London and Paris basins to
the Isaac Lea Collection, wherein they can be arranged and dis-
played.
In other departments we would acknowledge the continued assist-
ance of Dr. Henry A. Pilsbry of the Conchological Section, Dr.
Henry Skinner, Dr. Philip P. Calvert and Mr. Charles Liebeck of
the Entomological Section, and Messrs. Lewis Woolman and Theo-
dore D. Rand of the Geological Section; also the efficient aid
received from the students of the Jessup Fund, Miss Harriet N.
Wardle and Messrs. Fowler, Hamilton, Vanatta, Satterthwait and
Rehn.
Several of the collections have benefited from critical study by
specialists during the year, notably the North American Ophidia,
studied by Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, the Cetacean skeletons by
Dr. F. W. True, and the Mosses by Mrs. Elizabeth G. Britton.
‘The additions to the Museum have been many; among the most
important being the Lamborn Collection of Mexican Antiquities,
the Charles E. Smith Herbarium, the numerous valuable speci-
mens received from the Zodlogical Society of Philadelphia, and the
Japanese Mollusca received from Mr. Y. Hirase, of Kyoto,
Japan. Of particular interest also is a life-size portrait of
Linnzeus, copied from the original in Holland especially for the
Academy and presented by the late Charles E. Smith early in the
year; some heads of Indian Buffaloes, collected and deposited by
Dr. A. Donaldson Smith, and a beautiful exhibition case of
Lepidoptera, the gift of Mr. Charles H. Hutchinson.
Specimens have been loaned for study during the year to Mrs.
EK. G. Britton, Messrs. C. R. Ball, W. B. Clarke, F. M. Chap-
man, F. R. Coville, W. H. Dall, M. J. Elrod, C. R. Eastman,
George H. Girty, A. H. Howell, Alpheus Hyatt, W. P. Hay,
R. T. Jackson, G. S. Miller, E. L. Morris, P. Ryberg, Robert
Ridgway and J. K. Small.
Henry C. CHAPMAN,
Chairman.
770 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
REPORT OF THE CURATOR OF THE WILLIAM &.
VAUX COLLECTIONS.
The Curator of the William S. Vaux Collections would respect-
fully report tnat there have been added to the collection since the
last report one hundred and fifty-eight specimens, many of them
of unusual excellence, at a cost of over $1000, exhausting the
funds available at present.
To provide for efficient display additional case room must very
soon be supplied, as a number of excellent specimens are not ex-
posed to view.
The catalogue of species has been completed and also a card
catalogue.
The Curator desires to express his acknowledgments to Mr.
George Vaux, Jr., for valuable aid in the selection and procuring
of specimens, and to Miss Harriet N. Wardell for admirable work
on the catalogue and assistance in arranging the collection.
Respectfully submitted,
Taro. D. RAnp,
Curator.
REPORT OF THE BIOLOGICAL AND MICROSCOPICAL
SECTION.
The Section held ten meetings during the year with the usual
attendance. Numerous communications, illustrated by slides and
specimens, were made at the regular meetings, and in addition to
these others were made at the meetings in conjunction with the
Academy by Messrs. Pilsbry, Woolman, Sharp, Morris, Palmer
and Keeley.
The following articles were recommended for publication in the
Proceedings of the Academy :
‘¢ The Structure of the Diatom Girdle,’’ by T. C. Palmer and
F. J. Keeley.
‘* Biddulphoid Forms of North American Diatomacer,’’ by
Charles 8. Boyer.
Arrangements have been made for a joint meeting of the
Biological Society of the University of Pennsylvania and the
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 771
Biological and Microscopical Section of the Academy, and for a
Microscopical Exhibition.
The following officers were elected to serve during the ensuing
year:
Director, : P : : J. Cheston Morris, M.D.
Vice- Director, . F ; T. Chalkley Palmer.
Treasurer, ‘ : ; ; Lewis Woolman.
Conservator, . : : : F. J. Keeley.
Corresponding Secretary, . ‘ Silas L. Schumo.
Recorder, - : : : Charles S. Boyer.
CHARLES S. Boyer,
Recorder.
REPORT OF THE CONCHOLOGICAL SECTION.
The collection of mollusks has been increased during the year by
about 2,064 lots, representing over 10,000 specimens, received from
sixty-six persons. The collection remains in about the same con-
dition as last year, except that a rearrangement of the entire series
of land mollusks has been begun.
The Australian and Oriental Bulimi have been examined and
relabeled in the course of work upon these groups for the Manual
of Conchology. The North American Pupide have also been
reviewed, and the Japanese land snails of the collection have
undergone revision.
As in former years, a large amount of work has been done upon
North American mollusks. These studies have been instrumental
in obtaining much material from naturalists in this country and
abroad, who send it upon the condition that such collections be
investigated.
Sixteen papers dealing with this material have been published
in the current volume of the Proceedings of the Academy, with an
equal number of minor articles in the Nautilus and elsewhere.
During the year the Section has issued Vol. XIII of the second
series of the Manual of Conchology.
Mr. E. G. Vanatta has rendered valuable assistance throughout
the year in all departments of the Section’s activity. The thanks
of the Section are also due to Mr. Charles W. Johnson, of the
Museum Committee, for assistance upon many occasions.
Henry A. Pirssry, Conservator.
172 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
REPORT OF THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SECTION.
The usual monthly meetings of the Section have been held, with
an average attendance of ten persons. Two members and two
associates have been elected. The collections are in a good state of
preservation, and their care, mounting and the incorporation of new
material has been the principal work of the year. The Conserva-
tor has been aided in this work by Mr. Alfred F. Satterthwait,
Jessup Fund student, and by several members of the Section. The
desiderata from the 10,000 specimens of exotic Coleoptera included
in the Griffith collection have been properly placed. Like disposi-
tion has been made of the collections made in Florida by H. A.
Pilsbry, in Maryland by E. G. Vanatta, in Manchuria by Dr. A.
D. Smith and G. Farnum, in Palestine by R. Weber, in Utah by
H. Skinner, and in Pennsylvania by H. W. Wenzel. These gifts
are more particularly recorded in the list of additions to the Mu-
seum last year and this.
A second case for the display of the beautifully mounted butter-
flies, the gift of Mr. Charles H. Hutchinson, has been filled.
The large collections made by Dr. A. D. Smith in Africa have
been remounted and are ready for distribution to the cabinets. A
fine collection of 450 specimens of various orders from Japan, col-
lected and presented by Dr. H. C. Wood, have also been mounted
and partly distributed. A collection of 340 ants from Pennsyl-
vania and New Jersey, presented by Mr. H. W. Wenzel, have
been mounted and placed with the Hymenoptera. A small but
valuable collection of butterflies and moths from Bolivia was
received from Miss Prentiss Smith. They have been placed in the
Martindale collection and are all new to the cabinet. The exotic
Bombycide have been rearranged and relabeled.
Dr. Calvert has incorporated into the collection of Odonata 381
dragon-flies from Bolivia, which were purchased.
The American moths to the end of the Crambidze have been
rearranged and relabeled. They are now in good condition for
study and reference. Mr. Liebeck has rearranged the American
Coleoptera as far as the family Anthicide.
The enormous collections in the care of the Section are particularly
liable to the attack of museum pests and require a care and over-
sight which necessitate the expenditure of much time. As improve-
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 773
ments in cabinets and cases are secured, the use of poisons for
disinfecting—or rather disinsecting—purposes will be less neces-
sary. This year about fifty pounds of naphthaline have been
placed in the collection of exotic Coleoptera alone.
The growth of the collections is very satisfactory, and their
value is evidenced by the fact that many students from other
museums and scientific societies find it necessary to consult them.
The Entomological News has been continued and Volume XI,
just completed, contains 339 pages and 17 plates.
At the annual meeting of the Section, held December 27, the
following persons were elected to serve as officers for the year 1901:
Director, . : : : E Philip Laurent.
Vice-Director, ; ; : : : H. W. Wenzel.
Treasurer, . : : E. T. Cresson.
Conservator and Recorder, : . Henry Skinner.
Secretary, 3 ; : ; . C. W. Johnson.
Publication Committee, . : : ; J. H. Ridings,
C. W. Johnson.
HENRY SKINNER,
Recorder and Conservator.
REPORT OF THE BOTANICAL SECTION.
The Director of the Botanical Section has pleasure in reporting
that the prospects of the botanical interests of the Academy were
never better than now. So far as the growth and care of the
herbarium is concerned, the report of the Conservator attached
hereto details the progress made. The Redfield Memorial Fund
of $20,000, which it was proposed to establish as a mark of grati-
tude for the life-long devotion to the interests of the Academy of
our deceased fellow-member, John H. Redfield, ceased to grow
when about one-fourth of the sum had been subscribed, owing to
the temporary need of the Academy at that period in another
direction. Though the Academy has materially aided in the care
of the herbarium by detailing a special assistant to the Curators to
assist in the work, the original idea of honoring our deceased
friend by a $20,000 ‘‘ Memorial Fund’’ should not be lost sight
of through lapse of time.
50
774 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
The growth and care of the herbarium is but a smal] field in the
realm of botany, and there is no reason why the Academy may
not occupy in time a foremost place among the institutions of the
world in the advancement of this amiable science, when it possesses
resources commensurate with the full measure of the task.
Meetings of the Section have been held regularly, except during
the three summer months. Valuable communications have been
made at each meeting, some of which have been accepted as of
original merit for the Proceedings of the Academy.
The officers elected for the year ensuing were:
Director, . 2 - . ‘ Thomas Meehan.
Vice-Director, . ; ; : George M. Beringer.
Recorder, “ : : : John W. Harshberger.
Treasurer and Conservator, : Stewardson Brown.
Corresponding Secretary, . : Joseph D. Crawford.
Executive Committee, : : George M. Beringer,
Thomas Meehan,
Stewardson Brown,
Joseph D. Crawford,
Dr. Ida A. Keller.
Respectfully submitted,
Tuomas MEEBAN,
Director.
Report of the Conservator.—The mounting of the plants in the
general herbarium has been finished through the Exogens, and it
is expected that this entire work will be completed during the
coming year. The work has been accomplished through the untir-
ing efforts of the Director of the Section, Mr. Thomas Meehan,
aided by Mr. Uselma C. Smith, with the official aid of the Con-
servator, who in May became a member of the working staff of the
Academy by his appointment as an assistant to the Curators. He
has thus been enabled to devote his entire time to the work in hand,
and, with the employment of a permanent assistant in the herba-
rium, 14,000 sheets of specimens have been arranged during the
year.
While a rapid completion of the work of mounting the herba-
rium would thus be indicated, there yet remains a vast accumula-
tion of material, including the C. W. Short herbarium and several
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 775
smaller collections, which, at the present rate of progress, will take
several years to properly arrange.
It is also proposed, during the coming year, to rename the North
American. species to conform with the modern ideas of nomencla-
ture. This in itself will bea vast work, but the Conservator has
been promised liberal assistance to aid in its accomplishment.
Notwithstanding that two years ago nine new cases were provided
to relieve the congested condition of the collections, the cases are
again becoming overcrowded, and additional accommodation is
required for the arrangement of the specimens after mounting and
for the placing of the natural growth through accessions.
The Cyperaceze, Graminez and Pteridophytes are at present in
the room devoted to North American plants, because of the impos-
sibility of placing them systematically with the rest of the herba-
rium owing to the lack of casing.
It seems very advisable that all the general collections should be
arranged together in sequence, and in order to accomplish this
and relieve the overcrowded condition, as well as provide for the
several special collections which are now wholly unprovided for,
the Conservator recommends the erection of cases on the remain-
ing wall space in the Botanical rooms on the library floor.
In the latter part of May the herbarium of the late Charles
Eastwick Smith was received at the Academy. It contains
nearly 5,000 species, about half of which were collected within the
fifteen-mile radius of the City Hall, the balance being largely
plants which were no doubt, with a few exceptions, received in
exchange. The latter part of the collection is unusually rich in
Carices and the Juncacez, two groups in which Mr. Smith was
particularly interested. It contains a full set of Engelmann’s
Herbarium Juncorum Boreali-Americanorum Normale, as well as a
partial set of the species of the ‘‘ Southern Flora’’ collected by
Drs. Chapman and B. F. Saurman. Of these plants 1,200 sheets
have been mounted and the balance will be completed during the
coming year. These and other accessions to the herbarium,
amounting to 7,000 specimens, are recorded in the list of accessions
to the Museum.
Srewarpson Brown,
Conservator.
776 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
REPORT OF THE MINERALOGICAL AND GEOLOG-
ICAL SECTION.
The Director of the Mineralogical and Geological Section would
respectfully report that nine meetings were held during the year
with an average attendance of eight members. A number of
communications were read, and no lack of interest has been mani-
fested among the few connected with the Academy who are espe-
cially concerned with these branches of science.
In addition to the above two field meetings were held, one at
Durham Furnace and vicinity and the trap outcrop at Nock-
amixor, the other to Camp Hill, Jarrettown and Three Tuns.
These were largely attended.
The Section has suffered the loss by death of two of its members,
Mr. Wilfred Harned and Dr. J. T. M. Cardeza. The latter was
one of the earliest members of the Section, and took an active
part in its work so long as his health permitted.
Additions to the Museum, elsewhere recorded, have not been
large in number, but some of them are valuable.
The officers elected at the annual meeting were as follows:
Director, 2 ‘ : ‘ Theodore D. Rand.
Vice-Director, . y : : Benjamin Smith Lyman.
Conservator, . : : : F. J. Keeley.
Secretary, ; . oe er Charles Scheffer, M.D.
Treasurer, : ; g ‘ Emma Walter.
Respectfully submitted,
THEODORE D. Rann,
Director.
REPORT OF THE ORNITHOLOGICAL SECTION.
While no general rearrangement of the exhibition series of birds
has been possible during the past year, the erection of a large
exhibition case has been completed on the bird-floor of the new
Museum, which, with the two smaller cases already in position,
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Tae
will permit of the removal of a portion of the collection to its new
quarters early in the coming year.
The Curators have also provided ten additional moth-proof
storage cases for skins, and the Conservator has been enabled to
rearrange the entire series of American Passerine birds, numbering
some 12,000 specimens. By this means the Hoopes series has been
combined with the general collection, which greatly facilitates the
study of the material. Many specimens previously exposed in
unsafe wooden cases have been placed beyond the reach of dust
and moths.
The Old-World Passeres are, however, still occupying temporary
eases, and the provision of tight cases for their accommodation
cannot be too strongly urged. The receptacles as finally arranged
have been labeled to facilitate reference, some 400 cards having
been prepared.
During the year the exhibition collection of North American
Warblers, Woodpeckers, Hawks and Owls formed by Mr. Josiah
Hoopes has been entirely remounted on natural branches and
placed in the Museum. It comprises 158 groups and forms one of
the finest exhibits in the ornithological galleries.
A number of specimens presented by Dr. Samuel W. Wood-
house have also been remounted and placed on exhibition, while
several valuable nests and eggs from the mountains of Pennsyl-
vania have been added to the Delaware Valley Club collection.
Through the liberality of several members of the Academy a
fund has been subscribed sufficient to secure for the institution a
full set of the valuable Alaskan birds obtained by Mr. E. A.
Mellhenay, which when added to the present series of American
water birds will render it nearly complete.
The general activity in the study of ornithology at the Academy
has continued during the year. The Delaware Valley Ornitho-
logical Club and Pennsylvania Audubon Society have held their
meetings in the building. Many of our specimens have also been
consulted by ornithoiogists from other institutions, notably by Mr.
Robert Ridgway, who has made considerable use of the Acad-
emy’s material in the preparation of his forthcoming monographs
of American birds.
For assistance during the year the Conservator is indebted to
Mr. J. A. G. Rehn.
778 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
At the annual meeting of the Section, held December 17, 1900,
the following officers were elecied:
Director, . : Spencer Trotter, M. D.
Vice-Director, . : George Spencer Morris.
Recorder, . : : Stewardson Brown.
Secretary,. . : William A. Shryock.
Treasurer and Conservator, . z Witmer Stone.
Respectfully submitted,
WirMerR SToNgs,
Conservator.
The election of Officers, Councilors and Members of the Com-
mittee on Accounts to serve during 1901 was held with the follow-.
ing result:
President, . . ; : Samuel G. Dixon, M.D.
Vice-Presidents, . ; : Thomas Meehan,
; Arthur Erwin Brown.
Recording Secretary, . : Edward J. Nolan, M.D.
Corresponding Secretary, , Benjamin Sharp, M.D.
Treasurer, . ; : : George Vaux, Jr.
Librarian, . : : , Edward J. Nolan, M.D.
Curators, . ; : Henry C. Chapman, M.D.,
Arthur Erwin Brown,
Samuel G. Dixon, M.D.,
Henry A. Pilsbry, Se. D.
Councilors to serve three years, Charles Schaeffer, M.D.,
Dr. C. Newlin Pierce,
Theodore D. Rand,
Philip P. Calvert, Ph. D.
Committee on Accounts, : Uselma C. Smith,
Charles Morris,
William L. Baily,
Harold Wingate, — :
Lewis Woolman.
oo
-
ak
———E——————SEOOee ll
1900. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 779
COUNCIL FOR 1901.
Ex-officio.—Samuel G. Dixon, M.D., Thomas Meeban, Arthur
Erwin Brown, Edward J. Nolan, M.D., Benjamin Sharp, M.D.,
George Vaux, Jr., Henry A. Pilsbry, Henry C. Chapman, M.D.
To serve Three Years.—Charles Schaeffer, M.D., Dr. C. Newlin
Pierce, Theodore D. Rand, Philip P. Calvert, Ph.D.
To serve Two Years. —Thomas A. Robinson, Charles H. Cramp,
Charles Morris, Isaac J. Wistar.
To serve One Year.—Charles Roberts, Uselma C. Smith, John
Cadwalader, William Sellers.
ELECTIONS DURING 1900.
MEMBERS.
January 30.—Florence Bascom, William E. Barrows, S. Men-
delson Meehan, Catharine G. Dixon, William R. Reinick.
February 27.—Harry G. Parker.
March 27.—John W. Harshberger, Ph.D., John H. Converse.
April 24.—Walter T. Taggart, M. G. Miller, M.D.
May 30.—W. H. Bower, John Thomson.
September 25.—Lowndes Taylor, Helen Taylor, Emily Hinds
Thomas.
October 30.—Thomas S. Stuart, M.D.
November 27. —T. Percival Gerson, M.D.
CORRESPONDENTS.
February 27.—Henri Lacaze-Duthier, of Paris; Frederic W.
True, of Washington.
780 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
‘ ADDITIONS TO THE MUSEUM.
MamMALs.
G. W. Bert. Three specimens of Varying Hare, Lepus
americanus virginianus, from Pennsylvania, prepared as skins.
Orro Benr. Red Squirrel, Seiurus hudsonius loquaz, Penn-
sylvania. Skin.
J. L. Bucx. Young Black Bear, Ursus americanus, prepared
as skin.
H. C. Cuapman, M.D. Notoryctes typhlops, specimen in
alcohol and mounted skeleton; Semnopithecus sp., brain; Cheiro-
mys madagascariensis in alcohol.
J. E. CLEAvVE.AND, M.D., through S. N. Rhoads. Varying
Hare, Lepus americanus virginianus, Bradford county, Pa., pre-
pared as a mount..
H. W. Fowuer. Five skins from Holmesburg, Pa., Putorius
noveboracensis, Scalops aquaticus, Didelphis virginianus (2), Blarina
brevicauda.
Epw. B. Gueason, M.D. Ear bone of Whale.
AnNnA HArtTsHoRNE. Mounted specimen of Rat, Mus sp.,
Japan.
Davin McCappen. Skull of Caribou, Rangifer terre-nove.
Mrs. J. A. Marspen. Mummitied Rat.
PurcHasep. Young Orangutan, Simia satyrus, in alcohol;
Macacus maurus, prepared for mounting.
ABRAHAM ReEp, M.D. Mounted specimen of Gray Seal,
Holocherus gryphus, Tadousae Bay.
S. N. Raoaps. Mole, Scalops aquatieus, Audubon, N. J., pre-
pared as skin.
P. A. Saearr, M.D. Preparation of Human Ear.
Mrs. CHARLES SCHAEFFER. Skin of Alaskan Lynx, Iynzr
canadensis mollipilosus ; skins of Arctomys, Neotoma and Peromys-
cus, from Glacier, B. C.
E. W. Cores. Double Kitten in alcohol.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 781
Henry Warrineton. Mounted Opossum, Didelphis virgin-
ianus ; two skins and skulls of Oryzomys palustris, from Salem,
Nie di
ZooLoGicAL Socrery oF PariapenparA. The following
specimens which have been prepared as indicated : Mounted:
Black Macaque, Macacus mawrus, female; Vervet Monkey,
Cercopithecus pygerythrus ; Green Monkey, C. callitrichus, male;
Diadem Monkey, C. leucampyx, male; Mona Monkey, C. mona,
female; White-crowned Mangaby, Cercocebus ethiops ; Wanderoo,
Macacus silenus; Leonine Macaque, Macacus leoninus, male;
Arabian Baboon, Papio hamadryas ; Mongoose, Herpestes mungo ;
Prong-horned Antelope, Antilocapra americana, male and female;
Vulpine Phalanger, T'richosawrus vulpecula, female. To be
mounted: Leopard, Felis pardus, female; Jagarundi, Felis jagar-
undi, male; Long-eared Fox, Otocyon megalotis, male; Coati,
Nasua narica ; Collared Peceary, Dicotvles angulatus, male; Ben-
nett’s Gazelle, G. bennetti, male; Rufous-necked Wallaby, Halam-
aturus ruficollis, male; Prevost’s Squirrel, S. prevosti, male. Skins
and skulls: Cercocebus collaris, C. albiqularis, Cercopithecus eryth-
rogaster, Oercopithecus sp., CO. callitrichus, C. ludio, C. niger, C.
mona, C. nictitans, Macacus maurus, Galera barbara, Canis azare,
Cholepus sp., Halamaturus rujicollis, Bettongia gaimardi, Seiurus
bicolor (no skull), Lepus arizone (no skull), Lynx rufus arizone,
Ooendou prehensilis. Skins and skeletons: Otocyon megalotis,
Nasua narica. Rough skeletons: Ateles ater, Lemur macaco (2)
Macacus maurus, M. fuscatus, Ursus arctos, Fennecus zerda, Ibex
ibex, Bison bison (two males). Skulls: Cercopithecus cephus and
Bassariscus astutus. Alcoholic: Cercophithecus pygerythrus (juv. ),
two young Monkeys, Cercopithecus campbelli (juv.), Nyctipithecus
trivirgatus, Nycticebus tardigradus, Lemur macaco, Lemur albifrons,
Dipus jaculus, Neotoma albigula, Didelphis virginianus (very
young).
In EXCHANGE: Two alcoholic specimens of Phyllonycteris plani-
frons.
Birps.
AMERICAN COLONIZATION Society. Two cases of mounted
* birds from Liberia.
H. C. BorpEen. Game Rooster, prepared as a skin.
782 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
H. G. Bryant. Marsh Hawk, Circus hudsonius, prepared as
a skin.
Davip Conover. Mounted Peacock.
S. G. Dixoy, M.D. Cooper’s Hawk, Accipiter Cooperi, Ham-
burg, Pa., prepared as a skin.
DELAWARE VALLEY ORNITHOLOGICAL CLuB. Seven nests and
eggs, and six mounted birds from Pennsylvania, collected by W.
L. Baily, Otto Behr, Witmer Stone and Henry Warrington.
GrorcE L. Farnum. Two Pileated Woodpeckers, OCeophleus
pileatus, from Ontario, prepared as skins.
ANNA HArtsHorNe. Two mounted Japanese birds.
Horatio HAte (est.). Case of twelve mounted birds from
the South Pacific, collected on the U. S. Exploring Expedition.
Davip McCappen. Sternum of Qlor columbianus and four
skulls of NMumenius hudsonius.
C. J. Pennock. Flat skin of Campephilus principalis, Florida.
PurcuasEep. The Hoopes Collection of North American Birds,
some 8,000 specimens.
Mrs. CHARLES ScHAFFER. Six bird skins from Glacier, B. C.
H. G. Parker. Skin of Junco hyemalis pinosus.
Joun Carson. Triple Robin’s nest, Wynnewood, Pa.
Henry Warrincton. Collection of bird skins from Cali-
fornia.
ALBERT WHITAKER. Great Blue Heron, Ardea herodias.
ZOOLOGICAL Socrery OF PHILADELPHIA. The following were
prepared as indicated: Skins: Chrysotis sp., Cassieus sp., Dendro-
cygna javanica, Garrulax chinensis. Skull and sternum: Tantalus
loculator, Porphyrio caluus, Coscoroba coscoroba. Skull: Porphyrio,
Gowra coronata. Rough skeleton, Dendrocygna javanica.
REPTILES AND BATRACHIANS.
ArtHuR Erwin Brown. Varanus varanus (2), Tiliqua
scincoides (?), Chelodina longicollis.
SrEWARDSON Brown. Collection of twenty-five Snakes and
Salamanders from Lake Ganoga, Pennsylvania.
J. L. Buck. Alligator mississippiensis prepared as rough
skeleton.
R. D. Carsoy. Hamadryas Cobra.
G. A. Boutencer. <A series of European Batrachia.
CLARENCE B. Moore. Six casts of Snakes.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 783
J. W. Perrce. Four Amblystoma punctatum, Clifton, Delaware
county, Pa.
C. W. Ports. Mounted Heloderma suspectum, Arizona. ;
PorcaaseD. Necturus maculatus, Darby Creek, Delaware
county, Pa.
Hon. Water Rorascuitp. Testudo ephippiwm, Duncan
Island, Galapagos. :
MARIAN SKINNER. Liopeltis vernalis, Lake George, N. Y.
H. C. Woop, M.D. A small collection of Batrachia from
Japan.
ZOOLOGICAL SocreTy OF PAILADELPHIA. Crotalus durissus
(3), Coluber obsoletus lindheimeri (2), Spilotes corais xanthoura,
Lachesis lanceolatus, Boa diviniloqua, Macrochelys lacertina,
Ctenosaura acanthura, Tiliqua scincoides, Testudo argentina, Tes-
tudo geometrica.
FISHES.
H. C. Coapman, M.D. Skeleton, dried specimen and alcoholic
specimen of Callirhynchus antarcticus, skeleton of Chimaera and
small shark, articulated skeleton of head of Codfish, alcoholic
specimen of Polistotrema dombey.
S. G. Drxon, M.D. Egg of Shark, Islesboro, Me.
Louis Parts. Saw of Sawfish.
J. B. Samuer. Boney plate of Sturgeon.
C.S. Tyter. Lophius piscator from Ocean City, N. J.
. Henry Warrineton. Eight fishes from the West Indies.
REcENT MOLLUSCA.
C. F. Ancey. Three trays and two bottles of land shells from
Algeria.
Mrs. GeorGe ANprReEws. Five trays of land shells from Tea-
nessee.
F. H. Anprus. Five trays and four bottles of land and fresh-
water shells from Oregon.
Epwin Asusy. Four trays and one bottle of Chitons from
South Australia.
Rey. E. H. Asamun. One hundred and nine trays and four
bottles of Jand shells from Arizona, New Mexico and California.
F. C. Baker. One tray of Pisidium from New York.
784 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
F. N. Baton. Nine trays of marine shells from Coldspring
Harbor, Long Island Sound.
F. H. Brown. Ninety-three trays of shells from New Jersey
and Pennsylvania.
Srewarpson Brown. Twenty-seven trays and twelve bottles
of land shells from Potter and Clinton counties, Pa.
F. W. Bryant. Five trays of shells and one bottle of Agrio-
limax from California.
F. L. Burroy. Thirteen trays and two bottles of West Coast
land shells.
H. C. Caapman, M.D. Alcoholic specimens of Nautilus
pompilius L. and one tray of land shells from Gibraltar.
Grorce H. Crapp. Twenty-one trays of land shells from
Maine and Tennessee, U. S., and Colombia, S. A.
T. D. A. Cockrerety. Seventy-three trays and three bottles
of land shells from New Mexico, ete.
J. C. Cox, M.D. Nine trays of land shells from Australia, ete.
W. H. Dati, M.D. Three trays and two bottles of land shells
from Cocos Island, W. Mexico, ete.
L. EK. Dantecs. Four trays of land and fresh-water shells.
S. M. Epwarps. Fourteen trays of Jand and fresh-water
shells from North Dakota.
C. H. Ercenmann. Types of Helicodiscus eigenmanni Pils.
M. J. Etrop. Thirteen trays and one bottle of land and fresh-
water shells from Montana.
J. H. Ferriss. Two hundred and fifteen trays and sixteen
bottles of United States land shells.
JoHn Forp. One tray of Mopalia from California.
H. W. Fowter. Two trays of fresh-water shells from Penn-
sylvania and New York.
L. S. Frrerson. Nine trays of fresh-water shells from Lou-
isiana.
M. R. Gaines. Three trays of Japanese land shells.
Mrs. E. M. Gayrtorp. One tray of Trophon from Calfornia.
G. K. Gupr. Six trays of Japanese land shells.
Appison GuLicK. Seven trays of Chinese and Japanese land
shells.
A. C. HartsHorne. Eight trays of marine shells from
Japan,
\ ae
a | ee ee ee ee
eee eee
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 785
S. W. Heaton. ‘Two trays of marine shells from Gloucester,
Mass.
ANGELO Heriprix. Two trays of land shells from New York
and Bermuda.
H. Hempeuity. Eight trays of marine shells from California,
J. B. Henprrson, Jr. Cotypes of Crossopoma enganoense
Hend.
Y. Hirase. Two hundred and ninety trays of land shells from
Japan.
J. D. JAmison. Seven trays of land and fresh-water shells
from North Dakota.
‘C. W. Jonnson. Forty-seven trays and fourteen bottles of
land shells from Florida, Panama and Borneo.
Miss E. J. Lerson. Eleven trays of Limnea from New
York.
J. G. Matone. Eighty-four trays of marine shells from South
Africa.
R. C. McGrecor. Fourteen trays and ten bottles of land
shells from Alaska.
Witi1aAM Meegan. Six trays and one bottle of marine shells
from Florida.
CLARENCE B. Moore. Scaphella junonia Ewass. from Florida.
H. A. Prospry. One hundred and thirty-two trays and ten
bottles of American mollusks.
GrEoRGE Pine. Seven trays of land shells from Aripeka, Fla.
E. Pueas. Goniobasis plebeius Anth. from Arkansas.
Sapre F, Price. Two trays of land and fresh-water shells
from Kentucky.
J. A. G. Reay. Two bottles of New Jersey marine shells.
S. N. Raoaps. Twelve trays and one bottle of land shells
from Florida and Pennsylvania.
H. E. Sargent, Fifty-nine trays of land shells from Ten-
nessee.
Siras L. Scnumo. Twenty trays of fresh-water and marine
shells from Europe and America.
BensamMin SHarp, M.D. Seven trays of land and marine
shells from Bavaria and Greenland.
J. A. Sryavey. Three trays of fresh-water shells from
Texas.
786 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Usretma C. Surra. ‘Ten trays and one bottle of land shells
from Jamaica and Pennsylvania.
W. W. Suita. Terebra cerethina Lam.
R. E. C. Stearns. Two trays of land shells from California.
Wirmer Srone. Five trays of land shells from Wyoming
county, Pa.
D. THaanum. Sixty trays of Jand and marine shells from
Hawaii and Queensland.
University oF Micuican. One hundred and six trays of
shells.
E. G. Vanarra. Forty-two trays of land and fresh-water
shells from Pennsylvania and the Philippine Islands.
T. Van Hyninc. Twelve trays of land and fresh-water shells.
J. W. Veuie. Type of Calliostoma veliei Pils. from southwest
Florida.
A. E. Verritut. Twenty-nine trays and thirteen boitles of
land shells from Bermuda.
H. von InertnG. Thirty-three trays of land and marine shells
from South America. :
Bryant WALKER. Somatogyrus from Columbia, Pa.
J.J. Wurre. Twenty-six trays of land and marine shells from
Bahamas.
Watrer F. Wess. Four trays of land shells.
JosepH Wriiicox. Fulgur pyrum, Cape Sable, southwest
Florida.
H. C. Woop, M.D. Melania from Japan.
Lewis Wooitman. ‘Twenty-one trays of marine shells from
New Jersey.
Purcuasep. Two hundred and eighty-six trays of East Indian
land shells.
INSECTS.
Mrs. C. R. Wooprurr. A small collection of East Indian
Lepidoptera.
H. C. Woop, M.D. Four hundred and fifty insects from
Japan.
ArtTaurR Erwin Brown. Two Coleopterous larva and twelve
>?
specimens of ‘‘ walking sticks.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 787
H. W. Wenzeu. A large collection of New Jersey and Penn-
sylvania ants.
Pattie Laurent. A large nest of paper wasp; two larve of
* Corydalus cornutus; egg masses of Tenodera sinensis; two blown
larvee of Hemileuca maia.
W. F. Bepnatu. Nine Coleoptera from Australia.
Epwarp Ports. ‘Ten larve of Coleoptera.
Porcuasep. A collection of Bolivian Odonata.
CRUSTACEA.
H. C. Coapman, M.D. Limulus polyphemus, Atlantic City,
Nid.
Dr. J. C. Cox. Cypris, West Australia.
H. W. Fowrer. Cambarus, western Pennsylvania and New
York.
CLARENCE B. Moore. Limulus polyphemus, Florida.
H. A. Pitsspry. Crabs from Biscayne Bay, Fla.
S. N. Rooats. Cambarus pellucidus, Mammoth Cave, Ky.
OTHER INVERTEBRATES.
F. H. Brown. Eight trays of Echinoderms, etc., New Jersey.
D. J. Buttock. Cucumaria frondosa, Bar Harbor, Me.
E. D. Cope (est.). Six species of Gordius, etc., North
America.
Howarp B. Frencn. Hyalonema sp.
J. B. Hatcuer. Terebratula dorsata, Patagonia.
Anna C. ParrsHorne. Glass sponge, Japan.
D. N. McCapven. = Strongylocentrotus, New Jersey.
H. A. Pussry. Sponge, Biscayne Bay, Fla.
Tuomas SHARPLEsS. Limnodrilus sp., West Chester, Pa.
ETHNOLOGY AND ARCHZOLOGY.
Mrs. Harrison ALLEN. Human cranium.
Henry A. Pertey. Dress of Blackfoot Squaw, Ravelstoke,
B. C.
Est. oF Dr. Ropert LaAmporn. Large collection of Mexican
antiquities.
Miss Mary DaSitva. Large polished horn.
788 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
INVERTEBRATE FOssILs.
CaArRLeEs Bouies, Jr. Aturia, Wilmington, N. C.
Rev. LeanperR TROWBRIDGE CHAMBERLAIN, D.D. Seven
hundred and twenty-four trays of Eocene and Oligocene fossils,
chiefly from the Gulf States.
J. B. Harcuer. Six species of fossils from Cape Fairweather,
Patagonia.
H. von Inerine, Ph.D. Corbula, Patagonia.
C. W. Jounsoy. One hundred and forty species of Piocene
fossils from the Caloosahatchie River.
JosEPpH Witucox. Four species of Eocene and Pliocene fossils.
MINERALS.
Joan Borpen, through C. S. Welles. Rose Quartz, Silex
quarry, Dutcher county, N. Y.
G. W. Case. Series of specimens of Zine Blende, Rush, Ark.
Rapuap Esrrapa. Galenite, Joplin, Mo.
E. J. Houston. Blende and Dolomite.
Louis Paris. Stalactite, and series of Italian Marbles.
Frances E. Perrcr. Collection of Rocks and Minerals.
THropoRE D. Ranp. Serpentine (2), Beryl (2), Sphene,
Galenite.
W. T. Ryper. Garnets, Connecticut.
Srupents’ MINERALOGICAL CiuB. Limonite Geode.
Purchased for the William S. Vaux Collection, 158 specimens.
PLANTS.
Grorce M. Bertncer. Two species of Hieraceum, New
Jersey.
Srrewarpson Brown. Four hundred and twenty-five species
of Florida plants, collected in 1894-95 by George V. Nash; 250
species of Pennsylvania and New Jersey plants.
SamuEt G. Dixon, M.D. _ Five species Violets, Rose Glen, Pa.
Mrs. A. F. Exy. Gyrostachys simplex, Lancaster county, Pa.
Tuomas Mrrenan. ‘Ten species plants, mostly from cultivation.
Maria PincKknEy. Schweinitzia odorata, Ell., North Carolina.
Mrs. E. 8. Sayres. Dryopturs Braunii, New Hampshire.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 789
Usetma C. Suiru. Thirty-five species from vicinity of Lynch-
burg, Va.
Unirep Srates Nationat Museum. Forty species North
American and European plants received in exchange.
EK. G. Vanatra. Seventy species of plants collected near
Chestertown, Md.
C. F. Saunpers. One hundred and fifty species North Ameri-
ean plants.
Additions have been acquired through purchase from the income
of the Redfield Memorial Fund as follows:
JoHN R. Barrows. One hundred and eight species California
plants, the collections of Purpus and Anthony.
THEODORE BoRNMULLER. One hundred and _ ninety-seven
species Thuringian plants, collected in 1899; 255 species African
plants from the Kamarun District.
H. E. Brown. Twenty species California and Oregon plan‘s.
Witiarp N. Crure. One hundred and seventy-three species
Jamaica plants, collection of 1900.
C. G. Prinete. Two hundred and sixty species Mexican
plants, collection of 1899.
Fosstt PLANTs.
C. B. Nicnors. Large slab of Fern impressions, Sibley Mine,
near Scranton, Pa.
51
790
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
INDEX TO GENERA, ETC.,
1900.
|
(1900.
Aletris, 485, 488
| Alisma, 662
Alismaces, 662
Allocosa, 539
Alsine, 486, 488
Alycceus, 381
Amarantacez, ; 665
Amaranthus, . . 657, 665
Amblystoma, 617
Amblystomide, <.
Ambrosia, . 649, 660, 670
Ameiurus, . 802-355
Ammodenia, 639, 641, 665
Ammodramus, . 5, 33
Abama, . 549
Abottia, . 586
Abudefduf, . 503 |
Acanthis, .. 32
Acanthobdella . 70
Acanthurus, 513
Acarina, 543
Acavide, gree Arete (7!
Acer, 649, 667
Aceraceze, 667
Achatina, 5 ee tes, ee
Achatinella, 561, 562,
564-567, 570, 576
Achatinellidee, 95, 564,
567, 571, 578
Achatinide, 133, 564, 571, 572
Achillea, 653, 660, 670
Achnanthes, 473
Achnanthoidese 473
Acnida, 665
Acrosoma, 535
Actinocyclus, 476
Adiantum, 485
Adopogon, . 483
Agalena, 532
Agalenide . 5 a ee
Agapostemon, . 376, 377
Aglena, 396, 397, 404, 410
Agnatha, 568, 564, 569
Agnathomorpha, 563, 564, 569
Agrimonia, . 485, 488
Agriolimax, one on
Agrostis, 483, 485, 662
Aira, 662
Aizoacelie, 665
Albinula, 607
Ammophila, 640-643, 646,
657-660, 662
Ampelopsis, 645, 646-649, 667
Amr hiprora, - |
| Amphitetras, 690, 730
_ Amphora, 473
Anacardiace, . 667
Anagallis, 668
Anaides, 613
Anampses, 506
Anaphalis, . 641, 670
Anaulus, 687, 735-737
Ancylus, . 457
Andrena, . . . 808-875
Andropogon, . . 646, 662
_ Anguilla, s 2 incon ene a
Anguillide, . 524
Anser, ¢ 15
Antennaride, . . . 519
Antennariusy, . . . . 6519
Anthemis, . . . 660, 670
Antirrhinum, «+»
—y.
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. vo
Anyphena, . 530, 532 | Azalea, . 546
Aphyllon, . . . . . 490 | Baccharis, 643, 646, 647,
paca ee | «502 ead 656-660, 670
meee 6) |. |. 7002)| Balena,. -. -. 34
Aquifoliaceer, . . . . 667 | Balistapus,. . . 514, 528
Agachnoidiscus, . . .. 478 | Balistes,. . . - =. = 528
melee | (a 488 | Balistide, 514, 528
Archexobdella,.. . . 59 | Balsaminacee,. . . 667
Arctonetta,. . . . . 18 Baptisia, ; 483, 546
Arctostaphylos, . . . 545 Bartonia, . hon ea AOD
Arenaria, 22, 157, 158 | Basommatophora, . 562, 570
Argiope, 395-410, 535 | Bathyphantes,. . . . 533
Argyrodes, . . HOO) 593°| Bdella, . . . . « .« 843
Argyrepeira, . . . 536 | Belogona, 556-560
eating). | SC. Dal | Berendtia, . .. . - 500-550
Arionide, 564, 569, 571, 572 Biddulphia, 475, 477, 686,
Arionta, 5 gg 99 690-731
Ariophantide, . . . . 569 | Biddulphiz, 686, 690, 727
Ariseema, » . 487, +88 | Biddulphier, . . . . 686
Een 4) s . 662 | Bidens, . . 483, 486, 670
Aronia, . . . . . . 485 | Bifidaria, 133, 426-431,
deeictiiagtay ss. | 3. 670 456, 573, 577, 590-596, 606
Artibeus, ae (90-758 | Binneyia, . . . » = 102
eee. | 40! | Blennechis,.. . . . .. “GE?
Paani. cS 480 |} Blennide, . . . « 2 alt
agcow@sucer,. . ...: 669 | Blennius, . . . . . 587
Asclepias, 486-489, 652, Bothriopupa,. -.5 «. . 610
6p4.-669:'| Branta’’s¢ -. 3 JA ae Ee
Ascyrum, . L483) | Bromusi. 02, as (ets "662
Ashmunella, 107— 109, bHo—5H0 | ‘Brotulas . ..-4,) 2 pene oko
a . 5, 28, 153) Brotulide, .. . c+ . “odd
Asplenium, ; 3» BAR | (Bobo ee isso 5). yee: ie
Aster, 483- 489, 660, 670 | Budytes, 5, 33
Athoracophoride,. . . 4561 Buliminus, 562, 067, 575
Atriplex, 640, 657-660, 665 | Bulimulide, 391, 561, 564,
Attide, 530, 539 571, 572, 580
Pee 6 ss) O82 | Bulinmlus; 89-92, 391, 392
Muecehlora, .. . . . 356] Bulinus,. . . 0669, 576
Augochloropsis, . . . 356 Cakile, 639, 657, 659, 666
Aulaeodiscus, . . . . 477) Calearius, .. 5, 30, 31
Aulacopoda, 563, 564, Calidris, 5, 27, 154
569) 570; 572. 5762) @Callotaria, . . . . .: 48
Bolostounde, . . - . 000) Callyodon, . . .;. . 512
Amlostomus,. . . « - 500 | Cambarus, . . . - & 484
Auriculide, . . . . 577 | Campanula, 483, 486, 488
Autodax, 613, 618, 620 | Campanulacez, be eG
Awaous, . : Bere Waoanisreine <2) oo aks OS) ae
792 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Cantherines, 514 | Chrysopsis, 484, 670
Canthidermis, 514 | Ceomarna, oe 133
Caprifoliacez, . 669 Circinariide, 133, 564, 571
Caprolagus, . 460-462 | Cirrhites, -+ 2) 902
Capromys, 4° 423 | Cirrhitide, 502
Caracanthide, 515, 522 Cistacez, 667
Caracanthus, 515,°522| Clangula, . . ..c) .9e
Carangide, . 501 | Clausilia 443-448, 575,
Caranx, . Meme ar ae 3s 3) 1) 583, 672-682
Carduus,. 646, 659, 660, 670 Clausiliide, . 564, 571
Carex, 483-486, 489, 546, Clivicola, 4
652, 656 Clubiona, 532
Carya, 2 345, 346 Clubionide, 532
Caryophyilaceze, 665 Clupea, 519
Cassandra, . . . 0946 | Clupeide, 519
Cassia, 649, 652, 666 Cnicus, 670
Castatia, . . . 546 | Cocconeis, ; 473
Castracania, 730 | Cochlicopa, 97, 133, 5795
Caucalis, . . . . . 668 | Cochlicopide, : 564
Cenchrus, 639, 640, 649, 662 Ccelocentrum, 550-555
Centrurus, . 530, 541 Ceelotes, . 532
Cephalacanthidee, 516 | Colpocephalum, 157
Cephalacanthus, 516 | Composite, . 670
Cepphus, 7 | Comptonia, . 484
Cerataulus, atts 690, 738 | Conferva, 689
Cheetodon, 503, 512 518, Coniferz, 661
520, 527, 528 | Conoclinium, 632
Cheetodontide, . 512, 528 Contopus, . 5
Cheetopterus, 502 | Conulus, 92, 96, 140, 383, 456
Chamzenerion, 483 Convolvulacez, . » “668
Charadrius, . . . 23 | Convolvulus, 657, 669
Charopa,’ <)>... 387, 576 | Corema, . 545, 547
Cheilinus, 521 Coriarachne, 537
Cheilio, a 510 Coris, 510
Cheilodipteridee, 502 | Cornacer, 668
Chelifer, . 9043 | Cornus, . : 348
Chelone, 485, 488 | Coscinodiscus, . 475
Chen, . 15 | Costigo, . 432
Chenopodiacex, . 665 | Cracca, 484
Chenopodium, 657, 665 Crucifers, 666
Chimaphila, 485, 488 Crustulina, . = ie
Chiracanthium, 532 Crymophilus, 20, 153, 158
Chiroderma, . 756 Crypto-Raphidiez, 686
Chiromys, 419-423 Cryptotomus, 512
Chondrotus, 617 Ctenide, 539
Chondrula, . 428 Ctenus, 539
Chrysophrys, 502 | Cyclorrhy nchus, 7
a eee eee
1900. ]
Gyoeney te as ;- 536 |
Cyclostoma, . 585
ae 426- 428,
430, 431
Gye 2 ess TB
ol ee? 3
Gyperaces,- . -. =. . 663
Cyperus,. 646, 652, 659, 662
Cypripedium, . . . . 485
eres ce See. B40
Dactyliosolin, . . . . 467
Dactylopterus,. . . . 516
Danthonia, . : . . . 483
Dasyscoms, . - . . . 484
Daucus,. . Saige os) 660
Delphinapterus, oa ae
Dendroica, ee Et) So
Dendryphantes, (30 040
Deringa, : 485, 488
Dermanura,. . 756, 758
Desmognathide, . . . 620
Desmognathus, 50, 615-
Meeps 2 Se. | 527
Diatoma, 473, 688
Diatomacez, . -. . 686
Dicrostonyx, 37, 40-42
Miya. 2 ss «OSS
Dictynide, . . . 530, 534
Dietyolathys, . . . . 534
Micdiaye- 2" = =. ~~ §«©632, 669
Diomedea, . . 154, 155, 157
Wiamedia 2... Ce 14
Diospyros, . . . . . 649
Wiplacines =... =. «- «(662
Diplommatina, 382, 576, 578
Preceplenra;) =< . . - 668
Distichlis, . . 653, 659, 662
Ditremata, . . . 4561, 571
Moi 5 sw TAB
Docophorus, . . 151-155
Dolomedes, . . 530, 538, 539
Donax, wo & A8O} 482
li oe 665
Pimekthys, 2 2 . = -620
Woryrhamphus, .. : - 519
erste: 8 pk. gfe SOSE
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
793
Drosera, 485, 488, 490,
546, 548, 647, 651, 654, 666
Droseracee, 666
Dryopteris, 548, 651, 652, 661
Dules, . . : 502, 520
Dulichium, . . . 485, 488
Dysderide, 531
Echeneidide, . . 517, 525
Echeneis, . . . 517, 528
Echidna, 495, 496, 524
Elasmognatha, 564, 569, 570
Eleocharis, . . 485, 488, 663
Eleotris,. . . . 516, 523
Elopidee, oe Vee ee
Bilops: <2 4/ce. 20 ae ee
Endodonta,. . . 93, 576
Endodontide, 147, 387,
564, 571
Engraulidide, AOL
Eniconetta,. . . . 18
Kpeira, . . . . 980, 536
| Epeiride, . . . 530, 535
Epinephelas, . 602, 527
Epiphragmophora, 99-105,
109, 389, 556, 560
Eptesicus, 795
Hqnula, <> 2 a: 502, 526
Kquulide, . . . 902, 526
Erechites, a> gla 3 7 E86
Erechtites, . . . 6957, 670
Ereunites, 26
Ericacez, 668
Erigeron, 342
Hrenachus® set 42. 43
Eriophorum, . . 485, 488
Eryngium, 668
Eubifidaria, 4 606
Eucampia, 688, 742, 743
Eucampiez , Sey oe OOT
Eudromias,. . Pig esos
Eulota, 578
Eunotia, 474
Eunotogramma, Sh cath Gant
Eupatorium, 483, 485,
488, 649, 653, 670
Euphiedusa, 672, 673, 675
94 PROCEEDINGS OF
Euphorbia, 639, 640, 643,
Euphorbiaceze,
Eupomacentrus,
Kurymetopus,
Kuthamia,
Exoceetide, .
Exoccetus,
Fagaceze,
Waleo, 3° +
Fauxulus,
Festuca, .
Fierasfer,
Fierasferide,
Filistata,
Filistatidee,
Fimbrystylis,
Fistularia,
Flammalina,
Forcipiger,
Fragilaria,
Fratercula, .
Fuirena,
Galeopithecus,
Galium,
Galtonia,
Gamasus, ;
Gasteracantha, .
Gastrodonta,
Gaucelmus, .
Gavia,
Gayenna, .
Gay lussacia, °
Gentiana,
Gentianacex,
Genyoroge, .° .
Georissa,
Geotriton
’
Geraniaceze,
Geranium,
659, 660,
508,
485, 488,
344,
118, 115,
141-147,
530,
484,
486,
485,
Gerardia, 484, 486, 641,
646,
Glabaris,
Glaudinide,.
Glaux,
654, 659,
564,
666
667
527
157
A487
500
500
664
28
596 |
662
O20
5238 |
531
531
663
500
D76
512
473
7
663
423
632 |
B45 —
D4 3
Doo
456
533
5, 6
532
D46
488
669
527
384
618 |
666
666
THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Glossiphonia, 56, 58, 60,
63-65, 69
| Glossiphonide, . 450, bs 70
| Glyphisodon, ‘ 503
Gnaphalium, 483
Gnaphosa, . 5382
Gnathobdellide, : os ee
Gobiide. ... = ‘SIG>2a
Gobius, . . -. i. © \ehipeee
Gomphonema, P 473
Gomphosuy, . . . . 910
Goniobasis,. . . 149, 458
Graminer, . . .:. © aan
Grammistes, 502
Gratiola, . — =a
Graya, '. . - . 6@iigaE
Grus, =. a 20
Guinardia, .. (aa
Guppya, 92, 96, 97, 105, 386
Guttiferz, .
_Gyrinophilus, .. 619, 620
Gyrostachys, 488, 646, 654, 664
Habrocestum, . . . . 540
Heemopis, 59
Halicheeres, 510
Halictus, 342
Hallogracinacez, 668
Haplopupa, . > ae
Happia,. . . 985, 386
Helianthemum, . 483, 487
Helianthus, . . 649, 670
Helicella, - =)
Helicide, 117, 388, 564,
571, 572
Helicina, 96, 116, 393,
394, 449, 576
Helicinide, . 116, 393, 569
Helicodiscus, yar 148
Helix, . 100, 383, 559, 575
Hemiaulidiex, -. is.
Hemiaulus, . 687, 7388-74L
Hemidactylium, . 618, 620
Hemigymnus, ay 527
Hemiphedusa,. . 675, 679
Hemipteronotus, 508
Hemiramphide, 498
| Hemiramphus, 499
1900. ]
NATURAL SCIENCES
Herpobdella, 57, 58, 65
Herpobdellide, . 59, 67
Herpyllus, : 532
Heterurethra, . 564, 570, 571
Hibiscus, 643, 651-656, |
659, 667
Hieracium, . 483, 670
Hirudinea, . 67, 68-71
Hirudo, . 59,. 69
Holeus, . ;- 3660); 662
Holocentride, 501, 520, 526
Holocentrum, 520
Holocentrus, 501, £ 508, 520, 526
Holopoda, 563, 564, 569,
570, 576
Homalattus, 540
Morons, 2). fe 28 |
Hudsonia, 644, 652, 659,
660, 667
Huttonia, 687, 737
Hyacinthus, 438 |
Hydrocenide, 576
Hydrocotyle, . 668 |
Hydrosera, . 687, 754
Hylobates, 414-418
Hylocichla, . BO! Bo: |
Hypericum, 646, 654, 667 |
Hypopitys, 485, 490
Hyporhampus, . anv AgS. |
Hypoxys, . 484, 546
Hypselostoma, 596
fetus; +. septip i DAO
Ilex, 349, 645, 648, 649,
659, 667
Immersidens, be OUG
Impatiens, 652, 667
_ . 459
Tonactis, . pes OO
Iphigenia, : 480, 481
Isthmia, . 478, 686, 688, 689
Isthmicze, ..« “686; 688
Iva, 648, 652, 656-659, 670
Janellidee, 562
Juglans, vy ee ORD
Julis, 508, 510
Juncacee, 668
. Junco, 4 |
OF PHILADELPHIA.
Juncus,
' 485, 486, 489,
548, 647, 652-654, 659, 663
Juniperus, 646, 648, 649,
652, 659, 661
| Kaliella, . 383
Kalmia, 484, 645, 647, 668
Katadysas, . 529, 532
Kneiffia, i sey 1656
Kosteletskya, 645, 654,
659, 660, 667
Kuhlia, 502; 520, 527
| Kuhlide, 502, 520, 527
Labiate, " 669
| Labride, 506, d21 a2
Labrus, 508, 508, 510, 527
Lacinaria, ie nal
Lactuca, - 660) Gf
Lagopus, APA Pao, 11S)
Lampsilis, 74-77
Darina; . . fy EEO
Larus, 5, 9, An 152, 153; 159
| econ en ; aye ode
Lathyrus, 642, 658- 660, 666
Lauderia, 467, 475
Laurace, peGOG
Lechea, 645, 660, 667
Leguminosze, : 666
Leiuranus, <7 hap AO:
Lemmus, ae 40-42
Leptamnium, . 490
Leptilon, s 641, "660, 671
Leptinaria, . 95-98
_ Leptocephalidee, 494
Leptocephalus, . sai ags
Lepus, é . 35, 460, 462
Lespedeya, at 649, 659, 666
Lestris, 153
Tengnchil, : 5085
Leucochiloides, Be O8D
Leurognathus, 620, 621
3 | Liatris, 342, 671
_ Liliaceze, 664
| Lilium, 664
Limacide, 147, 564, "569,"
571, 572, 576
Limax, ighatihi Ono
Limnea, 457, 567, 569
796 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
485, 488
Limnodorum,
Limodorum, .
Limonium, 653, 654,
Limosa, .
Linacez,
Linum,
Linyphia,
Liobunum,
Lipeurus,
Lippia, :
Lithodesmium, .
Lithyphantes,
Lobelia, .
Lonicera,
Lophiola,
Lophius,
Loris,
Lunda,
Lutianidee,
Lycondontis,
Lycopersicon , .
Lycopodium,
Lycopus,
‘484, 645,
Lycosidee,
Lygodium,
Lynx,
Lyropupa,
Lysimachia,
Lyssomanes,
Lyssomanidee,
Lythracer, .
Macoma,
Macrochlamys, .
Macropharyngodon,
Macrorhamphus, .
Magnolia, 488, 547,
‘Magnoliace: x,
Mahadeva,
Malvacex,
Marptusa,
Marrubium,
Mastogloia, .
Medionidus,
Megalopta, . . 356,
Meibomia, . . 649,
485, 488,
Lycosa; ... . 396,
546
Oe
866
659, 666
649, 669
530, 538
530, 537
548
48
452
"483, 546
530, 541
541
667
"480, 481
382
508
27
649, 665
665
535
op Qr9O
00/, of9
659, 666
[ 1900.
Melampyrum, 546
Melania, 5d76
_ Melastomacexe, . 2s 6S
_ Melosira, 466, 474, 686
_ Menopon, : 158, 159
Merganser, :. <0. 3 se
Meridion, ; . ATS
| Microbdella, 51-71
Microcystis, . O76
| Micropus, 515, 522
Mikandia, 6498
| Misumeng, .. . 2 pp
_ Meehringia, . 665
_ Molide, . 514
Monacanthide, 514
Monacanthus, 514
_Monarda, 646, 649, 659, 669
| Monoceros, . 513
Monotremata, . . . . 561
Monotropa, . 485, 490
- Mugil, 500, 524, 525
Mugilidee, 500, 524, 526
Muhlenbergia, . . 5a
Mullidee, 520
Mullus, . . ae
Murrena, 494, 496, 524
Murvenide, 494, 524
Murchisonia, . . . . 329
Myctophidee, 498
Myctophum, 498
Mygale, . » tela
Myodes, aS 40
Myrica, 643, 646, 649, 653,
659, 664
Myricacez, . 664
Myrichthys, 494
Myriophyllum, . . 668
Myriprisiis,.. ... ./S00aam
Myrmeciophila, 530
Myrmecophila, . 530
Mysmena, 533
Nabalus, . 485, 488
Neesiotus, .. . <<, ene
Nalades,, <i. <. . 5 -s eee
Najadaces,. . . . . 661
Mamicule,.- .) ..°° . © bee
Naviculoidex, 473
a eS
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES
Wearemidges . . . . 610 |
Neopetreus, . . . . 392
Weosubulinae 2... . . 98
Wepbromaias, . - . . 77
Nesopupa, 431, 482
Nirmus, . 158, 154
Nitzschia, Ree al Ae
Manilariacs) .- i) 4... 84
Nothoceratium, . . . 730
INumenius, < 2 . . .% 4
Nyctea, 28, 153
Wisse, « . - . ,649, 668
@bolella, <<. . .-... 329
Ohovasitess wou st 78
Gighemiten. . . . « 43
Odontelltin .. =< ©. 3. 695
Odontostomus, . . . 893
CEdipus, . "619-621
(Enothera, 545. 5, 632, 641,
659, 660, 668
Oidemia, . 5, 20, 152, 159
Genetics. . .. . . . 829
Oligocheta, 56, 62, 70
Olor. > .. 4
Omphalina, 113, 115, 134-136
Onagracee, . 1a, 1608
Opeas, . ‘ 96, 5G; O01
Ophichthyid:e, : 494
Ophioglossacee, . . . 661
Ophigelossum, . . .,. 661
Ophisurus, 494
Orchidacez, 664
Gedemmuis 2s 2 .. -... 535.,
Orandella, - . =. . -° 67
Orthotomium, : 393
Orthurethra, 562, 564, 569-576
Osmunda, 652, 661
Osmundacee, es i 661
Ostodes,. ; SO70—000
Ovoides, we... O28
Mixybeles . -. ; 523
Oxycoccus, 647, 668
Oxyg raphis, ee. 666
Oxmyones, - . . . . 539
Oxyopide, _ ee re
Oxypolis, 486, 488, 652, 668
Oxypilas. 2 . . . . O58t
OF PHILADELPHIA. 797
Pachylomerus, .
Pagophilajg,: -:\/ 2h lee 3
Panicularia;. ..<!- «we ay s662
Panicum, 483-489, 549,
643, 646-649, 654, 662
Pardosa, 539
Parthenocissus, . . . 667
Partula, 561, 562, 564,
570, 578, 576-579
Partulide, 564, 571
Parexoccetus, wisi ve yoo
Paspalum, . . . 486,.6382
Passerinay 29° .- 2. .') Silt
Pedicularis, . 483
ErCay™ Com 3o OG cue OU
WEronmseuss © 2 Ga5 4 kos
Petroskirtes, > 2: =3 3. OER
Pencetia, 2. =» . «5389
Phalacrocorax, neo w20
Phalangida, ©. ..._ .j.=:54il
Phalaropus, | 5, 22
Phegopteris, 548
Phidippus, 639, 540)
Pinlodromus, “.° .- 20. bol
Philomycide, 147, 564,
569, 571
Philomycus, . 115,147
Phoca;. seen
Pholeidse, 92> 2a a 5 ook
Pholeus, ork. sage MAROU
Phrurolithus, 5382
Phryma, : 488
Phyllostoma, .° , ©1756, 757
Bhysas ©. 9) 45 ood
Phy tolacca, 646
Pieris, . . A485
Pinus, 632, 645, 647-649, 661
Pisaurina, pee: DS
Pisoddonophis, 494
Placobdella, 2, 2. fa<:.) “61
Placostyius; 35 +. =. 24061
Blapiolae’ (xs. 034 ve EL
Planorbis;) 3° qed he) 569
Plantaginacee,. . . . 669
Plantago, . : . 6547, 669
Elatytrochus, © -\. 24cfcl 450
| Plectana, 536
798
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
[1900.
Pteris, . 483, 649, 661
Pterois, . . \. ze
| Ptilimnium, 643, 646, 652,
654, 668
Ptychobranchus, . . . 79
Puffinus, oy
Punctum, 115, 148, 575
Pupa, 94, 427, 428, 573,
576, 577, 583-608
Pupide, 133, 564, 571,
573, 576, 583
Pupina, (2) Sa
Pupoides, 426, 428, 456,
573, 585-590, 605
Putorius, . 44, 751
| Pyramidula, 113, 115, 116,
Plethodon, 618, 620 |
Plethodontide, . 617
Pleurobema, . 80-82
Pleurocera, . 149, 457, 458
Pleuroceratide, 149
Pleurosigma,, 5. VATS
Ploiaria, . 687, 741, 742
Pluchea, . 632, 659, 671
Plumbaginaceze, 669 |
Plutoma, . 575 |
Podophthalmidze, . 539
Podophyllum, 487, 488
Peecilia, *. 3S. ES
Pogonia, . 484, 485, 489, 546 |
Polycheeta, “be
Polydactylus, . ool
Polygala, 485, 488, “490,
546, 666
Polygalacez, 666
Polygonacex, oy es
Polygonatum, 485, 664
Polygonum, 646, 652, 659, 664
Polygyra, 1138, 115-133,
449-454, 556
Polygyratia, 388, 389
Polymita, 100 |
Polynemid, 501
Polynemus, . 501
Polypodiaceze, «3 GOE
Pomacentride, . 520, 527
Pomacentrus, 503
Pontederia, . 549
Populus, . 485
Porpeia, . 731
Primulaces, 668
Privatula, 606
Proserpinacea, 8
Prostheclina, . . 530, 540
Prosthesima, 531
Protoglyptus, i. ORES aes
Prunus, 645, 649, 666
Psammobia, 480, 481
Pseudocheilinus, 521
Pseudochromide, 523
Pseudochromis, . 623
Pseudodon, 84
Pseudoscorpionida, 548
147, 148, 457
Pyrola, 485, 488
Quadrula, . . 7a
Quercus, 350, 484, 645-
649, 664
Hangifer, ...-. 979
Ranunculaces, . 666
Ranunculus, 666
Raphistoma, 329
Rathousiide, 571
Ranzania, : 7 "Bee
Realiide, 569, 576, 577
Remora, . O17
Rhabdonema, . « Mo
Rhexia, 549, 668
Rhinoseopelus, 498
Rhipidoglossa, 576
Rhizosolenia, 467
Rhodostethia, 13, 151
Rhoicosphenia, . 473
Rhus, 648, 645-647, 649,
652, 657, 659, 660, 667
Rhyncospora, 485, 488,
548, 654, —
Rhytidide, 564, 572
Rissa, . 6, 12
Romerolagus, i - 462
Rosa, 646-648, 652, 657, 666
Rosacex, 666
Rubiacex, = “ae
Rubus, «.. 485, 484, 645, 666
———————————
1900. ]
Rumex, .
Rumina, .
Runcinia, Sia
iappiag 93. «| G58,
Sabbatia, 483, 549, 643,
653, 654,
Sagina, Bae
Saitis,
Salacia, . ven
Balerias, . = is, + . SLT,
Salicornia, 653, 659, 650,
SOU TTACL Ea ne rr
Salsola, 639, 640, 657,
659, 660,
Sanguinolaria, . sue
Sanicula, 485,
Sardinella, pee:
Sassafras, 647, 649,
Saurida, . hes:
Savastana,
Saxicola,
Searichthys, cart
Scaride, . = a HON:
Scarus, 510, 512,
Schiza, . 548,
Scicena, Tee
Scicenus, .
Scirpus, . 643, 646, 651,
652, 656, 663
Sciuropterus,
Scleria,
Scolithus,
Scolodonta, .
Scomber,
Scorpzena
Scorpzenenopsis,
Scorpzenidee,
Scorpionida,
Scrophulariaceze,
Scutalus,
Scutelaria,
Sebastopistes,
Sebastopsis, .
Selenites,
Selenitidee,” .
Semele, .
Senecio, .
484, 486, 488,
165,
NATURAL SCIENCES
664
67 |
537
661
669
665
540
730
518
665
498
665
480
9, 488
| Spartina, .
OF PHILADELPHIA. 799
Sergiolus,* . 531
Sericocarpus, Jit 404
Serranide, 502, 527
Sesuvium, 640, 659, 660, 665
Sieglingia, . 646, 659, 662
Sigmurethra, . 563, 564,
569-572
Simorhynchus, . sage ri
Sisyrinchium, 483
Sium, o 4 7s (45a 1665
Smilax, . 485, 488, 549,
648, 649, 663
Solanacese, : 669
Soletellina, . 480
Solidago, 342, 483, 487,
549, 641, 643, 645, 646,
Somateria,
Somolus,
Sonorella,
a!
Sorex, ‘
Sparide, .~ .
Sparosomus, .
Spelerpes,
Spermophilus,
| Spermophora,
Spheeronycteris,
| Spheroides,’ .
| Sphyreena,
| Sphyrzenide,
| Spiropalpus,
Squatarola, .
Statice,
Staurodon,
Stauroneis,
Stenogyra,
Stenogyride,
Stenotrema, .
Stephanoda,
Stercorarius,
Stereophzedusa, .
Sterkia, .
Sterna,
Stethojulis, .
Stictodiscus,
Stolephorus,
649, 659, 671
sae 16
668
. 556-560
502
658, 657-660, 662
6138, 616-620
. Oo, 43
O81
759
J. “Ola
501, 520
501, 520
533
00 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1900.
Stolidoma, . . 98 | Theraphoside, 2 {hee
Streptaxidee, 385, 564, 571, 572 | Theridiide, . 530, 533
Strix, “ 153 | Theridium, . 093
Strobilops, Shs ety dee) Thendula, 533
Strophocheilus, 389-391, | Thomisidx, 536
394, 564 Thyrsoidea, ; 494
Strophostyles,. 640, 641, | Thysa, 457
645, 646, 649, 659, 666 Tibellus, . 537
Stylommatophora, . 562 Tiedemannia, 668
Suzeda, A ee a at Abbe | Ediigutisia, . bt Sa
Subtlina oes. aae 1 agleOG |) Pate 653, 659, 660, 665
Succinea, 94, 95, 97, 99, Tmarsus, . b37
102, 149, 570, 575, 576 | Tofiedia, .- ee
Succineide, 149, 561, 564, 571 | Torix, . . . 50, 67-69
Synedra, 477 Tornatellina, 95, 96, 98,
Synemas Nah 2.4 rh. ease 4 573, 576, 578
Syngnathide, 519 | Torquilla, . 96
Syngnathus, . . .« 919 | Tracheopulmonata, 562
Surirella, 468-471, 477 | Trachurops,. . . . . 501
Synodontide, 497 | Triadenum, 652, 654, 667
Synodus, 497 Triceratium, 478, 690, 721,
Trenioglossa, 4 os 727-739
Tagelus, . 480, 481 | Trientalis, 668
Tarsius, 4 oy tet, 428: | Deinaerm: ie 739
Taxeodonta, . . 143, 383 | Tringa, 4, 5, 24-26, 154
Taxodium, 300 | Tritoponia, . . . ~ .~ ce
Tegenaria, . . 9032 Trochocyathus, 436, 437
Tellina, 480, 481 | Trochomorpha, . 92, 576, 578
Tellinacea, . « « » 480 | Trochosa, ee
Terpsinoé, . 478, 687,.f02 | Deynpites; . <9. eee
Terpsinoé:e, ‘| Aare BG a 651, 659, 661
Testacellidee, 564, 571 Typhlotriton, . 620
Tetradon, . 528 Tyrannophiedusa, 676
Tetradrachmum, 503, 520 | Uloboride, . . . . . ddd
‘Tetragnatha, 536 | Uloborus, 539
Tetragnathide, . . 936 | Umbellifere, «Ga
Tetraodontide, . p14, 628 | Unie, . . * ~ ieee
Teucrium, 646, 657, 669 | Unionide, . . . . 3) 4
Teutana, . . . 533 | Upenoides, . i
Teuthidide, . . 613 | Upeneus, . . , 020, 526
Teuthig,/. 4 .. Sige) ener | Race, a ee 6
Thalarctos, . . . . . 44 Urocoptide, 564, 571
Thallassoma, 510 Uroderma, 756-758
Thanatidius, 539 | Utricularia,. . 548, 549
Thanatus, 537 Vaccinium, 484, 546, 645,
Thargalia, hx 9 a ee 647, 668
Thelypteris, .... .. ).,.« -653)| Wallisneria,.>... 5. (ae
_ ee eee
a
1900. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
Delicuidee - |. «C.:SC«OG4 Vulpes, . 2. se
Vampyrops, - - . - (06) Willughbea, . . 649,
Wan Eleurckig, . . . 473 | Xanthium, . . 640, 657,
Vasopulmonata, . 562, 564 | Xema, Be FIs.
Vejovis,. . . . 930, 541 | Xyridacez, 2s, Wap Weta
Wermena,e > >.” 654, 669 | Xyris, . . . 485, 483,
Memenuseoea ys. = ~. 669 | Xysticus,s ..: 2°. .
Vernonia, . . 341, 342, 486 | Zanclide,
Veronicellide, . . 571 | Zanclus, .
Vertigo, 97, 98, 133, 583, | Zaptyx,
sao ous, | Zonites;*.. 2 24s ae
Vertigopsis, . . . . 607 | Zonitide, 134, 564, 569,
Wertitizeaere =. 4... -. 610 571,
Vespertilio,. . . . . 757 | Zonitoides, 113, 115, 140,
Vesperus, . 759 141, 384,
Walwenany, 485, 488, 649, 670 | Zonotrichia, .
Viola, 483, HO. 4504 486, 489 | Zora, . . « . 529,
Wiaces > > = : =:. - 667 | Zoropside Fay 2
Vitis,. . 649, 651, 659, 667 | Zostera,
Vitrea, 93, 115, 138-140, Zygoballus, <4.) 4 ey
149, 150, 384, 456 | Zygoceros,-. . . 690,
Vitrinizonites,. 1138, 115, 187
802
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
GENERAL INDEX.
1900.
Additions to Museum, 780.
Ashhurst, John, Jr., M.D., an-
nouncement of death of, 441.
Baker, Frank C. A review of
the Phys of Northeastern
Tllinois, 379, 412.
Banks, Nathan. Arachnida
from Alabama, 378, 529.
Biological and Microscopical
Section, report of, 771.
Botanical Section, report of,
773.
Boyer, Charles S. The Bid-
dulphoid forms of North |
American Diatomace, 339,
685. Report of the Bio-
logical and Microscopical Sec-
tion, 771.
Brown, Arthur Erwin.
view of the genera and species
of American Snakes north of
Mexico, 684.
Brown, Stewardson. Report
of the Conservator of the
Botanical Section, 774.
Burgin, Caroline A. Edible
and poisonous mushrooms,
684.
Calvert, Philip P., Ph.D., ap-
pointment on Committee on
Publication, 380.
Camac, William, M.D., an-
nouncement of death of, 380.
Carter, Oscar C. S. Petrified
forest and caye-dwellings of
Arizona, 684.
Chapman, Henry C., M.D.
Respiratory quotient and loss
in volume of expired air, 379
Observations on the anatomy
of Hylobates leuciscus and
Chiromys madagascariensis,
412, 414. Report of Cura-
tors, 767.
Cockerell, T. D. A. Descrip-
tions of new bees collected by
Mr. H. H. Smith in Brazil,
I, 87, 356.
Cockerell, T. D. A., and Wil-
matte Porter. A new cray-
fish from New Mexico, 425,
437.
| Committees, Standing, 1.
| Conchological Section, report of,
A re- |
reek
Corresponding Secretary, re-
port of, 763.
Coues, Elliott, announcement
of death of, 2.
Council for 1901, 779.
Curator of William S. Vaux
Collections, report of, 770.
Curators, report of, 767.
Dall, William H. Additions
to the insular land-shell
fauna of the Pacific coast,
especially of the Galapagos
and Cocos Islands (Plate
VIII), 87, 88.
Elections during 1900, 779.
England, James B., announce-
ment of death of, 87.:
(1900.
1900. ]
Entomological Section, report
of, 772.
Fowler, Henry W. Notes on
Ameiurus prosthistius, 339,
352. Contributions to the
ichthyology of the tropical
Pacific (Plates XVIII, XIX,
XX), 491, 493.
Goldsmith, Edward.
lapsing crater, 424. ‘
Hamilton, S. MHarbert. Re-
marks on water analysis, 378.
Harshberger, John W., Ph.D.
History of botany in Phila-
delphia, 339. An ecological
study of the New Jersey
strand flora, 492, 623.
Harvey, F. L., announcement
of death of, 339.
Hayden Geological Memorial
Fund, modification of trust,
340.
Holman, D. Shepherd.
waves, 380.
Index to Genera, 790.
Keeley, Frank J. Motion of
diatoms, 339.
Keller, Ida A. Notes on Hya-
cinth roots (Plate XIII),
424, 438.
Kellogg, Vernon L., and Shin-
kai I. Kuwana. Mallophaga
from Alaskan birds (Plate
Ni) .).2; 251.
Krauth, Charles P., announce-
ment of death of, 2.
Librarian, report of, 764.
Lyman, Benjamin Smith, The
Raubsville Cave, 464.
MacElwee, Alexander. Flora
of Willow Grove and the
Edgehill Ridge, 412, 402.
Sound-
Mackellar, Thomas, announce- |
ment of death of, 2.
Meehan, ‘Thomas.
tions to the life history of
NATURAL SCIENCES
A col- |
| Ortmann,
Contribu- |
Palmer, T. C., and F. J. Kee-
plants, No. XIV, 339, 341. |
OF PHILADELPHIA. 808
Appointment to prepare bio-
graphical notice of Charles E.
Smith, 412, 612. Report of
Botanical Section, 773.
Miller, Adolph W. Zodlogi-
cal and botanical gardens of
Paris and Germany, 612.
Milne-Edwards, Alphonse, an-
nouncement of death of, 380.
Mineralogical and Geological
Section, report of, 776.
Mivart, St. George, announce-
ment of death of, 378.
Montgomery, Thomas H. Re-
cent studies of the Gordi-
aces, 2.
Moore, Clarence B. Certain
antiquities of the Florida
West Coast, 441, 442.
Moore, J. Percy. A descrip-
tion of Microbdella bian-
nulata with especial regard
to the constitution of the
Leech somite (Plate VI), 2,
50. Notes on some _ post-
Jarval changes in the verte-
bral articulation of Spelerpes
and other Salamanders, 491,
613.
Morris, Charles. Subterranean
waters, 340, 412.
Museum, additions to, 780.
Nolan, Edward J., M.D. Re-
port of Recording Secretary,
760. Report of Librarian,
764.
Officers, Councillors and Mem
bers of the Committee on Ac-
counts for 1901, 778.
Ornithological - Section,
ols Tle:
report
A. E. Crustacea
and Pynecogonida collected
during the Princeton Arctic
Expedition of 1899, 749.
the
ley. The structure of
804
Diatom girdle (Plates XV,
XVI), 425, 465.
Pilsbry, Henry A. Notes on
the anatomy of the Helicid
genus Ashmunella, 87, 107.
Mollusea of the Great Smoky
Mourtains, 87, 110. Notes
on some Southern Mexican
shells, 339. New South
American land snails (Plates
XI-XIT), 340,385. Notice of
new Japanese land snails, 331.
Note on Australian Pupidee,
425, 426. Note on Polyre-
sian and East Indian Pupide,
431. Additions to the Japan-
ese land-snail fauna, No. IT
(Plate XIV), 441, 448.
Notes on certain Mollusca
from Southwestern Arkansas,
441, 449. On the zodlogi-
cal position of Partula and
Achatinella (Plate XVII),
442, 561. Lower California
species of Ccelocentrum and
Berendtia, 464, 550. Sono-
rella, a new genus of Helices
(Plate XXI), 491, 556.
The genesis of Mid-Pacific
faunas (Plates XXII,
XXIII), 491, 568. Addi-
tions to the Japanese land-
snail fauna, III (Plates
XXIV, XXV), 612, 672.
Crustacea from
ceous formation of New Jer-
sey, 749. Report of Con-
lard dl
chological Section, 772.
Pilsbry, Henry A., and Edward
G. Vanatta. <A partial re-
vision of the Pupz of the
United States, 491, 582.
Platt, Franklin, announce-
ment of death of, 442.
Rammelsberger, Carl F., an-
nouncement of death of, 2.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
the Creta-.
| Sargent,
[1900.
Rand, Theodore D. Notes on
the geology of Southeastern
Pennsylvania, 160. Report
of Mineralogical and Geologi-
cal Section, 776.
Rankin, Walter M. Report
on the Echinoderms collected
off the west coast of Green-
land by the Princeton Arctic
Expedition of 1899, 750.
Recording Secretary, report
of, 760.
Rehn, James A. G. Notes on
Chiroptera, 759.
Report of the Biological and
Microscopical Section, 771.
Report of Botanical Section,
773.
Report of the
Section, 771
Report of Corresponding Secre-
tary, 763.
Report of the Curator of the
William S. Vaux Collections,
110:
Report of Curators, 767.
Report of Entomological Sec-
tion, 772.
Report of Librarian, 764.
Report of the Mineralogical
and Geological Section, 776.
Report of the Ornithological
Section, 776.
Report of the Recording Secre-
tary, 760.
Rhoads, Samuel N. A _ new
weasel from Western Pennsyl-
vania, 749, 751.
Roberts, Charles, election as
member of Council, 412.
Sangree, Ernest B., M.D., an-
nouncement of death of, 87.
Annie Bell. — Pre-
liminary notes on the rate of
growth and on the develop-
ment of instincts in Spiders
(Plates IX, X), 340, 395.
Cortchological
1900.]
Saunders, C. F. The pine bar-
rens of New Jersey, 2, 544.
Sharp,
tary, 765.
Shufeldt, R. W. On the oste- |
ology of Vulpes macrotis,
413, 425. Osteology of the
Psittaci, 684.
Simpson, Charles T. New and
unfigured Unionide (Plates
J-V), 74.
Skinner, Henry, M.D. Pro-
tective mimicry in insects,
684. Report of Entomologi-
eal Section, 772
Smith, Charles E., announce-
ment of death of, 379
Standing Committees, 1.
Staudinger, Otto, announce-
ment of death of, 684.
Stone, Witmer. Report on the
52
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
Benjamin, M.D. Re-
port of Corresponding Secre- —
805
birds and mammals collected
by the McIlhenny Expedition
to Pt. Barrow, Alaska, 4.
Description of a new Rabbit
from Liu Kiu Islands and a
new Flying Squirrel from
Borneo, 442, 460. Report
of Ornithological Section, 776.
Tasker, Stephen P. M., an-
nouncement of death of, 339.
Vaughan, T. Wayland. Tro-
chocyathus Woolmani, a new
coral from the Cretaceous of
New Jersey, 378, 436.
Von Thering, H. The Musculus
cruciformis of the Order Tel-
linacea, 441, 480.
Williams, Edward H., an-
nouncement of death of, 2.
Wister, William Wynne, Jr.,
announcement of death of,
413.
PLATE I.
1900.
SCI. PHILA.
NAT.
PROC. ACAD.
NEW AND UNFIGURED UNIONIDA.
SIMPSON.
ND UNFIGURED UNION!
NEW A
SIMPSON.
SIMPSON] NEW" AnD-UNFIGURED UNIONIDAD
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1900 PEATE VV
A z
SIMPSON. NEW AND UNFIGURED UNIONID-.
1p
PLA
4900.
NAT. SCI. PHILA
ACAD.
PROC.
URED UNIONID-.
J
SIMPSON. NEW AND UNFIG
PLATE Vi.
1900.
- PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA.
BAe
MOORE. MICROBDELLA BIANNULATA.
KELLOGG AND KUWANA. MALLOPHAGA FROM
ALASKAN BIRDS.
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1900. PLATE VIII.
DALL. PACIFIC INSULAR LAND-SHELL FAUNAS.
ESTIVE GLAND
Nae OESOPH. COMMIS.
PLATE IX.
EPRODUCTIVE
INTESTINE
SUCKING
STOMACH
\ MUSCLE
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1900.
2. MUSCLE /“ STOMACH OVARY
EYES Vp ~ ;
in
ASST) =
MUSCLE i : CUTICLE
: ia Sade YY OL Kk
CHELICERA Xe RagAS Boi
CHITINOUS | MOUTH UN Wi
HOOK UPPER UNG
ip SPINNARETS
oO)
(6)
SPINNING
GLANDS
A.B.S. del.
SARGENT. DEVELOPMENT OF SPIDERS:
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1900. PEATE Xx:
747 2D
X
\
ie
\
EN ie
BN i
SARGENT. DEVELOPMENT OF SPIDERS.
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1900 PLATE XI:
PILSBRY. SOUTH AMERICAN LAND SNAILS.
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1900. PLATE XII.
D
PILSBRY. SOUTH AMERICAN LAND SNAILS.
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1900. PLATE: XIII.
Kbit. EE VvACIN TH ROO:
PLATE XIV.
PROC, ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1900.
PILSBRY. JAPANESE LAND SNAIL FAUNA.
PROG. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1900. PLATE XV.
PALMER AND KEELEY. GIRDLE OF DIATOMS.
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1900 PLATE XVI.
PALMER AND KEELEY. GIRDLE OF DIATOMS
2. » oy Vs ey
a 2 ee
NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1900.
PROC. ACAD.
A
A.
A
ACHATINELL
IN CF
FPILSBRY. ZOOLOGICAL POSITI
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1900. PLATE XVIII.
@ ee" & :
. ny nti time he
“4, e.
FOWLER, ICHTHYOLOGY OP THE RRO RIC Nc, NGG:
1. LYCODONTIS PARVIBRACHIALIS FOWLER. 2. ECHIDNA ZONATA FOWLER.
3. MYRICHTHYS MAGNIFICUS (assortt). 4. LYCODONTIS EUROSTA (apport).
5. LYCODONTIS ACUTIROSTRIS (AssortT). 6. LYCODONTIS KAUPI (AsgoTT).
C
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1900. PLATE XIX.
ee
Pe
FOWLER. ICHTHYOLOGY OF THE TROPICAL PACIFIC.
STOLEPHORUS PURPUREUS' FOWLER.
SYNODUS SHARPI FOWLER.
HEMIRAMPHUS DEPAUPERATUS- LAy AND BENNETT.
MUGIL CALDWELLI FOWLER.
FIERASFER PARVIPINNIS (Kaur).
apon =
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 4900. PLATE XX.
BOVE Cit iyOLOGY OF THE, TROPICAL PACIFIC:
HEMIPTERONOTUS COPE! FowLer
OVOIDES OPHYRUS' (Cope).
BROTULA TOWNSEND! Fow er.
SPHEROIDES FLOREALIS (Cope).
CARACANTHUS MACULATUS (Garay).
ao f wn =
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1900. PLATE XXII.
a
Sg,
30 ca 15 ¥ 3
i 2 4
1 2. r
= i | > ‘
\ =
{eae
~ 4 :
NS j
Seed
we =
04
ey
Veet
Nea |
e
P an: h
2
b= f 5
=e
+
x 6
PILSBRY DEL.
PILSBRY. SONORELLA.
PROC. ACA. NAT. SCI. PHILA, 1900. PLATE XXII.
(Vanatta del.)
PILS AR Y and VANAT TEA, REVISION OF PUPS
PROG, ACAD, NAT. SCI PHILA. 19300. PLATE XXIII.
Ss
(Uanatta del.) 9 11
PILSHRY and VANATTA. REVISION OF PUPA
PROC, ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1900. PLATE XXIV.
(Mee ¢-)
eye
prethy Fa lee
13 14 15
PILSBRY. JAPANESE LAND SNAIL FAUNA.
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1900. PLATE XXV.
PILSBRY. JAPANESE LAND SNAIL FAUNA.
’
‘i
a
=
~ 7
:
ge
me
~~,
ao
, aioe
-
; &
1
_ -
aad
yo
»
ie ct aay?
wire
»
‘
‘ae ee
aid
QH Aeademy of Natural Sciences
1 of Philadelphia
A2 Proceedings
¥. 52
Biological
& Medical
Serale
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
STORAGE
essen
OI LORE E
Sy
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American Libraries
TV News
Understanding 9/11